B.TECH.
DEGREE COURSE
SCHEME AND SYLLABI (200203 ADMISSION ONWARDS)
MAHATMA GANDHI UNIVERSITY
KOTTAYAM KERALA
REGARDS CC
REGULATIONS
(Effective from 200203 admission onwards) 1. Conditions for admission Candidates for admission to the B.Tech. Degree course shall be required to have passed the higher secondary/+2/XII Std. examination conducted by boards/departments recognized/accepted by the University, obtaining not less than 50% marks in Mathematics and not less than 50% marks in Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry put together or the diploma examination in Engineering, Kerala or any examination accepted by the Government of Kerala as equivalent there to with 50% marks in the final qualifying examination, subject to the usual concession allowed for backward and other communities as specified from time to time. 2. Duration of the course a) The course for the B.Tech. Degree shall extend over a period of four academic years comprising of 8 semesters. The first and second semester combined and each semester from third semester onwards shall cover the groups of subjects as given in the scheme of studies and examinations. b) Each semester shall normally comprise of 16 weeks. c) The course calendar will be as follows. Semesters I & II Semesters IV, VI and VIII Semesters III, V and VII Semesters 3. Eligibility for the Degree Candidates for admission to the Degree of B.Tech. shall be required to have undergone the prescribed course of study in an institution maintained or affiliated to Mahatma Gandhi University for a period of not less than four academic years and to have passed all examinations specified in the scheme. The first academic year of study shall be from the date of commencement of admission till the closure of the academic year. The remaining 6 semester will have to be completed within 3 subsequent academic years. 4. Subjects of Study The subjects of study shall be in accordance with the scheme and syllabi given in the Annexure. 5. Electives All students shall choose electives in VII and VIII semesters, from a prescribed set of elective subjects offered by the institution, as indicated in the scheme. There should be at least 20% students of the class for an elective subject to be offered. New electives may be introduced according to the needs of emerging fields in technology. The name of the elective and its syllabus should be approved by the university before the course is offered. 6. Sessional work Commencement After the admissions are over. December 1st First working day of June Closing 31st of March 31st of March 30th of September Examination 15th April 15th April 15th October
2
Sessional marks for Theory, Drawing, Workshops, Laboratories and Practical will be awarded by the teaching faculty based on the day to day performance of the students. The allocation of sessional marks for the individual subjects shall be on the following basis. Theory Subjects Attendance Assignments Tests 20% 20% 60% Practical Subjects Attendance Regular class work/Drawing/Workshop Record/Lab Record and Class Performance Tests 20% 60% 20%
The sessional marks allotted for attendance shall be awarded in direct proportion to the percentage of attendance secured by the candidate in the subject. However full sessional marks for attendance shall be awarded to those who are securing 80% attendance and above. 7. Examination There shall be University Examinations at the end of the first academic year and at the end of every semester from third semester onwards in subjects as prescribed in the scheme of examination. 8. Eligibility for appearing examination is subject to the following a) The student should have successfully completed the course work for the year/semester. b) The student should have not less than 75% attendance for the particular year in the case of I & II semesters combined or the particular semester in the case of higher semesters. However, he is eligible for condonation of attendance (once in case of I & II semesters combined or twice in the case of higher semesters) subject to the conditions given below in the entire course. His conduct must be satisfactory. The shortage shall not be more than 10% of actual working days. Condonation is given only on medical grounds. The condonation shall be granted subject to rules and procedures prescribed by the University from time to time. It is open to the Vice Chancellor to grant condonation of shortage of attendance on the recommendation of Principal. 9. Repetition of the course work a) A student who is not eligible for condonation of shortage of attendance shall repeat the course in full including the sessional work in the next immediate chance. The sessional marks earned during repetition of course alone will be counted in such case. b) A student can repeat the course only once in each semester/year. c) A student can also repeat the course work for improving sessional marks subject to the following conditions. He shall repeat the course work in full (including sessionals) in a particular semester/year once and that too at the earliest available opportunity. He shall not combine his course work with regular course work of any other semester. A candidate who has satisfactorily completed the VIII semester course will not be allowed to repeat the course work in any semester. He shall not be allowed to repeat the course work of any semester if he has already passed that semester examination in full. 3
A candidate who has been registered for the higher semester examination will not be allowed to repeat the course work, in lower semester. The sessional marks obtained during the repeated course only shall be considered for all purposes. d) For repeating the course in any of the above cases the character and conduct of the student must be satisfactory as certified by the Head of the Institution. 10. Conduct of Examination To conduct all the theory examinations, a Chief Superintendent and an Assistant Chief Superintendent should be appointed by the Principal. An external Chief Superintendent should also be appointed by the University as an Observer for conducting all theory examinations in Selffinancing Engineering Colleges. The examination in theory papers will be conducted in accordance with the following schedule as far as possible. Tues. Wed. Thurs. Fri. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thurs. Fri. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thurs. Fri. Mon. Fore Noon After Noon day 1 1 & 2, 6 4, 8 day 2 5 3, 7 day 3 1 & 2, 6 4, 8 day 4 5 3, 7 day 5 1 & 2, 6 4, 8 day 6 5 3, 7 day 7 1 & 2, 6 4, 8 day 8 5 3, 7 day 9 1 & 2, 6 4, 8 day 10 1 & 2, 6 4, 8 day 11 5 3, 7 day 12 1&2 day 13 5 3, 7 day 14 1&2 day 15 1&2 (Main and supplementary examinations will alternate)
Conduct of Practical Examinations The Principals of the concerned Engineering Colleges with the help of the Chairmen of all branches will conduct the practical examination for all semesters with the approval from the University and bonafide laboratory record, workshop record/project record, seminar report are mandatory for appearing practical/viva voce university examinations. To conduct each practical examination, an External Examiner and an Internal Examiner should be appointed by the University. In Selffinancing Engineering Colleges, no practical examination should be conducted without the presence of an External Examiner appointed by the University. 11. Minimum for a pass A candidate shall be declared to have passed in any individual subject of a semester/year examination if he secures not less than 40% marks for the subject in University examination and not less than 50% of the total marks for the subject, i.e., University examination marks and sessional marks in that subject put together. A candidate who passes in all the subjects of a semester examination shall be declared to have passed the examination in full. 12. Improvement of marks 4
A candidate shall be allowed to reappear for any theory examination in order to improve the marks already obtained subject to the following conditions. a) The candidate shall be permitted to take the improvement examination only during the chance immediately after the first appearance. b) The candidate shall not be allowed to appear for an improvement examination for the subject of the VIII semester. c) The improved marks (better of the two) obtained by the candidate for each subject he has appeared for shall be counted for all purposes. d) A candidate can apply for improvement in three subjects in combined SI&II provided he/she has passed all the theory subjects. e) A candidate can apply improvement in two subjects in combined SI&II if he/she has only one supplementary theory examination. f) A candidate can improve one subject in combined SI&II if he/she has only two supplementary theory examinations. g) Those candidates who have to write supplementary examination in three or more theory papers in combined SI&II will not be eligible for improvement of any paper. h) For higher semesters (SIII to SVII) (i) a candidate can apply for improvement in two subjects if he/she has passed all theory subjects (ii) a candidate can apply for improvement in one subjects if he/she has passed five theory subjects (iii) a candidate shall not be eligible for improvement of any paper if he/she has failed for two or more theory subjects. i) No candidate shall be permitted to improve the marks for practical examination. j) A candidate shall be allowed to withdraw from the whole examination of a semester in accordance with the rules for cancellation of examinations, of the University.
13. Promotion to Higher semesters A student is eligible to be promoted to the higher semesters subject to the following conditions. He should have successfully completed the lower semester. He should have obtained 75% attendance in the lower semester or obtained condonation as per University rules. A student shall be permitted to register for any semester examination only if he had registered for the previous semester examination. A student can be permitted to register for the V semester University examination only if he has passed fully the combined I & II semester examination. A student can be permitted to register for the VII semester examination only if he has passed fully the III and IV semester examination. 14. Completion of the course The degree will be awarded to the candidate only if he successfully completes the course work and has passed all the examinations within a period of 8 years from the time of admission. 15. Classification of Successful candidates a) A candidate who qualifies for the Degree passing all the semester examinations within five academic years (10 consecutive semesters) after commencement of his course of study and has secured not less than 75% of the aggregate of the total marks in all the 8 semesters shall be declared to have passes B.Tech. Examination in First Class with Distinction. b) A candidate who qualifies for the Degree passing all the semester examinations within five academic years (10 consecutive semesters) after the commencement of the course of study and 5
has secured not less than 60% of the aggregate of the total marks in all the 8 semesters shall be declared to have passes B.Tech. Examination in First Class. c) All other successful candidates shall be declared to have passed B.Tech. Degree Examination in Second Class. d) Successful candidates who complete the examination in four academic years (8 consecutive semesters and chances) after the commencement of the course of study shall be ranked branchwise on the basis of the aggregate of the total marks for all the eight semesters. 16. Industrial visit It is desirable to conduct Industry/Establishment/Site visits of one day duration as suggested by the department in 3rd to 8th semesters. Such visits should be limited to 15 numbers during the course and these days will be counted for attendance. 17. Cocurricular Activities and Extra Murals a) ‘Students’ Counselling Students counselling must be undertaken either during Saturdays or after regular working hours or on other holidays depending upon the convenience of students and faculty members. A team of 3 faculty members including group tutor of the class is expected to conduct regular counselling for duration of 5 hours/week in order to help the students in their curricular and personal problems. b) Industrial/Field Training & Literature Overview In order to promote IndustryInstitute Interaction and to impart handson experience in the field work/literature overview, 3 hours/week must be set apart for each class in addition to regular working hours under the supervision of the faculty members. c) Seminar, Symposium, Group Discussions etc. Orientation lectures, Seminars etc. will be presented by the faculty and experts from Industries or other Educational institutions. Also there will be Seminars, Debates and Group Discussions presented by the students to develop their communication skill. 3 hours/week from 4 P.M. to 5 P.M. is to be apart for this, which is to be, supervised by the faculty members. d) Project work For the students in final semester, in addition to 4 hours allotted to regular project work, 5 hours/week must also be added on during Saturdays or other holidays in order to improve the quality of the projects undertaken. A candidate will not be permitted to appear for the project work/viva voce examinations unless, he/she submits the project report within the prescribed date (March 15th). 18. Question Papers Question papers for Mathematics of all semesters and Engineering Graphics of I & II semesters combined shall contain two questions from each module of the relevant syllabus, one of which will have to be answered. All other theory papers will normally have the question papers in the following pattern. Part A Part B Short answer questions covering the whole syllabus with maximum 40% marks for this part. All questions are compulsory. Two questions from each module of the syllabus out of which one is to be answered. Maximum marks for this part is 60%.
19. Revision of Regulations 6
The University may from time to time revise, amend or change the Regulations, scheme of studies, and examination and syllabi. The changes, unless specified otherwise, will have effect from the beginning of the academic year/semester following the Notification from the UNIVERSITY.
7
Scheme – I & II Semesters Combined
e – I & II (Common to all branches)
Course No. Subject Teaching Period Duration of Uty. Exam (hrs) Session al 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50x3 600 Marks
Lect. CME LRPTA 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
Tut.
Prac.
The ory 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 900
Prac tical 
Total
Engineering Mathematics I Engineering Physics Engineering Chemistry Engineering Mechanics Engineering Graphics Basic Civil Engineering Basic Mechanical Engineering Basic Electrical Engineering Basic Electronics Engineering Workshop Total
3 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 12
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 9
3 6* 9
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1500
*3 periods will be in Mechanical Engineering Workshop and 3 periods in Civil Engineering Workshop & Electrical Engineering Workshop alternately.
8
CIVIL ENGINEERING 3 SEMESTER
RD
Subject Code CMELP A301 C302 C303 C304 C305 C306 C307 C308
Subject Engineering Mathematics II Fluid Mechanics – I Mechanics of Solids Construction Engineering and Management Surveying I Civil Engineering Drawing  I Material Testing Laboratory – 1 Surveying practical – 1 Total
Duration of Uty. Exam (hrs.) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24
No. of periods per week (hrs) Lect. Tut. Prac. 3 3 2 3 3 14
TH
Marks Session al 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practi cal 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
1 2 2 1 1 7
3 3 3 9
4 SEMESTER
Subject Code CMELRP TA401 C402 C403 C404 C405 C406 C407 C408 Subject Engineering Mathematics III Fluid Mechanics – II Structural Analysis  I Engg. Economics and Construction Management Surveying – II Civil Engineering Drawing –II Hydraulics Laboratory Surveying Practical II Total Duration of Uty. Exam (hrs.) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24 No. of periods per week (hrs) Lect. Tut. Prac. 3 2 2 2 3 12
TH
Marks Session al 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 Practi cal Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
1 2 2 2 2 9
3 3 3 9
600
5 SEMESTER
Subject Code Duration of Uty. Exam (hrs.) 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 No. of periods per week (hrs) Lect. Tut. Prac. 3 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 Marks Session al 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 The ory 100 100 100 100 100 100 Prac tical 100 100 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Subject Engineering Mathematics IV Design of concrete structures –I Structural Analysis – II Computer programming Engineering Geology Geo Technical Engineering – I Computing Techniques Lab Geo Technical Engineering Lab
CMELP A501 C502 C503 C504 C505 C506 C507 C508
Total
25
15 9
9
6
400
600
200
1200
6 SEMESTER
TH
Subject Code
Subject Structural Analysis – III Design of Steel structures Transportation Engineering I Water Resources Engineering  I Geo Technical Engineering – II Quantity surveying Material testing lab  II Computer Aided Design I Total
C601 C602 C603 C604 C605 C606 C607 C608
Duration of Uty. Exam (hrs.) 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 25
No. of periods per week (hrs) Lect. Tut. Prac. 3 3 3 3 3 2 17
TH
Marks Session al 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 The ory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Prac tical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
1 1 1 1 1 2 7
3 3 6
7 SEMESTER
Duration of Uty. Exam (hrs.) 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 25 No. of periods per week (hrs) Lect. Tut. Prac. 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 3 3 6 Marks Session al 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 The ory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Pract ical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
bject ode
Subject Design of Concrete Structures – II Water Resources Engineering  II Transportation Engineering –II Architecture and town planning Environmental Engineering  I Elective –I Transportation Engineering Lab. Computer Aided Design II Total
701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708
8 SEMESTER
TH
bject ode
Subject Advanced structural design Finite Element Analysis Building Technology and Management Environmental Engineering II Elective –II Elective –III Environmental Engineering Laboratory Project / Seminar Viva  Voce Total
801 802 803
Duration of Uty. Exam (hrs.) 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 25
No. of periods per week (hrs) Lect. Tut. Prac. 3 3 3 3 3 2 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 3 4 7
Marks Session al 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 450 The ory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 50 150 Prac tical 100 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 100 50 1200
804 805 806 807
808 809
10
MECHANICAL ENGINEEING 3 SEMESTER
RD
rse o.
Subject Engineering Mathematics  II Machine Drawing  I Fluid Mechanics Metallurgy & Material Science Thermodynamics Strength of Materials and Structural Engg. Fluid Mechanics Laboratory Strength of Materials Laboratory Total
Teaching Periods Lect. 3 2 3 2 3 13 Tut. 1 2 1 2 1 7 Prac. 4 3 3 10
Duration of Uty. Exam. (Hrs.) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TH
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
EL 301 02 03
04
05
06
07
08
4 SEMESTER
Teaching Periods Subject Lect. Engineering Mathematics  III Theory of Machines1 Hydraulic Machines Machine Tools Electrical Technology Machine Drawing  II Hydraulic Machines Laboratory Electrical and Electronics Laboratory Total Tut. Prac. Duration of Uty. Exam. (Hrs.) Marks Sessional Theory Practical Total
urse o.
EL TA 01 402 403 404 405 406
3 2 2 2 3 12
1 1 2 1 1 6
4 4 4 12
3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400
100 100 100 100 100 100 600
100 100 200
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
407
408
11
5 SEMESTER
TH
ourse No.
Teaching Periods Subject Lect. Engineering Mathematics  IV Manufacturing Processes Computer Programming Theory of Machines II Mechatronics and Control systems Thermal Engineering  I Computer Laboratory Machine Tool Laboratory Total 3 3 2 2 2 2 14 Tut. 1 1 2 2 2 2 10 Prac. 3 3 6
Duration of Uty. Exam. (Hrs.) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
MEL A 501
M 502
M 503 M 504
M 505
M 506 M 507
M 508
6 SEMESTER
TH
ourse No.
Teaching Periods Subject Lect. Mechanics of Materials Metrology and Instrumentation Thermal Engineering  II Heat and Mass Transfer Principles of Management and Engineering Economics Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing Heat Engines Laboratory Advanced Machine Tool Laboratory Total 2 3 2 2 3 3 15 Tut. 2 1 2 2 1 1 9 Prac. 3 3 6
Duration of Uty. Exam. (Hrs.) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
M 601
M 602
M 603
M 604
M 605
M 606
M 607
M 608
12
7 SEMESTER
TH
ourse No.
Teaching Periods Subject Lect. Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion Industrial Engineering Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Dynamics of Machinery Machine Design and Drawing  I Elective  I Mechanical Engineering Laboratory Heat Transfer Laboratory Project and Seminar Total 2 2 2 2 2 3 13 Tut. 1 1 1 1 1 5 Prac./ Proj. 2 4 4 2 12
Duration of Uty. Exam. (Hrs.) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
M 701
M 702
M 703
M 704
M 705
M 706 707
M 708
M 709
At the beginning of the seventh semester, students must submit a brief out line of the proposed project work. They must submit an interim report at the end of the semester. They will complete the project in the eighth semester. 8 SEMESTER
TH
ourse No.
Teaching Periods Subject Lect. Production Engineering Automobile Engineering Production Planning and Control Machine Design and Drawing  II Elective  II Elective  III Mechanical Measurements Laboratory Project and Seminar Viva Voce Total 2 3 2 2 3 3 Tut. 1 1 1 1 1
Prac./
Proj. 2 
Duration of Uty. Exam. (Hrs.) 3 3 3 3 3 3
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 Practical Total 150 150 150 150 150 150
M 801
M 802
M 803
M 804
M 805 M 806
M 807
M 808 M 809
15
5
4 4 10
3 
50 100 450
600
100 50 150
150 100 50 1200
Sessional marks for seminar will be out of 25. Sessional marks for project will be out of 75, in which 35 marks will be based on day to day performance assessed by the guide. Balance 40 marks will be awarded based on the presentation of the project by the students before an evaluation board consisting of a minimum of 3 faculty members including the guide. Sessional marks for workshops and laboratories will be based on day to day performance assessed by faculty members. In each semester for workshops and laboratories, 60% of the sessional marks will consists of class performance, lab record and viva conducted by faculty members day to day. Out of the remaining 40%, 20% will be for attendance and 20% for final examiniation.
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING 13
3 SEMESTER
RD
Course No.
Teaching Hours Subject L Engineering Mathematics II Mechanical Technology Electric Circuit Theory Electromagnetic Theory Electical and Electonic Measurements Power Generation & Distribution Basic Electrical Lab Mechanical Lab* Total 15 7 3 3 2 3 2 2 T 1 1 2 1 1 1 4 4 8 P
Maximum Marks Duration of Univ. Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total 4 4 4 4 3 3 4 4 30 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
MEL A 301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
*Mechanical Lab consists of: 1) Hydraulic Machines Lab & 2) Heat Engines Lab. University Exam will be either in Hydraulic Machines Lab or Heat Engines Lab.
4 SEMESTER
TH
Course No.
Teaching Hours Subject L Engineering Mathematics III Network Analysis & Synthesis Electronic Circuits Electrical Machines  I Computer Programming Electrical and Electronic Instruments Electrical Measurements Lab Computer Programming Lab Total 16 6 3 2 3 3 3 2 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 8 P
Maximum Marks Duration of Univ. Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total 4 3 4 4 4 3 4 4 30 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
MELR A 401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
14
5 SEMESTER
TH
ourse No.
Teaching Hours Subject L 3 3 2 3 2 2 T 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 4 15 7 8 P
Maximum Marks Duration of Univ. Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total 4 4 3 5 3 3 4 4 30 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
MELP 501 Engineering Mathematics IV Digital Circuits Communication Engineering Industrial management and Economics Linear Integrated Circuits Power Electronics Electrical Machines Lab  I Electronic Circuits Lab Total
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
6 SEMESTER
TH
Course No. 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608
Teaching Hours Subject Control Systems  I Electrical Machines  II Electrical Power Transmission Digital Signal Processing Microprocessors and Applications Computer Organisation Digital Lab Systems Lab Total 16 6 L 3 3 3 2 3 2 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 8 P
Maximum Marks Duration of Univ. Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total 4 3 50 100 150 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 30 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
7 SEMESTER
TH
15
ourse No.
Subject Electrical Machines III Electrical Drives and Control Utilisation of Electrical Power Control Systems  II System Design with Microcontrollers Elective  I Electrical Drawing Control and Power Electronics Lab Project & Seminar* Total
701
Teaching Hours Maximum Marks Duration of Prac./ Univ. L T Proj. Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total 3 1 4 3 50 100 150 2 2 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 2 15 6 9 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 2 30 24 400 800 1200 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
*The Project Work will be started in the Seventh Semester. Sessional Marks for Seminar will be out of 25 and that for Project will be out of 75. 8 SEMESTER
TH
ourse No.
Subject Power System Analysis Switch Gear and Protection Instrumentation Electrical System Design Elective  II Elective  III Electrical Machines Lab II Project and Seminar** Viva Voce Total
801
Teaching Hours Maximum Marks Duration of Prac./ Univ. L T Proj. Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total 3 1 4 3 50 100 150 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 16 6 8 4 3 4 4 3 4 4 30 21 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 450 50 750 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 150 150 150 150 100 50 1200
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
**Sessional Marks for Seminar will be out of 25 and that for Project will be out of 75 in which 40 marks will be based on day to day performance assessed by the Guide. The remaining 35 marks are to be awarded based on the presentation of the project by the student in the presence of 2 staff members one of which shall be the Guide.
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
16
3 SEMESTER
RD
Marks Course No. CMEL PA 301 LA302 LA303 LA304 LA305 LA306 LA307 L308 Subject Teaching periods L T P 3 2 2 3 3 3 0 0 16 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 8 Uty. Exam duration (hours) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Sessional Theory Practical Total
e e
Engineering Mathematics II Network Theory Electrical Technology Solid state devices Electronic circuits –I Computer programming Electrical lab Basic Electronics Lab Total
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 200
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
600
4 SEMESTER
TH
Marks Course No. CMELR TPA 401 LA402 LA403 LA404 LTA405 LA406 LA407 LA408 Subject Teaching periods L T P 3 3 3 3 2 2 0 0 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 8 Uty. Exam duration (hours) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Sessional Theory Practical Total
e e
Engineering Mathematics III Digital Electronics and Logic Design Communication Engineering Electronic circuits –II Signals and systems Reliability & Humanities Electronic circuits Lab Computer programming Lab Total
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 200
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
600
5 SEMESTER
TH
17
Marks Course No: CMEL PA 501 LA502 L503 LA504 LA505 L506 LA507 L508 Subject Teaching periods L T P 3 2 3 2 3 3 0 0 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 8 Uty. Exam duration (hours) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Sessional Theory Practical Total
Engineering Mathematics IV Power Electronics Applied Electromagnetic Theory Computer organization and Architecture Linear integrated circuits Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Digital IC lab Communication–I lab Total
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 200
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
600
6 SEMESTER
TH
Marks Course No: LA 601 L602 LTA 603 L604 L605 L606 L607 L608 Subject Teaching periods L T P 3 3 3 2 3 3 0 0 17 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 6 Uty. Exam duration (hours) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Sessional Theory Practical Total
Industrial Management and Economics Digital communication Techniques Digital signal processing Radiation and Propagation Electronic Instrumentation Control Systems Linear IC Lab Mini Project Total
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 200
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
600
7 SEMESTER
TH
18
Marks Course No: LA701 LA702 L703 L704 L705 L706 LA707 L708 L709 Subject Teaching periods L T Pra./ 2 3 3 2 3 3 0 0 0 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 2 8 Uty. Exam duration (hours) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Sessional Theory Practical Total
Proj.
Microcontroller based system design VLSI technology Microwave and Radar Engineering Optical fiber communication systems Information Theory and coding Elective – I Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab CommunicationII lab Project design and seminar Total
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
600
200
8 SEMESTER
TH
Course No: LA801 L802 LA803 L804 L805 L806 L807 L808 L809
Subject
Teaching periods L T Prac./
Proj.
Uty. Exam duration (hours)
Marks Sessional Theory Practical Total
Computer Networks Advanced communication systems Advanced microprocessors Television Engineering Elective –II Elective – III Systems Lab Project design and seminar Viva voce Total
3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 18
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 6
0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 6
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 450
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 50 150
150 150 150 150 150 150 150 100 50 1200
600
COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING 19
3 SEMESTER
RD
Teaching Course No. RT301 R 302 RT 303 RT 304 RT 305 R306 R 307 R 308 Subject L Engineering Mathematics II Micro Processor Systems Solid State Electronics Problem Solving and Computer Programming Humanities Logic System Design Solid State Electronics Lab Programming Lab Total 3 3 2 3 2 3 0 0 16 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 P 4 4 8
se
Uty. Exam duration (hours) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
4 SEMESTER
TH
se
Course No.
Teaching Periods Subject L T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 P 4 4 8
Uty. Exam duration (hours) Sessional 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400
Marks Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
CMEL RPTA 401 R 402 R 403 R 404 R 405 R406 R 407 R 408
Engineering Mathematics III Computer Organization Object Oriented Programming Integrated Circuits Data Structures and Programming Methodologies Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals Integrated Circuits Lab Data Structures Lab Total
3 2 2 3 3 3 0 0 16
5 SEMESTER
TH
20
se de
Course No. RT501 R 502 RT503 R 504 RT505 RT506 R 507 R 508
Subject Engineering Mathematics IV Operating Systems Database Management Systems File Structures and Algorithms Language Processors Data Communication Microprocessor Lab Database Lab Total
Teaching Periods L T P 3 3 3 2 3 2 0 0 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 4 4 8
Uty. Exam duration (hours) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
6 SEMESTER
TH
rse de
Course No. R 601 RT602 R 603 RT604 RT605 R 606 R 607 R 608
Subject L PC & PC based Systems Software Engineering Project Management and Quality Assurance Computer Networks Network Computing Algorithm Analysis and Design System Software Lab Mini Project Total 3 2 2 3 3 3
Teaching Periods T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6
Prac./ Proj.
4 4 8
Uty. Exam duration (hours ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
0 0 16
7 SEMESTER
TH
21
Teaching Course No. RT701 RT702 R 703 R 704 RT705 R 706 R 707 R 708 R709 Subject L Object Oriented Modeling and Design Computer Graphics Theory of Computation Advanced Software Environments Web Technologies Elective I Computer Hardware and Networking Lab Network Programming Lab Project & Seminar Total 2 3 3 2 2 3 0 0 0 15 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 6
Prac./
se de
Uty. Exam duration (hours)
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
3 3 3 9
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
8 SEMESTER
TH
rse de
Course No. RT801 R 802 R 803 RT804 R 805 R 806 R 807 R 808 R809
Subject L Security in Computing High Performance Computing Principles of Programming Languages Artificial Intelligence Elective II Elective III Graphics and Multimedia Lab Project & Seminar VivaVoce Total 2 2 3 3 3 3 0 0 
Teaching Periods T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6
Prac./ Proj.
4 4 8
Uty. Exam duration (hours ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 450 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 50 150 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 100 50 1200
16
22
POLYMER ENGINEERING 3 SEMESTER
RD
rse de
Course No. CMEL 301 P 302 P 303 P 304 P 305 MP 306 P 307 P 308
Subject Engineering Mathematics II Humanities Computer Programming Polymer Science I Organic Chemistry Strength of Materials & Structural Engineering Chemistry lab Computer Lab Total
Teaching Periods L 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 6 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 P 3 3 6
Uty. Exam duration (hours ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
4th Semester
Course No. Subject Engineering Mathematics III Object Oriented Programming Electrical Technology Chemical Engg. – I Polymer Physics Polymer Science II Polymer Preparation & Characterisation Lab Electrical Machines Lab Teaching Periods L T 1 1 1 1 1 1 P 3 3 6 6 Uty. Exam duration (hours ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
rse de
CMEP 401 P 402 LP 403 P 404 P 405 P 406 P 407 P 408
3 3 3 3 3 3 18
Total
23
5 SEMESTER
TH
rse de
Course No.
Subject Engineering Mathematics IV Chemical Engg.  II Plastics  Science & Technology Rubber  Science & Technology Latex Technology Polymer ProcessingI Specification Tests Lab Polymer Analysis Lab
Teaching Periods L T 1 1 1 1 1 1 P 3 3 6 6
CMEP 501 P 502 P 503 P 504 P 505 P 506 P 507 P 508
3 3 3 3 3 3 18
Uty. Exam duration (hours ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
Total
6 SEMESTER
TH
rse de
Course No.
Subject Principles of Management Engg. Statistics & Quality Control Chemical Engg.  III Biomedical & Biopolymers Polymer Blends & Composites Polymer ProcessingII Latex Products Lab Polymer Products Lab
Teaching Periods L T 1 1 1 1 1 1 P 3 3 6 6
P 601 P 602 P 603 P 604 P 605 P 606 P 607 P 608
3 3 3 3 3 3 18
Uty. Exam duration (hours ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 100 200 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
Total
24
7 SEMESTER
TH
rse de
Course No.
Subject L Elective I Industrial Engineering Production Engineering Chemical Engg. IV Tyre Technology Polymer Testing Polymer Testing Lab Chemical Engineering Lab
Teaching Periods T 1 1 1 1 1 1 Prac./
P 701 P 702
P 703
2 2 3 3 3 3 
3 3 2
Uty. Exam duration (hours ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 Practical 100 100 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 
P 704 P 705 P 706 P 707 P 708
P709
Project/Seminar
16 6 8 400 600 200 1200 Total At the beginning of the seventh semester, students must submit an abstract of their undergraduate project. They must submit a preliminary report at the end of the semester. They will complete the project in the eighth semester.
8 SEMESTER
TH
rse de
Course No.
Subject L Elective II Computer Aided design & Manufacturing Fibre Technology Polymers & Environment Polymer Product Design Speciality Polymers Chemical Technology Lab Project Work & Seminar Viva voce
Teaching Periods T 1 1 1 1 1 1 6
Prac./
P 801 P 802 P 803 P 804 P 805 P 806 P 807 P 808 P 809
3 3 3 3 3 3 18
3 3 6
Uty. Exam duration (hours ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 
Marks Sessional 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 450 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 Practical 100 50 150 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 100 50 1200
Total
25
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 3 SEMESTER
RD
Teaching Periods L 3 3 2 3 2 3 0 0 16 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 P/D 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 8
ourse No. SUBJECT T 301 Engg. Mathematics II Electrical Circuits and Systems
Marks Duration Uty Exams Univ. (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total 3 50 100 150 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
T302
T303 Solid State Electronics
T304 Problem Solving & Computer Programming Digital Electronics C Programming Lab Electronic Circuits Lab TOTAL
T305 Humanities
T306
T307
T308
4 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Periods SUBJECT L 3 3 2 3 2 3 0 0 16 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 P/D 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 8
Course No.
Marks Duration Uty Exams Univ. (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
MELR Engg. Mathematics III TA401 Data Structures & Algorithms Linear Integrated Circuits & Applications Computer System Architecture Object Oriented Programming in C++ C++ & DS Lab Integrated Circuits Lab TOTAL
T402
T403
T404
TA405 Signals & Systems
T406
T407
T408
26
5 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Periods SUBJECT L 3 4 3 3 3 2 0 0 18 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6
ourse No.
Duration Marks Uty Exams Univ. P/D (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
T501 Engg. Mathematics IV Operating System Concepts Microprocessors
T502
T503 Database Management Systems
T504
T505 Language Processors DBMS Lab Microprocessor Lab TOTAL
T 506 Data Communication
T 507
T 508
6 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Periods L 3 2 3 3 3 4 0 0 18 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6
Prac./ Proj.
ourse No. SUBJECT T 601 Project Management RT602 Software Engineering
0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 6
Duration Marks Uty Exams Univ. (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total 3 50 100 150 3 50 100 150 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
TA603 Digital Signal Processing
T 604 Computer Networks Personal Computer Hardware Systems Programming Lab Mini Project TOTAL
RT605 Network Computing
T606
T 607
T608
27
7 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Periods L 2 3 3 2 2 3 0 0 0 15 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 6
ourse No. SUBJECT T 701 Object Oriented Modelling and Design Modern Communication Systems Mutimedia Techniques Elective I Multimedia Lab Communication Systems Lab Project & Seminar TOTAL
Duration Marks Uty Prac./ Exams Univ. Proj (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total 0 3 50 100 150 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 9 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 _ 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 _ 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 _ 800 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 _ 1200
T 702 Computer Graphics
T 703
T 704
T 705 Web Technologies
T706
T 707
T708
T 709
8 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Periods SUBJECT L 2 3 2 3 3 3 0 0 0 16 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 6
ourse No.
Duration Marks Uty Prac./ Exams Univ. Proj (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 0 8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 _ _ 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 0 450 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 _ 50 750 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 100 50 1200
T 801 Security in Computing Information Systems and Management ECommerce Elective II Elective III Internet Lab Project & Seminar Viva Voce TOTAL
T 802
T 803
T 804 Artificial Intelligence
T 805
T 806
T 807
T 808
T 809
28
APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION 3 SEMESTER
RD
urse ode
Course No CMEL PA 301 LA302 LA303 LA304 LA305 LA306 LA307 A308
Subject
Teaching Periods Lect Tut 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6
Marks Uty Exam Prac Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total (Hours) 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
A
B C D E F
Engineering MathematicsII Network Theory Electrical Technology Solid State Devices Electronic CircuitsI Computer Programming Electrical Lab Basic Electronics Lab Total Teaching Hours
3 2 2 3 3 3 0 0 16
G H
600
4 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Periods Course No Subject Lect Tut 3 3 3 3 2 2 0 0 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6
Course Code A B C D E F G H
Marks Uty Exam Prac Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total (Hours) 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 100 100 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
CMELR Engineering PTA 401 MathematicsIII Digital Electronics LA402 and Logic Design Communication LA403 Engineering LA404 Electronic CircuitsII LTA405 Signals and Systems Reliability and LA406 Humanities LA407 Electronics Circuits Lab LA408 Computer Prog Lab Total Teaching Hours
5 SEMESTER
TH
29
Course Code
Course No
Subject
Teaching Periods Lect Tut
Marks Uty Exam Prac Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total (Hours) 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 100 100 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
A B C D E F G H
CMEL PA 501 LA502 A503 LA504 LA505 A506 LA507 A508
Engineering Mathematics IV Power Electronics Basic Instrumentation Computer Organisation And Archetecture Linear Integrated Circuits Transducers And Recording Systems Digital I.C. Lab Measurement Lab Total Teaching Hours
3 2 3 2 3 3 0 0 16
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6
6 SEMESTER
TH
ourse Code A B C D E F G H
Course No
Subject
Marks Uty Exam Lect Tut Prac Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total (Hours) 3 3 3 2 3 3 0 0 17 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 100 100 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
Teaching Periods
LA601 A602
Industrial Management And Ecnomics Micro Processors And Micro Controllers
LTA603 Digital Signal Processing A604 A605 A606 A607 A608 Industrial Instrumentation I Data Communication Control Sysrem Theory Instrumentation Lab Mini Project Total Teaching Hours
7 SEMESTER
TH
urse Course ode No
Subject
Teaching Periods
Uty Exam Duration
Marks
30
Lect Tut / LA 701 Micro Controller based System Design LA 702 VLSI Technology A 703 Industrial Instrumentation II A 704 Process Dynamics & Control A 705 Bio medical Instrumentation A 706 Elective I LA 707 Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab A 708 Industrial Electronics Lab A 709 Project Design And Seminar Total 2 3 3 2 3 3 0 0 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 6
Prac. Proj. (Hours)
Sessional Theory Practical Total 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 400 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 100 100 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 1200
A
0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 2 8
B C D E F G
H I
8 SEMESTER
TH
urse Course ode No
A B C
D
E F G H I
Teaching Periods Uty Exam Lect Tut Prac./ Duration Sessional Proj. (Hours) LA801 Computer Networks 3 1 0 3 50 A802 Modern Control Theory 3 1 0 3 50 Advanced LA803 Microprocessors 3 1 0 3 50 A804 Computerised 3 1 0 3 50 Process Control A805 Elective  II 3 1 0 3 50 A806 Elective  III 3 1 0 3 50 A807 Process Control Lab 0 0 3 3 50 A808 Project and Seminar 0 0 3 100 A809 Viva  Voice 0 0 0 Total 18 6 6 450 Subject
Marks Theory Practical 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 100 50 150 Total 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 100 50 1200
31
Here is attaching file for page no. 33
32
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I CMELRPTA 101 3+1+0 Module 1 Matrix Elementary transformation – finding inverse and rank using elementary transformation – solution of linear equations using elementary transformations – eigenvalues and eigenvectors – application of Cayley Hamiltion theorem – Diagonalization – Reduction of quadratic form into sum of squares using orthogonal transformation – nature of quadratic form. Module 2 Partial Differentiation Partial differentiation – chair rules – Eulers theorem for homogeneous functions – Taylors series for function of two variables – maxima and minima of function of two variables (proof of results not expected.) Modules 3 Multiple Integrals Double integrals in cartesian and polar coordinates – application in finding area and volume using double integrals – change of variables using Jacobian – triple integrals in cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates – volume using triple integrals – simple problems. Module 4 Laplace Transforms Laplace transforms – Laplace transform of derivatives and integrals – shifting theorem – differentiation and integration of transforms – inverse transforms – application of convolution property – solution of linear differential equations with constant coefficients using Laplace transform – Laplace transform of unit step function, impulse function and periodic function Module 5 Fourier Series Dirichelt conditions – Fourier series with period 2* and 21 – Half range sine and cosine series – simple problems – rms value. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Higher Engg. Mathematics Engg. Mathematics Laplace and Fourier Transforms Advanced Mathematics for Engineers Methods of Applied Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig Grawal B.S. N.P.Bali Goyal and Gupta E.S.Sokolinokoff F.B.Hilderbrand
ENGINEERING PHYSICS CMELRPTA 102 1+1+0 Module 1 Optical Instruments and Applications Electron microscope – characteristics of laser – spontaneous emission – stimulated emission – population inversionpumping pumping mechanisms – typical laser systems like Ruby lase – HeNe laser – semi conductor laser – Applications of laser. Module 2 Super Conductivity Transition temperature – Meissner effect – Isotope effect – Type I and II super conductors – BCS theory (qualitative study) – High temperature super conductivity (general idea) – Joseph son effect – SQUIDS – Applications of Super conductors. 33
Module 3 Crystallography and Lattice Planes Crystallography – space lattice – unitcell – crystal systems – Coordination number packing factor – lattice planes and Miller Indices – spacing between lattice planes – Bragg’s law and crystal structure analysis – Bragg’s Xray spectrometer. Module 4 Magnetic Materials Dia, Para, Ferro, Antiferro and Ferri magnetic materials – soft and hard magnetic materials – properties – applications – magnetic permeability – susceptibility – relation between them – Hysteresis. Dielectrics: Properties – Dielectric constant – Dielectric strength – Dielectric loss – Polar and non polar molecule – Dielectric polarization – dielectric susceptibility – types – applications. Ultra sonics – Production – piczoelectric and magnetostriction method – properties – applications. Module 5 Fibre Optics and its Application General ides of optical fibre – NA of fibre – step index and graded index fibre – multi mode and single mode fibre – applications of optical fibre – fibre optic communication system (block diagram) – Optical fibre sensors. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Engg. Physics Engg. Physics Solid State Physics Engg. Materials Physics for Engineers R.K.Gaur and S.L.Gupta Dr. M.Arumugam C.Kittel Decker B.Premlet ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY CMELRPTA 103 1+1+0 Module 1 Electro Chemistry Conductance – Experimental Determination – Galvenic cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF and its measurement – Single electrode potential – types of electrodes – Hydrogen electrode – Calomel electrode – Electrochemical series – Nernst equation – concentration cells – polarization and over voltage – decomposition potential – Secondary cells – LeadAcid accumulator – Fuel cells. Module 2 Plastics and Elastomers High Polymers – types of polymerization – addition, condensation and copolymerism  thermo plastics and thermo setting plastics – preparation and properties of PVC, PVA, Poly propelene, Poly vinylidene chloride, Teflon, Terylene, Acrylics, Nylon, Bakelite – Moulding techniques – Lamination – glass reinforced plastics – Natural Rubber properties – Valcunisation of rubber – synthetic rubber – industrial uses buna rubbers, butyl rubber, silicon rubber and Thiokol. Module 3 Corrosion and protective coatings Chemical and electro chemical corrosion – Factors affecting corrosion – corrosion control – cathodic protection – inorganic coating – metallic coating – hot dipping – electroplating – metal spraying – cladding – vacuum metalistion – anodisation – vitreous coating. Module 4 Domestic water supply 34
Requirements and methods of processing – Industrial water supply: Hard and soft waters – defects of using water containing dissolved minerals for industrial purposes – Boiler Troubles – methods of treatment. Module 5 Fuels: Classification – calorific value and its determination – solid, liquid and gaseous fuels – petrol knock – octane number – cetane number – synthetic gasoline – natural gas – pollution – causes of pollution – air pollution due to automobiles – control of air pollution Lubrication and Lubricants: Mechanism of lubrication – different types of lubricants – manufacture and properties of lubricating oil – manufacture, properties and uses of semisolid lubricants – properties and uses of solid lubricants – synthetic lubricants. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Engg. Chemistry Engg. Chemistry Chemistry in Engg. And Tech. (Vol. I & II) Environmental Chemistry Jain and Jain O.P.aggarwal J.C.Kuriakose and J.Rajam A.K.De
ENGINEERING MECHANICS CMELRPTA 104 2+2+0 Module 1 Forces in Plane – Vector addition of concurrent forces in plane – problems involving the equilibrium of particles – free body diagrams. Definition of rigid body – moment of a force about an axis – varignon’s theorem of moment – couple – properties of force couples – resolution of a given force in to force acting at a given point and a couple – reduction of a system of coplanar forces acting on a rigid body into a single force and a single couple – equilibrium of a rigid body under coplanar forces – types of supports – reaction at supports of beams and frames – graphical method. Module 2 Centre of gravity, centroid of wires, areas, volumes – moment of inertia of lamina and radius of gyration – parallel axis theorem and its applications – mass moment of inertia of thin circular and rectangular plates – mass moment of inertia of solid rectangular prisms, cylinders and cones. Frictionangle of friction and coefficient of friction – laws of dry frictionladder friction – wedge friction. Module 3 Simple trusses – analysis of trusses by methods of joints and sections – graphical method. Simple stress and strain – bars of uniform cross section – shear stress – modulus of rigidity – bulk modulus – Poisson’s ratio – Relation between different modulii. Module 4 Dynamics: Kinematics (Velocity – acceleration) rectilinear motion of a particle under variable acceleration Relative velocity – simple cases only. Circular motion with uniform acceleration – relation between angular and rectilinear motion – normal and tangential acceleration – motion of rotation and translation – instantaneous centre of zero velocity (elementary treatment only) 35
Module 5 Kinetics of particles – Newton’s Laws of motion of translation – work, energy and power – principles of momentum and impulse. Motion of rotation – couple – torque – Newtons laws of motion of rotation – differential equations of rotation – angular impulse and torque – conservation of angular momentum – workdone and power by torque and couple. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Shames I.H., Engineering Mechanics, Prentice hall of India S.Timoshinko, Engineering Mechanics, McGraw Hill Ramachandra, Engineering Mechanics, Standard Publishers and Distributors S. Rajasekararn & G.Sankarasubramanian, Engineering Mechanics, Vikas Publishing Co. Beer F.P. & Johnston E.R., Mechanics for Engineers – Statics and Dynamics, McGrwa Hill Meriam J.L. & Kraige L.G., Engineering Mechanics, John Wiley ENGINEERING GRAPHICS CMELRPTA 105 1+0+3 Module 1 Introduction of Engineering Graphics: drawing instruments and their uses – familiarization with current, Indian standard code of practice for general engineering drawing. Scales – plain scale – vernier scal – diagonal scale. Conic sections – construction of ellipse, parabola, hyoperbola and rectangular hyperbola. Construction of cycloids, involute, archimedian spiral and logarithmic spiral – drawing tangents and normals to these curves. Module 2 Introduction to orthographic projections: planes of projection – projection of points in different quadrants. Orthographic projection of straight lines parallel to one plane and inclined to the other plane – straight lines inclined to both the planes – true length and inclination of lines with reference planes – traces of lines – projection of planes. Module 3 Projection of polyhedra and solids of revolution – cubes, prisms, cones, cylinders, pyramids, tetrahedron, octahedron and sphere – frustums. Projection of solids with axis parallel to one plane and parallel, perpendicular of inclined to the other plane  projection of solids on auxiliary planes. Sections of solids by planes inclined to horizontal or vertical planes. Module 4 Development of surfaces of cubes, prisms, cylinders, pyramids and cones – development of funnels and pipe elbows. Introduction to isometric projection – isometric scale – isometric views – isometric projections of prism, pyramids, cylinders, cones and spheres. Module 5 Introduction to prespective projections: prespective views of prisms. 36
Intersection of surfaces – methods of determining lines of intersection – intersection of prism, cylinder in cylinder. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Elementary Engineering Drawing – N.D.Bhatt. Geometrical Drawing – P.S.Gill. Geometrical Drawing – V.Lakshmi Narayanan & M.C.Marhur Engineering Graphics – P.I.Varghese & K.C.John
BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING CMELRPTA 106 1+1+0 Module 1 Materials: Cement – Types of Portland cement – grades of cement and its uses – Steel – types of steel for reinforcement bars – steel structural sections. Aggregates: sources, types & sizes – requirements of good aggregates. Mortar preparation – Concrete – grades of concrete as per IS Code – water cement ratio, workability, batching, mixing, compaction and curing. Module 2 Timber – Varieties found in Kerala – effects, seasoning, decay preservation – specification for use in construction. Bricks: varieties and strength – tests on bricks. Roofing: Steel truss. A. C. and GI sheets roofing for industrial buildings – sketches only – reinforced concrete roofs. (Design details not required) Module 3 Building Components: Foundation: Bearing capacity and settlement  definitions  Isolated footing  combined footing  rafts, piles and well foundation  machine foundation  special situations where those foundations are suitable. (Brief description only). Superstructure: Walls  brick masonry  English bond  Flemish bond  Stone masonryRandom Rubble masonry. Module 4 Surveying: Classifications  based on object of survey  based on instruments used. Chain Surveying: Instruments  field work  field book  procedure and booking. Compass Surveying: Prismatic compass – Basic principles  Bearing of survey lines & local attraction. Leveling: field work  reduction of levels  Height of instrument method. Module 5 Site plan preparation for buildings (Sketch only) – Kerala Municipal Building Rules – 1999general provisions regarding site and building requirements – Exterior and interior open air spaces – coverage and floor area ratio – provisions of the size, height and ventilation of rooms (residential buildings) disposal of domestic waste water through septic tank and soak pit. Classification of roads and components of roads – basics of traffic engineering – Road marking – Traffic Islands, signaling – (brief description only) References 37
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Jha and Sinha, Construction and foundation Engineering, Khanna Publishers Punmia B. C., Surveying Vol –I, Laxmi Publications Rangwala, Building Materials, Charotar Book stall K. Khanna & C. E. G. Justo, Highway Engineering, Khanna Publishers Nevile, Properties of Concrete, Mc Graw Hill Kerala Municipal Rules – 1999
BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING CMELRPTA 107 110 Module 1 Thermodynamics: Basic concepts and definitions, Gas laws, specificheat – Universal gas constant – Isothermal, adiabatic and polytropic processes, work done and heat transferred: Carnot, Otto & Diesel Cycles – air standard efficientcy. Module 2 I.C. Engines: Working of two stroke and four stroke engines – petrol and diesel engines – fuel systems, injector and carburetor – ignition system – lubrication and cooling systems. Refrigeration and airconditioning: methods of refrigeration – vapour compression and vapour absorption systems – block diagrams and general descriptions – winter and summer air conditioning systems – general description. Module 3 Power transmission: Methods of transmission – belt, rope, chain and gear drives. Fields of application, calculation of length of belt – expression for ratio of belt tension. Velocity ratio and slip – simple problems – velocity ratio and choice of gear wheels – simple problems. Module 4 Power plants: General layout of hydraulic, diesel, thermal and nuclear power plants, nonconventional energy sources, general description only. Types of hydraulic turbines – selection of turbines depending upon head, discharge and specific speed – steam turbines – reaction and impulse turbines – compounding methods. Module 5 Simple description of general purpose machines like lathe, shaping machines, drilling machine, milling machine and grinding machine. Manufacturing process: moulding and casting, forging, rolling, welding – arc welding – gas welding (simple descriptions only) References 1. 2. 3. 4. Elements of Hear Engines Thermal Engineering Elements of Mechanical Engineering Power Plant Engineering R.C.Patel P.L.Bellany S.Domkundwar Nagpal
38
BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CMELRPTA 108 1+1 Module 1 S I unit of Current, Voltage, Power and Energy, Ohm’s Law – Temperature Coefficient of Resistance – Kirchhoff’s Laws – Solution of SeriesParallel D.C. circuits – star Delta Transformation – Magnetic Circuits – FluxFlux density – m m f – Magnetising Force – Reluctance –Permeability –Comparison of Electric and Magnetic CircuitsForce experienced by a current carrying conductor in Magnetic Field – Electromagnetic Induction – Farady’s Laws – Lenz’s Law – Statically Induced e m f – dynamically induced e.m.f. – Self and mutual Induction – Coefficient of coupling. Module 2 Alternating Quantity – Generation of Sinusoidal Voltage – Frequency – R.M.S. and Average Value – Form Factor – Peak Factor – Phasor Representation – Phase and Phase Difference – Solution of Series R L C circuits – Power and p.f. – Operator ‘j’ – Admittance – solution of series and parallel R L C circuits. Module 3 Resonance – Series and Parallel – Q factor – Selectivity and Bandwidth – Three phase system – Representation – Star and Delta Systems – Phase sequence – Balanced Delta connected System – Balanced Star Connected system – Phasor representations – Simple Problems. Module 4 D.C. Machine – Principle of Operations of a D.C. generator – Constructional Details – e.m.f. equation – Types of Generators. D.C. Motor – Principle of Operations – Back e.m.f. and its Significance – Necessity of Starters – Types of motors and Applications. Transformer – Principle of Operations – e.m.f. equation – Ideal Transformer – Constructional Details – Losses and Efficiency – Use of Power, Distribution and Instrument Transformers. Induction Motor – Principle of Operation of 3 phase Induction Motor – Cage and Slip ring – Slip – Applications – types of Single Phase Induction Motors – Applications. Alternator – Principle of Operations – Types Module 5 Requirements of Good Lighting System – Working Principle of Incandescent – Fluorescent and Mercury Vapour Lamps – Estimate the quantity of Materials required and Draw the wiring layout of (a) Residential Building with One or Two rooms. (b) Workshop with one Induction Motor. Generation – Types of Generation – Hydroelectric, Thermal, Nuclear and Non Conventional – Transmission – Need for high Voltage Transmission – Transmission Voltages in Kerala – Distribution – Underground Versus Overhead – Feeder – Distributor – Service Mains – Conductor materials – One line Diagram of a typical Power System. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Electrical Technology Electrical Technology Electrical Circuits Electrical Design, Estimating & Costing A Course in Electrical Power 39 H.Cotton Hughese Edminister J.A. S.K.Bhattacharya, K.B.Raina M.L.Soni & P.V.Gupta
BASIC ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CMELRPTA109 1+1+0
Module 1 Basic circuit components Passive components: Resistors  Types of resistors  Fixed Resistors  Variable resistors, resistor tolerance, colour coding, power rating of resistors. Capacitors: Types of capacitors: Fixed capacitors, Mica, Paper, Ceramic and Electrolytic capacitors, Variable capacitors, voltage rating of capacitors. Inductors: Fixed and Variable inductors. Semiconductor Components: Definition of insulators, semiconductors and conductors types: Intrinsic and extrinsic, p and n type materials, pn junction, Classifications: Germanium, Silicon, Zener, LEDs (working principle only). Transistors: npn, pnp, working principle. Integrated circuits: Advantages, classification, Linear and Digital ICs. Module 2 Basic electronic circuits Diode circuits: Forward and reverse characteristics, Rectifiers: Half wave, full wave, Bridge circuits, DC Power supply: Capacitor filter, Zener regulator, eliminator circuit. Transistor circuits: CB, CE, CC characteristics, concept of α and β , Amplifiers, common emitter RC coupled amplifier, Frequency response, Bandwidth. Module 3 Basic communication engineering Communication: Frequency bands: RF, VHF, UHF. Modulation – need for modulation, basic principles of amplitude, frequency, phase and pulse modulation. Radio engineering: block schematic of AM radio receiver and transmitter  function of each block. Television Engineering: Basic principles of TV – CRT  scanning  simplified block schematic of a monochrome TV receiver. Wireless communication: mobile, microwave and satellite (basic principles and block schematic only). Module 4 Basic instrumentation and Digital electronics Electronic instrumentation: Transducers: Basic principles of Strain guage, LVDT, Thermistor, Photodiode, microphones, Loud speaker. Measurements: Multimeter and XY recorder. Digital electronics: number systems  binary, octal and hexadecimal  conversion  representation of negative numbers using 1’s compliment and 2’s compliment method. Logic gates – truth table. Module 5 40
Basic Computer engineering Digital computer: Block schematic, function of each block: CPU, Memory, I/O devices. Memory: RAM, ROM, Magnetic Tape, Floppy Discs, Hard Discs and CD. Programming: Machine language, Assembly language, High level language, System Software, Operating systems, Compilers and Assemblers.
References 1. Basic Electronics: Bernad Grob, Mc Graw Hill Publication 2. Electronic Devices: Floyd, Pearson Education 3. Electronic Devices & Circuits Theory: Boyelstad & Naschelsky, Prentice Hall. 4. Electronic Principles: Malvino, Mc Graw Hill Publication 5. Digital Principles: Malvino & Leach, Mc Graw Hill Publication 6. Integrated Electronics: Millman & Halkias, Mc Graw Hill Publication 7. Electronic Instrumentation: H.S Kalsi, Mc Graw Hill Publication 8. Systems Programming: J.J. Donavan, Mc Graw Hill Publication WORKSHOP AMECHANICAL ENGINEERING WORKSHOP CMELRPTA 110 Carpentry 0+0+6 Planing – cutting – chiseling, marking – sawing – cross and tee joints – dovetail joints – Engineering Application, Seasoning, Preservation – Plywood and plyboards.
Fitting Practice in chipping – filing – cutting – male and female joints Smithy Foundry Forging of square and hexagonal prisms, hexagonal bolt – Forging Principles, materials and different operations. Preparation of Simple sand moulds – moulding sand characteristics, materials, gate, runner, riser, core, chaplets and casting defects. Demonstration & study of machine tool  lathe, drilling, boring, soltting shaping and milling machines, grinding, CNC and machining centers. BCIVIL ENGINEERING WORKSHOP CMELRPTA 110 Masonry English bond – flemish bond –wall –junction – one brick – one and a half brick  two brick two and a half brick—Arch setting.
41
Plumbing Study of water supply and sanitary fittings—water supply pipe fitting –tap connections sanitary fittings  urinal, wash basin—closet (European and Indian), manholes.
Surveying Study of surveying instruments – chain – compass – plane table – leveling – theodolite—minor instruments.
C – ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING WORKSHOP CMELRPTA 110 1. Wiring of one lamp and one plug, control of two lamps in series and in parallel. 2. Stair case Wiring. 3. Godown Wiring. 4. Hospital Wiring. 5. Wiring of fluorescent, C F L and mercury vapour lamp. 6. Wiring of Distribution Board including Power Plug using Isolator, M C B and E L C B. 7. Insulation megger – earth megger, measurement of Insulation resistance and earth resistance. 8. Identification of electronic components and soldering practice. 9. Soldering and testing of a H W and FW rectifier with capacitor filter in a P C B. 10. Soldering of typical I C circuit. 3 periods will be in Mechanical Engineering Workshop and 3 periods in Civil Engineering Workshop & Electrical Engineering Workshop alternately.
42
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
43
CIVIL ENGINEERING BRANCH
44
THIRD SEMESTER
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  II CMELPA 301 3+1
Module 1 Vector Differential Calculus Differentiation of vector functions  scalar and vector fields – gradient, divergence and curl of a vector function – their physical meaning – directional derivative – scalar potential, conservative fields – identities – simple problems. Module 2 Vector Integral Calculus Line, surface and volume Integrals – work done by a force along a path – Application of Green’s theorem, Stokes theorem and Gauss divergence theorem. Module 3 Function of Complex Variable Definition of analytic functions and singular points – derivation of C.R. equations in Cartesian coordinates – harmonic and orthogonal properties – construction of analytic function given real or imaginary parts – complex potential – conformal transformation of function like zn, ez, 1/z, sin z, z+k2/z – bilinear transformation – cross ratio – invariant property – simple problems. 45
Module 4
Finite Differences
Meaning of ∆ , ∇ , E, µ , δ  interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula – central differences – problems using Stirling’s formula, Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided difference formula for unequal intervals.
Module 5 Difference Calculus Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences – Numerical integration – Newton – Cote’s formula – trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8th rule – simple problems. Difference equations – Solution of difference equations. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Grawal B.S., Higher Engg. Mathematics, Khanna Publishers. M.K.Venkataraman, Numerical Methods in science & Engg., National Publishing Co. S.Balachandra Rao and G.K.Shantha, Numerical Methods, University press. Michael D.Greenberg, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, PrenticeHall. M. R. Spiegel, Theory and Problems of Vector analysis, McGraw – Hill. FLUID MECHANICS  I C302 3+2 Module 1 Properties of fluids: Definition and Units, Mass density, specific weight, surface tension, capillarity, Viscosity – Classification of fluids – Ideal and real fluids, Newtonian and non – Newtonian fluids. Fluid pressure – Atmospheric, Absolute, gauge and Vaccum Pressure, Measurement of Pressure – Piezometer, manometer, Bourden Gauge. Total pressure and centre of pressure on a submerged lamina. Pressure on a submerged curved surface – pressure on lock gates, Pressure on gravity dams. Module 2 Buoyancy – Centre of buoyancy – Metacentre – Stability of floating bodies – Determination of metacentric height – Analytical & experimental methods. Types of flow – Streamline, Path line and Streak line, Velocity Potential, Stream Function, Circulation and Vorticity, Laplace’s Differential equation in rectangular coordinates for two dimensional irrotational flow. Flow Net – Orthogonality of stream lines and equipotential lines. Stream tube – continuity equation for one dimensional flow. Module 3 Forces influencing motion – Energy of fluids, Euler’s equation, statement and derivation of Bernoulli’s equation and assumptions made. Applications of Bernoulli’s equation – Venturi meter, Orifice meter, Pitot tube Orifices and Mouth Pieces – Coefficients of Contraction, Velocity and Discharge, External and internal mouthpiece. 46
Notches and weirs – Rectangular, triangular, trapezoidal notches, Cippoletti weir, submerged weir, broad crested weir. Module 4 Flow through pipes: Laminar and Turbulent flow – Reynold’s experiment, loss of head due to friction, Darcy – Weishbach Equation, Other energy losses in pipes. Hydraulic Gradient and Total Energy Lines: Flow through long pipes – Pipes in series and parallel, Siphon, Transmission of power through pipes –nozzle diameter for maximum power transmission. Laminar Flow in circular pipes: Hagen poiseuille Equation, Laminar flow through porous media, Stoke’s law. Turbulent flow through pipes: Hydrodynamically smooth and rough boundary, Velocity distribution for turbulent flow. Drag and lift for immersed bodies. Module 5 Dimensional Analysis and Model studies: Units and dimensions of physical quantities, Dimensional Homogeneity of formulae and it’s application to common fluid flow problems, Dimensional AnalysisRayleigh’s method, Buckingham’s method. Derivations of dimensionless parameters, Froude’s, Reynold’s, Webber, Mach numbers. Hydraulic Models: Need, Hydraulic Similitude, geometric, Kinematic, Dynamic Similarity, Scale ratios of various physical quantities for Froude’s and Reynold’s model laws – problems, Selection of scale of models – Distorted models, Moving Bed models, Scale effects in models, Spillway models and Ship models. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Streeter V. L., Fluid Mechanics, Mc Graw Hill, International Students Edition. Dr. P. N. Modi & Dr. S. M. Seth, Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, Standard Book House Delhi. Jagdishlal, Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulics, Metropolitan Book Co., Delhi. R. J. Garde and A. G. Mirajoaker, Engineering Fluid Mechanics, Nem Chand & Bross., RoorKee. MECHANICS OF SOLIDS C303 2+2
Module 1 Stressstrain: Bars of varying cross sectionComposite sectiontemperature stresses. Strain energy: Gradually applied and suddenly applied load. Compound stresses: Two dimensional problemsprincipal stresses and principal planesmaximum shear stressplanes of maximum shear Graphical method. Module 2 Bending moment and shear force: Shear force and Bending moment diagrams for various types of statically determinate beams with various loading combinations relation between load, shear force and bending moment.
47
Module 3 Stresses in beams: Theory of simple bending stresses in symmetrical sections bending stress distribution modulus of section shear stress distribution in beams stress in various sections built up sections – composite sections beams of uniform strength. Module 4 Stresses due to torsion: Torsion of solid and hollow circular shafts power transmittedstresses due to axial thrustbending and torsion. Springs: Close coiled and open coiled carriage springs. Pressure vessels: Thin and thick cylindersLame’s equationstresses in thick cylinders due to internal and external pressures. Module 5 Columns and struts: Short and long columnselastic instabilityEuler’s formula for long columns with different end conditions slenderness ratio Rankine’s formulaEmpirical formulaBuit up memberscolumns subjected to eccentric loading and initial curvature. Combined bending and direct stresses: Core of different sections wind pressure on structures. Unsymmetrical bending: Product of inertiaprincipal axesstresses due to unsymmetrical bending. Shear centre: Shear centre of sections having two axes of symmetry. References 1. Timoshenko.S.P, Strength of Materials, Part1, D.Van Nostrand company, Inc.Newyork. 2. Popov E.P., Engineering Mechanics of solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Deihi. 3. Punmia B.C, Strength of Materials and Mechanics of structures, Vol.1, Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi. 4. Vazirani V.N., Ratwani N. M., Analysis of Structures, Vol.1, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. 5. Kazimi S.M.A., Solid Mechanics, Tata Mc Graw Hill. 6. William A Nash, Strength of Materials, Mc Graw Hill. 7. Ryder G.H., Strength of Materials, ELBS. 8. Arthur Morley, Strength of Materials, ELBS, Longman’s Green& Company. CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT 3+1
C 304
Module 1 Admixtures in Concrete – light weight concrete – heavy weight concrete – mass concrete – ready mix concrete – polymer concrete – vacuum concrete – shortcrete – prepacked concrete – pumped concrete. Joints – Construction joints – expansion joints – contraction joints – sliding joints – joints in water retaining structures etc. Scaffolding and Formwork (elementary concepts only). Module 2 Flooring – different types – Mosaic – marble – granite – roofing – pitched and flat roofs – domes and folded plate roofs – doors, windows and ventilators – types – construction details of paneled&glazed– I. S. specifications. Damp prevention – Causes – Material used – Damp proofing of floors – walls – roofs. 48
Finished works – plastering, painting – white washing – distempering – application of Snowcem – Concrete repairsconstruction and constructed facilities. Module 3 Functional planning of buildings – general principles of site plan – principles of functional planning – orientation of buildings – shading principles.
Modern construction materials – Intelligent buildings – building automation.
Module 4 Construction management – Mechanisation in construction – earth moving, handling, pneumatic and hoisting equipment – pile driving equipment – Earth work computation – mass diagram – soil compaction & stabilization – owning and operating works of construction equipment. Module 5 Departmental organizational structure – staff pattern – powers and functions of officers in planning, organising, directing and controlling construction –PWD code. PWD system of account – classification of transactions –heads of accounts – cash – precautions in keeping accounts – construction accounts. Stores – Safe custody of stores – classification – works – administrative sanction, technical sanction – categories of works.
References 1. M. S. Shetty, Concrete technology, S.Chand & Co. 2. S. P.Arora, Building construction, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi. 3. Dr.Mahesh Varma, Construction Equipment and its Planning and Application, Metropolitan Book Company. 4. R.L.Peurifoy, W.B.Ledbetter, Construction Planning, Equipment, and methods, Tata Mc Graw Hill. 5. B.L.Gupta, Amit Gupta, Construction Management and Accounts, Standard publishers and Distributors. SURVEYING  I C305 3+1 Module 1 Introduction – Principles – classifications – Chain surveying: Ranging and chaining. Reciprocal ranging – overcoming obstacles –setting perpendicular and gradients – traversing – plotting – errors in chaining and their corrections. Compass surveying – Prismatic compass – surveyor’s compass – bearings – systems and conversions – local attraction – Magnetic declination – dip – traversing – plotting – adjustment of error by graphical and analytical method (Bowditch’s). Plane table surveying – Different methods – Traversing. Module 2 Levelling: levels and staves – spirit level – sensitiveness – bench marks – temporary and permanent adjustments –booking  methods of reduction of levels – arithmetic checksdifferential, fly, check 49
and profile levelling cross sectioning – curvature and refraction – reciprocal levelling – errors in levelling – contouring – characteristics and uses of contours – Locating contours plotting. Module 3 Theodolite traversing: Transit theodolite – vernier, micrometer and microoptic theodolites – description and uses – fundamental lines of a transit theodolite – temporary and permanenet adjustments – horizontal angle – reiteration and repetition methods– booking. Vertical angle measurements. Methods of traversing – conditions of closure – closing error and distribution – Gales traverse table – plotting by coordinates – omitted measurements. Tacheometric surveying:  general principles Stadia method – distance and elevation formulae for staff held vertical – Instruments constants – analytic lens – tangential method – use of subtense bar – electromagnetic distance measurement – principles Module 4 Areas and volumes Areas – by latitude and departure  meridian distance method – double meridian distance method – coordinate method – trapezoidal and Simpson’s method – area by planimeter. Volume – trapezoidal and prismoidal rule. Volume from contours.  Capacity of reservoirs – Mass haul curve. Module 5 Curves: Elements of a simple curve – setting out simple curve by chain and tape methods – Rankine’s method – two theodolite method – compound and reverse curve (parallel tangents only) – transition curves – different kinds – functions and requirements – setting out the combined curve by theodolite – elements of vertical curve. References 1. Dr. B. C. Punmia, Surveying Vol. I & II, Laxmi Publications (P) LTD, New Delhi. 2. T.P. Kanetkar & Kulkarni, Surveying and leveling Vol. I&II A.V.G.Publications, Pune. 3. Dr. K. R. Arora, Surveying Vol. I, Standard Book House New Delhi. 4. C. Venkatramaiah, Text Book of Surveying, Universities Press (India) LTD. Hyderabad. 5. S.K.Roy, Fundamental of Surveying, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 6. S.K. Hussain & M.S. Nagaraj, Surveying, S.Chand & Company Limited. 7. B.N.Basak – Surveying. 8. Alak De, Plane Surveying, S.Chand &Co. CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING  I C306 PART A Detailed drawings of paneled doors, glazed doors, glazed windows and ventilators with wooden frames. (2 sheets). Reinforced concrete staircase (1 sheet). Roof truss in standard steel sections (1 sheet). Roof lines (1 sheet). Roof detailing for M. P. tiles (1 Sheet). PART B Working drawings – plan, section and elevation of single storied buildings with RC and tiled roofs (only residential buildings) (8 sheets). (Preparation of plan from line sketches only) 50 0+3
Part A Part B
References
Marks distribution 40 marks 60 marks
1. Balagopal & T. S. Prabhu, Building drawing & detailing, Spades Publishers and distributors, Calicut. 2. Shah & Kale, Building Drawing, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi. 3. B.P.Varma, Civil Engineering drawing and House Planning, Khanna Publishers, Delhi. 4. Gurucharan Singh, Subhash Chander Sharma, Civil Engineering drawing, Standard Publishers distributors, Delhi. MATERIAL TESTING LABORATORY  I C 307 0+3
1. Tests on springs (open and close coiled) 2. Bending Test on Wooden Beams using U. T. M. ' 3. Verification of Clerk. Maxwell's Law of reciprocal deflection and determination of E for steel. 4. Torsion Pendulum (M.S. wires. Aluminum wires and brass wires) 5. Torsion test using U. T. M. on M. S. Rod, torsteel and High Tensile steel. 6. Torsion Test on M. S, Road 7. Shear Test on M.S. Rod. 8. Fatigue Test 9. Impact Test (Izod and Charpy) 10. Hardness Test (Brinell, Vicker's and Rebound) 11. Strut Test. Note All tests should be done as per relevant BIS. SURVEY PRACTICAL  I C308 1. 2. Running a closed compass traverse – plotting and adjustments. Plane table surveying. i. Traversing. ii. Three point problem iii. Two point problem. Levelling. i. Study of leveling instruments ii. Reduction of levels by H I method iii. Reduction of levels by rise and fall method iv. Longitudinal sectioning and cross sectioning. v. Contouring. 51 0+3
3.
4.
Theodolite Surveying i. Study of transit theodolite. ii. Measurements of horizontal angles by the method of repetition. iii. Measurement of horizontal angles by the method of reiteration. Study of minor instruments.
5.
52
FOURTH SEMESTER
53
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  III CMELRPTA401 3+1+0 Module 1 Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficents  Finding P.I. by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchys equations  Linear Simultaneous eqnssimple applications in engineering problems. Module 2 Partial Differential Equations: Formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitrary Functions  solution of Lagrange Linear Equations – Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave equation. Module 3 Fourier Transforms: Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine & Cosine transforms  inverse transforms  transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no proof) – Parsevals Identity  simple problems. Module 4 Probability and statistics: Binomial law of probability  The binomial distribution, its mean and variance  Poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution  its mean and variance fitting of binomial & Poisson distributions  normal distribution  properties of normal curve standard normal curve  simple problems in binomial, Poisson and normal distributions. Module 5 Population & Samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) –Sampling distribution of variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance  Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – Test of significance for single proportion, difference of proportions, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected). References 1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers. 2. M.K. Venkataraman, Engineering Mathematics Vol. II 3rd year Part A & B, National Publishing Company. 3. Ian N.Sneddon, Elements of Partial Differential Equations,Mc Graw Hill International Edn. 4. Richard A Johnson, Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers, Pearson Education Asia / PHI. 5. Bali and Iyengar, A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II), Laxmi Publications Ltd. 6. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 7. Hogg and Tanis, Probability and statistical inferences, Pearson Education Asia. FLUID MECHANICS  II C402 2+2 Module 1 Flow in open Channel – Uniform and non uniform flow, equations for uniform flow – Chezy’s and Manning’s formula, Most economical cross sections – Velocity distribution in open channels, Conveyance of a canal section, Normal depth, computation of uniform flow, Energy in open channel 54
flow, specific energy, specific force diagrams, critical velocity, critical states of flow, Froude number, measurement of discharge in channels. Module 2 Gradually varied flow – Dynamic Equation for gradually varied flow, Different forms of the dynamic equation, Characteristics of surface profiles in prismatic channels, backwater computation by direct step method. Module 3 Rapidly varied flow, hydraulic jump – initial and sequent depths, nondimensional equation, Practical application of hydraulic jump, Types of jump in horizontal floor, Basic characteristics of the jump, Energy loss, efficiency, height of jump, jump as energy dissipater, stilling basins, Location of hydraulic jump. Module 4 Hydraulic Machines – Impact of jet, Force of jet on stationary and moving plates – turbines – Classification, velocity triangle for Pelton, Francis, Kaplan turbines, Specific speed, selection of turbines, draft tube – types, Penstock, surge tank – types, tail race. Module 5 Centrifugal Pumps – Types, Velocity triangle for pumps, Head of pump, Losses and efficiency, Minimum starting speed, Specific speed, Multistage pump, Pumps in parallel. Positive displacement pumps – working principle, types of reciprocating pumps, work done, effect of acceleration and frictional resistance, slip and coefficient of discharge. Indicator diagram, separation in suction and delivery pipes. Air vessel – rate of flow into and from air vessel. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Ven Te Chow, Open Channel Hydraulics, Mc Graw Hill Ltd. K. Subrahmanya, Flow in open channel vol.1, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi Dr. P. N. Modi & Dr. S. M. Seth, Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics, Standard Book House, Delhi. Jagadheesh Lal, Hydraulic Machines, Metropolitian Book Co., New Delhi.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS  I C403 2+2 Module 1 Deflection of determinate beams: Differential equation of the elastic curve slope and deflection of beams by method of successive integrationMacaulay’s method moment area methodconjugate beam methoddeflection due to shear. Module 2 Energy Theorems: Strain energy due to axial loadbendingshear and torsionprinciple of super positionprinciple of virtual workCastigliano’s first theoremBetti’s theoremMaxwell’s law of 55
reciprocal deflectionunit load method and strain energy method for determination of deflection of statically determinate beamspin jointed frameseffect of temperaturelack of fit. Module 3 Moving loads and influence lines: effect of moving loadsinfluence lines for reaction, shear force and bending moment for determinate beamsload positionabsolute maximum bending moment. Module 4 Arches: Theoretical archEddy’s theoremanalysis of three hinged arches – moving loads on archessettlement and temperature effect. Module 5 Cables and suspension bridges: General cable theoremanalysis of cables under concentrated and uniformly distributed loadsshape and stresses due to self weightanchor cablestemperature effectsuspension bridges with three hinged and two hinged stiffening girdersinfluence lines for bending moment and shear forcetemperature stresses in stiffening girder. References 1. Reddy C.S., Basic Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.1996. 2. Smith J.C. Structural Analysis, Macmillian Pub.Co.1985. 3. Rajesekharan &Sankarasubramanian,G., Computational Structural Mechanics, Prentice Hall of India, 2001. 4. Wang C.K.& Solomon C.G., Introductory Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill.1968. 5. Sadhu Sindh, Strength of Materials, Khanna Publishers, 1988. 6. Seeli F.B.& Smith J.P., Advanced Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley &Sons, 1993. 7. Norris & Wilbur, Elementary Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill. 8. Junarker S.R., Mechanics of Structures, Vol. II, Charorbar Book Stall. 9. Timoshenko S.P, Young D.H., Theory of structures, McGraw Hill 10. Thadani B.N, Desai J.P, Structural mechanics, Weinall Book Corporation. 11. Punmia B.C., Strength of materials and theory of structures, Vol.II, Laxmi publications.
C 404
ENGG. ECONOMICS AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT 2+2 Part A Engineering Economics
Module 1 Indian Industries: Industrial patternIndustrial growthInadequacies of the program of industrialisationRole of the public sectorproblems and prospects of privatizationmultinational corporations and their impacts on the Indian economyinflationdemand pull and cost pusheffects of price increases. Module 2 Accountancy: Objectives of accounting – management accounting and financial accounting – journal – ledger – the trial balance – balance sheet – profit and loss account.
56
Module 3 Financial management: The Indian financial system – types of banks and their functions – long term financing – the stock market – functions and problems faced by the stock market – Industrial finance – loans and return of loans – cost benefit analysis – methods of appraising profitability – pay back method – average rate of return – internal rate of return – net present value. Part B Construction Management Module 4 Introduction to job planning and Management: Bar charts and mile stone charts  work breakdown structure  C P M and PERT networks  Network and time estimates  Earliest expected time  Forward pass and backward pass  Time estimates  related problems. Module 5 Project costs analysis: Cost Vs Time curve  optimum duration related problems  updating, resource allocation  resource smoothing – resource leveling  Network compression  Compression limited by crashing  float parallel critical paths  crashed critical paths – most economical solution. Module 6 Industrial Relations: Payment of wages Act  Minimum wages Act  Employees State Insurance Act –Workers participation in management – labour welfare and social security – Industrial safety and welfare provision – role of state in labour welfare – role of labour welfare officers social security principles and practice. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A.N.Agarwal, Indian economy, Wishwa prakashan. Prasanna Chandra, Fundamentals of financial management, Tata McGraw Hill. Ruddar Datt, K.P.M. Sundaram, Indian economy, S.Chand &Co. James.D.Steevens, Techniques for Construction Network Sheduling, McGraw Hill. S.C.Sharma, Management of Systems, Khanna Publishers. T.R.Banga, S.C.Sharma, Industrial Organisation and Engineering Economics, Khanna Publishers. L. S. Srinath, PERT and CPM Principles and Applications, East – West Press. SURVEYING  II C405 3+2 Module 1 Triangulation: triangulation figures – classification of triangulation systems – selection of triangulation stations – intervisibility and heights of stations – station marks – signals and towers – base line – choice – instrument and accessories – measurement of base lines – corrections – satellite stations – need, reduction to centre – extension of base. Module 2 Theory of errors and triangulation Adjustments: Kinds of error – laws of weights – principles of least squares – determination of most probable value of quantities – probable error – distribution of error to the field measurements – normal equation – Method of corrections – Adjustment of simple triangulation figures. 57
Module 3 Hydrographic surveying – Equipment – Methods of locating soundings – reduction and plotting of soundings – use of sextants and station pointer. Geodesy – shape of earth – effects of curvature – spherical excess – convergence of meridians. Module 4 Terrestrial photogrammetry – General principles – photo theodolite – horizontal position of a point from photogrammetric measurements – elevation of a point – determination of focal length of lens. Aerial photogrammentry – aerial camera – scale of vertical photograph – relief displacement on a vertical photograph – principle of parallax – stereoscopic pairs – flight planning – radial line method – flying height and overlaps – remote sensing – concepts of remote sensing – ideal remote sensing system. Module 5 Field Astronomy:  Definitions – celestial sphere – coordinate systems – astronomical triangle – sidereal, apparent and mean solar time – corrections to astronomical observations – determination of azimuth, latitude and longitude – different methods. References 1. 2. 3. 4. T. P. Kanetkar and Kulkarni, Surveying and leveling Vol. II, A.V.G. Publications, Pune. B. C. Punmia, Surveying and leveling Vol. II, Laxmi Publications (P) LTD, New Delhi. Thoms M.Lillerand, Remote sensing and image interpretation, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York. Dr. K.R. Arora, Surveying Vol. II, Standard Book House, New Delhi. CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING  II C406 0+3 Preparation of design, sketches and working drawings as per area and functional requirements. Working drawings for 1. Residential buildings: Flat and pitched roof – cottages, bungalows and flats (single storied and double storied) (4 sheets) 2. Public buildings – schools, offices, libraries, restaurants, commercial complexes (3sheets) 3. Preparation of site plan and plan as per building rules. (2 sheets) 4. Plumbing: water supply and sanitary drawings for residential buildings. (1 sheet) The student is expected to know local building rules and national building code provisions. The student is expected to prepare sketch design for clients and submission drawings for approval References 1. 2. 3. 4. Balagopal & T. S. Prabhu, Building drawing & detailing, Spades Publishers and distributors, Calicut. Shah & Kale, Building Drawing, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi. B.P.Varma, Civil Engineering drawing and House Planning, Khanna Publishers, Delhi. Gurucharan Singh, Subhash Chander Sharma, Civil Engineering drawing, Standard Publishers distributors, Delhi. 58
5. National Building code, Kerala building byelaws. HYDRAULICS LABORATORY C407 PART A FLOW 1. Study of taps, valves, pipe fittings, gauges, pitot tubes, watermeters and current meters. 2. Determination of metacentric height and radius of gyration of floating bodies. 3. Hydraulic coefficients of orifices and mouth pieces under constant head method and time of emptying method. 4. Calibration of venturimeter, orifice meter and water meter. 5. Calibration of rectangular and triangular notches. 6. Determination of Darcy’s and Chezy’s constant for pipe flow. 7. Determination of Chezy’s constant and Mannings number for open channel flow. 8. Determination of discharge coefficient for PlugSluices. PART B  MACHINERY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Study of centrifugal, self priming and reciprocating pumps; impulse and reaction turbines Performance characteristics of centrifugal pump. Performance characteristics of reciprocating pump. Performance characteristics of self priming pump. Performance characteristics of Pelton wheel . Performance characteristics of Francis turbine. Performance characteristics of Kaplan turbine. SURVEYING PRACTICAL  II C408 0+3 0+3
1. Measurement of vertical angles using theodolite. 2. Solution to problems on heights distances by observations using a theodolite. 3. Traversing using a theodolite – distribution of errors using gale’s traverse table. 4. Determination of constants of the transit theodolite. 5. Heights and distances – using the stadia Tacheometer Principles. 6. Heights and distances – using tangential tachometry. 7. Setting out a simple circular curve by offsets from long chord. 8. Setting out a circular curve by Rankine’s method. 9. Setting out a building – Foundation marking. 10. Study of total station.
59
FIFTH SEMESTER
60
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  IV CMELPA501 3+1+0 Module 1 Complex Integration: Line Integral –Cauchy’s integral theorem Cauchy’s integral formulaTaylor’s seriesLaurent’s series zeros and singularities Residues residue theoremEvaluation of real integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semicircle. Module 2 Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection methodRegula falsi method  Newton –Raphson method – solution of system of linear equations by Jacobi’s iteration method and GaussSiedel method. Module 3 Numerical solution of ordinary differential equation: Taylor’s series method Euler’s method – Modified Eulers method Runge – Kutta method (IV order)Milne’s predictor corrector method. Module 4 Z – Transforms: Definition of Z transform properties –Z transform of polynomial functions – trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property inverse transform – solution of 1st & 2nd order difference equations with constant coefficients using Z transforms. Module 5 Linear programming: graphical solution – solution using simplex method (non – degenerate case only) – BigM method,two phase method Duality in L.P.P. Balanced T.P. – Vogels approximation method – Modi method. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Ervin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley Eastern limited. Dr. B.S.Grewal, Numerical methods in Engineering & Science, Kanna Publishers. Dr. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Kanna Publishers. Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, Numerical methods in Science & Engineering, National Publishing Company. P.C.Tulsian & Vishal Pandey, Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems, Pearson Education Asia. Churchill and Brown, Complex variables and applications, McGrawHill. Panneer Selvam, Operations research, PHI. S Arumugam, A.T.Isaac & A Somasundaram, Engineering Mathematics Vol. III, Scitech publications T.K.M.Pillai, G.Ramanaigh & S.Narayanan, Advanced Mathematics for Engg. Students Vol. IIIS.Vishwananthan printers & publishers.
DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES  I C502 61 2+2
Module 1 Working stress method: Introduction permissible stressesfactor of safety –behaviour of R.C.C beams –assumptionsunder reinforced –over reinforced and balanced sections. Theory of singly and doubly reinforced beams. Module 2 Limit state method: Conceptsassumptions –characteristic strength and load partial safety factorslimit stateslimit state of collapse –limit state of serviceability. Theory of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular sections in flexuredesign of simply supported and flanged beams. Module 3 Behaviour and design of one way and two way slabsContinuous slabsanalysis using method recommended by BIS arrangements of reinforcement in slabs. Design of flat slab. Module 4 Design of columns: Limit state method I S specificationsdesign of columns with lateral and helical reinforcementmembers subjected to combined axial load and bending. Module 5 Design of footingsIsolated footing with axial and eccentric loadingcombined footing. Stair casesintroduction to different typesdesign of simply supported flightscantilever steps. References 1. Relevant IS codes. (I.S 456, I.S 875,SP 16) 2. Park R and Pauloy T, Reinforced concrete structures, John Wiely & sons Inc. 3. Purushothaman P, Reinforced concrete structural elementsBehaviour, Analysis and Design, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd. 4. Unnikrishna Pillai S. & D.Menon, Reinforced concrete design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company Ltd. 5. Mallick S.K., Reinforced concrete, Oxford & IBH Publishing company. 6. Varghese P.C., Limit state design of Reinforced concrete, Printice Hall of India Pvt Ltd. 7. Ashok .K. Jain, Reinforced concrete Limit state design, New Chand & Bose.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS  II C503 2+2 Module 1 Statically indeterminate structuresdegree of indeterminacyforce and displacement methods of structural analysis. Force method of analysis of indeterminate structures  Method of consistent deformationanalysis of fixed beams and continuous beams. Clapyron’s theorem of three moments62
analysis of fixed and continuous beams Minimum strain energyCastigliano’s second theoremanalysis of indeterminate beams, portal frames and trusses. Module 2 Displacement method of analysis of statically indeterminate structures: Slope deflection methodfundamental equationsanalysis of continuous beams & portal frames (with sway and without sway)  Moment distribution methodanalysis of continuous beams & portal frames (with sway and without sway). Module 3 Theories of Elastic Failure: Maximum principal stress theory maximum shear stress theory maximum principal strain theory – Mohr’s theory. Influence line diagrams for statically indeterminate structures: Muller Breslau’s principle Influence lines for reactionsshear forcebending momentpropped cantilevercontinuous beams and fixed beams Module 4 Matrix methods: Classification of structuresstatic& kinematic indeterminacy Stiffness methodcoordinate systemselement stiffness matrix  Direct stiffness method  structure stiffness matrixassembly of structure stiffness matrix from element stiffness matrixequivalent joint load – incorporation of boundary conditions –analysis of beams and frames (rigid & pinjointed). Module 5 Flexibility method: Flexibility influence coefficients  flexibility matrixanalysis of beams & frames (rigid and pinjointed). References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Weaver &Gere, Matrix Analysis of Structures, East West Press. Moshe F. Rubinstein – Matrix Computer Analysis of Structures Prentice Hall, 1969. Meek J.L., Matrix Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill,1971. Reddy C.S., Basic Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.1996. Smith J.C. Structural Analysis, Macmillian Pub.Co.1985. Rajesekharan & Sankarasubramanian,G., Computational Structural Mechanics, Prentice Hall of India, 2001. 7. Mukhopadhyay M., Matrix Finite Element Computer and Structural Analysis, Oxford & IBH,1984. 8. Wang C.K.& Solomon C.G., Introductory Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill.1968. 9. Pezemieniecki, J.S, Theory of Matrix Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill Co., 1984 10. Sadhu Sindh, Strength of Materials, Khanna Publishers, 1988. 11. Seeli F.B.&Smith J.P., Advanced Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley &Sons, 1993. 12. Norris & Wilbur, Elementary Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill. 13. Junarker S.R., Mechanics of Structures, Vol. II, Charorbar Book Stall. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING C 504 2+2 Module 1 Basic concepts of operation of a computer: Operating system  drives, directories and files  types of files COM, EXE, BAT  booting  operating system commands  creating, editing, listing and copying files  different levels 63
of programming languages  high level languages compiling, linking and running structured planning  algorithms, flowcharts  simple examples.
compilers and programming
interpreters program
Module 2 Introduction to C language: Character set operators  constants and variables  data types  use of control statements  if, for, while, dowhile, switch  conditional assignment  use of built in l/O functions  writing small programs. Module 3 Functions: Declaration  passing parameters by value and by reference  writing trigonometric, algebraic and string handling functions  recursion – scope rules  storage classes  macros. Module 4 Arrays: Declaration and handling  sorting  pointers and arrays  pointers as parameters to functions  structures and unions  array of structures  sorting of strings  linked lists. Module 5 Data files: Reading, writing and appending data files  binary files  transfer of data in blocks command line arguments  operation on files at command line. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Balaguruswamy, Programming in C, Tata Mc Graw Hill. Kern Ingham & Ritchie, The C programming language, Prentice Hall. Byron S Gottfried, Programming with C, Tata Mc Graw Hill. Y. Kenetker, Let us C, BPB Publications. V. Rajaraman, Programming with C. Y. Kenetker, Exploring C, BPB Publications.
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY C 505 3+1 Module 1 Introduction: Various branches of geology  Relevance of Geology in Engineering. Geologic time scale. Physical Geology: Geomorphic processesRock weatheringFormation of soilssoil profilessoils of India – Geologic work and engineering significance of rivers and oceans. Module 2 Dynamic Geology: Interior constitution of the earthVarious methods to study the interiorcrust, mantle, corelithosphereasthenospheremajor discontinuitiesMoho, Guttenberg, Lehmanncomposition of different layerssima & sial. Plate tectonics: Lithospheric platesdiverging, converging and transform boundariestheir characteristic featuresmidoceanic ridge, benioff zone and transform faultssignificance of plate tectonic concept. 64
Earthquake: Elastic rebound theorytypes of seismic wavescause of earthquakeintensity and magnitude of earthquakeLocating epicentre and hypocentereffect of earthquakedistribution of earthquakeearthquake resistant structures. Module 3 Mineralogy: Definition and classificationimportant physical properties of mineralscolour, streak, lusture, transperancy, cleavage, fracture, hardness, form, specific gravity and magnetism. Study of the diagnostic physical properties and chemical composition of the following rock forming minerals: 1.Quartz, 2.Feldspar, 3.Hypersthene, 4.Auguite, 5. Hornblende, 6. Biotite, 7.Muscovite, 8.Olivine, 9.Garnet, 10.Fluorite, 11.Tourmaline, 12.Calcite, 13.Kyanite, 14. Kaolin, 15. Serpentine. Petrology: Definition and classificationimportant structures and textures of igneous sedimentary and metamorphic rocksdiagnostic texture, mineralogy, engineering properties and uses of following rocks: Igneous rocks: 1. Granite, 2. Syenite, 3. Diorite, 4. Gabbro, 5. Peridotite, 6.Dolerite, 7.Basalt 8.Pegmatite. Sedimentary rocks: 1. Conglomerate, 2. Breccia, 3. Sandstone, 4. Limestone, 5. shale.Metamorphic rocks: 1. Gneiss, 2. Schist, 3. Slate, 4. Marble, 5. Quartzite, 6. Mylonite, 7. Pseudotachyllite. Special Indian rock types: 1. Charnockite, 2. Khondalite, 3. Laterite. Module 4 Structural Geology: Definitionoutcropstratificationdip and strike. Foldsdefinition parts of foldclassificationrecognition of folds in the field Faultsdefinitionparts of a faultclassificationrecognition in the fieldeffects of faulting and subsequent erosion on outcrops. Jointsdefinitionclassification. Unconformitesdefinitionclassification recognition in the field. Effects of all the above described structures in the major engineering projects like reservoirs, dams, tunnels and other important structures.
Module 5 Engineering Geology: Mass movement of earth materialsLandslidesdefinition, classification, causes of land slides and their correctionsGeological considerations in the selection of sites for reservoirs and dams. Geological considerations in Tunnel constructions and mountain roadsrocks as building materials. Hydrogeology: Groundwater tableabundance and advantagesaquiferacquicludeacquifugeartesian conditions and artesian wellscone of depression–perched water table. Recommended field work: Field trip to quarries or geologically significant places to learn  in site character of rocks in quarries/outcropsmeasuring strike and dip of a formationtracing of outcrops. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Arthur Holmes, Physical geology, Thomas Nelson. Parbin Singh, Engineering & general geology, K.Katria & sons, New Delhi. HH.Read, Rutleys elements of mineralogy, George Allen & Unwin Ltd, London. G.W.Tyrell, Principles of petrology, B.I. Publications, Bombay. M.P.Billings, Strucutural geology, Aisa publishing house, New Delhi. Krynine&Judd, Engineering geology & geotechniques, Tata McGraw hill, New Delhi. David Keith Todd, Groundwater hydrology, John Wiley & sons, New York.
65
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING  I C506 3+1 Module 1 Soil formation and soil types: Residual soil and transported soilSoil structureBasic structural units of clay minerals. Simple soil properties: three phase systems  void ratio  porosity  degree of saturation  moisture content  specific gravity  unit weight relationships. Laboratory and field identification of soils: Determination of water content, specific gravity, determination of field density by core cutter and sand replacement method, grain size analysis by sieve, hydrometer and pipette analysis  Atterberg limits and indices  field identification of soils. Classification of soils: Principles of classification  I. S. classification  plasticity chart  Sensitivity and thixotropy. Module 2 Permeability of soils: Darcy's law factors affecting constant head and falling head test  permeability of stratified deposits. soil water system  classification of soil water  capillarity of soils  principles of effective stress. Seepage of soils: seepage pressure, critical hydraulic gradient quick sand condition  flownet diagram for isotropic and anisotropic soils  phreatic line in earth dams  exit gradient protective filters.
Module 3 Shear strength: Shear strength parameters  Mohr's circle – Mohr Coulomb strength theory direct, triaxial, unconfined and vane shear tests Drainage conditions  UU, CD and CD tests  choice of test conditions for field problems  measurement of pore pressurecritical void ratio and liquefaction. Module 4 Compaction: Objects of compaction  proctor test and modified proctor test  concept of OMC and Max. dry density  Zero air void line  factors affecting compaction  effect of compaction on soil properties  field methods.of compaction  control of compaction. Stability of slopes: types of failures of soil slopes  Swedish circle method  (φ) = 0 analysis and C (φ ) analysis. Friction circle method Taylor's stability number and stability charts. Module 5 Compressibility and consolidation of soils: void ratio  pressure relationship  concept of coefficient of compressibility  coefficient of volume change and compression index  normally loaded and pre loaded deposits  determination of preconsolidation pressure  Terzaghi's theory of one dimensional consolidation  time rate of consolidation  time factor  degree of consolidation square root time and log time  fitting methods  coefficient of consolidation  calculation of void ratio  height of solids methods and change in void ratio method  settlement analysis. References 1. Murthy V. N.S, Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Nai Sarak, Delhi. 2. Jumkis A .R., Soil Mechanics, Calgotia Book Source Publishers. 3. Gopal Ranjan and A .S .R .Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, New Age International Publishers. 4. Punmia B. C., Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Laxshmi Publications, New Delhi. 66
5. Arora K. R., Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Standard Publishers, Distributors. 6. V. Narasimha Rao and Venkatramaiah, Numerical Problems, Examples and Objective Questions in Geotechnical Engineering, Orient LongMan Publishers. 7. Lambe & Whitman, Soil Mechanics, John Wiely Publications. COMPUTING TECHNIQUES LAB (C) C 507 0+3 1. Familiarisation with the computer system  PCs  LAN Peripherals. 2. Fundamentals of operating system like DOS, WINDOWS etc.,(Use of files, directories, internal commands, external commands,editors and compilers. 3. Familiarisation with packages like Wordstar, dbase, lotus, MS Office. 4. Familiarisation with data processing packages like FOXPRO etc,. 5. Familiarisation of application softwares  like Grapher, Surfur, Hardward Graphics  3. 6. Familiarisation of drawing Softwares  AUTOCAD, Auto Architect, 3D Studio. 7. Programming with C as per syllabus of computer programming. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0+3
C508
1. Determination of specific gravity, water content and particle size distribution by hydrometer method / pipette method. 2. Determination of field density of soil by sand replacement method and core cutter method. 3. Determination of Atterberg limits. 4. Proctor's compaction tests (light and heavy). 5. Permeability tests for cohesive and cohesionless soil. 6. Direct shear test. 7. Triaxial shear test. 8. Unconfined Compression test. 9. Vane shear Test. 10. Consolidation test. 11. Study on Collection and Field Identification of Soil and Sampling Techniques.
67
SIXTH SEMESTER
68
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS  III C601 2+2 Module 1 Approximate methods of frame analysis: Frames under lateral loadingportal method – cantilever method. Frames under vertical loading –substitute frame method. Space frames – tension coefficientstension coefficient method applied to space frames Module 2 Kani’s methodcontinuous beams & frames (with and without sway). Beams curved in plan analysis of cantilever beam curved in plan analysis of curved balcony beams analysis of circular beams over simple supports. Module 3 Elementary theory of elasticity: State of stress at a point stress tensor equilibrium equationsstresses on arbitrary plane transformation of stresses principal stressesstrain components – strain tensor compatibility equationsboundary condition equations octahedral stresses. Module 4 Two dimensional problems plane stresses  plane strain – compatibility equations in two dimensional cases Airy’s stress functions biharmonic equations equilibrium equations in polar coordinates – compatibility equation and stress functions in polar coordinates bending of cantilever loaded at ends. Module 5 Plastic theory – ductility of steel plastic bending of beams evaluation of fully plastic moment – plastic hinge – load factor – method of limit analysis basic theorems collapse load for beams and portal frames. References 1. Timoshenko S.P., Theory of Elasticity, McGraw Hill. 2. Sreenath, Advanced Mechanics of Solids 3. Sadhu Sindh, Strength of Materials, Khanna Publishers, 1988. 4. Seeli F.B.&Smith J.P., Advanced Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley & Sons, 1993. 5. Vazirani & Ratwani, Analysis of Structures, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. 6. B.C. Punmia, Theory of Structures, Vol. II, Laxmi Publishers, New Delhi. 7. P.S.David, Analysis of continuous beams and rigid frames 8. Coats, Coutie, & Kong, Structural Analysis, ELBS & Nelson, 1980. 9. Kinney J.S., Indeterminate Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill, 1957. 10. Prakash Rao D.S., Structural Analysis, Universal Press Ltd, Hyderabad, 1997.
69
DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES C602 2+2 Module 1 Loading standards  I.S structural sections  I.S specifications  design of tension members  riveted and welded connections  design of simple and compound beams  laterally supported and unsupported. Module 2 Compression members  design of columns  short and long columns  axial and eccentric loading built up columnsmoment resisting connections  lacing and battening  column base  slab base gusseted base  grillage foundation. Module 3 Water tanks  rectangular, circular and pressed steel tanks – connections  analysis and design of supporting towers. Module 4 Light gauge steel structures  introduction  type of sections  local buckling stiffened and multiple stiffened elements  beams with and with out lateral supports. Module 5 Chimneys types  self supporting & guyed – stresses in chimneys – design of chimney stack, breech opening, base plate, connections and foundations. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Relevant I.S Codes. (I.S 800, I .S 875, Steel Tables) Ramamrutham S, Design of steel and timber structures, Dhanpat Rai & sons, Delhi. Ramchandra, Design of steel structures Vol. I & II, Standard book house, Delhi. Gaylord & Gaylord, Design of steel structures, Tata McGrawHill. Graham W. Owens& Peter .R. Knowles, Steel Designers Manual, Blackwell scientific publications. 6. B.C.Punmia, Design of steel structures, Laxmi publications. TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING  I C603 3+1 Module 1 Introduction: Comparison of highway and railway. Modern developments  Surface elevated and tube railways. Design of railway track: Component parts of a railway track  their requirements and functions Typical cross section  conning of wheels  wear and creep of rails  rail fastenings  Train resistances and evaluation of loading capacity. Geometric design of railway track: Horizontal curves, radius – super elevation  cant deficiency transition curves  gradients  different types  Compensation of gradients. Module 2 Railway operation and control: Points and Crossings – Design features of a turn out  Types of railway track  Functions  Details of station yards and marshalling yards  Signaling and 70
interlocking  Principles of track circuiting  Control of train movements by absolute block system automatic block system  centralised traffic control systems. Module 3 Tunnel Engineering: Tunnel sections types, size and shapes tunnel surveying  alignment, transfering centre, grade into tunnel  tunnel driving procedure  tunnelling through soft soil (Fore Poling Method) and tunneling through hardsoil (Cantilever Car Dump Method) Tunnel lining, ventilation  lighting and drainage of tunnels. Module 4 Harbour Engineering: Classification of harbours and the effect of tides, winds and waves in the location and design of harbours; Break waters necessity and functions  different types  forces acting on break water design principles— construction of break waters  general study of pier heads quays, landing stages wharves, jetties, transit sheds and warehouses channel demarcation signal characteristics (Beacons, buoys, channel lighting  light houses). Module 5 Dock Engineering: Functions and types of docks, dry docks, floating docks, slip ways, dock gates and caissons. Dredging  mechanical and hydraulic dredgers  general study of bucket ladder dredger, grab dredger and dipper dredgers. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. S.C. Rangawala, Railway Engineering, Chartor Publishing House Saxena, Arora., Railway Engineering, Dhanpat rai & Sons Subhash C. Saxena, Railway Engineering, Dhanpat rai & Sons R. Srinivasan, Harbour, Dock & Tunnel Engineering, Chartor Publishing House S.P.Bindra, Acourse in docks and Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat rai & Sons WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING  I C604 3+1 Module 1 Irrigation: Definitionnecessity of irrigation  environmental effects of irrigation  sources of water  planning concepts of irrigation schemes irrigation systems lift and flow irrigation – modes of irrigation  layout of irrigation schemes  historical development and irrigation in India through ages. Soilwaterplant relation – classes and availability of soil water water requirement for crop optimum moisture for crop growth  depth of water and frequency of irrigation  crop seasons and important crops in India. Crop period and base period  duty, delta and their relationship  factors affecting duty  commanded areas and intensity of irrigation. Consumptive use of water evapotranspiration  determination of consumptive use  irrigation efficiencies. Module 2 Basic concepts of hydrology: Hydrological cycle and its components  rainfall  rain gauge mean precipitation over a catchment area  run off  factors affecting runoff  hydrograph  direct run off and base flow  unit hydrograph  S. hydrograph – applications of unit hydrograph. 71
Estimation of runoff: Empirical formula, infiltration method, rational method  flood estimation flood frequency, unit hydrograph method and empirical formula. Module 3 Flow irrigation: canal system  classification of canals and their alignment  requirements of a good distribution systembalancing depth  section of canal. Design of canals in alluvial soils  silt theories  non silting and non scouring velocity. Kennedy's theory Lacey's theory  design of unlined canal using the two theories in alluvial soils  bed load and suspended load  canal outlets  requirements of good canal outlets  non modular  semi modular  modular outlets. Module 4 Ground water: Definitions porosity  specific yield  specific retention  storage coefficientcoefficient of permeability and transmissibility. Ground water velocity Darcy's equation  flow towards wells  Dupit's theory of aquifers. Wellsshallow wells  deep wells  yield of an open well constant level pumping test and recuperation test  tube wells  strainer, cavity and slotted tube wells factors governing the selection of site and type of tube wells. Springs, Infiltration galleries and wells. Module 5 Reservoir planning: Investigation  selection of site  storage zones in a reservoir  mass inflow curve  demand curve  calculation of reservoir capacity and safe yield from mass inflow curve reservoir sedimentation  reservoir sediment control  single purpose reservoirs  multi purpose reservoirs  useful life of a reservoir. River training works: guide banks, groynes and marginal bunds – flood control  causes  methods of flood control  principles of flood routing. Soil conservation: water logging and its control  reclamation of salt affected land. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. P.M.Modi, Irrigationwater recourses and water power, Standard book house, Delhi. S.K Garge, Irrigation and hydraulic structures, Khanna Publishers, Delhi R.K.Linsley, M.A.Kholar&J.L.H.Paulhur, Hydrology for Engineers, Mc Grawhill book co., New York. Bharat Singer, Fundamentals of Irrigation Engineering. V.B.Priyani, Irrigation and Waterpower Engg, Charota Book stall Anand. Dr.B.C.Punmia&Dr.Pande.B.B.Lal, Irrigation & Water Power Engineering, Laxmi Publications.
72
GEO TECHNICAL ENGINEERING  II C 605 3+1 Module 1 Site investigation and Soil exploration: Objectives  planning  reconnaissance methods of subsurface explorationtest pits, auger borings  rotary drilling  depth and spacing of borings  bore log  soil profile  location of water tablesampling  disturbed and undisturbed samples. Standard Penetration test  Static and dynamic cone penetration test  field vane shear test  Geophysical methods. Stress Distribution: Boussinesque's and Westergaard's equations for vertical pressure due to point loads and u.d.l.  assumptions and limitations  pressure bulb  Newmark charts and their use. Module 2 Earth Pressure: General & local State of plastic equilibrium. Earth pressure at rest  active and passive. Rankine's and Coulomb's theories of cohesionless and cohesive soils  influence of surcharge and water table. Rehban's and Culman's graphical methods: Sheeting and bracings in shallow and deep excavations. Sheet Piles: Common Types of Sheet Piles – Uses of Sheet pile walls Module 3 Bearing capacity: Definitions  ultimate and allowable  plate load test  factors affecting Terzaghi's and Skempton's analysis  bearing capacity factors and charts  effect of watertable bearing capacity from building codes andSPT values  Methods of improving bearing capacity vibroflotation and sand drains. Settlement analysis: Distribution of contact pressure estimation of immediate and consolidation settlement  causes of settlement  permissible, total and differential settlement  methods of reducing differential settlement. Module 4 Foundation: General consideration  Functions of foundation  shallow and deep foundation different types of foundation Selection of type of foundationsteps involved. Footings: Design of individual, continuous and combined footings  footings subjected to eccentric loading  proportioning footings for equal settlement. Module 5 Raft foundation: Bearing capacity equations  design procedure  floating foundation. Pile foundation: Uses of piles  Classification of piles  Determination of load carrying capacity of axially loaded single vertical pile (static & dynamic formulae) pile load tests  negative skin friction group action & pile spacings  settlement of pile group. Caissons: Open, box, and pneumatic caissons, construction details of well foundation  problems of well sinking. Note Structural design of foundations is not contemplated in this course. References Arora K. R, Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering, Standard Publishers , Distributors. 1. Joseph E.Bowles, Foundation Analysis and Design, McGraw Hills Publishing Company. 73
2. 3. 4. 5.
Ninan P. Kurian, Modern Foundations, Tata McGraw Hills Publishing Company. Peck, Hansen & Thornburn, Foundation Engineering. W.C. Teng, Foundation Design. Hans. F. Winterkorn & Hsai Yang Fang, Foundation Engineering Hand Book, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company. QUANTITY SURVEYING VALUATION AND SPECIFICATIONS 2+2
C606
Module 1 & 2 (24 hrs.) Purpose of estimates different methodsPreparation of detailed estimates and abstracts for RCC Single storey buildings  R C. Footings, Columns – T Beams. Preparation of bar bending schedule for R. C. works such as beams and slabs. Module 3 (8 hrs.) Preparation of specification for common materials of construction and its items of works with reference to IS specifications. Cost of materials at source  different types of conveyance and rates head loads  preparation of conveyance statement  cost of materials at site. Module 4 (8 hours) Analysis of rates for earth works, mortars, RCC Works, plastering, brick works, stone works, laterite work, Pointing, form work, flooring  different types, wood works  reinforcement works. Module 5 (6 hours) Valuation  explanation of terms  material value, rate, years purchase  freehold and lease hold purchase  depreciation  methods of calculating depreciation  straight line method  constant percentage method, sinking fund method  and quantity survey method. Methods of valuation of land  comparative method  abstractive method. Methods of valuation of property  rental method  direct comparison with capital cost  valuation based on profit  valuation based on cost  development method  depreciation method. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Schedule of rates, KPWD PWD Data Book Dutta, Estimating and costing,S Dutta & Company, Lucknow Rangawala S.C., Estimating & costing, Charator Anand, Delhi I.S: 1200 1968  Methods of measurements of building and civil engineering.
74
MATERIAL TESTINGB LABORATORY  II C607 1. Tests on cement. a) Standard consistency, initial and final setting time. b) Compressive strength of mortar cubes. c) Specific gravity. d) Soundness. e) Fineness. 2. Tests on fresh concrete. a) Compaction factor test. b) Slump test. c) VeeBee test. d) Flow table test. e) Ball penetration test. 3. Tests on hardened concrete. a) Compressive strength of concrete cubes. b) Compressive strength of concrete cylinder. c) Splitting tensile strength. d) Modulus of elasticity. e) Flexural strength. 4. Tests on RC beam 5. Tests on aggregates. a) Aggregate crushing value for coarse aggregate. b) Specific gravity of coarse and fine aggregate. c) Bulking of fine aggregate. d) Bulk density and percentage voids of coarse aggregate. e) Grain size analysis of coarse and fine aggregate. 6. Tests on bricks. a) Compressive strength. b) Water absorption. c) Efflorescence. 7. Tests on roofing tiles. a) Transverse strength. b) Water absorption. 8. Tests on flooring tiles. a) Transverse strength. b) Water absorption. c) Abration tests. 9. Compression tests on Laterite blocks 10. Study of a) Strain measurements using electrical resistance strain gauges. b) Nondestructive test on concrete. Note All tests should be done as per relevant BIS. COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN  I C608 Module 1 History and overview of CAD popular CAD packages – advantages of CAD over manual drafting and design – hardware requirements – Configuration and installation of the CAD package. 0+3 0+3
75
Module 2 Creation of 2D drawings: Menu structures Menu bars, Screen menu, Pull down menu and Toolbars. Setting up units, limits, snap, grid, ortho mode etc. Controlling the drawing and drawing display – zoom, pan, regeneration, redraw. Drawing aids and tools  Osnap settings, point filters, inquiry commands, concept of UCS Modify tools – Erase, undo, redo, copy, move, rotate, offset, fillet, chamfer, array, scale, extend, break, explode, stretch, properties. Creation of blocks and symbols, using layers, color, linetype, ltscale etc. Dimensioning – Styles – Dim variables, scaling, formatting, annotation, QDIM adding text to drawing – multiline text, text styles, editing text. Working with multiple drawings, printing and plotting. Module 3 Creation of 3D drawings: Concept of 3D Drawings, working with views in 3D using view point, Realtime 3D rotation, concept of UCS in 3D, multiple active work planes. 3D modeling techniqueswire modeling, surface modeling, surface revolution, tabsurf, rulesurf, edgesurf, and 3D face, region modeling, solid modeling, fillets and chamfer, editing faces of 3D solid & shelling. Calculating mass properties and interference Creating perspective and sectional perspective views of 3D models. Shading and rendering  assigning material, landscapes, mapping, lights and scenes etc. Module 4 AutoLISP: Introduction of AutoLISP Data types, signs and symbol conventions, user defined functions, variables and functions. Writing your own commands. Module 5 1. Planning and designing of residential buildings (2D only) 2. Planning and designing of public buildings (2D only) 3. Term project – To prepare sketch design for Client and submission drawings for approval (Using National Building code provisions and Local Building rules) References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reference Manual of the package. National building code of India. Shah & Kale, Building Drawing, Tata McGraw Hill. Balgopal T.S. Prabhu, Building Drawing and Detailing, SPADES, Calicut. Sham Tickoo, Understanding AutoCAD 2002, Tata McGraw Hill. Sham Tickoo, AutoCAD 2002 with Applications, Tata McGraw Hill.
76
SEVENTH SEMESTER
77
DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES  II C701 2+2+0 Module 1 Prestressed concrete: I. S. Specifications  general principles  methods and systems of prestressing  losses of prestress  design of simply supported rectangular beams. Module 2 Retaining walls: TypesEarth pressure diagrams modes of failure design of cantilever and counter fort retaining walls ("L” not included) Module 3 Design of continuous beam: using coefficients given in IS: 456  design of circular beams uniformly loaded and supported on symmetrically placed columns. Module 4 Domes: membrane stresses in spherical and conical domes –design of domes with uniformly distributed and concentrated loads  openings  ring beams. Module 5 Water tanks: Types  design of ground supported and overhead water tanksrectangular and circular with flat bottomflexible and rigid joints – design of staging columns and bracings  IS code method. References 1. Relevant IS codes.(I.S 456, I.S 875,SP 16) 2. Park R and Pauloy T, Reinforced concrete structures, John Wiely & sons Inc. 3. Purushothaman P, Reinforced concrete structural elementsBehaviour, Analysis and Design, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing company Ltd. 4. Unnikrishna Pillai .S & D.Menon, Reinforced concrete design, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd. 5. Mallick S.K, Reinforced concrete, Oxford & IBH Publishing Company. 6. Varghese P.C, Limit state design of Reinforced concrete, Printice Hall of India Pvt Ltd. 7. Ashok .K. Jain, Reinforced concrete Limit state design, New Chand & Bose. 8. Krishna Raju, Prestressed Concrete, Oxford and I B H Publishing companyLtd. 9. Ramamruthum S., Design of Reinforced concrete structures, Dhanpat Rai Publishing co. 10. Punmia B.C, Reinforced concrete structures Vol II, Lakshmi Publications
78
WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING  II C702 3+1+0 Module 1 Dams: definitions  classifications  factors governing the selection of the type of dam and site of the dam investigation for a dam site. Gravity dam: forces acting  combination of forces for design modes of failure and stability requirements  elementary profile and practical profile  principal and shear stress  base width of elementary profile by stress and stability criteriastresses developed in the elementary profile  low dam and high dam  methodsof design of gravity darn (introduction only)  joints  keys water stops – opening and galleries and shaft  foundation treatment  brief description on type of spill ways. Module 2 Arch dams: types of arch dams  forces acting design of arch dams on thin cylinder theory introduction of other methods of design  thick cylinder theory  trial load analysis and elastic theory. Buttress dam  types  advantages and disadvantages. Earthen dam  types of earth dams design criteria  selection of a dam  phreatic line  stability analysis  different dam sections to suit available materials and foundation  rock fill dams materials of construction  impervious membrane type and earth core type (brief description only) Module 3 Diversion head works: function and component parts of diversion head works  effect of construction of weir on the regime of river causes of failure of weirs on permeable foundation. Bligh's creep theory and its limitations  Lane's weighted creep theory  Khosla's theory and design of impermeable foundation  design of vertical drop weir  silt control devices  silt excluder, silt ejector. Module 4 Design and drawings emphasizing the hydraulic aspects of the following structures: (1) Regulatorsdesign of head regulator and cross regulator. (2) Canal falls trapezoidal notch fall vertical drop fall sarda type and glacis fall. (3) Cross drainage works –aqueduct and syphon aqueduct. Module 5 Water power engineering: Classification of hydel plants runoff river plants, storage plants and pumped storage plants  low, medium and high head schemes  investigation and planning  fore bay – intakes  surge tanks  penstocks  powerhouse – selection of turbineScroll casing  draft tube tailrace definition of gross head  operating head  effective head  firm power –secondary powerload factor, capacity factor and utilization factor. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. P. M. Modi, Irrigationwater resourses and water power, Standard book house. S. K.Garg, Irrigation and hydraulic structures, S. K.Garg, Khanna publishers R. K. Linsley, M. A. Kholer, L. H. Paulhur, Hydrology for Engineerers, Tata Mc Graw Hill Bharat Singer, Fundamentals of Irrigation Engineering V. B. Priyani, Irrigation and water power Engg. , Charotar Book stall. B C Punmia, Pande B B Lal, Irrigation and water power engineering, Laxmi Publications. R.S.Varshney, S.C.Guptha, R.L.Guptha, Theory and design of irrigation Structures, Vol II, Nemchand &brothers, Roorkee.
79
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING  II 2+1+0 Module 1 Classification, alignment and surveys classification of highways  historical development of road construction, typical cross section of roads in urban and rural areas  definitions of various cross sectional elements  requirements and factors controlling alignment of roads, engineering surveys for highway location. Geometric design of highways: pavement surface characteristics, camber and width requirements, sight distances  over taking zone requirements and related problems. Design of horizontal alignment  speed  radius – super elevation  extra widening  transition curves, methods of attainment of super elevation  related problems.Design of vertical alignment  gradient and grade compensation  sight distance requirements on summit and valley curves simple problems on design of vertical alignment. Module 2 Traffic Engineering: traffic characteristicsvarious traffic studies and their applications . Traffic control devices Traffic signs, markings, traffic signals and traffic islands. Types of road intersection  kerb parking  principles of highway lighting  (Design of traffic signals not expected). Module 3 Highway materials: Road aggregates  their desirable properties and tests. Bituminous materials  properties and tests  sub grade soil  desirable properties. Highway construction and maintenance: Bituminous surface dressing and pavement construction cement concrete construction and joints in concrete pavements  types and causes of failures in flexible and rigid pavements, highway drainage. Pavement design: Basic difference between flexible and rigid pavements factors affecting their design  designof flexible pavementsCBR, GI & IRC methods. Module 4 Aircraft characteristics regional planning, selection of site for airport  factors to be considered. Imaginary surfaces  approach zone and turning zone, obstructions and zoning laws. Runway orientation and layout of runways: use of wind rose diagrams, basic runway length and corrections required. Methods of classification of airports. Stopway, clearway and taxiway design requirements. Module 5 Aprons: loading aprons  factors controlling size and number of gate positions  aircraft parking systems  holding apron. Facilities required in the terminal building  facilities for movement of baggage and passengers. Use of blast fences, typical airport layout  airport markings  marking of runways, taxiways etc. Airport lighting: lighting of runways approaches, taxiways and aprons. Air traffic control airways, navigational aids and landing aids. References 1. S. K.Khanna, C. E. G. Justo, Highway engineering, Nem Chand Publications. 2. L .R. Khadiyali, Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Publishers. 3. S.K. Khanna, M. G. Arora, S.S. Jain, Airport Planning & Design, Nem Chand Publishers 4. S. C. Rangwala, Airport Engg., Charotar Publishing Co. 5. Horenjeft, Robert & Francise Mc Keivy, Planning and design of airports, 80
C703
Mc Graw Hill 6. G V Rao, Principles of transportation and High way Engineering, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi. 7. Robert. G. Hennes, Martin Ekse, Fundamentals of Transportation engineering, Tata Mc Graw Hill. 8. Theodore M Matson, Wilbur.S.Smith, Frederick.W.Hurd, Traffic Engineering, Mc Graw Hill. ARCHITECTURE AND TOWN PLANNING C704 2+1+0 Module 1 Principles of architectural Design: Definition of architecture: factors influencing architectural development characteristic features of a stylehistorical examples. Creative principles: function/strength, aesthetics  deciding the space and form  detailed analysis of factors influencing the space  activity space, circulation space and tolerance space  Factors influencing form form perception  form expressive of functionform related with material and Structural system. Design principles  elements of composition  point, line, plane, texture, colour etc.  mass and scale, proportion, rhythm, balance and unity  iconic, canonic and analogic design consideration of comfort factors such as acoustics, lighting, ventilation and thermal aspects. Module 2 Functional planning of buildings: Occupancy classification of buildings'general requirements of site and building  building codes and rules  licencing of building works. Functional planning of building such as residential, institutional, public, commercial, industrial buildings  the process of identifying activity areas and linkages  drawing built diagrams  checking for circulation, ventilation, structural requirements and other constraints preparing sketch plan and working drawings  site plans. Kerala Municipal acts – planning regulations of corporations and developmental authorities – Kerala building bye laws. Module 3 Building services: Vertical Transportation: stairs  layout and details of different types of timber masonry, steel and concrete stairs  precast concrete stairs, elevators  types  traction, hydraulic operation  passenger, service goods elevators  design considerations of passenger elevators handling capacity  arrangement of lifts  positioning, escalators, features operation arrangement ramps. Ventilation and air conditioning  ventilation requirements natural and mechanical ventilation  air movement  cross ventilation  effect of orientation  radiation  evaporation, calculation of air conditioning load  summer and winter air conditioning. Plumbing services: typical details of water supply and sewage disposal arrangements for residence, hospitals and hostel buildings  standard requirements. Module 4 Town planning theory: Evolution of towns: problems of urban growth  beginning of planning acts ideal town  garden city movement  concept of new towns and conservative theory  comprehensive planning of towns Survey and analysis of town: fare maps  land use classification  transportation network  housing demographic arid social surveys  economic studies  environmental aspects. Theories of land use planning, transportation planning and housing development. Urban area lineation: urban influence zone  urban region concept of regional planning. Module 5 81
Planning Process: Concept of master plan: structural plan, detailed town planning scheme and act. Estimating future needs: planning standards for different land use allocation for commerce, industries, public amenities, open areas etc. planning standard for density distributionsdensity zone, planning standards for traffic networks  standards of roads and paths  provision for urban growthgrowth models. Plan implementation: town planning legislation and municipal acts  planning control development schemes  urban financing  land aquisitions  slum clearance schemes pollution control aspects. References 1. Banister Fletcher, History of World Architecture, Taraporevalas. 2. Broadbent, Theory of Architecture Design, John Wiley Sons 3. Gallien, Urban Pattern, D.Van Nostrand CD. Inc. 4. Nelson P. Low's, Planning to Modern City 5. Rangwala, Town Planning, Charotar Publishing House. 6. S.C Agarwala, Architecture and Town Planning, Dhanpatrai &sons. ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING  I C705 3+1+0 Module 1 Scope of Environmental Engg. population trends resource use  effect on the balance of ecosystem and natural resources. Water supply Engineering: Rural and Urban water supply systems  water requirements  consumption for various purposes, percapita demand, factors affecting percapita demand, variations in the rate of consumption, fire demand, design period, forecasting population. Quality of water: impurities in water and their importance  water borne diseases  sampling of water for tests  analysis of water  physical, chemical and bacteriological tests  MPN total coliforms, fecal coliforms by A1 medium. WHO and Indian standards for drinking water. Module 2 Collection of water: intakes  location, types, principles of design and construction. Transmission of water: free flow and pressure conduits  pipe materials  hydraulicsof flow  design of pipes  Indian standards for pipes. Pumps: Classification  rotary, reciprocating, centrifugal pumps, hand pumps submersible pumps selection of pumps  location of pumping stations. Distribution of water: pumping system, gravity system, pumping and storage system distribution reservoirs storage capacity of balancing reservoir, pipe grids, methods of analysis of network. Appurtenances in the distribution system  meters, valves, fire hydrants etc. pipe laying, testing & disinfections of mains. Detection and prevention of leaks in distribution systemcleaning and maintenance of distribution system, pipe corrosion and its control. Water supply of buildings: house connections  overhead tanks. Module 3 Introduction: Sanitation, sewage, sewer, and sewerage systems, sewage treatment and disposal. Sanitary Plumbing  Sanitary Fixtures, traps, soil pipe, anti siphonage pipes, systems of plumbing. House drainage: Principlesinspection chamber, ventilation, testing of drain, connection of house drain to street sewer. Sewerage systems – separate, combined and partially combined systems, situation for adoption, collection pattern. 82
Quantity of sewage: sanitary sewage  sources, factors affecting. Fluctuations in sewage flow, peak factor. Characteristics of sewage: physical, chemical and biological characteristics and analysis, sampling, population equivalent relative stabilitycycles of decay. Storm sewage: Factors affecting, intensity of rainfall, rational and empirical formula, time of concentration, intensity  duration curve and formula. Design of sewers: Flow formula, minimum and maximum velocity of flow, effect of variation of discharge on velocity, use of partial flow diagrams, design of circular sewers, longitudinal and cross section of sewer lines. Module 4 Construction of sewers: Materials of sewers, crown corrosion, sewer joints, planning, preparation of layout and construction of sewers and testing of sewers, cleaning and maintenance, ventilation of sewers. Sewer appurtenances: inlets, catch basins, clean outs, manholes, drop manholes, lamp holes/flushing tanks, grease and oil traps, inverted siphons, storm regulators. Sewage pumping: pumping stations  types of pumps  capacity of pumps  design of pumps. Natural methods of wastewater disposal: land disposal . Sewage farming  disposal by dilution  self purification of streams  oxygen sag curve  dilution into sea, comparison of disposal methods.
Module 5 Air pollution: Types of pollutants, sources, health effects, Monitoring. Noise pollution: Sources, effects. Solid waste management: Type and source of solid waste, characteristics, collection, transportation and processing Disposalcomposting, sanitary land fill, incineration References 1. Peavy, Rowe, Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, Mc Graw Hill International Editions. 2. 3. 4. 5. M.N. Rao & H.V.N. Rao, Air Pollution, Tata Mc Graw Hill Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. S. K. Garg, Environmental Engineering Vol. l & ll, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. B.C. Punmia, Water supply Engineering, Arihant Publications, Jodpur. B.C. Punmia, Waste water Engineering, Arihant Publications, Jodpur. OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  I) CMELRTA 7061 3+1+0 Module1: Classical optimization techniques Single variable optimization – Multivariable optimization with no constraints – Hessian matrix – Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier method Multivariable optimization with inequality constraints – KuhnTucker conditions. Module 2: Onedimensional unconstrained minimization Elimination methods – unrestricted search method – Fibonacci method – Interpolation methods – Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation methods. 83
Module 3: Unconstrained minimization Gradient of a function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hooke and Jeeve’s method. Module 4: Integer – Linear programming problem Gomory’s cutting plane method – Gomory’s method for all integer programming problems, mixed integer programming problems. Module 5: Network Techniques Shortest path model – Dijkstra`s Algorithm – Floyd`s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem – PRIM algorithm – Maximal Flow Problem algorithm. References 1. S.S. Rao, Optimization theory and application, New Age International P. Ltd. 2. A.D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla, Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering, Pearson Education Asia. 3. F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena, Richard D, Principles of Operations Research for Management, Irwin, INC. 4. H. A. Taha, Operation Research an introduction, Eastern Economy Edition. 5. R. Panneerselvam, Operations Research, PHI. THEORY OF PLATES (ELECTIVE  I) C7062 3+1+0 Module 1 Plates Introduction classification of plates thin plates and thick plates – small deflection theory and large deflection theory – basic concepts of two imensional theory of elasticity – fourth order differential equation for generalized bending problems (derivation in next module) Module 2 Pure bending of plates – slope and curvature of slightly bent plates – relation between bending moment and curvature in pure bending – stresses – variation– plates subjected to lateral loadings small deflection theory of thin plates – Love Kirchhoff’s theory – assumptions– derivation of fourth order differential equation Module 3 Solution techniques for fourth order differential equation – boundary conditions – simply supported, built in and free edge – Navier’s solution for simply supported rectangular plates – uniformly distributed and concentrated load. Module 4 Strain energy – pure bending of plate – bending of plates by lateral loads – Mindlin’s theory – assumptions  equilibrium equations – stress variations – comparative study with Love Kirchhoff’s equations. Module 5 Circular plates – polar coordinates – differential equation of symmetrical bending of laterally loaded circular plates uniformly loaded circular plates – circular plates loaded at the centre References 84
1. 2. 3. 4.
Lloyd Hamilton Donnell, Beams, plates and shells, Mc Graw Hill, NewYork. Timoshenko, W Krieger, Theory of plates and shells, Mc Graw Hill. Owen F Hughes, Ship structural design, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1983. William Muckle, Strength of ship structures, Edqward Arnold Ltd, London, 1967. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE (ELECTIVE  I)
C7063
3+1
Module 1 Introduction: Basic concept of prestressing  Advantages of prestressed concrete over reinforced concrete  materials for prestressed concrete and their characteristics. Uniform prestress distribution in prestressed concrete  nonuniform prestress distribution  moments of resistance. Module 2 Systems and methods of prestressing pretensioning systems  post tensioning systems  Thermo elastic prestressing  chemical prestressing.Behavior of prestressed concrete beams in flexure : load deflection curves for prestressed concrete beams  Interpreting bending tests  Microcracks and visible cracks  Failure. Module 3 Losses in prestress: purpose of assessing losses  counteracting elastic lossloss of prestress in case of nonuniform prestress  creep, shrinkage, relaxation and achorage losses  friction loss in prestress graphical solution of friction losses  overcoming friction losses. Module 4 Elastic design of sections for flexure: design of a simply supported beam with symmetrical sections of post tensioned and pretensioned type tension members. Module 5 Bearing and anchorage zone statically indeterminate structurecontinuous beams primary moment –secondary moment resultant moment – Concordant cable profileGyons theorem. References 1. 2. 3. 4. N. Krishna Raju, Prestressed Concrete, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd, New Dehi. S K Mallick, A P Gupta, Prestressed concrete, Oxford and IBI Series. R. H. Evans, Bennet E W, Prestressed concrete theory and design, Chapman and Hall, London. T. Y. Lin, Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures, Asia Publishing House. GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  I) C7064 3+1+0 Module 1 Necessity of soil improvementselection of improvement method mechanical stabilizationeffect on engineering propertiesdewateringwellpoint systemelectro osmosispreloading sand drainsmethods of installationvibroflotationstone columns. Module 2 85
Chemical stabilization cement stabilization factors affecting soil cement mixingadmixtures lime stabilizationeffect of lime on soil propertiesconstruction of lime stabilized basesbituminous stabilization thermal stabilization electrical stabilization. Module 3 Introduction to grouts and grouting basic functions – groutability ratio –classification of groutsproperties of grouts fluidity, bleeding potential, rigidity and thixotropy, strength and permeancegrouting applicationsseepage control in soil under dams and for cut off walls seepage control in rock under damsstabilization grouting for under pinning. Module 4 Earth Reinforcement mechanism and concept stress strain relationship of reinforced soildesign theories and stability analysis of retaining walltie back analysiscoherent gravity analysis application areas of earth reinforcement Module 5 Geotextiles: Soil reinforcement with geotextiles classification concepts geotextiles as separators, filters, and drainage mediadamage and durability of geotextiles References 1. M.J.Tholinson  Foundation design and construction Robert M.Koerner  Construction and Geotechnical methods in Foundation Engineering 2. C.J.F.P.Jones  Earth Reinforcement and Soil structures 3. R.A.Jewell  Soil Reinforcement with Geotextiles 4. Donald P.Coduto  Geotechnical Engineering, Principles and Practices Prentice Hall India CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE  I) C7065 3+1+0 Module 1 Concrete materials: cement manufacture  chemical composition hydration  types of cement tests for cement  setting and hardening  Aggregates  Classification  requirements  size  shape texture  Tests for aggregates  Alkali aggregate reaction  grading of aggregate  sieve analysis Flakiness index  Elongation Index Impact valueabrasion value Water  general requirements quality of water. Module 2 Fresh Concrete: Workability  factors affecting  measurement of workability  different tests for workability  segregation  bleeding  process of manufacture of concrete  Batching  mixing transportation  compaction  curing of concrete  curing methods  admixtures in concrete  air entraining agents  Accelerators – Retarders workability agents  Damp proofing agents Miscellaneous admixtures  quality control. Module 3 Elastic properties of Concrete  factors affecting modulus of elasticity  Strength of concrete: w/c ratio  gel/space ratio  Gain of strength with age.  accelerated curing tests  maturity concept of concrete  effect of maximum size of aggregate on strength  relation between compressive and tensile strength  revibration  high speed slurry mixing  creep  shrinkage  factors affecting. 86
Module 4 Durability of concrete:  sulphate attack  methods of controlling sulphate attack. Durability of concrete in sea water  action of organic acids, mineral oils, sugar etc. on hard concrete  thermal properties of concrete  Fire resistance cracks in concrete–Remedies, Testing of Hardened concrete, flexural strength  comparison of cuube test and cylinder test  Indirect tension test methods concrete mix design  IS methods  ACI methods  mean strength  characteristic compressive strength  Non distructive testing of concrete. Module 5 Special aggregates: light weight  artificial  natural  special concrete  no  fine concrete high density concrete  Sulphur infilterated concrete  fibre reinforced concrete  polymer concrete polymer impregnated concrete  polymer cement concrete  properties of polymer concrete special concreting methods  cold Weather concreting, hot weather concreting  Ferrocement. References 1. Krishna Raju N, Concrete Technology 2. A.M. Neville, Properties of concrete 3. M.S. Shetty, Concrete Technology TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVEI) 3+1+0
C7066
Module 1 Traffic management  scope of traffic management measures  restrictions to turning movements one way streets  tidal flow operation  regulation of traffic  Need and scope of traffic regulationsMotor Vechicle Act  Speed limit at different locations regualtion of the vechicle  regulations concerning the driver rules of the road enforcement. Module 2 Highway capacity: Its importance in transportation studies  basic, possible and practical capacity determination of theoretical maximum capacity passenger car units  level of service  concept in HC manual  factors affecting level of service. Module 3 Design of Intersection: Design of at grade & grade seperated intersection  rotary intersection capacity of rotary intersection  traffic signals  design of fixed timesignal  pretimed signalised intersection  performance  Websters approach for the design. Module 4 Traffic Safety: causes of road accidents  collection of accident data  influence of road, the vehicle .the driver, the weather and other factors on road accident  preventive measures. Module 5 Traffic Flow: theory of traffic flow  scope  definition and basic diagrams of traffic flow basic concepts of light hill  Whitham's theory  Car 'following theory and queuing 87
References 1. Khadiyali L.R. Traffic Engineering and Transport planning, Khanna Tech Publishers 2. Khanna O.P and Jesto C.G; Highway Engineering, Nem Chand Publishers 3. Martin, Whol, Traffic system Analysis for Engineers 4. Donald Drew, Traffic Flow Theory OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
C7067
Module 1 Introduction to OOP: Basic concepts objectsclassesdata abstractioninheritancepolymorphismdynamic bindingvirtual functionsadvantages of OPP over procedure oriented programmingobject oriented languages. Introduction to C++  C++ character set  C++ tokensdata types constants and variables  declaration of variables  operators, expression, and statementstype compatibility  type casting l/O operators <<and >>) cascading of 1/0 operators. Module 2 Control flow and iterative statements standard inputoutput streams arrays: one dimension arraymultidimensional array array Initialization. Structures: definitionreferencing structure elements. Function prototypesargument data typesreturning values and their types – scope  rules of functions and variables – built  in functions. Module 3 Classes and Objects: Class declaration  data member functions private and public members class function definition member function definition  private and public member functions methods creating objects  accessing class data membersaccessing member functions  constructors and destructors – declaration, definition and use. Module 4 Advanced features: Dynamic memory allocationpointers –new and delete operatorspointer variables pointers to objectsaccessing member functionsclasses with pointers to objects accessing member functions  classes with pointerscopy constructorstatic membersfriend classesfriend functionsoperator overloading File handling in C++: File pointers Fstream classes open (), close () read (), write () functionsdetecting end of file. Module 5 Polymorphism and Inheritance: Function overloadingbase class derived classclass conversionvisibility modesprivate, public and protected memberssingle inheritance privately derived and publicly derived  making protected member inheritable  access controlvirtual functionsdynamic binding abstract classesconcept of multiple inheritance. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Stanely, Lipman, C++ primer Balaguruswammy, Object Oriented Programming with C++, Tata Mc Graw Hill Robert Lafore, Turbo C++ Gordenkeith, Data Abstraction and OOP in C++ 88
5. Strostraup, C++ Programming Language 6. David Parsons, Object Oriented Programming with C++, B P B Publications 7. Y.Kanetkar, Let Us C++, BPB Publications. OPEN CHANNEL AND COASTAL HYDRAULICS (ELECTIVE  1) 3+1+0
C7068
Module 1 Parameters of open channel flow  uniform and non uniform flow normal depth  conveyance friction formula  specific energy  specific force  diagram  critical depth  application to problems. Critical flow computation  section factor  hydraulic exponent for critical flow computation and its use for trapezoidal channel. Module 2 Hydraulic jump  sequent depths  dimensionless equation of the jump  loss of head  the jump at the feet of a spillway  criteria for the formation of a jump  use of jump as an energy disspiator. Control of jump by sills  stilling basins. Module 3 Nonuniform flow  friction slope  differential equation of nonuniform flow  the 12 type of surface profiles  the point of control  computation by Bresse's method and the simplified step method. Module 4 Water waves  classification into periodic progressive, periodic oscillatory, oscillatory and stationary waves  ocean waves  wave period  wave length and celerity. General expression for the celerity of deep Water  gravity wave and shallow water gravity wave  determination of the wave length and celerity for any water depth given the deep water wave amount as wave energy (no proof). Wave deformation  transformation of waves on a slope (description only) reflection of waves at a vertical sea wall. Clapotis  wave refraction  breaking of waves (description only). Module 5 Wind generated waves  wave forecasting  significant wave height  breakwaters  different types. Coastal erosion with special reference to the Kerala Coast  shore protection measures  sea walls tetrapods. groynes and'beach nourishment. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.S.M.Woodword, C.J.Posey, Hydraulic of Steady Flow in Open Channels F. N. Henderson, Open Channel Flow A. I. Ippen, Estuary and Coast line Hydrodynamics K. E. R. I. Peechi, Coastal Engineering Publications V. T. Chow, Open Channel hydraulics, Mc Graw Hill Robert .M. Sorensen, Basic coastal engineering, John Willy & Sons AIR POLLUTION CONTROL (ELECTIVE  1) C 7069 Module 1 89 3+1+0
Introduction  Significance of air pollution studies, factors that contribute to air pollution possibilities to air pollution abatemant  air pollution legislation  Techno  administrative aspects of air pollution  Emission and noise standards of Kerala State Pollution Control board. Module 2 Gaseous pollutantssource, chemistry, adverse effects on plants, animals and human beings, properties  tolerance levels  carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, aldehydes, hydrocarbons compounds of sulphur, compounds of Nitrogen, Oxidants, Hydrogen fluoride  Control of gaseous pollutants  Automobile pollution control. Module 3 Particulates in the air  source, nature and adverse effects  control of particulates  settling, filtration, collection in fluids, electrostatic precipitation, conversion to harmless and useful products. Meteorology related to atmosphere  pressure, temperature, lapse rates  humidity  condensation wind direction and velocity. Effects of meteorological parameters on transport and diffussion. Atmospheric Electricity. Module 4 Optics of the atmosphere  Effects of air pollutants on atmospheric visibility  methods of measurement of visibility  Introduction to noise pollution. Photochemical reactions of the atmosphere. Module 5 Purpose and principles of measurement of (1) High volume sampler (2) Exhaust gas analyser (petrol and diesel) (3) Stack sampler (4) Sound level meter  industrial hygiene and in plant safety to workers. References 1. Henry C Perkins, Air pollution, Mc Graw Hill Pvt Ltd, NewDelhi. Arthur C Stern, Air pollution, Vol I, II, III, IV, V, Academic Press, NewYork. 3. Noel De Nevers, Air pollution control Engineering, Mc Graw Hill International Edition, Mc Graw Hill Inc, New Delhi. 4. M. N. Rao, H V N Rao, Air pollution, Tata Mc Graw Hill Pvt Ltd, NewDelhi.
90
C70610
REMOTE SENSING AND ITS APPLICATIONS (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
Module 1 Principles and concepts: Introduction and definition of remote sensing terminology principles and methods of remote sensing electromagnetic radiation and spectrum radiation sourcesinterferenceatmospheric effects on remote sensing atmospheric window –energy interaction with surface features different types of platforms sensors and their characteristicsorbital parameters of a satellite multi concepts in remote sensing. Module 2 Aerial photogrammetry: Definition types of photographs geometry of photographs – parallax pair of photographs height determination flight planning stereoscopy. Module 3 Interpretation of images: Aerial photo interpretation – basic elements techniques of photo interpretation application of aerial photo interpretation photographs versus maps interpretation of satellite images ground truth collection and interpretation and verification advantages of multi date and multi band images. Module 4 Imagery: Landsat imagery thermal infrared imagery Radar imagery digital image processingcomparison with image types applications of satellite imagery merits limitationscomparison with aerial photographs. Module 5 Applications: Applications in water resources management land use mapping and monitoring soil sciences geology agriculture forestry  oceanography. References 1. Thomas M. Lillesand & Raiph W. Kiefer, “Remote sensing and image interpretation”, John Wiley Sons. 2. Floyd F. Sabins, “Remote sensing principles and interpretation”, Freeman and company. 3. Campbell J. B, “Introduction to remote sensing”, The Guilford press, London. 4. Curran P.J., “Principles of remote sensing”, Longman, London. 5. Engmen E.T and Gurnay R. J.,”Remote sensing in hydrology”, Chapman and Hall. 6. Wolf P.R., “Elements of photogrammetry”, McGraw Hills.
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING LAB C707 TEST ON SOIL 1.Califormia bearing ratio method. 91 0+0+3
TEST ON BITUMEN 2. Softeningpoint of Bitumen 3. Ductility test on Bitumen 4. Specific gravity of Bitumen 5. Flash and fire point test 6. Stripping value test 7. Viscosity using Viscometer TESTS ON ROAD AGGREGATES 8. Aggregate crushing value test 9. Impact value test 10. Specific gravity test 11. Shape tests  Flakiness index and elongation index 12. Los angles abrasion test 13. Bulk density, specific gravity, void ratio and porosity of coarse aggregate, water absorbtion. TESTS ON MIXES 14. Marshell stability value 15. Determination of bitumen content by bitumen extractor. COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN II C708 0+0+3 Module I and II • INTRODUCTION Overview and the Environment of STAADIII Package. • GENERAL DESCRIPTION Type of structure, Unit systems, structure geometry and Coordinate systems, global co ordinate system, Local coordinate systems • STAAD III Commands Using Edit InputCommand FormatsText Input. • STAAD PRE Graphical Input Generation“Concurrent” VerificationsLibrary Geometry Generation – Dimensioning. • STAAD POST – Graphical Post Processing – Animation – Icons – Isometric View – ZoomingResults of Analysis & Design – Query reports. • LOAD – Member Load, Element Load, Joint Load, Floor Load, Self weight Command, Load case no, Load Combination .Load Generation for Wind Load, Seismic Load and Moving Load • FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS & Dynamic Analysis. • DESIGN for Concrete and Steel Structures using IS: 456 and IS 800 respectively. • STAAD INTDES – Interactive Design Series for slabs, retaining walls and footings. Note The student has to practice the above topics by working out problems in 1. 2. 3. Analysis and design of steel trusses, Steel and RCC framed structures. Analysis and design of multistoried framed structures. Analysis and design of RCC and steel water tanks. 92
Module III & IV Project management using CPM/PERT Software (Microsoft Project /PRIMAVERA software) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Note The student has to practice the above topics by doing Project Management for Turn key projects related to Civil Engineering applications. References 1. STAAD III Reference Manual 2. MS Project/PRIMAVERA Reference Manual Practice on the GUI of the software and Input of Date Practice on Creating Bar Charts/Ghant charts Practice on creating CPM/PERT charts and finding out critical path. Practice on resource allocation and leveling of resources. Practice on Project Monitoring (Cost &Time) Plotting and printing of various charts and project
93
EIGHTH SEMESTER
94
ADVANCED STRUCTURAL DESIGN C801 2+2+0 Module 1 Road bridges: I. R. C. Specifications  slab bridges TBeam bridges  box culvert  bearings. Module 2 Shell structures: General principles for membrane theory for symmetrical uniformly distributed load  design of a simply supported single barrel cylindrical shell for membrane stresses  beam method. Folded plates: general principles  structural behaviour of plates (design not required) Module 3 Industrial buildings: roof loads  analysis and design of trusses  design of purlins  design of bracing – supporting system. Module 4 Design of plate girders and gantry girders  riveted and welded compound sections. Module 5 Steel bridges:  I. S. Specifications  design of highway and railway bridges of plate girder type. References I. R. C. Bridge code, Indian Railway Bridge code, I. S. 456, I. S Victor J.D., Design of Concrete Bridges, Oxford& I B H Publishing Company, New Delhi. Krishna Raju, Advanced Design of Concrete Structures, Oxford& I B H Publishing Company, New Delhi. Ramchandra, Design of Steel Structures. Vol II, Standard Book House, Delhi. Ramaswamy G.S., Design and Construction of Concrete Shell Roofs, Mc Graw Hills FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS C802 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to FEMHistorical developmentIdealization of actual structuresMathematical modelGeneral procedure of FEADisplacement approach. Solution techniques Gauss Elimination – Frontal solver (concepts only) Module 2 Finite element analysis Energy principles Principle of Stationary Potential EnergyComplementary Energy  Variational approach Stable Unstable Neutral equilibriumVirtual workPrinciple of virtual forces – Principle of virtual displacements. Module 3 Shape functionsLagrangian and Hermition Interpolation – Polynomials – General coordinatesArea coordinatesCompatibility –C0 and C1 elementsconvergence criteria conforming & nonconforming elements – Patch test
95
Module 4 Stiffness matrixBar elementBeam elementTriangular elements  Constant Strain TriangleLinear Strain Triangle Isoparametric elementsNumerical Integration  Gauss Quadrature. Module 5 General plate bending elements Plate bending theory – Kirchhoff’s theory – Mindlin’s theory – Introduction to locking problems preventive measures – reduced integration – selective integration. Axysymmetric elements Introduction to shell elements References 1. O C Zienkiewicz,.Finite Element Method, fourth Edition,McGraw Hill, 2. R.D.Cook, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, John Wiley &Sons. 3. Stephen P.Timoshenko& Krieger, S.W., Theory of Plates and Shells, McGraw Hill. 4. C.S.Krishnamoorthy, Finite Element Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill .New Delhi, 1987. 5. S.Rajasekharan, Finite Element Analysis, Wheeler Publishing Co., &Sons.1993. 6. T.Kant, Finite Element Methods in Computational Mechanics, Pergamons Press. 7. K.J.Bathe, Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis, Prentice Hall, 8. Mukhopadhyay M., Matrix Finite Element Computer and Structural Analysis, Oxford &IBH, 1984. 9. Irving H.Shames, Energy &Finite Element Methods in Structural Mechanics. 10. Desai C.S.&Abel J.F., Introduction to Finite Element Methods, East West Press. BUILDING TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT 3+1+0
C803
Module 1 Concrete Mix Design: General concepts. BIS method of mix design, American standards of mix design, ISmethod of mix design, Durability concepts in mix design  Requirements and tests of materials required for mix design.Fibre reinforced concrete High performance concrete. Form work. General arrangements – general requirements – common faults – materials for form work – form work arrangements – form work design – loads on forms – design procedure – form work vibration for compaction of concrete – stripping time and shoring. Module 2 Prefabricated construction: Advantages, foundation units, wall panels, frames for opening, walls– units for roofs and floors – low cost roof systems. Hollow concrete blocks, Ferro cement – use and application – modular coordination – method of production – flow line method – station method – manufacturing process for structural units. Codification and Standerdisation Value analysis: Various methods and techniques. Module 3 Construction company organization: Different types of organizational set up – construction team – objectives of civil engineering management – duties and responsibilities of a civil engineer – functions of construction management. Technical planning. Site organization: Organization of labour, resources, materials, method of execution of the project – inspection and quality control safety in construction.
96
Module 4 Materials Management: Functions of materials management – inventory control techniques. Construction contracts: Item rate contract – Lumpsum contract –Labour contract – Negotiated contract – Global contract – Percentage contract – Cost plus percentage contract Cost plus fixed fee contract Cost plus fluctuating fee contract – Target contract – All in contract. Module 5 Claims manual for a construction organization: Law of contract  Extra work and deviation order – claims – owner’s claim – sub contractor’s claim – disputes and arbitration – consequences of mistake in contracts – terms and conditions of contract – contract documents – earnest money – security deposit – warranty period – contract signed under coercion – contract signed by minors, insane or drunken persons – authority to agree and find, validity of an oral agreement – conditions and warranties – express terms and implied terms – voidable contracts and their performance – illegal and voidable contracts – liability for tort in contract litigation – breach of contract and remedies – discharge of contract – equity, privity of contract – transfer of contractual rights and obligations. References 1. M .S Shetty, concrete technology, S. Chand & Co. 2. S. P Arora, Building constructions, Dhanpat Rai & sons, New Delhi. 3. B. L Gupta, Amit Gupta, Construction Management and accounts, standard publishers and Distributions. 4. Construction Management and accounts – V .N Vazirani. 5. National Building code of India – Indian standards. 6. Construction Engineering & Management, S. Seetharaman, Umesh 7. Publications, Delhi.
97
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING  II C804 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: Storage of water  effect of storage on quality of water, general layout of treatment plant  surface water and ground water. Aeration, purpose of aeration. Sedimentation  plain sedimentation, theory of sedimentation, continuous flow sedimentation tanks. Chemically aided sedimentation  necessity, theory of coagulation and flocculation  generally used coagulants, dosage, feeding, mixing devices, clariflocculators, design of flash mixers clarifiers and clarifloculators. Module 2 Filtration  Theory of filtration, filter media  sand for filtration. Classification of filters  design, construction, control, operation and maintenance of rapid sand filters and slow sand filters. pressure filters, dual media & multimedia filters.Disinfection: requirements of a good disinfectant, chlorination  action, application, and dosage chlorine demand, pre chlorination, post chlorination, double chlorination, super chlorination, breakpoint chlorination, chloramination. Other disinfectants. Miscellaneous treatment methods: color, odour and taste removal, iron and manganese removal, deflouridation, removal of hardness, desalination. Module 3 Introduction: Objectives of waste water treatment  Effluent standards, KSPCB Standards, BIS Standards. Layout of conventional treatment plant  preliminary, primary, secondary and tertiary treatments in general. Preliminary process: screens  types of screens, design, disposal of' screenings; comminutors, grit chamber  function, design, construction and operation, disposal of grit , detritus tank, skimming tank function, design and operation, disposal of skimmings Sedimentation: Theory of sewage sedimentation  design, construction and operation, rectangular and circular tanks, disposal of sludge. Module 4 Biological process: principle and theory of biological treatment. Sewage filtration: Trickling filters design, construction and operation. Activated sludge process: Design, construction and operation of conventional and extended aeration, aeration methods. Miscellaneous methods Stabilization ponds, Oxidation ditch, Aerated lagoons, rotating biological contactors; disinfection of sewage effluents. Module 5 Sludge treatment and disposal: quantity of sludge, characteristics of sludge, sludge thickening, digestion, conditioning and disposal, design of sludge digesters only. Septic Tanks: Design (as per Ministry of urban development) construction, disposal of effluents, cleaning of tanks, Imhoff tanks. Sewage treatment by high rate anaerobic methods: Anaerobic digestion, suspended growth, contact process, UASB, attached growth, filters, expanded bed  only basics (Ref. Wastewater Engineering by Metcalf and Eddy  3rd Edn.)
References 1. 2. 3. 4. Peavy, Rowe, Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, Mc Graw Hill International Editions. S. K. Garg, Environmental Engineering Vol. l & ll, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. B.C. Punmia, Water supply Engineering, Arihant Publications, Jodpur. B.C. Punmia, Waste water Engineering, Arihant Publications, Jodpur. 98
5. Metcalf & Eddy, Waste water Engg. 3rd Edn., Mc Graw Hill International Editions. 6. Mark J Hammer, Water and waste water technology, John Wiley and sons, Inc. ADVANCED MATHEMATICS (ELECTIVE  II) CMELRT 8051 3+1+0 Module 1 Green’s Function Heavisides, unit step function – Derivative of unit step function – Dirac delta function – properties of delta function – Derivatives of delta function – testing functions – symbolic function – symbolic derivatives – inverse of differential operator – Green’s function – initial value problems – boundary value problems – simple cases only Module 2 Integral Equations Definition of Volterra and Fredholm Integral equations – conversion of a linear differential equation into an integral equation – conversion of boundary value problem into an integral equation using Green’s function – solution of Fredhlom integral equation with separable Kernels – Integral equations of convolution type – Neumann series solution. Module 3 Gamma, Beta functions Gamma function, Beta function – Relation between them – their transformations – use of them in the evaluation certain integrals – Dirichlet’s integral – Liouville’s extension of Dirichlet’s theorem – Elliptic integral – Error function. Module 4 Power Series solution of differential equation The power series method – Legendre’s Equation – Legendre’s polynomial – Rodrigues formula – generating function – Bessel’s equation – Bessel’s function of the first kind – Orthogonality of Legendre’s Polynomials and Bessel’s functions. Module 5 Numerical solution of partial differential equations. Classification of second order equations Finite difference approximations to partial derivatives – solution of Laplace and Poisson’s equations by finite difference method – solution of one dimensional heat equation by Crank – Nicolson method – solution one dimensional wave equation. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ram P.Kanwal, Linear Integral Equation, Academic Press, New York. Allen C.Pipkin, Springer, A Course on Integral Equations, Verlag. H.K.Dass, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, S.Chand. Michael D.Greenberge, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Pearson Edn. Asia. B.S.Grewal, Numrical methods in Engg.&science, Khanna Publishers. R.F. Hoskins, Generalized functions, John Wiley and Sons. 7. Bernard Friedman, Principles and Techniques of Applied Mathematics, John Wiley and sons 8. James P.Keener, Principles of Applied Mathematics, Addison Wesley. 9. P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy Numerical methods, S.Chand & co. THEORY OF SHELLS (ELECTIVE  II) C8052 99 3+1+0
Module 1 Structural behaviour of shellsclassification of shellstranslational and rotational shellsruled surfacesmethods of generating the surface of different shellshyperbolic paraboloidelliptic paraboloidconoidGaussian curvaturesynclastic and anticlastic surfaces. Module 2 Classical theories of shellsthin shellthick shellsmall deflection theorystress resultants and deformations of shells without bending. Module 3 Cylindrical shellsmembrane theory of cylindrical shellsfree body diagram of a cylindrical shell elementformulation of equilibrium equation. Module 4 Bending theory of cylindrical shellsstresses and deformation of circular cylindrical shellspressure vesselscylindrical shells with uniform internal pressurefree body diagram of a differential cylindrical shell element formulation of equilibrium equation. Module 5 Finite element application on cylindrical shellsintroduction to shell elementsflat elementsaxisymmetric elements degenerated elementsgeneral shell element. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Timoshenko, W Krieger, Theory of plates and shells, Mc Graw Hill. Gol’oenveizen, Theory of elastic thin shells, Pergaman Press, 1961. J Ramachandran, Thin shells theory and problems, Universities press. Novoshilov V V,Theory of thin elastic shells, P Noordoff, Groningen,1959. Baker E H, Kovalesky and Flrish, Structural analysis of shells, Mc Graw Hill, New York. Kraus H, Thin elastic shells, Wiley, New York, 1967. Ramaswamy G S, Design and construction of concrete shell roofs, Mc Graw Hill, New York. Wilhelm Flugge, Stresses in shells, Springs, Verlog, Berlin.
100
C8053
ADVANCED STEEL STRUCTURES (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0
Module 1 Microwave and Transmission Towers: Introduction  Loads  Analysis of Microwave & Transmission towers  Design of members  Design of foundation  Design of Connections Application using STAAD, SAP. Module 2 PreEngineered Metal Buildings: Introduction  Loads  Metal cladding  Design of cold formed secondary framing  Optimization design of main frames  Wind bracing  Frame connections (haunch, ridge)  Column base connections (fixed, pinned)  Application using STAAD, STRAP. Module 3 Multistorey Buildings: Introduction  Anatomy of structure  Loads  Design of columns  Design of composite beams  Design of composite floor  Bracings – Connections  Application using STAAD, STRAP. Module 4 Space Frames: Introduction  Structural types  Loads  Design of single layer barrel vault  Design of single layer dome  Design of double layer flat  Design of node connectors  Application using STAAD, SAP. Module 5 Construction: Tolerances: Fabrication tolerances  Erection tolerances, Fabrication: Economy Shop activities  Quality management, Erection: Method statement  programme – Machineries, Fire Protection: Regulations  Structural performance  Methods of protection, Corrosion Resistance: Corrosion process  Effect of environment  Protection methods. References 1. Ram Chandra, Design of Steel Structures, Vol. II, Standard Book House, New Delhi. 2. Alexander Newman, Metal Building Systems: Design and Specifications, 3. Graham W. Owens, Peter R. Knowles, Steel Designers Manual, Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford, ISBN 0632038810. 4. Ramamrutham S., Design of Steel Structures, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2001, ISBN 8187433361. 5. Ramaswamy G. S., Suresh G. R., Analysis, Design and Construction of Steel Space frames, Thomas Telford Ltd., 2002, ISBN 0727730142. 6. Edwin H. Gaylord, Jr., Charles N. Gaylord, Design of Steel Structures, McGrawHill, Inc., Singapore, ISBN 0071126236. 7. IS: 800  1984, Use of Structural Steel in General Building Construction, BIS, New Delhi. 8. IS: 802, Use of Structural Steel in Overhead Transmission Line Towers, BIS, New Delhi. 9. IS: 875  1987, Code of practice for Design Loads (Parts I, II & III), BIS, New Delhi. 10. IS: 806, Code of practice for use of Steel Tubes in General Building Construction, BIS, New Delhi. 11. IS: 1161, Specification for Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes, BIS, New Delhi. HIGHWAY AND AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0 101
C8054
Module 1 Pavement types: stress distribution in pavements  theoretical subgrade conditions and traffic loadings Basic difference between flexible and rigid pavements  design factors  wheel load equivalent single wheel load  repetition of loads  elastic modulii  climatic variations. Module 2 Design of flexible pavements: group index method  CBR method  IRC recommendations  Me Load method  Burmister's layer theory. Module 3 Design of rigid pavements: radius of relative stiffness  critical load positions  Westergaard's stress equation  Bradley's stress coefficients  design charts. Module 4 Temperature stresses in concrete pavements: Westergaard's concept  wrapping stress  functional stress  combination of stresses. Design of joints in concrete pavements: expansion joints  construction joints  design of dowel bars tie bars  IRC recommendation. Module 5 Evaluation of pavement condition: pavement instrumentation  types of pavement distress roughness and skid resistance. Environmental influence and effects pavements maintenance and overlays. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Bindra B.S, Highway Engineering, Danpat Rai and Sons. H.J.Yoder, Principles of Pavement Design, John wiley and sons Khanna O.P, Justo C.G., Highway Engineering, Nem Chand Publishers IRC Standard specifications for Construction of Flexible and rigid pavements ADVANCED FOUNDATION DESIGN (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0
C8055
Module 1 Machine foundations: basic theory of vibrationsfree and forced vibration of single degree of freedom with and without dampingtwo degrees of freedom with and without dampingdynamic soil propertiesmass spring model and constants elastic half space approachdetermination of dynamic soil constants in laboratory and field based on IS code provisions. Modes of vibration of block foundation –natural frequency of foundation of soil system by Barkan’s approachmethods of analysisBarkan’s method. Vertical translations, sliding, rocking, yawing (IS code method) Module 2 Design of machine foundations: Static and dynamic design criteriapermissible amplitude of vibrations for different types of machines. Foundations for reciprocating machines design criteriacalculation of induced forces and moments multi cylinder enginesFoundations subjected to impact type of forces (hammer)design datadesign criteriavibration isolation. 102
Module 3 Sheet Pile walls and Cofferdams: types and uses of sheet pilesdesign of cantilever sheet pile walls in granular and cohesive soilsanchored bulkheadfree earth support and fixed earth support methodcoffer damsuses braced and cellular cofferdams. Module 4 Special Foundations: Foundation for special structures such as water tanks, silos, cooling towers, guyed structures, ground storage tanks, chimneys, telecommunication towers, transmission line towersfoundation for under ground conduits foundation for coastal and offshore structuresprestressed foundations. Shell Foundationsstructural form and efficiencydifferent types. Module 5 Foundations in Special soils: Foundation in expansive soil, soft and compressible soils, problems associated with foundation installation ground water lowering and drainage shoring and underpinningdifferent methodsdamage and vibrations due to constructional operations References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Bowles.J.E, Foundation Analysis and DesignMc Graw Hill Publishing Company. N.P.Kurian, Modern foundations Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing company Srinivasulu P, Vaidyanathan C.V Handbook of Machine foundations IS 2974part I toV. IS 5249 INDUSTRIAL WASTE ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0
C8056
Module 1 Introduction: Environmental pollution  Magnitude of the industrial waste problem in India  damage caused by industrial waste pollution. Effect of industrial wastes on streams and sewerage systems: Computation of organic waste loads on streams  Streeter phelps, Churchill and Thomas methods.
Module 2 Stream sampling: stream protection measures  effluent and stream standards. Characteristics of industrial wastes: physical, chemical and biological. retreatment of industrial wastes: waste volume reduction, waste strength reduction  neutralization, equalization and proportioning. Module 3 Theories of treatments processes: removal of suspended solids by sedimentation and flotation, removal of colloidal solids by coagulation  removal of inorganic solids by evaporation & ion exchange. Removal of organic solids: lagooning, activated sludge treatment  extended aeration, step aeration, trickling filters. High rate anaerobic treatment  up flow and down flow filters; up flow anaerobic sludge blanket reactor  Disposal of sludge solids. Joint treatment of treated and untreated wastes with domestic sewage  discharge of raw and treated wastes to streams.
103
Module 4 Major industrial Wastes and their treatment: pulp and paper industry  oil refinery  textile industry tannery. Module 5 Treatment of industrial waste: canning  dairy  sugar  distillery. References 1. M Narayana Rao, Waste water treatment, Rational methods of design and Industrial practice, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd, Bombay. 2. Nelson Leonard Nemerow, Theories and practices of industrial waste treatment, AddisonWesley Publishing Co., Inc. 3. C Fred Gurnham, Principles of industrial waste treatment, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York. 4. W Wesley Eckenfelder Jr., Industrial water pollution control, International Edition, Mc Graw Hill Inc, New Delhi. 5. Hardam Singh, Industrial Waste water management Hand Book, Mc Graw Hill, NewDelhi.
ADVANCED HYDROLOGY (ELECTIVE  II) C8057 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: Hydrologic cyclehistory of hydrology  application in engineering: water resources in the world  water resources in India. Weather and hydrology: Thermal circulation  effects of earth's rotation  effect of' land and water distribution  migratory systems  fronts  measurement of temperatures  Lapse rate of temperatures  geographic distribution of temperatures  time variations of temperatures  properties of water vapour Measurement of humidity  geographic distributions of humidity  time variations in humiditygeographic variations of wind  time variations of wind scanning and predicting weather. Module 2 Precipitation: types of precipitation  measurement of precipitation recording gauges  automatic gauges radars estimation of missing data and adjustment of records  mean areal depth of precipitation rain gauge network design principlesdepth area duration curves  Hectograph and mass curve of rainfall  analysis of rainfall data  moving average curves  design storms  probable maximum precipitation curves snowfall and measurement. Determination of snowmelt. Water Losses:.Evaporationevaporation pans – evapometre, control of' reservoir evaporation  soil evaporation  transpiration  estimation of evapo transpiration  infiltration  infiltration curves determination of infiltration irifiltration indices  water shed leakage  water balance. Module 3 Runoff: Catchment characteristics  classification of streams  factors affectingrun off, run off estimation by empirical formulae, curves infiltration method, rational method, overland flow hydrograph and unit hydrograph, method. Hydrographs: Separation of stream, flow components hydrograph separation  unit hydrograph  assumption  derivations of unit hydrograph  unit hydrograph of complex storms  instantaneous unit hydrograph  synthetic unit hydrograph. . 104
Module 4 Floods: Definition of standard project flood  maximum probable flood  probable maximum precipitation and design flood  estimation of peak floodflood control. Measures  flood forecasting techniques flood routing  analytical and graphical methods of flood routing. Sedimentation: The erosion process  factors controlling erosion  suspended load, bed load  estimation of sediment load (basic principles and statement of important.equations only) measurement of sediment load reservoir sedimentation  control of reservoir sedimentation. Module 5 Probability analysis of hydrological data: mean, median, mode, meandeviation, standard deviation, variances and skewness of data normal, gamma, poisons, log normal and pears and type III distributions  flood, frequency by fuller's, Gumbel's, Powel and Ven Te chow methods. Mathematical models in hydrology: definition of stochastic models, deterministic modelsconceptual models and empirical models optimisation of models and efficiency of models  method of determining 1UH by the scurve hydrograph, convolution integral and conceptual models  synthetic stream flow  flow at ungauged sites  by multiple regression  reservoir mass curve  flood forecasting. References 1. H. M.Reghunath, Hydrology, Wiley Easten Ltd., New Delhi. 2. Santhosh Kumar Garg, Hydrology and flood control engineering, Khanna Publishers 3. R.K. Linsley, M. A. Kholar, Hydrology for engineers, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
APPLIED GEOLOGY (ELECTIVE  II) C8058 3+1+0 Module 1 Plate tectonics: Plate tectonics and drift of continentsPangaea and drift of Indian plateformation of HimalayasTectonic frame work of South India Tectonic movementstheir significancemethods of detecting tectonic movements  radar interferometry & global positioning system. Earthquake: Earthquakes in relation to plate tectonicsglobal seismic belts seismic zones of Inidaseismicity of South Indiaearthquakes in Kerala earthquake resistant structuresprediction of earthquakedefusing earthquakeReservoir induced seismicity. Module 2 Structural geology: Clinometer & Brunton compassMeasuring of strike and dip using clinometer/Brunton compassBasic idea of toposheetsLineamentsdefinitionsingificancetechniques of identifying lineamentsmajor lineaments in South India and Kerala. Remote sensing: Basic conceptselectromagnetic radiation, spectral windows, spectral signatures, sensors, false colour images, geocoded images. Remotesensing satellitesLandsat. Aerial photography: Basic conceptsstereopairs, stereoscopic vision, stereoscopeLimitations of aerial photography. Applications: Interpretation of imageries (brief description only). Application of satellite imageries and aerial photographs in geological and hydrogeological studies. Module 3 105
Hydrogeology  General: Groundwaterimportance and availabilityAquifersconfined and unconfinedArtesian wellsGeologic formations as aquiferlateritesandy layersweathered rockfractured crystalline rock their distribution in KeralaStructures used for tapping groundwaterOpen well, Bore well, Tube well & Filterpoint well (construction techniques not expected). Saline water intrusion. Module 4 Hydrolgeology  Groundwater exploration techniques: Hydrogeological, geophysical & geobotanical methodsGeophysical methodresistivity surveyWenner and Schlumberger configurationsinterpretation of resistivity curvecurve matching technique. Groundwater recharge: Natural & artificial. Structures used for artificial rechargecheckdams, subsurface dams, open well & bore well. Selection of site for subsurface damssalient features. Module 5 Practical Work: Identification of important rock forming minerals: 1.Quartz, 2.Feldspar, 3.Hypersthene, 4.Auguite, 5. Hornblende, 6. Biotite, 7.Muscovite, 8.Olivine, 9.Garnet, 10.Fluorite, 11.Tourmaline, 12.Calcite, 13.Kyanite, 14. Kaolin, 15. Serpentine. Identification of common rock types: Igneous rocks: 1. Granite, 2. Syenite, 3. Diorite, 4. Gabbro, 5. Peridotite, 6.Dolerite, 7.Basalt, 8.Pegmatite.Sedimentary rocks: 1.Conglomerate, 2.Breccia, 3.Sandstone, 4.Limestone, 5.shale.Metamorphic rocks: 1. Gneiss, 2. Schist, 3. Slate, 4. Marble, 5. Quartzite, 6. Augen gneiss, 8. Mylonite, 9. Pseudotachyllite. Special Indian rock types: 1. Charnockite, 2. Khondalite, 3. Laterite. Recommended Field work: Field trips to learn identification of faults/lineaments in the field and groundwater exploration techniques. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Arthur Holmes, Physical geology, Thomas Nelson. Arthur D. Howard, Geology in environmental planning, McGraw Hills, New Delhi. M.P.Billings, Strucutural geology, Asia Publishing house, New Delhi. N.W. Gokhale, A manual of problems in structural geology, CBS Publishers & distributors, New Delhi. 5. Thomas M. Lillesand & Raiph W. Kiefer, Remotesensing and image interpretation, John Wiley Sons, New York. 6. K.K.Rampal, Text book of photogrametry, Oxford & IBH Publishing company, New Delhi. 7. David Keith Todd, Groundwater hydrology, John Wiley & sons, New York. 8. H.M. Regunath, Groundwater, Willey Eeastern Ltd. 9. HH.Read, Rutleys elements of mineralogy, George Allen & Unwin Ltd, London. 10. G.W.Tyrell, Principles of petrology, B.I. Publications, Bombay. 11. E.G. Ehler & H. Blatt, Petrologyigneous, sedimentary & metamorphic, CBS Publishers & distributors, Delhi. STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS AND STABILITY ANALYSIS (ELECTIVE  III) C8061 2+1+0
106
Module 1 Introductionproblems in naturesteady state problemdynamic problemstability problem (Eigen value problem)introduction to dynamic loadingD’Alembert’s equation of equilibriuminertia forceeffect of dampingHamilton’s principle. Module 2 Single degree of freedom systemidealisationfree vibrationnatural frequencyresonanceforced vibrationlumped massconsistent mass. solution techniquesdeterminant search procedureHouseholders method Module 3 Introduction to stability analysisenergy principlesstable, unstable and neutral equilibriumfourth order differential equation for generalized bending problemselastic instability of columnsEuler’s theoryassumptionslimitations. General treatment of column stability problem as an Eigen value problemvarious modes of failure for various end conditions both ends hingedboth ends fixedone end fixed other end free one end fixed other end hinged Module 4 Beam columnbeam column equationsolution of differential equation for various lateral loadsudl and concentrated loadssolutions for various end conditionsboth ends hingedboth ends fixedone end fixed other end free one end fixed other end hinged. Module 5 Finite element application to dynamicselement stiffness matrix and mass matrix of a beam element. Finite element application to stability analysis finite element stability analysiselement stiffness matrix –geometric stiffness matrixderivation of element stiffness matrix and geometric stiffness matrix for a beam element. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Ray W Clough, Joseph Penzien, Dynamics of structures, Mc Graw Hill, Kogabusha Ltd. Ziegler H, Principles of structural stability, Blarsdell, Wallham, Mass, 1963. Thompson J M, G W Hunt, General stability of elastic stability, Wiley, New York. Timoshenko, Gere, Theory of elastic stability, Mc Graw Hill, New York. Don O Brush, B O O Almorth, Buckling of Bars, plates and shells, Cox H L, The buckling of plates and shells, Macmillam, New York, 1963. O C Zienkiewicz ,.Finite Element Method ,fourth Edition,McGraw Hill, R.D.Cook, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, John Wiley &Sons. INTERNET PROGRAMMING AND JAVA (ELECTIVE  III) 2+1+0
C8062
Module 1 Internet: Definitionprinciples of internet workingprotocols TCP/IP. Email architecture and services. World wide web definition linking of documents in wwwURLDNS. Major categories of websites over Internet. HTMLTags and writing pages.
107
Module 2 Importance of Java – advantages  method of byte codes  object oriented programming concepts in Javadata types – variables – arrays – operators  control statements. Classes: Overloading – inheritance  packages and interfaces  exception handlingbuilt in exceptions. Module 3 Threads: Multi threadingstring handlingan overview of important packages and interfaces used in JavaJava.util, Java.io. Module 4 Applet: applet classevent handlingoverview of event classes. AWT: working with windowsgraphicstextAWT controlslayout managersmenuimages. Module 5 DatabasesJDBC connectivity introduction to swing, RMI, servlets, COM, CORBA, Java Beams. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. MK Goel, Internet, Herbert Schildt, Java the complete reference, Tata Mc Graw Hill. Steven Holzner, Java 2 Black book, Wiley Dreamtech Joseph L Weber, Using Java, Prentice Hall India New Delhi. James Gosling, Java Programming. TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION PLANNING (ELECTIVE  III) 2+1+0
C8063
Module 1 Statistical methods for Traffic Engineering: definition and probability  probability distribution – Poisson, Binomial and normal distribution. Applications in traffic engineering: sampling theory and significance testing  linear regression and correlation  simple problems. Module 2 Systems approach to transport planning: stages in transport planning  trip generation  introduction and definitions – factors affecting trip generations and attraction  Multiple linear regression analysis  category analysis  Modal split analysis. Module 3 Trip Distribution: growth factor methods  synthetic methods. Trip Assignment: purpose, general principle  assignment techniques. Module 4 Parking: Parking problems  desirable parking space standards for different land use common methods of on street parking, offstreet parking facilities, parking surveys. Street illumination: Definition of common terms  types and location of lanterns on straight roads and junctions avoiding glare. Module 5 108
Transportation Economics: Road user costMotor Vehicle operation cost  fixed and variable costs road user benefits  principles of economics  analysis through annual cost  rate of return and benefit cost ratio methods  worked out problems.
References 1. Khadiyali L.R. Traffic Engineering and Transport planning, Khanna Tech Publishers 2. Hutchinson “Principles of Urban transport systems Planning 3. Martin & Whol Traffic system Analysis for Engineers 4. Donald Drew Traffic Flow Theory ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNICS (ELECTIVE  III) C8064 2+1+0 Module 1 Clay mineralogy and soil structure: Gravitational and surface forcesinter sheet and inter layer bonding in the clay minerals Basic structural units of clay minerals isomorphous substitution – kaolinite mineral montmorillonite mineral illite mineral electric charges on clay minerals – base exchange capacity diffused double layer adsorbed water soil structure methods for the identification of minerals (introduction only). Module 2 Effect of environment on Geotechnical properties of soils: Effect of drying on Atterberg limits.Volume change behaviour factors controlling resistance to volume change general relationship between soil type, pressure and void ratio. importance of mineralogical composition in soil expansion. Activity sensitivitycauses of sensitivityinfluence of exchangeable cations, pH and organic matter on properties of soils. Permeability of soils hydraulic conductivity of different types of soils – Darcy’s law and its validity factors affecting permeability Module 3 Wastes and Contaminants (introduction only): sources of wastestypes of wastes composition of different wastes characteristics and classification of hazardous wastes generation rates ground water contamination sources of ground water contamination transport mechanismspotential problems in soils due to contaminants. Module 4 Disposal and containment technics: Criteria for selection of sites for waste disposal hydrological aspects of selection of waste disposal sites disposal facilities subsurface disposal technicsdisposal systems for typical wastes (sketches only) Module 5 Containment control systems liners and covers for waste disposal rigid liners flexible liners. Ground modification technics in waste management – waste modification ground modificationmechanical modificationhydraulic modification chemical modification. References 1. Mitchell, J (1976), “ Fundamentals of soil behaviour”, John Wiley and sons, New York 2. Lambe, T. W & Whitman, R. V (1979), “ Soil Mechanics “, John Wiley and Sons, New York. 3. Gopal Ranjan & A.S.R Rao (1991), “ Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi. 109
4. Wilson, M. J (1987), “ A Hand book of Determinative methods in Clay Mineralogy”, Chapman and Hall, New York. 5. Robert M. Koerner (1984), “Construction and Geotechnical methods in Foundation Engineering”, McGraw Hill Book Co., New York. 6. Yong R. N. (1992), “ Principles of contaminant Transport in Soils, “Elsevier, New York. 7. Ramanatha Iyer T. S (2000), “Soil Engineering Related to Environment”, LBS centre. SOIL STABILITY ANALYSIS (ELECTIVE  III) C8065 2+1+0 Module 1 Ground water seepage Laplace’s equations for two dimensional flow quick sand conditionconstruction of flownets confined and unconfined flowseepage in anisotropic soil conditionspipingdesign of filters. Module 2 Stability of earth slopesmodes of slope stability analysis of slope stability problems Swedish circle method Friction circle method Taylor’s stability chartBishop’s method stabilization measuresinstrumentation. Module 3 Landslides: Introduction movements associated with landslidescauses of landslidesconsequences, classification and analysis of landslidesinvestigation of landslidesinstrumentationmethods of preventing landslides. Module 4 Earthquake effects on soil foundation system: earth quakes ground shakingliquefaction ground deformationsseismic provisions in building codes Module 5 Underpinning: Introductionreasonspit underpinningpile underpinningdriven underpinning pilesshoringspecial underpinning methodsmoving structures References 1. Hans.F.Winterkorn and Hsai Yang Fang Foundation Engineering handbook  Van Nostrand Reinhold Company 2. Bowles E.J. Foundation analysis and Design. Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co. 3. Gopal Ranjan and A.S.R.Rao Basic and applied Soil mechanics New Age International Publishing Company 4. Donald.P.Coduto Geotechnical Engineering –Principlesand practices, Prentice Hall India ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ANALYSIS C8066 2+1+0 Module 1 Concepts of environmental impact analysisEnvironmental protections, legislations, laws and Actsair quality legislationenergy legislationfish and wild life resources legislationhistorical preservation legislationfactors for consideration in assessing environmental impact conceptshort term vs. long term effects. 110
Module 2 Socio impact analysisphysical, social, aesthetic and economic environmentexamples of types of socio impact analysis. Module 3 Air quality impact analysisair pollutantssourcesatmospheric interactionsenvironmental impactassessment methodology, case studies. Noise impact analysiseffects of noise on peopleestimating transportation noise impactexamples Module 4 Water quality impact analysiswater quality criteria and standardsmodellingwater quality impact by projects like High ways, power plants, agriculture and irrigation, forest management, vegetation and wild life impact analysis. Module 5 Assessment methodologiesimpact on biotasummerisation of environmental impactchecklist method. References 1. John G Rau, David C Wooten, Environmental impact Analysis Handbook, Mc Graw Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 1980. ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LAB C807 0+0+3 SVI. 1. Determination of (a) solids  total, suspended, dissolved, fixed, volatile, settleable 2. pH Value. 3. Conductivity. 4. Chemical oxygen demand. 5. D. 0. and Biochemical Oxygen Demand. 6. Jar test and Turbidity. 7. Chlorine demand and residual chlorine. 8. Determination of iron. 9. Determination of sulphates. 10. Acidity and Alkalinity. 11. Hardness. 12. Nitrogen  various forms. 13. M. P. N. Fecal coliforms using Al medium. 14. Measurment of smoke density for diesel vehicles. 15. Measurment of H C and CO of exhaust from petrol driven vehicles. 16. Measurment of suspended particulate matter in ambient air. PROJECT / SEMINAR C 808 0+0+4
111
Each student is required to present a technical paper on a subject approved by the department. The paper should in general reflect the state of the art. He/she shall submit a report of the paper presented to the department. In addition to the seminar he/she shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in the 7th semester itself in consultation with the guide(s). On completion of the project work, he/she shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work done to the department. VIVA VOCE C809 A comprehensive Vivavoce examination will be conducted to assess the student's overall knowledge in the specified field of engineering. At the time of vivavoce, certified reports of seminar and project work are to be presented for evaluation.
112
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING BRANCH
113
THIRD SEMESTER
114
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  II CMELPA 301 3+1+0
Module 1 Vector Differential Calculus Differentiation of vector functions  scalar and vector fields – gradient, divergence and curl of a vector function – their physical meaning – directional derivative – scalar potential, conservative fields – identities – simple problems. Module 2 Vector Integral Calculus Line, surface and volume Integrals – work done by a force along a path – Application of Green’s theorem, Stokes theorem and Gauss divergence theorem. Module 3 Function of Complex Variable Definition of analytic functions and singular points – derivation of C.R. equations in Cartesian coordinates – harmonic and orthogonal properties – construction of analytic function given real or imaginary parts – complex potential – conformal transformation of function like zn, ez, 1/z, sin z, z+k2/z – bilinear transformation – cross ratio – invariant property – simple problems. Module 4 Finite Differences Meaning of ∆ , ∇ , E, µ , δ  interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula – central differences – problems using stirlings formula – Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided difference formula for unequal intervals. Module 5 Difference Calculus Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences – Numerical integration – Newton – Cote’s formula – trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8th rule – simple problems. Difference equations – Solution of difference equations. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics  Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Higher Engg. Mathematics  Grawal B.S., Khanna Publishers Numerical Methods in science & Engg. M.K.Venkataraman, National Publishing Co Numerical Methods  S.Balachandra Rao and G.K.Shantha, Uty. press Advanced Engg. Mathematics  Michael D.Greenberg, PrenticeHall Theory and Problems of Vector analysis  M.R.Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series, McGraw – Hill
MACHINE DRAWING  I M 302 0+0+4
115
Conversion of pictorial views into orthographic viewsdimensioning techniques preparation of drawing screw threadsdifferent formsconventional representationsketchingorthographic views of hexagonal bolts and nutsdimensional drawingsquareheaded bolts and nutssketching of different types of lock nuts and locking devices and foundation bolts. Forms of rivet headsrivetted jointslap and butt joints with single and multiple riveting in chain and zigzag arrangementsdimensional drawing. Sketching of conventional representation of welded joints. Fully dimensioned and sectional drawings of the following: Jointscottered joints (spigot and socket, sleeve and cotter, gib and cotter)  knuckle joint. Shaft couplings  types of keys  plain and protected types of flanged couplings  bushed pin type flexible coupling  Oldhams coupling. Pipe jointsspigot &socket joint  flanged joint  union joint –Amstrong (hydraulic) joint. Shaft bearings and supports  journal bearing, plummer block  footstep bearingwall bracket  ball bearings. Steam engine parts  stuffing box  cross head  connecting rod  eccentric. I.C.Engine partspiston, connecting rod.
ferences 1. Machine Drawing 2. Machine Drawing 3. Machine Drawing N.D.Bhatt P.I.Varghese P.S.Gill FLUID MECHANICS M 303 2+2+0 Module 1 IntroductionProprties of fluids pressure, force, density, specific weight, compressibility, capillarity, surface tension, dynamic and kinematic viscosityPascal’s lawNewtonian and nonNewtonian fluidsfluid staticsmeasurement of pressurevariation of pressuremanometryhydrostatic pressure on plane and curved surfacescentre of pressurebuoyancyfloationstability of submerged and floating bodiesmetacentric heightperiod of oscillation. Module 2 Kinematics of fluid motionEulerian and Lagrangian approachclassification and representation of fluid flow path line, stream line and streak line. Basic hydrodynamicsequation for accelerationcontinuity equationrotational and irrotational flowvelocity potential and stream functioncirculation and vorticityvortex flowenergy variation across stream linesbasic field flow such as uniform flow, spiral flow, source, sink, doublet, vortex pair, flow past a cylinder with a circulation, Magnus effectJoukowski theoremcoefficient of lift. Module 3 Euler’s momentum equationBernoulli’s equation and its limitationsmomentum and energy correction factorspressure variation across uniform conduit and uniform bendpressure distribution in irrotational flow and in curved boundariesflow through orifices and mouthpieces, notches and 116
weirstime of emptying a tankapplication of Bernoulli’s theoremorifice meter, ventury meter, pitot tube, rotameter. Module 4 NavierStoke’s equationbody forceHagenPoiseullie equationboundary layer flow theoryvelocity variation methods of controllingapplicationsdiffuserboundary layer separation –wakes, drag force, coefficient of drag, skin friction, pressure, profile and total dragstream lined body, bluff bodydrag force on a rectangular platedrag coefficient for flow around a cylinderlift and drag force on an aerofoilapplications of aerofoil characteristicswork doneaerofoil flow recorderpolar diagramsimple problems. Module 5 Flow of a real fluideffect of viscosity on fluid flowlaminar and turbulent flowboundary layer thicknessdisplacement, momentum and energy thicknessflow through pipeslaminar and turbulent flow in pipescritical Reynolds numberDarcyWeisback equationhydraulic radiusMoody;s chartpipes in series and parallelsiphon losses in pipespower transmission through pipeswater hammerequivalent pipeopen channel flowChezy’s equationmost economical cross sectionhydraulic jump. References
Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Lewitt
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Fluid Mechanics Fluid Mechanics Fluid Mechanics Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics

I.H.Shames B.S.Massey K.L.Kumar R.K.Bhansal Mody and Seth
METALLURGY AND MATERIAL SCIENCE M 304 3+1+0 Module 1 Crystallography: Crystal structural determination, crystallographic directions and planes, miller indices, packing of atoms in solids, atomic packing factor, co ordination number Amorphous structure, glass transition temperature  Effects of crystalline and amorphous structure on mechanical and optical properties  Mechanism of crystallization: Homogeneous and heterogeneous nuclei formation, dendritic growth and grain boundary irregularity, grain size effects on mechanical & optical properties  Changes within solid materials: Structural imperfections: Point defects  line defect: edge, screw dislocation, burgers vector, forest of dislocations, role of dislocation in the deformation of metals  Surface imperfections: role of surface defect on crack propagation etc – Mode of plastic deformation: mechanism of slip & twinning, dislocation climb & cross slip, dislocation sources, frankread source – Diffusion in solids, fick’s laws, applications. Module 2 Cold working, strain hardening, recovery, recrystallization, grain growth, grain size and its effects on mechanical properties Hot working, super plasticity – Reasons for alloying, phase transformation phase rules, single phase, multi phase equilibrium diagrams, solid solutions, inter metallic compounds – Equilibrium diagram reactions: monotectic, eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, peritectoid  Polymorphism – Detailed discussion of IronCarbon diagram with microstructure changes in ferrite, austenite, cementite, graphite, pearlite, martensite, bainite. 117
Module 3 Definition and aims of heat treatment Annealing, spheroidizing, normalizing, hardening, tempering, austermpering, martempering with microstructure changes  Surface treatment: Diffusion methods: carburizing, nitriding, cyaniding  Thermal methods: flame hardening, induction hardening – Deposition methods: hot dipping and coating, impregnation, metal spraying, metal cladding – Various strengthen mechanisms in metals: work hardening, grain boundary hardening, grain size reduction, solid solution hardening, dispersion hardening. Module 4 Alloy steels: Effects of alloying elements on: dislocation movement, polymorphic transformation temperature, formation and stability of carbides, grain growth, displacement of the eutectoid point, retardation of the transformation rates, improvement in corrosion resistance, mechanical properties Nickel steels, chromium steels, etc – Effects on steels, containing molybdenum, vanadium, tungsten, cobalt, silicon, copper and lead – high speed steels   Cast irons: classifications, gray, white, malleable and spheroidal graphite cast iron, composition, microstructure, properties and applications  Principal non ferrous alloys like aluminum, beryllium, copper, magnesium, nickel, study of composition, microstructure, properties and applications Reference shall be made to the phase diagrams whenever necessary. Module 5 Fracture: Bonding forces and energies, cohesive strength of metals  Griffith theory – Crack initiation, growth and crack arrest – Effect of plastic deformation on crack propagation – Factors leading to crack propagation  Cleavage, intercrystalline, brittle, ductile fracture  Influence of slip on fracture – Effect of impact loading on ductile material and its application in forging etc.Fatigue: stress cycles – Effects of stress concentration, size effect, surface texture on fatigue – Corrosion and thermal fatigue – Mechanism of fatigue failure  Creep: Creep curves – Structural change – Mechanism of creep deformation.
References 1. Avner S.H. – Introduction to Physical Metallurgy – McGraw Hill. 2. Callister William. D. – Material Science and Engineering. – John Wiley. 3. Guy A.G. – Essentials of material science. – McGraw Hill. 4. Dieter George E. – Mechanical Metallurgy. – McGraw Hill. 5. Higgins R.A. – Engineering Metallurgy partI. – ELBS. 6. Mans Chandra – Science of Engineering Materials Vol. 1, 2, 3. – Macmillan. 7. Reed Hill E. Robert – Physical Metallurgy Principles. – East West Press. 8. Richards C.W. – Engineering Material Science. 9. Van Vlack – Elements of material Science. Addison – Wesley. 10. www. msm. com. ac. uk / online teaching. THERMO DYNAMICS M 305 2+2+0
118
Module 1 Fundamental conceptsScope and limitations of thermo dynamics Thermo dynamic systems – different types of systemsmacroscopic and microscopic analysiscontinuumPropertiesStateProcesses Thermo dynamic equilibriumEquation of state of an ideal gasPVT systemReal gasReal gas relationsCompressibility factorLaw of corresponding states. Module 2 Laws of thermo dynamicsZeroth law of thermo dynamicsThermal equilibriumConcept of temperature –Temperature scalesThermometryPerfect gas temperature scales. Work and HeatFirst law of thermo dynamicsconcept of energyfirst law for closed and open systemsspecific heatsinternal energy and enthalpy Steady flow energy equation Joule Thompson effect. Module 3 Second law of thermo dynamicsVarious statements and their equivalenceReversible process and reversible cycles – Carnot cycleCorollaries of the second lawThermo dynamic temperature scaleClausius inequalityConcept of entropyCalculation of change in entropy in various thermo dynamic processesReversibility and irreversibilityAvailable and unavailable energy – Third law of thermo dynamics. Module 4 Thermo dynamics relationsCombind first and second law equationsHelmholtz and Gibbs functions – Maxwell relations equations for specific heats, internal energy, enthalpy and entropy – ClausiusClapeyron equation – applications of thermo dynamic relations. Module 5 Properties of pure substances – PVT, PT and TS diagrams,Mollier diagrams Mixture of gases and vapoursmixture of ideal gasesDalton’s lawGibbs law –Thermo dynamic properties of mixturemixtures of ideal gases and vapoursPsychrometic principlesPsychrometic chartApplications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Engineering Thermodynamics Thermodynamics Engineering Thermodynamics Engineering Thermodynamics Thermodynamics Thermodynamics Thermodynamics Heat and Thermodynamics Thermodynamics P.K.Nag J.F.Lee and F.W.Sears. Spalding and Cole M.Achuthan Keenan Obert Holman M.N.Zemansky Rogers, Pearson
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING M306 3+1+0 Module 1 I Stress and strain  Bars of varying cross  sections – composite sections  temperature stresses. Principal stresses and planesMohr's circle representation of plane stress. Module 2 119
Shear force and bending moments Cantileversimply supported and overhanging beamsconcentrated and U. D. loadings analytical method. Relation between load. SF and BM. Theory of simple bending bending and shear stress distribution rectangular, circular and 1sections. Module 3 Slope and deflection of simply supported beams and cantilevers Double integration Macaulay's Methodmoment area method conjugate beam method. Module 4 Torsion of circular shaftssolid and hollow shafts power transmitted by shafts. Closecoiled and open coiled spring leaf spring. Thin cyliders and jhick cylinders subjected to internal and external pressures compound pipes wire wound pipesstrain energyaxial loads, gradually and suddenly applied loadimpact loads. Module 5 Columns and sturts short and long columnsEuler's theoryRan kine's theory  Eccentrically Loaded columnscolumn with initial curvature. General description only of simple and compound steel, beams, columns and column foundationprinciple of reinforced concrete. Reinforcements detailing in R. C. Slabs, beams, columns & footings (No problem expected) References 1. Timoshenko.S.P, Strength of Materials, Part 1,D.Van Nostrand company, Inc.Newyork. 2. Popov E.P., Engineering Mechanics of solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 3. Punmia B.C, Strength of Materials and Mechanics of structures, Vol 1,Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi. 4. Vazirani V.N., Ratwani N. M, Analysis of Structures, Vol 1, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. 5. Kazimi S.M.A., Solid Mechanics, Tata Mc Graw Hill. 6. William A Nash, Strength of Materials, Mc Graw Hill. 7. Ryder G.H., Strength of Materials, ELBS. 8. Arthur Morley, Strength of Materials, ELBS, Longman’s Green& Company. FLUID MECHANICS LABORATORY M 307 1. 2. 3. 4. 0+0+3 Study of plumbing tools and pipe fittings Study of taps, valves, gauges, pitot tubes, watermeters and current meters Determination of metacentric height and radius of gyration of floating bodies. Hydraulic coefficients of orifices and mouthpieces under constant head method and time of emptying method. 5. Calibration of venturimeter, orifice meter and water meter 6. Calibration of rectangular and triangular notches 7. Determination of Darcy’s and Chezy’s constant for pipe flow 8. Determination of critical velocity in pipe flow. 9. Determination of minor losses in pipe flow 10. Experimental verification of Bernoulli’s theorem 11. Determination of Chezy’s constant and Mannings number for open channel flow. 12. Determination of discharge coefficient for PlugSluices 120
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORTAORY M308 0+0+3 1. Tests on springs (open and close coiled) 2. Bending Test on Wooden Beams using U. T. M. ' 3. Verification of Clerk. Maxwell's Law of reciprocal deflection and determination of E for steel. 4. Torsion Pendulum (M.S. wires. Aluminum wires and brass wires) 5. Torsion test using U. T. M. on M. S. Rod, torsteel and High Tensile steel. 6. Torsion Test on M. S, Road 7. Shear Test on M.S. Rod. 8. Fatigue Test 9. Impact Test (Izod and Charpy) 10. Hardness Test (Brinell, Vicker's and Rebound) 11. Strut Test. Note All tests should be done as per relevant BIS
121
FOURTH SEMESTER
122
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  III CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0 Module 1 Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficents  Finding P.I. by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchys equations Linear Simultaneous eqnssimple applications in engineering problems. Module 2 Partial Differential Equations: Formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitary Functions solution of Lagrange Linear Equations –Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave equation. Module 3 Fourier Transforms: Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine & Cosine transforms  inverse transforms  transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no proof) – Parsevals Identity  simple problems. Module 4 Probability and statistics: Fundamentals of probability, Bayes theorem  Binomial law of probability  The binomial distribution, its mean and variance  poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution  its mean and variance  fitting of binomial & poisson distributions  normal distribution  properties of normal curve  standard normal curve  simple problems in binomial, poisson and normal distributions. Module 5 Population & Samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) –Sampling distribution of variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance  Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – Test of significance for single proportion, difference of proportions, single mean and difference of means (proof of theorems not expected) References 1. Higher Engineering Mathematics  B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers 2. Engineering Mathematics Vol. II 3rd year Part A & B  M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing Company 3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations  Ian N.Sneddon, McGrawhill International Edn. 4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers – Richard A Johnson, Pearson Education Asia / PHI 5. A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II) – Bali and Iyengar, Laxmi Publications Ltd. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 7. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia THEORY OF MACHINES  I M 402 2+1+0 Module 1 Kinematics: Links, pairs, chain, mechanisms, machines, inversion of single and double slider crank, quadric cycle chainskinematic diagramexpression for degree of freedom equivalent curvescoupler curvesspatial mechanismsmanipulations velocity analysis by instantaneous center method123
Kennedy’s theorem velocity and acceleration of various mechanisms by analytical and graphical methodCoriolis component of accelerationanalytical treatment of slider crank and four bar chainKlein’s constructionlocating instantaneous centervelocity and acceleration image. Module 2 Linkage Synthesis: Precision pointsgraphical synthesis of slider crank mechanisms, rocker mechanisms, four bar linkageoverlay methodnumber synthesisbasic features of mechanical synthesisgraphic and analytical methods of dimensional synthesiskinematic synthesisapproximate and exact synthesis. Module 3 Mechanisms: Pantograph, approximate straight line, straightline mechanisms engine indicator mechanismssteering gearDavis and Ackerman typequick return Whitworth, slider crank mechanismHooke’s joint, ScottRussel, Watt and grasshopper mechanisms. Module 4 Brakes and clutches: Shoe, double block, long shoe, internally expanding shoe, band, band & block, hydraulic, mechanical, air and powerbrakesbraking of avehiclecone, single plate, multiple, centrifugal clutches. Dynamometers: Pony brake. rope brake, epicyclic train, belt transmission and torsion dynamometerseffort and power. Module 5 Gears: Condition for constant velocity ratiolaw of gearingconjugate teeth actiontooth formsstandard modules and tooth proportionscontact ratiointerferencespur, helical, bevel, spiral, and hypoid gears gear forces. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Theory of Machines Mechanisms and Machine Theory Theory of Mechanisms and Machines Theory of Machines Theory of Machines Theory of Machines and Mechanisms Thomas Bevan Ambedkar A.Ghosh & A.K.Mallick V.P.Singh, Pearson P.L.Bellaney J.E.Shigley & J.J.Uicker
HYDRAULIC MACHINES M 403 2+2+0 Module 1 Dynamic Action of Fluid: Momentum and angular momentum equation applied to control volume – impact of jet – flow of an incompressible fluid over fixed and moving vanes – workdone and efficiency – reaction principle – propulsion of ships. Dimensional analysis – Rayleigh’ s method – Buckingham’s Pi theorem – nondiamesional parameters in fluid mechanics and fluid machinery – principle of similitude, geometric and dynamic similarity – model studies. 124
Module 2 Euler`s turbine equation: velocity triangles – impulse and reaction turbines – Pelton wheel, Francis turbine Kaplan turbine – construction features and performance characteristics – non dimensional parameters for comparative study of turbine performance – unit speed, unit power, unit quantity, run away speed, geometric similarity – model laws – effect of specific speed on speed, runner size, flow type etc. – theory of draft tube – speed regulation of turbines – selection, type and speed of turbines. Module 3 Pumping machinery: General classification –Dynamic pumps  working of centrifugal pumps, priming, vapour pressure, wear rings, hydraulic balancing, Classification of impellers, impeller shapes – types of casings – materials for pumps & medical use – principle of operation Euler`s head equation – velocity diagrams – losses in pumps – circulatory flow – pre rotation – efficiency – non dimensional parameters – specific speed – effect of change of diameters & speed  performance pump characteristics: main, operating, ISO efficiency characteristics curves – surging – NPSH – selection of pumps from performance curves, suction & delivery pipe sizing, motor rating equivalent length of pipe, simple head loss calculation in pipe lines & fittings – Principle of similitude – axial trust – multistage pumps – propeller pumps – pump in parallel & series operation. Module 4 Theory, efficiency, performance curves & application of selfpriming pump, jet pump, airlift pump, slurry pump & hydraulic ram  Positive displacement pumps: reciprocating pump, effect of vapour pressure on lifting of liquid – indicator diagram – acceleration head – effect of friction – use of air vessels – work saved – Slip  efficiency – pump characteristics – applications. Condition monitoring of pumps: temperature on bearing, vibration in equipmets, noises – vibration measurement and fault diagnosis. Cavitation in fluid machines – installations susceptible to cavitation – collapse of bubble theory – Thoma`s prameter – factors affecting cavitation in pumps and turbines – Abrasive wear of pumps  prevention of cavitation damage. Module 5 Positive displacement Rotary pumps: Gear, screw, vane, root pumps – rotary axial & rotary radial piston pumps  theory, efficiency, performance curves, effect of surface texture & materials of construction on performance – applications. Hydraulic accumulator, intensifier & lift – principle of operation Hydraulic symbols, hydraulic cranes, hydraulic capstan, hydraulic press. References Abdulla Sheriff  Hydraulic machines, standard publishers. 1. Govinda Rao N. S.  Fluid flows machines, TMH. 2. Jagadishlal.  Hydraulic machines, metropolitan publishers. 3. Pippinger.  Industrial hydraulics. 4. Centrifugal and axial flow pumps  Wiley & sons. – Stepanoff John A. J. 5. Lewitt E. H.  Hydraulic & Fluid Mechanics MACHINE TOOLS M 404 2+1+0 Module 1 Types and classification of lathes: Specificationsmethod of holding work and tool, accessories, attachmentsoperations and types of tools for each operationtool room lathe duplicating lathe125
Capstan and Turret lathehorizontal and vertical automaticssingle spindle and multispindle screw machinesmanufacture of cylindrical bolts, stepped bolts, shaftsprofile turning. Drilling and boring machines: types and specificationsdescription of tool and work holding devicesboring tools and reamersdrilling of holes, countersinking and counterboring operationsboring of cross holesmanufacture of bushes. Module 2 Shaping, planing and slotting machines: Types and specificationsquick return motionhydraulic feed and its advantagesautomatic feedspeed, feed and depth of cutwork holding devicestypes of operation and examples of work doneshaping of Vblocks, planing of guide gibs, slotting of keyways. Broaching machines:typescutterprocessesinternal and external broachingbroaching of splinebores. Milling machines:  types, specifications, operations and milling cuttersIndexing head and its usemethod of indexingdividing headmilling of plane surface, keyways, slides and hexagons. Module 3 Grinding, Horning and Lapping: Types and methods of operationstool and cutter specificationssurface finish obtainablemethod of evaluation of surface finishroughnesssuper finishingburnishingultrasonic impact grindinggrinding of shafts and boresmethods of gear cuttingform cuttersgear generating machinesgear hobbing straight, spiral, worm, helical, and bevel gear cuttinggear finishing and gear shaping operationsgear errors. Module 4 Numerical Control (NC) machine tools: Elements, classification (basics only)NC toolingdesign of NC/CNC toolingautomated chip less process. Automatic machines: Semiautomatic multi tool central lathesautomatic cutting of machines Swiss type automatic screw machines, multi spindle automatic special purpose machine tools program controlled machine toolscopying machines. Module 5 Computers in production technology: CIMcomputer simulation of manufacturing process and systemscellular manufacturingFMS  just in time productionmanagement of toolroommachining centersautomatic tool changingmanufacture of ICs, PCBs, Ceramic circuit boards, and advanced PCBsexpert systems in manufacturingunmanned machining trends in automated factory. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Production Technology R.K.Jain All about Machine tools Gerling Workshop Technology: Vol. 1,2 and 3  W.A.J.Chapman Production Technology  H.M.T. Machine Tools: Vol. 1, 2, 3 and 4 Acherkan Manufacturing Science & Technology, Vol. 2 Suresh Daleela Manufacturing Engineering &Technology S.Kalpakjian, S.A.Schmidt ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY M 405 Module 1 126 3+1+0
Transformer  emf equation: No load current  equivalent circuit  regulation  efficiency. Determination of regulation and efficiency from O.C. and S.C. tests  cooling of transformers. D.C. motors: Back emf  speed and torque equation  starting and speed control  testing of D.C. motors  brake test  swinburn's test. Module 2 Alternators  construction details: Type  emf equation (winding factor need not be derived) synchronous impedance  regulation by emf and mmf method. Synchronous Motors: Principle of operation  method of starting. Three phase induction motor: Production of rotating magnetic field equivalent circuittorque equation  torque slip characteristics  no load and blocked rotor tests  starting and speed control. Single phase motor: Double revolving theory  capacitor start capacitor run induction motors – applications. Module 3 Industrial drives  electric drives  advantages  individual drive and group drive  factors affecting choice of motor  mechanical characteristics of A.C. and D.C. motors  motors for particular applications like textile mill, steel mill, paper mill, mine, hoists, crane etc.  size and rating of motor – motor Selection for intermittent loads. Electric traction  Different systems of traction  comparison – track electrification  different systems  traction motor characteristics  electric braking  plugging Dynamic and regenerative braking. Module 4 Basic principle of transistor amplifier  R.C. coupled amplifier F.B. amplifier  Basic principle. Oscillators  basic principle  typical R.C. and L.C. oscillator circuits (no analysis) –Astable multivibratior Pulse circuits  wave shaping circuits like simple clipping, clamping R.C. differentiating, integrating circuits  simple sweep generator. CRO  basic principle of cathode ray tube  deflection methods – block schematic of CRO  measurement of current, voltage and frequency. Module 5 Power semiconductor devices: Power diodes  SCR's  Principle of operation of SCR's  two transistor analogy of SCR  characteristics  SCR rating (basic principle only). High frequency heating  induction and dielectric heating – resistance heating Resistance welding  block schematic of resistance welding scheme References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Perfomance and design of D C machines – Clayton Perfomance and design of A C machines – M G Say Electrical Traction – Dover A T Industrial and Power electronics – Harish C Rai Electronic principles S K Sahdev MACHINE DRAWING  II M 406 Assembly and working drawings of the following: 127 0+0+4
1. Valves:  Feed checkvalve, stop valve, spring loaded safety valve, Ramsbottom safety valve, lever safety valve, deadweight safety valve, blow off cock. 2. Pulleys:  Fast and loose pulleys, speed cone or stepped pulley. 3. Clutches:  Single plate clutch, cone friction clutch. 4. Machine elements:  lathe spindle, screw jack, machine vice, lathe tool post. References 1. Machine Drawing 2. Machine Drawing 3. Machine Drawing N.D.Bhatt P.I.Varghese P.S.Gill
HYDRAULIC MACHINES LABORATORY M 407 0+0+4 Study of hydraulic turbines – Pelton wheel, Francis & Kaplan turbines – force due to impact or jet on vanes – velocity triangles – specific speed – types of casings – governing – cavitation – draft tubes  performance characteristics – applications. Study of dynamic pumps: Centrifugal pump  velocity triangles – priming  vapour pressure, wear rings, hydraulic balancing  casings – impellers – specific speed – cavitation  selection of pumps from performance curves, suction & delivery pipe sizing, motor rating, equivalent length of pipe, crane co. table, simple head loss calculation in pipe lines  applications. Theory, efficiency, performance curves & application of selfpriming pump, jet pump, airlift pumps slurry pump & hydraulic ram. Condition monitoring of pumps: temperature on bearing, vibration in equipmets, noises – vibration measurement and fault diagnosis. Study of positive displacement pumps – Reciprocating pumps – single & multi cylinder – Air vessel – indicator diagram   performance characteristics – applications. Positive displacement Rotary pumps: Gear, screw, vane, root pumps – rotary axial & rotary radial piston pumps  theory, efficiency, performance curves, effect of surface texture & materials of construction on performance  applications. Experiments Performance characteristic tests on Pelton wheel (Load test & best speed). Performance characteristic tests on Francis turbine (Load test & best gate opening). Performance characteristic tests on Kaplan turbine (Load test & best gate, vane angle opening). Performance characteristic tests on single stage, multi stage centrifugal pumps at constant speed & at variable speed. Actual & predicted curves. Performance characteristic tests on selfpriming pump, Jet pump, Airlift pump and deep well pump Performance characteristic tests on axial flow pump. Performance characteristic tests on Hydraulic ram. Vibration measurement and computer aided fault diagnosis of a centrifugal / selfpriming / Gear / Reciprocating pump. Performance characteristic tests on reciprocating pump at constant speed. Performance characteristic tests on Gear pump. Performance characteristic tests on Screw pump.
128
References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Abdulla Sheriff.  Hydraulic machines, standard publishers. Govinda Rao. N. S  Fluid flows machines, TMH. Jagadishlal  Hydraulic machines, metropolitan publishers. Pippinger Industrial hydraulics. Stepanoff john A.J. Centrifugal and axial flow pumps, Wiley & sons.
ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS LABORATORY M408 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB 1. Efficiency and regulation of single phase transformer by direct loading. 2. Equivalent circuit of transformer from open and short circuit testcalculation of efficiency and regulation at various loads and power factors. 3. Regulation of alternator by emf and mmf methods. 4. Starting of cage induction motor using stardelta switch  performance characteristics. 5. No load and blocked rotor test on slip ring induction motor  equivalent circuit  torqueslip characteristics. 6. a) O.C.C. of D. C. shunt generator  critical resistance.critical speed. b) External and internal characteristics of D C shunt generator. 7. Load test on D. C. series motor. 8. Swinbume's test Pre determination of efficiency. 9. Study of single phase induction motor, determination of performance characteristics. ELECTRONICS LAB 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Diode characteristics Transistor characteristics C.B, C.E configurations Pulse circuits Rectifier circuits Sweep generator R C Coupled amplifier R C Oscillator, L C Oscillator Astable multivibrator 0+0+4
129
FIFTH SEMESTER
130
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  IV CMELPA501 3+1+0 Module 1 Complex Integration: Line Integral –Cauchy’s integral theorem Cauchy’s integral formulaTaylor’s seriesLaurent’s series zeros and singularities Residues residue theoremEvaluation of real integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semicircle. Module 2 Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection methodRegula falsi method  Newton –Raphson method – solution of system of linear equations by Jacobi’s iteration method and GaussSiedel method. Module 3 Numerical solution of ordinary differential equation: Taylor’s series method Euler’s method – Modified Euler’s method  Runge – Kutta method (IV order)Milne’s predictor corrector method. Module 4 Z – Transforms: Definition of Z transform properties –Z transform of polynomial functions – trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property inverse transform – solution of 1st & 2nd order difference equations with constant coefficients using Z transforms. Module 5 Linear programming: graphical solution – solution using simplex method (non – degenerate case only) – BigM method, two phase method Duality in L.P.P. Balanced T.P. – Vogels approximation method – Modi method. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 9. Advanced Engineering Mathematics – Ervin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern limited. Numerical methods in Engineering & Science – Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers. Higher Engineering Mathematics – Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers. Numerical methods in Science & Engineering – Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, National Publishing Company. Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems – P.C.Tulsian, Vishal Pandey, Pearson Education Asia. Complex variables and applications – Churchill and Brown, McGrawHill. Operations research – Panneer Selvam, PHI 8. Engineering Mathematics vol III – S.Arumugam, A.T.Isaac, Somasundaram, Scitech publications Advanced Mathematics for Engg.students vol III –S.Narayanan, T.K.M.Pillay, G.Ramanaigh, S.Vishwananthan printers & publishers.
131
MANUFACTURING PROCESSES M 502 3+1+0 Module 1 Patterns:  pattern allowances and materialsmouldingcore and core printstypes of cores pattern constructionlayout and colour codingtoolsprocessesmoulding sand constituents, types and testingmoulding machinesmoulding proceduresand conditioninggating systemcupola operationpouring and cleaning of castingsdefects in castingsinspection and quality controlcasting machinesdesign of diescentrifugal, continuous, investment, squeeze casting and shell mould casting comparison of casting with other production processes.( include necessary figures) Module 2 Welding:  definitionmetallurgy of weldingapplications – classification mechanismprocessesgas welding  details, equipment, fluxes and filler rods design effect of weld parameters on weld qualityflame cuttingISI specification for welding. Arc welding applicationsequipment –polaritygoverning factor in fusion weldingelectrodes and typesISI specification for electrodes –Welding designbutt jointTIGGMACO2 process. Submerged arc, electroslag plasma arc and flux cored arc weldingresistance, thermit solid state, electron beam and laser welding.Brazing: solderingexplosive weldinginspection and defects in weldingwelding of plastics.(include necessary figures ) Module 3 Rolling:  principlestypes of rolls and rolling millssemifinished and rolled products rolling of tubes, wheels, axles, Ibeamthread and gear rollingfriction and lubrication in metal forminghot and cold rollingrolling machinesheating and cooling in rollingstrip velocity and roll velocityroll and roll pass design Theories of rolling and effect of parametersload calculationHigh velocity forming  energysources  material behaviour  pneumatic, mechanical, electrohydraulic, electromagnetic, and explosive forming. Module 4 Press working:  types of presses and pressworking operations involving shearing, bending, drawing, squeezingExtrusion:  methods, machinesanalysis of rod extrusionWire and wire drawing operationsanalysisdie anglessimple, progressive and compound diesplastic and rubber processingCalenderingtransfer, injection and compression moulding. Module 5 Forging: classificationprocessequipmentsdrawing, deep drawing, punching, blanking tube piercingspinning and coiningelastic and plastic deformationhot forging, die forging machinery for forgingoperationheating in forgingmanufacture of drop forging dies, pressesdesign of forgings and diesupsettingforging defectsforging analysisquality assurance for forgingnon destructive testing.
References 1. 2. 3. 4. Workshop Technology  Raghuvanshi Manufacturing Engineering & Technology  S.Kalpakjian and S.A.Schmidt Manufacturing Processes  Begeman Manufacturing Science & Technology; Vol. I  Suresh Daleela 132
5. Processes and Materials of Manufacture  Roy A.Lindberg COMPUTER PROGRAMMING M503 2+2+0 Module 1 Introduction to C language – character set – operators – constants and variables – data types – use of built in I/O functions  use of control statements if, if – else, for, while, dowhile and switch – use of logical AND, OR and NOT – preprocessor directive  writing summation of various mathematical series like ex, sin(x), cos(x) etc. Module 2 Arrays – declaration of one dimensional array and its handling – bubble sorting – quick sorting – searching – string handling functions – multidimensional arrays and its handling – structure and union – array of structures – sorting of strings – programs Module 3 Functions – declaration – global and local variables  call by value method – writing different string handling functions – storage classes – passing an array to a function – passing a structure to a function – recursion  macros – programs Module 4 Declaration and use of pointers – call by reference method – pointer to an array – pointer to a structure – array of pointers – pointer to an array – selfreferential structure – dynamic memory allocation – linked lists – programs Module 5 Different types of files – reading writing and appending of text and binary files – other various file handling functions  transfer of data in blocks  command line arguments – use of bitwise AND, OR and NOT. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Programming with C Programming in C The C Programming Language Let us C Programming with ANSI and Turbo C – – – – – Schaum’s series Balaguruswamy Kerningham & Ritchie Yaswant Kanetkar Kamthane, Pearson
THEORY OF MACHINES  II M 504 2+2+0 Module 1 Static force analysis:  force couplescondititons for equilibriumfree body diagram analysis of four bar chainforce analysis of slidercrank mechanismCoulomb friction. Dynamic force analysis:  D’Alemberts principleinertia forcesdynamic force analysis of four bar chain, and slider crank mechanism. 133
Module 2 Governors:  terminology; Watt, Porter, Proel, Hartnell, Hartung, WilsonHartnell, and Pickering governorsspring controlled governors of gravity typeeffort and powercontrolling force diagramquality of governorseffect of frictioninsensitivenessstabilityinertia governors governor speed, torque characteristics of an enginegovernor and flywheel. Module 3 Turning moment diagram and Flywheel:  coefficient of fluctuation of energy and speed energy saved in a flywheelpunching pressdynamically equivalent two mass systemcentre of percussionkinetic equivalencereversed effective force analysispiston effortcrankpin effort crank effortturning moment diagrams for steam and I.C. engines. Module 4 Gyroscope:  principleangular accelerationeffect of gyroscopic couple on bearings, airplanes, and shipsstability of automobile and two wheel vehiclesgyroscopic stabilization of sea vessels and grinding mills. Gear trains: simple, compoundepicyclic trains with coaxial shafts. Module 5 Cams and Followers:  typesfollower motionSHMuniform velocity and acceleration cycloidal displacement, velocity and acceleration curvescam profilereciprocating and oscillating followerstangent camsconvex and concave cams with footed followers. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Mechanism and Machine Theory Theory of Mechanism and Machines Theory of Machines Theory of Machines Theory of Mechanism and Machines Dynamics of Machinery Ambedkar A.Ghosh & A.K.Mallick V.P.Singh P.L.Ballaney Joseph Shigley Holovanco
MECHATRONICS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS M 505 2+2+0 Module 1 Introduction:  Scope of Mechatronicssystemsmicroprocessor based controllersmechatronic approachsensors – transducers  forcevelocity – displacement  temperatureinputting data by switchessignal coditioning  operational amplifiersfilteringmultiplexersdata acquisitionmodulation. Data presentation systems:  displaysmeasurement systemscalibrationpneumatic and hydraulic systemscontrol valvesactuatorsmechanical and electrical actyation systemsrelays and solenoid switches and proximity pickups. Module 2 134
Input/Output systems:  ports, interface requirementsadaptorsprogrammable logic controllersdatahandling digital communicationssystem, networks, protocols, interfaces, fault findingdesign and mechatronicsdesign solutions. Electromechanical systems: CD, DVD ROMs, OCR, PrintersMedical devices: Artificial internal organsDiagnostic and Therapeutic EMDs. Module 3 Introduction to Control systems Engineering: concept of automatic controlopen loop and closed loop systemsservomechanismsblock diagramstransfer functions. Representation of control components and systemsTranslational and rotational mechanical componentsseries and parallel combinationscomparators, integrating devices, hydraulic servomotors, temperature control systems, and speed control systems. Module 4 System response:  First and Second order system response to step, pulse, ramp, and sinusoidal inputsystems with distance, velocity lag. Control system analysis:  Transient response of simple control systemsStability of control systemsRouth stability criteria error analysis. Module 5 Frequency response analysis:  polar, rectangular and logarithmic plotsexperimental determination of frequency responseBode, and Nyquist stability criteriaGain and phase margin. Root locus of simple transfer functionstransient response from root locus. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. M 506 Mechatronics  W.Bolton, Pearson Understanding Electromechanical Engineering  Lawrence J.Kamm Mechatronics  Dan S. Necsuleseu, Pearson Control System Engineering  T.J.Nagrath and M.Gopal Automatic Control Theory  Ravan Modern Control Engineering  Katsuhiko Ogata Control Systems  A.Nagoor Kani Modern Control Engineering  Dorf, Pearson THERMAL ENGINEERING  I 2+2+0 Module 1 Steam Engineering: Properties of steam  wet, dry and superheated steam  dryness fraction enthalpy and internal energy  entropy of steam  temperature entropy diagram  process  Mollier chart  Rankine cycle for wet, dry and superheated steam. Steam Generators  classification  modern steam generators  boiler mountings and accessories. Module 2 Steam nozzles  Mass flow rate  throat pressure for maximum discharge  throat area  effect of friction  super saturated flow. Steam turbines: velocity triangles, work done, governing, and efficiencies. Module 3 135
Gas turbine Plants  Open and closed cycles  thermodynamics cycles  regeneration, re heating inter cooling  efficiency and performance of gas turbines. Rotary Compressors  Analysis of rotary compressors  centrifugal and axial compressors. Combustion  combustion chambers of gas turbines  cylindrical, annular and industrial type combustion chamber  combustion intensity  combustion chambers efficiency  pressure loss combustion process and stability loop. Module 4 Introduction to solar energy  solar collectors  Liquid flat plate collectors  principle  thermal losses and efficiency  characteristics  overall loss coefficient  thermal analysis  useful heat gained by fluid  mean plate temperature  performance  focussing type solar collectors  solar concentrators and receivers  sun tracking system  characteristics  optical losses  thermal performance  solar pond  solar water heating  solar thermal power generation (Description Only) Module 5 Thermal power plants: layout and operation of steam and diesel power plants  coal burners stockers  cooling ponds & towers  chimneys  draught  dust collectors  precipitators  feed water heaters  evaporators  steam condensers  coal handling  ash handling. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Power plant technology Thermodynamic and heat power engineering Thermal Engineering Gas Turbine Theory Solar Energy Utilization Thermal engineering E. L. Wahid Mathur and Mehta P. L. Ballaney Cohen & Rogers G. D. Rai R.K. Rajput.
COMPUTER LABORATORY M 507 a) b) c) d) e) 0+0+3
Familiarization of operating systems. Use of file directories, editors, compilers and file managers etc. Familiarization of Word processing packages – editing, formatting and printing Familiarization with spread sheet packages for graphical representation of data Introduction to computer aided drafting – drawing simple objects Programming experiments in C to cover control structures functions, arrays, structures, pointers and files Examples: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. Counting characters, lines and words Checking leap year Finding sum of digits and reversing a number Generating Prime numbers, Fibonacci numbers and Angstrom numbers Sine and Cosine series Sorting of numbers, strings and records Matrix addition and multiplication 136
viii. ix. x. xi.
Implementation of dynamic memory allocation Implementation of linked lists File handling Problems using Command line arguments MACHINE TOOL LABORATORY
M 508
0+0+3 Study of Centre Lathe: Origin of the name lath and lathe specification of lathe head stock, tail stock, carriage, cross slide, compound rest, guide ways, feed gar box, apron box, micro structural requirement of bed material. Accessories: Chuck, two and three jaws, and faceplate, follow rest, tool post grinder, and centres. Study of Machining technology: Study of metal cutting – tool terminology as per ASA, ISO, DIN standards –merchant’s circle, Lee & Shaffer theory, thick & thin zone models  tool materials, coated HSS, ceramic, CBN, diamond etc, inserts, chip breakers  Tool wear mechanisms, VB determination  Use of Taylor’s equation at shop floor  Machineabilty index  Role of specific heat in cutting fluids. – Cutter types and selection – Abrasive machining (Ra values) – Diamond turning of parts (Ra values)  Production of axi – symmetric parts – Production of prismatic components – Hole machining – Gear machining. Study of Basic measurement and devices: accuracy, precision, sensitivity, and standards of measurements, metrology lab; standard and calibration, linear measurements, limit gauges (types and design), Taylor’s principle, comparators (optical, mechanical, electrical, pneumatic), slip gauges, optical projector with digital measuring. – Geometrical measurements: angular measurements, vernier and optical protractors, sine bar.  Measurement of light wave interference, flatness and parallelism and round measurement, checking the dimensional accuracy of slip gauges with interference microscope.  Surface characterization: measurement of surface finishes RMS and CLA values, waviness, cut off, skid, instruments for measurement of roughens of a sand cast surface, slip gauge surface, ground bore of an engine cylinder, importance of surface finish on crack initiation. – Screw thread terminology, best wire size, two and three wire methods pitch measurement – Gear metrology (spur gear): run out checking, composite errors, base pitch measurement, profile measurement, checking backlash, alignment errors. – Advanced measuring devices: CMM, machine vision, toolmakers microscope, limitations, SEM, & TEM, laser measuring instruments, laser micrometer and alignment test using laser interferometry.
Experiments Measurement of cutting forces in machine tools using dynamometers –process capability study of Machines –grinding of tool angle using tool and cutter grinding machine in a tool room –Turning & taper turning, turning & thread cutting,  Indexing & Gear cutting, pocket milling–– Study of tool and machine monitoring systems. Angular measurements use of sine bar and slip gauges, measurement of angle using clinometer, bevel protractor – calibration of plug and snap gauges using slip gauges – Roundness measurement : cylindricity, concentricity, perpendicularity using dial stand and measuring bench – Surface finish measurement. Optical profile projector: study of profile of gear tooth, screw threads, other tools – Tool makers microscope: to study tool geometry, screw threads, measurement of turning tool wear of VB & KT values –Flatness measurement of surface table using auto collimator – Lathe alignment test using laser interferometer – gear concentricity tester, gear roll tester and gear tooth measurement.
137
Student’s assessment, continuous evaluation, awarding of sessional marks, record bonafides, oral examination etc and university examination shall be done by Faculty members. References 1. Acharkan. N. Machine Tool Design Vol. 1 to 4, MIR Publication. 2. HMT Production Technology, TMH.
138
SIXTH SEMESTER
139
MECHANICS OF MATERIALS M 601 2+2+0 Module 1 Definition of stress and strain – components of stress and strain – Hook’s law – Plane stress and strain – stress at a point – measurement of strain – strain rosette – Mohr’s circle of strains – differential equations of equilibrium – boundary conditions – compatibility equations – stress functions – 2D problems in rectangular coordinates – solutions by polynomials of various degrees and effects – Saint Venant’s principle – determination of displacements. Module 2 3D stress and strain – principal stresses – strain ellipsoid and director surfaces – stress invarients – determination of maximum and minimum shearing stress – homogeneous deformation – strain at a point – principal axes of strain – principal strain and invarients of strain – differential equations of equilibrium – boundary conditions – conditions of compatibility – determination of displacements – strain energy – uniqueness of solutions. Module 3 2D problems in polar coordinates – general equations in polar coordinates – stress distribution symmetrical about an axis – pure bending of curved bars – strain components in polar coordinates – displacements for symmetrical stress distributions – rotating disk with and without central hole – disk of uniform strength. Module 4 Thick cylinders – spherical shells – compound cylinders –rotating rims and cylinders – long cylinders. Module 5 Curved beams – bending by eccentric loading – crane hooks – c clamp – chain link – columns of machine tools. Photo elastic techniques of study of stress – description only. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Theory of Elasticity Advanced Mechanics of Materials Advanced mechanics of Solids Mechanics of Solids Introduction to Mechanics of Solids Mechanics of solids Timoshenko & Goodyear Seelv & Smith L.S.Srinath Lardner & Archer Ezer P.Popov Mubeen, Pearson
140
METROLOGY AND INSTRUMENTATION M 602 3+1+0 Module 1 General measurements concepts: Principles for achieving accuracy; Methods for estimating accuracy and precision, precision Vs accuracy, systematic and constant errors; progressive, random, erratic, drunken errors; statical concepts in metrology, statcial analysis of measurement data, control chart techniques – comparators – General principle of measurements: line & end measurements, standards; linear measurements, basic units, and quantities for displacement, mass, time, temperature & optics; systems of limits and fits; selecting & assigning of fits, tolerances for linear dimensions. Module 2 Gauges: classification, design of gauges, gauge maker’s tolerances, wear allowance, gauges materials & gauge manufactures. Form measurements: straightness, flatness, squreness, circularity & cylindricity – Measurement of angles & tapers: sine bars, angle gauges: auto collimator, clinometer & spirit level; taper gauges, bevel protractors. Module 3 Measurement of surface finish: surface structure, integrity, texture, roughens, waviness, lay, cut off, RMS & CLA values, roughness values produced by machining processes, instruments for different surface finish measurements, concept of apparent to real area of contact of mating surfaces, applications in clutch plate surface, brake liner, inner race of a bearing, cylinder liner, machine tool guide way, surface to be painted etc & importance of surface finish on crack initiation. Optical measuring instruments: interferometry, optical flats, optimeters, and optical projectors, tool maker’s microscope, limitations, SEM & TEM. Module 4 Advanced measuring devices: Laser interferometry, applications – computer controlled coordinate measuring machine; machine vision & non contact CMM  Gauging and measurements of screw threads: Gauging methods for manufacturing, screw thread terminology, standard specification, and formulae, tolerance, thread gauge measurement, measuring equipment, application of thread gauges – Measuring of gears: Measuring methods for runouts, pitch profile, lead, backlash, tooth thickness, composite elements, inspection equipment. Module 5 Generalized measurement system: measurement terminology, input, out put configurations, static characteristics, errors in measurement, drift, noise, accuracy, precision static sensitivity and resolution, loading effects on instruments Detector transducer elements: principles of calibration, applications in measurement of strain, types of strain gauges, application in measurement of load & torque, measurement of force and torque, hydraulic, pneumatic & train gauge type load cells, hydraulic & electric dynamometers, measurement of vibration, vibrometers & accelerometers, theory of seismic instruments  Temperature measurement: Use of Bi metals, pressure thermometer thermocouple, optical & radiation pyrometer – magnetic flow meter – thermal conductivity gauges. References ASME Beckwith 1. Doeblin 2. Hume 3. Sharpe Hand book of industrial Metrology Mechanical measurements, 5/e, Pearson Measurement systems, 4/e, McGraw Hill Metrology, McDonald Metrology, ELBS 141
Taher

Metrology, ELBS THERMAL ENGINEERING  II
M 603
`
2+2+0
Module 1 Working of two stroke & four stroke  Petrol and Diesel Engines (Review Only)  valve timing diagrams  Fuels  Chemical structure  qualities, ratings of fuels  Alternative fuels, Alcohol, vegetable oils, biogas. Types of Engines  Wankel E/n, Stirling E/n, Stratified charge e/n, VCR E/n, free piston E/n. Fuel air cycle (actual) for petrol and diesel engines  variation of specific heats  heat losses  Dissociation Module 2 Carburation  Air fuel mixture requirements  stoichiometry and excess air calculations  types of carburetors  Fuel injection systems  classifications  fuel injection pump  nozzle  direct and indirect injection  Injection in S. I. Engine  M. P. F. I. System  Ignition system  Battery & Magneto type  firing order  Ignition timing and spark advance  Lubrication systems  types properties of lubricants  additives for lubricants  Heat rejection and cooling  Theory of engine heat transfer  types of cooling system  Air and liquid system  Super charging & turbo charging. Module 3 Combustion in S. I. E/n  Ignition limits  stages of combustion  combustion quality  Ignition lag Flame propagation  Abnormal combustion  detonation  effects  Theory, chemistry and control flash point, fire point & viscosity index  combustion chamber design considerations. Module 4 Combustion in C. I. Engines  Air Fuel ratio in C. I. Engines  Ignition Lag  diesel knock Controlling Methods  Various stages of combustion  vaporization of fuel droplets and spray formation  Air motion  Swirl  combustion chamber  design considerations. Module 5 Pollutant formation and control in S. I. And C. I. Engine, Nox, CO, Unburned hydro Carbon and particulate  Exhaust gas treatment  catalytic converter  Thermal reaction  Particulate Trap. Engine operating characteristics  Testing of I. C. Engines  Indicated power  Brake power Volumetric Efficiency  Heat balance Test  Morse Test  Measurement of exhaust smoke and exhaust emission. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals Internal Combustion Engine and Air Pollution Internal Combustion Engine Internal Combustion Engine A course in internal combustion Engine John B. Heywood Obert E. F. Lichty L. C. V. Genesan Mathur and Sharma.
HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER M 604 Module 1 142 2+2+0
Introduction to basic modes of heat transfer  Scope and application of heat transfer principles in engineering practice. Conduction Fourier law  thermal conductivity of solids, liquids and gases factors affecting thermal conductivity. Thermal heat, conducting equation in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates  one dimensional steady state conduction with and without heat generation  unsteady state conduction. Conduction through homogenous and composite surfaces plane wall cylindrical and spherical  variable thermal conductivity shape factors  heat flow through corners and edges. Module 2 Convection  Newton's law  concept of boundary layer  significance of Prandtil number  boundary layer equation  flat  plate heat transfer equations by integral method Laminar and turbulent flow of heat transfer in tubes  Forced convection in turbulent flow  Reynolds analogy. Application of dimensional analysis in forced and natural convection. empirical relations, Combined effect of convection and conduction. Over all heat transfer coefficient  critical radius of insulation. Module 3 Heat Exchangers type of heat exchangers. Log mean temperature difference. Design of shell and tube exchangers  NTU method of evaluation of heat exchangers  heat exchange  effectiveness application of straight rectangular and triangular fins effectiveness of fins. Module 4 Radiation  Nature of thermal radiation  Definitions and concept  Monochromatic and total emissive power  Absorptivity  Reflectivity transmissivity, Black Grey and Real surfaces. Concept of Black body Planks distribution law  Kirchoffs law Wein's displacement lawGeometric factors of simple configuration. Heat exchange by radiation between black surfaces  Large parallel black plate  equal parallel and opposite black squares, discs, black rectangles perpendicular to each other having a common edgeheat exchange by radiation between large parallel planes of different emissivity (no derivations  simple problems with the use of chart and equations) Module 5 Mass transfer  introduction to mass transfer  Pick's law of diffusion in gases. Diffusion coefficient. Analogy between the phenomena of heat transfer and mass transfer. Elementary problems. Condensation and boiling  film Dropwise condensationfilm boiling and pool boiling. Bubble growth and collapse empirical relations for heat transfer with change of phase (description only) Numerical methods in conduction (finite difference and finite element methods description only). References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Elements of Heat Transfer Jacob Hawkins Principles of Heat Transfer Krieth Heat and Mass Transfer Fckert & Drake Heat transfer Holmann Engineering Heat & Mass Transfer R.K. Rajput. Engineering Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer  Gupta and Rajendra Prasad
143
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT AND ENGINEERING ECONOMICS M605 3+1+0 Part A – Principles of Management Module 1 Functions of management: planning, organizing, staffing, directing, motivating, communicating, controlling and coordinating – Organizational structureline, staff and functional relationshipspan of control and delegation. Module 2 Ogranisational behaviour: stress, meaning, causes, effects, strategies for coping with stressmotivationtypes of motives, theories of work motivationgroup dynamicsnature of work group, group cohesiveness, group performance, group norms. Marketing management: identification of products, pricing, promotion and distribution channels. Module 3 Formation of companies: proprietary and partnershipjoint stock, private limited, public limited companiesprivate sector, public sector, joint sector and cooperative sector. Wages and incentives: Time and piece rate system, bonus, incentivesmonetary and nonmonetary Total quality managementreengineeringmanagement by objectives Part B – Engineering Economics Module 4 Basic concepts: Theory of demand and supplyprice mechanismfactors of productionland, labour, capital and organizationnational incomedifficulties in estimationtaxationdirect and indirectprogressive and regressiveblack moneyinflationdemand pull and cost pusheffects of price increases. Module 5 Indian financial system: Reserve bank of Indiacommercial bank systempublic sector banksdevelopment financial institutionsIDBI, ICICI, SIDBI, IRBIinvestment institutionsUTIinsurance companiesstock marketfunctionsproblems faced by the stock marketsrole of the public sectorprivatisationmultinational corporations and their impact on the Indian economy. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Benga & Sharma Fred Lufthans Keith Davis Philip Kotler K.K.Dewett A.N.Agarwal Kargaweski Mazda O.P.Khanna – – – – – – – – Industrial Organisation and Management Organisational Behaviour Human Behaviour at Work Marketing Management Modern Economic Theory Indian Economy Operation management, Pearson Engineering management, Pearson Industrial Engineering & Management
M 606
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING 3+1+0 144
Module 1 Evolution of CAD/CAM and CIM segments of generic CIM, computers and workstation, elements of interactive graphics, input/ out put display, storage devices in CAD  an overview of CIM software  2D Graphics: line drawing algorithms, DDA line algorithm – circle drawing, bressnham`s circle drawing algorithm– 2D translation, rotation, scaling – clipping 3D Graphics (basic only). Design process – CAD process: wireframe, surface, solid modeling; Engineering analysis; design review & evaluation, automated drafting – CAD hard ware, software, data presentation, CAD software packages Module 2 Numerical control: Need  advantages & disadvantages – classifications – Point to point, straight cut & contouring positioning  incremental & absolute systems – open loop & closed loop systems – DDA integrator & Interpolators – resolution – CNC & DNC. Programmable logic controllers (PLC): need – relays logic ladder program – timers  Simple exercises only. Devices in N.C. systems: Driving devices  feed back devices: encoders, moire fringes, digitizer, resolver, inductosyn, tachometer. Module 3 NC part programming: part programming fundamentals  manual programming – NC coordinate systems and axes – tape format – sequence number, preparatory functions, dimension words, speed word, feed world, tool world, miscellaneous functions – programming exercises. Computer aided part programming: concept & need of CAP – CNC languages – APT language structure: geometry commands, motion commands, postprocessor commands, compilation control commands – programming exercises – programming with interactive graphics. Module 4 Automated process planning: Process planning, general methodology of group technology, code structures of variant & generative process planning methods, AI in process planning, process planning software. Module 5 Robotics: Industrial robots and their applications for transformational and handling activities, configuration & motion, actuators, sensors and end effectors, feature like work envelop, precision of movement, weight carrying capacity, robot programming languages. Vision systems: introduction to intelligent robots. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Craig john Groover M.P. Hearn & Baker New man & Sproull Petruzella Frank.D. Yoram koren Jonn Craig Introduction to Robotics CAD/CAM, PHI. Computer graphics (in C version), Prentice Hall. Principles of interactive Graphics, McGraw – Hill. Programmable logic controllers. Numerical control of machine tools, McGrawHill Introduction to Robotics HEAT ENGINES LABORATORY M 607 145 0+0+ 3
Study of systems and components of IC Engines and automobiles  study of dynamometers used in engine testing  study of IC Engine repairs and maintenance. Study of boilers, boiler mountings and accessories  study of steam engine parts and systems. Testing of IC engines • Performance analysis of IC engine using computerized test rigLoad test on petrol and diesel engines determination of indicated and brake thermal efficiencies  mechanical efficiency  relative efficiency  volumetric efficiency  airfuel ratio and compression ratio  valve timing diagram  retardation test  Morse test  heat balance  effect of varying the rate of cooling water and varying the speed on the performance characteristics of engines. Testing of steam boiler boiler trial  steam calorimeters and steam nozzles  performance test on steam engines performance test on steam turbines. Testing of fuels and lubricants  determination of flash and fire points of petroleum products determination of kinematics and absolute viscosity of lubricating oils  determination of calorific
146
ADVANCED MACHINE TOOL LABORATORY M 608 0+0+3 Study of Vibration: two and multi degree freedom systems, signature analysis and preventive maintenance, noise control. Study of Automated process planning: process planning, general methodology of group technology, code structures variant generative process planning methods, AI in process planning. Study of Quality circle concepts – ISO 9000, ISO 4000 series, QS 9000 – quality system standards, TQM,  SQC, control charts for inspection, charts for variables, R charts, six sigma concepts – Taguchi methods. Study of Fundamentals of Numerical control: principles of NC  incremental & absolute positioning, PTP, straight & contouring machining, open & closed loop system  DDA integrator & different interpolators  feed back devices  lead screw  stepper motor  advantages & disadvantages  NC, CNC and DNC  punched tapes – manual part programming, preparatory function, G codes, speed word, feed word, M codes, tool word etc, computer aided part programming, APT languages – tooling for CNC, tooling systems, automatic tool changing tool magazines etc  principles, need of machining centers. Study of Programmable logic controllers (PLC): need – relays logic ladder program – timers; on & off delay timers, cascading & retentive timers – counters; cascading counters. Study of Tolerance charting techniques: operational sequences for typical shaft type components, preparation of process drawing for different operation, tolerance worksheets and centrality analysis. Study of Design of jigs and fixtures: degree of freedom  principles of location and clamping  principles of jig design – fool proofing  elements of jigs  design of jigs for drilling, reaming – principles of fixture design, locators and different types of clamps – elements of fixture – provision for tool setting – design of fixture for milling, turning, boring, and grinding operations, inspection of assembly fixtures – modular fixturing – concepts and applications – use of software for building fixture – tool design for forging, drop forging dies and auxiliary tools – upset or forging machine dies. Study of Design of sheet metal blanking and piercing dies: Die design – power press types – die clearances – cutting forces – punch and die mountings – types of construction – fine blanking – die design fundamentals – materials for dies & allied elements – multiplexing of tools.
147
Experiments Key way slotting, side & face milling of a rod to make square head – 5mm material removal by Shaping – Drill 10.5 mm. CBR 16 mm, 10 mm deep – Surface grinding, cylindrical grinding and tool grinding  Vibration study of machine tools with an analyser. Preparation of process plans using CAPP software –Planning of experiments for process improvement using software – simulation of factory layout  facilities layout analysis – line balancing – materials requirement planning – inventory analysis – quality assurance using control charts – preparation of process sheet for manufacturing of spindle like & housing type component – preparation of process plan & cost estimation for the manufacture of typical product like submersible pump, three phase motor etc. Preparation of CNC programs for drilling, grooving, parting, linear interpolation, circular interpolation, etc. – Simulate and produce a component has valley shaped undercuts along its lenth, etc. PLC operated solenoid valves. Design of a jig and a fixture for drilling & milling operation Design of assembly, inspection, fixtures  Design of sheet metal working dies: feed strip layout design, force calculations, press tool design (forming & cutting), assembly & dismantling of simple die casting dies  Design & fabrication of simple bending dies – Design of forging dies: product requirement & design of forging dies – study of analysis software for mould flow, melt flow, metal forming. Student’s assessment, continuous evaluation, awarding of sessional marks, record bonafides, oral examination etc and university examination shall be done by Faculty members. References 1. Acharkan. N. 2. HMT 3. Petruzella Frank. D 4. Yoram Koren Machine Tool Design Vol.1 to 4, MIR Publication. Production Technology, TMH. Programmable logic controllers. NC machines tools, McGraw Hill.
148
SEVENTH SEMESTER
149
GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION M 701 2+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to gas dynamics: control volume and system approaches acoustic waves and sonic velocity  Mach number  classification of fluid flow based on mach number  mach conecompressibility factor  General features of one dimensional flow of a compressible fluid  continuity and momentum equations for a control volume. Module 2 Isentropic flow of an ideal gas: basic equation  stagnation enthalpy, temperature, pressure and densitystagnation, acoustic speed  critical speed of sound dimensionless velocitygoverning equations for isentropic flow of a perfect gas  critical flow area  stream thrust and impulse function. Steady one dimensional isentropic flow with area changeeffect of area change on flow parameterschocking convergent nozzle  performance of a nozzle under decreasing back pressure De lavel nozzle  optimum area ratio effect of back pressure  nozzle discharge coefficients  nozzle efficiencies. Module 3 Simple frictional flow: adiabatic flow with friction in a constant area ductgoverning equations fanno line limiting conditions  effect of wall friction on flow properties in an Isothermal flow with friction in a constant area ductgoverning equations  limiting conditions. Steady one dimensional flow with heat transfer in constant area ducts governing equations  Rayleigh line entropy change caused by heat transfer  conditions of maximum enthalpy and entropy Module 4 Effect of heat transfer on flow parameters: Intersection of Fanno and Rayleigh lines. Shock waves in perfect gas properties of flow across a normal shock  governing equations  Rankine Hugoniat equations  Prandtl's velocity relationship  converging diverging nozzle flow with shock thickness shock strength. Module 5 Propulsion: Air craft propulsion:  types of jet engines  energy flow through jet engines, thrust, thrust power and propulsive efficiency turbojet componentsdiffuser, compressor, combustion chamber, turbines, exhaust systems. Performance of turbo propeller engines, ramjet and pulsejet, scramjet engines. Rocket propulsion  rocket engines, Basic theory of equations  thrust equation effective jet velocity  specific impulse  rocket engine performance  solid and liquid propellant rockets  comparison of various propulsion systems. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Compressible fluid flow  A. H. Shapiro Fundamentals of compressible flow with aircraft and rocket propulsion  S. M. Yahya Elements of gas dynamics  Liepman & Roshko Aircraft & Missile propulsion  Zucrow Gas dynamics  M.J. Zucrow & Joe D.Holfman INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 150
M 702
2+1+0
Module 1 Introduction: Evolution of Industrial Engineering Fields of application of Industrial Engineering Functions of Industrial EngineerOrganisational structure of Industrial Engineering Department. Production and Productivity: Types of productioncontinuous productionintermittent production. Productivityproductivity indexfactors affecting productivitytechniques for productivity improvement. Value Engineering: Historical perspectivereasons for poor valuestypes of valuesthe different phases of value analysisapplications of value analysis. Module 2 Plant design: Plant locationfactors influencing plant location. Plant layouttypes of plant layoutintroduction to layouts based on group technology, just in time and cellular manufacturing systems. Material handling: Principles of material handlingselection of material handling devicestypes of material handling equipments. Maintenance and replacement of equipments: Types of maintenance. Depreciationmethods of calculating depreciation. Selection of equipmentsmethods for replacement studies. Module 3 Methods Engineering: Process charts and flow diagramsMicro motion studyWork measurement techniques. Job evaluation and merit rating: Objectives of job evaluationMethods of job evaluation. Objectives and uses of merit ratingMerit rating plans. Module 4 Industrial relations: FatigueCommunication in industryIndustrial disputesTrade unionsQuality circlesBISISOLabour welfareIndustrial safetyStatutory provisions in labour legislations. Ergonomics: Objectives and applications. Module 5 Inventory control: Determination of Economic order quantity and reorder level. Quality control: Destructive and nondestructive testing methods. Statistical quality controlprocess control chartsacceptance sampling. Cost accounting and control: Elements of cost Selling price of a productTypes of costAllocation of overheads.
References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Production system Production control Human factors in Engg design Industrial Engg & Management Industrial Organisation & Management Industrial Engg Value Engg Manufacturing organization & Management Time & Motion Study 151 Riggs Hiejet Mc Cormic E.J. O.P.Khanna Banga & Sarma A.P.Verma Mudge Amrine Lowry
10. Quality Control

Hansen
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING M 703 2+1+0
Module 1 Principles of refrigeration: Thermodynamics of refrigeration  Carnot cycle, reversed carnot cycle, heat pump, and refrigerating machine coefficient of performance  unit of refrigeration refrigeration methods conventional refrigeration systems. Air refrigeration system Bell Coleman cycle  C.O.P. capacity work and refrigerant flow requirements in Bell  Coleman cycle. Module 2 Vapour compression system: simple cycle comparison with Carnot cycle  theoretical, actual and reactive  COP effect of operating parameters on COP  wet, dry and superheated compression under cooling  actual cycle representation on TS and PH diagrams simple problems. Advanced vapour compression systems  multistage vapour compression systems  flash chamber multiple compression and evaporation systems cascading  simple problems. Module 3 Vapour absorption systems: simple, cycles  actual cycle  ammonia water and lithium bromide water systems  COP  electrolux system. Refrigerant and their properties: Nomenclature  suitability of refrigerants for various applications  unconventional refrigeration methods Vortex tube, steamjet, magnetic (cryogenics) refrigeration and thermoelectric refrigeration  applied refrigeration house hold refrigerators  unit air conditioners and water coolers  ice plant cold storage. Module 4 Refrigeration system components: condensers  water and air cooled condensers  evaporative condensers  expansion devises  capillary tube constant pressure expansion valve  thermostatic expansion valve  float valve and solenoid valve  evaporators  natural convection coils  flooded evaporators  direct expansion coils. Reciprocating compressors: single stage and multistage compressors  work done optimum pressure ratio effect of interfolding  volumetric efficiency effect of clearance  isothermal and adiabatic efficiency  compressed air motors. Rotodynamic compressors: Screw and vane type compressors  principle of operation  hermetic, semihermetic and open type refrigeration compressors. Module 5 Principles of air conditioning: Psychrometry and psychrometric chart thermodynamics of human comfort  effective temperature  comfort chart applied psychrometry  sensible heat factor psychometric processproblems. Winter air conditioning: heating load calculations humidifiers and humidistat. Summer air conditioning: cooling load calculations  year round air conditioning unitary and central systems  principles of air distribution  design of air duct systems. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Refrigeration and air conditioning Refrigeration and air conditioning Refrigeration and air conditioning Principles of Refrigeration 152 Ballaney P. L. Stocker W. F. Jordan and Protester Roy J. Dossat
DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY M 704 2+1+0
Module 1 Balancing:  Balancing of rotating masses, static balancing and dynamic balancing, Balancing of several masses rotating in same plane, Balancing of several masses rotating in several planes, Balancing machines. Balancing of reciprocating masses:  The effect of inertia force of the reciprocating mass on the engine. Partial primary balance. Partial balancing of locomotive, Hammer blow, Variation of tractive effort, Swaying couple. Coupled locomotives, Balancing of multi cylinder inline engines, vengines, Radial engines, Direct and Reverse cranks Module 2 Vibrations:  Definitions, simple harmonic motion. Single degree freedom systems: Undamped free vibrations:  Equations of motion Natural frequency, Energy method, Equilibrium methods, Rayleigh’s methods, Equivalent stiffness of spring combinations. Damped free vibrations:  Viscous damping, Free vibrations with viscous damping, overdamped system, critically damped system, underdamped system, Logarithmic decrement, viscous dampers, coulomb damping. Forced Vibrations:  Forced harmonic excitation Rotating unbalance, Reciprocating unbalance. Energy dissipated by damping, vibration isolation and Transmissibility. Vibration measuring instruments. Module 3 Two degree freedom systems:  Principal modes of vibration, Rectilinear and angular modes, systems with damping, vibration absorbers, centrifugal pendulum damper, dry friction damper, untuned viscous damper. Multidegree of freedom system:  Free vibrations, equations of motion, Influence coefficients method, lumped mass and distributed mass systems, Stodola method, Dunkerly’s method, Holzer’s method, Matrix iteration method. Torsional Vibrations:  Torsionally equivalent shaft, torsional vibration of tworotor, threerotor, and geared systems. Module 4 Critical speeds of shafts:  Critical speed of a light shaft having a single disc without damping. Critical speeds of a light cantilever shaft with a large heavy disc at its end. Transient vibration:  Laplace transformation, response to an impulsive input, response to a step input, response to a pulse input, phase plane method, shock spectrum. Nonlinear vibrations:  Phase plane, undamped free vibration with nonlinear spring forces, hard spring, soft spring, Perturbation method, Forced vibration with nonlinear forces, Duffings equation, self excited vibrations. Module 5 Noise control:  Sound propagation, decibels, acceptance noise levels, Air columns, Doppler effect, acousticl measurements, microphones and loud speakers, Recording and reproduction of sound, fourier’s theorem and musical scale, Acoustics of buildings, Acoustic impedence filters and human ear. 153
References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Theory of Machines  Thomas Bevan Theory of Machines  P.L. Ballaney Mechanical Vibrations, V edition  G.K. Groover Theory of Vibrations with applications, III Edn  W.T. Thomson Mechanical Vibrations  S. Graham Kelly, Schaum’s outlines Fundamentals of Vibrations  Leonard Meirovitch, Mac Graw Hill A text book of sound  L.P. Sharma & H.C. Saxena Engineering Noise Control  D.A. Bies & C.H. Hausen. Noise & Vibration Control  Leo N. Beraneck MACHINE DESIGN AND DRAWING  I M 705 2+0+2 Module 1 Definitions  Design principles – common engineering materials – selection and their properties – general steps in design – design criteria – types of failures  types of cyclic loading. Stresses in Machine parts – tension, compression and shear –elastic constantsworking stressfactor of safetybending and torsioncombined stressesstress concentrationfatigueendurance limitfatigue diagramfatigue factorstheories of failureGoodman and Soderberg lines Detachable jointssocket and spigot cotter joint, knuckle joint – pins, keys, splines set screws, threaded fasteners and power screws – Shaft coupling – sleeve coupling – split muff coupling – flange coupling – protected type flange coupling – thick and thin cylinders Riveted joints: Lap joint – Butt joint – failures of riveted joint – strength of riveted joint – efficiency of riveted joint – design of longitudinal butt joint for boiler – design of circumferential lap joint for boiler – joints of uniform strength – Lozange joint – eccentrically loaded riveted joint. Module 2 Springs – Classification and uses of springs – design of helical springs – effect of end turns – energy absorbed – deflection – design for fluctuating loads – vibration in springs – buckling of spring materials Shafts – Torsion and bending of shafts – hollow shafts – design of shafts for strength an deflection – effect of keyways – transverse vibration and critical speed of shafts Design of IC engine parts – connecting rod – piston – flywheel – Welded joints: Lap joint – Butt joint – weld symbols parallel and transverse fillet welds – strength of welded joints – axially loaded welded joints – eccentrically loaded welded joints. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Mechanical Engg. Design Machine Design Machine Design Machine Design Machine Design an integral approach Machine Design data hand book Elements of Machine Design – – – – – – – 154 Joseph Shigley Mubeen Black R. K. Jain Norton, Pearson Lingayah Vol I. Pandya & Shah
Note For the University Examination 100% choice may be given. i.e. two questions from each module with full choice. OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  I) CMELRTA 7061 3+1+0 Module 1: Classical optimization techniques Single variable optimization – Multivariable optimization with no constraints – Hessian matrix – Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier method Multivariable optimization with inequality constraints – KuhnTucker conditions. Module 2: Onedimensional unconstrained minimization Elimination methods – unrestricted search method – Fibonacci method – Interpolation methods – Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation methods. Module 3: Unconstrained minimization Gradient of a function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hooke and Jeeve’s method. Module 4: Integer – Linear programming problem Gomory’s cutting plane method – Gomory’s method for all integer programming problems, mixed integer programming problems. Module 5: Network Techniques Shortest path model – Dijkstra`s Algorithm – Floyd`s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem – PRIM algorithm – Maximal Flow Problem algorithm. References 1. Optimization theory and application  S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd. 2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering  A.D.Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla, Pearson Education Asia. 3. Principles of Operations Researc for Management  F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena, Richard D. Irwin, INC. 4. Operation Research an introduction  H. A. Taha, Eastern Economy Edition. 5. Operations Research  R. Panneerselvam, PHI PLANT ENGINEERING AND MAINTENANCE (ELECTIVEI) 3+1+0
M 7062
Module 1 Wear and Lubrication: wearclassificationtheories of wearanalytical treatment of wear stages of weareffect of moisture, gas and liquid on weareffects of temperaturecorrosive wear frettingfatiguecalculation of working lifedesign considerations. Module 2
155
Lubricants: solid, fluid and semifluidsynthetic lubricantgeneral properties and usestests and classificationaniline pointcloud, pour and flash pointcarbon residueflash and fire points sulphur contentlubricant additiveslubricant systemslubrication equipments and components. Module 3 Maintenance: Breakdown and preventive maintenancedeterioration and failure analysis planning, scheduling, and controlling of maintenance workorganisation for maintenance. Replacement:  causes of deterioration and obsolescencesudden and gradual obsolescence and deteriorationeconomic analysisMAPI method. Evolution of maintenance managementSWOT analysissubjective methods of evaluationobjective criteria of evaluation. Module 4 Reliability: concept and definitionchance of failurewear and failure application of stochastic model for reliability studiesreliability of series, parallel and stand by systemsestimation of parameters of failure distributionmaintainability and availabilityproblems. Module 5 Non destructive testing and diagnostic instruments:  inventory control of spare partssimple problems. Safety management:  accident prevention programdesigning of safe operationfire protection –legal provisions for safety in industry. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Standard Handbook of Plant Engineering  Robert C.Rosder Reliability&Maintainability Management  Balbir S.Shillon Industrial Maintainence Management  Sushilkumar, Srivasthava Handbook of Tribology  Bharat Bhooshan, B.K.Guptha Inspection, Quality control and Reliability  S.C.Sharma Maintenance and Spare parts management  P.Gopalakrishnan, A.K.Banergy. WELDING TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE  I) M 7063 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction:  Welding as a fabrication process advantages and limitations – principal types of welding process and their characteristics. Soldering & Brazing: Soldering – principles of soldering, TinLead binary diagram different types of solders – need of fluxes for soldering and different fluxes used – method of soldering – silver soldering and aluminium soldering – advantages and limitations. Brazing:  Principle of Brazing – brazing alloys & fluxes methods of brazing – aluminium brazing – advantages & limitations. Pressure Welding Process:  Forge welding spot welding – seam welding – projection welding butt welding – flash butt welding – welding of tubes & percussion welding. Module 2 Fusion Welding: Oxyacetylene welding – chemistry of oxyacetylene welding flame – type of flames & adjustments – welding set up & arrangements – preparation & storing of acetylene as well 156
as oxygen gases rightward & leftward welding techniques – filler metals & fluxes used for gas welding – weld movements – welding of: cast iron, stainless steel, aluminium, copper, nickel & magnesium safety rules in oxyacetylene welding. Module 3 Electric arc welding: Electric properties of the arc – arc column theories: ion theory & electron theory heat distribution in an electric arc – arc welding power sources – their specific characteristics advantages & limitations – arrangements for straight & reverse polarities – striking of an arc – types of weld movements – welding positions – welding symbols – Electrodes – needs & types of electrodes covering – classification of arc welding electrodes. Arc welding Processes: Carbon arc welding – single & twin carbon arcs – flux shielded metal arc welding – submerged arc welding – TIG & MIG welding and atomic hydrogen welding. Module 4 Special or Unique welding processes: Various welding processes – their specific applications – neat sketches advantages & limitations: Electroslag welding – Plasma arc welding – Ultrasonic welding – Electron beam welding – Laser beam welding – friction welding – explosive welding & cold welding processes. Module 5 Basic metallurgy of welding: Three prominent zones: weld metal zone – heat affected zone & the unaffected zone. Welding Stresses: causes of development of residual stresses – methods of relieving or controlling of residual stresses in weldments. Defects: commonly found defects in welded joints. Inspection & testing of weldments:  Needs of inspection & testing of weldments – the various testing methods – destructive tests such as tensile, bend, impact, neck break & hardness tests – Non destructive tests such as Magnetic particle, Ultrasonic, Dyepenetratant, radiographic & eddy current methods. References 1. Welding Engineering Rossi 2. Welding & welding Technology Little. 3. Metallurgy of welding Bruckner 4. The Electric Welder Tse Golsky 5. Welding Engineer’s Hand Book Vol 1,2 & 3 (ASME) 6. Welding for Engineers Udin & Funk 7. A text book of Welding Technology O.P Khanna 8. Welding Engineering R.L Agarwal 9. Welding engineering & Technology R. S. Parmer 10. Welding (10th Edition) A. C. Davis, Cambridge University Press. FOUNDRY TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE  I) M 7064 Module 1 Patterns: Different types of patterns – colour codes of patterns. 3+1+0
157
Moulding sands: Natural and synthetic sand ingredients of moulding sands special sand additives sand mixing general properties of moulding sand – testing of moulding sand  effect of ingredients and Additives on properties of moulding sand reusability of moulding sands sand conditioning. Core and core making: Purpose of cores  core prints – types of cores – core sand ingredients – requirements of core sand core sand mixing – binding materials – core boxes, core making, baking, coating, reinforcing and venting. Module 2 Gating and risering: Mechanism of solidification – nucleation and growth – rate of solidification – progressive and directional solidification. Gates and gating system – functions and types of gates – design of gating system – gating ratios for ferrous and nonferrous castings – risering functions and requirements of riser – types of risers theoretical considerations – Chvorinov s rule – riser shape and directional solidification – use of chills, insulators and exothermic compounds Module 3 Ferrous foundry metallurgy: Gray cast iron – composition – effect of composition in properties – types of graphite in gray cast iron – foundry characteristics of grey cast iron – effect of inoculation and inoculants – low alloy and high alloy cast iron –malleable iron – white heart and black heart malleable iron – malleablisation – S.G. iron – compositon and properties Module 4 Nonferrous foundry metallurgy: Foundry characteristics of copper and aluminium base alloys – degassing and melt treatment. Melting and pouring: Types of furnaces used for C.I., steel and nonferrous metals – details and charge calculation in cupola charging Module 5 Cleaning and inspection: Knock out and fettling – destructive and nondestructive testing salvaging. Mechanisation in foundry: Elementary ideas of mechanisation in sand conditioning and supply, moulding, core making, knock out and fettling. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Principles of Metal Casting  Hine and Rosenthal Foundry Technology  P.R.Beeley Manufacturing Science  Amitabha Ghosh and Ashok Kumar Mallick Manufacturing Engineering and Technology  Kalapakjian and Schmid ADVANCED OPERATIONS RESEARCH (ELECTIVE  I) 310
M 7065
Goals: The course is designed to develop an understanding of operation research with particular attention to linear programming, dynamic programming, and integer programming. Module 1 • Linear Programming 1. Problem Formulation 2. Graphical Solution 158
3. 4. 5. 6.
Simplex Method Revised Simplex Method Duality Theory Sensitivity Analysis
Module 2 • Transportation Model 1. Northwest corner method 2. Least cost method 3. VAM 4. Test of optimality Module 3 • Integer Programming 1. Introduction, basic concepts and simple problems 2. Gomory’s all integral cutting plane method • Goal Programming 1. Application of goal programming 2. Introduction basic concepts and simple problems Module 4 • Dynamic Programming 1. Shortest path models 2. Characteristic of Dynamic Programming 3. Discrete Dynamic Programming models Module 5 • Simulation
1. Basic Concepts Binomial distribution Poisson distribution Normal distribution 2. Monticralo simulation 3. Generation of random numbers 4. Simulation software Course Outcomes 1. Students will have a working knowledge of operation research techniques such as linear programming, Integer Programming, Goal Programming and Dynamic Programming. 2. Students will have the ability to analyze and perform sensitivity analysis on different optimum solutions generated. 3. Students will have the ability to tackle real life optimization problems. References
159
1. 2. 3. 4.
Hamda & Taha, Operations Research  7th edn; Pearson Ravindran and Philips Operations Research – Principles and Practice. Ronald L.Rardin, Optimisation in Operation Research, Pearson Education Verma A.P., Operation Research, S.K.Katharia & Sons
M 7066
MARKETING AND SALES MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
Module 1 Marketing: Definition Marketing concepts Market segmentation Market demand Product Value and satisfaction Exchange and transactions Marketing channels Competition Marketing environment Marketing mix. Marketing Management: FunctionsSales forecastingPricingDistribution Advertising Sales promotion Marketing research. Module 2 Strategic Planning: Strategic business unit (SBU) Business strategic planningSWOT analysis. Marketing decision support system. Module 3 Product life cycle: Marketing strategies in the different stages of product life cycle. New product development: Idea generation Concept development and testing conjoint analysis. Introduction to Relationship marketing, International marketing and on line marketing. Module 4 Consumer behaviour: Major factors affecting consumer buying behaviour Consumer decision making process. Organisational buying behaviour: Buying situations the buying center Purchasing process. Module 5 Sales management: Evolution of Sales management Objectives of Sales management Personal selling situations Theories of selling Basic selling stylesRecruitment, selection and training of sales personnelSales territorySales quotas. References 1. Marketing Management 2. Sales Management 3. Industrial Engg & Management 4. Industrial Organisation & Management 5. Organisational Behaviour 6. Consumer Behaviour 7. Basic marketing 8. Marketing Management for small units 9. Sales Engg 10. Salesmanship concept 160 Philip Khotler Richard, Edward & Norman O.P.Khanna Banga & Sarma Fred Luthans Schifman & Kanuk Gundiff Jain Lester Thomson
M 706 7
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
Module 1 Basic concepts: conservation principlesmass, momentum energyconservation of scalar quantitiesdimensionless form of equationssimple mathematical models for incompressible, inviscid, potential and creeping flowsapproximations of hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic, and mixed flows introduction to numerical methods, advantages and limitationscomponents of numerical solution methods and properties. Module 2 Finite difference methods:  conceptapproximation of first derivative, second derivative and mixed derivativeboundary conditions, errors, spectral methods, examplesfinite volume method, approximation of surface and volume integrals, boundary conditionsexamples. Module 3 Solutions of Linear Equations:  direct methodsGauss elimination methodLV decompositiontridiagonal systemcyclic reductioniterative methodsconyergenceconjugate gradient multigrid methodsnon linear equationsdeferred correction approaches, methods for unsteady problems, two level Runge Kutta predictor corrector methodsexplicit, implicit methods. Module 4 Solutions of Navier Stokes equations: choice of variable arrangement on gridcalculation of pressureother methodssolution methods for Navier Stokes equations. Module 5 Turbulent flows:  direct numerical solutionlarge eddy simulation, RANS models, Reynolds stress models compressible flows (introduction only)pressure correction modelssimple examples. References 1. Computational methods for Fluid Dynamics Joel H.Ferziger & Miloven Peric. (Springer Werlag Publishers) 2. Computational Fluid Dynamics (The basics with applications) John D.Anderson (Mc Graw Hill Pub.) 3. Numerical methods for Scientific& Engineering Computations  M.K.Jain & R.K.Iyengar (WileyEastern) 4. Introduction to Numerical Analysis  F.B.Hilderbrand. (Tata Mc GrawHill)
161
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LABORTAORY M 707 Tests on reciprocating air compressor Tests on blowers and rotary compressors Vibration of springs – free and forced vibrations. Whirling of shafts. Balancing of reciprocating and revolving masses – balancing machines. Tests on universal governor apparatus. Tests on gyroscope. Friction in hydrodynamic bearings – bearing testing machines. Metallurgical analysis of specimens using metallurgical microscope. Testing of foundry sands for strength, moisture content, permeability etc. Determination of minimum fluidizing velocity in a conventional fluidized bed. HEAT TRANSFER LABORTAORY M 708 Tests on refrigeration equipment. Tests on air conditioning units. Determination of thermal conductivity of conducting and insulating materials. Determination of emissivity of surfaces Heat flow through lagged pipes. Heat flow through composite walls. Determination of overall heat transfer coefficient of a heat exchanger. Free and forced convection. 0+0+4 0+0+4
162
EIGHTH SEMESTER
163
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING M 801 2+1+ 0 Module 1 Theory of metal cutting: Historical back ground –Classification of manufacturing process – Deformation of metals (review only) – Performance & process parameters  Oblique & orthogonal cutting – Mechanism of chip formation, types, chip curl, chip control – Tool geometry: American, British, DIN, ISO systems – Mechanism of orthogonal cutting: Thin zone model, Merchant’s analysis, Oxley thin shear zone analysis – Thick zone models, Palmer & Oxley analysis – shear angle relationship, Lee & Shaffer`s; relation ship etc. – Friction process in metal cutting: nature of sliding friction, effect of increasing normal load on apparent to real area of contact , columb`s law, yield stress at asperities, adhesion theory, ploughing, sublayer flow – Effect of rake angle,cutting angle, nose radius etc. on cutting force and surface finish – Empirical determination of force component. Module 2 Thermal aspects of machining: Source of heat; temperature distribution in chip, shear plane & work piece; effect of speed, feed & depth of cut – Tool materials: carbon steel, HSS, coated HSS, ceramics, diamond etc. Cutting fluids: effect of specific heat, etc on selection of liquids; effectiveness at tool chip interface; classification of fluids – Tool wear: flank & crater [KT] wear – Tool wear mechanisms: adhesion, abrasion, diffusion & fatigue; Taylor’s equation, application at shop floor; speed, tool material & micro structure on tool life; allowable wear land [VB] ; rapid, steady & catatospheric wear on rough & finishing operations – Economics of machining – Machineability index. Module 3 Power metallurgy: Preparation metal powers – Power characteristics: properties of fine power, size, size distribution, shape, compressibility, purity etc. Mixing – Compaction techniques – Mechanism of sintering of single & multi phase materials  Sintering atmosphere – Finishing operations: heat treatment, surface treatment, impregnation treatment etc. – Impregnated bearings – Sintered oilretaining bearing – Economics of p/m. Advanced materials: Super alloys  Titanium & titanium alloys – shape memory alloys –smart materials – microstructure, properties, applications. Module 4 Polymers: Polymerization – Structural features: Linear & net work molecular structure – Molecular wt, degree of polymerization, branching, cross linking – co polymers & ter polymers – Molecular architecture – effect of crystallinity – Glass transition temp:  Thrmo polymers – Thermoset polymers – Additives – Polymer matrix composites: properties & applications.  Elastamers: Kinked structure  Mechanical, physical & chemical properties – Vulcanization of rubber – conductive polymers, applications. – Ceramics: Structure – Mechanical, physical properties & applications. – Glasses: Types, glass ceramics – Types, properties and application of MMC and CMC – Honey comb structure. Module 5 Advanced production methods: Rapid prototyping: background & definitions – Process methods: Stereolithography, selective laser sintering, fused deposition modeling, laminated object manufacturing, laser engineered net shaping, 3D welding – Information processing – Indirect fabrication of metals & ceramics. – Non traditional machining: EDM, ECM, USM – principle, types, process parameters, control, MRR, surface finish, application etc. – Electro chemical grinding, 164
lapping, honing; process principle & Ra only, applications – EBM, LBM, IBM, AJM, Abrasive water jet machining, LIGA process. References 1. Armarego & Brown, The Machining of Metals, Prentice  Hall 2. Beaman, Barlow & Bourell, Solid Free Foam Fabrication: A new direction in mafg., Kluwer Academic Publishers 3. Brophy, Rose & Wulf, The Structure & Properties of Metals Vol.2, Wiley Eastern 4. Dixon & Clayton, Powder Metallurgy for Engineers, Machinery publishing co. London 5. HMT, Production Technology, Tata McGraw Hill 6. Kalpakjian, Manufacturing Engineering & Technology, Addison – Wesley, 4nd edn. 7. Lal G.K., Introduction to Machining Science, New Age publishers 8. Metcut research, Machinablity Data Center Vol.1 & 2, Metcut research associates, Cincinnati 9. Paul. H. Black, Theory of Metal Cutting, McGraw Hill AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING M 802 3+1+0 Module 1 Engines: Types of engines in automobilesclassificationsengine componentsworking of various systemsCNGenginesR&D workspresent and future vehiclesframe, body and engine constructionstructure and mechanism forming components carburetors, diesel fuel pumps, injector, single point and multi point fuel injectioncombustion chamberslubricating oil pumpscooling systemsVehicle performanceresistance to the motion of vehicleair, rolling, and radiant resistancepower requirementacceleration and gradeabilityselection of gear ratios. Module 2 Transmission: prime moversclutchprinciplefrictionhelical spring and conical spring clutches – centrifugal clutches and fluid couplingsGear boxprinciple and necessity of manual gear boxconstant mesh, sliding mesh and synchromesh gear boxesepicyclic gearboxoverdriveshydraulic torque converterssemi and automatic transmissionFinal drivefront wheel, rear wheel and four wheel drivestransfer caseHotchkiss and torque tube drivesuniversal jointsconstant velocity universal jointdifferentialnonslip differentialrear axlestypes of rear axles.
Module 3 Steering and Suspension: Different steering mechanismssteering gear boxespower steering – typessuspension systemsfront axle, rigid axle and independent suspensionsantiroll barcoil spring and leaf springtorsion barMacpherson strutsliding pillarwish bonetrailing arm suspensionsfront axle typesfront wheel geometrycastor, camber, king pin inclination, toein toeout. Shock absorbershydraulic and gas charged shock absorbersair suspensions. Module 4 Chassis and Body: Types of chassis and body constructionscrumble zones, air bags and impact beamsautomotive air conditioningbraking mechanism and convectional brakes booster, hydraulic and power brakes, components and attachmentsmechanical, hydraulic and pneumatic brakesantilock braking systemsWheels and Tyres:tubeless tyresply ratings radial tyreshybrid vehicles165
vintage carsracing carsautomated roadscoach worksmaterials safety provisions motor vehicle act. Module 5 Electrical systems Battery, charging and ignition systemselectronic ignitiondynamos and alternatorsvoltage regulatorslight and horn relayscircuit diagramsstarting motorbendix and follow through drivespower windowselectronic engine control unit for fuel injection automotive lighting, accessories and dashboard instrumentsPreventive and breakdown maintenanceengine testing, servicingoverhaul engine tuning wheel balancingtrouble shootinggarage tools and equipmentsnoise, vibration, and performance tests. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Automobile Engineering (Vol. 1 & 2) Automotive Mechanics Automobile Engineering Automotive Mechanics K.M.Guptha Joseph Heitner Harbans Singh Reyd William H. Course
PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL M 803 2+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to PPC: need for PPC, effect, advantages, functions and problems of PPC. Forecasting: methods of sales forecastingforecasting for new productsforecasting for established productstime series analysis for sale forecasting – long term forecasting – methods of estimating Sales trend problems correlation analysis. Module 2 Production planning: objectivescharacteristicsprocess planning. Capacity planning factors affectingMaster production schedulingmaterial requirement planning – BOM and product structure. Production control: objectives production control systems principle and procedure of production Control. Routing: objectives procedure – route sheets. Module 3 Sequencing assumptions: solution of sequencing problemsprocessing n jobs through two machines Processing n jobs through three machines – processing n jobs through m machines – processing two Jobs through m machinesproblems Module 4 Materials management: Components of integrated material management Purchasing managementstores management. Supply chain management – ERPRole of I.T. Module 5 Loading and scheduling: aim reasons for scheduling master scheduling or aggregate scheduling Estimating shop loads short term scheduling – mathematical loading and scheduling problemsScheduling through PERT / CPM problems. Despatching duties procedure rules. 166
Follow up and reporting typesreport preparation and presentation. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Modern Production Management Principles of Production Management Production management principles Production Planning and Control Manufacturing Planning &Control Production and operations management Modeling the supply chain E.S.Buffa J.Apple Mcycss K.C.jani& L.N.Aggarwal Volfman, Berry, Whybark systems R.Paneerselvam Jeremy F Shapiro
MACHINE DESIGN AND DRAWING  II M 804 2+0+2 Module 1 Gears: Types of gears –spur gear, helical gear, bevel gear, worm and worm wheel strength of gear teeth – gear forces and their effects – formative number of teeth – lead – lead anglebasic geometry and nomenclature of meshed spur gear setdynamic load – endurance loadwear loads – AGMA standards – Lewis equation for strength design and Lewis form factor – design for wear – design of gears such as spur gear, helical gear, bevel gear, worm and worm wheel. Module 2 Bearings: Bearing materials – introduction to lubrication – minimum film thickness – hydrodynamic theory of lubrication – viscosity of oil – oil seals – selection of lubricants – viscosity index – measurement of viscosity – effect of temperature on viscosity – clearance ratio – summer feld number – specifications and selection of bearing – anti friction bearing – bearing life – rating life – dynamic load capacity – equivalent dynamic load – design of journal bearing – design of rolling contact bearing such as ball and roller bearing. Pumps: Design of centrifugal pump (Simple problems) References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Note Question Paper pattern same as Machine Design  I ADVANCED MATHEMATICS (ELECTIVE  II) CMELRTM 8051 167 3+1+0 Mechanical Engineering Design – Joseph Shigley Machine Design – Mubeen Machine Design – Black Principles of Lubrication – Cameron A. Mechanical Seals – Mayer E. Design of Machine Elements – Bhandari V. B. Machine Design – Pandya and Shah
Module 1 Green’s Function Heavisides, unit step function – Derivative of unit step function – Dirac delta function – properties of delta function – Derivatives of delta function – testing functions – symbolic function – symbolic derivatives – inverse of differential operator – Green’s function – initial value problems – boundary value problems – simple cases only Module 2 Integral Equations Definition of Volterra and Fredholm Integral equations – conversion of a linear differential equation into an integral equation – conversion of boundary value problem into an integral equation using Green’s function – solution of Fredhlom integral equation with separable Kernels – Integral equations of convolution type – Neumann series solution. Module 3 Gamma, Beta functions Gamma function, Beta function – Relation between them – their transformations – use of them in the evaluation certain integrals – Dirichlet’s integral – Liouville’s extension of Dirichlet’s theorem – Elliptic integral – Error function. Module 4 Power Series solution of differential equation The power series method – Legendre’s Equation – Legendre’s polynomial – Rodrigues formula – generating function – Bessel’s equation – Bessel’s function of the first kind – Orthogonality of Legendre’s Polynomials and Bessel’s functions. Module 5 Numerical solution of partial differential equations. Classification of second order equations Finite difference approximations to partial derivatives – solution of Laplace and Poisson’s equations by finite difference method – solution of one dimensional heat equation by Crank – Nicolson method – solution one dimensional wave equation. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Linear Integral Equation  Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York A Course on Integral Equations  Allen C.Pipkin, Springer – Verlag Advanced Engg. Mathematics  H.K.Dass, S.Chand Advanced Engg. Mathematics  Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia Numerical methods in Engg. &Science  B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers Generalized functions  R.F. Hoskins, John Wiley and Sons. 7. Principles and Techniques of Applied Mathematics  Bernard Friedman, John Wiley and sons 8. Principles of Applied Mathematics  James P.Keener, Addison Wesley. 9. Numerical methods  P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy, Chand & co EXPERT SYSTEMS IN MANUFACTURING (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0
M 8052
Module 1 Artificial Intelligence  expert / knowledge based systems  definition  expert system architecture: software components, knowledge base, inference engine, inference sub systems. Module 2 168
Hard ware requirements  knowledge acquisition, knowledge base, knowledge representation semantic netwoks, objects, nods; links, attributes, values  semantic net work structures: nodes, object, links, attributes, values. Module 3 Knowledge representation: rule based system  heuristic rules  frame based knowledge representation  inference engine components  inferences strategies; modus ponens, backward & forward chaining, monotonic & non monotonic reasoning, search strategies  expert system building tools: languages, shells. Module 4 Commercial software for manufacturing applications in CAD, CAPP, MRP  11, adaptive control of devices, robotics, process control, fault diagnosis, failure analysis etc; linking expert systems to other software such as DBMS, MIS, MDB, process control and office automation. Module 5 Case studies and programming of typical applications in process planning, tool selection, Grinding wheel selection, part classification, inventory control, facilities planning etc. References 1. Peter Jackson  Introduction to Expert systems, 3/e, by; Addison Wesley Longman, 1999. 2. Prentice  hall hand book of expert systems AEROSPACE ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE  II) M 8053 3+1+0 Module 1 The atmosphere: Characteristics of Troposphere, Stratosphere, Mesosphere and Ionosphere International Standard Atmosphere – Pressure, Temperature and Density variations in the International Standard Atmosphere – Review of basic fluid dynamics – continuity, momentum and energy for incompressible and compressible flows – static, dynamic and stagnation pressures – phenomena in supersonic flows Module 2 Application of dimensional analysis to 2D viscous flow over bodies – Reynolds number – Mach number similarity – Aerofoil characteristics – Pressure distribution – Centre of Pressure and Aerodynamic Center – Horse shoe vortex Module 3 Momentum and Blade Element Theories – Propeller coefficients and charts – Aircraft engines – Turbo jet, Turbo fan and Ram Jet engines – Bypass and After Burners Module 4 Straight and Level Flight – Stalling Speed – Minimum Drag and Minimum Power conditions – Performance Curves – Gliding – Gliding angle and speed of flattest glide – Climbing – Rate of Climb – Service and Absolute Ceilings – Take off and Landing Performance – Length of Runway Required – Circling Flight – Banked Flight – High Lift Devices – Range and Endurance of Air planes. 169
Module 5 Air speed indicators – Calculation of True Air Speed – Altimeters – Rate of Climb meter – Gyro Compass – Principles of Wind Tunnel Testing – Open and Closed type Wind Tunnels – Pressure and Velocity Measurements – Supersonic Wind Tunnels (description only) – Rocket Motors – Solid and Liquid Propellant Rockets – Calculation of Earth Orbiting and Escape Velocities Ignoring Air Resistance and assuming Circular Orbit. References 1. Mechanics of Flight 2. Aerodynamics for Engineering Students 3. Airplane Aerodynamic Kermode A. C. Houghton and Brock Dommasch
COMBUSTION (ELECTIVE  II) M 8054 3+1+0 Module 1 Thermodynamics of reactive mixtures: Bond energyHeat of formationHeat of reactionadiabatic flames temperaturesentropy changes for reacting mixtureschemical equilibrium – equilibrium criteria –evaluation of equilibrium constant and equilibrium composition –simple numerical solutions. Module 2 Elements of chemical kinetics: law of mass actionorder and molecularity of reaction – rate equation Arrheniuss law – activation energy – collision theory of reaction rates Transition state theorycollision theory of reaction rates Transition state theory –General theory of chain reactionscombustion of carbon monoxide and hydrogen. Module 3 Ignition and flammability: methods of ignition –self ignition – thermal theory of ignition – limits of flammability –factors affecting flammability limits flame quenching flame propagation flame velocity measurement of flame velocity – factors affecting flame speed premixed and diffusion flames – physical structures and comparison – characteristics of laminar and turbulent flames theory of laminar flame propagation. Module 4 Flame stabilization: Stability diagrams for open flames mechanisms of flame stabilization –critical boundaryvelocity gradient –stabilization by eddies bluff body stabilization – effects of variables on stability limits. Module 5 Combustion in solid an liquid propellant: Reactant motors – Classification and types of propellants – desirable properties of grain shapes – burning rates and combustion model of solid propellantsinjection of liquid propellantsignition and ignitors. Miscellaneous topics – droplet combustion – fluidized bed combustion  classification of coal – air pollution. References 170
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Fuels and combustion Some fundamentals of combustion Fundamentals of combustion Elementary reaction Kinetics Flames
– – – – –
Sharma S.P Spalding D.B Strehlow . R.A Lathan J.L Gaydan and wolfhard.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE  II) M 8055 3+1+0 Module 1 Project feasibility Analysis Marketing, Technical, and financial feasibilities report preparationcase studies. Module 2 Project Management nature and scope PERT and CPM techniques, Estimatestime, cost, resources (man, material, tool). Module 3 Forecasting MethodsTime series analysismethod pf least square, moving average, curvilinear, correlation analysis. Module 4 Risk Analysisrisk in economic analysismeasuring risk in investment; risk profiles, decision trees, formulation of discounted decision trees, simulation. Module 5 MS Project: (Software Practice) Creation of task, sequencing of task, assignment of resources, finding critical path, ABC activities (discuss), breaking the activities, colouring techniques, resource balancing, allocating overtime, using different calendars (Like 8 or 12 hours shift, Friday/Sunday holiday, Special public holidays etc), cost estimates, assignment of blank fields, creation of different views on screen. Reports: Daily reports for completed activity, lagging activities, overall progress review, Management highlevel reports, individual Departmental reports. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Corter, Mastering MS Project 2000, BPB Publishers. Harvey Maylor, Project Management, Pearson Education. PrasannaChandra, Project Management, Tata McGraw Hill. Prasanna Chandra, Projects, Tata McGraw Hill. PROGRAMMING IN C++ AND VISUAL C++ (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0 171
M8056
Module 1 Introduction to C++  Object Oriented Approach – I/O instructions – Data types – Type Conversions – Arithmetic Operators – Relational Operators – Loops – Precedence – Conditional Operator – Logical Operators – Structures and its manipulations – Functions – Arrays. Module 2 Classes and Objects – Specifying the Class – The private and public key words – Defining Member Functions – Defining Objects – Calling Member Functions – Constructors – Destructors – Overloaded Constructors – Objects as Arguments – Returning Objects from Functions – Array of Objects. Module 3 Operator Overloading – Operator Arguments – Operator Return Values – Postfix Notation – Overloading Binary Operators – Arithmetic Assignment Operators – Data Conversion – Inheritance – Derived Class and Base Class – Specifying The Derived Class – Accessing Base Class Members – The protected Members – Derived Class Constructors – Overriding Member Functions – Scope Resolution with Overridden Functions – Public and Private Inheritance – Levels of Inheritance – Multiple Inheritance. Module 4 Pointers – Memory Management – The new and delete Operators – Pointers to Objects – Self Containing Classes – Virtual Functions – Accessing Normal and Virtual Member Functions with Pointers – Pure Virtual Functions – Friend Functions – The ‘this’ Pointer – Accessing Member Data with ‘this’. Module 5 Introduction to Windows Programming – Basic Windows Program Structure – Different Windows Messages like WM_PAINT, WM_TIMER etc. – Introduction to MFC – MFC Hierarchy  Use of Simple Foundation Classes like CTime, CString, CFile etc. – Exception Handling. References 1. Object Oriented Programming in Microsoft C++ 2. Windows Programming Primer Plus 3. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C Robert Lafore Jim Conger Kamthane. Pearson
SILICATES  STRUCTURE, PARTICLE ANALYSES AND SPRAY COATING (ELECTIVE  II) M 8057 3+1+0 Module 1 Silicate Mineralogy in General  MineralsDefinition, ClassificationSilicates and nonsilicates. Physical properties of mineralsColour, lusture, transperancy, cleavage, hardness, fracture, form, specific gravity, fusibility & tenacity. Module 2 Identification of Silicate Minerals  Physical properties, chemical composition and uses of the important silicate minerals1. Quartz, 2. Feldspars, 3.Pyroxenes, 4.Amphiboles, 5.Micas, 172
6.Aluminium silicatesandalusite, sillimanite & kyanite, 7.Olivine, 8.Garnets, 9.Chlorites 10. Natrolite, 11.Clay minerals, 12.Asbestose, 13.Talc 14.Tourmaline 15. Staurolite
Module 3 Silicate Mineral Structures  Detailed study of the silicate structures with examples 1. Nesosilicate, 2.Sorosilicate, 3.Cyclosilicate, 4.Inosilicate, 5.Phyllosilicate & 6. Tectosilicate. Ceramics and silicates. Module 4 Particle Analyses – Coarse and powder materials Coarse materialSize distribution Grain size parameters, coefficient of angularity, specific surface area (actual and theoretical) by sieve analysis. Powder materialSize and area determination by various methods Blane’s methods, air jet sieve, Bacho dust classifier and BET methods. Module 5 Spray Coating – Basic concepts and general discussion of spray coating. Binders Ethyl orthosilicate (ETS40), properties and hydrolysis. Slurries – Binder and different ceramic powders, consistency and determination, drying. Heat source – Plasma arctransferred and nontransferred arcs, arrangement of spray coating. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Rutley’s elements of mineralogy, H.H.Read, Thomas Murby&Co, London. A text book of mineralogy, E.S. Dana, Wiley Eastern Ltd, New Delhi. Mineralogy, Dier, Howie & Zussman, CBS Publishers, New Delhi. MaterialsTheir nature, properties and fabrication, Seghal & Linderburg. Material science and manufacturing process, Dhaunedrakumar, S.K.Jain & A.K.Bhargava, Vikas publishing house, New Delhi. 6. Welding and welding technology, Little, Tata McGraw hill publishing Co., New Delhi. 7. Investment casting, H.T. Bidwell, The machinery publishing Co., Ltd, UK. 8. Nonferrous foundry metallurgy, A.J. Murphy, Pergamon Press Ltd. 9. Welding engineering and technology, R.S. Parman, Khanna publishers, New Delhi. 10. Manufacturing science, Amitabha Ghosh & Asok kumar Mallik, EWP, East West Press Pvt Ltd, New Delhi. MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
M 8061 Goals
To learn Management Information System (MIS), implementation requirements and process standardisation. Module 1 Elements of a MIS – Levels of Management – Types of Management information – Technical dimensions of Information – System elements – Characteristics of MIS – Case Study. 173
Module 2 Building Business Model – Data Base – Report generation and time sharing – Case study. Module 3 Communication and distributed Data processing. Module 4 Managing and controlling the MIS function. Application Development Cycle. Module 5 Future of MIS – Architecture – reliability – Security – Intelligent Buildings. Outcomes Student will learn elements of MIS & steps in implementing MIS. Students will also learn hardware and software selection for MIS. References 1. Mudric and Rose 2. Jerome Kauter 3. R. S. Daver 4. Mudric, Rose & Callgget 5. James Obrein Information System and Management. Management Information Systems, Prentice Hall India. The Management Process. Information System for Modern Management, Prentice Hall India. Management Information Systems
CRYOGENICS (ELECTIVE  III) M 8062 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: Historical development present areas involving cryogenic engineering. Basic thermodynamics applied to liquefaction and refrigeration process  isothermal, adiabatic and Joule Thomson expansion process  adiabatic demagnetization – efficiency to liquefaction and coefficient of performances irreversibility and losses. Module 2 Low temperature properties of engineering materials: mechanical properties  thermal properties electrical and magnetic properties. Properties of cryogenic fluids  materials of constructions for cryogenic applications. Module 3 Gas liquefaction systems: production of low temperatures  general liquefaction systems liquefaction systems for neon, hydrogen, nitrogen and helium. Module 4 Cryogenic refrigeration systems: ideal refrigeration systems refrigerators using liquids and gases as refrigerants  refrigerators using solids as working media. Module 5 174
Cryogenic storage and transfer systems  Cryogenic fluid storage vessels cryogenic fluid transfer systems. Application of cryogenics  cryo pumping  superconductivity and super fluidity cryogenics in space technology  cryogenics in biology and medicine. References 1. Cryogenic Systems 2. Cryogenic Engineering 3. Cryogenic Engineering Barron R. F Scot R. W. Bell J.H.
NUCLEAR ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE  III) M 8063 3+1+0 Module 1 Review of elementary Nuclear Physics: Atomic structure – Nuclear energy and nuclear forces – Nuclear fission Nuclear reactions and radiations: Principle of radioactive decay – Interaction of α and β rays with matter – Neutron cross section and reactions – The fission process – Chain reaction – Basic principles of controlled fusion. Module 2 Nuclear reaction principles – Reactor classifications – Critical Size – Basic diffusion theory – Slowing down of neutrons – Neutron flux and power – Four factor formula – Criticality condition – Basic features of reactor control Module 3 Boiling water reactor: Description of reactor system – Main components – control and safety measures Materials of Reactor: Construction – Fuel – Moderator coolant – Structural materials – Cladding – Radiation damage. Module 4 Nuclear fuels: Metallurgy of Uranium – General principles of solvent extraction – Reprocessing of irradicated fuel – Separation process – Fuel enrichment. Module 5 Reaction heat removal: Basic equations of heat transfer as applied to reactor cooling – Reactor heat transfer systems – Heat removal in fast reactors Radiation Safety: Reactors shielding  Radiation dozes – Standards of radiation protections – Nuclear waste disposal. References 1. Nuclear Engineering 2. Sources book on Atomic Energy Glasstone & Sesoske Glasstone S.
INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS (ELECTIVE  III) M 8064 175 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to hydraulic / pneumatic devices – their application and characteristics – comparison of electric, hydraulic and pneumatic devices. Module 2 Pumps and motors: Principle of working – range of displacement and pressures fixed and variable discharge pumpsgear, screw, vane, piston pumps – axial piston pumpswash pumpbent axis pump. Types of hydraulic motors – their characteristics. AccessoriesHydraulic accumulators – intensifiersfiltersheatercooler. Module 3 Hydraulic valves: Stop valve non return valverelief valvesequence valvecounter balance valvepressure reducing valve – flow control valve –irection control valvestheir principle of operationand applicationJIC symbols of hydraulic pneumatic components. Module 4 Properties of commonly used hydraulic fluidsTypical hydraulic circuits like those used in machine tools –Rivetter pneumatic Hammer, hydraulic press, and power steering. Module 5 Fluidics: Introduction of fluidics devices –Principles of working of common fluidics devices like wall attachment devices – proportional amplifiersturbulent amplifiers fluidic logic devices – examples of applications of fluidics devices like edge control of steel plate in rolling mills tension control. References 1. Daniel Bonteille Fluid Logic and Industrial automation. 2. John Pippenger & Tyler Hicks  Industrial Hydraulics MACHINE VISION AND APPLICATION (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
M 8065
Module 1 Introduction to machine vision – basics of picture processing, Binary and grey scale images. Preprocessing concepts – Digital image, Geometrical correction, Grey scale modification, Sharpening and smoothing images. Module 2 Edge detection and line finding – Spatial differentiation, extraction of line descriptions. Types of cameras for Machine vision and their principles. Module 3 Software for measurement and pattern recognition applications with examples – two and threedimensional measurements. Fourier transformation for pattern recognition applications. Module 4 Image operation studies, interfacing a robot with a vision system. Basics of hardware for vision system 176
Module 5 Machine vision applications in engineering – dimension measurement, flaw detection, identification, verification, sorting  co ordinate measuring machines, noncontact type – case studies. Reference 1. Sonaka M, Hlavac V & Boyle. R.  Image processing, analysis & machine vision FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS (ELECTIVE  III) M 8066 Goals: This course is designed to acquaint students with the basic principles of the finite element method, to provide experience with its use in engineering analysis and design, and to provide an opportunity to work with finite element programs used in industry. Computer programming may be involved. Module 1 Introduction: Structural analysis objectives, static, dynamic and kinematic analysis, skeletal and continuum structures, modeling of infinite d.o.f system into infinite d.o.f system, basic steps in finite element problem formulation, general applicability of the method. Element types and characteristics: Discretization of the domain, basic element shapes, aspect ratio, shape functions, ganeralised coordinates and nodal shape functions, 1D spar and beam elements, 2D rectangular and triangular elements, axisymmetric elements. Module 2 Assembly of elements and matrices: Concept of element assembly, global and local coordinate systems, band width and its effects, banded and skyline assembly, boundary conditions, solution of simultaneous equations, Gaussian elimination and Cholesky decomposition methods, numerical integration, one and 2D applications. Module 3 High order and isoparametric elements :One dimensional quadratic and cubic elements, use of natural coordinate system, area coordinate system, continuity and convergence requirements, 2D rectangular and triangular elements. Module 4 Static analysis: Analysis of trusses and frames, analysis of machine subassemblies, use of commercial software packages, advantages and limitations. Module 5 Dynamic analysis: Hamilton`s principle, derivation of equations of equilibrium, consistent and lumped mass matrices, derivation of mass matrices for 1D elements, determination of natural frequencies and mode shapes, use of commercial software packages. Course Outcomes: 1. The students will understand the fundamental principles of finite element theory and applications. 2. The students will be able to built finite element models correctly for various engineering problems and solve the model using existing finite element codes 177 3+1+0
Text Book Rao S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, 2nd edition, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1989. References 1. Robert D. Cook, David S. Malkins and Michael E. Plesha, “Concepts and Application of Finite Element Analysis”, 3rd edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1989. 2. Chandrupatla T.R. and Belegundu, A. D.,” Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Pearrson Pvt. Ltd., 3rd edition 2002. TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
M 8067 Goal
To give the detailed information on TQM Tools and Techniques for TQM will be known. Module 1 Introduction – Leadership Concepts – Customer Satisfaction – employee involvement Module 2 Continuous Process Improvement – Kaizen, Reengineering, PDSA cycle, Juran Trilogy – Supplier Partnerships – Quality Cost Module 3 Statistical Process Control (SPC) – Pareto Diagram, Cause – and – Effect diagram, check sheet, histogram. Benchmarking – Quality Function Development – Failure mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) Module 4 Total Quality Control (TQC) – Quality Circles – Poka – Yoke Just–inTime (JIT) KANBAN  ‘55’ Module 5 Implementing procedure of TQM  case studies Learning Objective 1. Student will clear principles and practices of TQM 2. Student will learn tools and Techniques used in TQM. 3. Students will learn the procedure of implementation of TQM References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Besterfield, Total quality Management, Person Education Besterfield, Quality Control, Prentice  Hall Arora K.C, TQM & 1S0 14000, S K Kataria & Sons Jain & Chitale, Quality assurance and Total quality management, Khanna Publishers. Mitra, Quality control & improvement, Person Education 178
M 807
MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS LABORTAORY 0+0+4
1. Study of use of laser interferometer for calibration of linear measurements 2. Measurement of temperature: Calibration of thermometers and pyrometers Preparation and calibration of thermocouple and resistance temperature detectors (TTD & RTD) 3. Measurement of pressure: Calibration and use of pressure measuring instrumentsPressure Gauge, Micro manometer, Pressure Transducers, Dead weight pressure gauge calibrator 4. Measurement of speed: Calibration and use of tachometers & stroboscope 5. Measurement of linear and angular dimensions: Micrometer, Vernier caliper, dial gauge feeler gauge, comparator, interferometer, angle gauge, sine bar, plug gauge and wire gauge 6. Measurement of Flow: Rotameter, watermeter, Anemometer; calibration and use 7. Measurement of surface roughness using subtonic tester 8. Measurement of gear and screw thread profiles gear tooth calipers, screw thread calipers 9. Measurement of strain and force – calibration of strain gauges and load cells 10. Measurement of vibration – use of vibration pick ups, accelerometer and vibration indicator 11. Acoustic measurementssound level meter – preparation of noise contours 12. Measurement of PH value 13. Measurement of psychometric properties of air 14. Analysis of Automobile Exhaust gas and Flue gas Use of instruments like oxygen analyser. Orsat gas analyzer, Gas chromatography. PROJECT & SEMINAR M808 0+0+4 At the beginning of the seventh semester, students must submit an abstract of their undergraduate project. They must submit a preliminary report at the end of the semester. They will complete the project in the eighth semester. Sessional marks for seminar will be out of 25. Sessional marks for project will be out of 75, in which 35 marks will be based on day to day performance assessed by the guide. Balance 40 marks will be awarded based on the presentation of the project by the students before an evaluation board consists of a minimum of 3 faculty members including the guide.
VIVA VOCE M809 A comprehensive Vivavoce examination will be conducted to assess the student's overall knowledge in the specified field of engineering. At the time of vivavoce, certified reports of seminar and project work are to be presented for evaluation. 179
180
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING BRANCH
181
THIRD SEMESTER
182
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  II CMELPA 301 3+1+0 Module 1 Vector Differential Calculus: Differentiation of vector functions – scalar and vector fields – gradient, divergence and curl of a vector function – their physical meaning – directional derivative – scalar potential, conservative field – identities – simple problems. Module 2 Vector Integral Calculus: Line, Surface and Volume Integrals, work done by a force along a path – Application of Greens theorem, Stokes theorem and Gauss divergence theorem. Module 3 Function of Complex Variable: Definition of Analytic functions and singular points – Derivation of C. R equations in Cartesian coordinates – harmonic and orthogonal properties – construction of analytic function given real or imaginary parts – complex potential – conformal transformation of function like zn, ez, 1/z, Sin z, z + k2/z – bilinear transformation. Cross ratio – invariant property – simple problems. Module 4 Finite Differences: Meaning of ∆ , ∇ , E, µ , δ  interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula – central differences – problems using Stirlings formula – Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided difference formula for unequal intervals. Module 5 Difference Calculus: Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences – Numerical integration – NewtonCote’s formula – trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s 1/3 rd and 3/8th rule – simple problems. Difference eqns. – solutions of difference equations. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern. Higher Engg. Mathematics: Grawal B. S, Khanna Publ. Numerical Methods in Science and Engg: M. K Venkataraman, National Publishing Co. Numerical Methods: S. Balachandra Rao and G.K Shantha, University Press. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Michael D. Greenberg, Prentice – Hall Numerical mathematical Analysis: James B. Scarborough, Oxford IBH Publishing Co. Theory and Problems of Vector Analysis: Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series – McGraw Hill. 8. Finite Differences and Numerical Analysis: H.C Saxena, S. Chand & Co.Ltd.
MECHANICAL TECHNOLOGY E 302 3+1+ 0 Module 1 Properties of Fluids: Pressure, density, bulk modulus, dynamic and kinematic viscosity, surface tension, capillary – fluid at rest, Pascal’s law, applications, pressure head, vapor pressure, pressure 183
measurement, manometers, gauges and pressure switch – pressure on immersed surfaces – floating body. Module 2 Fluid in Motion: Euler’s equation in one dimension. One dimensional incompressible Bernoulli’s equation, interpretation of Bernoulli’s equation as a energy equation. Flow through Orifices – measurement of fluid velocity, pitot tube – discharge measurement, venturimeter, orifice meter, Rota meter and notches. Flow of compressible fluids through pipes – types of flow – critical Reynolds number – friction factors for laminar and turbulent flow – hydraulic gradient – minor losses – transmission of power through pipes. Module 3 Hydraulic Turbines: Evolution of present day hydraulic turbines from the water wheel – classification – degree of action – Pelton wheel, Francis and Kaplan Turbines – constructional details and characteristics only (no problems based on velocity triangles) – governing of turbines – draft tube – specific speed – cavitation effects. Module 4 Pumping Machinery: General classification – Dynamic pumps – working of centrifugal pumps, priming, vapour pressure, wear rings, hydraulic balancing, Classification of impellers, single and double suction impellers – types of casings – effect of vapour pressure on lifting of liquid – specific speed – performance pump characteristics: main, operating, ISO efficiency characteristics curves – NPSH _ multistage pumps – propeller pumps – pump in parallel & series operation – Theory, efficiency, performance curves & application of selfpriming pump, jet pump, airlift pump, slurry pump & hydraulic ram (description only). Module 5 Positive Displacement Pumps: reciprocating pumps, effect of vapour pressure on lifting of liquid – indicator diagram – acceleration head – effect of friction – use of air vessels – work saved – slip – efficiency – pump characteristics – applications – Cavitation in fluid machines – Rotary pumps: Gear, Screw, vane, root pumps – rotary axial & rotary radial piston pumps – thory, efficiency, performance curves – applications (Description only). References 1. Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines: Abdulla Sheriff, Standard Publ. 2. Fluid Flows Machines: Govinda Rao N.S, TMH. 3. Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines: Jagadishlal, Metropolitan publ. 4. Fluid Mechanics: Massey B. S, ELBS 5. Centrifugal and Axial Flow Pumps: Stepanoff John A. J, Wiley & Sons. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT THEORY E 303 2+2+0 Module 1 Circuit Analysis: Concept of Linearity, Unilateral and Bilateral Systems – Passive and Active networks – Vector and Phasor – Sources of Energy – Independent and Dependent voltage and current Sources – Standard input signals – Source transformations  Mesh and Node Analysis – Driving point Impedance and Transfer Impedance – Driving point Admittance and Transfer Admittance. 184
Module 2 Coupled Circuits: Selfinductance and Mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – dot convention – Ideal Transformer – Analysis of multiwinding coupled circuits – Analysis of single tuned and double tuned coupled circuits. Module 3 Network Theorems: StarDelta transformations – Super position, Reciprocity, Substitution, Compensation, Thevinin, Norton, Millman, Tellegen and Maximum power transfer theorems. Module 4 Three Phase Circuits: Generation of three phase voltages – Phase sequence – Line and Phase quantities – Analysis of unbalanced loads – Neutral shift – Symmetrical components – Analysis of unbalanced system – power in terms of symmetrical components. Module 5 Graph theory: Introduction – Linear graph of a network – Tieset and cutset schedule – incidence matrix – Analysis of resistive network using cutset and tieset – Dual of a network. Introduction to MATLAB and pSPICE – Simulation/Analysis of simple Electric Circuits using MATLAB and pSPICE. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Network Analysis: M.E Van Valkanburg Circuits and NetworksAnalysis and Synthesis: A. Sudhakar, S.P Shyam Mohan Networks and Systems: D. Roy Choudhary, New Age Intl’. Theory and Problems in Circuit Analysis: T.S.K.V Iyer, TMH Electric Circuits: Edminister J, Schaum’s Outline series Engineering Circuit Analysis: W.H Hayt and J.E. Kemmerly – Mc Graw Hill. Electric ciruit theory: Rajeswaran – Pearson Education
ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY E 304 3+1+0 Module 1 Review of Vector Analysis – Cartesian coordinate system – The Vector field – dot cross products – introduction to cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems. Static Electric Field: Coulomb’s law – electric field intensity – field intensity due to point charge, line charge, surface charge and volume charge distributions – electric flux – electric flux density – Gauss’s law and its applications – divergence – Maxwell’s first equation – the Del operator – Divergence theorem. Module 2 185
Energy and Potential – Energy expended in moving a point charge in an electric field – Electric Potential between two points – potential at a point charge – potential at any point – due to discrete as well as distributed charges – Electric field lines and equipotential contours – electric dipoles – potential gradient – conservative nature of a field – Laplace and Poisson equations (Derivation only and not solution). Module 3 Conductors, Dielectrics and Capacitance – current and current density – continuity equation – point form of Ohm’s Law – conductor properties – polarisation – dielectric boundary conditions – capacitance – parallel plate capacitor – capacitance of isolated sphere, spherical shell, coaxial and cylinders and parallel wires – effect of earth on capacitance  method of images – energy stored in electrostatic field – dielectric strength and break down. Module 4 The steady Magnetic Field – BiotSavart’s law – Ampere’s circuital law  Curl – Stoke’s theorem – magnetic flux and flux density – the scalar and vector magnetic potentials – magnetic force on a moving charge – force on a moving charge – force on a current element – force between current carrying wires – torque on closed circuits – magnetic boundary conditions – self and mutual inductances – energy stored in a magnetic field – skin effect – inductance of solenoids, torroids and twowire transmission lines. Module 5 Time varying fields – Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction – Motional emf concept of displacement current – Maxwell’s equations in point form and integral form – wave equation in free space – applications in transmission lines – Poynting vector and power flow – Poynting theorem – interpretations –instantaneous, average and complex pointing vector – power loss in conductors. References 1. Engineering Electromagnetics: William H. Hayt Jr., McGraw Hill 2. Electromagnetics: John D. Karus and Carver K.R, McGraw Hill 3. Field Theory: Gangadhar K. A 4. Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics: Joseph Edminister, schaum’s outline series 5. EMT with applications: B. Premlet ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS 2+1+0
E 305
Module 1 Units and Dimensions: SI Units – Dimensions of Electrical quantities – dimensional equations. Magnetic Measurements: Theory of Ballistic galvanometer – Flux meter – Lloyd Fischer Square. Module 2 Measurement of Voltage: Potentiometers – slidewire, Precision slidewire, Vernier potentiometer – Calibration of Ammeter, Voltmeter and Wattmeter using potentiometer AC potentiometer. Measurement of Resistance: Low, medium, high – Wheatstone bridge Kelvin’s double bridge – Insulation Megger – Earth Megger. Module 3 186
AC Bridges: Maxwell’s bridge – Hay’s bridge, Wien’s bridge, Anderson Bridge, High voltage Schering Bridge. (Analysis and Phasor diagram required) Module 4 Instrument Transformers: Principle of Current and Potential transformers – Phasor diagram – nominal ratio – phase angle error, Ratio error – Constructional features and applications. Error Analysis in Measurements: Source of error – Instruments errors – Human errors – Environmental errors – Combination of errors – Mean and variance – Standard deviation – Limits of error. Module 5 Illumination measurements: Units of illumination – laws of illumination – polar curves – Determination of MSCP and MHCP – Integrating meters – Lumer Brodhern type. Temperature measurement: Thermoelectric effects, laws of thermoelectric circuits – common thermocouples. References 1. Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments – Golding E.W, Wheeler and Co., 1991. 2. Electrical and Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements – Sawhney A.K, Dhanpat Rai and Co., 1992. 3. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and measurement Technique – Albert D. Helfrick and William D. Cooper, PHI, 1992.
187
E 306
POWER GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION 2+1+0
Module 1 Economic Aspects: Load Curve Load duration curveMaximum demandAverage demand Load factor Diversity factorPlant use factor. Cost of Generation: Fixed and Running Charges depreciation straight line and sinking fund method Tariffs Different types and comparison. Module 2 Distribution Systems: Feeder Distributor  Service mains Radial and Ring mains AC and DC Distributors Calculations of voltage drop due to concentrated loads fed at one or more pointsLT Lines LT Capacitors – Installation Size – Connections Distribution system maintenance Module 3 Design of Feeder Kelvin’s law Limitations Related ‘Indian Electricity Act’ Rules regarding generation and supply of electrical energy Power factor improvement necessity – methods – economics – capacity of phase advancing plant Module 4 Underground Cables: Single core and three core cables – Insulation Resistance – Stress and capacitance of single core cables – Grading – Extra high voltage cables – Localisation of cable faults. Module 5 High Voltage Generation: D.C: Rectifier circuits  Voltage multiplierCascade circuitsElectrostatic machines A.C.: Cascade transformers – series resonance circuits Impulse Voltage: Single stages and cascade circuits References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Course in Electric Power: Soni M.L., P.V.Gupta A Course in Electric Power: Uppal Electric Power Distribution System: A.S. Pabla Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy: Cotton H High Voltage Engineering: M. S. Naidu, V. Kamaraju BASIC ELECTRICAL LAB E 307 0+0+4 1. Study of AC and DC supply systems in Electrical Laboratory 2. Study of PMMC / MI voltmeters, ammeters, electrodynamometer type watt meters, induction type energy meters, various loads like resistive, capacitive and inductive. 3. Testing of insulating oils and H.V testing on insulating materials. 4. Determination of voltagecurrent characteristics of linear resistance and a nonlinear resistance (e.g. incandescent lamp). 5. Verification of Kirchhoff’s laws using resistive network. 6. Verification of superposition theorem in a resistive circuit with two given DC sources. 7. Verification of Thevinin’s theorem in a DC circuit. 188
8. Verification of generalised reciprocity theorem in a DC circuit. 9. Verification of Maximum Power transfer theorem in a DC circuit 10. Three phase star and delta connection – measurement of line and phase values. 11. Measurement of three phase power at different power factors for balanced and unbalanced loads. 12. Study and measurement of symmetrical components for unbalanced system. 13. Determination of BH characteristics of a magnetic specimen. 14. RLC series and parallel circuit: measurement of current in various branches and verification by calculation – drawing of phasor diagram. 15. Determination of locus diagram RL and RC circuit. 16. Study of frequency – current relations of given series RLC circuit and condition for series resonance. 17. Measurement of single phase power – (a) Three ammeter method (b) three voltmeter method 18. Measurement of single phase power and energy using wattmeter and energy meter – calculation of error. 19. Determination of Power and Power factor of a given single phase circuit using watt meter and power factor meter – power factor improvement of the above circuit. 20. Determination of fusing time versus current characteristics for two specimens – fusing factor – study of various types of fuses. 21. Measurement of Neutral shift voltage for an unbalanced star connected system. MECHANICAL LAB E 308 HYDRAULICS LAB 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Study of centrifugal pump and components Study of reciprocating pump and components – single cylinder and multi cylinder Study of impulse and reaction turbines Performance characteristics of centrifugal pump Performance characteristics of reciprocating pump Performance characteristics of Pelton Wheel Performance characteristics of Francis turbine Performance characteristics of Kaplan turbine 0+0+4
HEAT ENGINES LAB 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Load Test (Constant speed test) on petrol engine Load Test (Constant speed test) on diesel engine Variable speed test on petrol engine Variable speed test on diesel engine Cooling curve of I.C engine Performance test on air compressors and blowers Performance test on refrigeration unit Performance test on airconditioning unit 189
190
FOURTH SEMESTER
191
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  III CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0 Module 1 Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential Equations with constant coefficients – Finding P.I by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchy’s equations – Linear Simultaneous equations – simple applications in engineering problems. Module 2 Partial Differential Equations: Formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions – solution of Lagrange’s Linear equations – Charpit’s method – solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equation – equation with constant coefficients  solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave equation. Module 3 Fourier Transforms: Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier transforms – Fourier sine and cosine transforms – inverse transforms – transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no proof) – Parseval’s identity – simple problems. Module 4 Probability and Statistics: Binomial law of probability – The binomial distribution, its mean and variance – Poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution – its mean and variance – fitting of binomial and Poisson distributions – normal distribution – properties of normal curve – standard normal curve – simple problems in binomial, Poisson and normal distributions. Module 5 Population and samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) – sampling distribution of variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance – Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – test of significance for single proportion, difference proportion, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected). References 1. 2. 3. 4. Higher Engg. Mathematics: Grawal B. S, Khanna Publ. Engineering Mathematics Vol.2: M. K Venkataraman, National Publishing Co. Elements of Partial Differential Equations: Ian N. Sneddon, Mc Graw Hill Intl’ Miller and Fread’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers: Richard A. Johnson, Pearson education/ PHI. 5. A Text Book of Engg. Mathematics, Vol.2: Bali and Iyengar, Lakshmi Publ. Ltd. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern. 7. Probability and Statistical Inferences: Hogg and Tam’s, Pearson Education Asia. NETWORK ANAYSIS AND SYNTHESIS E 402 Module 1 2+1+0
192
Laplace transforms: Properties of Laplace Transforms – basic theorems – Laplace transform of gate function, impulse function and periodic functions – convolution integral – inverse Laplace transform – application of Laplace transforms to solution of Network problems. Module 2 Fourier series: Evaluation of Fourier coefficients – wave form symmetries as related to Fourier coefficients – exponential form of Fourier series – steady state response to periodic signals. Fourier Integral: Spectrum envelop for a recurring pulse – the Fourier Integral and Transforms – Application in Network analysis. Module 3 Network Functions: Network functions for two port – poles and zeroes of network functions – restrictions on poles and zeroes for driving point functions and transfer functions. Two port parameters – short circuit admittance parameter – open circuit impedance parameters – Transmission parameters – Image parameters and Hybrid parameters. Ideal two port devices – ideal transformer – Gyrator – negative impedance converter. Module 4 Filters: Classification of filters – Characteristics of ideal filters – Image impedance – Constant K lowpass, highpass, and bandpass filters – mderived lowpass, highpass and bandpass filters. Module 5 Network Synthesis: Realizability concept – Hurwitz property – positive realness – properties of positive real functions – Synthesis of RL, RC and LC driving point functions – Foster and Cauer forms. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Network Analysis: M.E Van Valkenburg Circuits and Networks – Analysis and Synthesis: A. Sudhakar and S.P Shyam Mohan Networks and Systems: D. Roy Choudhary Network Analysis and Synthesis: Franklin F. Kuo – John Wiley & Sons Engineering Circuit Analysis: W.H. Hayt and J.E. Kemmerly – McGraw Hill.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS E 403 3+1+0 Module 1 Transistor Characteristics: CE, CB, CC Configurations – Biasing – Operating Point – Operating point instability – thermal runaway – bias stability – Stability factor – stabilization techniques – Fixed bias – Collector to Base bias – Emitter bias – Voltage divider bias – Stability against variation in ICO. FET: Principle of operation and characteristics – biasing FETs – self bias – FET amplifier. 193
UJT: Principle of operation and characteristics. Module 2 Small Signal Analysis: hparameter equivalent circuit of a BJT – comparison of CB, CE, and CC configurations – Determination of h – parameters from static characteristics – current and voltage gains, input impedance of a basic amplifier in hparameters. Multistage Amplifiers: RC coupling – Frequency response characteristics – bandwidth – cascading of amplifiers – gain and bandwidth. Module 3 Feedback amplifiers: Positive and Negative feedback – types of negative feedback – Typical circuits –effect of negative feedback in amplifier performance. Oscillators: Barkhausen criterion – classification of oscillators – Principle of operation of RC phaseshift, Hartley and crystal oscillators (analysis not required). Module 4 Multivibrators: Principle of Operation and design of astable multivibrators – principle of bistable and monostable multivibrators – circuits. Sweep generators: Principle of Sweep generation – basic transistor sweep circuit – Equation for sweep amplitude. Sweep generation using UJT relaxation oscillator circuit. Wave shaping: Clipping and Clamping circuits using diodes – RC differentiating and Integrating Circuits. Module 5 Power Amplifiers: Class A, B, AB and C operation – Efficiency of Class A and B – Pushpull amplifier – Complimentary Symmetry amplifiers. References 1. Integrated Electronics: Millman and Halkias, TMH 2. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory: Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Pearson Education Asia, LPE. 3. Electronic Principles: Albert Paul Malvino, TMH 4. Electronic Devices and Circuits, An Introduction: Allen Mottershead, PHI
ELECTRICAL MACHINES  I E 404 3+1+0 Module 1 D.C Machines: Generation of D.C – Action of Commutator – constructional details of D.C machine – magnetic circuit of D.C machines – D.C Armature windings – Induced emf – emf equation – torque developed in a D.C machine – generator and motor action – back emf – Armature mmf – magnitude and direction – Airgap flux distribution curve on load – effect of saturation – Demagnetising and cross – magnetising armature mmf – variation with brush position – compensating winding – Commutation – time of commutation – emf in coil undergoing commutation – reactance emf – effect of brush shift – interpoles.
194
Module 2 D.C Generator: Types of excitation – separately excited – self excited shunt, series and compound machines. OCC – Condition for self excitation – field critical resistance – critical speed – Load characteristics of generators – Load critical resistance – parallel operation of shunt, series and compound generators – equalizer connection – Losses – power flow diagram – efficiency condition for maximum efficiency – applications – special machines – welding generator – Boosters. Module 3 D.C Motors: Performance characteristics of shunt, series and compound wound motors – starting – 3point and 4point starters – Calculation of resistance elements for shunt motor starters – methods of speed control of shunt, series and compound wound motors – effect of an open field circuit – power flow diagram – efficiency – testing D.C machine – Swineburne’s test – Hopkinson’s test – Field’s test – Retardation test. Module 4 Transformers: Single phase transformer – Constructional details – Core – windings – Insulation – principle of operation – Inrush of switching currents – emf equation – magnetising current and core losses – noload and load operation – Phasor diagram – equivalent circuit – losses and efficiency – condition for maximum efficiency – voltage regulation – approximate expression for voltage regulation – harmonics in single phase transformers  Magnetising current wave form – OC and SC tests – Sumpner’s test. Module 5 Three phase Transformer: Constructional features of three phase transformers – three phase connection of single phase transformers – oscillating neutral – tertiary winding – Scott connection – open delta connection – three phase to six phase connection – equal and unequal turns ratio – load sharing – distribution transformers – all day efficiency. Autotransformers – saving of copper – applications  tapchanging transformers  cooling of transformers.
References 1. 2. 3. 4. The performance and Design of Direct Current Machines: A. E. Clayton and N. N Hannock AC Machines: M.G. Say Theory of Alternating Current Machinery: Alexander Langsdorf, TMH Electrical Machines: R.K Rajput COMPUTER PROGRAMMING E 405 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to C: The C character set – identifiers and keywords – data types – user defined data types – constants and variables – declarations – operators – expressions – statements – library inputoutput functions Control statements: if, ifelse, switch, goto statements – conditional and comma operators. Module 2 195
Iterative statements: ‘while’, ‘dowhile’, ‘for’ statements – nested loops, break and continue statements. Functions: Declarations, definition and access – passing arguments to a function – pass by value and pass by reference – recursion. Storage classes: automatic variables – external variables – register variables – scope and life time of variables. Module 3 Arrays: single dimensional arrays – multidimensional arrays – definition – initializing arrayspassing arrays to a function – matrix operations – addition, transpose and multiplication. Strings: Definition – string handling functions – comparison, concatenation and sorting of strings. Module 4 Pointers: Introduction – pointer declaration – operations on pointers. Files: File pointers – data files: opening and closing – reading and writing. Module 5 Structures and union: definition – initialization – accessing structure members – array of structures – passing structure to a function – sorting of structures – binary files – reading and writing of data blocks – union. Dynamic memory allocation – self referential structures – basic concepts of linked lists – adding and deleting nodes – command line arguments – macros – C preprocessor. References 1. Theory and Problems of Programming with C: B.S. Gotterfield, TMH 2. Programming in ANSI C: Balaguruswamy, TMH 3. Programming with ANSI & Turbo C: Ashok Kamthane, Pearson Education Asia 4. The Spirit of C, An Introduction to modern programming: Mullish & Cooper, Jaico Publishing Co. 5. Programming in C: Stephen G. Kochan, CBS Publ. 6. Computer Programming in C: V. Rajaraman, PHI EEE 7. The Official Borland Turbo C Survival Guide: Miller & Quilci, Wiley Eastern 8. Programming Techniques through C: M. G Venkateshmurthy, Pearson Education 9. Let us C: Yashwant Kanetkar, BPB publ. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS 2+1+0
E 406
Module 1 Principle of measuring instruments: Classification – indicating, recording and integrating instruments – Torque acting on the moving system – deflecting torque – methods of production – controlling torque – spring and gravity control – damping torque – electromagnetic and air friction damping. Constructional features of instruments – torque to weight ratio of the moving system – basic theory of instruments – characteristics – damping coefficient – under damped – over damped and critically damped and critically damped instruments. Module 2 196
Permanent magnet moving coil instruments: – Ammeters and Voltmeters – Torque relationship – Milliammeters and voltmeters – shunt and multipliers – sensitivity – multimeters. Moving iron instruments: Attraction and Repulsion types – constructional features – Ammeters and Voltmeters – Errors and Compensation. Module 3 Electrodynamometer instruments: Ammeters, Voltmeters and Watt meters – Sensitivity – Torque to weight ratio – methods of connection of current and potential coils Errors and compensation – low power factor wattmeters – single phase wattmeters. Induction type instruments: Wattmeters and energy meters – single phase and three phase – constructional features – Theory of operation – Errors and compensation – creep – maximum demand meters – Trivector meters. Module 4 Rectifier Instruments: Principle of operation – Electrostatic instruments – voltmeters – characteristics, applications. Electronic voltmeters – basic DC voltmeters – basic AC voltmeter using rectifier – basic electronic multi meter – function generator – RLC meter. Cathode ray Oscilloscope: Principle – Application – Measurement of Voltage, current, phase and frequency. Multichannel oscilloscopes – principle of operation and uses.
Module 5 Instruments for phase, frequency, speed, stroboscopic methods – Resonance frequency meters – Power factor meters – Synchroscope – phase sequence indicators. Symbols for instruments – Indian standards specifications Grading of Instruments – Classification. References 1. Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments – Golding E.W, Wheeler and Co., 1991. 2. Electrical and Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements – Sawhney A.K, Dhanpat Rai and Co., 1992. 3. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and measurement Technique – Albert D. Helfrick and William D. Cooper, PHI, 1992. ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS LAB E 407 1. Extension of instrument range by using a. Shunt and multipliers b. Instrument transformers 2. Measurement of 3phase power using a. Single watt meter b. Two watt meters c. Threephase watt meter 3. Calibration of flux meter using a. Standard solenoid b. Hibbertz magnetic standard 197 0+0+4
4. 5. 6. 7.
Determination of BH characteristics Hysterisis loop using CRO Separation of core losses in a given magnetic specimen (a) Study of Multi meter (b) Measurement of R, L, C using LCR Bridge 8. Measurement of resistance using a. Wheatstone Bridge b. Kelvin’s Double bridge c. Voltmeter and Ammeter – calculation of error due to voltmeter resistance 9. Calibration of ammeter, voltmeter and wattmeter and measurement of resistance using a. Simple slidewire potentiometer b. Vernier Potentiometer c. Precision slidewire potentiometer 10. Calibration of ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter and measurement of impedance using A.C Potentiometer 11. Measurement of self inductance, mutual inductance and coupling coefficient. 12. Calibration of singlephase Energy meter by a. Direct loading b. Phantom loading with and without using phase shifting transformer 13. Calibration of threephase Energy meter by a. Direct loading b. Phantom loading 14. Efficiency measurement of Lamps using Lux meter 15. Measurement of displacement using LVDT 16. Measurement of different parameters using Trivectormeter COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LAB E 408 Part A Familiarisation
1. Study of Operating systems like DOS, Windows, Linux etc; Commands for use of files and directories, internal commands, external commands etc. 2. Familiarisation with word processing packages like MS Word, PageMaker etc. 3. Familiarisation with spread sheet packages like MS Excel.
0+0+4
Part B Programming Experiments in C Programming experience in C to cover control structures, functions, arrays, structures, pointers and files in accordance with syllabus of E 405. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Summation of series Preparation of Conversion tables Solution of quadratic equations Array manipulation Functions Recursive functions String manipulation – compare, copy, reverse operations 198
8. Matrix operations 9. Stack operations and simple programs using linked lists 10. Tabulation of marks and declaration of results – input and output using files 11. Creation of numeric and text files, merging and appending of files. Part C Application of numerical methods 1. Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: bisections, Newton Raphson method. 2. Numerical Integration – Simpson’s 1/3rd rule.
199
FIFTH SEMESTER
200
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  IV CMELPA 501 3+1+ 0 Module 1 Complex Integration: Line integral – Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s series – Laurent’s series – Zeroes and singularities – residues – residue theorem – evaluation of real integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semi circle. Module 2 Numerical Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection method – Regula – Falsi method – Newton – Raphson method – solution of system of linear equation by Jacobi’s iteration method and Gauss – Sidel method. Module 3 Numerical solution of Ordinary Differential Equations: Taylor’s series method – Euler’s method – Modified Euler’s method – Runga – Kutta method (IV order) Milne’s predictorcorrector method. Module 4 z  Transforms: Definition of z – transforms – properties – ztransform of polynomial functions – trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property – inverse transform – solution of first and second order difference equations with constant coefficients using ztransforms. Module 5 Linear Programming: Graphical solution – solution using simplex method (nondegenerative only) – duality in LPT – balanced TP – Vogel’s approximation method – Modi method. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern. Numerical Methods in Engg. and Science : Grawal B. S, Khanna Publ. Higher Engg. Mathematics: Grawal B. S, Khanna Publ. Numerical Methods in Science and Engg.: M. K Venkataraman, National Publishing Co. Quantitative techniques: Theory and Problems: P.C Tulsian and Vishal Pandey, Pearson Education Asia Complex Variable and Applications: Churchill and Brown, McGrawHill Engineering Mathematics Vol.3: S.Arumugam, A.T Issac and A.Somasundaram, Scitech Publ. Advanced Mathematics for Engineering students Vol3: S. Narayanan, T.K.M Pillai & G. Ramanaiah, S.Viswanathan Printers & Publ. Operations Research: Paneer Selvam, PHI
DIGITAL CIRCUITS E 502 3+1+0 Module 1 Number Systems and Codes: Arithmetic using signed and unsigned numbers Floating point representation Normalized floating point representationGray Codes, ASCII and EBCDIC code.
201
Logic gates: Elements of Boolean algebra Logic operations AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR gates De Morgan’s Theorem Realisation of combinational circuits using SOP and POS forms  Kmap up to 4 variables Half adder, full adder circuits. Half subtraction and Full subtraction circuits. Module 2 Logic Families: DTL, TTL and CMOS families comparison of characteristics TTL NAND gate internal circuit TTL characteristics sinking and sourcing fanin and fanout – CMOS characteristics – CMOS NAND and NOR gates. Decoders: BCD to decimal, BCD to 7 Segment decoders Encoders Multiplexer Demultiplexer. Module 3 Sequential Circuits: JK Flipflops SR JK, T and D flipflops buffers Tristate buffers racing JK masterslave FF. Truth table and excitation table conversion of flipflops from one type to another. Asynchronous counters: Ripple counter disadvantagesDecoding errorsmaximum frequency of the counter – modulo N ripple counter using CLEAR and PRESET inputs. Asynchronous UPDOWN counters. Module 4 Synchronous Counters: Methods to improve counter speed synchronous serial and parallel counters – synchronous counter design – modulo N counter design for completely specific count sequence – lockout, design without lockout – Synchronous UP/DOWN counters. Counter IC 7490. Module 5 Shift Registers: SISO, PIPO, PISO, PIPO types – Universal shift registers. Counters using Shift Registers: Ring counter – twisted ring counter Design for self starting ring counter. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Digital Principles and Applications: Malvino & Leach, TMH Digital Fundamentals: Thomas L. Floyd Digital Integrated Electronics: Taub & Schilling, McGraw Hill Intl. Digital Electronics and Microcomputers: R.K. Gaur, Dhanpat Rai & sons Engineering Approach to Digital Design: Fletcher – EEE Edition
COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING E 503 2+1+0 Module 1 Modulation: Need for modulation, Amplitude modulation–Definition Mathematical representation  Frequency spectrum  Power relations. Principle of single side band transmission – Advantages Disadvantages. Frequency modulation – Definition – Mathematical representation  Frequency spectrum, Comparison between FM and AM. Module 2 202
Transmitter: AM transmitter – high level and lowlevel systems  functional description of each block. FM transmitter – FET & BJT modulator. Receiver: AM receiver – TRF receiver – Limitations. Superhetrodyne receiver – block schematic, choice of IF, image signal rejection. Module 3 Television: Composite video signal – synchronizing pulse – blanking pulseequalizing pulse, Video BW, Positive and negative modulation, Vestigial side band transmission, Television standards, Block schematic of monochrome TV transmitter and receiver. Colour Television: Compatibility, characteristics of colour transmission and reception, luminance, hue & saturation, colour difference signal, I & Q signals, frequency interleaving, colour sub carrier. Module 4 Radar: Basic radar system, radar range equation – performance factors, Pulsed radar, Continuous wave radar – advantageslimitationsapplications, CW radar, MTI radar system. Radio navigational aids – ILS – GCA. Module 5 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION: Geosynchronous satellites – advantages and disadvantages, uplink & downlink, multiple access techniques – Basic principles of FDMA, TDMA, DAFDMA, DATDMA. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Electronic Communication Systems: George Kennedy, TMH Electronic Communication Systems: Wayne Tomasi, Pearson Education, LPE Monochrome and Colour Television: R.R Gulati, Wiley Eastern Introduction to Radar Systems: Skoluik, McGraw Hill Intl. Satellite Communications: D.C Agarwal, Khanna Radio Engineering: Mithal, Khanna
E 504
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND ENGINEERING ECONOMICS 3+2+0 PART A: INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
Module 1 Modern Concepts of Management: Scientific management – functions of management – planning – organizing – staffing – directing – motivating – communicating – coordinating – controlling – Organisational structures – line, line and staff, and functional relationships – Span of control – delegation – Management by objectives. Module 2 Personnel Management: Objectives and functions of personnel management – recruitment – selection and training of workers – labour welfare – industrial fatigue – Industrial disputes – Trade unions – Quality circles. 203
Formation of Companies: Proprietary – Partnership – joint stock companies – public sector – joint sector and cooperative sector. Module 3 Marketing Management: Pricing – Promotion – Channels of distribution – Market research – Advertising. Production Management: Batch and mass production – inventory control – EOQ – Project planning by PERT /CPM – Construction of network (Basic Ideas only) References 1. Industrial Management: O.P. Khanna 2. Industrial Management: K.K Ahuja 3. Marketing Management: Philip Kotler PART B: ENGINEERING ECONOMICS Module 4 Theory of demand and supply – price mechanisms – factors of production – land, labour, capital and organisation – National income – Difficulties in estimation – Taxation – Direct and indirect taxes – Progressive and regressive – black money – inflation – Causes and consequences. Module 5 Indian Financial System – Reserve bank of India – Functions – Commercial banking system – Development financial institutions – IDBI –ICICI – SIDBI – IRBI NABARD – Investment institutions – UTI – Insurance companies – Indian capital market – Stock market – Functions – Role of the public sector – Privatisation – Multinational corporations and their impact on the Indian economy. References 1. Indian Economy: A.N Agarwal 2. Modern Economic Theory: K.K. Dewett 3. Principles of Economics: K.P.M. Sundharam & M.C Vaish. LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS E 505
2+1+0
Module 1 Operational Amplifiers: Differential amplifier – block diagram of a typical op amp – characteristics of an ideal opamp – definitions of CMRR – slew rate – input offset voltage – differential input resistance – input voltage range – SVRR – large signal voltage gain – output voltage swing – output resistance – openloop configurations – disadvantages – closedloop configurations – non inverting amplifier – voltage follower – inverting amplifier – summing and scaling amplifier – integrator – differentiator – logarithmic amplifier. Module 2 Basic Comparator: Astable and mono stable multivibrators  Schmitt trigger – zero crossing detector – precision rectifier – peak detector – sample and hold circuit – function generator (no analysis). Module 3 204
Active filters: First order low pass filter, high pass filter, band pass filter, band reject filter (twin T notch filter). D/A converter – binary weighted resistor type – ladder type – A/D converter – simultaneous A/D converter – counter type – successive approximation converter – dualslope converter – Digital voltmeter. Module 4 Phaselockedloop: Basic principles of PLL – block diagram – transfer characteristics – applications of PLL as FM demodulator, AM demodulator and frequency multiplier. Module 5 Timer: The 555 timer – functional block diagram – astable and monostable operation of 555 timers. Regulated Power Supplies: Zener voltage regulator – series voltage regulator using transistors (analysis not required) – Series opamp regulator – IC voltage regulator – 723/317 general purpose switching regulator. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Opamp and Linear Integrated Circuits: Ramakant Gayakwad, Pearson Education Asia, 4/e, LPE Integrated Electronics: Millman and Halkias Integrated Circuits: Botkar K.R Linear IC: Roy Choudhary Opamp and Linear IC: Robert F. Coughlin Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory: Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky
POWER ELECTRONICS E 506 2+1+ 0 Module 1 Power Semiconductor Devices: Power diodes, Power Transistors, Power MOSFET, IGBTs, Diac, Triac, GTOs – static characteristics and principle of operation. SCRs: Static and dynamic characteristics – two transistor analogy – gate characteristics Module 2 SCR ratings and specifications  Device protection – heat sink selection – series and parallel operation of SCRs. SCR Triggering circuits – R, RC, UJT triggering circuits – diac triggering circuit – single pulse, continuous pulse carrier frequency triggering – pulse transformer – amplification and isolation of SCR gate pulses. Module 3 Phase control: single phase half wave controlled rectifier circuit – single phase full wave controlled rectifier circuit – R, RL Loads – free wheeling – half controlled and fully controlled bridge with continuous and steady current – Expression for output voltage – wave forms – active and reactive power – effect of source inductance – line commutated inverter – 3phase half wave and full wave controlled rectifier – expression for output voltage.
205
Module 4 Commutation of SCRs – classification of commutation schemes Inverters: series and parallel inverters – single phase and three phase bridge inverters (schematic diagrams and wave forms only) – Mc Murray Inverter – Basic Principle of PWM. Module 5 Choppers: Basic principle – Classification – Type A, B, C, D and E. (Analysis not required) Basic Principle of Cycloconverters. Control Circuits: Generation of control pulses – block schematic of firing circuits – linear and cosine comparison – Digital firing scheme. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices and Applications, M.H. Rashid, PHI/Pearson Edn. Power Electronic Systems – Theory and Design, Jai P. Agarwal, Pearson Education Asia, LPE Power Electronics, P.S Bhimbhra, Khanna publ., New Delhi A Text Book of Power Electronics, S.N Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Co, 2000 Power Electronics – Converters, Applications and Design, Mohan N, Undeland T.M and Robbins W.P, John Wiley 1989 6. Power Electronics, Harish C. Rai, Galgotia Publ.
206
ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB  I E 507 D.C. Machines 1. Study of 3point and 4point starters for D.C machines – mode of connection – protective arrangements 2. OCC of self and separately excited D.C machines – critical resistances of various speeds. Voltage builtup with a given field circuit resistance. Critical speed for a given field circuit resistance 3. Load test on shunt and compound generator – deduce external, internal and armature reaction characteristics. Find load critical resistance. 4. Characteristics of D.C series machine as motor and generator. 5. Swineburne’s and retardation test on D.C machines. 6. Brake test on D.C shunt, compound motors and determination o characteristics. 7. Hopkinson’s test on a pair of D.C machines. 8. Separation of losses in a D.C machine. 9. Field’s test on D.C machine. Transformers 10. Polarity, transformation ratio, tests of single phase units and stardelta combination for 3phase operation. 11. O.C and S.C tests on single phase transformers – calculation of performance using equivalent circuit – efficiency, regulation at unity, lagging and leading power factors. Verification by direct loading. 12. Sumpner’s test on single phase transformers. 13. O.C and S.C tests on threephase transformers. 14. Scott connection – check for 2 phase – predetermination of primary current for balanced and unbalanced secondary currents – verification by actual loading. 15. Parallel operation and load sharing of two single phase dissimilar transformers. 16. Separation of losses of single phase transformer into Hysterisis and eddy current losses. 17. Paralleling of Threephase transformers and load sharing. 18. Auto transformer – equivalent circuit. ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB E 508 0+0+4 1. Design and testing of clipping, clamping, RC integrator and differentiator circuits – Display of Transfer characteristics on CRO. 2. Design and testing of rectifier circuits – Half wave – Full wave (centre – tapped and bridge) circuits. Filter circuits. 3. Zener regulator design and testing. 4. BJT, FET and UJT characteristics. 5. Design and testing of CE amplifier – frequency response. 6. Design and testing of RC coupled and feedback amplifiers. 7. FET amplifier. 8. Sweep circuits – UJT and BJT based sweep generators – sweep circuit using constant current source (BJT). 9. Design and Testing of RC phaseshift Oscillator and LC Oscillator. 10. Design and Testing of Astable and Bistable Multivibrators. 11. Relay driving circuit using transistors. 207 0+0+4
12. Study of IC power amplifiers. Optional Simulation of the above circuits using EDA tools like pSPICE. (Any experiment relevant to E 403 may be added) References 1. Electronic Principles: A.P. Malvino – TMH 2. Electronic Devices: Floyd – Pearson Education, LPE 3. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory: Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Education Asia, LPE.
Nashelsky, Pearson
208
SIXTH SEMESTER
209
CONTROL SYSTEMS  I E 601 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: Concept of a system – control system – openloop system – levels of sophistication in a control system – mathematical model of physical systems – plant representation – transfer functions – block diagrams – signal flow graphs – effects of feedback on parameter variations, system dynamics and disturbance signals. Module 2 Time response analysis: Type and order of a system – time domain analysis of systems – typical test input signals – response of first order systems to unit step, unit ramp, and unit impulse signals – step response of second order systems – performance characteristics of feed back control systems – time domain behaviour from polezero plot Steady state errors and error constants – generalized error constants – improvement of performance by derivative control, integral control, PID control. Module 3 Concepts of Stability: BIBO stability – asymptotic stability – Routh Hurwitz stability criterion – relative stability – root locus technique – construction of root loci – root contours – systems with transportation lag. Module 4 Frequency response analysis: Correlation between time and frequency response – polar plots – bode plots – relative stability – phase margin and gain margin – minimum and nonminimum phase systems. Module 5 Stability in Frequency domain: Nyquist stability criterion – relative stability. Control System Components: synchros – resolvers – rotating amplifiers – magnetic amplifier – Amplidyne – Tachogenerators – DC and AC servo motors – Gyroscopes – stepper motor. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Modern Control Engineering: Katsuhiko Ogatta, Pearson Education Asia Analog and Digital Control System Design: Chi Tsong Chen, Oxford University Press Modern Control Systems: Dorf and Bishop, Addison Wesley, LPE, 9th Ed. Control System Design & Principles: M. Gopal, TMH
ELECTRICAL MACHINES  II E 602 Module 1 210 3+1+0
Synchronous Machines: Types – selection of alternators – constructional features of cylindrical and salient pole machines. Armature windings: different types – phase grouping – single and double layer, integral and fractional slot winding – emf equation – distribution factor – coil span factor – tooth harmonic ripples – skewed slots – harmonics, elimination of harmonics – revolving magnetic field. Module 2 Armature Reaction – Synchronous reactance – circuit model of synchronous machine. Regulation – predetermination – emf, mmf and potier methods, saturated synchronous reactance – Phasor diagrams – short circuit ratio – tworeaction theory – Phasor diagram – slip test – measurement of Xd, Xq, losses and efficiency of synchronous machines. Module 3 Parallel operation of alternators – load sharing – synchronising power and torque – governor characteristics – method of synchronising – synchroscope. Synchronous Motor: Principles of operation – torque and power relationships – Phasor diagram – hunting in synchronous machines – damper winding – starting of synchronous motors. Module 4 Synchronous machines connected to infinite bus – power angle characteristics of cylindrical rotor and salient pole machines – reluctance power – steady state stability limit – Vcurves – inverted Vcurves – Ocurves – synchronous condenser – symmetrical short circuit of unloaded alternators – steady state, transient and subtransient reactance – current variation during short circuit. Module 5 Generalised Machine Theory: Dynamic representation of generalised machines – formation of emf equation – expression of power and torque – representation of DC machines – synchronous machine and Induction motor. Excitation systems: different types – comparison – exciter ceiling voltage – excitation limits – exciter response – methods of increasing the response of an exciter. Brushless Alternators: Principle of operation constructional features – excitation methods – voltage regulation. References 1. The performance and Design of AC Machines: M.G. Say 2. Theory of Alternating Current Machinery: Alexander Langsdorf 3. A course in Electrical Engg. Vol.2: C.L Dawes 4. Power System Stability – Vol. 3: E.W Kimbark 5. Electrical Machines: P.S Bhimbra 6. Generalised Theory of Electrical machines: P. S Bhimbra 7. Theory and performance Electrical Machines: J.B Gupta ELECTRICAL POWER TRANSMISSION E 603 3+1+0 Module 1 Transmission Line Constants: Resistance – skin effect – proximity effect. Inductance of single phase line – inductance of three phase line with symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing – transposed line. 211
Capacitance of single phase line – capacitance of three phase line with symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing – transposed lines – effect of earth on line capacitance – geometric mean distance – geometric mean radius Module 2 Overhead Lines: Mechanical characteristics  Conductor – bundled conductors – line supports – spacing between conductors – sag and tension calculations – effect of ice and wind  sag at the time of erection – vibration and dampers Line insulators: Different types – pin type – suspension type – strain type – potential distribution of a string of suspension insulator – string efficiency – equalization of potential – testing of insulators Module 3 Performance of Transmission Lines: Classification of transmission lines – analysis of short linesmedium line by nominal pi and T methods – rigorous solution of long lines – A, B, C, D constants – Ferranti effect – losses in an open circuited line – power flow through transmission lines Voltage Control: Different methods – static capacitor – tap changing transformer – booster transformer – phase modifier – power circle diagram – calculation Module 4 Corona: Critical disruptive voltage – visual critical voltage – power loss – factors affecting – methods to reduce corona – radio interference effect Substations: Types  general layout  neutral grounding – resistance earthing – reactance earthing – arc suppression coil earthing – grounding transformer  Power system earthing  measurement of earthing resistance Module 5 Extra High Voltage Transmission: Need for EHV transmission – limitations of EHV AC transmission – requirements of EHV lines  reactive compensation in EHV systems – EHV systems in India. HVDC Transmission  Advantages and disadvantages – Graetz circuit – inversion – kinds of d.c. links – economic distance of DC transmission References 1. Modern Power System Analysis: Nagrath and Kothari, TMH 2. Electrical Power Systems: C. L. Wadhwa, New Age Int’l 3. Electrical Power: Uppal 4. A Course in Electrical Power Systems: Soni, Gupta, Bhatnagar 5. HVDC Power Transmission System: K. R. Padiyar 6. Power System Analysis: Bergen, Pearson, 2/e DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING E 604 2+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: Elements of a Digital Processing System  Advantages of Digital over Analog Signal Processing. Applications of DSP. DiscreteTime Signals and Systems: Elementary DiscreteTime Signals Classification of DiscreteTime Systems  LTIV systems Causality, Stability. 212
Frequency Domain representation of discretetime signals: Fourier transform of a sequence properties of Fourier Transforms. Module 2 Discrete Fourier Transform: Properties of DFTLinearityshifting property, symmetry property, Convolution of a sequence. Fast Fourier Transform Decimationin time radix two FFT decimation in frequency radixtwo FFT. Module 3 Review of z transforms: inverse ztransform  properties of z transforms. Realisation of digital filters: Direct and cascaded structures for FIR filters  direct and cascade and parallel structures for IIR filters. Module 4 FIR filters: characteristics of practical frequency selective filterscharacteristics of FIR filters with linear phase  design of linear phase FIR filters using windows rectangular, Hamming, Hanning and Kaiser windows, FIR filter design using frequency sampling. Module 5 IIR filters: Properties of IIR filtersdesign of IIR digital filters from analog filtersButterworth designChebyshev design  impulses invariant transformationBilinear transformation. DSP chips: TMS 320C family  features and block schematic of simplified architecture. References 1. Digital Signal Processing – Alan V. Oppenheim and Ronald W. Schafer, Pearson Education Asia, LPE 2. Digital Signal Processing  John G. Proakis and Dimitris G. Manolakis 3. Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach – Emmanuel C. Ifeachor and Barrie W. Jervis, Pearson Education Asia, LPE 4. An Introduction to Digital Signal Processing: Johny R. Johnson
E 605
MICROPROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS 3+1+ 0
Module 1 Evolution of Processors – single chip microcomputer – Intel 8085 Microprocessor – signals – architecture of 8085 – ALU – register organisation – timing and control unit – microprocessor operations – instruction cycle – fetch, decode and execute operation – Tstate, machine cycle and instruction cycle – timing diagram of opcode fetch, memory read, I/O read, memory write and I/O write cycles – wait state. Module 2 Instruction set of 8085: Classification of instructions – different addressing modes – writing assembly language programs – typical examples like 8 bit and 16 bit arithmetic operations, finding 213
the sum of a data array, finding the largest and smallest number in a data array, arranging a data array in ascending and descending order, finding square from lookup table. Counters and time delays – delay using one register, two registers and register pair. Module 3 Stack and Subroutines: Stack pointer – stack operations – callreturn sequence – examples Interrupts of 8085: restart instructions – interrupt structure of 8085 – vectored locations – SIM and RIM instructions – software and hardware polling. Module 4 Memory interfacing  ROM and RAM – interfacing I/O devices – address space partitioning – memory mapped I/O and I/O mapped I/O schemes – interfacing I/Os using decoders – the 8212 I/O device – interfacing LED and matrix keyboard – programmable peripheral devices – 8155 and 8255, block diagram, programming simple input and output ports. Module 5 Different data transfer schemes: synchronous and asynchronous data transfer – programmed and interrupt driven data transfer. Applications of microprocessor in system design: interfacing ADC 0808 – interfacing DAC 0800. DMA controller 8257Interfacing of stepper motor – interfacing of 8279 keyboard /display controller 8275 CRT controller. Architecture and operation of 8086. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications: R.S. Gaonkar, Penram Intl’ Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers: B. Ram, Dhanpat Rai and Sons 0000 to 8085: Introduction to Microprocessors and Engineers: P.K Ghosh, PHI Microprocessors and Digital Systems: Douglas V. Hall, McGraw Hill Introduction to Microprocessors: A.P Mathur, TMH Digital Electronics and Microprocessors: Malvino, TMH
214
COMPUTER ORGANISATION E 606 2+0+ 0 Module 1 Introduction: Functional block diagram of digital computer – processor organization – typical operation cycle: fetch, decode and execute – microprogrammed Vs hardwired control (basic concepts only) – bus structures. Module 2 Arithmetic and Logic unit: Adders serial and parallel adders fast adders carry look ahead adder2’s complement adder/subtractor multiplication and division operations (description using block schematic diagrams only)design of Logic unitone stage ALU. Module 3 Memory System: memory parameters – main memory – cache memory – auxiliary memory – semiconductor RAM – Static RAM –Dynamic RAM – ROM – PROM – EPROM – E2PROM – Flash Memory. Programmable Logic Devices: PAL, PLA, FPLA, Applications. Module 4 Memory Organisation: Internal Organisation of memory chips – cache memory – mapping functions – direct mapping – associative mapping – set associative mapping – memory interleaving – Hit and miss – virtual memory – organization – Address translation. Module 5 Input/Output Organisation: access to I/O Devices – Interrupts – Enabling and Disabling of Interrupts – Handling multiple devices –Buses – Synchronous and Asynchronous buses. Data Communication interfaces and standards: parallel and serial ports – RS232, RS423 serial bus standards –GPIB IEEE488 Instrumentation bus standard PCI, SCSI, USB (basic ideas only). References 1. 2. 3. 4. Computer Organisation: V. Hamacher – Mc Graw Hill Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals: M. Morris Mano 2/e Pearson Computer Organisation and Design: P. Pal Chaudhari – PHI Digital Computer Fundamentals: Thomas Bastee DIGITAL LAB E 607 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0+0+4 Study of TTL gates Characteristics of TTL gates Realisation of sequential circuits Study of SR. JK, D, T and JK MasterSlave Flip Flops Study of seven segment display Testing of different shift registers Design and Testing of decoders and encoders Design and testing of astable and monostable multivibrator using 555 Design and testing asynchronous and synchronous counters and modulo N counter 215
10. Design and testing of counters using shift registers 11. Realisation of ADC and DAC 12. Testing of arithmetic circuits using opamps 13. Design and testing of square wave generation using opamps 14. Study of IC Regulator Power supplies SYSTEMS LAB E 608 1. 8085 assembly language programming experiments a. 8bit and 16 bit arithmetic operations b. Arranging a data array in descending and ascending order c. BCD to binary and binary to BCD conversion d. Finding square root of a number e. Finding out square root of a number using lookup table f. Setting up time delay and square wave generation g. Interfacing of LEDs, 7 segment displays h. Traffic control signals i. Interfacing of stepper motor j. Interfacing of ADC k. Interfacing of DAC l. Generation of firing pulses for SCR. m. Interfacing of Power devices n. Interfacing LCD displays 2. VCO circuits using IC 566, 4046B etc. 3. PLL systems using IC 565, 4046B etc. 4. Multiplexed Displays 0+0+4
216
SEVENTH SEMESTER
217
ELECTRICAL MACHINES  III E 701 3+1+ 0 Module 1 Three phase Induction Motor: Construction – squirrel cage and slipring motor – principle of operation – slip and frequency of rotor current – mechanical power and developed torque – Phasor diagram – torque slip curve – pull out torque – losses and efficiency. No load and locked rotor tests – equivalent circuit – performance calculation from equivalent circuit – circle diagram – operating characteristics from circle diagram – cogging and crawling and methods of elimination Module 2 Starting of three phase squirrel cage induction motor – direct online starting – auto transformer – stardelta starting – starting of slipring motor – design of rotor rheostat – variation of starting torque with rotor resistance. Speed control – pole changing – rotor resistance control – frequency control – static frequency conversion – Applications of Induction machines – single phasing – analysis using symmetrical components. Module 3 Induction Generator: Theory – Phasor diagram – equivalent circuit  Synchronous Induction motor: – construction – rotor winding connections – circle diagram – pulling into step. Single phase Induction motor: revolving field theory – equivalent circuit – torque slip curve – starting methods – split phase, capacitor startcapacitor run and shaded pole motors. Module 4 Single phase Series Motor: Theory – Phasor diagram – circle diagram – compensation and interpole winding – Universal motor Repulsion Motor: torque production – Phasor diagram – compensated type of motors – repulsion start and repulsion run induction motor – applications Reluctance motor – Hysterisis motor Module 5 Deep bar and double cage induction motor – equivalent circuit – torque slip curve – Commutator motors – principle and theory – emf induced in a commutator winding   Polyphase commutator motors – three phase series and shunt type – Schrage motor – characteristics – applications – use of commutator machines as frequency converters, phase advancers – expedor type and susceptor type – Walker and Scherbius advancers – Linear Induction motor – operation and application References 1. 2. 3. 4. Performance and Design of AC machines – M.G Say Theory of Alternating Current machines  Alexander Lagnsdorf A.C Commutator motor – Openshaw Taylor Alternating Current machines – Puchstein & Lloyd
218
ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CONTROL E 702 2+1+0 Module 1 DC motors: Methods of Speed control – single phase rectifiers with motor load single phase fully controlled bridge rectifier drives – half controlled bridge rectifier drives – freewheeling with regeneration – speed torque characteristics – power in load and source circuits Module 2 3 Phase fully controlled bridge rectifier drives – free wheeling, freewheeling with regeneration – Dual converter fed DC motor drives – chopper fed drives – single, two and four quadrant chopper drives Module 3 (Qualitative treatment only) Speed control of 3 Phase induction motors – stator voltage control – principle – controller configurations – operation and applications Slip power recovery scheme – principle – static Kramer’s drive – static Scherbius’ drive – applications V/f control – constant torque and constant power control Module 4 (Qualitative treatment only) Voltage Source Inverter – Application to induction motor drives – v/f, e/f, flux weakening schemes of control – applications PWM inverter drive Current Source Inverter – application to induction motor drives – operation under fixed frequency – operation under variable frequency – applications Module 5 (Qualitative treatment only) Speed control of synchronous motors – adjustable frequency operation of synchronous motors – principles of synchronous motor control – Voltage Source Inverter Drive with open loop control – self controlled synchronous motor with electronic commutation – self controlled synchronous motor drive using load commutated thyristor inverter. Principle of Vector control References 1. Power Electronic Control of AC motors – J.M.D Murphy and F.G Turnbill, Pergumon Press 1988 2. Power Semiconductor controlled Drives – G.K Dubey, Prentice hall, 1989 3. Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives – Bose B.K, Pearson Education Asia 2002 4. Electric Drives – N.K De and P.K Sen, PHI New Delhi 2001 5. Power Electronics – M.D Singh and K.B Khanchandani, TMH, 1998 6. Mohammad A and E.L Sharkaw – Fundamentals of Electric Drives – Thomson Learning 7. Power Semiconductor Drives – Vedam Subramaniam, TMH
219
UTILISATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER E 703 2+1+0 Module 1 Electric Drives: Advantages of Electric drives – factors affecting choice of motors – mechanical characteristic of DC and AC motors – motors for particular applications llike textile mill, steel mill, paper mill, mine, hoists, cranes – size and rating of motors. Electrical Braking – plugging – dynamic and regenerative braking – energy returned to the mains Module 2 Electric Traction: Advantages and disadvantage  speed time curves – analysis using trapezoidal speed time curve  mechanics of train movement – tractive effort – specific energy consumption – factors affecting specific energy consumption  train resistance – adhesive weight – coefficient of adhesion  traction motor & characteristics Seriesparallel control of D.C. series motor – shunt and bridge transition  energy saving by series parallel control. Module 3 Electric Heating and Welding: Electric heating – resistance types – design of heating element – induction heating – types of high frequency heating – dielectric heating – methods of high frequency generation – direct and indirect arc furnaces – power supply and control for different types of arc furnaces – application. Electric welding – resistance welding – arc welding – electronic welding control Module 4 Illumination: Review of definitions and laws of illumination – requirements of good lighting polar curves – Rousseau’s construction  lighting calculation – design of interior and exterior lighting system  factory lighting – flood lighting – street lighting. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: Types of refrigeration and air conditioning systems – refrigerants – no frost refrigeration – trouble shooting – working of electrical systems – protection of motors. Module 5 Energy Management: Necessity for Energy Management – Energy Saving – adopting nonconventional sources – Energy Management techniques (case study) applied to 1) Residential Buildings, 2) Industries/Organisations – Energy auditing References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Utilisation of Electrical Energy: Openshaw Taylor A Course in Electrical Power: Soni Gupta Generation, Distribution & Utilization: C.L Wadhwa Utilisation of Electric Power: N.V Suryanarayana, New Age Int’l. Energy Conservation Handbook: Utility publication
220
CONTROL SYSTEMS  II E 704 3+1+0 Module 1 Compensation and design of Control Systems: cascade compensation – lag, lead and laglead compensators – frequency domain methods – Bode plot method – Rootlocus methods Module 2 Digital Control Systems: the process of sampling – sample and hold circuits – Review of z transforms and its properties – solving difference equation by z transform methods – inverse z transform – the pulse transfer function – response between sampling instants – system characteristic equation – Jury’s stability test. Module 3 NonLinear Control Systems: Common physical non linearities – the phase plane method – basic concepts – describing functions of saturation, dead zone non linearities – stability analysis using describing functions. Module 4 State Variable Approach: state space representation – block diagram representation of linear system in state variable form – non uniqueness of the set of state variables – Eigen values of an n X n matrix – eigen vectors – transfer function – solution of homogeneous state equation – state transition matrix. Module 5 State equations from transfer function – decomposition of transfer function – controllability and observability  pole placement compensation – state variable approach to discrete data system – vector matrix difference equation – solution of the general linear time invariant systems – vector matrix difference equation References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Modern Control Engineering – Katsuhiko Ogatta, Pearson Education Asia/PHI Modern Control Systems –Dorf and Bishop, Pearson Education Asia Analog and digital Control System Design – Chi Tsong Chen, Oxford University Press Discrete Time Control of Dynamic Systems – Katsuhiko Ogatta, Pearson Education Asia Digital Control of Dynamic Systems – G.F Franklin, J. David Powell and Michael Workman, Pearson Education Asia
E 705
SYSTEM DESIGN WITH MICROCONTROLLERS 2+1+0 221
Module 1 Microcontrollers and Microprocessors  Comparison. Intel 8051: Architecture–Block diagramOscillator and ClockInternal RegistersProgram CounterPSWRegister BanksInput and Output portsInternal and External memory, Counters and Timers, Serial data I/O InterruptsSFRs. Module 2 Programming of 8051: Instruction syntaxTypes of instructions–Moving dataArithmetic InstructionsJump and Call InstructionsLogical InstructionsSingle Bit Instructions. Arithmetic programs. Timing subroutines –Software time delay Software polled timer Addressing Modes Module 3 I/O Programming: Timer/Counter ProgrammingInterrupts Programming Timer and external Interrupts Serial Communication Different character transmission techniques using time delay, polling and interrupt drivenReceiving serial data – polling for received data, interrupt driven data reception. Module 4 Microcontroller system design: External memory and Memory Address Decoding for EPROM and RAM. Interfacing keyboard. 7 segment display and LCD display. Interfacing of ADC (0808) and DAC (808) to 8051. Module 5 Designing a stand alone Microcontroller system: Typical system design examples (BlockDiagram level only)  Data acquisition system Measurement of frequency  Temperature control Introduction to PLCs: Basic configuration of PLCs Text Books 1. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems – Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Pearson Education Asia. 2. The 8051 Microcontroller – Architecture, Programming and Applications – Kenneth J. Ayala, Penram International Publishing (India), Second Ed. Reference 1. Intel Data Book on MCS 51 family
Web Reference 1. www.intel.com
ELECTIVE  I E 706 List of Electives 222 3+1+0
E 706.1 CMELR Optimisation Techniques (Common to all branches) E 706.2 HVDC Engineering E 706.3 Neural Networks E 706.4 Object Oriented Programming E 706.5 Biomedical Instrumentation Note New Electives may be added according to the needs of emerging fields of technology. The name of the elective and its syllabus should be submitted to the University before the course is offered. OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES CMLRTA 7061 Module l Classical optimization techniques: Single variable optimization  Multivariable optimization with no constraints  Hessian matrix  Multivariable saddle point  Optimization with equality constraints Lagrange multiplier method. Module 2 Constrained multivariable optimization: Multivariable optimization with inequality constraints KuhnTucker conditions  Convex programming problem  Quadratic programming. Module 3 Onedimensional unconstrained minimization: Elimination methods  unrestricted search method Fibonacci method Interpolation methods  Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation methods. Module 4 Unconstrained minimization: Gradient of a function  Steepest descent method  Newton's method Powells method  Hooke and Jeeve's method. Module 5 Integer  Linear programming problem: Gomory's cutting plane method  Gomory's method for all integer programming problems, mixed integer programming problems. References 1. Optimization theory and application  S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd. 2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering  A. D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla, Pearson Education Asia. 3. Principles of Operations Research for Management  F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena, Richard D. Irwin, INC. 4. Operation Research an introduction  H. A Taha, Eastern Economy Edition. HVDC ENGINEERING E 7062 Module 1 Introduction: Comparison of AC, DC transmission – Description of DC transmission systems – modern trends in thyristor valves – Pulse number of converters – choice of converter configuration – Review of Graetz circuit – Valve rating – Transformer rating – Simplified analysis of Graetz circuit without overlap only. 223
Module 2 HVDC System Control: principles of DC link control – converter control characteristics – system control hierarchy – firing angle control – individual phase control and equidistant phase control – comparison – advantages and disadvantages – current and extinction angle control – starting and stopping of DC link – power control Module 3 Converter faults and protection: types of faults – commutation failure –arc through and misfire – protection against over currents – over voltages – surge arresters – protection against over voltages Module 4 Harmonics and filters: Sources of harmonics in HVDC systems  Smoothing reactors – Corona and radio interference effects – harmonic distortion factor (derivation not required) – types of AC filters – DC filters (design not required) Module 5 Multiterminal DC systems: applications of MTDC systems – types – comparison. Reactive power control: sources of reactive power – static VAR systems – TCR configuration (analysis not required) – Typical control system (block diagram only) for a TCR – operation of Thyristor switched capacitor Text Book 1. HVDC Power Transmission SystemsTechnology and System Interactions: K.R Padiyar, New Age Int’l. Reference 1. Direct Current Transmission Vol 1: E.W Kimbark, Wiley
NEURAL NETWORKS E 7063 Module 1 Introduction: Principles Artificial neuron  activation functions Singe layer and Multilayer networks Training artificial neural networks  Perception  Representation  Linear Separability  Learning Training algorithms. Module2 Back propogation: Taining Algorithim  Application  Network Configurations  Network Paralysis  Local Minima  Temporal instability. Module 3 224
Counter Propogation Networks: Kebenone layer  Training the cohenen layer  Pre initialising the weight vectors  statistical properties Training the Grosbery layer  Full counter propagation network Application. Module 4 Statistical Methods: Boltzmann's Training  Cauchy training  Artificial specific heat methods applications to general nonlinear optimization problems Module 5 Hopfield nets: Recurrent networks  stability  Associative memoryapplications  Thermo dynamic systems  Statistical Hopfield networks Bidirectional associative memories  Continuous BAM Adaptive resonance theory  Architeture classification  implimentation. Text Book 1. Neural Computing & Practice  Philip D. Wasserman, References 1. Adaptive pattern Recognition & Neural Networks  Pay Y.H. 2. An Introduction to neural computing  Chaoman & Hall 3. Artificial Neural Networks  Kishan Mehrota and Etal OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING E 7064 Module 1 OOP concepts: Objectsclassesdata abstractiondata encapsulationinheritancepolymorphismdynamic bindingcomparison of OOP and Procedure oriented programmingobject oriented languages. OOP using C++: Classes and objectsclass declarationdata members and member functionsprivate and public membersmember function definitioninline functionscreating objectsaccessing class members. Module 2 Arrays of objectsobjects as function argumentspass by valuereference variables/aliasespass by referencefunction returning objectsstatic class members. Constructors and destructors declaration, definition and usedefault, parameterized and copy constructorsconstructor overloading. Module 3 Polymorphism: function overloadingdeclaration and definitioncalling overloaded functions. Friend classesfriend functionsoperator overloadingoverloading unary  overloading binary operators use of friend functions Module 4 Inheritance: different forms of inheritancebase classderived classvisibility modessingle inheritancecharacteristics of derived classabstract class 225
File handling in C++: file stream classesfile pointersopen (), close (), read (), write () functionsdetecting end of file. Module 5 Dynamic memory allocation: pointer variablespointers to objectsnew and delete operatorsaccessing member functions using object pointers'this' pointer. Run time polymorphism: pointers to base classpointers to derived classvirtual functionsdynamic binding. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Object Oriented Programming with C++  Balagurusamy, McGraw Hill Object Oriented Programming in Turbo C++  Robert Lafore ,Galgotia Publications C++Programming Language  Bjame Stroustrup, Addison Wesley C++ primer Stanely B.Lippman, PearsonEducation,Asia Data Abstraction and OOP in C++  Gordenkeith Object Oriented Analysis & Design  Grady Booch, Addison Wesley
BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION E7065 Module 1 Physiology and generation of bio electric potential Cell Potentials stimulation and thresholdsAction potentialspropagation of action potentialssodium pumpelectro physiology of cardio pulmonary systems  Respiration and circulation  Cardio vascular system  Heart electro cardiogram  Measurement and analysis of EGG waveformECG recorder principlesblock schematic of ECG recorder. Module 2 Blood pressureCharacteristics of blood flowHeart sounds Measurement of blood pressureDirect and indirect methodsPacemakers defibrillators PH of blood ESR and GSR Temperature measurement of various parts. Module 3 Respiratory systemmeasurement of respiration rateMeasurement of CO2 and O2 of exhaled airRespiratory therapy equipmentinhalators, ventilators and respirators. Module 4 Central Nervous systemsAnatomy of Nervous systemneuronal communicationOrganisation of brainNeuronal receptorssomatic nervous systems and spinal reflexesEEG measurement and characteristic of sleep.
Module 5 Modern imaging systems – X ray machine – computer tomography – magnetic resonance imaging system – NMR components – ultrasonic imaging systems – Therapeutic equipments – dialysers – surgical diathermy machines – laser applications – physiotherapy and electro therapy equipments 226
References 1. Handbook of Biomedical instrumentation – R.S Khandpur 2. Medical and Clinical Engg. – Brtil Jacobson and John G 3. Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements – Leslic Cromwell, F.J Weibel ELECTRICAL DRAWING E 707 PART A DC Winding 1. Lap winding with equalizer rings. 2. Wave winding, dummy coils. DC Machines 1. Dimensioned sketches of (a) front and end views of armature (b) commutator (c) brush holders (d) slot details. 2. Dimensioned sketches of yoke and pole assembly. 3. Dimensioned sketches of front and side views of an assembled medium size D.C machine. Transformers 1. Sections of core type transformer limbs. 2. Dimensioned sketch (external view) of a distribution transformer with all accessories. 3. (a) Dimensioned sketch of sections of transformer limb. (b) Assembled sectional view of Power transformer. 0+0+3
PART B AC Winding Three – phase AC winding 1. Integral slot lap winding 2. Short chorded winding 3. Fractional slot winding 4. Mush winding AC machines Dimensioned sketches of parts and assembled views of 1. Salient pole alternator 2. Cylindrical rotor alternator 3. Dimensioned sketches of parts and assembled views of 4. Squirrel cage induction motor 5. Slip ring Induction motor References 1. Electrical Engineering Drawing  S. K Bhattacharya 2. Electrical Engineering Drawing – K.L. Narang 227
3. Electrical Machine Design – A.K Sawhney (University Examination Pattern: 3 questions from Part A, of which any two must be answered, and 3 questions from part B of which any two must be answered. All questions carry 25 marks each). CONTROL AND POWER ELECTRONICS LAB E 708 Part A: Control Systems Lab 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Transfer Function of Separately excited DC generator Transfer Function of FieldControlled DC motor Transfer Function of ArmatureControlled DC motor Amplidyne characteristics and transfer function Voltage regulation of DC generator using Amplidyne Synchro characteristics, error detection and data transmission, differential Synchro AC servo motor – speed transfer characteristics Step and sinusoidal response of RLC circuits Study of PID controller – design and experimental determination of frequency response of lag and lead networks 10. D.C servo motor position control system 11. Use of MATLAB for simulating transfer functions, closedloop systems etc. Part B: Power Electronics Lab 1. 2. 3. 4. Study of VI characteristic of SCRS triac. Study of BJT, IGBT, GTO & MOSFET. R, RC and UJT firing circuits for the control of SCRS. Design and implementation of RampComparator and digital firing scheme for simple SCR circuits. 5. Automatic lighting control with SCRs and optoelectronic components. 6. AC phase control using SCR and Triac. 7. Speed control of DC motor using choppers and converters. 8. Generation and study the PWM control signal for Single phase dc to ac inverter. 9. Study and use of the single phase half controlled & fully controlled AC to DC Converter and effect of firing angle control on load voltage & wave Forms. 10. Study and use of back to back connected SCR/ triac Controlled AC Voltage controller and its wave forms with Variation of firing angle. 11. Study & use chopper circuit for the control of DC Voltage using (1) Pulse width control (2) Frequency Control. 12. Study of Single Phase inverter and its wave form. 13. Study of Three Phase firing circuit with synchronisation, and testing with three phase AC to DC bridge converter. Testing of wave forms of digital firing modules. 14. Study and Testing of a Three Phase bridge inverter with different types of loads. 15. Simulation of gating circuits and simple converter circuits. PROJECT AND SEMINAR E 709/E808 0+0+4
228
Each student is required to present a technical paper on a subject approved by the department. The paper should be in general reflecting the stateoftheart. He/she shall submit a report of the paper presented to the department. In addition to the seminar he/she shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in the 7 th semester itself in consultation with the Guides. On completion of the project work, he/she shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work, and submit a report of the project work done to the department.
229
EIGHTH SEMESTER
230
POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS E 801 3+1+0 Module 1 Power System Model: Representation – Single Line Diagram – per unit system – per unit impedance diagram – network model formulation – bus admittance matrix – formation of Y bus and Z bus using singular transformation – symmetrical components – sequence impedance and networks Module 2 Power Flow Studies: Load flow problem – Gauss Siedal method – Newton Raphson method – algorithm for load flow solution – handling of voltage controlled buses, off nominal transformer ratios and phase shifting transformers Module 3 Economic Load Dispatch: System constraints – Economic dispatch neglecting losses – optimal load dispatch including transmission losses – physical interpretation of co ordination equations – exact transmission loss formulae – modified co ordination equation – automatic load dispatching Module 4 Symmetrical and unsymmetrical short circuit analysis: Different types of faults in power systems – symmetrical fault analysis – selection of circuit breakers – use of reactors Unsymmetrical faults – analysis of single line to ground, line to line and double line to ground faults in power system – analysis of unsymmetrical fault using Z bus. Module 5 Stability Analysis: Swing equation – power angle equation and power angle curve – inertia constant – steady state stability  transient stability – equal area criterion – application – numerical solution of swing equation – critical clearing time and angle – effect of clearing time on stability –methods of improving system stability – modified Euler’s method – Rangakutta method – application to the solution of swing equation and computational algorithms References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Power System Engineering: Nagrath and Kothari, TMH Electrical Power Systems: C. L. Wadhwa, New Age Int’l Power System Analysis: Bergen, Pearson Education Asia, LPE Elements of Power System Analysis: William D. Stevenson Power System Stability Vol. I: Kimbark E. W.
SWITCHGEAR AND PROTECTION E 802 Module 1 231 3+1+0
Switchgear: Circuit breaker – basic principle of operation – arc phenomenon – initiation and maintenance of arc  arc interruption methods – arc voltage and current waveform in AC circuit breaking – restriking and recovery voltage – current chopping – DC breakers – rating of circuit breakers  breaking capacity – making capacity – short time rating – working principle and important features of oil CB, minimum oil CB, air blast CB, vacuum CB and SF6 CB – auto high speed reclosing. Module 2 Protective relaying: Main and back up protection – basic requirements of protective relaying – classification of relays – induction type – principle  inverse time characteristics – directional overcurrent and power relays – distance relays – definite distance and distance time relays – differential relays  negative phase sequence relay – static relays – basic static relay – block diagram of static overcurrent, static directional, static distance and static differential relays. Module 3 Generator Protection: External and internal faults – differential protection – biased circulating current protection – self balance system – overcurrent and earth fault protection – protection against failure of excitation Transformer protection: Differential protection – selfbalance system of protection – overcurrent and earth fault protection – buchholz’ s relay and its operation. Module 4 Feeder protection: Protection of radial feeders – protection of parallel feeders – protection of ring mains – differential pilot protection for feeders – Merz Price voltage balance system – transley system Transmission Line Protection: Definite distance and time distance protection – phase and earth fault protection – carrier current protection Module 5 Surge Overvoltages: Causes – lightning and switching surges – protection against overvoltages – surge diverters thyrite and horn gap types – use of ground wires – insulation coordination. Wave propagation: Wave propagation on OH lines and UG cables – transmitted and reflected waves – surge impedance – velocity of propagation References 1. Power System Protection and Switchgear: Ravindranath and Chander 2. Electrical Power Systems: C. L. Wadhwa, New Age Int’l 3. A Course in Electrical Power Systems: Sony, Gupta, Bhatnagar 4. Elements of Power System Analysis: William D. Stevenson 5. Traveling Waves on Transmission Systems: Bewsley L. V. 6. Power System Protection: M. A Date, B. Oza and N.C Nair, INSTRUMENTATION E 803
2+1+0
Module 1 Transducers: Classification – characteristics – static and dynamic characteristics – Instrumentation System – Functional description – input / output configuration – interfering and modifying inputs – Methods of correction – Loafing effect – Instrumentation amplifiers – Isolation amplifier – charge amplifier. 232
Module 2 Displacement Transducers: Resistance potentiometer – linearity and sensitivity – types – Resistance strain gauges – working principle – gauge factor – strain gauge circuitry – temperature effect and its compensation – load cells – LVDT – working principle – equivalent circuit – LVDT circuitry – Capacitive transducers – different types – piezoelectric transducers – working principle – piezoelectric crystal equivalent circuit. Module 3 Temperature Measurement: Thermo electric effects – Laws – thermocouples – thermo electric circuits – Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) – Bridge circuits – Thermistors – characteristics – pyrometer – radiation and optical pyrometers. Module 4 Absolute acceleration – null type and servo type – strain gauge Accelerrometer – piezo electric accelerometer – Electromagnetic flow meter – ultrasonic flow meter – transit type and Doppler flow meter – Ultrasonic flaw detector – Optical transducers. Module 5 PH measurement – Low Pressure measurement – McLaud gauge – Pirani gauge – ionisation gauge – thermal conductivity gauge – spatial encoder for angular measurement – wave analyser and spectrum analyser (block schematic) – scintillation counter – Hygrometer. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Measurement Systems – Application and Design: E.O Doeblin, TMH Principles of Industrial Instruments: D. Patranabi, TMH Industrial Instruments Fundamentals: E. Fribance, TMH Electronic Instruments: H.S Kalsi Instrumentation Devices and Systems: V. Rangan, G.R Sharma and V.S.V Mani
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESIGN E 804 3+1+0 Module 1 Design of D.C Machines: Design specifications – output equation – output coefficient – specific loadings – choice of speed and number of poles – calculation of D and L – Armature design – choice of type of winding – number of sots – number of conductors per slot – current density – cross sectional area – slot insulation – length of air gap – field winding design – field ampere turns – excitation voltage per coil – conductor cross section – height of pole – design of ventilating ducts – design of commutator and brushes – Carter’s coefficient – real and apparent flux density. Module 2 233
Transformers: Design – single phase and three phase – output equation – specific magnetic loading – core design – single, stepped core  windings – number of turns – current density – area of cross section of conductors – types of coils – insulation – window area – window space factor – overall dimensions – cooling – design of cooling tank with tubes – design of distribution and power transformers – design of small transformers like 230V/606V. Heating, cooling and temperature rise calculation – Continuous, short time and intermittent rating. Module 3 Design of Synchronous Machines: Specific loading – output equation – output coefficient – main dimensions – types of winding – design of field system – turbo alternator – main dimensions – stator design – rotor design – damper winding design – comparison of water wheel and turbo alternators, cooling of turbo alternator. Design of three phase Induction motors: output equation – output coefficient – main dimensions – rotor bar currents. Module 4 Estimate the quantity of materials required and draw the electrical wiring layout of (a) residential building (b) Multistoried building using rising mains (c) factory with one number of small and high rating motor at LT ot HT supply and many number of connected loads with suitable starters/switches and control panels (d) Cinema hall Module 5 a. Design, layout and estimation of power supply arrangement for (1). A bulk Industrial consumer (2) An under ground power supply (3) An Over head line to a rural consumer. b. Estimate and draw the layout of (1) indoor (2) outdoor 11KV transformer station with all accessories – single line diagram and physical layout c. Design and draw the typical earthing installation like (1) pipe earthing (2) Plate earthing (3) earth mat / grid d. Study the electrical wiring diagram of a typical automobile clearly showing all connected loads/ sources with specifications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E 805 List of Electives: E 805.01 CMELR Advanced Mathematics E 805.02 Computer Aided Design of Induction Machines E 805.03 Robotics E 805.04 Advanced Power Systems E 805.05 Advanced Microprocessors E 805.06 System Software 234 Electrical Machine Design: A.K Sawhney Performance and Design of D.C Machine: Clayton Performance and Design of A.C Machines: M.G Say Design of Electrical Machines: V. N Mittal Electrical Design Estimating and Costing: Raina & Bhattacharya ELECTIVE  II 3+1+0
E 805.07 Advanced Power Electronic Systems Note New Electives may be added according to the needs of emerging fields of technology. The name of the elective and its syllabus should be submitted to the University before the course is offered. ADVANCED MATHEMATICS CMELRT 8051 Module 1 Green's Function Heavisides, unit step function  Derivative of unit step function  Dirac delta function properties of delta function  Derivatives of delta function  testing functions  symbolic function  symbolic derivatives  inverse of differential operator  Green's function initial value problems  boundary value problems  simple cases only. Module 2 Integral Equations Definition of Volterra and Fredholm Integral equations  conversion of a linear differential equation into an integral equation  conversion of boundary value problem into an integral equation using Green's function  solution of Fredhlom integral equation with separable Kernels  Integral equations of convolution type  Neumann series solution.
Module 3 Gamma, Beta functions Gamma function, Beta function  Relation between them  their transformations  use of them in the evaluation certain integrals  Dirichlet's integral  Liouville's extension, of Dirichlet's theorem  Elliptic integral  Error function. Module 4 Power Series solution of differential equation The power series method  Legendre's Equation  Legendre's polynomial  Rodrigues formula generating function  Bessel's equation  Bessel's function of the first kind Orthogonality of Legendre's Polynomials and Bessel's functions. Module 5 Numerical solution of partial differential equations. Classification of second order equations Finite difference approximations to partial derivatives  solution of Laplace and Poisson's equations by finite difference method solution of one dimensional heat equation by Crank  Nicolson method  solution one dimensional wave equation. References 1. Linear Integral Equation: Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York 2. A Course on Integral Equations: Allen C.Pipkin, Springer  Verlag 235
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Advanced Engg. Mathematics: H.K.Dass, S.Chand Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia Numrical methods in Engg. &Science: B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers Generalized functions: R.F. Hoskins, John Wiley and Sons. Principles and Techniques of Bernard Friedman: John Wiley and sons Applied Mathematics Principles of Applied Mathematics: James P.Keener, Addison Wesley. Numerical methods: P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF INDUCTION MACHINES
E 8052 Module 1 CAD Orientation of Engineering design problems to computers. Design by analysis and synthesis approach – simulation of nonlinearity – stator windings for 3 phase and single phase induction motors Module 2 Main dimensions of three phase induction motors – standard specification – constructional features – specific electric and magnetic loading – output coefficient – main dimensions – computer programmes Module 3 Core design – leakage reactances – rotor winding design – equivalent resistances – computer programmes Module 4 Calculations from design data – Carters coefficient – no load current – equivalent circuit parameters – torque – efficiency and temperature rise – computer programmes Module 5 Main dimensions of single phase induction motors – auxiliary winding and capacitor design – equivalent circuit parameters  torque – efficiency and temperature calculations using design data – computer programmes References 1. Computer Aided Design of Electrical Equipments – Ramamoorthy M, Affiliated EastWest press pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2. Performance and Design of A.C Machines – M.G Say 3. Computer Aided Design of Electric Machinery – Venott C. G, MIT Press, London ROBOTICS E 8053 Module 1 Introduction: Historical developmentclassification of robotsapplicationsrobots kinematics joints and linksdegree of freedomdescription of position, orientation, framesmapping from one frame to anothercompound transformationsinverse of transform matrixtransform equationskinematics of three 236
degree of freedom manipulatorsDescription of linksintermediate links in chainFirst and last links in chain Link parametersaffixing frames to linksderivation of link transformation matrixDescription of an industrial robot. Module 2 Inverse manipulator kinematics  Workspacesolvabilitymultiple solutionsAlgebraic solution. Drive and control systems for robots: hydraulic systems and DC servomotors Position control for robotssimple position control systemposition control along a trajectory Module 3 Robot end effectors: Classification of endeffectorsdrive System for grippersmechanical grippers magnetic grippersvacuum grippersgripper force analysis and gripper design. Module 4 Sensors and intelligent robots: need for sensing systems sensing devicespiezoelectric sensorslinear position and displacement sensing absolute optical encodingincremental optical encoderposition and direction measurementvelocity measurement—force and torque sensorsproximity sensorsrange sensorsrobot vision systems Module 5 Trajectory planning for Robots: Joint space schemescubic polynomials with via pointsBlending schemes  interfacing to microprocessors and computers. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Robotics and Image Processing  PA Janakiraman Robotic Technology and flexible Automation  S R Deb Robotics for engineers  Yoram Koren Introduction to Robotics Analysis, Systems and Applications: Saeed B. Nikku, Pearson Education Asia, LPE
ADVANCED POWER SYSTEMS E 8054 Module 1 Automatic generation and voltage control  load frequency Control (single area case) turbine speed governing system  model of Speed system  Turbine model generator load model  steady state analysis dynamic response  control area concept. Module 2 Unit commitment  constraints in unit commitmentspinning spinning reserve  thermal unit constraints  other constraints  unit commitment solution methods  priority  list methods dynamic programming solution. Module 3 Hydrothermal coordination  long range and short range hydro scheduling hydro electric plant models  scheduling problems  the short term hydrothermal scheduling problem  short  term hydro— 237
scheduling: a gradient approach  hydro units in seriesdynamic programming solution to the hydrothermal scheduling problem. Module 4 Interchange evaluation and power pools  economy interchange economy interchange evaluation interchange evaluation with unit commitment multiple interchange controls after  the fact production costing  other types of interchange  power pools  the energy broker system  centralized economic despatch of a power pool  allocating pool savings. Module 5 Power system security  factors affecting power system securitycontingency analysis: Detection network problem  network sensitivity methods  calculation of network sensitivity factors correcting the generation despatch  sensitivity methods  linear programming.
References 1. Power System Engineering  I.J.Nagrath, D.P.Kothari 2. Power generation, operation and control  Allen J.Wood, Bruce Wollenberg, John Wiley & Sons ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS E 8055 Module 1 Intel 8086  Pin out signals and functions  Internal architecture  Registers and flags  bus buffering and latching bus timing – Pipelining Operating modes  minimum mode and maximum mode. Module 2 Introduction to 8086 assembly language programming  addressing modes – instruction set classification  Writing simple programs eg. Arithmetic operations, reading data from input port etc. 8086 memory interface – memory bank – separate bank decoders and signals Module 3 8087 internal block diagram and interfacing (Programming not required). Intel 80186 Architecture  block diagrams  different integrated peripherals Intel 286  Block diagram  Hardware features  Additional instructions (Programming not required) Module 4 Intel 8038  memory system  I/O system  Protected mode – mmu  Descriptors and selectors  TSS, Memory paging mechanism. Intel 80486  Internal Architecture  memory management and cache memory. Module 5 Introduction to Pentium  processors – memory system – I/O system  special Pentium registers Pentium memory management. 238
Pentium II  Introduction  software changes Pentium III  Introduction  chip set, Bus Pentium IV  Memory interface, Hyper pipelined technology (elementary treatment only). Concept of RISC – comparison of CISC and RISC References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The 80x86 Family  John Uffenbeck  Pearson Microprocessor and Interfacing  Douglas V. Hall  McGraw Hill The Intel Microprocessors  Barry B. Brey (6th edition) – Pearson LPE Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals – A.K Ray and M. Bruchandy – TMH An Introduction to the Intel family of Microprocessors – James L. Antonokos, Pearson LPE SYSTEM SOFTWARE E 8056 Module 1 Introduction: Concept of system software  Classification of system softwareRelationship of system software with the machine and the user. Assemblers: overview of the assembly processsingle pass and two pass assemblers. Elementary ideas of macros Macro definition macro call macro expansion  macro processors. Module 2 Linkers and Loaders: translated, linked and load time addresses relocation and linking conceptsobject module loader absolute loader, relocating loader linking loaders (elementary ideas only). Compilers: Overview of compilation process  phases of a compiler  analysis phase synthesis phase  lexical analysis  parsing  static and dynamic storage allocationintermediate code generation  code generation (basic ideas only). Module 3 Operating systems: Definition of operating system functions of operating system  types of servicesTypes of operating systems batch processing multiprogramming, multitasking timesharing, realtime, distributed systems (brief descriptions only). Process management process concept process states scheduling  FCFS, Shortest Job first, round robin scheduling policies. Module 4 Memory management contiguous memory allocation  static and dynamic partitioning swapping noncontiguous allocation fragmentation concept of virtual memory pagingpage tables  page replacement FIFO and LRU page replacement policies  segmentation caching of secondary storage information. File system  directory structures  file system implementation  sharing and security. Device management  basic principles of I/O device controllers  I/O scheduling policies. Module 5 Introduction to distributed operating system: characteristics of distributed systems advantages client server model  remote procedure call. Real time operating systems  Basic requirements  hard and soft real time systems  issues in real time systems basic ideas of real time scheduling  reentrancy real time embedded systems (basic ideas only). References 1. Introduction to System Software  Dhamdhere D.M., Tata McGraw Hill 2. Systems Programming  Donovan J.I, McGraw Hill 3. Systems Programming  Dhamdhere D.M., Tata McGraw Hill & Operating Systems 4. Principles of compiler design  Aho & Ullman, Narosa Publishing 5. Operating System Milenkovic, McGraw Hill 239
6. 7. 8. 9.
Operating System concepts  Peterson & Silberschatz, Addison Wesley Real time systems & programming languages Burns, Wellings, Addison Wesley Introduction to RTS  Martin Real time embedded Systems  Mathai Joseph, CERN ADVANCED POWER ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
E 8057 Module 1 DCDC converter topologies: Buck and boost converters  continuous and discontinuous current modes  buckboost, C’uk converter  operation – control of dcdc converters –PWM method  Fullbridge with bipolar and unipolar switching – output voltage equations. Module 2 SMPS topologies: Basic block schematic of SMPS – isolated dcdc topologies – forward and flyback – principles – (circuit and operation only). Pushpull topology – half bridge Basics of SMPS control methods – voltagemode and currentmode control (block diagrams and description only). Module 3 Resonant Converters: Advantages of resonant converters over PWM converters – Classification series and parallel resonant converters – halfbridge operation – discontinuous and continuous current modes (basic modes only, no analysis required) Principles of Zero voltage and Zero current switching (ZVS and ZCS switches only – no analysis required) Module 4 PWM Inverters: Need for PWM techniques – various PWM techniques – principle of sinusoidal PWM – bipolar and unipolar PWM  modulation index – application to single phase bridges disadvantages of SPWM – brief introduction to other PWM methods – currentmode control schemes (tolerance band control and fixed frequency control – description with block diagram only) Module 5 Applications: Power factor correction – Actual power factor – Displacement factor and distortion factor – principles of input line current shaping using boost rectifiers. UPS – Different topologies – block schematics. Electronic ballast – block schematics. References 1. Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design – Mohan, Undeland and Robbins, John Wiley and Sons, 2nd ed. 2. Power Electronic Systems: Theory and Design – Jai P. Agrawal , Pearson Education Asia, LPE 3. Modern Power Electronics – P.C Sen, Wheeler Publ.
240
ELECTIVE  III E 806 List of Electives: E 806.01 Digital Protection of Power Systems E 806.02 Insulation Technology E 806.03 Computer Networks E 806.04 Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems E 806.05 OptoElectronics and Communication E 806.06 VLSI Technology Note New Electives may be added according to the needs of emerging fields of technology. The name of the elective and its syllabus should be submitted to the University before the course is offered. 2+1+0
DIGITAL PROTECTION OF POWER SYSTEMS E 8061 Module 1 Need for protectionnature and causes of fault zones of protectionclassification of protective relays based on technology and functioninstrument transformers used in protection circuit. A/D converters analog multiplexerssample and hold circuits. Module 2 Computer applications to protective relaying  simulation of power system disturbancessimulation of current and voltage transformerssimulation of distance relays during transient conditions. Module 3 Offline application of computerson line application of computers –Relay coordination programmes. Module 4 Microprocessor based protective relays  multistage frequency relay measurement of power system signals through phase locked loop interface protection of alternators against loss of excitation. Module 5 Microprocessor based over current relaysimpedance relays directional relayreactance relay  distance relay  measurement of R and X  mho relay quadrilateral relay  generalized interface for distance relays.
References 1. Madhava Rao T.S, "Power System ProtectionStatic relays" 241
2. Bddri Ram, "Power System Protection and Switchgear" 3. Singh L.P, "Digital ProtectionProtective Relaying from electromechanical to microprocessors" 4. Arun G. Phadke, James S. Thorp, "Computer Relaying for Power systems" INSULATION TECHNOLOGY E 8062 Module 1 Insulating materials  classification, brief study of preparation and properties of ceramics, mica, paper, PVC, PE Epoxy resin, teflon, SF6 transformer oil, polychlorobiphenyls (PCB) vacuum purification of transformer oil drying and degassing. Impregnation of paper and cotton insulation. Module 2 Dielectric properties  permittivity, complex permittivity, dielectric loss factors influencing permittivity, permittivity of mixtures, factors influencing tan delta, Measurement of resistivities, dielectric loss and constant, testing for tracking partial discharge measurements. Module 3 Polarisation  internal fields, Clausins  Mossotd relation limitations, different types of polarisaiton. Electric fields in homogeneous dielectrics, mechanical force under electric fields, absorption currents. Insulation problems in high voltage transformers, surge phenomena, insulation design to withstand surges in transformers, Elementary design of insulating system of capacitors. Module 4 Breakdown phenomena in gases  ionization processes, deionization processes, breakdown mechanisms, T ownrend's theory. Steramer theory, Paschen's law, breakdown in electronegative gases, uniform fields, nonuniform fields penning effect. Module 5 Breakdown mechanisms in vacuumbreakdown in liquid dielectrics pure liquids and commercial liquids, breakdown in solid dielectrics  different types  intrinsic, electronic, thermal, electromechanical, tracing and tracking, partial discharges, partial discharges. References 1. High Voltage Engineering: Naidu and Kamaraju 2. Ionisation, Conductivity and Breakdown in Liquids: Adam Czawski 3. High Voltage Engineering: Kuffel and Zeamgl 4. SF6 and Vacuum Insulation for High Voltage Applications: Naidu and Maller COMPUTER NETWORKS E 8063 Module 1 Introduction: Goals and applications of networks  Network Topologies  Broadcast  Point to point  bus, star, ring, tree  Types of networks  LAN, MAN, WAN OSI reference model  TCP/IP reference model  Client server computing Physical layer  Packet switching Transmission media Fibre optic networks – ISDN Module 2 242
Data link layer: Services  Data framing  Error handling  Data link protocols – Elementary protocols  Sliding window protocol( basic concepts only)  data link layer in the InternetSL1P/PPP. Module 3 Medium access sub layer: Channel allocation  static vs dynamic channel allocation  CSMA protocol  collision detection  wireless LANs  IEEE 802 standards  Ethernet  Token bus Token ring  Bridges – FDDI Module 4 Network layer: services  Routing  congestion control  internetworking  Principles  Gateways Host  backbone network  Network layer in the Internet  IP protocol  IP address  Internet control protocols. Transport layer: Services  Internet Transport protocols  TCP and UDP. Module 5 Application layer: services  Network security  Cryptography  DNS  DNS Namespace Name servers  Network Management concepts. Internet services: Email  USENET  FTP TELNET gopher  WWW  WAIS – Archie References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Computer Networks (3r edition)  Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia Data and computer communications  William Stalling, Pearson Education Asia Data Communication, Computer networks  F. Halsall, Addison Wesley and open systems Computer Networks, A system approach  Peterson & Davie, Harcourt Asia The Internet Book Douglas E. Comer, Pearson Education Asia Internet Complete Reference  Harley Harn Osborne
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE & EXPERT SYSTEMS E 8064 Module 1 Introduction to AI and problem solving concepts: Definition pattern recognitionproduction systems  problem and production system characteristics  twopail problemanalysis of AI techniques  criteria for success Module 2 Knowledge representation  formal and nonformal logic: Representation evaluation criteria level of representation formal logic schemes resolutions predicate and prepositional logic conversion to clause form semantic networksframesscriptsproduction system 243
Module 3 Problem solving strategies dealing with uncertainty: Defining the problem  control strategies exhaustive search  generate and testspace transformation models forward versus backward reasoning matching  weak methods  hill climbing breadth and depth first searches  search algorithms. Module 4 Expert system development process and knowledge acquisition: Definition  analysis of expert system problem solving  role and analysis of knowledge  architecture of the expert system problem selection  formalization implementation –evaluation. Module 5 Knowledge acquisition techniques cognitive behavior  knowledge representation development. Expert system tools: Expert system shells narrow tools large hybrid expert system tools PC based expert system tools knowledge acquisition tools. References 1. Introduction to AI & Expert System  D. W. Patterson, Prentice hall of India 2. Principles of Artificial Intelligence& Expert Systems Development  David W.Rolston, Tata McGraw Hill 3. Artificial Intelligence  Elaine Rich, McGraw Hill 4. Principles of Artificial Intelligence  Nils J. Nilsson, Springer Verlag 5. Introduction to Artificial Intelligence  Charnaik & McDermott, Addison Wesley
OPTOELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION E 8065 Module 1 Review of PN jncharacteristics  semiconductorhetero junctionLEDs (spontaneous emissionLED structuresurface emittingEdge emittingInjection efficiency recombination efficiencyLED characteristicsspectral responsemodulationBand width. Module 2 Laser diodesBasic principlecondition for gainLaser actionpopulation inversionstimulated emissionInjection faster diodestructuretemperature effectsmodulationcomparison between LED and ILDs.
Module 3 Optical detectorsoptical detector principleabsorption coefficientdetector characteristicsQuantum efficiencyresponsivity response timebias voltageNoise in detectors PN junctionphoto diode(characteristicsPINphoto dioderesponseAvalanche photo diode (APD) multiplication processB. WNoisephoto transistor. Module 4 Optical FibrestructureadvantagesTypespropagationwave equationphase and group velocitytransmission characteristicsattenuationabsorptionscattering lossesdispersionfibre bend lossessource coupling, splices and connectorswave length division multiplexing. 244
Module 5 Optical fibre systemsystem design considerationfibre optic linkoptical transmitter circuitsource limitationsLED drive circuitLaser drive circuitpreamplifierequalizationFibreoptic link analysistypical lira design. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Semiconductor Opto electronics DevicesPallab Bhattacharya (Pearson Education) Optical fibre Communication SystemsPrinciples and practice John M Senior (PHI) Optical communication SystemsJohn Gower (PHI) Optical fibre Communication Gerd keiser (PHI)
VLSI TECHNOLOGY E 8066 Module 1 Process steps in 1C fabrication: Crystal growth and wafer preparation Czochralski processapparatus silicon shaping, slicing and polishing Diffusion of impuritiesphysical mechanism Pick's I and II law of diffusion Diffusion profiles complementary (erfc) error function Gaussian profileIon implantation Annealing process Oxidation process Lithography Photolithography, Fine line lithography, electron beam and xray lithography Chemical vapour deposition (CVD) epitaxial growth reactorsmetallisation patterning wire bonding and packaging. Module 2 Monolithic components: Isolation of components junction isolation and dielectric isolationTransistor fabrication buried layer impurity profile parasitic effectsmonolithic diodes schottky diodes and transistors FET structures JFET MOSFETPMOS and NMOS, control of threshold voltage (Vth) silicon gate technologyMonolithic resistors sheet resistance and resistor designresistors in diffused regionsMOS resistors monolithic capacitors junction and MOS structures 1C crossovers and vias.
Module 3 CMOS technology: Metal gate and silicon gate oxide isolation Twin well process Latch upBiCMOS technology fabrication steps circuit design process stick diagrams design rulesCapacitance of layers Delay Driving large capacitance loads Wiring capacitance Basic circuit concepts scaling of MOS structures scaling factors effects of miniaturization. Module 4 Subsystem design and layout Simple logic circuits inverter, NAND gates, BiCMOS circuit, NOR gates, CMOS logic systems  bus lines arrangements power dissipationpower supply rail distribution subsystem design process design of a 4 bit shifter. Module 5 Gallium Arsenide Technology: Submicro CMOS technology Crystal structure Doping processChanneling effect MESFET GaAs fabrication Device modeling. 245
References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E 807 VLSI technology. S M Sze, Me Graw Hill pub, Basic VLSI design: Douglas Pucknell, PHI Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: H E Weste, Pearson Edn. Integrated Circuits: K R Botkar, Khanna Pub. CMOS circuit design layout and simulation: Barter, IEEE press. Introduction to VLSI: Conway, Addison weslay. ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB II 0+0+4 1. Alternator regulation by synchronous impedance and mmf methods 2. Alternator regulation by Potier method 3. Alternator regulation by Blondel’s method and verification by direct loading 4. Alternator V – curves for constant input/output 5. Synchronous motor V – curves and compounding curves 6. Alternator regulation by feeding back power to mains – use of synchroscope 7. Study of starters and load tests on double cage and single phase induction motors 8. Characteristics of cage / slip ring motors by circle diagram 9. Characteristics of induction generator and rotor hysterisis by Link’s method 10. Synchronous Induction motor – predetermination of excitation current and verification 11. Characteristics of pole changing motor 12. Characteristics of Schrage motor – torque variation with load, predetermination of speed variation with brush shift and verification 13. Characteristics of cascade induction motor set 14. Experimental determination of torque slip curve of induction motor in unstable region upto about 40% slip 15. Experimental determination of variation of starting torque with rotor resistance in slipring induction motor 16. Predetermination of line current. Torque, power of a 3phase induction motor under single phasing verification 17. No load and blocked rotor tests on single phase induction motor and determination of equivalent circuit parameters 18. Determination of a. Continuous rating for specified temperature rise b. One hour rating by heat run test of a machine PROJECT AND SEMINAR E 709/E808 Each student is required to present a technical paper on a subject approved by the department. The paper should be in general reflecting the stateoftheart. He/she shall submit a report of the paper presented to the department. In addition to the seminar he/she shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in the 7 th semester itself in consultation with the Guides. On completion of the project work, he/she shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work, and submit a report of the project work done to the department. 246
247
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING BRANCH
248
THIRD SEMESTER
249
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  II CMELPA 301 3+1+0 Module 1 Vector differential calculus: Differentiation of vector functions scalar and vector fields gradient divergence and curl of a vector function  their physical meaning  directional derivative  scalar potential conservative field – identities  simple problems. Module2 Vector integral calculus: Line surface and volume integrals work done by a force along a pathapplication of Green’s theorem Stoke’s theorem and Gauss divergence theorem. Module 3 Function of complex variable: Definition of analytic function and singular points derivation of C.R. equations in Cartesian coordinates harmonic and orthogonal properties construction of analytic function given real or imaginary parts complex potential conformal transformation of functions like Zn, ez, 1/z, Sin z, z + k2/z  bilinear transformation cross ratio invariant propertysimple problems. Module 4 Finite differences: meaning of ∆, , E, μ, δ  interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula central differences problems using Stirlings formula Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided difference formula for unequal intervals. Module 5 Difference Calculus: Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences. Numerical integration NewtonCote’s formula trapezoidal rule Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8th rule simple problems difference equations  solutions of difference equations. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Erwin Kreyzing Wiley Eastern. Pub. Higher Engg. Mathematics: B. S. Grewal Khanna publishers. Numerical methods in Science and Engineering: M K Venkataraman National Pub. Numerical methods: S Balachandra Rao University Press. Advanced Engineering Mathematics: Michael D Greenberg PHI. Theory and Problems of Vector analysis: Murray Spiegel Schaum’s Mc Graw Hill.
NETWORK THEORY LA 302 2+1+0
Module 1 Source transformation Mesh and Node voltage Analysis – Coupled circuits – Dot conventions – Analysis of coupled circuits. 250
Module 2 Network theoremsSuper position theorem Reciprocity theorem  Thevenin’s theorem Norton's theorem Millman's theorem Maximum power transfer theorem Tellegen’s theorem Graph of a network Trees cotrees Incident matrix cut set matrixtieset matrix Analysis of networksequilibrium equations. Module 3 Fourier Analysis and Laplace transform  Fourier analysis of periodic signalsTrignometric and exponential forms Non periodic signals and Fourier transforms Frequency spectrum of periodic waveforms  Laplace Transform Review of theoremsLaplace transform of important signal waveforms  Periodic functions Initial value and final value Theorems DC&AC transientsSolution of network problems using Laplace transform. Module 4 Twoport Networks and Filters  Voltage and Current ratios of two  port networks Admittanceimpedance hybrid and transmission parameters of two port networks. Passive filters as two port networks Characteristics of ideal filtersImage impedance Constant K low pass High pass and Band pass filtersmderived filtersComposite filters. Module 5 Network Synthesis – Realizability concept – Hurwitz property – positive realness – properties of positive real function – Synthesis of R, L, RC and LC driving point functions – Foster and Cauer forms. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Network analysis M.E Van Valkenburg, PHI Circuits and Networks – analysis & synthesis – A. Sudhakar & S P ShyamMohan Network and Systems D Roy Chaudhary Network analysis and synthesisFranklin F Kuo – John Wiley & Sons Engineering Circuit AnalysisW H Hayt & Jack Kennerly – McGraw Hill
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LA 303 2+1+0
Module 1 D.C.Generator – O.C.C. – Condition for self excitation – field critical resistance – critical speed – Load characteristics of generators – Losses – power flow diagram – efficiency – Condition for maximum efficiency – Applications. Module 2 D C motor – starter – 3 point and 4 point starters – torque equation – speed equation – speed torque – characteristics of shunt, series and compound motors – Losses – efficiency – Brake test – 251
Swinburne’s test – speed control – field control – armature control – series parallel control – applications. Module3 Transformers: transformer on noload and load operation – phasor diagram – equivalent circuit – regulation – losses and efficiency – o.c. and s.c. test – applications – Design of step down transformers like 230/606V, – Basic principles of 3 phase tranformer – autotransformer – applications. Module 4 A.C Machines: 3 phase induction motors – rotating magnetic field – torque equation – slip – torqueslip characteristics – operating characteristics – starting of 3 phase induction motors – starters – single phase induction motors – constructional features – types – working and characteristics only (no analysis) – constructional features of synchronous machines – principle of operation of alternator – emf equation – regulation by emf and mmf method – principle of operation of synchronous motor – starting of synchronous motor. Module 5 Special Machines: A C and D C servo motors – synchros – constructional features – working of a tachogenerator – stepper motors – construction, working, applications and specifications of stepper motors – universal motors  constructional features – typical applications – criteria for selection of motors – electromagnetic relays – contactors. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Electrical & Electronic Technology: Hughes, Pearson Education Electrical Technology: H. Cotton Electrical Machines: R.K.Rajput Electrical Design Estimating & Costing: K.B.Raina & Bhattacharya Electrical Machines & Power systems: Vincent Del Toro
SOLID STATE DEVICES LA304 3+1+0 Module 1 Energy bands and charge carriers in semiconductors: energy bands metals semiconductors and insulators direct and indirect semiconductors charge carriers in semiconductors: electrons and holes intrinsic and extrinsic material nmaterial and pmaterial carrier concentration: fermi levelEHPs temperature dependance conductivity and mobility drift and resistance effect of temperature and doping on mobility hall effect. Module 2 Diffusion of carriers derivation of diffusion constant D Einstein relation continuity equation pn junctions: contact potential equilibrium fermi levels space charge at junctions current components 252
at a junction: majority and minority carrier currents zener and avalanche breakdown capacitance of pn junctions. Module 3 pn junction diodes: voltampere characteristics switching time rectifier action Zener diodes: voltampere characteristics Tunnel diodes: tunneling phenomena voltampere characteristics Varactor diodes Photo diodes: detection principle light emitting diodes. Module 4 Bipolar junction transistors: npn and pnp transistor action open circuited transistor biasing in active region majority and minority carrier distribution terminal currents amplification and switching α and β gain factors emitter efficiency γ schottky transistors photo transistors. Module 5 Field effect transistors: operation pinch off and saturation pinch off voltage gate control voltampere characteristics MOSFETS: n MOS and p MOS: comparison enhancement and depletion types control of threshold voltage MOS capacitance. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Solid state electronic devices  Ben G Streetman Pearson Education Microelectronic Devices: Nagchaudhari, Pearson Education Integrated electronics – Millman and Halkias Mc Graw Hill. Physics of semiconductor devices  S M Sze Mc Graw Hill. Semiconductor devices – Nagchoudhary Tata Mc Graw Hill. Physics of semiconductor devices: Shur PHI. Theory of Semiconductor devices: Karl Hess PHI.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS  I LA 305 3+1+0 Module 1 Rectifiers and Power supplies: Half wave full wave and bridge rectifiers working analysis and design C filter analysis regulated power supplies: series and shunt design of regulated power supplies for specified output conditions current limiting short circuit protection IC regulated power supplies. Module 2 Transistor as an amplifier: Transistor at low frequencies h parameter model analysis expression of voltage and current gain input and output impedance CE CB and CC configurations comparisontransistor parameters from static characteristics FET: operation characteristics small signal model. Module 3
253
Transistor Biasing: operating point DC and AC load lines Q point selection bias stabilitydefinition of stability factors derivation of stability factor for ICO variation fixed bias collector to base bias self bias circuits bias compensation compensation for ICO and VBE. Module 4 RC Coupled amplifier: working analysis and design phase and frequency response FET amplifier: biasing analysis and design. Module 5 Wave shaping circuits: clipping clamping RC integration differentiation transistor as a switchastable multivibrator working and design UJT working and applications simple sweep circuit. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Electronic devices and circuits: Boylsted & Nashelsky Pearson Edn. Integrated Electronics: Millman & Halkias Mc Graw Hill. Electronic Principles: Malvino Tata Mc Graw Hill. Electronic devices and circuits: Bogart UBS. Electronic devices and circuits: Allen Mottershed PHI. Electronic devices: Floyd Pearson Edn. Electronic devices and applications: B Somanathan Nair PHI. Electronic devices and circuits: J B Gupta S K Kataria & Sons Pub.
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LA 306 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to C: C fundamentals  The character set  identifiers and keywords  Data types constants  variables and arrays  declarations  expressions  statements  symbolic constantsarithmetic operators  Relational and Logical operators  The conditional operator  Library functions  Data input and output  getchar – putchar, scanf, printf  gets and puts functions  interactive programming. Module 2 Control Statements: While  do while  for  nested loops if else switch break  continue  The comma operator  go to statement, Functions  a brief overview  defining a function  accesing a function  passing arguments to a function  specifying argument  data types  function prototypes Recursion. Module 3 254
Program structure: storage classes  Automatic variables  external variables  multi file programs. Arrays: defining an array  processing an array  passing arrays in a function – multi dimensional arrays  array and strings. Structures and unions: defining a structure  processing a structure  user defined data types  passing structure to a function – self referential structures  unions. Module 4 Pointers: Fundamentals  pointer declaration  passing pointers to a function  pointers and one dimensional arrays  operations on pointers  pointers and multi dimensional arrays – passing functions to other functions. Module 5 Data files: Opening and closing of a data file  creating a data file  processing a data file, low level programming  register variables – bit wise operation  bit fields  enumeration  command line parameters  macros  the C preprocessor. Text Book 1. Programming References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Theory and problems of programming with C Gottfried, Schaum’s series. The C programming language: Kernighan & Ritche, PHI. Programming Techniqes through C: Venkateshmurthy, Pearson Edn. Programming in C: Balaguruswamy, Tata Mc Graw Hill. Programming Ansi C: Ram Kumar. Computer Programming: Rajaraman, PHI. with ANSI and Turbo C: Ashok N Kanthane, Pearson Edn.
ELECTRICAL LAB LA 307 0+0+4 1. Measurement of Electric power (single phase and three phase) and energy using wattmeter and energy meter. 2. Study of stardelta connections. 3. O.C.C. and Load characteristics of D.C. generators. 4. Swinburne’s test. 5. Load characteristics of D.C. shunt, series and compound motors 6. O.C and S.C test on singlephase transformer. 7. Load test on stepup/stepdown transformer; calculation of efficiency and regulation at different power factors. 8. Study of starting of three phase induction motors and load test on squirrel cage induction motor. 9. Load test on slipring induction motor. 10. Study of stepper and servomotors. 11. Load test on single phase induction motor. 12. Predetermination of regulation of the alternator by emf and mmf method. 255
BASIC ELECTRONICS LAB L 308 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0+0+4 Familiarization of CRO, DVM, AF generator etc and soldering practice. Characteristics  Diode, Transistor, FET, UJT. Determination of parameters. Design and testing of DC power supplies for specified output. Design of Single stage RC coupled amplifier. Determination of Band width. Design of FET amplifier. Determination of Band width. Wave shaping. Design of clipping, clamping, RC differentiator & Integrator. Design of Astable multivibrator for specified time period  sharpening of edges. Simple sweep circuit. Familiarization of data sheets of components – OA79, 1N4001, SZ6.8, BC107, BC547, BC557, BFW10, 2N2646. 10. Simulation of simple circuits using Spice. Note New experiments may be added in the above list concerned to the relevant theory paper (LA 305).
256
FOURTH SEMESTER
257
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  III CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0 Module 1 Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficents  Finding P.I. by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchys equations Linear Simultaneous eqnssimple applications in engineering problems. Module 2 Partial Differential Equations  formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitrary Functions solution of Lagrange Linear Equations –Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave equation. Module 3 Fourier Transforms:  Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine & Cosine transforms  inverse transforms  transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no proof) – Parsevals Identity  simple problems. Module 4 Probability and statistics: Binomial law of probability  The binomial distribution, its mean and variance  poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution  its mean and variance fitting of binomial & poisson distributions  normal distribution  properties of normal curve standard normal curve  simple problems in binomial, poisson and normal distributions. Module 5 Population & Samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) –Sampling distribution of variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance  Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – Test of significance for single proportion, difference of proportions, single mean and difference of means (proof of theorems not expected). References 1. Higher Engineering Mathematics  B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers. 2. Engineering Mathematics Vol.II 3rd year Part A & B  M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing Company 3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations  Ian N.Sneddon.,McGraw Hill. 4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers – Richard A Johnson, Pearson Education Asia / PHI. 5. A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II) – Bali and Iyengar, Laxmi Publications Ltd. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 7. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC DESIGN LA 402 3+1+0 Module 1 Gates –Inverter  OR gates  AND gates  NOR Gates  De Morgan’s Theorems  NAND Gates EXCLUSIVEOR Gates  Tristate Inverter  TTL Circuits  Digital Integrated Circuits  7400 258
Devices  TTL Characteristics  TTL Overview  AND OR NOT Gates  OpenCollector Gates – CMOS gates. Module 2 Boolean Algebra and Karnaugh Maps  Boolean Relations  SumofProducts method  Algebraic Simplification  Karnaugh maps – Pairs – Quads  and Octets  Karnaugh Simplifications  Don’tCare Conditions. Multiplexers  demultiplexers  decoder and encoder. Module 3 ArithmeticLogic Units  Binary Addition  Binary Subtraction  Half Adders  Full Adders  Binary Adders  signed Binary Numbers  2’s Complement  2’sComplement AdderSubtractor. Module 4 Flip Flops  RS Latches  Level Clocking  D Latches  EdgeTriggered D & T FlipFlops  EdgeTriggered JK Masterslave FlipFlop. Module 5 Registers and Counters  Buffer Registers  Shift Registers  Controlled Shift Registers  Ripple Counters  Synchronous Counters  Ring counters  Modulo counters  ThreeState Register. ROMs – PROMs and EPROMs  RAMs. A small TTL Memory. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Digital Fundamentals: Floyd, Pearson Edn. Digital Design: Wakerly, Pearson Education. Fundamentals of digital circuits: A Anand Kumar, PHI Digital Integrated Electronics: Taub and Shilling, McGraw Hill, Digital electronics: D C Green, Pearson Edn. Digital Logic and state machine design: Comer, Oxford. Digital electronic principles and applications: A K Maini, Khanna Pub. Digital electronic principles: Malvino and Leach, Mc Graw Hill. Logic and computer design fundamentals: M Morris Mano, Pearson Edn.
COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LA 403 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: communication systems – Modulation  need for modulation bandwidth Amplitude modulation  theory mathematical representation frequency spectrum  USB & LSB power relation Frequency modulation  theory mathematical representation frequency spectrum Phase modulation comparison of AM FM PM. 259
Module 2 Radio transmitters: AM transmitter  block diagram  Solid state modulators  circuit explanationFM transmitter  reactance modulator varactor diode modulator Amstrong modulator. Module 3 Radio receivers: Tuned radio frequency receiver superheterodyne receiver  block schematicselectivity sensitivity importance of IF  image frequency rejection  AM receivers  schematic explanation  RF amplifiers  circuit explanation  Mixer circuits  IF amplifiers  circuit explanationsimple diode detector  Automatic gain control circuit  simple and delayed AGC  FM receivers block schematic explanation  amplitude limiting  FM demodulators: slope detectors phase discriminator ratio detectors. Module 4 Side band communication: Single side band transmission  suppression of carrier  balanced modulator  filtering of unwanted sideband  SSB receivers  block schematic explanation  pilot carrier receiver  suppressed carrier receiver  Vestigial side band transmission  transmitter and receiver responses  advantages of VSB in television. Module 5 Telephone Systems  Telephone subscribers loop circuit  subscribers line interface circuit  Pulse and tone signaling  Frequency assignments  Electronic telephone  block schematic of a telephone set block schematic of single line analog SLIC board  two wire repeaters  Electronic private automatic branching exchange  basic block schematic Power line communication: block schematic explanation Facsimile  FAX transmitter and receiver. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Electronic communication Systems: Wayne Tomasi Pearson Edn. Electronic communication: Roody and Coolen PHI. Electronic Communication systems: George Kennedy Mc Graw Hill. Electronic and radio engineering: A P Mathur. Telephony and Carrier current engineering: P N Das. Modern communication Systems: Couch PHI.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS  II LA 404 3+1+0 Module 1 High frequency equivalent circuit of a transistor. Hybrid pi model  explanation of components r parameters in terms of h parameters Tuned amplifiers principle  single tuned and double tuned amplifiers frequency response applications (no analysis) multistage amplifiers frequency response. Module 2 Feedback different types positive, negative, voltage, current, series and shunt feedback Feedback in amplifiers its effect on amplifier performance typical feedback arrangements emitter follower darlington emitter follower cascade amplifier (principles only) difference amplifier. 260
Module 3 Oscillators conditions for oscillation analysis and design of RC phase shift oscillator, general form of oscillator circuit working of Hartley, Colpitt's, Crystal, tuned collector and Wien Bridge oscillators. Module 4 Monostable multi vibrator analysis design applications triggering Bistable multivibrator analysis and design different methods of triggering commutating capacitor Schmitt trigger working design. Module 5 Large signal amplifier harmonic distortion analysis of class A, class B, class C and class D amplifiers complimentary and symmetry stage sweep generators voltage and current sweeps time base generators linearisation miller and bootstrap sweeps  applications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Electronic devices and circuits Boylsted & Neshelsky, Pearson Edn. Integrated electronics Millman & Halkias , Mc Graw Hill Electronic principles Malvino Electronic devices and circuits Bugart Microelectronics Digital and Analogue Botkar.
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS LTA 405 2+1+0 Module 1 Dynamic Representation of Systems  Systems Attributes Causality  linearity Stability timeinvariance. Special Signals Complex exponentials Singularity functions (impulse and step functions). Linear TimeInvariant Systems: Differential equation representation convolution Integral. Discrete form of special functions. Discrete convolution and its properties. Realization of LTI system (differential and difference equations). Module 2 Fourier Analysis of Continuous Time Signals and Systems  Fourier Series Fourier Transform and properties Parseval’s theorem Frequency response of LTI systems. Sampling Theorem.
261
Module 3 Fourier Analysis of Discrete Time Signals & Systems  DiscreteTime Fourier series DiscreteTime Fourier Transform (including DFT) and properties. Frequency response of discrete time LTI systems. Module 4 Laplace Transform  Laplace Transform and its inverse: Definition existence conditions Region of Convergence and properties Application of Laplace transform for the analysis of continuous time LTI system (stability etc.) Significance of poles & zeros ZTransform  ZTransform and its inverse: Definition existence Region of convergence and properties Application of ZTransform for the analysis of Discrete time LTI systems Significance of poles and zeros. Module 5 Random Signals  Introduction to probability. Bayes Theorem concept of random variableprobability density and distribution functions function of a random variable. MomentsIndependence of a random variable. Introduction to random process. Auto and cross correlation. widesense stationarity power spectral density White noise Random processes through LTI systems. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Signals and Systems: Oppenheim Alan V Willsky Alan. S Pearson Edn. Communication Systems: Haykin Simon John Wiley. Signals and Systems: I J Nagrarth Tata Mc Graw Hill. Signals and Systems: Farooq Husain Umesh pub. Adaptive signal processing: W Bernad Pearson Edn.
RELIABILITY AND HUMANITIES LA 406 2+1+0 Module 1 Concepts of reliability: Definition of reliability failure classification of failures measures of reliability failure rate mean time between failures (MTBF) mean time to failure (MTTF). Module 2 Failure pattern and fitting curves: Graphical plots Bath tub curves Hazard models Constant hazard models Linearly increasing hazard model Weibull model. Module 3 Manufacture for Quality and reliability: The need for prototype tests the quality standard planning to achieve required quality basic concepts of sequencing. Module 4 Control charts in statistical quality control: statistical quality control advantages types of control charts X and R chart P chart C chart Reengineering Zero defects. Module 5 262
Human relations: Human Behavior Scope of Industrial psychologyTheories of MotivationHandling of workers grievancesWorkers participation in managementIndustrial disciplineIndustrial disputesIndustrial fatigueWages and incentives. References 1. Reliability Engineering: L S Sreenath. 2. Reliability Engineering: A K Govil. 3. Industrial Engineering & Management: Banga and Sharma.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB LA 407 List of experiments 1. Power amplifiers: Design of class A and class AB push pull stage – verification of power output. 2. IC power amplifier. 3. Oscillators: Design of RC phase shift, Hartley & Colpitts oscillators. 4. Design of Monostable and bistable multivibrators. 5. Design of bootstrap sweep generator. 6. Schmitt trigger. 7. SCR, Triac firing circuits. 8. Feedback amplifier, design of two stage RC coupled amplifier. 9. Tuned amplifiers. 10. Design and testing of DC regulated power supplies (Fixed and variable). 11. Simulation of above circuits using PSPICE. Note New experiments may be added in accordance with subject LA 404 0+0+4
COMPUTER PRORAMMING LAB LA 408 Part 1 1. Computer hardware familiarization. 2. Familiarization of MSDOS commands, Microsoft Windows. 3. Familiarization of Microsoft Word, Adobe Acrobat Reader. Part 2 Programming Experiments in C/C++: Programming experiments in C/C++ to cover control structures, functions, arrays, structures, pointers and files, classes, operator & function overloading, inheritance, polymorphism. 263 0+0+4
FIFTH SEMESTER
264
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS IV CMELPA501 3+1+0 Module 1 Complex Integration: Line Integral –Cauchy’s integral theorem Cauchy’s integral formulaTaylor’s seriesLaurent’s series zeros and singularities Residues residue theoremEvaluation of real integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semicircle. Module 2 Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection methodRegula falsi method  Newton –Raphson method – solution of system of linear equations by Jacobi’s iteration method and GaussSiedel method. Module 3 Numerical solution of ordinary differential equation: Taylor’s series method Euler’s method – Modified Eulers method Runge – Kutta method (IV order)Milne’s predictor corrector method. Module 4 Z – Transforms: Definition of Z transform properties –Z transform of polynomial functions – trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property inverse transform – solution of 1st & 2nd order difference equations with constant coefficients using Z transforms. Module 5 Linear programming: graphical solution – solution using simplex method (non – degenerate case only) – BigM method,two phase method Duality in L.P.P. Balanced T.P. – Vogels approximation method – Modi method. References 1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics – Ervin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern limited. 2. Numerical methods in Engineering & Science – Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers. 3. Higher Engineering Mathematics  Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers. 4. Numerical methods in Science & Engineering  Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, National Publishing company. 5. Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems  P.C.Tulsian, Vishal Pandey, Pearson Education Asia. 6. Complex variables and applications  Churchill and Brown, McGrawHill. 7. Operations research  Panneer Selvam, PHI. 8. Engineering Mathematics Vol. III S Arumugam, A.T.Isaac, A.Somasundaram, Scitech publications 9. Advanced Mathematics for Engg.students Vol. III S.Narayanan, T.K.M.Pillay, G.Ramanaigh, S.Vishwananthan printers & publishers.
POWER ELECTRONICS LA 502 Module 1 265 2+1+0
Power semiconductor Devices  History of development of Power Electronic devices Constructional features Characteristics rating and specification gate/base drive circuitsprotection including cooling and application consideration of diodes SCRS, GTO, BJTS, MCT, MOSFET and IGBT. Series and parallel operations of SCR Electromagnetic interference. Module 2 AC to DC Converters  Operation and analysis of Single phase and multiphase uncontrolled and controlled rectifiers with R, RL and back EMF load effect of source inductance free wheeling effect power factor improvement methods for phase Controlled rectifiers filters. PWM chips: SG3524 and TL 494 Block schematic. Module 3 AC to AC Voltage Converter  Operation and analysis of single phase integral cycle and phase controlled converters Configuration of three phase controllers. Module 4 DC to DC Converters  Chopper classification Step down step up and four quadrant converters operation analysis and control with R, RL and EMF load current and voltage Commutation circuits. Module 5 DC to AC Converters  Single phase and three phase bridge inverters VSI and CSI voltage control  PWM & Square wave operation Harmonics and their reduction techniques. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Power Electronics: Rashid Muhammad, Pearson Edn. Power Electronics: Harish C Ray, Galgotia Pub. Thyristors and Applications: Ramamoorthy. Power Electronics: Converter, Applications and Design, Mohan Ned, John Wiley, Power Semiconductor Circuits: Dewan, S.B. and Satrughan A, John Wiley & Sons, 1975. Thyristorised Power Controllers: Dubey, G.K., Doradlla, S. R., Wiley Eastern, 1987.
APPLIED ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY L 503 3+1+0 Module 1 Review of vector analysis: Cartesian, Cylindrical and Spherical coordinates systems Coordinate transformations. Static electric field: Coulomb’s Law of point charges Electric fluxGauss’s LawElectrical scalar potential different types of potential distribution Potential gradient Boundary conditions Capacitance: Capacitance of isolated sphere capacitance between two concentric sphere shells capacitance between coaxial cylinders capacitance between parallel wires. Vector fields: Divergence and curl Divergence theorem Stokes theorem. 266
Module 2 Magnetic field: Steady current and current density in a conductor BiotSavarts Law Ampere’s Law Helmholtz theorems Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction Solenoid, toroid, inductance of transmission line Mutual inductance energy stored in magnetic fields Magnetic dipole Electric and Magnetic boundary conditions vector magnetic potential. Module 3 Maxwell’s equations and travelling waves: conduction current and displacement currentMaxwell’s equations Plane waves Poynting theorem and Poynting vector Plane electromagnetic waves Solution for free space condition Uniform plane wavewave equation for conducting medium Wave polarization Poisson’s and Laplace equations. Module 4 Guided waves between parallel planes transverse electric and transverse magnetic waves and its characteristics Rectangular wave guides modes of propagation. Module 5 Transmission lines Transmission line equations transmission line parameters Skin effect VSWRCharacteristic impedance Stub matching Smith chart  Phase velocity and group velocity. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Engineering Electromagnetics: W. H. Hayt, Mc Graw Hill Publications. Electromagnetics: J. D. Kraus, Mc Graw Hill Publications. Engineering electromagnetics: E. C. Jordan. Field & Wave Electromagnetic: Cheng, Pearson Education. Electromagnetics: Edminister, Schaum series, 2 Edn. Electromagnetic Theory: B. Premlet. Electromagnetic Theory: Sadiku, Oxford University Press.
LA 504
COMPUTER ORGANISATION AND ARCHITECTURE 2+1+0
Module 1 Basic structure of computer hardware and software addressing methods and machine programming sequencing different addressing modes instruction sets computer arithmetic logic design fast adders multiplication Booth’s algorithm fast multiplication integer division floating point numbers. Module 2 Control unit instruction execution cycle sequencing of control signals hardwired control PLAsmicro programmed controls control signals micro instructions  Micro program sequencing branch address modification pre fetching of micro instructions. Module 3 Memory organization semi conductor RAM memories internal organization bipolar and MOS devices dynamic memories multiple memory modules and interleaving cache memories mapping 267
functions  replacement algorithms virtual memories address translationpage tables  memory management units secondary memories disk drives standards. Module 4 InputOutput organization accessing I/O devices direct memory access (DMA) interrupts and interrupt handling handling multiple devices device identification vectored interrupts interrupt nesting daisy chaining I/O interfaces serial and parallel standardsbusesscheduling bus arbitrations printers plotters VDUs. Module 5 Introduction to parallel processing and architectureclassification array processors pipeline architecture interconnection networks multistage networks message passing architecture. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Computer organization – Hamacher C V, Mc Graw Hill. Computer Systems and Architecture – Vincent P Heuring, H F Jordan, Pearson Edn. Computer organization and Design – Pal Choudhary Computer organization and Architecture – Hayes J P Computer Org. & Architecture: Stallings, Pearson Education.
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LA 505 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to operational amplifiers – Basic differential amplifier  dual input balanced output and unbalanced output Internal block schematic of op amp  Pin identificationpower supply requirements  typical data sheet  Opamp parameters  ideal op amp  transfer curve  equivalent circuit open loop configurations  frequency response of op amps  compensating networks  slew rate and its effect. Module 2 Op amp in closed loop configuration: Different feed back configurations Voltage series feedback and voltage shunt feedback  concept of virtual ground voltage follower  V/I converters and its applications  Differential amplifiers with one op amp and 3 op amps Use of offset minimizing resistor (ROM) and its design. Module 3 Op amp applications Summer Subtractor Log amplifier Antilog amplifier Comparators: zero crossing using voltage reference regenerative (Schmitt trigger) comparators Astable and monostable multivibrators Triangular and sawtooth wave generators Integrator and differentiatorRC phase shift and Wien bridge oscillatorsSample and hold circuit Peak detector circuit. 268
Module 4 Filters and timers: LPF HPF BPF Notch and all pass filters I order and II order filters Switched capacitor filter Switched capacitor integrator. 555 timers – Functional block diagram Astable multivibrator, monostable multivibrator and its applications. Module 5 Specialized ICs and applications: Voltage regulator ICs – 78XX and 79XX series 317 variable regulators 1723 switching regulators 566 VCO chip Phase locked loop(PLL)  capture and lock range 565 PLL  PLL applications: Frequency multiplication and division AM demodulation FM detection FSK demodulation  LM 380 power amplifier  intercom using LM 380 8038 Function generator chip  applications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: Ramakand Gaykwad PHI publications. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: R F Coughlin Pearson Education. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: Ravi Raj Dudeja Umesh Publications. Linear Integrated circuits: Roy Choudhary & Jain Wiely Eastern Publications. Integrated circuits: K R Botkar
L506
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS 3+1+0
Module1 Introduction to microprocessors and microcomputers: Function of microprocessors architecture of 8085 pin configuration and functions – tristate bus concept  generation of control signals  bus timings – demultiplexing AD0AD7 – flags  memory decoding  interfacing of RAM and EPROM I/O addressing  I/O mapped I/O  and memory mapped I/O schemes  instruction execution fetch/execute cycle  instruction timings and operation status. Module 2 Atmel AT89C51 microcontroller – features  pin configurations  internal block schematic  pin descriptions  PORT0, PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, idle & power down mode  power control register program protection modes  flash programming & verification. Module 3 Memory organization  program memory  data memory  direct & indirect addressing area  Program status word  register banks  addressing modes  instruction set – arithmetic  logical and data transfer instructions  Boolean instructions  program branching instructions  Programming examples. Module 4
269
Machine cycles – interrupts  interrupt sources  interrupt enable register  interrupt priority interrupt control system  interrupt handling  single step operation  port bit latches and buffers port structures and operation  accessing external memory – programming examples. Module 5 Timer0 & Timer1  TMOD SFR  mode0, mode1, mode2, mode3  TCON SFR  serial interface SCON SFR  mode0, mode1, mode2, mode3 block schematics baud rates power on reset circuitONCE mode on chip oscillator external program & data memory timing diagrams I/O port timings – programming examples. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The 8051 Microcontroller: Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Pearson Education. The 8051 Microcontroller: Kenneth J Ayala, Penram International Microprocessors and Architecture: Ramesh S Goankar Microcomputers and Microprocessors: John Uffenbeck, PHI Web site of Atmel  www.atmel.com
DIGITAL IC LAB LA 507 List of experiments 1. TTL & CMOS characteristics (7400, CD4001) 2. Interfacing of TTL & electromagnetic relay using transistor, opto coupler (4N33) & Darlington arrays (ULN2803). 3. Logic family interconnection (TTL to CMOS & CMOS to TTL) 4. Design of half adder & full adder using gates. 5. Design and testing of ripple & synchronous counters using JK flip flops (7473, 7476) 6. Counters using shift registers (Ring counter & Johnson counter). 7. Study of counter ICs (7490, 74190). 8. Design of astable & monostable multivibrators using gates. 9. Design of monoshots using dedicated ICs (74123). 10. Logic design using multiplexers (74150). 11. Logic design using decoders (74138). 12. Adders, Subtractors, multipliers. 13. Design of 7 segment display circuitsstatic/dynamic (7447, FND542). 14. PRBS generator. 15. Digital circuit simulation using electronic work bench/ similar working tools. Note Any experiment related to LA402 may be added to the above list. COMMUNICATION  I LAB 270 0+0+4
L 508 List of experiments 1. Passive filters – constant K and M derived. 2. Amplitude modulation. 3. Frequency modulation. 4. PWM using SG3525. 5. 555 Applications 6. 566 Applications 7. Study of 565 and its applications 8. Crystal oscillator 9. Oscillators using OPAMP 10. Colpitts & Hartley oscillator. 11. Multiplexing using analog multiplexer IC’s. Note Any other experiments may be added to the above list related to LA403.
0+0+4
SIXTH SEMESTER
271
272
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & ECONOMICS LA 601 PART A: INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT Module 1 Modern concept of Management: Scientific managementFunctions of managementPlanningOrganising StaffingDirecting Motivating Communicating Coordinating ControllingOrganisational structures Line, Line and staff and Functional relationships Span of controlDelegation Management by Objectives. Module 2 Personnel management: Objectives and functions of personnel management RecruitmentSelection and training of workers Labour Welfare Industrial Fatigue Industrial disputesTrade UnionsQuality circles. Formation of companies: ProprietoryPartnershipJoint stock companies Public sector Joint sector and Cooperative sector. Module 3 Marketing Management: Pricing Promotion Channels of distribution Market researchAdvertising. Production Management: Batch and mass production Inventory control EOQProject planning by PERT/CPM Construction of Network (Basic ideas only). PART B: ECONOMICS Module 4 Theory of demand and supply Price mechanism Factors of production Land, labour, capital and organization National income Difficulties in estimation Taxation Direct and indirect taxesProgressive and regressive Black money InflationCauses and consequences. Module 5 Indian financial system Reserve bank of India: Functions Commercial banking systemDevelopment financial institutions IDBI ICICI SIDBI IRBI NABARD Investment institutionsUTI Insurance companies Indian capital market Stock market Functions Role of the public sector Privatisation Multinational corporations and their impact on the Indian economy. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Industrial Management Industrial Management Marketing Management Indian economy Modern economic theory O P Khanna, Dhanpat Rai Pub. K.K. Ahuja, Khanna Pub. Philip Kotler, PHI A.N. Agarwal, Wishwa Prakashan K.K Dewett, Shyam Lal charitable trust. 3+2+0
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES L 602 Module 1 273 3+1+0
Random Signal Theory: Review of discrete and continuous random variablesGaussian probability function properties error function complementary error function. Base band data transmission: Base band binary data transmission system Inter symbol interference Nyquist pulse shaping criteria Optimum transmitting Receiving filters. Module 2 Correlative coding: Duobinary Base band PAM system Use of controlled ISI Mary signaling scheme (no analysis) Binary versus Mary signaling schemes pre coding Bipolar codingManchester coding HDB coding Equalization Adaptive equalization Eye pattern ScramblerUnscrambler. Module 3 Digital transmission:  BPSK DPSK Mary PSK QPSK BFSK Mary FSK MSK comparison. Module 4 Digital transmission of Analog signals:  Sampling  Quantizing uniform nonuniform quantization Companding A law μ law PCM system DPCM delta modulation system slope over loadingADM CVSD Quantization noise. Module 5 Noise in communication system:  Noise types SNR Probability of error Effective Noise temperature Noise figure Detection of binary signals in Gaussian noise: Maximum likelihood Receiver structure Matched filterCorrelation realization of matched filter optimizing error performance error probability performance of binary transmission system. References
1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Digital Communications: Sklar,Pearson Education
Digital and Analog Communication System: K Sam Shanmugam. Principles of Communication System: Taub & Shilling, TMH. Digital Communication Siman Haykin. Communication Systems Engineering: Proakis, Pearson Education. Digital & Analog Communication System Leon W Couch, Pearson Education.
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LTA 603 3+1+0 Module1 Review of signals and systems: Introduction  advantages and limitations of Digital Signal Processing. Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) Filters  Signal Flowgraph Basic Network structure for IIR filter Direct Cascade Parallel Forms. Design of IIR Digital filters from analog filters274
Butterworth design Chebyshev design design based on numerical solutions of differential equations Impulse Invariant Transformation. Module 2 Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filters: Linear phase FIR filters Frequency response of linear phase FIR filters  Location of the zeros of linear phase FIR filters. Realization of FIR cascade lattice designFourier Series method using windowsrectangular triangular or Barlett windowsHanning Hamming Blackman Kaiser windows. Module 3 Discrete fourier Transform: PropertiesCircular convolution Linear Convolution using DFTrelation between Z Transform and DFT Fast Fourier Transform; decimation – in time and Frequency  FFT algorithms – General Computation using Radix 2 algorithm. Module 4 Finite word length effects in digital filters: Introduction Number Representation  Fixed PointSignMagnitude  One’scomplement Two’s  complement forms Addition of two fixed point numbers Multiplication in Fixed Point arithmetic  Floating point numbers Block floating point numbers quantization  truncation rounding  effects due to truncation and rounding Input quantization error  Product quantization error  Coefficient quantization error zeroinput limit cycle Oscillations  Overflow limit cycle Oscillations  Scaling Quantization in Floating Point realization IIR digital filters  Finite Word Length Effects in FIR Digital Filters Quantization effects in the Computation of the DFT quantization errors in FFT algorithms. Module 5 Applications of digital signal processing: Speech Processing speech analysis speech coding sub band coding channel vecoder homomorphic vecoder digital processing of audio signals Radar signal processing DSP based measurements systems. Equi ripple FIR design PCM DSP chips a general study. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. L 604 Digital signal processing: Ifechor Pearson edn. Desecrate time signal processing: Oppenhiem Pearson edn. Digital signal processing: Oppenhiem and Sheffer PHI Introduction to Digital signal processing: Johny R Johnson Digital signal processing: Proakis and Manolakis. Digital signal processing: P Ramesh Babu Scitech Pub. RADIATION & PROPAGATION 2+1+0
Module1 Retarded potentials: Radiation from an A.C current element monopoles and dipolespower radiated from a dipole isotropic radiators radiation patternradiation intensitydirective gainpower antenna efficiencyeffective areaeffective length and apertureReciprocity theoremradiation resistanceantenna beam width. Module 2
275
Antenna array: ClassificationsBroadside, Endfire arrays, Array of n point, two point sources, multiplication of patterns binomial arraystacked array folded dipole reflectorBasic principles of antennaparabolic reflector different methods Chebyshev arrays super directive arrays. Module 3 VLF and LF transmitting antennaseffects of ground on antennaperformancegrounded antennaseffects of antenna height and effective height of antennamedium frequency antennasdipole antennasV and inverted V antennasRhombic antennatraveling wave antennasfolded dipole, YagiUda antennaBasic principles of radio direction findingloop antennas, Microstrip antennas. Module 4 Factors involved in the propagation of radio waves: the ground waveReflection of radio waves by the surface of the earthspace wave propagationconsiderations in space wave propagationatmospheric effects in space wave propagationionosphere and its effects on radio waves mechanism of ionosphere propagationrefraction and reflection of sky waves by ionosphereray pathsskip distancemaximum usable frequencyvertical and oblique incidencefading of signals selective fadingdiversity reception, Duct Propagation. Module 5 Antenna measurements: Input impedance SWR method radiation pattern measurements beam width measurementsgain measurementsmeasurements of radiation resistance radiation efficiency. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Antennas and wave propagation  K. D. Prasad Antennas  John Krauss, Mc Graw Hill Antenna theory and design A. Ballanis Radio Engg  F E Terman, Mc Graw Hill.
ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION L 605 3+1+0 Module 1 Objectives of engineering measurementBasic measuring systemblock diagram and descriptionPerformance characteristics of instrumentsstatic and dynamic. Types of datastaticdynamictransientrise time, response time & settling time. Analog and digital informationcomparison. Error classification of measurement errorssources of measurement errors. Module 2 Transducersparameters of electrical transducerstypesactive and passiveanalogue and digital types of transducers. Electromechanical typepotentiometric, inductive (self generating and non self generating type), capacitive, piezo electric, strain gauge, ionization and mechano electronic type. Opto electrical typephoto emissive, photo conductive and photo voltaic type. Frequency generating typedigital encodersselection criteria for transducers. 276
Module 3 Intermediate elementsinstrumentation amplifier, isolation amplifier. Data transmission elementsblock diagram of telemetering systemclassification of telemetering systernElectrical telemetering systemvoltage, current and position typeRF telemeterypulse telemetery (analog and digital)pulse amplitude, pulse frequency, pulse duration and pulse position modulation. Module 4 Bridge measurements  Wheatstone bridge  guarded Wheatstone bridge. AC bridges  Owen's bridge  Shering Bridge  Wein Bridge  Wagner ground connection. Recording techniquesstrip chart recordersbasic principles of digital recording. Basic principles of Signal AnalyzersDistortion analyzer wave analyzer, spectrum analyzer. Module 5 Basic measurements  Strain measurement  Pressure measurement  Flow measurement Temperature measurement  Force & torque measurement. Multiplexing  D/A multiplexing and A/D multiplexing. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Measurement Systems  Doeblin, MGH. Instrumentationdevices and systems  Rangan, Sarma & Mani, TMH. Principles of Measurement & Instrumentation – Morris, PHI. Transducers & Instrumentation – D.U. S Murthy, PHI.
CONTROL SYSTEMS L 606 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to control system – Basic idea of control systems and their classifications – transfer function – transfer function of electrical, mechanical and electromechanical system – block diagram – signal flow graph – Mason’s gain formula. Module 2 Time domain Analysis – Type and order of a system – typical test signals for the time response of control system – impulse and step response of first and second order systems – steady state error – static and dynamic error coefficients – concepts of stability – Routh Hurwitz criterion – basic ideas of proportional, derivative and integral controllers. Module 3 Frequency domain analysis – frequency response – frequency domain specifications – Bode Plot – Nicol’s chart – Nyquist stability criterion – relative stability – gain margin – phase margin. Module 4 277
Root Locus technique – basic theory and properties of root loci – procedure for construction of root loci – error detectors – servo motor – tacho generator – magnetic amplifier. Module 5 State variable analysis and compensation techniques – introduction to state variable concepts – state variable description of linear dynamic systems – state equations – state transition matrix – representaion of state equations – lag compensator – lead compensator – lag lead compensator (design of compensators is not needed). References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. L 607 List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Note Any experiment related to L505 may be added to the above list. MINI PROJECT L 608 0+0+3 The mini project will involve the design, construction, and debugging of an electronic system approved by the department. There will be several projects such as intercom, SMPS, burglar alarm, UPS, inverter, voting machine etc. The schematic and PCB design should be done using any of the standard schematic capture & PCB design software. Each student may choose to buy, for his convenience, his own components and accessories. Each student must keep a project notebook. The notebooks will be checked periodically throughout the semester, as part of the project grade. In addition to this, the following laboratory experiments should also be done in the lab. 1. Astable and mono stable multivibrators using 555 278 Measurement of op amp parameters. Active filters: LPF, HPF, BPF, All pass & notch filters. Square wave, Triangular, Saw tooth generation using op amp. Logarithmic amplifiers. Precision rectifiers. Switched capacitor filter. Sample and hold circuit. 8038 function generators. Analog to digital converters. Digital to analog converters. Modern control engineering – Katsuhiko Ogata, Pearson Edn Control systems principles and design: M. Gopal, TMH. Automatic control system – B.C. Kuo, PHI. Control system design: Graham C Goodwin, PHI. Modern Control Systems: Dorf, Pearson Education. LINEAR IC LAB 0+0+3
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Light activated alarm circuit Speed control of electric fan using triac Illumination control circuits Touch control circuits Sound operated circuits. Schematic capture software (OrCAD or similar) familiarization. PCB design software (OrCAD Layout or similar) familiarization. A demonstration and oral examination on the mini project also should be done at the end of the semester. The university examination will consist of two parts. One of the lab experiments will be given for examination to be completed within 60 to 90 minutes with a maximum of 30% marks. 70% marks will be allotted for the demonstration and viva voce on the mini project.
279
SEVENTH SEMESTER
280
LA701
MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN 2+1+0
Module 1 Various logic families  features – comparison – PLA – PAL GAL comparison – combinational PAL – PAL with flipflops – study of 16L8, 22V10 GAL – dual port RAM – FIFO  FPGA  gate arrays. Module 2 Embedded C compiler – advantages – memory models – interrupt functions – code optimization 89C2051 microcontroller architecturecomparison with 89C51 design of a simple trainer circuit using 89C51/89C2051 µC – interfacing of DIP switch, LED, 7 segment display, alphanumeric LCD – relay interface – design of a traffic light control system  interfacing programs using C and assembly language. Module 3 Analog to digital converters single slope, dual slope, successive approximation, sigma delta, flash – comparison  typical ICs  A/D interface – digital to analog converters – different types – D/A interface  optically isolated triac interface design of a temperature control system interfacing programs using C and assembly language. Module 4 Serial bus standards  I2C bus, SPI bus – operation – timing diagrams – 2 wire serial EEPROM – 24C04 – 3wire serial EEPROM – 93C46  interfacing  serial communication standards  RS232, RS422, RS485 – comparison – MAX232 line driver/ receiver  interfacing – interfacing programs using C and assembly language  low voltage differential signaling – PC printer port – registers – interfacing  universal serial bus – PCI bus. Module 5 Matrix key board interface  AT keyboard – commands – keyboard response codes  watch dog timers  DS1232 watch dog timer – real time clocks – DS1302 RTC – interfacing  measurement of frequency  phase angle  power factor – stepper motor interface  dc motor speed control – L293 motor driver  design of a position control system  interfacing programs using C and assembly language. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The 8051 Microcontroller: Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Pearson Education. The 8051 Microcontroller: Kenneth J Ayala, Penram International. Digital fundamentals: Floyd, Pearson Education. Programming and customizing the 8051 µC: Myke Predko, TMH Programming with ANSI C and turbo C: Kamthane, Pearson Education. Microcomputers and Microprocessors: John Uffenbeck, PHI. Web site of Atmel semiconductors  www.atmel.com
VLSI TECHNOLOGY LA 702 281 3+1+0
Module 1 Process steps in IC fabrication: Crystal growth and wafer preparation Czochralski processapparatus silicon shaping, slicing and polishing Diffusion of impurities physical mechanismFick’s I and II law of diffusion Diffusion profiles complementary (erfc) error function Gaussian profile Ion implantation Annealing process Oxidation process Lithography Photolithography, Fine line lithography, electron beam and xray lithography Chemical vapour deposition (CVD)epitaxial growth reactors metallisation patterning wire bonding and packaging. Module 2 Monolithic components: Isolation of components junction isolation and dielectric isolationTransistor fabrication buried layer impurity profile parasitic effects monolithic diodes schottky diodes and transistors FET structures JFET MOSFET PMOS and NMOS, control of threshold voltage (Vth) silicon gate technology Monolithic resistors sheet resistance and resistor designresistors in diffused regions MOS resistors monolithic capacitors junction and MOS structures IC crossovers and vias. Module 3 CMOS technology: Metal gate and silicon gate oxide isolation Twin well process Latch upBiCMOS technology fabrication steps circuit design process stick diagrams design rulesCapacitance of layers Delay Driving large capacitance loads Wiring capacitance Basic circuit concepts scaling of MOS structures scaling factors effects of miniaturization. Module 4 Subsystem design and layout Simple logic circuits inverter, NAND gates, BiCMOS circuit, NOR gates, CMOS logic systems – bus lines arrangements power dissipation power supply rail distribution subsystem design process design of a 4 bit shifter. Module 5 Gallium Arsenide Technology: Submicro CMOS technology Crystal structure Doping processChanneling effect MESFET GaAs fabrication Device modeling. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. L703 Modern VLSI design: Wolf, Pearson Education. VLSI technology: S M Sze, Mc Graw Hill pub. Basic VLSI design: Douglas Pucknell, PHI. Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: H E Weste, Pearson Edn. Integrated Circuits: K R Botkar, Khanna Pub. CMOS circuit design layout and simulation: Barter, IEEE press. Introduction to VLSI: Conway, Addison weslay. MICROWAVE AND RADAR ENGINEERING 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to Microwaves Characteristic features advantages and applications Wave guidesbasic concepts and properties. Scattering matrix Concept of N port scattering matrix representationProperties of S matrix S matrix formulation of twoport junction. Passive microwave devices T junctions H plane, E plane and EH plane Tee junctions, its S matrix and properties Applications of 282
Hybrid junction. Directional couplerTermination Gyrator Isolator Circulator Phase changerAttenuator. Module 2 Microwave measurements frequency power VSWR impedance. Microwave tubes High frequency limitations Magnetron Multicavity Klystron Reflex Klystron Traveling Wave Tubeprinciple of operation. Microwave Communication: Basic Principles of Microwave Links – Microwave relay Systems – block schematic of terminal transmitters and receivers – repeaters – basic principles of design of a microwave links. Module 3 Microwave semiconductor devices Principle of operation of Transistors and FETs. Transferred Electron Devices Gunn diode Gunn diode as an Oscillator and an amplifier InP diode Tunnel diode principle of operation. Avalanche Transit time devices IMPATT and TRAPATT devicesprinciple of operation. Module 4 Radar range equation Block schematic of pulse radar Radar frequencies Applications of radarCW radar applications of CW radar CW radar with nonzero IF FM CW radarFM CW altimeterMTI and Pulse Doppler radar. Module 5 Direction finders Instrument Landing System Radio ranges. Navigation Hyperbolic navigationLORAN. Satellite navigation Doppler navigation  Global positioning system Different types of microwave antennasbasic principles. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Microwave devices and circuit: Samuel Liao, PHI. Microwave and radar — A K Maini, Khanna Publishers. Microwave and Radar Engg. — M Kulkarni. Introduction to radar systems — Merrill I Skolnik, McGraw Hill. Radar systems and radio aids to navigation — A K Sen & A B Bhattacharya.
OPTICAL FIBRE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L704 2+1+0 Module 1 Recollection of basic principles of optics: ray theory reflections at boundary critical angle total internal reflection  Optical wave guides  Propagation in fibre expression for acceptance angleacceptance cone – numerical aperture V number  Index profileeffect of index profile on propagation. Module 2 283
SI fibre and GI fibre  Brief description of modes in SI fibre and GI fibre Pulse dispersion and Band Width limitation Mode coupling – Attenuation in single mode and multimode fibres Optic fibre cables characteristics of cables Optic fibre couplers: types of coupling – fibre to fibre jointssplicing techniques optical fibre connectors. Module 3 Optical sources LEDs, LASER diodes operating characteristics photodetectorsprinciples of photo detection – PIN diode – APD – operating principles – photomultiplier tubes source to fibre power launching – lensing schemes modulation circuits. Module 4 Basic optical communication systems pointtopoint link rise time budget protection techniquesWDM – transceiver requirementsTDM optical amplifiers SOAs – EDFAs optical receiversIntroduction to optical fibre networks. Module 5 OTDR  Measurements numerical aperture dispersion measurements refractive index profile measurements band width measurements fibre attenuation measurements cutoff wave length measurements applications of fibre optic systems future developments References 1. Fibre optic communication technology: Djafer K Mynbaev, Pearson Education. 2. Electronic communication: Dennis Roddy & John coolen, PHI. 3. Optic fibre communication: John M senior, PHI. 4. Telecommunication principle circuits Systems and experiments: S.Ramabhadran, Khanna. 5. Optical communication system: John Gower, PHI 6. Fibre optics in telecommunication: Sharma, Mc Graw Hill 7. Optical fibre and fibre optic communication: Subir Kumar Sarkar, S Chand & co. Ltd 8. Optical communication: M Mukund Rao , Universities press. 9. Fiber Optic Communication: Palais, Pearson Education. 10. Digital Communication system with Satellites & Fibre Optics Applications: Kolimbris, Pearson Education. 11. Optical Networks  3rd Generation Transport systems: Black, Pearson Education. INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING L705 3+1+0 Module 1 Information theory:  Concept of amount of information units, Entropy marginal, conditional and joint entropies relation among entropies Mutual information, information rate, channel capacity, redundancy and efficiency of channels. Module 2 Discrete channels:  Symmetric channels, Binary Symmetric Channel, Binary Erasure Channel, Cascaded channels, repetition of symbols, Binary unsymmetric channel, Shannon theorem. Continuous channels:  Capacity of band limited Gaussian channels, ShannonHartley theorem, Trade off between band width and signal to noise ratio, Capacity of a channel with infinite band width, Optimum modulation system. Module 3 284
Source coding:  Encoding techniques, Purpose of encoding, Instantaneous codes, Construction of instantaneous codes, Kraft's inequality, Coding efficiency and redundancy, Noiseless coding theorem. Construction of basic source codes:  ShannonFano algorithm, Huffman coding, Arithmetic coding, ZIP coding. Module 4 Codes for error detection and correction:  Parity check coding, Linear block codes, Error detecting and correcting capabilities, Generator and Parity check matrices, Standard array and Syndrome decoding, Hamming codes, Encoding and decoding of systematic and unsystematic codes. Cyclic codes:  Generator polynomial, Generator and Parity check matrices, Encoding of cyclic codes, Syndrome computation and error detection, Decoding of cyclic codes, BCH codes, RS codes, Burst error correction. Module 5 Convolutional codes:  Encoding State, Tree and Trellis diagrams, Maximum likelihood decoding of convolutional codes Viterby algorithm, Sequential decoding Stack algorithm. Interleaving techniques:  Block and convolutional interleaving, Coding and interleaving applied to CD digital audio system CIRC encoding and decoding, interpolation and muting. ARQ:  Types of ARQ, Performance of ARQ, Probability of error and throughput. References 1. Communication Systems: Simon Haykin, John Wiley & Sons. Pvt. Ltd. 2. Principles of Communication Systems: Taub & Schilling, Tata McGrawHill 3. Principles of Digital Communication: Das, Mullick & Chatterjee, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 4. Error Control Coding Fundamentals and Applications: Shu Lin & Daniel J. Costello Jr., Prentice Hall Inc. 5. Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications: Bernard Sklar, Person Education Asia OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  I) CMELRTA 706.1 3+1+0 Module1 Classical optimization techniques Single variable optimization – Multivariable optimization with no constraints – Hessian matrix – Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier method Multivariable optimization with inequality constraints – KuhnTucker conditions. Module 2 Onedimensional unconstrained minimization Elimination methods – unrestricted search method – Fibonacci method – Interpolation methods – Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation methods. Module 3 Unconstrained minimization Gradient of a function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hooke and Jeeve’s method. Module 4 Integer – Linear programming problem Gomory’s cutting plane method – Gomory’s method for all integer programming problems, mixed integer programming problems. Module 5 Network Techniques Shortest path model – Dijkstra`s Algorithm – Floyd`s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem – PRIM algorithm – Maximal Flow Problem algorithm. 285
References 1. Optimization theory and application: S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd. 2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering: A. D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla, Pearson Education Asia. 3. Principles of Operations Research for Management: F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena, Richard D. Irwin, INC. 4. Operation Research an introduction: H. A. Taha, Eastern Economy Edition. 5. Operations Research: R. Panneerselvam, PHI OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++ (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
LA7062
Module 1 Introduction to loops: Evolution of object oriented languages  Support for experiments and structure  process of language translation – Need of objects  Definition of Object  Oriented Language. Module 2 Encapsulation & Inheritance: Building classes  Declaring objects Member functions constructors and destructors members access control. Module 3 POLYMORPHISM  Virtual functions  Defining virtual functions – Usage of virtual functions Abstract classes  simulation using abstract classes. Module 4 OVERLOADING: Overloading functions  Overloading operators to provide new meaning Selecting Friend or Member Functions for Operator Overloading. Module 5 DYNAMIC OBJECTS: Dynamic object allocation  Using references with dynamic memory allocation  Inline functions outside class definitions  Friend functions, Applications  Object oriented databases case study – some language (Simula, Smalltalk, C++, Ada) features. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Data abstraction & OOP in C++: Gordenkeeth, Wiley Eastern. Object oriented programming usig C++: Pohl, Pearson Education. Object oriented programming with C++: E. Balaguruswamy, TMH. C++ Programming language: Strostroup, Pearson Education. Object Oriented Programming in C++: Nabajyoti Bjarne. NEURAL NETWORKS (ELECTIVE  I) L7063 Module 1 3+1+0
286
Introduction  Principles  artificial neuron  activation functions  Single layer & multilayer networks  Training artificial neural networks  Perception  Representation  Linear separability Learning  Training algorithms. Module 2 Back Propagation  Training algorithm  Applications  network configurations  Network paralysis Local minima  temporal instability. Module 3 Counter Propagation networks: Kebenon layer  Training the cohenen layer  Pre initializing the wright vectors  statistical properties  Training the Grosbery layer  Full counter propagation network  Application. Module 4 Statistical methods Boltzmann’s Training  Cauche training  Artificial specific heat methods Applications to general nonlinear optimization problems. Module 5 Hopfield nets  Recurrent networks  stability  Associative memory  applications  Thermo dynamic systems  Statistical Hopfield networks – Bidirectional associative memories  Continuous BAM Adaptive resonance theory  Architecture classification  Implementation. Text Book Neural Computing Theory & Practice  Philip D. Wasserman. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Neural Networks  Simon Haykins, Pearson Education. Adaptive Pattern Recognition & Neural Networks  Pay Y.H. An Introduction to neural computing  Chapman & Hall Artificial Neural Networks  Robert J. Schalkoff, McGraw Hill Artificial Neural Networks  B.Yegnanarayana, PHI BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE  I) L 7064 3+1+0 Module 1 Biometrics Biomedical instruments parameters Maninstrument system componentsphysiological systems of human body cardiovascular system The heart Respiratory system blood purification The Kidney Nervous system Bioelectric potentials Resting and Action potentialspropagation biopotential electrodes Transducers ECGEEGEMG. Module 2 Biomedical measurements: ECG measurement electrodes and leads ECG recorder different recorders. Blood pressure measurements indirect measurement sphygmomanometer direct measurement techniques. Respiratory measurements Lung volume and capacities Spirometer Gas 287
exchange measurements. Clinical measurements: Blood cells tests on blood cells chemical testscolorimeter spectro photometer continuous flow analyzer. Module 3 Ultrasonic measurements: Characteristics of Ultrasound Attenuation Doppler effect basic modes of transmission pulsed, continuous, pulsed Doppler Ultrasonic imaging Block schematic of A mode, B mode, M mode instruments Electronic scanners: Linear and Phased array Applications of Ultrasound: Gynecology and obstetrics blood flow measurements cardiac imagingechocardiography echoencephalography. Module 4 X ray imaging and measurements: x ray generation x ray machine C arm machine image intensifiers x ray films photographic imaging Fluoroscopy computed tomography CAT scan: block schematic Gantry detectors. Module 5 Biotelemetry: components in telemetry system transmitterreceiver pulse modulators implantable units applications. Intensive care unit: Planning and location of different instruments Bedside monitors Prosthetic instruments artificial heart pump oxygenators hemodialysis artificial kidneydifferent dialysers. Electrical safety: Physiological effects of electric current let go current shock hazards need of grounding isolation of patients isolated power distribution system. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Introduction to biomedical technology: Joseph J Carr, Pearson Edn. Biomedical Instrumentation & Measurements: Leslie Cromwell, PHI. Biomedical Instrumentation: John G Webster, Houghton Mifflin Company. A handbook to biomedical instrumentation: R S Khandpur, Tata Mc Graw Hill Pub. PRINCIPLES OF REAL TIME SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
LA 7065
Module 1 Introduction to Real Time Systems – Structure of real time systems, real time computer, task classes – Periodic, Aperiodic, critical, Noncritical, definition of real time systems – real time systems, embedded systems  Hard real time systems, soft real time systems, real time design issues. Module 2 Real time kernel – polled loop systems, coroutines, interrupt driven systems – sporadic, fixed rate systems, hybrid systems, task control block  task status, scheduling – uniprocessor scheduling – traditional rate monotonic, rate monotonic deferred server, EDF, IRIS tasks – multiprocessor scheduling – utilization balancing algorithm, nextfit, bin packing algorithm, myopic offline, buddy strategy (no need of proofs) fault tolerant scheduling. Module 3 Communication – Communication Media and message sending topologies, network architecture issues, protocols – contention – based, token  based, stop and go multiloop, polled bus, hierarchal, round robin, fault tolerant routing – clocks and synchronization – fault tolerant synchronization in hardware, synchronization in software. 288
Module 4 Fault tolerance – definition, cause of failure, fault types, fault detection and containment, redundancy – hardware, software, time, information, integrated failure handling – reliability – parameter values – series – parallel systems, NMR clusters, combinational model, master chain model, fault latency, transient faults, software error models. Module 5 Programming Languages – Desired language characteristics, Real time databases, characteristics, main memory databases, Transaction, Disk schedule algorithms, Databases for hard real time systems, maintaining serialization constituency. Text Book Real Time Systems References 1. Real Time Systems, Design & Analysis 2. Real Time Systems Philip Laplante (IEEE) Krishna, Tata McGraw Hill  C.M Krishna, Kang G. Shini (McGraw Hill)
LA707 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) Note
MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB 0+0+3 Familiarization of 8085 trainer kit, manual code entry, simple examples. Design and construction of a simple flash programmer for 89C51/89C2051 µC. Study of Intel Hex file format. Computer aided assembly language program development for 89C51/89C2051. Use of assembler, linker and simulator for 89C51/89C2051. Programming examples. Sorting, arithmetic operations (Using assembler, simulator). Programming examples using Embedded ‘C’ compiler for 89C51/89C2051. Programming examples using timer, external interrupts. Design and construction of the following interfacing modules. A/D converter. D/A converter. Alphanumeric LCD display. Matrix keyboard interface. Seven segment display. Extending I/O port using shift registers(74HC595, 74HC165). Stepper motor. Infra red transmission and reception. Opto isolated I/P and O/P. Serial EEPROM. Real time clock. Interfacing using RS 232 and printer port.
289
Any other embedded processor with similar or better capability may be used instead of 89C51/89C2051.
COMMUNICATION II LAB L708 0+0+3 1. Microwave measurements  VSWR, wavelength, Attenuation, Impedance. 2. Antenna Measurements  Gain, Directivity, Radiation Pattern of various types antennae. 3. Characteristics of Klystron. 4. Waveguide Measurements. 5. Study of optical fibers and optical communication systems. 6. Delta modulation, PCM, PAM, PPM, PWM, ASK, PSK. 7. Experiments of Satellite communication system. 8. Display systems. 9. Study of PLC's. 10. Familiarization of Digital modulation and demodulation Trainer Kit.
290
EIGHTH SEMESTER
291
COMPUTER NETWORKS LA 801 3+1+0 Module 1 Network goals topologies configurationsconcept of internet ISOOSI 7 Layer Standard peer processesFunctions of each layerTCP/IP reference model  Transmission media description and characteristics  base band and broad band transmissionsynchronous and asynchronous full duplex, half duplex links Concepts of WAP technology. Module 2 MODEMSserial communication standards  X21 digital interface Need for data link layerstop and wait and sliding window protocolHDLCterminal handling pollingmultiplexingconcentrationvirtual circuit and datagrams  routing congestion control. Module 3 LAN base band and broad band Lan’s  carrier sense networksCSMA/CD ring network shared memory IEEE802 standardsintroduction to X25. Transport layer design issues establishing and releasing connection  flow control – buffering  crash recovery  a simple transport protocol on X25. Module 4 Session layer design issues data exchange  dialogue management  synchronization remote procedure callclient server model  Presentation layerdata presentationcompression network securityprivacy cryptography presentation layer in ARPANET. Module 5 Application layer  virtual terminal  file transfer protocolEmailintroduction to distributed system ATMprotocol architecture ATM logical connections ATM cells cell transmission ATM adaptation layer AAL protocols basic principles of SDH and SONET. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Computer Networks: Andrew S Tannenbaum, Pearson Education. An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking: Keshav, Pearson Education. Computer Networking: A Top Down Approach: Kurose Pearson Education. Computer Network & Internet: Comer, Pearson Education. Data communication: Hausly Computer Networks, protocols standards & interfaces, Uyless Balack Local Area Networks: William Stallings, Pearson Education. Understanding Data Communication and networks 2nd edWilliam A Shay (Vikas Thomson Learning)
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L802 Module1 292 3+1+0
Satellite Communication  Satellite orbits – Geo synchronous orbit –orbital velocity – Round trip time delay  Antenna look angles  Satellite classifications  spacing  frequency allocation System parameters analysis  link equations Link Budget  Spacecraft subsystem (block schematic). Tracking and telecommand  Earth stations – Antenna systems – receiver subsystems (block) functioning LNA – LNB  down converter  channel filters  demodulatorsINTELSAT/INMARSAT –Overview of INSAT. Module 2 Types of satellite communication systemFSS, DSSDirect broadcasting and community broadcast Multiple Access Techniques– Introduction FDMFMFDMA, PSKTDMA, SSMA, CDMA Switching techniques – circuit – message  packet switching Packet satellite networkdomestic satellite system. Module 3 The cellular concept – Introduction  Frequency reuse –channel assignment – Hand off strategies – prioritizing handoff –practical handoff – Cochannel interface and system capacity – channel planning – adjacent channel interference –Cell splitting – sectoring – repeaters – microcell conceptBlue tooth technology Fundamentals and Applications. Module 4 Wireless communication systempagingcordless & cellular system –comparisonSecond generation cellular networksthird generation cellular networks  Global System for Mobile – services and features – Architecture – Radio subsystem – channel types – frame structure  Global positioning Systems  basic concepts system block  positioning – Applications. Module 5 Spread spectrum Techniques and remote sensing Pseudo noise sequences –time hoppingfrequency Hopping – Robustness – Fast and Slow hopping – Hybrid & Chirp spread spectrumSynchronization – acquisition – Tracking  Concepts of Jamming Analysis of DS/SS – Analysis of avoidancegeneration of signalsdetection –Applications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. LA803 Electronic communication system fundamentals: Wayne Tomasi, Pearson Education. Wireless communication principles and practice: T S Rappaport, Pearson Education. Satellite communication: Gagliardi. Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications: B Sklar, Pearson Education. Digital communication: Simon Haykin, John Wiley&Sons. Space communication System: Filipowasky, McGrawHill. ADVANCED MICROPROCESORS 3+1+0
Module 1 Intel 8086 Microprocessor  Internal architecture – Block diagram – Minimum and maximum mode operation – Interrupt and Interrupt applications – DMA data transfer – 8087 math coprocessor. 8086 memory organization – even and odd memory banks – segment registers – logical and physical address – advantages and disadvantages of physical memory. Module 2 293
Addressing modes used in 80x86 family  Data addressing mode – register addressing, immediate addressing, direct addressing, register indirect addressing, base plus index addressing, register relative addressing, base relative plus index addressing, scaled addressing. Program memory addressing modes  direct program memory addressing, relative program memory addressing. Stack memory addressing mode. Module 3 Intel 80286 Microprocessor  80286 Architecture, system connection – Real address mode operation – Protected mode operation Module 4 Intel 80386 Microprocessor  80386 Architecture and system connection – Real operating mode – 386 protected mode operation – segmentation and virtual memory – segment privilege levels and protection – call gates – I/O privilege levels – Interrupts and exception handling – task switching – paging mode – 80386 virtual 86 mode operation. Module 5 Advanced Intel Microprocessors  80486 – Processor model – Reduced Instruction cycle – five stage instruction pipe line – Integrated coprocessor – On board cache – Burst Bus mode. Pentium – super scalar architecture – uv pipe line – branch prediction logic – cache structure – BIST (built in self test) – Introduction to MMX technology. References 1. The Microprocessors 6th Edition Barry B. Brey Pearson Edu. 2. Microprocessor and Interfacing 2nd Edition Douglous V. Hall TMH 3. The 80x86 family John Uffenbeck
TELEVISION ENGINEERING L 804 3+1+0 Module 1 Elements of Television system: Basic block schematic of television transmitter and receiver, Analysis of Television pictures, Scanning, human factor consideration, flicker, interlaced scanning, number of scanning lines, Horizontal and vertical resolution, maximum video frequency, Colour resolution and bandwidth, Composite video signal, video signal dimensions, vertical and horizontal synchronization signal dimensions, channel bandwidth, vestigial side band transmission, channel bandwidth and allocations for colour transmission. Module 2 Television camera and transmitters: Photoelectric effects, Working principle of image orthicon, vidicon, plumbicon, CCD, structure of CCD and its working, Monochrome and Colour television 294
camera: block schematic explanation, TV transmitters: Positive and negative modulation and its comparison, high level and low level modulation and its comparison. Colour TV picture tubes: purity and convergence, Delta gun, PIL, Trinitron tubes, LCD screens. Module 3 Monochrome and colour reception, Monochrome receiver: Detailed block schematic, Yagi antenna, BALUN transformers, RF tuner, electronic tuning, SAW filters, IF conversion, VSB reception and correction, video detector, AGC: delayed AGC and Keyed AGC, video amplifier, cathode and grid modulation, sync separation, horizontal and vertical deflection circuits and wave forms, sound separation. Power supplies: SMPS and block schematic explanation, EHT generation and its wave form description, Typical ICs in different stages. Module 4 Colour Television: Compatibility consideration, Colour response of human eye, Three colour theory, additive mixing of colours, chromaticity diagram, Luminance and chrominance, colour difference signal and its generation, Polarity of colour difference signal, Frequency interleaving and Colour burst signal, delay lines, Basic colour television systems: PAL and NTSC, Block schematic explanation. Module 5 Television applications: CCTV and its functional block schematic, Cable television: converters, cable connections, Satellite television: Dish antenna, LNB, Down converters, Video discs: VCD and DVD, Digital recording, LASER source, High definition television. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Monochrome and colour television: R R Gulati, Wiley Eastern. Colour Television, Theory and Practice: S P Bali, Tata Mc Graw Hill. Television engineering: A M Dhake, Tata Mc Graw Hill Basic Television Engineering: Bernad Grob, Mc Graw Hill. ADVANCED MATHEMATICS (ELECTIVE  II) CMELRT 8051 3+1+0 Module 1 Green’s Function Heavisides, unit step function – Derivative of unit step function – Dirac delta function – properties of delta function – Derivatives of delta function – testing functions – symbolic function – symbolic derivatives – inverse of differential operator – Green’s function – initial value problems – boundary value problems – simple cases only Module 2 Integral Equations Definition of Volterra and Fredholm Integral equations – conversion of a linear differential equation into an integral equation – conversion of boundary value problem into an integral equation using Green’s function – solution of Fredhlom integral equation with separable Kernels – Integral equations of convolution type – Neumann series solution. Module 3 Gamma, Beta functions Gamma function, Beta function – Relation between them – their transformations – use of them in the evaluation certain integrals – Dirichlet’s integral – Liouville’s extension of Dirichlet’s theorem – Elliptic integral – Error function. 295
Module 4 Power Series solution of differential equation The power series method – Legendre’s Equation – Legendre’s polynomial – Rodrigues formula – generating function – Bessel’s equation – Bessel’s function of the first kind – Orthogonality of Legendre’s Polynomials and Bessel’s functions. Module 5 Numerical solution of partial differential equations. Classification of second order equations Finite difference approximations to partial derivatives – solution of Laplace and Poisson’s equations by finite difference method – solution of one dimensional heat equation by Crank – Nicolson method – solution one dimensional wave equation. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Linear Integral Equation: Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York A Course on Integral Equations: Allen C.Pipkin, Springer, Verlag Advanced Engg. Mathematics: H.K.Dass, S.Chand Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia Numrical methods in Engg.&science: B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers Generalized functions: R.F. Hoskins, John Wiley and Sons. Principles and Techniques of: Bernard Friedman, John Wiley and sons Applied Mathematics Principles of Applied Mathematics: James P.Keener, Addison Wesley. Numerical methods: P.Kandasamy,K.Thilagavathy,K.Gunavathy, S.Chand & co
VHDL (ELECTIVE  II) LA8052 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: Hardware Abstraction Basic Terminology Entity Declaration Architecture BodyConfiguration Declaration Package Declaration Package Body Model Analysis Simulation Basic Language Elements –Identifiers Data Objects Data Types Operators. Module 2 Behavioural Modelling: Entity Declaration Architecture BodyProcess Statement Variable Assignment Statement Signal Assignment Statement Wait Statement If Statement  Case Statement Null Statement Loop Statement Exit Statement Next Statement Assertion StatementReport Statement Other Sequential Statements Multiple Processes Postponed Processes Dataflow Modelling: Concurrent Signal Assignment Statement Concurrent versus Sequential Signal Assignment Delta Delay Revisited Multiple Drivers Conditional Signal Assignment StatementSelected Signal Assignment Statement the UNAFFECTED Value Block Statement Concurrent Assertion Statement Value of a Signal Module 3 Structural Modelling: Component Declaration Component Instantiation Resolving Signal Values  Generics and Configurations: Generics Configurations Configuration SpecificationConfiguration Declaration Default Rules  Conversion Functions  Direct Instantiation Incremental Binding. Module 4 296
Subprograms and Overloading: Subprograms Subprogram Overloading Operator OverloadingSignatures Default Values for Parameters  Packages and Libraries: Package Declaration Package BodyDesign File Design LibrariesOrder of Analysis Implicit Visibility Explicit Visibility. Module 5 Advanced Features: Entity Statements Generate Statements Aliases Qualified Expressions Type Conversions Guarded Signals Attributes Aggregate Targets Shared Variables Groups  Model Simulation: Simulation Writing a Test Bench Converting Real and Integer to Time Dumping Results into a Text Fi1e Reading Vectors from a Text File A Test Bench Example Initialising a Memory Variable File Names Hardware Modelling Examples: Modelling Entity interfacesModelling Simple Elements  Different Styles of Modelling Modelling Regular StructuresModelling Delays Modelling Conditional Operations Modelling Synchronous Logic State Machine Modelling Interacting State Machines Modelling a Moore FSM Modelling a Mealy FSM A Generic Priority Encoder A Simplified Blackjack Program A Clock Divider A Generic Binary Multiplier A Pulse Counter A Barrel Shifter Hierarchy in Design. Text Book VHDL Primer Third editions: J. Bhasker, Pearson Education Asia. References 1. Introducing VHDL from simulation to synthesis: Sudhakar Yalamanchilli, Pearson Education Asia MEDICAL ELECTRONICS (ELECTIVE  II) L 8053 3+1+0 Module 1 Bioelectric potentials Human cell – action potential – ECG waveform – relation with heart actionbiopotentials from brain excitation and inhibition potentials Electroencephalogram muscle actionEMG muscular servo mechanism. Biopotential electrodes: Half cell potential equivalent circuit between electrodes and skin – electrodes types stimulating electrodes biomedical transducersclassification selection. Module 2 Biomedical amplifiers – op amps differential amplifiers OPA 111: FET input op amp data sheethigh impedance 50 Hz reject filter with gain instrumentation amplifier – INA 101 pH probe amplifiers pH probe electrometer Bridge amplifiers input protection isolation amplifiers basic design carrier type isolation amplifier synchronous demodulator opto isolators optical couplingTransformer coupled isolation amplifiers ISO212 Fiber optic isolation amplifier chopper stabilized amplifier differential chopper amplifier input guarding shield driver. Module 3 ECG wave form The standard lead system Einthoven triangle ECG preamplifier Right leg drive circuit shield drive Typical ECG amplifier circuit QRS complex detection ECG digitizationimprovement in resolution ECG machine mechanism patient cables ECG machine maintenance. Blood pressure measurements Pressure transducers Amplifiers dc amplifiers isolated dc amplifier pulsed excitation amplifier ac carrier amplifier systolic, diastolic and mean detector circuit plethysmography blood flow measurements electromagnetic flow meter. 297
Module 4 EEG Instrumentation requirements Neuron membrane potential EEG electrodes Frequency bands multichannel EEG recording systems preamplifiers circuits EEG telemetry systems. ICU monitoring system intensive care equipments cardio tachometers lead fault indicator central monitoring consoles telemetry system. Module 5 Medical Imaging: Computed tomography basic principle  data accumulation scanning motions – x ray tubes collimators detectors image reconstruction algorithms display – resolution. Nuclear Magnetic Resonance nuclear structure and angular momentum magnetic dipole momentalignment Larmor frequency RF magnetic field Free Induction decay Instrumentation Imaging system. References 1. Introduction to Biomedical equipment technology: J J Carr, Pearson Education. 2. Biomedical Instrumentation: John G Webster, Mifflin Hougton Co. 3. Medical Electronics: C Raja Rao, University Press. 4. Biomedical Instrumentation: R S Khandpur, TMH ADVANCED MICROCONTROLLERS (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0
LA8054
Module 1 Low pin count controllers – Atmel AVR family – ATTiny15L controller  architecture – pin descriptions – features – addressing modes – I/O space – reset and interrupt handling – reset sources  Tunable internal oscillator. Module 2 Timers – Watch dog timer – EEPROM – preventing data corruption – Analog comparator – A/D converter – conversion timing – ADC noise reduction – PortB – alternate functions – memory programming – fuse bits – high voltage serial programming – algorithm. Module 3 National semiconductor COP8 family  COP8CBR9 processor – features – electrical characteristics – pin descriptions – memory organization –EEPROM  security – brownout reset – in system programming – boot ROM. Idle timer – Timer1, Timer2, Timer3 operating modes – PWM mode – event capture mode Module 4 Power saving modes – Dual clock operation – Multi input wake up – USART – framing formats – baud rate generation – A/D conversion – operating modes – prescaler – Interrupts – interrupt vector table – Watch dog – service window – Microwire interface – waveforms. Module 5 Microchip PIC16 family – PIC16F873 processor – features – architecture – memory organization register file map – I/O ports – PORTA  PORTB – PORTC – Data EEPROM and flash program memory – Asynchronous serial port – SPI mode – I2C mode.
298
References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Design with PIC microcontrollers: John B Peatman, Pearson Education. DS101374: National Semiconductor reference manual. National semiconductor web site – www.national.com 1187D: Atmel semiconductor reference manual. Atmel semiconductor web site – www.atmel.com DS30292B: Microchip reference manual. Microchip semiconductor web site – www.microchip.com ECOMMERCE (ELECTIVE  II) LA8055 3+1+0 Module1 Introduction to Electronic Commerce  ECommerce Framework Anatomy of ECommerce Applications  ECommerce Consumer & Organization Applications E Commerce and World Wide Web  Internet Service Providers  Architectural Framework for Electronic Commerce WWW as the Architecture Hypertext publishing. Module 2 Network Security  ClientServer Network Security  CS Security Threats – Firewalls  Data & Message Security  Encrypted Documents  Security on the Web. Module 3 Electronic Payment Systems  Types of Electronic Payment Systems  Digital Token Based Electronic Payment System  Smart Cards  Credit Cards  Risk in Electronic Payment Systems Designing Electronic Payment Systems. Module 4 Electronic Data Interchange  EDI Application in Business EDILegal  Security and Privacy Issues  EDI standardization  EDI Envelope for Message Transport  Internet based EDI  Internal Information System Workflow Automation and Coordination Supply Chain ManagementDocument Library Types of Digital Documents Corporate Data Warehouses. Module 5 Recent Trends in ECommerce  Multimedia in ECommerce Video Conferencing with Digital Videos Broad Band Telecommunication Frame & Cell Relays Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS) Asynchronous Transfer Mode Mobile Computing and Wireless Computing. Text Book Frontiers of Electronic Commerce: Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B Whinston, Pearson Education. References 1. Global Electronic Commerce: J Christopher Westland & Theodore H K Clark. 2. E Commerce The cutting edge of Business: Kamlesh K Bajaj & Debjani Nag. 3. ECommerce: Strategy Technologies and Applications, TMH. 299
LA8061
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to Multirate Digital Signal Processing – Sample rate reduction  decimation by integer factors sampling rate increase – interpolation by integer facto  Design of practical sampling rate converters: Filter Specification filter requirement for individual stages  Determining the number of stages and decimation factors  Sampling rate conversion using polyphase filter structure – polyphase implementation of interpolators. Module 2 Adaptive Signal Processing – Adaptive filters – Concepts Adaptive filter as a Noise Canceller Other configurations of the adaptive filter  Main components of the adaptive filter – Basic Wiener filter theory – The basic LMS adaptive algorithm – Practical limitations of the basic LMS algorithm Recursive Least Square Algorithm – Limitations  Factorization Algorithm. Module 3 Introduction to two dimensional signal and systems  2D – DFT Transforms  Properties and applications  Discrete Hilbert Transform and Discrete Cosine Transform – Properties and Applications  Short term Fourier Transform  Gabor Transform  Properties and Applications. Module 4 Wavelets – Wavelet Analysis – The Continuous Wavelet Transform  scaling  shifting  scale and frequency  The Discrete Wavelet Transform  One Stage filtering  Approximation and Details Filter bank analysis – Multilevel Decomposition – Number of levels – Wavelet reconstruction – Reconstruction filter Reconstructing Approximations and details Multilevel Reconstruction Wavelet packet synthesis Typical Applications. Module 5 General and special purpose DSP Processors  Computer Architecture for signal processing – Havard Architecture  Pipelining  Hardware Multiply and Accumulate – Special Instructions  Replication Onchip Memory Cache  Extended Parallelism  SIMD – VLIW and static superscalar Processing  Brief study of TMS320C4X and ADSP 2106 processors. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Digital Signal Processing: Emmanuel C Ifeachor, Barrie W Jrevis, Pearson Education. Theory and Applications of DSP: L.R Rabiner and B gold Electronic filter Desig Hand Book: A .B Williams and FT Taylor, McGraw Hill Wavelets and Subband Coding: Valterli & Kovaceric, PHI. Analog Devices & Texas Instruments Users Manuel of TMS320C4X and ADSP 2106x. MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  III) 300
LA8062
3+1+0
Module 1 INTRODUCTION: Definition of multimedia, multimedia, hardware, software applications and software environments  Media Types  Analog and digital video, digital audio, music and animation  Analog & Digital video  Memory storage  Basic tools  Authoring tools. Module 2 BUILDING BLOCKS: Text  Hyper text  Sound  Sound cards  Standards  Image  Image types Image compression, RLE, JPEG, MPEG  Fractal and Wavelet Compressions  Image file types Animation  Capture and Playback techniques. (basic ideas only) Module 3 MULTIMEDIA ENVIRONMENTS: The Compact Disc family, CDinteractive, Digital Video Interactive, QuickTime, Multimedia PC and Microsoft Multimedia Extensions. Module 4 MULTIMEDIA PROGRAMMING: Framework: Overview, Media classes, Transform classes, Format classes and Component classes  Problems related to programming  Composition, Synchronisation, Interaction, Database integration. Module 5 ADVANCED MULTIMEDIA: Moving pictures  Techniques realistic image synthesis, Virtual Reality  Full motion digital video  Video capture techniques  multimedia networks  Desktop video conferencing  Future multimedia. References 1. Multimedia Programming Objects, Environments & Framework  Simon J. Gibbs, Dionysios C. Tsischritziz (AddisonWesley Publishing Co.) 2. Multimedia Making it work  Tay Van Ghan – Osborne Tata Mcgraw Hill 3. Authoring Interactive multimedia  Arch C Luther 4. Optimizing your Multimedia PC  L.J. Skibbe, Susan Lafe Meister  Comdex 5. Multimedia Bible  Winn L. Rosch, Sams 6. Multimedia Producers Bible Ron Goldberg, Comdex 7. Multimedia Power Tools  Peter Jellam, Random house Electronic Pub. 8. Multimedia Computing  Mathew E. Hodger & Russel M. Sasnett, Addison wesley 9. Integrated Multimedia Systems  Palikom, The communication Wall Overview
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (ELECTIVE  III) LA8063 Module1 301 3+1+0
Introduction: Concept of system software, classification of system s/w. Assemblers: over view of assembly process, elementary ideas of macros & macro processors. Compilers: Overview of compilation process, Parsing top down & bottomup parsing, storage allocation. Interpreters: basic ideas only. Module2 Operating Systems: types of OS, batch processing, multiprogramming, timesharing, real time OS. OS services UNIX OS –shells, Bourne Shell, C shell visual editor. Module3 Information Management: File system directory structure, basic file system calls, file protection, allocation methods disk blocks and inodes in UNIX. Device management. Module4 Processor Management: CPU scheduling  scheduling algorithms, Multiprocessor scheduling, Process management in UNIX, concurrent process critical section, semaphores, synchronization, concurrent languages. Module5 Memory Management: swapping, partitions,, paging, segmentation, virtual memory concepts, page replacement, dynamic linking, caching of secondary storage, memory management in UNIX, Deadlocks: cause, detection, prevention, avoidance, recovery, combined approach to deadlock handling. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. System programming and Operating Systems – D M Dhamdhere System Software – an introduction to system Programming – Leland L Beck, 3ed. Operating System – Peterson & Silberschatz, Addison Wesley Operating Systems – Dietal H M Design of UNIX Operating System – Maurice J Bach UNIX System Programming – Stevens.
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  III) LA8064 3+1+0 Module 1 Overview of Embedded System: Embedded System, Categories of Embedded System, Requirements of Embedded Systems, Challenges and Issues in Embedded Software Development, 302
Applications of Embedded Systems in Consumer Electronics, Control System, Biomedical Systems, Handheld computers, Communication devices. Module 2 Embedded Hardware & Software Development Environment:  Hardware Architecture, MicroController Architecture, Communication Interface Standards, Embedded System Development Process, Embedded Operating systems, Types of Embedded Operating systems. Module 3 Embedded Communication System: Serial Communication, PCtoPC Communication, Serial Communication with the 8051 Family of Microcontrollers, Protocol Converter, VoiceoverIP, Embedded Applications over Mobile Network example MP3 Sound Player. Module 4 Real Time & Database Applications:  RealTime Embedded Software Development, Sending a Message over a Serial Link, Simulation of a Process Control System, Controlling an Appliance from the RTLinux System, Embedded Database Applications using examples like Salary Survey, Energy Meter Readings. Module 5 Java Applications & Future Trends in Embedded Systems: Networked JavaEnabled Information Appliances, Embedded Process Control System, Mobile Java Applications, Appliance Control using Jini, System on a Chip (SOC), Smart Cards and the Cashless Society, Security in Embedded Systems. Text Book Programming for Embedded Systems Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech Reference 1. Fundamentals of Embedded Software where C and Assembly Meet – Daniel W Lewis.
LA8065
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
Module 1 Image representation and modeling  Characteristics of a digital image  Elements of digital image processing systems  Image digitizers & scanners  Elements of visual perception  Brightness & contrast  Image sampling & Quantisation  Two dimensional Sampling theorem  Reconstruction of image from its samples  Aliasing. Module 2
303
Image Transforms  Two dimensional orthogonal & unitary transforms  Properties of unitary transforms  Two dimensional DFT & its properties – Cosine – Hadamard – Haar – Sine  KL Transforms & their properties. Module 3 Image Enhancement  Point processing  Histogram modeling & Equalization  Spatial Filtering Filtering in the frequency domain  color Image processing. Module 4 Image Restoration  Degradation model  Inverse filtering  Wiener Filter  Interactive restoration Image analysis & vision basic principles only. Module 5 Image Coding & Compression basic principles  run length coding  variable length coding  bit plane coding  lossless predictive coding  lossy predictive coding  Transform coding  Image compression standards. References 1. Digital image Processing: I.Gonzalez Rafel C, Pearson Education. 2. Fundamentals of digital image processing: Jain Anil K, PHI. 3. Digital Image Processing: Pratt William K, John Wiley. SYSTEMS LAB L807 0+0+3 1. Experiments based on Matlab. a. To test linearity, causality & stability of LTI system. b. To find DFT of a given sequence using DIT & DIF FFT algorithms. c. To find IFFT of a given sequence using DIT & DIF FFT algorithms. d. Program to design IIR filter using Bilinear transformation impulse invariant methods. e. Control system simulation experiments. f. Programs to design filters using window techniques. 2. Digital signal processing based on DSP processors. 3. Familiarization of PAL assembler. 4. Realization of combinational and sequential circuits using PAL. 5. Realization of simple digital circuits using VHDL. 6. Familiarization of FPGA trainer kits. 7. Realization of digital circuits using FPGA. Note Any other experiments may be added in accordance with the electives offered.
L 709 / 808
PROJECT DESIGN AND SEMINAR
0+0+2
Each student is required to present a technical paper on a subject approved by the dept. The paper should in general reflect the state of the art. He / she shall submit a report on the paper presented to 304
the department. In addition to the seminar he / she shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in the 7th semester itself in consultation with the guide (s), panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work done to the department.
VIVA – VOCE L809 A comprehensive Viva  voce examination will be conducted to assess the student's overall knowledge in the specified field of engineering. At the time of viva  voce, certified reports of seminar and project work are to be presented for evaluation.
305
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING BRANCH
306
THIRD SEMESTER
307
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  II RT301 3+1+0 Module1 Mathematical Logic  Statements, connectives  Well formed formulas – Tautologoies  Equivalance of formulas  Duality law Tautological implications  Normal forms  the theory of inference for the statement  Calculus  validity, Consistency, Theorem proving  the predicate calculus  Inference Theory of the predicate calculus. Module 2 Number Theory: Prime and Relatively prime numbers – Modular arithmetic – Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorems – Testing for Primability – Euclids Algorithm – Discrete Logarithms Relations & Functions  Properties of binary relations  Equivalance relations and partitions Functions and pigeon hole principle. Module 3 Algebraic systems  general properties  Lattices as a partially ordered set  some properties of lattices  lattices as algebraic systems  sub lattices  direct product  homomorphism  some special lattices. Module 4 Discrete Numeric Functions & generating Functions, Recurrence relations  Manipulations of Numeric functions  generating functions  Recurrence relations  Linear recurrence relations with constant coefficients  Homogeneous solutions  Particular solutions  Total solutions  solutions by the method of generating functions. Module 5 Graph Theory: Basic concept of graphs, subgraphs, connected graphs, Paths, Cycles, Multigraph and Weighted graph  Trees  spanning trees. References 1. Elements of Discrete Mathematics  C.L.Lieu, McGraw Hill. 2. Discrete mathematical structures with applications to Computer Science  J.P. Trembly, R. Manohar, McGraw Hill. 3. Discrete Mathematics  Richard Johnsonbaugh, Pearson Education Asia 4. Discrete Mathematical Structures  Bernard Kolman, Robert C. Bushy, Sharon Cutler Ross, PHI 5. A first look at Graph Theory  John Clark & Derek Allan Holton, Allied Publishers 6. Cryptography and network security principles and practice  William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia
MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEMS R302 Module 1 308 3+1+0
CPU, I/P unit, O/P unit, Memory, Bus organizations, ALU, Control Unit, Registers, Execution of an instruction, Main memory, Addressing, Memory Address Register  Memory Data Register – Memory systems  Architecture of 8085 Pin Diagram  Registers. Module 2 Instruction set of 8085  Instruction Types – Arithmetic – Logic data transfer, Branch, Stack, I/O and Machine Control instructions  Addressing Modes  Direct and Indirect Addressing  Immediate Addressing  Implicit Addressing. Module 3 Subroutines  Stack Operations  Call Return sequence Programming Examples. CPU of a microcomputer – timing and control unit – The fetch operation – Machine cycle and TState instruction and data flow. Module 4 Interrupts of 8085  Hardware & Software Interrupts – Enabling, Disabling and masking of interrupts – Polling – HALT & HOLD states – Programmable interrupt controller – 8259 Module 5 Interfacing Memory and I/O devices  Address space partitioning  Memory mapped I/O  I/O mapped I/O  Memory interfacing  interfacing EPROM & RAM to 8085 – Data transfer schemes Programmed data transfer  synchronous and asynchronous transfer  interrupt driven data transfer – DMA data transfer – DMA controller – 8257 – I/O channels. References 1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085  Gaonkar, New Age International 2. Microprocessors, interfacing and Applications  Renu Singh, B. P. Singh, New Age International 3. Microprocessors  B. Ram 4. Introduction to Microprocessors Systems  Adithya P. Mathur, PHI 5. Microprocessors Peripherals and Applications  Gilmore
SOLID STATE ELECTRONICS RT303 2+1+0 Module 1 Transistor – Biasing  Stability  Thermal runaway. Transistor As an amplifier  RC coupled amplifier, Frequency Response, Gain Bandwidth relation  Cascading of transistors  cascade Darlington pair  emitter follower 309
Module 2 FET, FET amplifier – MOSFET, depletion and enhancement type  source drain characteristics and transfer characteristics. Module 3 Oscillators  Concept of feed back  Transistorised phase shift oscillator  wien bridge Oscillator – Hartley Oscillator  Colpits Oscillator (Operation and Expression for frequency) Module 4 Clipping, Clamping, Integration, Differentiation  Astable, Bistable and Monostable Multivibrators Sweep generators, Simple Bootstrap sweep generators. Module 5 Power supplies & Special semi conductor devices  Regulator power supplies – IC regulated Power supplies, 7805, 7905, LM317 – LED, LCD, Photodiode, Photo transistor, opto coupler. Seven segment display, SCR, UJT (basic concepts only), DIAC, TRIAC. References 1. Integrated Electronics  Millman and Halkias, McGraw Hill 2. Pulse Digital and Switching wave forms  Millman and Taub, McGraw Hill 3. Electronics Devices & Circuits  Boylsted & Neshelsky, Pearson Education PROBLEM SOLVING AND COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 3+1+0
RT 304
Module 1 Problem solving with digital Computer  Steps in Computer programming  Features of a good program  Modular Programming  Structured  Object Oriented  Top down and bottom up approaches  Algorithms  Flowchart  Pseudocode, examples Module2 C fundamentals: Identifiers, keywords, data types, operators, expressions, data Input and Output statements, simple programming in C.
Module 3 Control statements & Functions: If  else, for, while, do  while, switch, break & continue statements, nested loops. Functions  parameter passing  void functions Recursion – Macros. Module 4 Structured data types: Single dimensional arrays  multidimensional arrays, strings, structures & unions  Program for bubble sort. Module 5 Pointers & files  Declaration, passing pointers to a functions Accessing array elements using pointers  Operations on pointers  Opening & Closing a file  Creating & Processing a file, Command line arguments. 310
Text Book 1. Programming with C  Byron S. Gottfried, Tata McGraw Hill References 1. Computer Programming in C  Kerninghan & Ritchie, PHI 2. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C  Ashok N. Kamthan, Pearson Eduacation 3. Let us  Yeaswanth Khanetkar, BPB 4. Programming in C  Stephen C. Kochan, CBS publishers 5. Using C in Program Design  Ronald Leach, Prism Books Pvt. Ltd, Bangalore 6. Mastering Turbo C  Bootle, BPB Publications 7. Programming and Problem Solving with PASCAL  Micheal Schneider, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 8. Pointers in C  Yeaswanth Khanetkar, PBP 9. C Programming  A Modern Approach  K.N. Iling W.W. Norton & Company Newyork 10. Structured and Object Oriented Problem Solving using C++  Andrew C Staugaard Jr., PHI
HUMANITIES RT305 PART A: PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT Module 1 Scientific Management – Evolution of management theory – Contributions of Taylor, Gilbreth, Gantt, Emerson – Definition and functions of management – Authority, Responsibility, Delegation and Span of control – Types of structures of Organisation – Types of Business firms – Job evaluation and merit rating – Wages – Types of incentives. Module 2 Procedure for ISO and ISI certification – Design, Development and implementation of reengineering – Inspection – SQC control charts – quality assurance – TQM – Zero defects. PART B: ENGINEERING ECONOMICS Module 3 The Indian financial system – Reserve bank of India – functions – commercial banking system – profitability of public sector banks – development financial institutions – IDBI, ICICI, SIDBI, IRBI – Investment institutions – UTI, Insurance companies– The stock market – functions – Recent trends. Module 4 Indian Industries – Industrial pattern – structural transformation – industrial growth – inadequacies of the programme of industrialization – Large and small scale industries – industrial sickness and government policy – industrial labour – influence of trade unions. Module 5 The tax framework – Direct and Indirect taxes – Impact and incidence – Progressive and regressive – functions of the tax system – Black money – magnitude and consequences – Public debt – Debt 311 2+1+0
position of the central and state governments – Deficit financing – revenue deficit and fiscal deficit – Problems associated with deficit financing. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Management Stoner, Freeman and Gilbert, PHI Engineering Management Mazda, Pearson Education Indian Economy  Ruddar Datt, S Chand and Company Ltd. Indian Economy – Problems of Development and Planning  A. N. Agarwal, Wishwa Prakashan. LOGIC SYSTEM DESIGN R306 3+1+0 Module 1 Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & division of binary nos, BCD nos, excess3 code, gray code, alphanumeric codes, error detection using parity bits  error correcting codes, haming code. Module 2 Postulates of boolean algebra  basic theorems  Logic functions  truth tables  canonical forms SOP, POS  methods of minimization of logic functions  K maps & quine mcclaskey method realization using logic gates  NAND NOR gates  universal gates  don’t care combinations formation of switching function  from word statements. Module3 Sequential logic  flip flops  SR, JK, T & D flip flops  master slave JK flip flop, Counters asynchronous, binary decade, and up/down counters  synchronous binary decade, and up/down counters. Module4 Adders  design  Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor & Full subtractor  Carry look ahead adder, carry save adder, carry propagation adder. Module 5 Registers  serial in & parallel in shift registers  left & right shift registers  static shift registers typical IC’s  counters using shift registers  ring counter, Johnson counter. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. An introduction to digital computer design  Rajaraman & Radhakrishnan, PHI Logic and Computer Design – M. Moris Mano, Charles R. Kime Pearson Education Switching & finite automata theory  Zvi Kohavi, Tata McGraw Hill Digital computer fundamentals  Thomas C. Bartee, Tata McGraw Hill. Digital Computer Design  Malvino, Tata McGraw Hill. Digital Design  Morris Mano, Pearson Education Digital Design Principles & Practice – John F. Wakerly, Pearson Education SOLID STATE ELECTRONICS LAB R307 312 0+0+4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Characteristics of Silicon, Germanium, Zener diodes. Characterisctics of CE, CB configurations of transistors; Characteristics of FET. Clipping and clamping Circuits  RC differentiating and Integrating Circuits. Half wave and full wave an Bridge rectifiers. Single stage RC coupled amplifiers  Frequency response Astable multivibrators using BJT. Sweep Generator (Simple sweep) Oscillators  Rc phase shift oscillator. PROGRAMMING LAB
R308
0+0+4 1. Familiarisation with computer system microprocessor  peripherals  memory card etc. 2. Familiarisation of operating system  DOS Windows etc. (use of files, directories, internal commands, external commands, compilers, file manager, program manager, control panel etc.) 3. Familiarisation with word processing packages like wordstar and Msword 4. Progrmming experiments in C to cover control structures  functions  arrays  Structures pointers and files. 5. Familiarisation of C++ and Visual tools.
Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT304 problem solving and Computer Programming can be included.
FOURTH SEMESTER
313
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  III CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0 Module 1 Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficents  Finding P.I. by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchys equations Linear Simultaneous eqnssimple applications in engineering problems. Module 2 Partial Differential Equations  formation by eliminating arbitary constants and arbitary Functions solution of Lagrange Linear Equations – Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave equation. Module 3 Fourier Transforms:  Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine & Cosine transforms  inverse transforms  transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no proof) – Parsevals Identity  simple problems. Module 4 Probability and statistics: Binomial law of probability  The binomial distribution, its mean and variance  poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution  its mean and variance fitting of binomial & poisson distributions  normal distribution  properties of normal curve standard normal curve  simple problems in binomial, poisson and normal distributions. 314
Module 5 Population & Samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) –Sampling distribution of variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance  Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – Test of significance for single proportion, difference proportion, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected) References 1. Higher Engineering Mathematics  B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers 2. Engineering Mathematics Vol. II 3rd year Part A & B  M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing Company 3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations  Ian N.Sneddon.,McGrawhill International Edn. 4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers – Richard A Johnson, Pearson Education Asia / PHI 5. A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II) – Bali and Iyengar, Laxmi Publications Ltd. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics  Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 7. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia COMPUTER ORGANIZATION R 402 2+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: Organization and Architecture – Review of basic operational concepts – CPU single bus and two bus organization, Execution of a complete instruction – interconnection structures – layered view of a computer system. Module 2 CPU  Arithmetic: Signed addition and subtraction – serial and parallel adder – BCD adder – Carry look ahead adder, Multiplication – Array multiplier – Booth’s Algorithm, Division – Restoring and nonrestoring division, floating point arithmetic  ALU Design. Module 3 Control Unit Organization: Processor Logic Design – Processor Organization – Control Logic Design – Control Organization – Hardwared control – Microprogram control – PLA control – Microprogram sequencer, Horizontal and vertical micro instructions – Nano instructions. Module 4 Memory: Memory hierarchy – RAM and ROM – Memory system considerations – Associative memory, Virtual memory – Cache memory – Memory interleaving. Module 5 Input – Output: Printers, Plotters, Displays, Keyboard, Mouse, OMR and OCR, Device interface – I/O processor – Standard I/O interfaces – RS 232 C, IEEE 488.2 (GPIB). References 1. 2. 3. 4. Computer Organization  Hamacher, Vranesic and Zaky, Mc Graw Hill Digital Logic and Computer Design  Morris Mano, PHI Computer Organization and Architecture William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia. Computer Organization and Design  Pal Chaudhuri, PHI 315
5. Computer Organization and Architecture M Morris Mano, PHI 6. Computer Architecture and Organization  John P Hayes, Mc Graw Hill
R403
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 2+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to OOP  Evolution of object oriented languages  Need of Objects  Definition of ObjectOriented Language – Classes and Objects – Creating and Using Classes and objects – Member functions and variables – Constructors and Destructors. Module 2 Inheritance and Access Control  Member access control in classes – Friend functions and classes – Extending classes  Public Private and Protected Inheritance – Classification of Inheritance – Single – Multiple – Multilevel – Hierarchical – Hybrid. Module 3 Polymorphism – Runtime and compile time polymorphism – overloading functions and operators – selecting friend member function for operator overloading  Virtual methods – pure virtual methods – Abstract classes  Defining and using of virtual methods, pure virtual methods and abstract classes – applications of abstract classes. Module 4 Advanced Concepts Virtual Destructors – Virtual Base Classes  Template classes – Creating and using templates – Namespaces Module 5 Dynamic Objects  Dynamic object allocation  Inline functions. Other Object oriented languages – Java – Object oriented features in Java – Comparison with C++ References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Object Oriented Programming in C ++  Robert Lafore, Galgotia Pub. Object Oriented Programming in C++  Nabajyoti Barkakati, PHI Structured and Object Oriented Problem Solving using C++  Andrew C Staugaard Jr., PHI Object oriented Programming with C++  E. Balaguruswamy, TMH Java 2 Complete Reference  Herbert, Schildt, TMH The Java Programming Language 3rd Edition  Arnold, Gosling, Holmes, Pearson Education Asia 7. Objectoriented programming using C++  Ira Pohl, Pearson Education Asia 8. C++ How to program  Dietel & Dietel, Pearson Education Asia 9. An Introduction to Objectoriented programming – Timothy Budd 10. Problem Solving with C++  Walter Savitch, Pearson Education Asia 11. C++ Primer  Stanley B Lippman, Josee Zajoie, Pearson Education Asia INTEGRATED CIRCUITS R404 316 3+1+0
Module 1 Logic Families  DTL  TTL  ECL  I2L & CMOS. Comparison of circuits. Tristate logic Propagation delay  power dissipation  Noise margin window profile  comparison  Fan in  Fan out. Module 2 Storage elements  Flip flops  Latches  Registers, Decoders, Multiplexers Buffers  Memory systems  ROM types  RAM  BJT RAM cells  MOS RAMs, RAM organization  flash memories PLA  PAL  PGA  FPGA  PLD  CPLD  CDROM  Magneto optic storage. Module 3 D/A Converters  Binary weighted resistor type  Ladder type A/D converters – counting type Successive approximation type  Parallel comparator type dual slope type. Module 4 Opamps: Characteristics  Basic principles  definitions  parameters  Input, Offset, Voltage, Input bias current, CMRR, slew rate  Ideal Opamp  inverting and non inverting opamps. Module 5 Opamp Applications: Summing, Comparator, Differentiator  Integrator  Square wave generator Triangular wave generator using opamps. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Digital Integrated Electronics  Taub & Shilling, McGraw Hill Pulse Digital & Switching Wave forms  Millman & Taub. , McGraw Hill Digital design with standard MSI & LSI by T.R. Blakesley & John Willey. Integrated Circuits  Botkar, Khanna Publishers DATA STRUCTURES & PROGRAMMING METHODOLOGIES R 405 3+1+0 Module 1 Principles of programming – System Life Cycle  Algorithm SpecificationRecursive AlgorithmsDocumentation Performance Analysis and Measurements Time and Space complexityComplexity calculation of simple algorithms. Module 2 Study of basic data structures – Arrays StructuresSparse matrix – Stacks – Queues Circular queues Priority queues  Dqueues. Evaluation of expressions – Polynomial representation using arrays. Module 3 Linked Lists  Linked stacks and queues  Doubly linked lists  Polynomial representation using linked lists, Strings – Data representation – Pattern matching. Module 4 317
Trees  Binary Trees – Tree Traversal – Inorder  Preorder and Postorder, Graphs – Depth first and breadth first search. Module 5 Sorting methods: Selection sort, Bubble sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort, Quick sort, Heap sort, Radix sort, External sorting methods (basic idea only). References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++: Horowitz, Sahni & Mehta, Galgottia Pub. Classic Data Structures: Samanta, PHI Data Structures and program design in C: Robert Kruse, Pearson Education Asia Data Structures using C & C++: Langsam, Augenstein & Tanenbaum Fundamental Algorithms: Knuth. Algorithms + Data Structures = Programs: N.Wirth, PHI An introduction to Data Structures with applications: Trembley & Sorenson, McGraw Hill Data structures in Java: Thomas Standish, Pearson Education Asia ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS & PERIPHERALS 3+1+0
R 406
Module1 Study of Interfacing ICs  8255, 8252, 8251, 8279 (functions and internal block diagram only) Module 2 Interfacing with 8085  Interfacing keyboard – Hardware and Software approach – Interfacing seven segment displays  Interfacing D/A and A/D converters  Micro controllers (brief idea only) Module 3 8086/88 Architecture, Block diagram – Addressing modes – memory addressing modes – Program memory addressing modes – stack memory addressing modes. Module 4 Instructions format of 8086 – data transfer arithmetic –branch – loop flag manipulation shift & rotate – string REP instruction – writing simple program in 8086 – Additional features of 80286 – protected mode memory addressing. Module 5 Additional features of 80386 – Paging mechanism – Interfacing coprocessors in 80386 – Additional features of Pentium Processors. Brief study of latest processors of Intel & AMD (Architecture not required) – Introduction to RISC processors References 1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085  Gaonkar, New Age International 2. The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium and Pentium Pro processors. Architecture, Programming and Interfacing – Barry B Bray, Pearson Education Asia 3. The 80X86 family  John Uffenbeck, PHI 318
4. Introduction to the Intel Family of Microprocessors  James L.Antonakos, Pearson Education Asia 5. Intel Microprocessors  A.K.Ray 6. Microprocessors and Interfacing  Douglas V. Hall, TMH 7. Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals  A. K. Ray and K. M.Bhurchandi, TMH 8. The Intel 8086/88 Microprocessor Architecture, Programming Design and Interfacing – Bhupendra Singh Chhabra, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P) Ltd 9. IBM PC and Clones  Govindarajalu, TMH
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB R407 0+0+4 1. OPamp Characteristics 2. Inverting and Noninverting amplifier using Opamp  frequency response. 3. Differentiating and Integrating Circuits  frequency response. 4. Astable multivibrator using Opamp. 5. A/D Converter. 6. D/A Converter. 7. Transfer Characteristics and specifications of TTL and MOS gates. 8. Study of flip flops 9. Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters 10. Astable and Monostable multivibrators using gates. 11. Study of shift registers and their applications. 12. Study of decoders and Multiplexers.
DATA STRUCTURES LAB R408 Experiments based on the following: 1. Array and Linked list implementation of Stacks, Queues, Dqueues, Graphs, Binary Trees, Polynomials, Sparse matrix. 2. Infix, Postfix and Prefix conversions. 3. Sorting and Searching methods. 4. String representation and pattern matching Any experiment according to the syllabus of R405 can be substituted. 0+0+4
319
FIFTH SEMESTER
320
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  IV RT 501 3+1+0 Module 1 QUEUEING THEORY: General Concepts  Arrival pattern  service pattern  Queue disciplines The Markovian model M/M/1/$, M/M/1/N  steady state solutions – Little’s formula. Module 2 NUMERICAL METHODS: Introduction  solution of algebraic and transcendental equations Bisection method  Method of false position  Newton’s method  Approximate solution of equations – Horner’s method solutions of linear simultaneous equations  Iterative methods of solutionJacobi’s method  Gauss Seidal method. Module 3 FINITE DIFFERENCES: Meaning of operators – Δ, , μ ,δ ,E  interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula  Langrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolation formula  numerical differenciation  first and second order derivatives using forward and backward formula  numerical integration  trapizoidal rule  Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rules. Module 4 LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM : graphical solution of LPP general problem  solution of LPP using simplex method  Big M method – duality in LPP. Module 5 TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEM: Balanced transportation problem  initial basic feasible solution Vogel’s approximation method  optimum solution by Modi method Assignment problem  Hungerian techniques References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Operations Research  P.K. Gupta & D.S. Hira, S.Chand & Co. Ltd Advanced Engg Mathematics  Ervin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Higher Engg. Mathematics  Dr. B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers. Operations research  Richard Bronson, Schaum’s Outline Series Operations research  Panneer Selvam,PHI Numerical Methods in Science & Engg  M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing Co.
OPERATING SYSTEMS R502 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction OS Concepts – Evolution of OS, OS Structures Kernel, Shell, General Structure of MSDOS, Windows 2000, Linux. 321
Module 2 Process Management Process & Threads – Process States  Process Control Block – Process Scheduling – Operations on Processes, Threads, CPU Scheduler – Preemptive and NonPreemptive; Dispatcher, Scheduling Criteria, Scheduling Algorithms – Process Management in UNIX. Module 3 Process Synchronization & Interprocess Communication Concurrent Processes, Cooperating Processes, Precedence Graph, Hierarchy of Processes, Critical Section Problem – Two process solution, Synchronization Hardware, Semaphores – Deadlockdetection, handling, prevention, avoidance, recovery, Starvation, Critical Regions, Monitors, Interprocess communication. Module 4 Memory Management Objectives and functions, Simple Resident Monitor Program (No design), Overlays – Swapping; Schemes – Paging – Simple, Multilevel Paging; Internal and External Fragmentation; Virtual Memory Concept, Demand Paging  Page Interrupt Fault, Page Replacement Algorithms; Segmentation – Simple, Multilevel, Segmentation with Paging, Memory Management in UNIX. Module 5 Information Management Files and Directories – Directory Structure –Directory Implementation – Linear List  Hash Table. Device Management: Dedicated, Shared and Virtual Devices  Serial Access Devices, Direct Access Devices, Direct Access Storage Devices  Channels and Control Units – Disk Scheduling methods. Text Book 1. Operating Systems Concepts – Silberschatz, Galvin, Wiley Publications References Operating Systems – William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia 1. Operating Systems: Design & implementation  Andrew S. Tenenbaum, PHI 2. Modern Operating Systems  Andrew S. Tenenbaum, Pearson Education Asia / PHI 3. Operating Systems  Nutt, Pearson Education Asia 4. Operating Systems  Deitel & Deitel, Pearson Education Asia
DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS RT503 3+1+0 Module 1 Basic Concepts  Purpose of database systemsComponents of DBMS – DBMS Architecture and Data Independence Data modeling  Entity Relationship Model, Relational – Network Hierarchical and object oriented modelsData Modeling using the Entity Relationship Model. Module 2 322
Structure of relational databases – relational databases – relational algebra tuple relational calculus. Data definition with SQL, insert, delete and update statements in SQL – views – data manipulation with SQL Module 3 Introduction to Transaction Processing Transaction and System Concepts Desirable properties of Transactions Schedules and Recoverability Serializability of SchedulesQuery processing and Optimization Concurrency Control assertions – triggers. Oracle case study: The basic structure of the oracle system – database structure and its manipulation in oracle storage organization in oracle  Programming in PL/SQL Cursor in PL/SQL Module 4 Database Design– Design guidelines– Relational database design – Integrity Constraints – Domain Constraints Referential integrity – Functional Dependency Normalization using Functional Dependencies, Normal forms based on primary keys general definitions of Second and Third Normal Forms. Boyce Codd Normal Form– Multivalued Dependencies and Forth Normal Form – Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form – Pitfalls in Relational Database Design. Module 5 Distributed databases: Distributed Database Concepts Data Fragmentation, Replication and Allocation Techniques Different Types Query Processing – semijoin Concurrency Control and Recovery. Text Book 1. Fundamentals of Database System Elmasri and Navathe (3rd Edition), Pearson Education Asia References 1. Database System Concepts  Henry F Korth, Abraham Silbershatz, Mc Graw Hill 2nd edition. 2. An Introduction to Database Systems  C.J.Date (7th Edition) Pearson Education Asia 3. Database Principles, Programming and Performance – Patrick O’Neil, Elizabeth O’Neil 4. An Introduction to Database Systems  Bibin C. Desai FILE STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS R504 2+1+0 Module1 File Organization:  Operations on Files – Heap Files  Sequential Files – Indexed sequential files – Direct files – Secondary key retrieval. Module 2 Index Structures for Files:  Single level Ordered IndexMultilevel IndexesIndexes on multiple Keys. Searching  Sequential search, Binary search, Interpolation search. Module 3 Hashing:  Static HashingHash TablesDifferent Hash FunctionsMid SquareDivisionFoldingDigit Analysis, Dynamic Hashing. CollisionCollision Resolution TechniquesExtendible Hashing. Module 4 323
Search trees: AVL Trees, height balanced trees, weight balanced trees, Threaded Binary Trees, Multiway search Trees B TreesB+ Trees. Module 5 Storage management:  Dynamic storage management storage allocation & liberation – First fit, best fit – Buddy system Garbage Collection & Compaction. References 1. Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++: Horowitz, Sahni & Mehta, Galgotia publications 2. Fundamentals of Database Systems: Elmasri & Navathe, Pearson Education Asia 3. File Structures an ObjectOriented Approach with C++: Folk, Zoellick, Riccardi, Pearson Education Asia. 4. Data Structures using C & C++: Langsam,Augenstein & Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia 5. Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++: Sahni Galgotia publications 6. Data structures & Program design in C: Robert Kruse Pearson Education Asia LANGUAGE PROCESSORS RT 505 3+1+0 Module 1 Assembler Overview of the assembly process  Design of two pass assembler Single pass assembler Macros – Macro definition and usage schematics for Macro expansion – Design of a Macro preprocessor Macro Assembler. Module 2 Introduction to Compilers Compilers and Translators – Structure of a compiler – lexical analysis – syntax analysis – context free grammars – basic parsing techniques top down and bottom up parsing (brief idea only)Recursive Decent parser – Shift reduce parser. Module 3 Storage allocation Data descriptors Static and Dynamic storage allocation – Storage allocation and access in block structured programming languages – Array allocation and access Compilation of expressions – Handling operator priorities – Intermediate code forms for expressions –code generator. Module 4 Compilation of Control Structures Control transfer Conditional and Iterative constructs Procedure calls – Code optimization – Optimization transformations – Local optimization and global optimization – Compiler writing tools – Incremental Compilers Module 5 Loaders and Linkers Loading – Program relocatability – linking – various loading schemes – linkage editing – Design of linkage editor – dynamic loading – overlays – dynamic linking. Text Book 1. System Programming and Operating Systems  Dhamdhere Mc Graw Hill 2. Principles of Compiler Design  Aho A.V., Ullman Narosa Publications. 324
References 1. Systems programming  Donovan, Mc. Graw Hill. 2. System Software  An Introduction to Systems Programming Leland L. Beck, Addison Wesley. 3. Compilers Principles Techniques And Tools Aho, Sethi, Ullman, Pearson Education Asia DATA COMMUNICATION RT 506 2+1+0 Module 1 Communication concepts – Analog modulation – Various schemes – AM, PM, FM –Sampling theorem  Analog pulse modulation – PAM, PWM, PPM – Generation of various modulated waves (Block diagram only) –Digital Pulse modulation (PCM). Module 2 Multiplexing  Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) – Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), Synchronous Time Division Multiplexing –Statistical time Division multiplexing – Key Techniques  ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK  Channel capacity  Shannon`s Theorem.
Module 3 Digital data transmission – Serial, Parallel, Synchronous, Asynchronous and Isochronous transmission. Transmission mode Simplex  Half duplex – Full duplex, Noise different types of noise – Basic Principles of Switching (circuit, packet, message switching) Module 4 Error detection and Correcting codes: Hamming code – Block codes and convolution codes – ARQ techniques – Transmission codes – Baudot – EBCDIC and ASCII codes – Barcodes. Module 5 Terminal handling – Point to point, Multidrop lines. Components of computer communication – Concentrators  Front end Processor – Transmission media – Guided media – Twisted pair cable, coaxial cable, fibre optic cable. GSM service and GSM system architecture. References 1. Electronic communication system  Kennedy, Mc Graw Hill. 2. Principles of Communication System  Taub & Schilling Mc Graw Hill. 3. Introduction to Data Communications & Networking  Behurouz & Forozan Mc Graw Hill. 4. Data Communication, Computer Networks & Open Systems  Fred Halsall Pearson Education Asia 5. Principles & Application of GSM.  Vijay K. Garg Pearson Education Asia 6. Modern Digital & Analog Communication Systems – B.P Lathi Prism Books Pvt. Ltd. 7. Computer Networks  A.S. Tanenbaum, PHI 8. Data and Computer Communication  William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia 9. Communication Engineering  A. Kumar, Umesh Publications
325
MICROPROCESSOR LAB R507 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Familiarization of training kits. Simple programs for Arithmetic and Data Transfer. Study of MASM Programming. Programming Peripheral Controllers. Interfacing the Trainer Kit. Any experiment according to the syllabus R302 can be substituted 0+0+4
DATABASE LAB R508 Experiments for performing the following: 1. Creation, insertion, updation, deletion of tables, indexes, views 2. Simple queries, nested queries, use of arithmetic and string functions. 3. Simple PL/SQL programs, use of exceptions, savepoints, cursor, procedure, function, trigger, sequence generator. 4. Importing and Exporting data. 5. Database Administration 6. ODBC/JDBC Interface. 7. Implementation of File Structures Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT503 can be substituted. 0+0+4
326
SIXTH SEMESTER
327
PC & PC BASED SYSTEMS R601 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to PC Hardware components – study of motherboards ––Different types of ports, slots and connectorsAddon cardsPower supply– SMPS function & operations. Module 2 Storage Devices Floppy – Floppy Disk Controller  Disk Physical specification & operations – Disk magnetic properties – Cylinders – Clusters – Hard disks – Hard disk drive operation – Magnetic data storage Sectors – Disk formatting – partitioning  Hard disk features – Hard disk data transfer modes – Programmed I/O – Direct memory access – Ultra DMA – Data addressing – Standard CHS addressing – Extended CHS addressing – Logical Block Addressing. Module 3 Optical Storage CD ROM, CD Technology, Sector layout, CDR, CDRW, CDROM, drive specifications data transfer rate – Access time – Constant linear velocity – constant angular velocity  Buffers – Interface – Magneto optical drives – WORM devices –DVD RAID – Holographic storage. Module 4 Memory Management in PC Parity – ECC – Static & Dynamic RAM – Memory Addressing – Segmented addressing  64 KB Limits – 640 KB barrier – Logical, segmented, virtual, linear and physical memory addresses – Extended and Expanded memory – Cache memory – Video memory – HMA  Flat memory model – Advanced memory technologies. Module 5 Bus Structures ISA, PCI, PCMCIA, AGP, USB, Hard Disk Interfaces – IDE, EIDE, ATA – Communication ports – Serial – Parallel port – Keyboard / Mouse Interface connectors. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PC Hardware Complete Reference  Craig Zacker & John Rourke, Tata McGraw Hill Inside the PC (8th Edition)  Peter Norton,BPB The Indispensable PC Hardware Book  Messmer, Pearson Education Troubleshooting and Repairing Your PC  Corey Candler, Wiley Upgrading and repairing PC’s (4th edition)  Scott Mueller, Pearson Education IBM PC Assembly Language Programming  Abel, PHI PC Upgrading Maintenance & Trouble shooting guide  Dr. S. K. Chauhan, Kataria
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING RT 602 Module 1 Introduction to Software engineering 2+1+0
328
Introduction – Software and software Engg. Phases in software developmentSoftware development process modelsRole of Management in software development –Role of Matrics and measurement –Software requirement specification(SRS)  Problem Analysis  validation . Module 2 Project Planning Cost Estimation – Uncertainties – models – COCOMO model – Project scheduling – average duration estimation – Project scheduling and milestones – staffing and personal plan – Rayleigh curve – personnel plan – team structure – software configuration – management plans – quality assurance plans – verification and validation – inspections and reviews  project monitoring plans time sheets – reviews – cost schedule – milestone graph – risk management. Module 3 System Design Design Principles – Problem partitioning and hierarchy – abstraction – modularity – top down and bottom_up – strategies – module level concepts  coupling  cohesion – structured design methodology  verification  matrics. Module 4 Coding Topdown and Bottomup  Structured Programming  Information Hiding  Programming style Internal Documentation – Verification  Code Reading  Static Analysis  Symbolic execution Proving Correctness  Code inspections – Unit testing. Module 5 Testing Testing fundamentals  Functional and Structured Testing  Testing Process  Comparison of Verification and Validation Techniques  Reliability assessment  Programmer Productivity  Error removal efficiency. Text Book 1. An integrated approach to Software Engineering  Pankaj Jalote, Narosa Publication References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Software Engineering  Roger S. Pressman, Tata McGraw Hill Software Engineering  Ian Sommervilla, Pearson Education Software Engineering Theory and Practice  Shari Lawrence, Pearson Education Asia Fundamentals of Software Engineering –Rajib Mall, PHI Fundamentals of Software Engineering – Carlo Ghezzi, Mehdi Jazayeri, PHI
R603
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 2+1+0
Module 1 PROJECT PLANNING Overview – Capital expenditure  Phases of capital budgeting – Project development cycle – 7s of project management – Requirements of a project manager – Forms of project organization. Module 2 PROJECT ANALYSIS 329
Market Analysis – Technical Analysis  Financial Analysis – Risk Analysis – Social cost Benefit Analysis. Module 3 CONTROL OF PROJECT Control Systems – Control of major constraints – Project management software & information systems. REVIEW: Performance of Evaluation – Abaudonment Analysis – Behavioral issues in Project Management Module 4 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT Quality systems – ISO 9000 series – ISI – Benchmarking – Quality Function development (QFD) – Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) – ISO 14000. Module 5 CONCEPTS IN SAMPLING Sampling designs and schemes – Errors in sampling – Simple random sample – stratified random sample – Cluster sample. Sample size destination – Estimating population mean – Estimating population proportion. References 1. Projects preparation, Apprisal, Budgeting & Implementation – Prasanna Chandra – Tata McGraw Hill 2. Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation & Review  Prasanna Chandra – Tata McGraw Hill 3. Project Management  Harvey Maylor  Pearson Education 4. Total Quality Management – Dale H. Besterfield – Pearson Education 5. Quality control and Improvement – Amitava Mitra – Pearson Education 6. Quality assurance and TQM – Jain & Chitale – Khanna Publishers COMPUTER NETWORKS RT 604 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: ISOOSI Reference Model – TCP/IP Reference Model – Comparison Network hardwareRepeaters, Routers, Bridges, Gateways, Hub, Cable Modem. Physical Layer: Transmission Media– ISDN system Architecture – Communication Satellites – geostationary satellites  Medium Earth Orbit Satellites Low earth orbit satellites– Satellite v/s Fiber Module 2 Data Link Layer: Design issuesError Detection and correction – Elementary Data link protocolsSliding window protocols. . LAN Protocols: Static & Dynamic channel allocation in LAN’s and WAN’s, Multiple access protocols – ALOHA – Pure ALOHA – Slotted ALOHA – Carrier Sense Multiple Access protocols – persistent and nonpersistent CSMA – CSMA with collision detection – IEEE 802.3 standards for LAN Module 3 Network layer: Virtual Circuits, Datagrams, Routing Algorithm – Optimality principle  Flooding Flow Based Routing  Link state routing – Distance vector routing – Multicasting – Link state 330
multicasting – Distance vector multicasting  Congestion Control Algorithms – General principles – Packet discarding – Choke packets  Congestion prevention policies – Traffic shaping – Leaky bucket algorithm – Flow specifications – jitter control Module 4 Transport Layer:  Transport Service  Elements of transport protocols – Internet Transfer Protocols UDP and TCP – ATM – Principle characteristics. Module 5 Application Layer: Domain name system – DNS name space – Resource records – Name servers – operation of DNS  Electronic Mail – MIME Mobile networks: Mobile telephone systems, Bluetooth  Components – Error correction – Network topology – Piconet and scatternet – L2CAP layers – Communication in Bluetooth networks References 1. Computer Networks (Fourth Edition): Andrew S.Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia/ PHI 2. An Introduction to computer networking: Kenneth C. Mansfield Jr., James L. Antonakos, PrenticeHall India 3. Communication Network: Leon, Garcia, Widjaja Tata McGraw Hill. 4. Computer Networks (Second Edition): Larry L Peterson & Bruce S Davie, (Harcourt India) 5. Computer Networking: James F Kurose & Keith W Ross, Pearson Education 6. Introduction to Data Communications and Networking: Behrouz, Forouzan, McGraw Hill
NETWORK COMPUTING RT 605 3+1+0 Module 1 HTML Documents Basic Tags for Font & Paragraph Formatting Lists, Tables, Frames, image Maps Cascading Style Sheets Style Element, Inline style sheets, Embedded style sheets, External Style sheets, CLASS Attribute, Absolute and relative positioning of elements, DIV & SPAN Tags. Module 2 Dynamic HTML Pages Client side scripting  Java Script – variables, Arithmetic operations – message boxes, Arrays, control statements, functions, event handling, document object model. Dynamic updating of pages with JAVA Script. Embedding ActiveX controls  using the structured graphics – ActiveX Control. Module 3 Java programming – Features of Java, Creating & using classes in Java – Static classes – Inheritance – Final methods, variables and classes – Interfaces  Nested classes – Inner classes – Anonymous Inner classes – Exception handling – Creating & using exceptions, Multithreaded programs and thread synchronization, creating and using packages. Creating GUI with AWT and Swing – JDK1.1 event model 331
Module 4 Network Programming with Java  Features of Java – Applets & Application – Life cycle of applets  Security features for applets  Inter applet communication – Threads & Thread synchronization – TCP/IP Programming with Java – Iterative & Concurrent servers. Datagrams, IP multicasting, RMI (Structure and Working of a simple RMI Program only) Module 5 HTTP Protocol working – HTTP methods, GET, PUT, DELETE, POST, HEAD Server side scripting – HTML Forms & CGI – GET & POST, Basic working of a CGI supported web server – Simple CGI program in C to validate user name & Password. Email: Working of SMTP and POP protocols (Overview only). References Module 1,2,5 1. Internet and World Wide Web How to program  Deitel,Deitel & Nieto, Pearson Education Asia 2. HTML, DHTML, Java Script, Perl, CGI  Evan Bayross, BPB Module 3,4,5 3. Java 2 Complete reference  Herbert, Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill 4. Java 2, AWT, Swing, XML and JavaBeans Programming Black Book – Steven Holzner, Wiley Dreamtech 5. The Java Programming Language 3rd Edition  Arnold, Gosling, Holmes, Pearson Education Asia 6. Using Java 2 Platform  Joseph Weber, PHI 7. Computer Networks  Tenanbaum, PHI/ Pearson Education Asia Additional References Unix Network Programming  Stevens W Richard, PHI 8. TCP/IP Protocol suite, 2/e Behrouz A. Forouzan, TMH ALGORITHM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN R606 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction and Complexity What is an algorithm – Properties of an Algorithm, Difference between Algorithm, Computational Procedure and Program, Study of Algorithms; Pseudocode Conventions; Recursive Algorithms – Space and Time Complexity –Asymptotic Notations – ‘Oh’, ‘Omega’, ‘Theta’, Common Complexity Functions; Recurrence Relations and Recurrence Trees for Complexity Calculations; Profiling. –Deterministic and non  deterministic algorithms. Module 2 Divide and Conquer Control Abstraction, Finding Maximum and Minimum, Binary Search, Divide and Conquer Matrix Multiplication, Stressen’s Matrix Multiplication, Merge Sort, Quick Sort. Module 3 Greedy Strategy 332
Control Abstraction, General Knapsack Problem, Optimal Storage on Tapes, Minimum Cost Spanning Trees – Prim’s Algorithm, Kruskal’s Algorithm – Job sequencing with deadlines. Module 4 Dynamic Programming Principle of Optimality, Multistage Graph, AllPairs Shortest Paths, Travelling Salesman Problem. Lower Bound Theory  Comparison Trees for Searching and Sorting, Oracles and Adversary Arguments – Merging, Insertion & Selection Sort; Selection of ‘k’th Smallest Element. Module 5 Backtracking Control Abstraction  Bounding Functions, Control Abstraction, NQueens Problem, Sum of Subsets, Knapsack problem. Branch and Bound Techniques – FIFO, LIFO, and LC Control Abstractions, 15puzzle, Travelling Salesman Problem. Text Book 1. Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms  Horowitz and Sahni, Galgotia References 1. Computer Algorithms – Introduction to Design and Analysis  Sara Baase & Allen Van Gelder, Pearson Education 2. Data Structures algorithms and applications  Sahni, Tata McGrHill 3. Foundations of Algorithms  Richard Neapolitan, Kumarss N., DC Hearth & Company 4. Introduction to algorithm Thomas Coremen, Charles, Ronald Rivest PHI SYSTEM SOFTWARE LAB R607 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 0+0+4 Symbol table construction Single pass and two pass assembler. Macro processor module binder (with limited Instruction set) Lexical analyzer. Bottom Up and Top Down Parser. Code generation. Generation of code for linkers & loaders. Working of device drivers, process scheduling methods.
Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT505 can be substituted. MINI PROJECT R608 0+0+4 The aim of the mini project is to prepare the students for the final year project. The topic for the mini project should be simple as compared to the main project, but should cover all the aspects of a complete project.
333
SEVENTH SEMESTER
334
335
OBJECT ORIENTED MODELING AND DESIGN RT 701 2+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: object oriented developmentmodeling concepts – object oriented methodology – models – object oriented themesObject Modeling– links and associations – advanced links and association concepts – generalization and inheritance  grouping constructs – a sample object model Advanced Object Modeling: aggregation – abstract classes – generalization as extension and restriction – multiple inheritance – metadata – candidate keys – constraints. Module 2 Dynamic modeling: Events and states – Operations – Nested state diagrams – Concurrency – Advanced dynamic modeling concepts – A sample dynamic model – Relationship of Object and Dynamic models. Functional modeling: Functional models – Data Flow Diagrams  Specifying operations – Constraints – A sample functional model – Relation of functional to Object and Dynamic models. Module 3 Analysis: Analysis in object modeling, dynamic modeling and functional modeling, Adding operations Iterating the analysis System Design: Breaking system into subsystems  Identifying concurrencyallocating subsystems to processors and tasks, managing of data stores. Handling of global resources handling boundary conditionsCommon Architectural Frameworks Module 4 Object Design: Overview of Object design – Combining the three models – Designing algorithms – Design optimization – Implementation of control – Adjustment of inheritance  Design of association – Object representation – Physical packaging – Documenting design decisionsComparison of methodologies Module 5 Other Models: Booch’s Methodology Notations, models, concepts. Jacobson Methodologyarchitecture, actors and usecases, requirement model, Analysis Model, Design model, Implementation model and Test ModelUnified Modeling Language (UML). Text Book 1. Object Oriented Modeling and Design JamesRumbaugh, Prentice Hall India 2. Object Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications  Grady Booch, Pearson Education Asia
References 1. Object Oriented Software Engineering  Ivan Jacobson, Pearson Education Asia 2. Object Oriented Software Engineering  Berno Bruegge, Allen H. Dutoit, Pearson Education Asia 3. Object Oriented Analysis and Design using UML  H. Srimathi, H. Sriram, A. Krishnamoorthy 336
4. Succeeding with the Booch OMT Methods A practical approach  Lockheed Martin, Addison Wesley 5. UML and C++ practical guide to Object Oriented development  Richard C.Lee & William, Prentice Hall India COMPUTER GRAPHICS RT 702 3+1+0 Module1 Introduction to Computer Graphics: Basic concepts in Computer Graphics – Applications of Computer Graphics, Interactive Graphics system – Raster scan and Random scan systems – Generating a raster image, Application of raster scan graphics. Video Display Devices, Display processors – Display files – graphical input & output devices. Module 2 2D Graphics: Line drawing algorithms – DDA, Bresenham’s – Bresenham’s Circle drawing algorithm  2D Transformations, Clipping – Line clipping – Polygon Clipping, Windowing. Module 3 3D Graphics: 3D display methods, 3D Object Representation – Polygon Surfaces – Quadratic surfaces – Spline Representations – Bezier Curves and Surfaces – BSpline Curves and Surfaces, 3D Transformations. Module 4 3D Rendering: ThreeDimensional Viewing  Projections, Clipping, Visible Surface Detection – Classification of Visible surface detection algorithms – Backface Detection, Depth Buffer Method, Scanline Method. Surface Rendering MethodsBasic illumination Models – Polygon–rendering Methods, Gouraud Shading, RayTracing Methods. Module 5 Advanced Technologies: Fractals – Classification of Fractals – SelfSquaring Fractals, AnimationRaster Animation, Morphing. Text Book 1. Computer Graphics (C version)  Donald Hearn & Pauline Baker (Pearson Education Asia) References 1. Computer Graphics  Donald Hearn & Pauline Baker (Prentice Hall of India) 2. Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics – William .N. Newman, Robert .F. Sproull (second edition), McGraw Hill edition 3. Computer Graphics Principles & Practice Foley, VanDam, Feiner, Hughes (second edition in C), Addison Wesley 4. Fundamentals of Computer graphics & multimedia D. P. Mukherjee, Prentice Hall of India 5. Java 2 complete reference  Herbert, Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill 6. Computer Graphics  Roy A Plastack & Gordon Kally (Schanmi Series McGraw Hill edition) 337
THEORY OF COMPUTATION R703 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to the theory of computation – Set theory – Definition of sets – Properties – Countability – Uncountability – Equinumerous sets – Functions – Primitive recursive and partial recursive functions – Computable and non computable functions – Diagonalization principle – Formal representation of languages – Chomsky Classification. Module 2 Introduction to Automata theory – Definition of Automation – Finite Automata – Formal definition – Language acceptability by Finite Automata – Transition Diagrams and Transition systems Deterministic and Nondeterministic finite automation – Finite Automation with Transitions – Eliminating Transitions  Conversion of NFA to DFA – Regular operations – Regular Expressions – Pumping lemma for regular languages – Applications of finite state automata – Lexical analysers – Text search. Module 3 Pushdown Automata – Formal definition – Language acceptability by PDA – Deterministic and nondeterministic PDA – Context free grammar  Applications of PDA – Parsing. Module 4 Turing Machines – Formal definition – Language acceptability – Universal Turing Machines – Halting Problem of Turing Machines – Church’s Thesis  Godelization. Module 5 Algorithmic complexity – Tractable and intractable problems – Complexity classes – Class P – Class NP – NP Complete and NP Hard problems. References 1. Introduction to the Theory of Computation Michael Sipser, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Learning) 2. Theory of Computer Science – K.L.P. Mishra, N. Chandrashekharan, Prentice Hall of India 3. Elements of the theory of computation Harry R Lewis, Christos H Papadimitriou Prentice Hall of India / Pearson Education Asia 4. The Theory of Computation  Bernard M Morct (Pearson Edn) 5. Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages & Computation John Hopcroft, Rajeev Motwani & Jeffry Ullman (Pearson Edn) ADVANCED SOFTWARE ENVIORNMENTS R704 2+1+0 Module 1 Windows Programming – Components of Windows API Distinction with ordinary programs – Event Driven Programming – WinMain Function – Creating Windows – Message loop – Window procedures  Menus & Buttons – Drawing on Windows. Module 2 338
MFC Features & Advantages – MFC Classes – Life cycle of an MFC application – The CWinApp Classes – Creating windows – Message maps and event handling – Menus & Buttons  Drawing on MFC windows – Handling mouse & Keyboard events. Module 3 CORBA – Introduction – Features – Fundamental concepts in Distributed objects – CORBA IDL – stub & Skeleton  implementing a simple CORBA server and CORBA client with C++. Module 4 CORBA object reference – Managing references at server – CORBA factories – CORBA object creation in C++ & JAVA – CORBA Exceptions – Destroying CORBA objects  comparison of CORBA & DCOM Architectures. Module 5 XWindows – Clients & Servers  Basic Architecture of XWindows systems – Layers in XWindows Architecture – XWindows Programming – Simple Hello World Application in X. Command line options and resources – connecting to XDisplay – creating windows and graphics context – Handling events – creating child windows. References Module1, 2 1. Visual C++ Programming  Yashwanth Kanetkar (BPB) 2. Programming Windows Fifth Edition – Charles Petzold Microsoft Press 3. Visual C++ Programming Bible – Leinecker & Archer IDG Books 4. Visual C++ Handbook  Osborne, TMH Module 3, 4 5. COM & CORBA side by side – Janson Pritchard, Pearson Education Asia Module 5 6. XWindows system programming – Nabajyoti Barkakati (2nd Edition), Prentice Hall of India WEB TECHNOLOGIES RT 705 2+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to SGML – features  XML, XML as a subset of SGML – XML Vs HTML – Views of an XML document – simple XML documents – Starting & Ending of Tags – Attributes of Tags – Entity References – Comments  CDATA section Module 2 Document Type declarations – Creating XML DTDs – Element type declaration – Attribute List Declaration – Attribute types – Attribute defaults – Displaying XML Data in HTML browser as HTML tables – Storing XML data in HTML document – Converting XML to HTML with XSL minimalist XSL style sheets – XML applications Module 3 339
Java Beans: Features – Designing Java Beans – Creating and using properties – Induced  bound and constrained properties  using and creating events – Introspection – creating & using Beanlnfo clauses – customization – providing custom property editors and GUI interfaces. Module 4 JSPs  Creating simple JSP Pages – templating – Request time expression – Request & Response objects – Reading parameter values – Using Javabeans in JSPs  Reading & setting Properties of JavaBeans – Connecting forms & bean properties – Serialized beans – declaring variables & methods in pages – scriptlets – conditionals, loops & execution handling in JSPs with scriptlets – Accessing beans via scriptlets. Module 5 EJB – Basics of EJB – Types of Beans – Development of Session Beans – Steps – Creating & Implementing Interfaces – Writing Deployment descriptors – Packaging and deploying bean  using the bean from a client – Development of stateful session bean. Entity beans – Features (Basics of developing and using entity beans) References Module1, 2 1. XML by Example: Building Ecommerce applications  Sean McGrath,Pearson Education Asia Module3 2. Using JAVA 2 Platform Special Edition Java 2, AWT, Swing, XML and Java Beans  Joseph L. Weber, Prentice Hall of India 3. Programming Black Book  Steven Holzner, Wiley Dreamtech Module4 4. 5. Java Server pages  Larne Pekowsky – Pearson Education Asia JSP: Java server pages  Barry Burd, IDG Books India
Module 5 6. Mastering Enterprise Java Beans and the Java 2 Platforms, Enterprise Edition – EdRoman (WILEY computer publishing) 7. EJB Design Patterns  Floyd Marinescu Additional Reference 8. Internet & Web Technologies  Raj Kamal, TMH ELECTIVE  I R706 List of electives 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Optimization Techniques Operating System Kernal Design Principles of Real Time Systems Windows Programming Mobile Computing Software Architecture 340 3+1+0
7. Lan Technology Note New Electives may be added according to the needs of emerging fields in technology. The name of the elective and its syllabus should be submitted to the university before the course is offered. CMELRTA 7061 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
Module1: Classical optimization techniques Single variable optimization – Multivariable optimization with no constraints – Hessian matrix – Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier methodMultivariable optimization with inequality constrains – KuhnTucker conditions. Module 2: Onedimensional unconstrained minimization Elimination metods – unrestricted search method – Fibonacci method – Interpolation methods – Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation metods. Module 3 Unsonstrained minimization Gradient of function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hooke and Jeeve’s method. Module 4 Interger – Linear programming problem Gomory’s cutting plane method – Gomery’s method for all integer programming problems, mixed integer programming problems Module 5 Network Technique Shortest path model  Dijkstra’s Algorithm Floyd’s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem – PRIM algorithm – Maximal Flow Problem algorithm References 1. Optimization theory and application  S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd. 2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering  A. D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla, Pearson Education Asia. 3. Principles of Operations Research for Management  F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena, Richard D. Irwin, INC. 4. Operation Research an introduction  H. A. Taha, Eastern Economy Edition. 5. Operation Research – R. Pannerselvam, PHI OPERATING SYSTEM KERNEL DESIGN (ELECTIVE  I) R7062 3+1+0 Module 1 Operating system – Basic Structure  Kernel – monolithic and microkernel architectures – Overview of UNIX kernels – Process kernel Model  reentrant kernels Signals –Interrupts – Timer interrupts System calls – Implementation of simple system calls – Booting procedure. Module 2 341
Processes and Tasks – Process relationship – process creation – Process Scheduling – Scheduling algorithm – SMP Scheduler Synchronization in kernel – Synchronization techniques  Interprocess communication using semaphores, messages and shared memory Module 3 Memory Management – The architecture independent memory model in Linux – memory pages – Virtual address space and linear address calculation – Virtual address space for a process – User segment – Virtual memory areas – Kernel Segment – Memory allocation in kernel segment – Block device caching mechanisms in Linux – paging – Page cache and management – handling page faults. Module 4 Linux File systems: Basic principles – kernel representation of file systems – layered file system architecture – Virtual file system – filesystem registration – mounting. The ext2 File system – Directories in ext2 – block allocation and addressing  extensions in ext2 file system Module 5 Device drivers – Character and block devices – polling – interrupt sharing – implementing a device driver for PC speaker References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Linux Kernel Internals 2nd edition – Beck (Pearson Education Asia) Understanding the Linux Kernel  Daniel P Bovet and Marco Cesati (O’Reilly) Linux Device Drivers – Rubini A. (O’Reilly) Operating System Concepts  Silbershatz and Galvin (John Wiley) Linux Kernel Online Book– David A Rusling (http://www.linuxdoc.org/LDP/tlk/tlk.html) Linux Kernel Book – Card R, E Dumas, F Mevel (John Wiley) Unix Internals Then New Frontiers – Vahalia U (PHI) Red Hat Linux 7.1 Bible – Christofer Negus (IDG Books) PRINCIPLES OF REAL TIME SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
RT7063
Module 1 Introduction to Real Time Systems – Structure of real time systems, real time computer, task classes – Periodic, Aperiodic, critical, Noncritical, definition of real time systems – real time systems, embedded systems  Hard real time systems, soft real time systems, real time design issues. Module 2 Real time kernel – polled loop systems, coroutines, interrupt driven systems – sporadic, fixed rate systems, hybrid systems, task control block  task status, scheduling – uniprocessor scheduling – traditional rate monotonic, rate monotonic deferred server, EDF, IRIS tasks – multiprocessor scheduling – utilization balancing algorithm, nextfit, bin packing algorithm, myopic offline, buddy strategy (no need of proofs) fault tolerant scheduling. Module 3 342
Communication – Communication Media and message sending topologies, network architecture issues, protocols – contention – based, token  based, stop and go multiloop, polled bus, hierarchal, round robin, fault tolerant routing – clocks and synchronization – fault tolerant synchronization in hardware, synchronization in software. Module 4 Fault tolerance – definition, cause of failure, fault types, fault detection and containment, redundancy – hardware, software, time, information, integrated failure handling – reliability – parameter values – series – parallel systems, NMR clusters, combinational model, master chain model, fault latency, transient faults, software error models. Module 5 Programming Languages – Desired language characteristics, Real time databases, characteristics, main memory databases, Transaction, Disk schedule algorithms, Databases for hard real time systems, maintaining serialization constituency. Text Book 1. Real Time Systems  C.M Krishna, Kang G. Shini (Tata McGraw Hill) References 1. Real Time Systems, Design & Analysis  Philip Laplante (IEEE) 2. Real Time Systems Krishna, Tata McGraw Hill WINDOWS PROGRAMMING (ELECTIVE  I) RT7064 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction  Concepts of Windows Programming  Event Driven Programming – Languages that support Windows Programming – Visual Basic – Java – Visual C++ Visual Basic Programming: Basic Language features – Variables, data types, constants, control statements – Forms – Creating and Using basic Controls – text boxes, labels, buttons  Event handling procedures – Properties Window – Common properties for Controls. Message boxes Module 2 Visual Basic Programming (Contd) Standard Controls – List boxes, Comboboxes, Image box, picture box, Shape controls, Timer, Scrollbars, Frames, Checkboxes, Option Boxes – Frames  File, Drive and Directory List boxes. MDI and SDI interfaces – Menus Module 3 ActiveX controls  RichTextBox, Tree View Control, List view Control, Progessbar, Flexgrid Control, Common dialog Controls – Font, File, Print Dialogs – Creating Custom activex controls – Creating Events and properties for ActiveX controls. Module 4 Graphics and Multimedia – Drawing Graphics in Windows  setting colors  Drawing text, lines, ellipses, arcs, circles – plotting points –Filling figures with colors and patterns – Using clipboards to transfer images between applications Printing graphics and text – Creating animations with Picture 343
clip control  applying image effects – stretching, flipping, embossing, egraving, blurring, sweeping – Using the Multimedia Control – Handling multimedia Errors
Module 5 Database Access – Using DAO, RDO and ADO for accessing databases – Creating tables, inserting, deleting and updating records – Using the Data Control – Using the ADO Data Control Using Windows API: Using DLL Procedures in Visual Basic – Declare statement – Handling C++ and Windows Data types – Playing sound with API funtions – Capturing Images from the screen – Handling mouse outside Applications window – Making an ‘always on top’ window. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Visual Basic 6 Programming Black Book – Steven Holzner (Dreamtech Press) Programming Windows fifth Edition  Charles Petzlod (Microsoft Press) Visual Basic  Ivan Petrosaus (BPB) Visual Basic  Garry Cornell (BPB) Using Visual Basic  Resselman (PHI) MOBILE COMPUTING (ELECTIVE  I) RT7065 Module 1 Introduction:  Short History, Mobile telephone systems Simplified Reference model. Multi carrier modulation. Cellular systems. Module 2 Wireless Communication Systems: Telecommunication SystemsGSM & DECTArchitecture and Protocols.Satellite SystemsGEO, LEO, MEO. Broadcast SystemsBroadcast transmission, Digital Audio BroadcastingMultimedia Object Transfer Protocol. Digital Video Broadcasting. Module 3 Wireless LAN and ATM:  Infra red and Radio Transmission, Infrastructure and ad hoc networks, 802.11 Bluetooth Architecture, Applications and Protocol, Layers, Frame structure, comparison between 802.11 and 802.16. Wireless ATM Services, Reference Model, Functions, Radio Access Layer. Handover Reference Model, Requirements, Types, handover scenarios. Location Management, Addressing, Access Point Control Protocol (APCP). Module 4 Mobile Network and Transport Layers: Mobile IP Goals, Requirements, IP packet delivery, Advertisement and discovery. Registration, Tunneling and Encapsulation, Optimization, Reverse Tunneling, IPv6, Dynamic Host configuring protocol, Ad hoc networks – Routing, DSDV, Dynamic source routing. Hierarchical Algorithms. Traditional TCP, Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Transmission. 344 3+1+0
Module 5 Wireless Application Protocol & World Wide Web WAP Architecture, ProtocolsDatagram, Transaction, Session Wireless Application EnvironmentWML Features, Script Wireless Telephony Application. WWW HTTP, Usage of HTML, WWW system architecture. Text Book 1. Mobile Communications – Jochen Schiller, Preason Education Asia References 1. Computer Networks – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, PHI 2. Communication Networks Fundamental Concepts and Key Architectures LeonGarcia & Indra Widjaja, Tata McGraw Hill SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE (ELECTIVE  I) RT7066 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to Software architecture – Architectural styles – pipes and filters –data abstraction and object oriented organization – Event based, Implicit invocation, Layered systems – Repositories – Interpreters – Process control – Heterogeneous Architectures. Module 2 Shared Information Systems – Integration in software Development Environment – Integration in the design of Buildings – Architectural structures for shared information systems Module 3 Guidance for user interface architecture Quantified design space – Formal models and specificationsThe value of architectural formalism – Formalizing the architecture of a specific system – Formalizing the architectural style – Formalizing an architectural design space Module 4 Linguistic issues  Requirements for architecture – Description languages – first class connectors – Adding implicit invocation to factorial processing languages. Module 5 Tools for architectural design – Unicon – Exploiting style in architectural design environments – Architectural interconnection Reference 1. Software Architecture – perspectives on an emerging discipline  Mary Shaw, David Garlan, PHI LAN TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE  I) R7067 3+1+0 345
Module 1 Classification of LAN  Life cycle of LAN Models for Communication  Topology  LAN standards  IEEE 802.2 LLC, IEEE 802.x MAC, FDDI. Module 2 Protocols: LAN protocols, protocol evaluation factors – CSMA – CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA – polling – Token passing – Ethernet – ACRNETs – IBM/PC network – IBM token ring. Module 3 Traditional interconnection components – Repeater, Bridges, Routers, Network interface cards, Types of switch, port switching & segment switching – combined speed – Hubs. Module 4 LAN Operating System – Peer – to –peer network – Function & responsibility spooler – Current Network Operating Systems. – Print
Module 5 Management & security – security levels – printing environment – opportunities, driver, printing queue – LAN security – physical security – logical security. Text Book 1. Local area networks: Management, Design & security Arne Mikalsen Per Borgesen – WILEYdreamtech 2. Local Area Network  S. K. Basandra, S. Jaiswal References 1. Local Area Networks  John E McNamara 2. Understanding Local Area Network Stan Schutt – PHI 3. Handbook of LAN Technology  Paul J. Fortier – McGraw Hill 4. Networking Technologies  Jaisal – Galgotia Publications 5. Networking and Connectivity  Gary R. McClain – Academic Press 6. Wireless LANs  Raymond P. Wenig – Academic Press 7. TCP/IP Networking – A Guide to the IBM Environment  David M. Peterson – McGraw Hill 8. Introduction to Local Area Networks Robert M. Thomas – BPB 9. LAN Peter Hodson – BPB 10. LAN Gerd E. Kerser – McGraw Hill 11. The Business Guide to Local Area Networks  William Stallings
R707
COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING LAB 0+0+3 Familiarisation with PC Components 346
1. Diagnostic S/Ws, Cards, Design & Programming of addon cards familiarisation with device drivers, Micro controllers etc. 2. Experiments for communication with peripheral devices using C and MASM. 3. Experiments for serial and parallel port communication using C and MASM. 4. Faimiliarisation with network configuration (routing, DNS, File Servers etc…) 5. Lan trouble shooting, Network problems and recovery, Network diagnostics softwares. References 1. Upgrading & Repairing PC’s  Scott Muller (PHI) 2. Red hat Linux Bible Cristofer Negas (IDG Books) 3. TCP/IP Bible –Rob Scringer (IDG Books)
NETWORK PROGRAMMING LAB R708 0+0+3 Experiments using interprocess communication and Network communication, synchronisation & IPC using semaphore, pipe & messages. Programs for FTP and socket based chat. Implementation of File Transfer  Communication through serial port  Communication through TCP/IP port Efficient error checking algorithms (Eg: CRC) Remote Procedure Call, Remote Method Invocation. Programs with HTML, DHTML, Applets, Java Script, Java, XML, Java Beans, JSP and EJB. Any experiments according to the syllabus of RT604 Computer Networks, RT605 Network Computing and RT705 Web Technologies may be substituted References 1. UNIX Network programming  Stevens. (PHI) 2. Using Java2 Platform – Weber (AWL)
PROJECT & SEMINAR R709/ R808 0+0+3 Each student is required to present a technical paper on subject approved by the department. The paper should in general reflect the state of the art. He/ She submits a report of the paper to the department.
347
In addition to the seminar He/She shall undertake a project work in the 7 th semester itself in consultation with the guide(s). On completion of the project work, He/She shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work done to the department.
348
EIGHTH SEMESTER
349
SECURITY IN COMPUTING RT 801 2+1+0 Module1 Introduction: Security basics – Aspects of network security – Attacks – Different types – Hackers – Crackers – Common intrusion techniques –Trojan Horse, Virus, Worm – Security services and mechanisms. Module 2 OS Security – Protection Mechanisms –Authentication & Access control – Discretionary and Mandatory access control – Authentication mechanisms – Official levels of computer security (DoD)  Security breaches – Concept of a hole  Types of a holes – Study of the security features for authentication, access control and remote execution in UNIX, WINDOWS 2000 Module 3 Cryptography: Basic Encryption & Decryption – Transposition & substitution ciphers – Caesar substitution – Polyalphabetic substitutions – Crypt analysis – Symmetric key algorithms – Fiestel Networks – Confusion – Diffusion – DES Algorithm – Strength of DES – Comparison & important features of modern symmetric key algorithms – Public key cryptosystems – The RSA Algorithm – Diffice Hellman key exchange – comparison of RSA & DES – Message Authentication & Hash functions – Digital signature Module 4 Network & Application Security: Kerberos – X509 Authentication service – IP security Architecture – Secure socket layer – Electronic mail security – Pretty Good privacy – S/MIME – secure Electronic Transactions – Firewalls  Security mechanisms in JAVA platform – Applet security – Security policy and Security Manager. Module 5 Database Security:  Security issues – SQL security DAC based on granting & revoking privileges – MAC for multilevel security – Statistical database security. Text Books 1. Module1, 4 Network Security Essentials Applications & Standards, William S., Pearson Education Asia 2. Module2 Modern operating System, Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia 3. Using JAVA 2 platform, Joseph L. Weber, Prentice Hall of India 4. Module3 Cryptography and network security principles and practice, William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia 5. Information theory coding and cryptography, Ranjan Bose, TMH 6. Module 4,5 Designing security Architecture Solutions, Jay Ramachandran, Wiley Dreamtech 7. Module5 Database Security Mechanisms for Computer Network, Sead Muftic, John wiles References 1. 2. 3. 4. Security in Computing  Charles P. Pfleeger IEEE Computer Science Press Database Security Mechanisms for Computer Network Sead Muftic, John wiles Designing Security Architecture Solutions – Jay Ramachandran, Wiley dreamtech Firewalls Complete  Marcus Gonsalvus, TMH 350
5. Networking Technologies  Jaisal, Galgotia Publication 6. Security in Computer Operating System  G.O.Shea, NCC Blackwell Manchester Oxford 7. Mastering JAVA security: Cryptography, Algorithms and Architecture  Rich Helton, Wiley Dreamtech 8. Implementing IPv6 Mark A. Miller P.E, IDG Books HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING R802 2+1+0 Module1 Introduction to parallel processing  Trends towards parallel processing  Parallelism in uniprocessor  Parallel computer structuresArchitecture classification schemes  Indian contribution to parallel processing. Module 2 Principles of pipelining and vector processing  Linear pipelining  Classification of pipeline processors  General pipelines  Instruction and Arithmetic pipelines –Design of Pipilined instruction unitPrinnciples of Designing Pipeline Processors Instruction prefetch and branch handlingDynamic pipelines  Architecture of Cray1. Module 3 Array processors  SIMD array processors  Interconnection networks  Static vs dynamic networks mesh connected networks  Cube interconnection networks  Parallel algorithms for array processors  SIMD matrix multiplicationParallel sorting on array processors  Associative array processing Memory organization. Module 4 Multiprocessor architectures and Programming  Loosely coupled and Tightly coupled multiprocessors  Interconnection networks  Language features to exploit parallelism  Process synchronisation mechanisms. Module5 Dataflow computers  Data driven computing and Languages  Data flow computers architectures Static data flow computer Dynamic data flow computer Data flow design alternatives. Text Book 1. Computer Architecture & Parallel Processing  Kai Hwang & FayeA.Briggs, McGraw Hill References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Elements of Parallel computing  V. Rajaraman  PHI Super Computers  V. Rajaraman  Wiely arstern Parellel Processing for Super Computers & AI  Kai Hwange & Douglas Degneot Mc Graw Hill Highly parallel computing  George S. Almasi, Allan Gottlieb  Benjamin Cumings Publishers. HIgh Performance Computer Architecture  Harold S. Stone, Addison Wesley. Advanced Computing  Vijay P.Bhatkar, Asok V.Joshi, Arirban Basu, Asok K.Sharma. 351
R803
PRINCIPLES OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES 3+1+0
Module1 Introduction – Role of programming languages  Effects of Environments on languages  Language Design issues  Virtual computers and binding times, Language Paradigms. Module2 Data types  Specification of data types, implementation of elementary data types, Declarations, type checking and type conversion  Assignment and Initialisation  Structured data types  Specification of data structure types, Implementation of data structure type  Declarations and type checking for data structures. Module 3 Abstract data types, Encapsulation by subprogram  Type definition, storage management  Sequence Control  Implicit and Explicit sequence control, sequencing with arithmetic expressions, sequence control between statements. Module 4 Subprogram control  Subprogram sequence control, attributes of data control, Shared data in subprograms  Abstract data types revisited, Inheritance, Polymorphism. Module 5 Advances in Language design  Variations of subprogram control, Parallel programming, Introduction to exception handling  Exception handling in JAVA, Hardware developments, software architecture. Text Book 1. Programming Languages, Design & Implementation  Terrence W. Pratt, Marvin V. Zelkowitz., Pearson Education Asia / Prentice Hall of India Reference 1. Programming Languages  Robert W Sebesta, Pearson EducationAsia ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE RT 804
3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction – Definitions – AI application areas – Example problems Problems and problem spaces  Problem characteristics – Problem solving by searching, Searching strategies – Breadth first search, Uniform cost search, DFS, Depth – Limited search, Bidirectional search – Constraint satisfaction search. Module 2 Informed search, A* algorithm, Heuristic functions – Inventing Heuristic functions  Heuristic for constraint satisfaction problem – Iterative deepening – Hill climbing – Simulated Annealing. Module3 352
Game playing and knowledge structures – Games as search problem – Imperfect decisions – Evaluation functions – Alpha – Beta pruning – state of art game programs, Introduction to frames and semantic nets. Module 4 Knowledge and Reasoning – Review of representation and reasoning with Logic – Inference in first order logic, Inference rules involving quantifiers, modus ponens, Unification, forward and backward chaining – Resolution. Module 5 Introduction to Prolog – Representing facts – Recursive search – Abstract data types – Alternative search strategies – Meta predicates, Matching and evaluation, meta interpreters – semantic nets & frames in prolog. Text Books Module 1,2,3,4 1. Artificial Intelligence – A modern approach, Stuact Russell – Peter Narang, Pearson Education Asia 2. Artificial Intelligence Rich E.  McGraw Hill Booq Company Module 5 3. Artificial Intelligence, George F Luger, Pearson Education Asia References 1. An Introduction to Artificial Intelligence – Eugene Charniak & Drew McDermot, Pearson Education Asia
ELECTIVE  II R805 List of electives 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Note New Electives may be added according to the needs of emerging fields in technology. The name of the elective and its syllabus should be submitted to the university before the course is offered. 353 Advanced Mathematics ClientServer Computing ECommerce Analysis and Modeling of Digital Systems Distributed Computing User Interface Design 3+1+0
ADVANCED MATHEMATICS (ELECTIVE  I) CMELR 8051 3+1+0 Module 1 Green’s Function Heavisides, unit step function – Derivative of unit step function – Dirac delta function – properties of delta function – Derivatives of delta function – testing functions – symbolic function – symbolic derivatives – inverse of differential operator – Green’s function – initial value problems – boundary value problems – simple cases only Module 2 Integral Equations Definition of Volterra and Fredholm Integral equations – conversion of a linear differential equation into an integral equation – conversion of boundary value problem into an integral equation using Green’s function – integral equation with separable Kernels – Integral equations of convolution type – Neumann series solution. Module 3 Gamma, Beta functions Gamma function, Beta function – Relation between them – their transformations – use of them in the evaluation certain integrals – Dirichlet’s integral – Liouville’s extension of Dirichlet’s theorem – Elliptic integral – Error function. Module 4 Power Series solution of differential equation The power series method – Legendre’s Equation – Legendre’s polynomial – Rodrigues formula – generating function – Bessel’s equation – Bessel’s function of the first kind – Orthogonality of Legendre’s Polynomials and Bessel’s functions. Module 5 Numerical solution of partial differential equations. Classification of second order equations Finite difference approximations to partial derivatives – solution of Laplace and Poisson’s equations by finite difference method – solution of one dimensional heat equation by Crank – Nicolson method – solution one dimensional wave equation. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Linear Integral Equation Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York A Course on Integral Equations  Allen C.Pipkin, Springer – Verlag Advanced Engg. Mathematics  H.K.Dass, S.Chand Advanced Engg. Mathematics Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia Numrical methods in Engg. & Science  B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers Generalized functions  R.F. Hoskins, John Wiley and Sons. Principles and Techniques of Bernard Friedman  John Wiley and sons Applied Mathematics Principles of Applied Mathematics James P.Keener, Addison Wesley. Numerical methods  P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy, S.Chand & co CLIENT SERVER COMPUTING (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0 Introduction
RT 8052 Module 1
354
History  uses  Client Server Computing & Hetrogenous Computing  Cross Platform Computing Distributed Computing  The costs of Client Server Computing  Advantages and Disadvantages Client Server Databases. Module 2 Design Fundamentals of client server design  Managing the interaction of client and server Communications Techniques protocols & Client server interaction protocols  Preparing applications for client server  Optimizing applications for client server  Example client server implementations Request acceptance dispatching  Execution of requests  Client server interaction using message. Module 3 Multitasking Multi programming vs multitasking  Processor  Advantages and draw backs of multiple processor Child and parent processor  Case study Novell Netware and Windows NT  Developing server applications  Threads  Server communication model. Module 4 Synchronization Scheduling implementations  processing queues  context switching pre emptive systems  critical sections  mutual exclusion  semaphores  semaphore implementations in NT & Netware. Module 5 Communications Network communication  Inter process communication  Building portable client server applications.
References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Novell's Guide to ClientServer Application & Architecture Jeffrey D.Schqnk, Novell Press. Client Server Computing  Dawna Travis Dewire, McGraw Hill. Developing Client Server Applications  W.H.Inman, BPB. Guide to Client Server Databases  Joe Salemi, BPB. Client Server Strategies David Vaskevitch, Galgotia. ECOMMERCE (ELECTIVE  II) R8053 3+1+0 Module1 Introduction to Electronic Commerce ECommerce Framework, Anatomy of ECommerce Applications, ECommerce Consumer & Organization Applications. E Commerce and World Wide Web – Internet Service Providers, Architectural Framework for Electronic Commerce, WWW as the Architecture, Hypertext publishing. Module 2 Network Security ClientServer Network Security, CS Security Threats, Firewalls, Data & Message Security, Encrypted Documents, Security on the Web. Module 3 Electronic Payment Systems 355
Types of Electronic Payment Systems, Digital Token Based Electronic Payment System, Smart Cards, Credit Cards, Risk in Electronic Payment Systems, Designing Electronic Payment Systems. Module 4 Electronic Data Interchange EDI Application in Business, EDILegal, Security and Privacy Issues, EDI standardization, EDI Envelope for Message Transport, Internet based EDI, Internal Information System, Workflow Automation and Coordination, Supply Chain Management, Document Library, Types of Digital Documents, Corporate Data Warehouses Module 5 Recent Trends in ECommerce Multimedia in ECommerce, Video Conferencing with Digital Videos, Broad Band Telecommunication, Frame & Cell Relays, Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS), Asynchronous Transfer Mode, Mobile Computing and Wireless Computing. Text Book 1. Frontiers of Electronic Commerce  Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B Whinston, Pearson Education Asia References 1. Global Electronic Commerce – J Christopher Westland & Theodore H K Clark 2. E Commerce The cutting edge of Business  Kamlesh K Bajaj & Debjani Nag 3. ECommerce  Strategy, Technologies and Applications, TMH ANALYSIS AND MODELING OF DIGITAL SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0
RT8054
Module1 Introduction to VHDL: Digital system design  Role of hardware description language Modeling digital systems – events, propagation delays and concurrency – waveforms and timing – signal values – shared signals – simulation model – synthesis model – Field Programmable Gate Arrays. Module 2 Basic language concepts simulation: signals – Entity architecture – concurrent statements – Constructing VHDL models using CSAs – delays. Synthesis: Interface from declarations, simple CSA statements, conditional signal assignment statements, and selected signal assignment statements. Module3 Modeling behavior Simulation: The process construct – programming constructs – the wait statement – attributes – generating clocks and periodic waveforms – using signals – modeling state machines – constructing VHDL models – programming errors. Synthesis: language directed view – inference from within process – issues – signals vs. variables – latch vs. flip flop – the wait statement – state machine. Module 4
356
Modeling structure: Describing structure – structural VHDL model – hierarchy, abstraction and accuracy – generics – component instantiation and synthesis – the generate statement subprograms: functions – procedures – sub program and operator overloading – packages and libraries. Module 5 Basic I/O operations – the package TEXTIO – ASSERT statement – terminology and directory structure – simulation mechanics – synthesis mechanics – identifiers – data objects – data types – operators. Text Book 1. Introductory VHDL  Sudhakar Yalamanchili, Pearson Education Asia. References 1. VHDL primer  J Bhaskar, Pearson Education Asia 2. Analysis and modeling of digital systems  Zainalabedin Navabi, McGraw Hill.
DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING (ELECTIVE  II) RT8055 3+1+0 Module I Introduction Introduction to Distributed Systems, evolution, characteristics, design issues, user requirements, Network technologies and protocols – overview, MACH, AMOBEA overview. Module 2 Distributed file system File service components, design issues, interfaces, implementation techniques, Sun Network File System – architecture and implementation, other distributed file systems – AFS, CODA. Name services – SNS name service model. Module 3 Communication in distributed systems Client server communication, Group communication, Message passing – features, synchronizations, RPC – model, implementation, stub generation, messages, marshalling, Server management. Distributed shared memory – Architecture, design issues, structure of shared memory space, replacement strategy, thrashing. Synchronization – clock synchronization, event ordering, mutual exclusion Module 4 Resource and Process management Features of scheduling algorithms, Task assignment approach, load balancing, load sharing, Process migration mechanisms, Threads – scheduling. Module 5 Consistency maintenance Transaction recovery – methods intention lists, Fault tolerance – failures, Byzantine failures. Deadlocks in distributed systems – detection and prevention, centralized and distributed approaches. References 357
1. Distributed Systems – Concepts and designing  George Coulouris, Jean Kindberg  Pearson Education Asia 2. Distributed Operating Systems  Andrew S. Tenenbaum Pearson Education Asia 3. Distributed Operating Systems  Concepts and design  Pradeep. K, Sinha, PHI USER INTERFACE DESIGN (ELECTIVE  II) RT8056 3+1+0
Dellimore,
Tim
Module 1 Introduction Importance of user interface – definition, importance of good design, brief history – Graphical User Interface – Web User Interface – Principles of User interface design. Module 2 Design Process Human Interaction with computers, Importance of Human Characteristics, Human consideration, Human Interaction speeds – Understanding Business function Module 3 Screen Designing Design goals  screen meaning and purpose, organizing screen elements ordering of screen data and content – screen navigation and flow – visually pleasing composition – amount of information – focus and emphasis – presenting information simply and meaningfully – information retrieval on web – Statistical graphics – Technological considerations in Interface Design. Module 4 Windows and components Menus and navigation schemes, selection of windows, Selection of device based and screen based controls  text and messages – icons and images – Multimedia – colours uses, problems, choosing colours. Module 5 Software tools Specification methods, interface building tools Interaction devices: keyboard and function keys  pointing devices speech recognition, digitization and generation – image and video displays – printers. Text Book 1. The Essential Guide to User Interface Design 2nd Edn. – Wilbert O. Galitz, Wiley 2. Designing the User Interface 3rd Edn. – Ben Shneiderman, Pearson Education Asia References 1. Human Computer Interaction – John M. Carroll, Pearson Education Asia 2. The Essentials of User Interface Design  Alan Cooper, Wiley Dreamtech ELECTIVE  III R806 List of electives 358 3+1+0 Dreamtech
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Note
Multimedia Systems Embedded Systems Neural Networks Genetic Algorithms and Applications Advanced Networking Trends Data Processing and Analysis Techniques Biometrics New Electives may be added according to the needs of emerging fields in technology. The name of the elective and its syllabus should be submitted to the university before the course is offered.
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  III) R8061 3+1+0 Module 1 1ntroduction Definition of multimedia, multimedia, hardware, software applications and software environments Media Types  Analog and digital video, digital audio, music and animation  Analog & Digital video  Memory storage  Basic tools  Authoring tools. Module 2 Building Blocks Text  Hyper text  Sound  Sound cards  Standards  Image  Image types  Image compression, RLE, JPEG, MPEG  Fractal and Wavelet Compressions  Image file types  Animation  Capture and Playback techniques. (basic ideas only) Module 3 Multimedia Environments The Compact Disc family, CDinteractive, Digital Video Interactive, QuickTime, Multimedia PC and Microsoft Multimedia Extensions. Module 4 Multimedia Programming Framework: Overview, Media classes, Transform classes, Format classes and Component classes Problems related to programming  Composition, Synchronisation, Interaction, Database integration. Module 5 Advanced Multimedia Moving pictures  Techniques realistic image synthesis, Virtual Reality  Full motion digital video Video capture techniques  multimedia networks  Desktop video conferencing  Future multimedia. References 1. Multimedia Programming Objects, Environments & Framework  Simon J. Gibbs, Dionysios C. Tsischritziz (AddisonWesley Publishing Co.) 2. Multimedia  Making it work  Tay Van Ghan – Osborne  Tata Mcgraw Hill 3. Authoring Interactive multimedia  Arch C Luther 4. Optimizing your Multimedia PC  L.J. Skibbe, Susan Lafe Meister  Comdex 5. Multimedia Bible  Winn L. Rosch, Sams 6. Multimedia Producers Bible  Ron Goldberg, Comdex 7. Multimedia Power Tools  Peter Jellam, Random house Electronic Pub. 8. Multimedia Computing  Mathew E. Hodger & Russel M. Sasnett, Addison wesley 359
9. Integrated Multimedia Systems Overview  Palikom, The communication Wall
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  III) RT8062 3+1+0 Module1 Overview of Embedded System Embedded System, Categories of Embedded System, Requirements of Embedded Systems, Challenges and Issues in Embedded Software Development, Applications of Embedded Systems in Consumer Electronics, Control System, Biomedical Systems, Handheld computers, Communication devices. Module 2 Embedded Hardware & Software Development Environment Hardware Architecture, MicroController Architecture, Communication Interface Standards, Embedded System Development Process, Embedded Operating systems, Types of Embedded Operating systems. Module 3 Embedded Communication System Serial Communication, PCtoPC Communication, Serial Communication with the 8051 Family of Microcontrollers, Protocol Converter, VoiceoverIP, Embedded Applications over Mobile Network example MP3 Sound Player. Module 4 Real Time & Database Applications RealTime Embedded Software Development, Sending a Message over a Serial Link, Simulation of a Process Control System, Controlling an Appliance from the RTLinux System, Embedded Database Applications using examples like Salary Survey, Energy Meter Readings. Module 5 Java Applications & Future Trends in Embedded Systems Networked JavaEnabled Information Appliances, Embedded Process Control System, Mobile Java Applications, Appliance Control using Jini, System on a Chip (SOC), Smart Cards and the Cashless Society, Security in Embedded Systems. Text Book 1. Programming for Embedded Systems Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech Reference 1. Fundamentals of Embedded Software where C and Assembly Meet – Daniel W Lewis. NEURAL NETWORKS (ELECTIVE  III) RT8063 360 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction  Principles  artificial neuron  activation functions  Single layer & multilayer networks  Training artificial neural networks  Perception  Representation  Linear separability Learning  Training algorithms. Module 2 Back Propagation  Training algorithm  Applications  network configurations  Network paralysis Local minima  temporal instability. Module 3 Counter Propagation networks: Kebenon layer  Training the cohenen layer  Pre initialising the wright vectors  statistical properties  Training the Grosbery layer  Full counter propagation network  Application. Module 4 Statistical methods  Boltzmann’s Training  Cauche training  Artificial specific heat methods Applications to general nonlinear optimization problems. Module 5 Hopfield nets  Recurrent networks  stability  Associative memory  applications  Thermo dynamic systems  Statistical Hopfield networks  Bidirectional associative memories  Continous BAM  Adaptive resonance theory  Architecture classification  Implimentation. Text Book 1. Neural Computing Theory & Practice  Philip D. Wasserman. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Neural Networks  Simon Haykins Adaptive Pattern Recognition & Neural Networks  Pay Y.H. An Introduction to neural computing  Chapman & Hall Artificial Neural Networks  Robert J. Schalkoff, McGraw Hill Artificial Neural Networks  B.Yegnanarayana, PHI GENETIC ALGORITHMS AND APPLICATIONS (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
RT8064
Module 1 ArchitectureAltering Operations Introduction, Previous Methods of Determining the Architecture of a MultiPart Program  On the origin of new function ArchitectureAltering operations for Subroutines Automatically Defined Iterations, Loops, Recursion, Storage. SelfOrganization of Hierarchies and Program Architecture Rotating the Tires on an Automobile – Boolean Parity Problem TimeOptimal Robot Control Problem MultiAgent Problem  Using Architecture Altering Operations for Subroutines. Transmembrane Segment Identification Problem using ArchitectureAltering Operations for IterationsFibonacci Sequence Cart Centering. Module 2 Genetic Programming Problem Solver (GPPS) 361
Elements of GPPS 1.0Problems Illustrating GPPS 1.0  Elements of GPPS 2.0  Problems Illustrating GPPS 2.0  Previous Work on Automated Analog Circuit Synthesis. Module 3 Automated synthesis of analog electrical circuits Synthesis of a Lowpass Filter and Highpass Filter The Role of Crossover in Genetic Programming. Module 4 Evolvable Hardware Evolvable Hardware and Rapidly Reconfigurable FieldProgrammable Gate Arrays Discovery of cellular Automata Rules: Discovery of a Cellular Automata Rule for the Majority Classification Problem. Module 5 Programmatic Motifs for molecular Biology Automatic Discovery of Protein Motifs –Programmatic Motifs and the Cellular Location Problem. Parallelization and Implementation Issues: Computer Time Parallelisation of Genetic Programming –Implementation Issues. Text Book 1. Johin R. Koza, Forrest H Bennett III, David Andre, Martin A. Kean, “ Genetic Programming III: Darwinian Invention and Problem Solving”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1999 Reference 1. Genetic Algorithms for VLSI Design, Layout and test Automation  Pinaki Mazumder, Elizabeth M Rudnick (Pearson Education Asia) ADVANCED NETWORKING TRENDS (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
RT8065
Module 1 Ethernet Technology – Frame format – Interface Gap – CSMA/CD – 10 mbps Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Wireless Ethernet – SONET – Sonet multiplexing, Sonet frame structure Module 2 ISDN  Definition  Protocol architecture  System architecture  Transmission channels  ISDN interface, BISDN. Module 3 ATM – ATM Principles – BISDN reference model – ATM layers – ATM adaption Layer – AAL1, AAL2, AAL3/4, AAL5 – ATM addressing – UNI Signaling – PNNI Signalling Module 4 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION: Satellite communication principles  Geo stationary satellites block schematic of satellite earth station  VSAT  VSAT networks  applications in personnel communication. (basic ideas only) Module 5 Wireless Lan – Infrared Vs Radio transmission – Infrastructure & ad hoc n/w – IEEE 802.11 – Hiper Law – Bluetooth – Physical Layer – MAC layer – Networking – Security 362
References Module 1 1. An introduction to Computer Networking  Kenneth C Mansfield, Jr., James L. Antonakos, PHI Module 1,2,3 1. Communication Networks Fundamental Concepts & Key Architecture  LeonGarcia – Widjaja, Tata McGraw Hill 2. Mobile Communication  Jochen Schiller, Pearson Education Asia DATA PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
RT8066
Module 1 Introduction to COBOL programming elements of COBOL divisions, sections and paragraphs Table writing  complete program in COBOL using various options verbs, statements conditional statements. Module 2 Table Handling – Occur clause – PERFORM verb – SET verb, SEARCH verb – Occurs depending clause – Sorting a Table. Module 3 Processing of various file structures in COBOL Language – File description – Fixed Length Record – Statements – Sequential File with variable length record – Sorting and merging of files – Direct access files. Module 4 Data warehousing – Definition – Multidimentional datamodel – OLAP operation – Data warehouse architecture – Warehouse Server – Metadata – OLAP Engine. Module 5 Data mining – Definitions, KDD Vs Data mining, DBMS Vs DM – DM Techniques, Issues and Challenges in DM – DM application areas. References 1. COBOL programming  M K Roy & D Ghosh Dastidar, Tata McGraw Hill 2. Data mining Techniques  Arun K Pujari (Universal Press) 3. Data mining Concepts and Techniques  Jawei Han & Micheline Kamber (Morgan Kunfmann Pub.) 4. Data Mining  Pieter Adriaans, Dolf Zantinge, Person Education Asia 5. Structured COBOL Programming  E. Rajasekar & S.Selvi (Anuradha Agencies) 6. Structured COBOL A. S. Philippakis & Leonard, J. Kazmier (Tata McGraw Hill) BIOMETRICS (ELECTIVE III) RT8067 3+1+0 Module 1
363
Introduction – Benefits of biometric security – verification and identification – basic working of biometric matching – accuracy – false match rate – false nonmatch rate – failure to enroll rate – derived metrics – layered biometric solutions Module 2 Finger scan – features – components – operation (steps) – competing finger scan technologies – strength and weakness Facial scan  features – components – operation (steps) – competing facial scan technologies – strength and weakness Module 3 Iris scan  features – components – operation (steps) – competing iris scan technologies – strength and weakness Voice scan  features – components – operation (steps) – competing facial scan technologies – strength and weakness Module 4 Other physiological biometricsHandscanretina scan AFIS (automatic fingerprint Identification systems)Behavieral BiometricsSignature scanKey stroke Scan. Module 5 Biometrics Application – Biometric Solution MatrixBioprivacyComparison of privacy factor in different biometrics technologiesDesigning privacy sympathetie biometric systemsBiometric standards (BioAPI, BAPI)Biometric middleware. Reference 1. Biometrics Identify Verification in a Networked World  Samir Nanavati, Michael Thieme, Raj Nanavati WILEYdreamtech GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA LAB R807 0+0+4
Point plotting, line and circle drawing, Line and Polygon clipping, transformations, hidden line elimination, curves, polygon hatching, Multimedia programming, Visual programming, Animation Any experiment according to the syllabus of R702 Computer Graphics may be substituted
PROJECT & SEMINAR R709/ R808 0+0+4 Each student is required to present a technical paper on subject approved by the department. The paper should in general reflect the state of the art. He/ She submits a report of the paper to the department. 364
In addition to the seminar He/She shall undertake a project work in the 7 th semester itself in consultation with the guide(s). On completion of the project work, He/She shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work done to the department. VIVA VOCE R809 A comprehensive Vivavoce examination will be conducted to assess the students overall knowledge in the specified field of engineering. At the time of Vivavoce, certified report of seminar, mini project and project work are to be presented for evaluation.
365
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
POLYMER ENGINEERING BRANCH
366
THIRD SEMESTER
367
MATHEMATICS – II ENGINEERING CMELPA 301 3+1 Module 1 Vector Differential Calculus Differentiation of vector functions  scalar and vector fields – gradient, divergence and curl of a vector function – their physical meaning – directional derivative – scalar potential, conservative fields – identities – simple problems. Module 2 Vector Integral Calculus Line, surface and volume Integrals – work done by a force along a path – Application of Green’s theorem, Stokes theorem and Gauss divergence theorem. Module 3 Function of Complex Variable Definition of analytic functions and singular points – derivation of C.R. equations in Cartesian coordinates – harmonic and orthogonal properties – construction of analytic function given real or imaginary parts – complex potential – conformal transformation of function like zn, ez, 1/z, sin z, z+k2/z – bilinear transformation – cross ratio – invariant property – simple problems. Module 4 Finite Differences Meaning of ∆ , ∇ , E, µ , δ  interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula – central differences – problems using Stirling’s formula, Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided difference formula for unequal intervals. Module 5 Difference Calculus Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences – Numerical integration – Newton – Cote’s formula – trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8th rule – simple problems. Difference equations – Solution of difference equations. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Grawal B.S., Higher Engg. Mathematics, Khanna Publishers. M.K.Venkataraman, Numerical Methods in science & Engg., National Publishing Co. S.Balachandra Rao and G.K.Shantha, Numerical Methods, University press. Michael D.Greenberg, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, PrenticeHall. M.R.Spiegel, Theory and Problems of Vector analysis, McGraw – Hill.
368
HUMANITIES P302 3+1 Part A: HISTORY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY Module 1 Early Developments and Middle Period:Contributions of Indian, Chinese, Greek and Roman Civilizations to science and technology. The dark ages of science in Europe. Technology transfer from east to west, the role of Arabs. Module 2 Renaissance and the Early Modern Period:Flowering of Europian Technology, the fall of the Aristotelian universe and the beginning of modern science. Industrial revolution and its impact on Science, the historical development of prime movers, progress in steel making, the birth and growth of different branches of Engineering. The characteristic trends in 20th century science, comparison with the 19th century approach. Theories of life and universe, science and religion. Module 3 Modern Trends in Technology:Developments in communication, transport and power engineering. Science in agriculture, the computer and space exploration. Integration of Science, technology and society, Science as agent of social change, Resource depletion and pollution. The urban problem and the social cost of progress, Limits to growth. Science and Technology in developing countries, Problems of technology transfer, Role of small scale and village industries, Gandhian approach to technology, Concept of appropriate technology. Part B: ECONOMICS Module 4 The basic economic problem, definitions, nature of economics and its laws. Economic Systems, Capitalism, Socialism and Mixed Economy. Theory of demand and supply, marginal utility theory, law of demand, elasticity, factors of production, cost of production, supply curves. Module 5 Theory of value, value and price, determination of market price and output under perfect competition and monopoly. Distribution, marginal productivity, theory of distribution, rent, wages, interest and profit. Money and banking, Classification of money, inflation, types of banks, their functions, credit creation. Public economics, Revenue, Taxation, Expenditure. National income, macro economic approach, GNP, MNP, NI, DI, PI, methods of calculation of national income. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. P 303 Module 1 369 History of Science and Technology : R.V.G.Menon A History of Technology : C.Singar Science in Technology : J.D.Bernal Science and Human Values : J.Brownoskyi Elements of Economics : Paul A.V. A Text Book of Modern Economics : Abuja K.I.H.L. Principles of Economics : Sundaram and Waish COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 3+1
Computer fundamentals, classification, mainframe, mini and microcomputers, block schematic of personal computers. Concept of software and hardware. Introduction to PC operating systems, DOS and WINDOWS, Programming languages, classification, machine language, assembly language and high level language. Program development. Flow charts and algorithms. Compilers, assemblers. Module 2 C Programming, Introduction to C programming language, compilation of C programs. Structure of a C program, syntax of C language, input, output statements. Fundamental data types, variables, identifiers, keywords, operator precedence and associativity, arithmetic expressions. Simple exercise, Loop statementsfor, while, dowhile. Decision statementsif, nested if, switch statements, break and continue statements. Module 3 Arrays & Structures, single and multidimensional arrays, character arrays and its initializations. String and its initializations, Functionsconcept, function declaration and calling. Arguments and local variables, parameter passing methods in C function, concept of recursive functions. Declaration and initialisation of structure variables. Array of structures and nested structures. Example programs using structures, unions. Module 4 Pointers, concept of pointers in C, declaration of pointer variables, use of pointers in arrays, functions and structures. Example programs using pointers, filessequential and random files, file type specification, creating a data file, file operators. References 1. Programming in C 2. Let us C 3. Pointers in C 4. Programming with C : : : : E Balaguruswamy Y.P.Kannetkar Y.P.Kannetkar Bryan.S.Gottfried,Tata McGrawHill
POLYMER SCIENCE  I P304 3+1 Module 1 Importance in everyday life, classification, examples for natural, synthetic, homo polymer, copolymer, inorganic and biopolymers, structure of linear, branched, ladder, crosslinked and network polymers, homochain and heteroatomic chain polymers, nomenclature, functionality of monomers, Bifunctional systems, poly functional systems, polymerisability Module 2 Number average, weight average, viscosity average, z average molecular weights, molecular weight distribution, polydispersity index, simple numerical problems to illustrate average molecular weight, basic principles of the following methods: end group analysis, colligative property measurements, osmometry, vapour phase osmometry, light scattering, ultracentrifugation, viscometry and gel permeation chromatography, Staudinger Index Module 3 Addition polymerization, mechanism and kinetics of free radical, cationic & anionic polymerization, free radical initiators, chain length and degree of polymerisation, control of molecular weight, 370
inhibition, autoacceleration, chain transfer, coordination polymerisation, mechanism, kinetics, Ziegler Natta catalysts, ring opening polymerization, diene polymerization. Module 4 Basics of condensation polymerisation, Carother’s equation, gelation, Copolymerization, different types of copolymers, monomer reactivity ratio, copolymer equation. Polymerisation techniques, bulk, solution, suspension, emulsion and interfacial polymerisation References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F.W. Billmeyer, Textbook of Polymer Science, Wiley international publishers, 1984. Joel R. Fried, Polymer science and Technology, Prentice Hall, NJ, 1995 J.M.G. Cowie, Polymers: Chemistry and Physics of Modern Materials, Blackie, London, 1991. R.J. Young and P.Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, 2nd Ed., Chapman & Hall, 1991. Premamoy Ghosh, Polymer Science and Technology of Plastics and Rubbers, Tata McGraw  Hill, New Delhi, 1990. 6. H.R. Allcock and F.W. Lampe, “ Contemporary Polymer Chemistry”, Prentice Hall 1981. 7. F.W.Billmeyer, “ Text Book of Polymer Science”, Wiley Interscience, 1971. 8. F.Rodrigues, “ Principles of Polymer systems”, Mc Graw Hill, 1970 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY P 305 3+1 Module 1 Chemical bonding and molecular structure, electronic effects in organic molecules, inductive, mesomeric and hyperconjugation effects, acids and bases, reactive intermediates in organic chemistry carbocations, carbanions, free radicals, carbenes and nitrenes. Module 2 Organic reaction mechanisms, introduction. Substitution and Elimination reactions: detailed study of SN1, SN2, SNi, SN1’, SN2’ and borderline mechanisms. Nucleophilicity and basicity, leaving group effects, solvent effects, neighboring group participation. Detailed study of elimination reactions (E 1, E2, and E1cb mechanisms), substitution vs. elimination. Rearrangement Reactions: common rearrangements in organic chemistry, rearrangement of carbocations, nonclassical carbocations. Catalysis by acid & bases, Lewis acid catalysis, Phase transfer catalysis and applications of crown ethers. Methods of determination of organic reaction mechanisms. Module 3 Isomerism of organic compounds: isomerism, definition and classification, molecular representation, stereo isomerism, conformation, configuration, chirality and optical activity, stereocentre, racemisation and methods of resolution, chiral synthesis, optical purity and enantiomeric excess, configurational nomenclature, D, L, R and S, determination of configuration, geometrical isomerism, E/Z notation, interconversion of geometrical isomers, conformational analysis of acyclic and cyclic molecules, rotation about bonds, concepts of dihedral angle, torsional strain, optical rotatory dispersion and circular dichroism. Module 4
371
Organic Spectroscopy: principles and applications of UV, IR, NMR, ESR spectroscopic techniques for the structure elucidation of organic compounds, problem solving approach. Recent advances in NMR techniques, 13C–NMR, 2 dimensional NMR spectroscopy. References 1. Morrison & Boyd, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall. New Delhi, 6th edition,1992 2. B.S.Bahl and Arun Bhal, Advanced Organic Chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 15th edition, 1998 3. I.L.Finar, Textbook of Organic Chemistry, ELBS, 5th edition, 1996, 4. Jerry March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, New york, 1992
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING MP306 3+1 Module 1 Stress and strain  Bars of varying cross  sections – composite sections  temperature stresses. Principal stresses and planesMohr's circle representation of plane stress. Module 2 Shear force and bending moments Cantileversimply supported and overhanging beamsconcentrated and U. D. loadings analytical method. Relation between load. SF and BM. Theory of simple bending bending and shear stress distribution rectangular, circular and 1sections. Module 3 Slope and deflection of simply supported beams and cantilevers Double integration Macaulay's Methodmoment area method conjugate beam method. Module 4 Torsion of circular shaftssolid and hollow shafts power transmitted by shafts. Closecoiled and open coiled spring leaf spring. Thin cyliders and jhick cylinders subjected to internal and external pressures compound pipes wire wound pipesstrain energyaxial loads, gradually and suddenly applied loadimpact loads. Module 5 Columns and sturts short and long columnsEuler's theoryRan kine's theory  Eccentrically Loaded columnscolumn with initial curvature. General description only of simple and compound steel, beams, columns and column foundationprinciple of reinforced concrete. Reinforcements detailing in R. C. Slabs, beams, columns & footings (No problem expected) References 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1. Timoshenko.S.P, Strength of Materials, Part 1,D.Van Nostrand company, Inc.Newyork. Popov E.P., Engineering Mechanics of solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Deihi. 3. Punmia B.C, Strength of Materials and Mechanics of structures, Vol 1,Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi. Vazirani V.N., Ratwani N. M, Analysis of Structures, Vol 1, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. Kazimi S.M.A., Solid Mechanics, Tata Mc Graw Hill. William A Nash, Strength of Materials, Mc Graw Hill. Ryder G.H., Strength of Materials, ELBS. 372
8. P 307
Arthur Morley, Strength of Materials, ELBS, Longman’s Green& Company. CHEMISTRY LAB 0+3
A. Organic synthesis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Synthesis of ethyl n butyl acetoacetate by the acetoacetatic ester condensation Synthesis of 3nitrobenzoic acid from benzoic acid Nitration of aromatic hydrocarbons. Side chain oxidation of aromatic hydrocarbons. Benzoylation of phenols. Preparation of solid esters. Bromination of amines. Purification and characterization of organic compounds 1. Purification (fractional crystallization, fractional distillation, chromatography) and separation of the components of a binary organic mixture (liquidliquid, liquidsolid and solidsolid) using chemical analysis and IIR and NMR spectral data. 2. Identify the components of the given binary mixture. 3. Checking the purity of the separated components on TLC plates.
373
COMPUTER LAB P 308 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Familiarisation of DOS commands and WINDOWS. Simple C programs with control statements and loops. Programs handling onedimensional array. Programs handling multidimensional array Programs using a simple function. Functions having arguments. Recursive functions. Programs handling structures. Programs using pointers. Programs involving files. A simple graphic program. 0+3
374
FOURTH SEMESTER
375
MATHEMATICS – III ENGINEERING CMELRPTA 401 3+1 Module 1 Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficents  Finding P.I. by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchys equations  Linear Simultaneous eqnssimple applications in engineering problems. Module 2 Partial Differential Equations: Formation by eliminating arbitary constants and arbitary Functions  solution of Lagrange Linear Equations – Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave equation. Module 3 Fourier Transforms: Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine & Cosine transforms  inverse transforms  transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no proof) – Parsevals Identity  simple problems. Module 4 Probability and statistics: Binomial law of probability  The binomial distribution, its mean and variance  Poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution  its mean and variance fitting of binomial & Poisson distributions  normal distribution  properties of normal curve standard normal curve  simple problems in binomial, Poisson and normal distributions. Module 5 Population & Samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) –Sampling distribution of variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance  Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – Test of significance for single proportion, difference proportion, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected). References 1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers. 2. M.K. Venkataraman, Engineering Mathematics Vol. II 3rd year Part A & B, National Publishing Company. 3. Ian N.Sneddon, Elements of Partial Differential Equations,Mc Graw Hill International Edn. 4. Richard A Johnson, Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers, Pearson Education Asia / PHI. 5. Bali and Iyengar, A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II), Laxmi Publications Ltd. 6. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 7. Hogg and Tanis, Probability and statistical inferences, Pearson Education Asia.
376
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING P 402 3+1 Module 1 Introduction, concepts of classes and objects, encapsulation and inheritance, building classes, declaring objects, member functions, constructors and destructors, member access controlprivate, public, protected. Inheritance and access control, extending classes, multiple inheritance Module 2 Polymorphism, virtual methods, definition, usage of virtual methods, abstract classes, simulation using abstract classes, overloading methods, operator overloading, selecting friend or member functions for operator overloading Module 3 Dynamic objects, dynamic object allocation, using references with dynamic memory allocations, inline functions outside class definitions. Case studyC++. Module 4 Concepts of Windows programming, GUI, visual programming concepts, active X concepts, fundamentals of MFC, concepts of DLL, DAO and ODBC. References 1. Data abstraction and OOP in C++ 2. Object Oriented Programming with C++ 3. C++ 4. Object Oriented Programming with C++ 5. Programming Windows 95 6. Visual C++ Programming 7. Visual Basic from the group UP Gordenkeeth Wiley Eastern E. Balaguruswamy, Tata Mc. Graw Hill Strostroup Nabajyothy Bjarne Charles Petzold, Microsoft Press Yashwanth Kaneethkar, BPB Cary Cornessl, Tata Mc. Graw Hill
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LP 403 3+1 Module 1 Basic Principles of Electric Machines concept of motoring and generating action, DC generator, characteristics, working, load test, DC motor, characteristics,, load test, speed control, field control, armature control, basic principles, applications. Module 2 Transformers: Transformer action, EMF equation, step up and step down transformer, load test, calculation of efficiency, design of typical step down transformers like 280/606V, 230/909 V, 280/12012 V for inverters and rectifiers. Auto and three phase transformers, basic principles of current transformers (no analysis) basic principles of servo stabilizer.
377
Module 3 A C Machines; Basic principles of operation of synchronous and induction motor characteristics (no analysis), starting of induction motors, starters, single phase induction motor, constructional features, types, working and characteristics only (no analysis). Module 4 Special Machines AC&DC servo motors, synchros constructional features, working of tacho generators, stepper motor, construction working, applications& specifications of stepper motors, universal motors, constructional features, typical applications, criteria for selection of motors, electromagnetic relays, AC&DC contactors. Module 5 Batteries: Dry cells, secondary cells, lead acid cells, charging and discharging characteristics, Ampere hour rating of batteries, construction of button cells, lithium batteries, specifications chargeable batteries, battery charging circuits, Maintenance of batteries, characteristics of nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride, and lithium ion batteries, used for pagers and cellular phones, concept of UPS, block schematic of UPS, fields of applications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Electrical Technology Electrical Machines Electrical Design Estimating And Costing Electrical machines and Power systems Electric Engineers Hand Book B.L.Thereja R.K. Rajput K.B. Raina & Bhattacharya Vincent Del Toro Donald G. Fink
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING  I P 404 3+1 Module 1 Fluidsnature of fluids, ideal fluid, real fluid, physical properties of fluids, density, specific weight, compressibility, surface tension, viscosity, capillarity, pressure, Pascal’s law, measurement of fluid pressure, piezometer, bourden pressure gauge, simple manometer, differential manometer. Module 2 Fluid flow phenomenaclassification of flow, steady and unsteady state flow, uniform and non uniform flow, laminar and turbulent flow, isothermal and adiabatic flow, rotational and irrotational flow, critical velocity, Reynolds number, Bernoulli’s theorem, measurement of fluid flow, pitot tube, orificemeter, venturimeter, rotameter. Module 3 Centrifugal pumpstypes of casings, piping system, work done, efficiency, discharge, velocity diagrams, characteristic curves, NPSH, cavitation, priming. Reciprocating pumps, discharge, slip, power required, indicator diagram. Module 4 Thermodynamics fundamental concepts and definitions, types of thermodynamic systems and properties, closed, open and isolated systems, intensive and extensive properties, path functions and state functions, zeroth law of thermodynamics, first law applied to non flow process, formulation of first law, enthalpy, heat capacity, specific heat, second law of thermodynamics, KelvinPlank 378
statement, Clausius statement, third law of thermodynamics, entropy changes and irreversibility, Gibb’s free energy, work function, Maxwell’s equations, Clapyeron equation, GibbsDuhem equation, fugacity and activity of pure fluids. References 1. Engineering Thermodynamics, Nag 2. Introduction to chemical engineering thermodynamics, J.M Smith, Tata McGrawHill publishing company, New Delhi 3. Fluid Mechanics, Jagadish Lal 4. Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics, P.N Modi 5. Fluid Mechanics, S.K Modi POLYMER PHYSICS P405 3+1 Module 1 Stress, engineering stress, true stress, strain, engineering strain, true strain, Poisson’s ratio, elastic solid, Hooke’s Law, viscous fluid, Newton’s law, viscoelastic materials, difference in the response of elastic solid, viscous fluid and viscoelastic materials under static and dynamic conditions, modulus, Young’s modulus, compression modulus, bulk modulus, compliance, factors affecting viscoelasticity, short term and long term properties, stress strain curves, hysteresis, tangent modulus, secant modulus, proportionality limit Module 2 Mechanical models, spring, dashpot, Maxwell, Voigt, MaxwellWeichert, Burger, generalised equations for these models, equations for creep and stress relaxation, Deborah number, timetemperature equivalence principle, Boltzmann superposition principle, simple numerical problems based on these principles, dynamic mechanical properties, storage modulus, loss modulus, tan δ , damping. Module 3 Rubber elasticity, molecular requirements of rubberlike elasticity, energy driven and entropy driven elasticity, thermoelastic experiment, GoughJoule effect, thermodynamic treatment of rubbers, statistical mechanical theory. Module 4 Newtonian fluids and nonNewtonian fluids, Power law, shear rate dependent fluids, psuedoplasticity, dilatancy, time dependent fluids, thixotropy, rheopexy, rheological measurements, plasticity, plasticity retention index, curing characteristics, scorch time, induction time, cure time, oscillating disc rheometers. capillary rheometer, entrance and exit effects, Rabinowitsch correction, cone and plate viscometer, Mooney viscometer, melt flow index, elastic effects in polymer melt flow, die swell, elastic turbulence, melt fracture, shark skin, draw down. References 1. David J. Williams, Polymer Science and Engineering, Maclaren and Sons, Newyork1978 2. H.F. Haufman and J.J. Falcetta, Introduction to Polymer science and Technology, S P E Text Book, John Wiley & Sons NewYork 1997 379
3. 4. 5. 6.
J. D. Ferry, Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers, John Wiley & Sons NewYork 1971 A.V. Tobolsky, Properties & structure of polymers, John Wiley & Sons NewYork 1960. R.J.Samuels, Structured Polymer Properties, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1974. J. A. Brydson, Flow Properties of Polymer Melts POLYMER SCIENCE  II
P 406
3+1
Module 1 Amorphous state, molecular motion, first order and second order transitions, Tg, Tm, factors affecting Tg, secondary transitions, free volume, kinetic, and thermodynamic views of glass transition, factors influencing glass transition temperature, crystalline state, crystal systems, unit cells, primitive cell, Bravais lattices, polymorphism, polymer single crystals, lamellae, spherulites, supermolecular structures, fringed micelle model, degree of crystallinity, factors affecting crystallinity, Xray diffraction, copolymers, linear and cyclic arrangement. Module 2 Polymer solutions, terms and definitions, types of solutions, Hildebrand approach, Flory Huggins theory, thermodynamic view of miscibility, upper critical solution temperature (UCST), lower critical solution temperature (LCST), concentration regimes in polymer solutions, theta conditions. Module 3 Chemical reactivity of linear and crosslinked polymers, hydrolysis, acidolysis, aminolysis, hydrogenation, addition and substitution reactions, cross linking reactions, reactivity of functional groups, polymer analogous reactions, polymer bound reagents, chain end and random degradation, degradation by oxygen, ozone, heat, UV light, microorganism, crazing, weathering, stabilisation to prevent degradation. Module 4 Effect of polymer structure on dielectric constant, capacitance, dielectric loss, power factor, dissipation factor and loss factor, prediction of molar polarization and effective dipole moment, effect of additives on electrical properties of polymers, effect of polymer structure on optical properties, clarity, transparency, haze, transmittance, reflectance, gloss, prediction of refractive indices of polymers by group contributions. References 1. Paul C. Painter and Michael M. Coleman, Fundamentals of Polymer Science, Technomic Publishing Co. Inc., Lancaster, USA, 1994. 2. Ulf W. Gedde, Polymer Physics, Chapman & Hall, 1995. 3. D.W. Van Krevelen And P.J. Hoftyzen, “Properties Of Polymer, 3rd Edition Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company Amsterdam – Oxford – Newyork. 1990. 4. J.E. Mark Ed.AIP, Physical Properties Of Polymers Hand Book, Williston, Vt, 1996. 5. D.A.Seanor, ed., Electrical properties of polymers, Acadamic press, Newyork, 1982. 6. Jozef.Bicerano, Prediction Of Polymer Properties, Second Edition, Marcel Dekker Inc. Newyork, 1995. 7. I.M.Ward & D.W.Hadley, An Introduction to the Mechanical Properties of Solid Polymers, John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, England, 1993.
380
P407
POLYMER PREPARATION AND CHARACTERISATION LAB 0+3
1. Synthesis of the following Polymers: Polymethyl methacrylate, Polyacrylamide, Regenerated Cellulose, PhenolFormaldehyde Resin (Novolak and Resol), Polystyrene, Polyurethanes and glyptal Resins, UreaFormaldehyde and MelamineFormaldehyde. 2. Quantitative estimation of the following monomers: Aniline, Phenol, Acetone, Ethyl Acetate, Formaldehyde, Acrylonitrile, Urea, Glycol, Methyl methacrylate 3. Determination of molecular weight by viscosity method. ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB P 408 0+3 A total of 8 experiments (4 from Group A and 4 from Group B) out of 16 suggested below may be done in the laboratory. GROUP A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. O.C.C and Load test on DC generator. Load test on DC shunt motor. Load test on Single phase induction motor. Load test on 3phase cage induction motor. Load test on 3phase slip ring induction motor. Load test on single phase transformer. Load test on 3phase alternator – regulation at different power factor – Demonstration of terminal voltage control. GROUP B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Characteristics of diode and Zener diode. Halfwave and fullwave rectifier – study of wave forms and regulations. Transistor biasing – assemble CE amplifier – study input and output Waveforms. Assemble RC phase shift oscillator – study waveforms. Study of SCR – assemble single phase controlled rectifier – study phase control. Operational amplifier circuit – adder, integrator. Study of logic gates – AND, OR, INVERTER, NAND, NOR, Half adder and full adder using NAND gates.
381
FIFTH SEMESTER
382
MATHEMATICS – IV ENGINEERING CMELPA 501 3+1 Module 1 Complex Integration: Line Integral –Cauchy’s integral theorem Cauchy’s integral formulaTaylor’s seriesLaurent’s series zeros and singularities Residues residue theoremEvaluation of real integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semicircle. Module 2 Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection methodRegula falsi method  Newton –Raphson method – solution of system of linear equations by Jacobi’s iteration method and GaussSiedel method. Module 3 Numerical solution of ordinary differential equation: Taylor’s series method Euler’s method – Modified Eulers method Runge – Kutta method (IV order)Milne’s predictor corrector method. Module 4 Z – Transforms: Definition of Z transform properties –Z transform of polynomial functions – trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property inverse transform – solution of 1st & 2nd order difference equations with constant coefficients using Z transforms. Module 5 Linear programming: graphical solution – solution using simplex method (non – degenerate case only) – BigM method, two phase method  Duality in L.P.P. Balanced T.P. – Vogels approximation method – Modi method. References 1. Ervin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley Eastern limited. 2. Dr. B.S.Grewal, Numerical methods in Engineering & Science, Kanna Publishers. 3. Dr. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Kanna Publishers. 4. Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, Numerical methods in Science & Engineering, National Publishing Company. 5. P.C.Tulsian & Vishal Pandey, Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems, Pearson Education Asia. 6. Churchill and Brown, Complex variables and applications, McGrawHill. 7. Panneer Selvam, Operations research, PHI. 8. S Arumugam, A.T.Isaac & A Somasundaram, Engineering Mathematics Vol. III, Scitech publications 9. T.K.M.Pillai, G.Ramanaigh & S.Narayanan, Advanced Mathematics for Engg. Students Vol. III S.Vishwananthan printers & publishers.
383
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING  II P502 3+1 Module 1 Modes of heat transferconduction and Fourier law, thermal conductivity, steady state conduction through single resistance and compound resistances in series, heat flow through a cylinder, unsteady state heat conduction, equation for one dimensional conduction. Module 2 Convectionnatural and forced convection, individual and overall heat transfer coefficients, factors influencing heat transfer coefficients, evaluation of heat transfer coefficients, calculation of overall coefficients from individual coefficients, resistance form of overall coefficients, cocurrent and counter current flows, logarithmic mean temperature difference, evaluation of heat transfer coefficients, fouling factors, analogy between heat and momentum transfer, significance of Prandtl number, Reynolds’s and Colburn analogies. Regimes of heat transfer in fluids, Graetz number, Peclet number, Nusselt number, Sieder Tate equation, Coulburn equation. Module 3 Heat exchange equipmentsdouble pipe heat exchangers, shell and tube heat exchangers, parallel and counter flow heat exchanger, single pass 11 exchanger, 12 exchanger, 24 exchanger, enthalpy balances in heat exchangers, temperature pattern in multipass exchangers, heat transfer coefficients in shell and tube heat exchangers, correction of LMTD for crossflow, plate type exchangers, condensers, shell and tube condensers, kettle type boilers, extended surface equipment. Module 4 EvaporationTypes of evaporators, single effect evaporators, performance of evaporators, capacity, economy, boiling point elevation, Diirhring’s rule, enthalpy balances for single effect evaporators, calculation of heat transfer area, multiple effect evaporators, methods of feeding. References 1. Introduction to chemical engineering, Tata McGrawHill publishing company, New Delhi, Badger 2. Unit operations in chemical engineering, Tata McGraw  Hill publishing company, New Delhi, Mc Cabe & Smith 3. Heat transmission, Mc Dams, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company, New Delhi,
384
PLASTICS  SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY P 503 3+1 Module 1 Advantages and disadvantages of plastics, monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of LDPE, HDPE, cross linked and chlorinated PE, PP and PS Module 2 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PVC, polyvinilidine chloride, PVA, polyvinylacetate, PMMA and PAN Module 3 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PU, PTFE, PVF, ABS, PC, polyacetal, polyester, SAN, epoxies, PF, novolac, resol, MF and UF Module 4 Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of nylon5, 6, 66, 612 and polyacrylamide References 1. K.J. Saunders, “Organic Polymer Chemistry, Chapman and Hall “, London.1973. 2. J.A. Brydson, “ Plastic materials”, Newnes Butterworths. 3. Encyclopaedia of Polymer Science and Technology. RUBBERS  SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY P 504 3+1 Module 1 Natural rubber, source, chemical formula, molecular weight distribution, crystallisation, structure property relationship, chemical reactivity, electrical and oxidation properties, anti degradants, strength of rubbers. Various forms of natural rubber, crumb, sheet, crepe, SP rubber, DPNR, LNR, liquid rubber, classes of liquid elastomers, telechilic polymers, powdered rubber. Module 2 Vulcanisation, chemical and physical aspects, curing characteristics such as scorch time, induction time, cure time, mechanism of crosslinking by different crosslinking agents, sulphur, sulphur monochloride, nitrosourethane, diazo esters, phenolic resins, metal oxide, diamines, peroxides, oximes, batch and continuous vulcanisation. Different curing systems, EV, semi EV, conventional and sulphur less cure, assessment of state of cure, vulcanisation techniques, press cure, autoclave, hot air, cold and hot water, fluidised bed, molten salt bath, drum curing, radiation, microwave curing. Module 3 IR, BR, IIR, SBR, NBRsynthesis of monomers, polymerisation, structure, chemical properties, crosslinking by different methods, oxidation and ageing, different types of CR, halogenation of IIR, characterisation, crosslinking, compare the oxidation properties of saturated and unsaturated rubbers, antioxidants, antiozonant. Module 4 385
Monomers, preparation, synthesis of polymers, structure, properties and application of the following rubbers. Ethylene based rubbers, chlorosulphonated polymers, fluorine containing rubbers, nitrosofluoro elastomers, phosphonitrillic elastomers, poly(thiocarbonyl fluoride) and related elastomers. Acrylic rubbers, oil resistant rubbers, polyvinylether elastomers, polysulphide rubber, silicone rubbers, polyalkenamers, polynorbornene, polyurethane, thermoplastic rubbers, polycarbonate rubbers. References 1. 2. 3. 4. J.A. Brydson, Rubber Chemistry, allied Science publishers, London, 1978. M.Morton, Rubber Technology, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1987. J.A. Brydson, Rubber Materials and Their Compounds Elsevier, 1988. A.Whelan and K.S. Lee, Developments in Rubber Technology (Vol. IIV) Applied Science Publishers. LATEX TECHNOLOGY P 505 3+1 Module 1 Natural latex, preservation, synthetic lattices and their blends, principles of latex compounding, deammoniation of latex, vulcanising agents, accelerators, antioxidants, fillers, dispersing and emulsifying agents, stabilisers, thickening agents, and other miscellaneous additives, special ingredients, preparation of dispersions and emulsions, latex compounding. Module 2 Fundamental latex characteristics, particle size and distribution, stability and destabilisation, coacervation, viscosityconcentration relationship, surface free energy and wetting behaviour, zeta potential, electrical properties of colloidal system, thermal movement of molecules, Brownian motion. Latex concentration methods, concentrated latex, significance of specification limits, test methods, total solids, dry rubber content, total alkalinity, coagulum content, sludge content, pH, KOH number, mechanical stability time, VFA number, surface tension, redox potential changes, degradation leading to acid formation, zinc oxide stability, stability tests, volatile fatty acids. Module 3 Manufacture of rubber goods from lattices and from solid elastomers, a comparison, impregnation, spreading, fabric proofing and coating. Rubber textile composite products, latex bonded fibrous structures, coir foam, latex treated rugs and carpet backing, latex application to paper. Dipping Methods, straight dipping, dipping with porous formers, coagulant dipping, heated formers, drying, surface treatments, extraction of surface soluble materials, vulcanisation, compounding of latex, manufacture of dipped goods like rubber band, surgeons gloves, household gloves, dipped fabric gloves, balloon, nipples, prophylactics. Module 4 Latex foam processing methods, ammonia content of latex, compounding, mechanical frothing by beating, vulcanisation, washing, and drying, gelling, gelling systems, merits and demerits of gelling systems. Continuous foam production, typical latex compounds for foam production. Latex casting, principles, production of hollow articles, solid articles, use of porous moulds in casting, manufacture of rubber thread, latex cement and adhesives, latex paints, protective coatings, chewing gum, use of latex in roads rubberisation. References 386
1. 2. 3. 4.
D. C. Blackley, High Polymer Latices, Vol I&II, Maclaren & Sons, London Madge, Latex Foam Rubber, Maclaren & Sons Ltd; 1982 Mausser, Vanderblit Latex Handbook, 3rd edition, Pub.R.T.Vanderbilt Co. Inc., U.S.A. 1987 Dipped goods, J. of Rubber Developments, V 25, pp.12141972 POLYMER PROCESSING  I
P 506
3+1
Module 1 Compounding ingredients, plasticisers, extenders, factice, stabilizers, fillers, antioxidants, antiozonants, UV absorbers, flame retardants, mould release agents, colorants, and other special additives, vulcanizing agents, activators, accelerators, peptiser, retarders, tackifying agents, blowing agents, bonding agents, fragrances, antistatic agents. Module 2 Compound development, factors to be considered for compound development, formulation of a mix, compounding for specific applications, ozone resistance, heat resistance, weather, resistance, oil resistance, radiation resistance, ermeability, medical, liquid resistance, low temperature resistance, electrical applications and opticalapplications. Module 3 Compounding, different methods, principles of mixing, dispersive and distributive mixing, mastication, tworoll mill mixing, internal mixers, comparison between open mill and internal mixer, Banbury mixing, Brabender plasticorder, continuous mixing, master batching. Module 4 Plastics processing techniques, compression moulding, typesflash, positive and semipositive, compression moulding cycle, troubleshooting, equipment for moulding of thermoplastics, moulding of thermosets and rubber, automatic compression moulding. Transfer moulding, transfer moulding cycle, advantages, limitations, theoretical and design consideration, general mould design consideration, troubleshooting. References 1. D.V. Rosato Kluwer, Injection moulding hand book.  Academic Publishers Boston 2nd edtion 1995. 2. Richard C. Progelhof James. L. Throne, Polymer Engg. Principles, Hanser Publisher Munich 1993 3. N.P. Charemisinoff & P.N. Chere, Hand book of applied Polymer Processing Tech, Marcel Dekker, inc, NY 1996. 4. Herbert Recs, Understanding of Injection moulding Tech., Hanser Pub., Munich 1994. SPECIFICATION TESTS LAB P 507 1. Specification tests for field latex Viscosity, density, pH 2. Specification tests for preserved latex 0+3
387
Ammonia content, Magnesium content, Copper and manganese content, Dry rubber content, Total solid content, KOH number, Volatile fatty acid number, Sludge content, Coagulum content, Mechanical stability time, Heat stability time, ZnO stability. 3. Specification tests for dry rubber Volatile matter, Ash content, Dirt content, nitrogen content, Estimation of Cu, Estimation of Fe, Estimation of Mn, P0, PRI.
POLYMER ANALYSIS LAB P 508 1. 2. 3. 4. 0+3 Identification of Rubbers: NR, SBR, BR, IR, IIR, EPDM, CR, NBR, Hypalon, Thiokol, Silicone. Identification of Plastics: PE, PP, PS, PVC, PVA, PF, UF, MF, Polyester. Identification of Thermoplastic Elastomers: SIS, SBS, SEBS, Hytrel. Estimation of Polymers: Acrylonitrile content of NBR, Chlorine content of CR, Rubber hydrocarbon content of NR. 5. Analysis of Polymer Compounds: Iodine value of rubber compounds, Carbon black content, Free sulphur content, Total inorganic content, Silica content.
388
SIXTH SEMESTER
389
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT P 601 3+1 Module 1 Evolution of scientific management, functions of management, planning, organising, staffing, directing, motivating, communicating, controlling and coordinating. Organisational structure line, staff and functional relationship, organisational structure of various departments, authority and responsibility, span of control delegation. Formation of companies, proprietary, partnership, joint stock, private limited and public limited companies, private sector, public sector and cooperative sector, raising of capital shares, types of shares and debentures. Module 2 Personnel management and Industrial relations, objectives and functions of personnel management, recruitment, selection and training of workers, psychological attitude to work and working conditions, fatigue, methods of eliminating fatigue cause, effect of industrial disputes, methods of settlement, collective bargaining, trade unions, workers participation in management, labour welfare and social security, industrial psychology, scope and objective. Job evaluation and merit rating, objectives and principles of job evaluation, systems of job evaluation, merit rating plans. Wages and incentives, primary wage systems, time rate and piece rate systems of wage payment, incentive plans, profit sharing, copartnership, nonmoney incentives. Module 3 Production Management, product, planning and control, batch and mass production, determination of economic lot size in batch production, function of production control, routing, scheduling, despatching and follow up, production control in mass production. Module 4 Marketing Management, importance, marketing Vs selling, marketing planning, competitive marketing strategy, product life cycle strategy, new product development cycle strategy, marketing channels inventory controls, determination of economic order quantity and recorder level, locating store, store room layout, store techniques, store room registers and records. Application of patents, sale of patent rights, trade mark and copy rights. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Koontzand O’ Dennel ‘Essentials of Management’ (TMH) F.Luffthans ‘Organisational Behavior’ (TMH) P.Hersey and Ken Blanchard ‘Management of Organisational Behavior’ (PHI) E.S.Buffa ’Modern Production Management’ E.S.Buffa ’Operations Management’ O.B.Choudhary ’Marketing Management’ A.K.Sinha & R.Sinha ’Project Engg. & Management’
390
P 602
ENGINEERING STATISTICS & QUALITY CONTROL 3+1
Module 1 Population and sampling, large and small samples, random sampling, estimating the mean value and variance, confidence intervals, choice of sample size for estimation. Testing of hypotheses for large samples, means, proportions, difference between means and standard deviations. Testing of hypothesis for small samples, tdistribution, test of hypothesis for mean, difference between means, test for paired data, Fdistribution, ftests and properties, contingency table, X2 distribution, goodness of fit and independence. Module 2 Concepts of inspection, quality control, quality assurance, quality circles, zero defect, total quality control, quality costs, computer aided inspection, economics of quality, quality vs. cost of production, Organisation of a Q.C. department, Q.C. Education, Training aids. Process control: control charts, 3 control limits, types of control charts for variables and attributes, rchart, Qchart, Pchart, NP chart, Uchart, determination of revised control limits, use and significance of control charts, quality rating system. Module 3 Acceptance sample, types of acceptance, sampling plans, determination of probability of acceptance by these sampling plans, sampling risks, design of sampling for stipulated producers risk and consumers risk. Concepts of AQL, LTPD, AOQL in sampling, QC curves, construction, standard sampling plans, MIL, STD, LOSD, plan, dodge roming plans, continuous and sequential sampling plans. Module 4 Definition of reliability, maintainability, failure rate, mean time between failures, factors contributing to reliability of products, failure cycle of products, bathtub curve, reliability tests, operating characteristics, curves for acceptance. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. I.W.Burr, Engineering Statics and Quality Control, McGraw Hill, 1975 A.J.Duncon, Quality Control and Industrial Statistics, Richard. Irwin, Inc., 1975 R.C.Gupta, Engineering Manufacture and Statical Quality Control, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1982 Granth L. Engene, Statistical quality Control, Mc Graw Hill, Inc, New York, 1952 Sigmund Halpern, An Introduction to Quality Control and Reliability, Quality Control Handbook (TMH) E.L. Grant,” Statistical Quality Control” Gupta And Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics. Gupta and Kapoor, Applied statistics
391
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING  III P 603 3+1 Module 1 Distillation, vapour liquid equilibrium, Dalton’s law, Raoult’s law and Henry’s law, relative volatility, boilingpoint diagrams, equilibrium diagrams, rectification, construction of fractionating column, calculation of the number of theoretical plates by McCabe Thiele method, feed quality and feed line, feed plate location, total reflux, minimum reflux, optimum reflux, plate efficiency. Module 2 Molecular diffusion, molecular diffusion in gases and liquids, Fick’s law, mass transfer coefficient, steady state diffusion of A through stagnant B and equimolar counter diffusion in binary gases and liquids, diffusivity of liquids and gases. Applications of molecular diffusion, mass, heat and momentum transfer analogies. Module 3 Drying, principles of drying, heat transfer in drying, mass transfer in drying, equilibrium moisture content, bound, unbound and free water, critical moisture content, batch drying, rate of batch drying, constant drying rate period, factors affecting the constant drying rate period, falling rate period, time of drying, rate of drying curve, material and enthalpy balances in drying, equipments for drying, batch dryers, rotary dryers, tunnel dryers. Module 4 Gas absorption, absorption equipment, tray towers, continuous contact equipment, packed columns, properties of tower packing, types of tower packing, tower construction, solubility of gas in liquid, two component systems, multicomponent systems, ideal liquid solutions, non ideal liquid solutions, choice of solvent, material balance in absorption, counter current flow, minimum liquidgas ratio, absorption factor, number of plates by graphical construction. References 1. Unit operations in chemical engineering, Tata Mc GrawHill Company limited, New Delhi, Mc Cabe & Smith. 2. Introduction to Chemical Engineering, Tata Mc GrawHill Company limited, New Delhi, Badger 3. Mass transfer Operations, Tata Mc GrawHill Company limited, New Delhi, Treyball
392
BIO MEDICAL & BIO POLYMERS P 604 3+1 Module 1 Biomaterials, biocompatibility, stabilisation, inflammation and wound healing, blood clotting system, kinn system, biological responses to implants, implant design and applications, silicone polymer implants. Module 2 Biomedical applications of polymers, permanent implants for function, orthopaedics, cardio vascular, respiratory patches and tubes, digestive system, genitourinary system, nervous system, orbital (corneal and lens prosthesis) permanent implant for cosmoses, other applications of engineered material in clinical practices, silicone implants, polymer membranes, polymer skin, polymeric blood, poly (vinyl pyrollidone) Module 3 Contact lenses, hard lenses, gas permeable lenses, flexible lenses, soft lenses, hydrogels, equilibrium swelling, absorption and desorption, oxygen permeability, types of soft lenses, manufacture, cleaning and disinfection, dental applications, denture base, denture reliners, crown and bridge resins, plastic teeth, mouth protectors, maxillofacial prosthetic materials, restorative materials, polyelectrolyte based restorative sealants, adhesives, dental impression and duplicating materials, agar, algmater elastomers. Module 4 Chemistry of peptides, polypeptides and proteins, synthetic approach to polypeptides and proteins, structural organisation in proteins. nucleic acids, RNA, DNA, structure, chemistry of polysaccharides, starch and cellulose, chemical modifications of cellulose, regenerated cellulose, viscose rayon and cuprammonium rayon References 1. R.H. Yocum and E.B. Nyquist, Eds., Functional Monomers, Volume 1,Marcel Dekker Inc.,NewYork,1973,Chapter 3,PP 299487 2. M.A.Galin and M.Ruben, Ed, Soft contact lenses:Clinical and Applied Technology,John Wiley and sons,Inc.,NewYork,1978. 3. Lehninger, “Principles of Biochemistry, Shulz and Bhirmer ,”Principles of protein structure “,Academic Press. 4. H.F. Mark (Ed), Encyclopedia of polymer science and engineering, John Wiley and Sons New York, 1989. 5. Galin and M. Ruben Ed., Soft compact Lenses clinical and applied Technology. 6. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York, 1978. Comprehensive Polymer Science Vol.7 7. (Ed) David Byrom, “BioMaterial” Macmillan Publishers Ltd. and ICI Biological products Business, 1991. 8. Wilfred Lynch, Hand book of Silicone rubber fabrication, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, 450 west 33 rd Street, New York 1000.
393
POLYMER BLENDS & COMPOSITES P605 3+1 Module 1 Introduction, preparation of polymer blends, thermodynamic criteria for polymer miscibility, specific interactions, copolymer effect, phase separation, spinoidal decomposition, nucleation and growth, phase diagram, morphology, blend characterisation techniques. Module 2 Structureproperty relationship, rubber plastic blends, phase morphology, properties of blends prepared by dynamic vulcanization, technological application, thermoplastic styrene block copolymers, polyester thermoplastic elastomers, thermoplastic polyurethane elastomers, basic structure, manufacture, morphology, commercial grades, applications, thermoplasic 1,2polybutadiene, trans 1,4polyisoprene, ionic thermoplastic elastomers, silicone based thermoplastic elastomers, polyamide 1,2elastomers. Module 3 Introduction, particulate and fibre filled composites, matrices and fibres, polymer fibre interface, pullout strength, critical fibre length, short fibre and continuous fibre composites, effect of coupling and bonding agents, characterization of interfacial bond strength, applications, polymer concrete, polymer impregnated concretes, polymeric binders for rocket propellants, analysis of long fibre composites, analysis of short fibre composites, factors influencing the performance of composites, rule of mixtures, physical and functional properties. Module 4 Introduction, resins (polyester, epoxies, phenolics), reinforcements (glass, carbon, aramid, polyester, nylon, cellulosics), moulding process, contact moulding, vacuum bag moulding, pressure bag moulding, hand lay up, filament winding, spray up, compression moulding, injection moulding, coinjection moulding, resin transfer moulding, pultrusion, RRIM, matched die moulding. References 1. Hand book of Elastomers, New Developments and Technology (Eds), A.K. Bhowmic, and H.C. Stephense, Markel Dekker, Inc., New york. 2. O.Olabisi, I.W. Robeson, and M.T. Shaw, Polymerpolymer Miscibility Academic Press, New York, 1979 3. Paul S. Newman (Ed) ‘Polymer Blends’” Academic Press, New York, 1978 4. G.Alliger, etal, Rubber world, 164930,51(1971) 5. Goettler inc, the role of the polymeric matrix in the processing and structural prpperties of copmposite materials (J C Sferis and L.Nicolars, (Edn) Plenum, New York 1983.
394
POLYMER PROCESSING  II P 606 3+1 Module 1 Injection moulding, terminology, process description, moulding cycle, classification of moulds, 2plate and 3plate moulds, different types of gates, cavity layout, setting up of mould, types of injection unit, elements of plasticating process, classification of screw, screw design, process control, clamping unit, classification of machine hydraulics, ancillary equipment, computer operation, trouble shooting of injection moulding, reaction injection moulding Module 2 Extrusion, principle, types of extruders, single screw and twinscrew extruders, metering, screw design, process control variables, types of dies, die design, elastic properties and die swell, manufacturing of pipes, cables, wire coating, extrusion profiles, blown films, flat film, sheets, filaments, lamination, extrusion of elastomers Module 3 Blow moulding, terminology, basis, process variables, injection & stretch blow moulding, single and multi layer, extrusion blow moulding, extrusion heads, process controls for blow moulding machine, process and product controls. Thermoforming, definition, methods of forming, thermoforming machinery, heating of sheet, heating cycle, stretching, concept, hot strength, blistering, sags, cooling and trimming the parts, heat balance, shrinkage, trimming operations. Module 4 Rotational moulding, types of machines, moulds, materials, part design, calendering, types of calenders and strainer, embosser, winder, take offsystems, crowning, machinery powder coating, manufacturing methods, application methods, types of powder coating, finishing and machining of plastics, joining, welding and assembling of plastics. References 1. Edited by Michael L. Berlin Plastics Engineering. Handbook. Society of the plastic Industries Chapman & Hall NY 1991. 2. James L. Throne, Technology of Thermoforming. Hanser, Publisher Munmich 1996. 3. M.J. Stevens and J.A. Covas, Extruder principle and operation. Chapman & Hall UK, 2nd edtion 1995. 4. D.V. Rosato & D.V. Rosato, Blow moulding Hand book, Hanser Published 1998.
395
LATEX PRODUCTS LAB P 607 0+3 1. Preparation of dispersion, slurry and emulsions 2. Creaming of NR latex. 3. Manufacture of rubber bands, balloons, finger caps, household gloves, surgeons’ gloves, latex thread and articles by casting. 4. Heat sensitized dipping. 5. Latex impregnation in textiles 6. Preparation of SP, CV and LV rubber 7. Preparation of latex based adhesives 8. Work practice in the production of latex foam 9. Work practice in the production of bonded coir PRODUCT MANUFACTURING LAB P 608
1. 2. 3.
0+3 Determination of Cure time. Effect of mastication time on plasticity/ viscosity Work practice in mastication, band formation, homogenisation and mixing using a laboratory
mill Preparation of micro cellular sheet, Vstrap, tea mat, teats, injection bottle cap, play ball, man made hose, solvent based adhesives, solid tyre, sponge, eraser and oil seal. 5. Work Practice in calendaring, injection moulding, rotational moulding and extrusion 6. Compounding of PVC on two roll mill 7. Visit to factories manufacturing tyres and non tyre products. 8. Preparation and characterisation of thermoplastic elastomers from rubberplastic blends. a) Miscible binary system (solution and melt mixing) b) Immiscible binary system (solution and melt mixing) c) Compatibilised binary system (solution and melt mixing) 9. Preparation of miscible polymer blends, phase separation, LCST measurements. 10. Blending of NR with SBR, BR and EPDM. 11. Preparation of fibre filled composites. 12. Hand Lay up technique and Compression Moulding.
4.
396
SEVENTH SEMESTER
397
PAINT TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE  I) P 701  1 2+1 Module 1 Reflection, refraction, diffraction, colour science, additive colour mixing, gloss, specular gloss, bloom gloss, surface uniformity, hiding power, chromaticity diagrams for colour measurements, components of paints, paint preparation, formulation, factors affecting pigment dispersion, preparation of pigment dispersion, manufacture, pigments, pigment properties, different types, selection, dispersion and colour matching of pigments, extenders, solvents, different types, solvent properties, oil, driers, resins, dilutents, additives affecting viscosity, interfacial tension, chemical reactions, living micro organisms. Module 2 Classification based on polymeric resin, emulsion, oil and alkyd paints, acrylic paints, epoxy coatings, polyurethanes, silicones, formaldehyde based resins, chlorinated rubbers, acrylics, hydrocarbon resins. Classification based on application. Fluoropolymers, vinyl resins, appliance finishes, automotive finishes, coil coatings, can coatings, marine coatings, aircraft finishes. Module 3 Mechanism of film formation, physical drying, oxidative drying, chemical drying, factors affecting coating properties, film thickness, film density, internal stresses, pigment volume concentration (PVC), different methods used for film preparation, barrier properties. Mechanical properties and optical properties of coatings, ageing properties, effect of rheological behaviour on paint performance. Module 4 Adhesion properties of coatings, factors affecting adhesive bond, thermodynamics of adhesion, destructive methods, nondestructive methods, properties such as floating, silking, cratering, foaming, skinning, flame retardance, slip resistance and storage stability, surface cleaning methods, chemical conversion treatments, paint application, brushing, dip coating, flow coating, roller coating, spray painting, electro deposition, chemiphoretic deposition. References 1. Swaraj Paul, “ Surface coating: Science and Technology” Wiley Interscience 1985 2. R. Lambourne. “ Paint and Surface CoatingsTheory and Practice” Ellis Horwood Chichester 1987
398
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE  I) P 701  2 2+1 Module 1 Data Structures, introduction, storage structures for arrays, stacks, application of stacks, queues, pointers and linked allocations, linked linear list, operations, circularly and doubly linked list, applications, sorting techniques, selection sort, bubble sort, exchange sort, searching techniques, sequential searching, binary searching. Module 2 Operating systems, generation and history of operating systems, multi programming and time sharing concepts, process states, transition, PCB, interrupt processing, job and process scheduling, disk scheduling, seek optimization, rotational optimization. Module 3 Software engineering, planning and cost estimation, importance of software, defining the problem, developing a solution strategy, planning, development process, organizational structure, software cost estimation, introduction, software cost factors, cost estimation techniques, staffing level estimation. Module 4 Software design concepts, introduction, fundamental design concepts, modules and modularization criteria, design notations and techniques, detailed design consideration, real time and distributed system design, test plans, milestone, walkthroughs and inspections, design guidelines, computer security, fundamental concepts of cryptosystems. Computer networks, introduction, uses of computer networks, network hardware & software, reference models, network topologies, examples of network, internet programming, HTML, DHTML, front page, introduction to dream weaver. Ecommerce, introduction, applications in business, Ecommerce framework. References 1. JeanPaul Tremblay& Paul.G.Sorenson, An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications, Mc Graw Hill, II edition, 1984. 2. Harvey.M.Detail, An Introduction to Operating Systems, Addison Wesley Publication Company, 1998. 3. James.L.Peterson, Abraham Silberschatz, Operating System Concepts, Addison Wesley Publication Company, 1985. 4. Richard Fairley, Software Engineering Concepts, Mc Graw Hill, 1985. 5. Pressman R.S., Software Engineering, Mc Graw Hill, II edition, 1987.
399
ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE  I) P701  3 2+1 Module 1 Nature and scope of engineering economics, definition and scope of study of the subject, significance of economic analysis in business decisions, demand and supply analysis, determinants of demand, law of demand, Elasticity of demand, Demand forecasting, Law of supply, Elasticity of supply, Market price. Module 2 Cost analysis, fixed cost, variable cost, marginal cost, cost output relationship in the short run and the long run, equilibrium of the firm, pricing decisions, situations demand, pricing decisions, pricing in practice, full cost pricing, marginal cost pricing, bid pricing, pricing for a rate of return, statutory price fixation in India, break even analysis, break even point, basic assumptions, break even chart, managerial uses of break even analysis. Module 3 Capital budgeting, need for capital budgeting, method of appraising project Profitability, rate of return, pay back period, present value comparison, cost benefit analysis, preparing of feasibility report, appraisal process, economic and commercial feasibility, financial feasibility, technical feasibility. Module 4 Work study, production, productivity, factors affecting productivity, role of work study, human factor, methods study, objectives and procedure, SIMO chart, principles of motion economy, work measurement, stop watch time study, rating concept and systems, allowances, work sampling, plant layout, factors governing plant location, objectives of a good plant layout, process layout, product layout and combination layout. References 1. O.P. Khanna Industrial Engineeering and Management Dhanpatrai Publications New Delhi1998 2. R. L. Varshney & K.L. MaheswariManagerial EconomicsS Chand and Co. 3. Samuelson P. A. & Nordhaus. W. DEconomicsMc'Grawhill1992 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT & RELIABILITY ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE  I) 2+1
P 701  4
Module 1 Basic concepts, evolution of total quality management, definitions of quality, deming, crosby, juran, taguchi, ishikawa theories, inspection, quality control, TQM system, human component, service and product quality, customer orientation. Module 2 Quality planning & techniques, quality planning, goal setting, designing for quality, manufacturing for quality, process control, CPK, 6σ , process capability, data based approach, statistical tools, 7QC tools, bench marking, QFD, FMEA, 5S, continuous improvement techniques, POKAYOKE, deming wheel. 400
Module 3 Human dimension & system development in TQM, TQM mind set, participation style, team work, team development, quality circle, motivational aspect, change management, documentation, structure, information system, ISO 9000, ISO 14000, QS 9000, certification, clauses, procedure, TQM road map. Module 4 Reliability, definition, probabilistic nature of failures, mean failure rate, meantime to failure, meantime between failures, hazard rate, hazard models, weibull model, system reliability, improvement, redundancy, series, parallel and mixed configurations, reliability in design, case studies of aircraft engines, brake system in automobiles and aircraft, electronic equipollents. Maintainability, introduction, choice of maintenance strategy, mean time to repair (MTTR), factors contributing to mean down time (MDT), fault diagnosis, routine testing for unrevealed faults, factors contributing to mean maintenance time, (MMT), oncondition maintenance, periodic condition monitoring, continuous condition monitoring, economics of maintenance. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Joel E. Rose, Total Quality Management, 2nd edn., Kogan page Ltd., USA, 1993. Srinath L.S., Reliability Engineering, Affiliated East West Press, New Delhi – 1975. John Bentley, Introduction to Reliability and Quality Engineering, 2nd edn., Addison – Wesley, 1999. Samuel K Ho, TQM – An integrated approach, 2nd edn., Kogan page Ltd., USA, 1996. John Bank, TQM, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ly\td., New Delhi, 1993. Patrick P.T. O’ Connor, Practical Reliability Engineering 2edn., John Wiley & Sons, 1985. Balagurusamy E., Reliability Engineering, Tata McGrew Hill Pub. Co., New Delhi, 1984. Bazovsky. I., Reliability Theory and Practice, Printice Hall, Inc. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1961.
401
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING P 702 2+1 Module 1 Introduction, evolution of modern concepts, functions of an industrial engineer, field of application, entrepreneurship, concept of project, types of investment, capital budgeting, investment proposals, project development cycle, preinvestment analysis, project environments, government regulations, importexport status, foreign exchange regulations, technical collaborations, means of raising capital, availability of resources, marketing survey and strategies. Module 2 Product development and research, design function, objectives of design, manufacture Vs purchase, development of design, experimentation, prototype production, testing, simplification, standardization, product development, selection of materials and processes, human factors in design, value engineering, selection of factory site, building design, construction, plant layout and material handling, product and process, layout, comparison of flowchart, use of time study data, physical facilities, constructional details, environmental control like lighting, temperature, humidity, ventilation, noise, dust, industrial waste disposalprinciples of material handling, types of material handling equipment, selection and application. Module 3 Maintenance and replacement, preventive and breakdown maintenance, economic aspect, replacement of equipment, methods of providing for depreciation, determination of economic life, criteria for selection of equipment. Module 4 Methods Engineering, analysis of work methods using different types of process charts and flow diagrams, critical examination, micro motion study and Therblings, SIMO chart, principles of motion economy, determination of standard time and allowances, accounting and costing, element of double entry book keeping, trial balance, trading profit and loss account, balance sheet, principles of costing, methods of allocation of overhead costs, finance and capital requirements, price fixation, cash flow statements, return of investment, source of finance. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Production System Production Control Human Factors in Engg. Design Time and Motion Study Operations Management Value Engineering Methods Engineering System Analysis and Project Management J.L.Riggs Hiegel Mc Cornic, E.J. Barnes R.M. Buffa E.S. Miles L.D. Krick Cleand &king.
402
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING P 703 3+1 Module 1 Lathe, types of lathe specification, parts of center lathe, operations, single point tool nomenclature accessories and attachment, capstan and turret lathe, parts, difference, automatic lathe, single spindle and multispindle types. Module 2 Shaping, types, operations, parts of standard shaper, specifications, planning, types, parts of double housing, planning machine, operations table drive mechanism only, specifications, milling, types, specifications, operations only, drilling, types, specification, operations, twist drill nomenclature, boring, types, specification, grinding, types, abrasives, girt, grade and structure of grinding wheel, bonding process, fine finishing, honing, super finishing, buffing, metal spraying, electro plating. Module 3 Special machining, electrical discharge machining, electro chemical machining, electron beam machining, ultrasonic laser machining, plasma arc machining, abrasive jet machining, chemical machining. Module 4 Transfer machines, types, components, N.C. machines, open and closed loop control system, analogy and digital control system, absolute and incremental position control, part programming, manual part programming technique and computer aided part programming technique, measurement principles, classification of measuring instruments, gauges, height gauge, slip gauges, sine bars, autocollimator, go, no gauges, classification, surface roughness, terms, symbols, measurement. References 1. S.K. Hajra Choudry, Elements of Workshop Technology Publishers, 1999, 9th Edition. 2. Workshop Technology, W.A.J. Chapman, Vol. I, II & III.3 3. Manufacturing Technology, M. Hastle Hurst. Vol. I & II Media promoters and
403
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING  IV P 704 3+1 Module 1 Process controlcontrollers, types, proportional derivative control, proportional integral controller, proportional integral derivative controller, basic principles and transfer functions, pneumatic and electronic controllers, open and closed loop systems, first order systems, mercury thermometer, liquid level and mixing process Module 2 Temperature measurementdifferent methods like electrical, contact and noncontact methodsthermometers liquid filled, bimetallic and resistance thermometers, thermocouple, optical pyrometer. Pressure measurement, manometers, Utube, well type and inclined types, barometer, bourden tube, bellows, diaphragms. Module 3 Chemical reaction engineeringclassification of chemical reactions and reactors, variables affecting the rate of reaction, reaction rate, molecularity and order of a reaction, Arrhenius law, collision theory and transition state theory. integral and differential method of data analysis, ideal batch reactor, semi batch reactor, mixed reactor Module 4 Process calculationsmethods of expressing composition of mixture of solids, liquids and gases. concept of limiting and excess reactants. ideal gas law, Dalton’s law, Amagat’s law, material balance problems involving mixing, leaching, evaporation, distillation and absorption. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stochiometry, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi, Bhatt & Vora Chemical reaction engineering, Levenspiel, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi Process control, Patranabis, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi Process instrumentation, Patranabis, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi Process system analysis and control, Coughnour & Koppel, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi 6. Chemical engineer’s Handbook, Perry, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi. 7. Introduction to chemical engineering, Anderson & Wenzel, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi
404
TYRE TECHNOLOGY P705 3+1 Module 1 History on the design and development of tyres, current status of tyre industry in India and its future prospects, tyre sizing, different components of a tyre, its geometry, basic functions, functions of a pneumatic tyre, load carrying, vibration and noise reduction, the tyre function as a spring, contribution to road adhesion, tyre friction contribution to driving control, steering control and self aligning torque. Solid tyres, concave tyres, winter tyres, OTR tyre, bicycle tyre, different types of tyres, bias, bias belted, radial, relative merits and demerits, their components, tube and tubeless tyresbasic features. Module 2 Cordrubber composites, failure mechanism of cord reinforced rubber, mechanics of tyre pavement interaction, tyre forces on dry and wet road surface, traction forces on dry, wet, ice, snow and irregular pavements, breaking and traction of tyres, tyre wear, rubber friction, sliding mechanism, various factors affecting friction and sliding, tyre stresses and deformation, tyre noise, mechanism of noise generation, effect of tread pattern, noise level, flatspotting, fatigue resistance, patographing, pneumatic resilience effect. Module 3 Manufacturing techniques of various tyres  two wheeler, car tyres, truck tyres, cycle tyres, cycle tubes, OTR tyres, aircraft tyres, automotive tubes, manufacture of tyre treads, beads, sidewalls, compounding techniques, principles of designing formulations for various rubber components, tyre reinforcement materials (textile, steel, glass, aramid), criteria of selection, different styles and construction, textile treatment (RFL dip), tyre mould design, green tyre design principles, methods of building green tyres for bias, bias belted, radial and tubeless tyres, green tyre treatments, tyre curing methods, curing bags, bladders, diaphragms, autoclave, airbag, bagomatic, autoform, post cure inflation, different types of tyre building machines, bead winding machine, bias cutters, curing presses. Module 4 Measurement of tyre properties, dimension and sizestatic and loaded, tyre construction analysis, endurance test, wheel and plunger tests, traction, noise measurements, force and moment characteristics, cornering coefficient aligning torque coefficient, load sensitivity and load transfer sensitivity, rolling resistance, nonuniformity dimensional variations, force variations, radial force variation, lateral force variation concentricity and ply steer, type balance, mileage, evaluations, tyre flaws and separations, Xray holography, foot print pressure distribution, BIS standards for tyres, tubes and flaps, quality control tests. References 1. Samuel K. Clark, Mechanics of pneumatic Tires, National Bureau of standards, Monograph, US Govt. printing office, 1971. 2. Tom French, Tyre Technology, Adam Hilger, New York, 1989. 3. F.J. Kovac, Tire Technology, 4th edition, Good year Tire and Rubber Company, Akron, 1978. 4. E. Robecchi, L. Amiki, Mechanics of Tire, 2 Vols, Pirelli, Milano, 197 POLYMER TESTING 405
P706
3+1
Module 1 Standards organizations, BIS, ASTM, BS, DIN, FDA, preparation and conditioning of test pieces, short term testing, stressstrain behaviour in tension, compression and shear, tensile strength, compressive strength, tear strength, flexural strength, impact, Izod, Charpy, long term testing, creep, stress relaxation, hardness, abrasion resistance, resilience, heat build up, ageing. Module 2 Chemical analysis of polymers, functional group analysis, tacticity analysis, use of mass spectrometry, gas chromatography, IR, C13, H1, ESR, NMR spectroscopy, optical microscopy, SEM, TEM, Xray diffraction, electron diffraction, neutron diffraction in polymer characterization. Module 3 Principle and use of DTA, TGA, DSC, DMA and TMA, determination of Tg, Tm, heat of fusion, thermal conductivity, flammability, vicat softening point, heat deflection temperature. Module 4 Analysis of dielectric strength, dielectric constant, volume resistivity, surface resistivity, arc resistance, corona resistance, power factor, dissipation factor, loss factor, transparency, refractive index, haze, gloss. References 1. 2. 3. 4. R.P.Brown, Physical testing of Rubber, Academic Press, New York 1984 Vishu Shah, Testing of Plastics ASTM Manual 35,36,37 BIS and TST Manual
POLYMER TESTING LAB P707 0+3 Testing of mechanical properties of plastics and rubbers 1. 2. 3. 4. Tensile strength Compression strength Flexural strength Tear strength 406
5. Izod and Charpy impact strength 6. Falling dart impact strength 7. Shore Hardness 8. Abrasion resistance 9. Rebound resilience 10. Flex resistance
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY P 708 1. Fluid flow measurement using orificemeter 2. Fluid flow measurement using venturimeter 3. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem 4. Single tank system 5. Simple distillation 6. Reynolds’s experiment 7. Dynamics of thermometer 8. Characteristic curves of a centrifugal pump 9. Characteristic curves of a reciprocating pump 10. Kinetics of hydrolysis of ethyl acetate. 0+3
407
EIGHTH SEMESTER
408
ADHESIVE TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE  II) P801  1 3+1 Module 1 Bond types, immiscible planar substrates, immiscible substrates with interphase formation via chemical reaction, setting, adhesive joint strength, interface, thermodynamics of adhesive, contact angle, work of adhesion, acid base consideration, surface treatment, measure of adhesion, test methods, strength of adhesion, rheology of adhesion Module 2 Low energy surface, high energy surface, solvent, solvent cleaning, mechanical abrasion, chemical treatments, primers, plasma treatments, mechanism of adhesion, introduction, mechanical interlocking, mechanically roughened substrates, chemically roughened substrates, role of localized energy dissipation diffusion theory, welding of plastics, polymer/ metal interface, electronic theory, adsorption theory, secondary force interactions, donoracceptor interactions, primary force interaction. Module 3 Hardening by solvent or dispersing medium removal, hardening by cooling, hardening by chemical reaction, nonhardening adhesives, adhesives from natural sources, rubber based adhesives, TPE based adhesives, phenolic resins, tannin formaldehyde resin, lignin based resin, polyvinylacetates, polyvinylalcohols, epoxides, di isocyanates, cyanoacrylate, anaerobic, acrylic, hot melt adhesives, pressure sensitive adhesives, structural adhesives in aerospace, adhesives in automobile industry, conductive, adhesives in building construction, adhesives in electrical industry. Module 4 Stresses, types of joints, selection of joint detail, joint design criteria, standard test methods, engineering properties of adhesives, non destructive testing, fracture mechanics of adhesive joints, effect of joint geometry, effect of temperature, dynamic and static fatigue, environmental attack, service life prediction. References 1. Skiests (Ed). Handbook of Adhesives, III edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1990 2. Shields, Handbook of Adhesives, Butterworths 1984 3. Pizzi (Ed) Wood Adhesives, Chemistry and Technology, Marcel Dekker 1983.
409
P 801  2
PLASTICS PACKAGING TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1
Module 1 Introduction to plastics packaging, functions of packaging, advantages of plastic packaging, distribution hazards, special requirements of food and medical packaging, packaging legislation and regulation, packaging as a system, elements, approach, package, design, relation criteria for packaging materials, packaging equipment checklist, case histories, major packaging plastics, introduction, PE, PP, PS, PVC, polyesters, PVDC, vinylacetate, PVA, EVA, PV Alcohol, PA, PC ionomers & fluoro polymers. Module 2 Conversion process, compression & transfer moulding, injection moulding, blow moulding, extrusion, rotary thermoforming, lamination, metallizing, decoration process, shrink wrapping, pallet & stretch wrapping, sealing methods, plasma barrier coatings, energy requirement for conversion. Module 3 Extrusion, film and flexible packaging, extrusion, cast film & sheet, blown film, multi layer film & sheet coatings, laminations & co extrusions, stretch and shrink wrap, pouching, sealing, evaluation of seals in flexible packages, advantages of flexible packaging, flexible packaging products, specialized packaging for food products Module 4 Thermoformed, moulded and rigid packages, thermoforming packages, position & thermoforming & wrap forming, variations in thermoforming and solid phase pressure forming, scrabbles, twin sheet & melt to mould thermoforming, skin packaging, thermoforming moulds, thermoforming fill real, aseptic thermoforming, advantages & disadvantages of moulding foams, other cushioning materials & distribution packaging, polystyrene & other foams systems cushioning, design of molded cushioning systems, plastic pallets, drums & other shipping containers, testing plastic packages, barrier, migration & compatibility, printing, labeling & pigmenting, sterilization systems and health care products, packaging hazards and their controls, environmental considerations. References 1. Susan E.M. Seleke, Understanding plastic packaging Technology, Hanser publications – Munich 2. A.S. Altalye, Plastics in packaging, Tata McGraw – Hill publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
410
P 801  3
PROCESS ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1
Module 1 Value of money, equivalence, equation for economic studies and equivalence, amoritation, capital recovery, depreciation, depletion. Module 2 Capital requirements for process plants, cost indices, equipment costs, service facilities, capital requirements for completed plan, balance sheet, cost, earnings, profits and returns, variable costs, fixed costs, income statement, economic production charts, capacity factors. Module 3 Economics of selecting alternates, annual cost methods, present worth method, equivalent alternate, rate of return and payment time, cash flow analysis, economic balance, economic balance in batch operation, cyclic operations and multiple equipment units. Module 4 Micro economics, elasticity of demand and supply, demand forecasting methods, economic analysis, cost analysis, time element, Beep micro economics, Keynesian employment theory, multiplier and accelerator, national income, accounting, business cycle. Concept of management, principles, managerial functions, scientific management, advanced techniques in management, type of organization, merits and demerits, concept of marking, need, reserach, sales forecasting, product cycle, personnel management, concepts recruitment, selection and training and development, maintenance, merit rating, job evaluation, fatigue, accidents, causes and prevention, labor management of relations, concept of industrial relations. References 1. Schwyer H.E., “Process Engineering Economics”, Mcgraw Hill Book Co., (N.Y) 2. Jelam, F.F., “Cost And Optimisation Engineering “. 3. Peter And Timmerhaus, “Plant Design And Economics For Chemical Engineers.
411
P 801  4
PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1
Module 1 Principles of measurement and classification of process control instruments, temperature pressure, fluid flow, liquid level, volumetric and mass flow rate, fluid density and specific gravity, viscosity and consistency, pH and concentration, electrical and thermal conductivity, humidity composition by physical and thermal properties and spectroscopy. Module 2 Transient response of open loop systems, first order systems, examples, response to step, impulse and sinusoidal forcing functions, first order systems in series, interacting and non interacting types, response of first order systems in series, second order system, transfer functions, examples, response of second order systems to step, impulse and sinusoidal inputs transient response of chemical reactor. Module 3 Control system, development of block diagram for feed back control systems, servo and regulator problems, transfer function for controllers and final control element, principles of pneumatic and electronic controllers, transportation lag, feedback characteristics of control systems, block diagram, signal flow graph techniques. Module 4 Introduction to frequency response of closed loop systems, concept of stability ROUTH test for stability, stability criterion, bode stability criterion, Niquist diagram, tuning of controller settings. Process dynamics and applications, dynamics and control of chemical reactors, heat exchangers and distillation columns, digital computer applications, microprocessors and computer control of chemical processes, introduction to PLC programming and DCS. References 1. Coughanowr D.R. and Koppel L.M., Process Systems Analysis and Control McGraw Hill, New York. 2. P. Harriot, Process Control, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1977. 3. D.P. Eckman, Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley 1978.
412
P 802
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN & MANUFACTURE 3+1
Module 1 Introduction, design process, application of computers for design, creating manufacture database, benefits of CAD, inputoutput devices in CAD, design work station, graphic terminal, operator input devices, plotters and other output devices, secondary storage. Functions of graphic package, constructing the geometry, 2D transformations, 3D transformations, conceteration, data base structure and content, wireframe modeling, surface modeling, solid modeling finite element modeling, digitizing, layering, groups, patterns, local coordinates, automate dimensioning, on line calculation capabilities. Module 2 Conventional memorial control (NC), basic components of NC system, NC procedure, NC co ordinate system, NC motion control system, applications of NC, economics of NC, NC part programming, punched tape in NC, tape coding and format, manual part programming, computer assisted part programming, the ATP language, the macro statement in ATP, NC programming with interactive graphics, voice NC programming, manual data input, computer controls in NC, introduction, problems with conventional NC, NC controller technology, computer numerical control, direct numerical control, combined DNC/CNC systems, adaptive control machining systems. Module 3 Structural modes of manufacturing process, process control strategies, distributed control versus central control, direct digital control, supervisory computer control, computer aided quality control, technology in Q.C., computer in Q.C., contract inspection methods, non contract inspection methods, optical and non optical, computer aided testing, integration of CAQC with CAD/ CAM manufacturing systems, manufacturing systems, machine tools and related equipment, material handling system, computer integrated manufacturing systems, human labour in the manufacturing system, CIMS benefits. Module 4 Group technology (G.T.), introduction, part families, part classification and coding, G.T. machine cells benefits of G.T., computer aided process planning, planning function, retrieval type process planning system, generative process planning system, benefits of CAPP, machinability data systems, computer generated time standards. References 1. M.P. Groover, E.M. Zimmers, Jr.”CAD/CAM”; Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing, Prentice Hall of India, 1987 2. Besent C.B. “ Computer aided Design and Manufacturing” Ellis Horwood Ltd England 1980
413
FIBRE TECHNOLOGY P 803 3+1 Module 1 Introduction, definition of fibre, fibre dimensions, units of measurements, tex, denier, conversion from one system to another, use of fibres in the rubber and plastic industry, polymer products containing fibres, fibre manufacturing industries in India, present status and future prospects. Module 2 Fibres used in polymer industry types and sources, chemical composition, properties, concept of order in fibres and polymers, crystallinity and orientation, methods of investigating fibre structure, detailed study of fibre properties such as mechanical properties, electrical properties, moisture absorption, optical properties and fibre friction, relation between fibre properties and structure, uses of vegetable fibres such as cotton, flax, linen, coir, sisal, pineapple, jute, silk, banana, use of animal and mineral fibres. Module 3 Man made fibres, physical structure of fibre forming polymers, production, chemical composition, properties and testing of viscose rayon, cellulose acetate, nylon 66 and nylon 6, polyester, acrylic, poly vinyl alcohol, spandex, carbon fibre, metallic fibres, saran, kevlar, nomex, steel wire, finishing and dyeing. Module 4 Yarn and textile production from fibres, definition of various textile terms, fibre spinning, drawing of fibres, felting, knitting, lacing, bonding and weaving, properties of yarns, yarn numbering system, brief idea about spinning of cotton yarns and blends, yarn properties such as count appearance, evenness, strength, abrasion, fatigue, friction, twist, dynamic mechanical properties and their importance, fabrics, brief idea about the construction, cover factor, geometry of weaves, fabric properties such as strength, abrasion resistance, air permeability, bursting strength, thermal properties. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Booths, “ Textile Testing”, Butterworths, Newness, U.K. 1980 Wake and D.B.Wooton, Textile reinforcement of Elastomers,” Applied Sciences” 1982 Evans,” House technology” Applied Science Publishes 1979 F.W.Billmeyer, “Text Book of Polymer Science”, Wiley – Interscience, 1971 Moncrief,” Man Made Fibres, Sadov et al, “Chemical technology of fibres and Material” Mir Publishers, Moscow 1978
414
POLYMERS & ENVIRONMENT P 804 3+1 Module 1 Introduction, resources of polymers, comparison of total energy costs for product manufacture based on polymers, ceramics and metals, polymer production and consumption, comparison of the impact on environment by polymers and other materials, environmental pollution, non biodegradability of polymers, drawbacks, burning of polymers, remedy for environmental problem by polymers, awareness program. Module 2 Biodegradation of polymers, introduction, enzymes, enzyme nomenclature, enzyme specificity, physical factors affecting the activity of enzymes, enzyme mechanism, chemical degradation initiates biodegradation, hydrolysis of synthetic biodegradable polymers. Development of starch based polymers, manufacture of master batch, biodegradation, assessment, soil burial test, biopolyesters, synthesis, isolation, solvent extraction, enzymatic digestion, properties, degradation, intracellular biodegradation, extra cellular biodegradation, thermal degradation, hydrolytic degradation, environmental degradation Module 3 Need for recycling of plastics from urban solid wastes, waste composition, sorting and segregation of waste, plastics identification, SPI coding, primary recycling, equipments for primary recycling, specific recycling techniques, PE films, PP battery case, crushing and separation, PET films Module 4 Secondary recycling, plastics wastes containing paper, hydrolytic treatment, processing of mixed plastics waste, household waste, industrial sector, TPO based materials, use of recyclable plastics in motor vehicles, recoverable material, disposal of residuals, recycling of rubber, difficulty in recycling of rubber products, reclaimator process, WTR, advantages of reclaimed rubber in cost, mixing and processing References 1. 2. 3. 4. Recycling of plastic materials (Ed) Francesco Paolo La Mantia, Chem Tee Publishing. Degradable polymers, recycling and plastics waste management, (eds) Ann Christine Albertsson and Samuel J. Huang, Marcel Dekker, New York. Plastics Waste Management (ed) Nabil Mustafa, Marcel Dekkar, New York.
415
POLYMER PRODUCT DESIGN P 805 3+ 1 Module 1 Steps in product design, functional design, aesthetic design, effect of fillers on properties and performance, safety factor, working stress, safe stress, fatigue factor, effects of cyclic loading, stress concentration, endurance limit, structural design of products under static and dynamic loads, design of beams and plates, design for stiffness, electrical use, optical use Module 2 Design features of products, inside and outside corners, wall thickness, ribs, tapers, draft angles, weld lines, gate size and location, tolerances, mouldedininserts, plastic threads, blind holes, undercuts, hinges, functional surfaces and lettering, snap fitting, welding. Module 3 Plastic gears, advantages and disadvantages, glossary of gearing terms, backlash and working clearance, materials, lubricants, frictional properties, design, moulded and cut gears, plastic bearings, rubber bearings, different types, designers checklist, pipes, dimensions and specifications, joints, manholes, pump pressure, pressure rating calculation, external loading. Module 4 Hysteresis, energy absorption, damping, principles of vibration, simple harmonic motion, combination of simple harmonic motion, beats, periodic motion, system with single degree of freedom, natural frequency, forced vibrations, undamped vibration, damped vibrations, octave rules, coulomb and solid damping, frequency of damped vibrations, logarithmic decrements, critical damping, two degrees of freedom, multi degrees of freedom, vibration isolation, dynamic isolation and transmissibility, isolation of shock and transient vibrations, rubber mountings, rubber bridge bearings , rubber seals, basic configurations, design of static and dynamic seals, design of rubber products in automobiles, aviation, marine fields, hoses, beltings, couplings, cables, rubber to metal components, footwear, sports goods. References 1. Plastic Products Design Handbook  Edward Miller 2. Plastic Products Design Engg. Handbook  S Levy & J. H. DuBois 3. Product Design With Plastics J.B.Dym Freakly and Payne “Theory and Practice of engineering With Rubber” Applied Science, London, 1978
416
SPECIALITY POLYMERS P 806 3+1 Module 1 High temperature and fire resistant polymers, improving low performance polymers for high temperature use, polymers for low fire hazards, polymers for high temperature resistance, fluoropolymers, aromatic polymers, polyphenylene sulphide, polysulphones, polyesters, polyamides, polyketones, heterocyclic polymers. Module 2 Electrical and electronic properties of polymers, insulating properties of polymers, conducting polymers, conducting mechanisms, polyacetylene, polyparaphenylene polypyrrole, organometallic polymers, photo conducting polymers, polymers in nonlinear optics, polymers with piezoelectric, pyroelectric and ferromagnetic properties, photoresists for semi conductor fabrication, optical fibre telecommunication cables. Module 3 Ionic polymers, synthesis, physical properties and applications, ion exchange, hydrophilicity, ionomers based on polyethylene, elastomeric ionomers, ionomers based on polystyrene, ionomers based on PTFE, ionomers with polyaromatic backbones, polyelectrolytes for ion exchange, polyelectrolytes based on carboxylates, polymers with integral ions, polyelectrolyte complexes, inorganic ionic polymers. Module 4 Liquid crystalline polymers, structure, types, applications, inorganic polymers, polymers containing phosphorous, nitrogen and boron, organometallic polymers, polysiloxanes and metal chelate polymers. References 1. H.F.Mark, (Ed), Encyclopedia of polymer Science & Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1989. 2. Matrin.T.Goosey, Plastics for Electronics, Elsevier, Applied Science, 1985. 3. R.W. Dyson, Specialty Polymers, Chapman & Hall, 2nd edition, 1998. 4. Manas Chanda, Salil.K.Roy, Plastics Technology Hand book, 2nd edition, Marcel 5. Dekker, New York, 1993 6. C.Ku & R.Liepins, Electrical Properties of Polymers, Hanser Publications, Munich 1987. 7. F. Bueche, Physical properties of polymers, Wiley, New York, 1962. 8. J.Mort & G.Pfister, eds. Electronic properties of polymers, Wiley Interscience,
417
CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY LAB P807 Determination of the following parameters 1. Acid value of oils 2. Iodine value of oils 3. Saponification value of oils 4. Sucrose content of sugar 5. Hardness of water 6. Dissolved oxygen in water 7. BOD and COD of water 8. Available chlorine content in bleaching powder 9. Preparation and analysis of soap 10. Flash point and fire point PROJECT & SEMINAR P 808 0+3 Each student has to undertake a short project under the supervision of a guide. A consolidated report of the project work in the form of a dissertation has to be submitted after the completion of the work. The assessment of the project work will be based on the daytoday performance of the student, knowledge, aptitude, sincerity, the quality & content of the project report and seminar & vivavoce. 0+3
VIVA VOCE P 809 A vivavoce will be conducted as a part of the university examination to assess the student’s overall ability and knowledge in the field of Polymer Engineering and allied subjects. The candidate has to present the project report, seminar paper and educational tour report for this examination.
418
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY ENGINEERING BRANCH
419
THIRD SEMESTER
420
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  II RT301 3+1+0 Module 1 Mathematical Logic – Statements, connectives – Well formed formulas – Tautologies. Equivalence of formulas  Duality law Tautological implications – Normal forms – the theory of inference for the statement. Calculus – validity . Consistency, Theorem proving – the predicate calculus – Inference Theory of the predicate calculus. Module 2 Number Theory: Prime and relatively prime numbers – modular arithmetic – Fermat’s and Euler’s theorems – testing for primability – Euclids algorithm – discrete logarithms. Relations & Functions – Properties of binary relations – Equivalence relations and partitions – Functions and pigeon hole principle. Module 3 Algebraic systems – general properties – Lattices as a partially ordered set – some properties of lattices – lattices as algebraic systems – sub lattices – direct product – homomorphism – some special lattices. Module 4 Discrete Numeric Functions & generating Functions, Recurrence relations – Manipulations of Numeric functions – generating functions – Recurrence – relations – Linear recurrence relations with constant coefficients – Homogenious solutions – Particular solutions – Total solutions – solutions by the method of generating functions. Module 5 Graph Theory: Basic concept of graphs, subgraphs, connected graphs, Paths, Cycles, Multigraph and Weighted graph – Trees – spanning trees. References 1. Elements of Discrete Mathematics  C.L.Lieu. McGraw Hill. 2. Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer Science  J.P. Trembly, R. Manohar. McGraw Hill. 3. Discrete Mathematics  Richard Johnsoubaugh (Pearson Education Asia) 4. Discrete Mathematical Structures  Bernard Kolman, Robert C. Bushy, Sharon Cutler Ross, Pearson Education Asia. 5. A first look at Graph Theory  John Clark & Derek Allan Holton, Allied Publishers. 6. Cryptography and network security principles and practice  William Stallings.
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS T 302 Module 1 421 3+1+0
Introduction:  The resistance, capacitance and inductance parameters. Active element conventions, Dot convention for coupled circuits. Topological description of networks. The network equationsKirchoff’s laws – source transformations. Loop variable analysis. Duality State variable analysis. Examples. Module 2 First order differential equations – solutions. Time constants. The integrity factor – examples – Initial conditions in elements Geometrical Interpretation of derivation. Evaluating initial conditions. Initial State of a network. Module 3 Second order equations – internal excitation. The Laplace Transformation – Basic theorems – examples. Transform of signal waveforms – Shifted unit sep function – Ramp and Impulse function. Waveform Synthesis – Initial and final value – Convolution as a summation Module 4 Impedance function – Concept of Computer frequency. Transform Impedance and transform circuits, series and parallel combinations of elements. Theorem – Super position, reciprocity, Thevenins and Norton’s theorems – proof and examples. Module 5 Network functions – Terminal pairs – one port and two port networks – Ladder networks – General networks. Poles and zeros. Pole – zero locations for transfer functions. Pole – zero plot – domain behavior, stability. Two port parameters – two port variable – short circuit admittance parameters – open circuit impedance parameters – transmission parameters – hybrid parameters – parallel connection of two port networks. Text Book 1. Network Analysis – M. E. Van Valkenburg – PHI References 1. 2. 3. 4. Introductory Circuit Theory – Errist A. Guillemin – John Wiley & Sons Network Analysis and synthesis – Franklin F Kuo – John Wiley & Sons Basic Network Theory – Paul M. Chirlian – Mc Graw Hill Electric Circuit Analysis, 2nd Edition – S.N.Sivanadam, Vikas Publications
SOLID STATE ELECTRONICS RT 303 Module 1 2+1+0
422
Transistor – Biasing – Stability – Thermal runaway. Transistor As an amplifier – RC coupled amplifier, Frequency Response, Gain Bandwidth relation – Cascading of transistors – cascade Darlington pair – emitter follower. Module 2 FET, FET amplifier – MOSFET, depletion and enhancement type – source drain characteristics and transfer characteristics. Module 3 Oscillators – Concept of feed back – Transistorised phase shift oscillator – wein bridge Oscillator – Hartley Oscillator – Colpits Oscillator (Operation and Expression for frequency) Module 4 Clipping, Clamping, Integration, Differentiation – Astable, Bistable and Monostable Multivibrators – Sweep generators, Simple Bootstrap sweep generators. Module 5 Power supplies & Special semi conductor devices – Regulator power supplies – IC regulated Power supplies, 7805, 7905, LM317 – LED, LCD, Photodiode, Photo transistor, opto coupler. Seven segment display, SCR, UJT (basic concepts only), DIAC, TRIAC. References 1. Integrated Electronics  Millman and Halkias, McGraw Hill. 2. Pulse Digital and Switching wave forms  Millman and Taub. 3. Electronics Devices & Circuits  Boylsted & Neshelsky, Pearson Education. PROBLEM SOLVING AND COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 3+1+0
RT 304
Module 1 Problem solving with digital Computer  Steps in Computer programming  Features of a good program  Modular Programming  Structured  Object Oriented  Top down and bottom up approaches  Algorithms  Flowchart  Pseudocode, examples Module2 C fundamentals:  Identifiers, keywords, data types, operators, expressions, data Input and Output statements, simple programming in C.
Module 3 Control statements & Functions: If  else, for, while, do  while, switch, break & continue statements, nested loops. Functions  parameter passing  void functions Recursion – Macros. Module4 Structured data types: Single dimensional arrays  multidimensional arrays, strings, structures & unions  Program for bubble sort. 423
Module 5 Pointers & files  Declaration, passing pointers to a functions Accessing array elements using pointers  Operations on pointers  Opening & Closing a file  Creating & Processing a file, Command line arguments. Text 1. Programming with C  Byron S. Gottfried, Tata McGraw Hill References 1. Computer Programming in C  Kerninghan & Ritchie, PHI 2. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C  Ashok N. Kamthan, Pearson Eduacation 3. Let us C  Yeaswanth Khanetkar, BPB 4. Programming in C  Stephen C. Kochan, CBS publishers 5. Using C in Program Design  Ronald Leach, Prism Books Pvt. Ltd, Bangalore 6. Mastering Turbo C  Bootle, BPB Publications 7. Programming and Problem Solving with PASCAL  Micheal Schneider, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 8. Pointers in C  Yeaswanth Khanetkar, PBP 9. C Programming  A Modern Approach  K.N. Iling W.W. Norton & Company 10. Newyork Structured and Object Oriented Problem Solving using C++  Andrew C Staugaard Jr., PHI HUMANITIES RT 305 PART A: PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT Module 1 Scientific Management, Evolution of management theory, Contributions of Taylor, Gilbreth, Gantt, Emerson, Definition and functions of management Authority, Responsibility, Delegation and Span of control, Types of structures of Organisation – Types of Business firms, Job evaluation and merit rating, Wages – Types of incentives. Module 2 Procedure for ISO and ISI certification – Design, Development and implementation of reengineering  Inspection – SQC control charts – quality assurance – TQM – ZERO defects. PART B: ENGINEERING ECONOMICS Module 3 The Indian financial system – Reserve bank of India, functions – commercial banking system, profitability of public sector banks, development financial institutions – IDBI, ICICI, SIDBI, IRBI – Investment institutions – UTI, Insurance companies – The stock market – functions – Recent trends. Module 4 Indian Industries  Industrial pattern  structural transformation – industrial growth – inadequacies of the programme of industrialization – large and small scale industries – industrial sickness and Government policy – industrial labour – influence of trade unions. Module 5 424 2+1+0
The tax frame work – Direct and indirect taxes – impact and incidence – progressive and regressive – functions of the tax system – Black money – magnitude and consequences – Public debt – Debt position of the Central and State Governments – Deficit financing – revenue deficit and fiscal deficit – Problems associated with deficit financing. References 1. 2. 3. 4. T 306 Management  Stoner, Freeman and Gilbert. Engineering Managemt  Mazda, Pearson Education. Indian Economy  Ruddar Datt, S. Chand and Company Ltd. A.N. Agarwal  Indian Economy Problems of Development and Planning, Wishwa Prakashan. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 3+1+0 Module 1 Review of number Systems – Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal – Conversion, Binary codes – BCD, Self complementing, Excess – 3 and Gray code, Alphanumeric codes Boolean Algebra – Postulates, Switching function, Sum of Product, Product of Sum, switching circuits, simplification – rules, laws and theorems, Karnaugh map, Completely and incompletely specified functions, Quine – Mc Clauskey method. Logic gates, Realization using logic gates, Design with NAND and NOR gates. Module 2 Combinational logic circuits – adder – half and full, subtractor – half and full, Serial & Parallel adders, Carry save adder, Look ahead carry adder, BCD adder, Multiplexers, Encoders, Demultiplexers, Decoders, Comparators, Implementation of logic functions using multiplexers and decoders. Module 3 Logic families – positive and negative logic, TTL NAND – analysis – characteristics, open collector gate, tristate gates, ECL & IIL logic (Brief explanation only), CMOS – Inverter, NAND, NOR, Characteristics, properties, Comparison of logic families, Typical IC’s. Module 4 Sequential logic Circuits – classification, flip flops – SR, JK, Master slave, D, T. applications, Truth table and Excitation table, Conversion of one type of flip flop to another. Memories – ROM organization of a ROM, Programmable ROMs, EPROM, EEPROM, PLD – PLA and PAL, RAM – basic structure, static and dynamic RAM. Module 5 Shift registers – SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, universal shift register, applications, Ring counter, Johnson Counter. Binary counters – Asynchronous and Synchronous – Design, decade, UpDown counters, Typical counter IC’s. Text Book 1. Digital Electronics and Logic Design  B. Somanathan Nair  PHI 2002 2. Digital Fundamentals, 8th Edition  Floyd, Pearson Education. 425
References 1. Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals, 2nd Edn.  Morris Mano & Charles R. Kime, Pearson Education. 2. Digital Integrated Electronics  Taub and Shilling, McGraw Hill. 3. Digital Logic – Applications and Design  John.M.Yarbrough Vikas Thomson Learning C PROGRAMMING LAB T 307 0+0+4
1. Familiarization with computer system, Processor, Peripherals, Memory etc. 2. Familiarization of operating systemDOS, Windows etc. (use of files directories, internal commands, external commands, compilers, file manager, program manager, control panel etc.) 3. Familiarization with word processing packages like MS Excel, MS Access, MS PowerPoint and MS Word. 4. Programming experiments in C to cover control structuresfunctionsarraysStructurespointers and files. (Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT304 can be included.)
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB T308 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 0+0+4 Characteristics – Diode, Zener Diode, Transistor, FET, UJT, Determination of parameters. Rectifiers with filters Half Wave, Full wave& Bridge Simple regulator circuits series regulator. Design of a single stage RC coupled amplifier. Determination of Bandwidth, Input & Output Impedances. Wave shaping. Design of clipping, clamping, RC differentiator and Integrator. Design of Astable multivibrator for specified time period sharpening edges. Simple sweep circuits. RC Phase shift oscillator. Wein bridge oscillator.
426
FOURTH SEMESTER
427
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  III CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0 Module 1 Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients  Finding P.I. by the method of variation of parameters –Cauchy’s equations Linear Simultaneous eqnssimple applications in engineering problems. Module 2 Partial Differential Equations  formation by eliminating arbitary constants and arbitary Functions solution of Lagrange Linear Equations –Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave equation. Module 3 Fourier Transforms:  Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine & Cosine transforms  inverse transforms  transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no proof) – Parsevals Identity  simple problems. Module 4 Probability and statistics: Binomial law of probability  The binomial distribution, its mean and variance  poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution  its mean and variance fitting of binomial & poisson distributions  normal distribution  properties of normal curve standard normal curve  simple problems in binomial, poisson and normal distributions. Module 5 Population & Samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) –Sampling distribution of variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance  Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – Test of significance for single proportion, difference proportion, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected) References 1. Higher Engineering Mathematics  B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers 2. Engineering Mathematics Vol.II 3rd year Part A & B  M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing Company 3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations  Ian N.Sneddon.,McGrawhill International Edn. 4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers – Richard A Johnson, Pearson Education Asia / PHI 5. A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II) – Bali and Iyengar, Laxmi Publications Ltd. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia DATA STRUCTURES & ALGORITHMS T402 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction, Data structures, AlgorithmsAnalysis of algorithms, Time & Space Complexity, Big O notation, Complexity calculation of simple algorithms. 428
Basic data structuresArrays, Records, Sparse matrix representation & addition using arrays, Polynomial representation & addition using arrays, Stacks & QueuesSequential Implementation, Circular queue, Priority queue & D queue. Module 2 Linked lists Linked stacks and queues, Doubly linked list, applications, Circular linked list, Polynomial representation using linked list Module 3 Treesbasic terminologybinary treebinary search treeinsertion, search, traversal, deletion, need for balancing, Balanced treesAVL Trees & B Trees (basic idea only) Module 4 Graphs –representation, traversal, applications Hashing Hashing functions, Collision resolution Dynamic memory management, Storage allocation and compaction. Module 5 Selection sort, insertion sort, bubble sort, radix sort, tree sort, heap sort, quick sort & merge sort Sequential search, binary search, Interpolation search References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Introduction to Data Structures with Applications  Tremblay & Sorenson, TMH Data Structures in C & C++  Tanenbaum, et., al., Pearson Education Classic Data Structures – Samanta, PHI Data Structures and Algorithms – O.G.Kakde and U.A.DeshpandeISTE Learning material Data Structures and Algorithms in C++ Adam Drozdek, Vikas Thomson Learning. Data Structures and Program design in C  Robert L Kruse, et.al., Pearson Education Introduction to Algorithms – Thomas.H.CoremanPHI Fundementals of Data Structures in C++  Horrowits and Sahni Galgotia Algorithms + Datastructures = Program NiklausWirth, PHI
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS & APPLICATIONS T 403 2+1+0 Module 1 Operational Amplifiers – Block diagram, Equivalent circuit, Ideal Op Amp characteristics, Nonideal Op Amp  finite open loop gain, offset voltage, bias current, drift, frequency response, band width, CMRR, circuit stability and slew rate. Inverting, Non Inverting Amplifier, Integrator. Differential Amplifiers, Instrumentation Amplifiers, V to I and I to V converters, Precision rectifiers. Module 2 429
Active Filters: Butterworth and Chebyshev filters I & II order filters – low pass, high pass, band pass, band reject, filter design. Comparators, Oscillators, Multivibrators, Waveform generators. Module 3 D/A converters Weighted resistor, R2R networks, Hybrid converters . A/D converters Successive approximation, Integrating ADC, Dual slope, Flash converters (parallel), Analog multipliers. Module 4 Voltage regulators voltage references, block diagram of linear voltage regulators, voltage regulator ICs and their design, three terminal voltage regulators, negative voltage regulators, dual tracking and switching regulators. Module 5 PLL: Operating principle, lock range and capture range, applications of PLL, building blocks of PLL, LM 565 and its applications. Signal generators monolithic waveform generators. IC power amplifiers. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. OPAMPS and Linear Integrated Circuits, 4rd Edn.  Ramakant A.Gayakwad, Pearson Education OPAMPS and Linear Integrated Circuits, 6th Edn.  Coughlin and Driscoll, Pearson Education. Microelectronics Circuits  Sedra & Smith, Oxford University Press Integrated Circuits  K.R.Botkar, Khanna Publishers. Microelectronics  Jacob Millman & Arvin Grabel, McGraw Hill. Electronics Circuits  Donald L.Schlling and Charles Belove
COMPUTER SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE T 404 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction Organization & Architecture, Functional Units of a computer, CPUMemory connection, Review of basic operational concepts like CPU registers, Instruction formats, Addressing modes, Instruction cycle, Interrupt, Operating system, Interconnection structures, Layered view of a computer system. Internal architecture of a typical 8bit Microprocessor (Intel 8085), Signals, Registers, Machine cycles Module 2 Instruction set Instruction set of 8085, Addressing modesRegister, Direct, Immediate, Indirect and Implicit addressing, examples 430
Instruction types – Arithmetic, Logic, Data transfer, Branch, Stack, I/O and Machine control Instructions, examples (Assembly language programming not intended) Module 3 CPU organization. Processor OrganizationSingle bus and 2 bus organization, execution of a complete instruction, Hardwired and micro programmed control units, Sequencing, Horizonal & vertical microprogramming. ArithmeticReview of addition & subtraction techniques, Carry look ahead & Carry save addition, Multiplicationarray multiplier, Booth’s algorithm, DivisionRestoring & non Restoring division Module 4 Memory Organization. Memory Hierarchy, characteristics, Memory system considerations, High speed techniquesCache memory, Associative memory, Memory interleaving, Virtual memorypaging. Module 5 I/O Organization. I/O Module Functions & Structure, I/O Processor, I/O techniquesProgrammed I/O, Interrupt driven I/O, DMA Standard I/O interfaces: RS 232 C, GPIB, SCSI References 1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming & Applications – Ramesh S Gaonkar, Penram International 2. Computer Organization & Architecture William Stallings, Pearson Education. 3. Computer OrganizationHamacher, Vranesic & Zaky, Mc Graw Hill 4. Computer System ArchitectureMorris Mano, Pearson Education. 5. Computer Organization & DesignPal Chaudhari, PHI
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS LTA 405 2+1+0 Module 1 Dynamic Representation of Systems  Systems Attributes Causality linearity Stability timeinvariance. Special Signals Complex exponentials Singularity functions (impulse and step functions).. Linear TimeInvariant Systems: Differential equation representation convolution Integral. Discrete form of special functions. Discrete convolution and its properties. Realization of LTI system (differential and difference equations). Module 2 Fourier Analysis of Continuous Time Signals and Systems  Fourier Series Fourier Transform and properties Parseval’s theorem Frequency response of LTI systems. Sampling Theorem. Module 3
431
Fourier Analysis of Discrete Time Signals & Systems  DiscreteTime Fourier series DiscreteTime Fourier Transform (including DFT) and properties. Frequency response of discrete time LTI systems. Module 4 Laplace Transform  Laplace Transform and its inverse: Definition existence conditions Region of Convergence and properties Application of Laplace transform for the analysis of continuous time LTI system (stability etc.) Significance of poles & zeros ZTransform  ZTransform and its inverse: Definition existence Region of convergence and properties Application of ZTransform for the analysis of Discrete time LTI systems Significance of poles and zeros. Module 5 Random Signals  Introduction to probability. Bayes Theorem concept of random variableprobability density and distribution functions function of a random variable. MomentsIndependence of a random variable. Introduction to random process. Auto and cross correlation. widesense stationarity power spectral density White noise Random processes through LTI systems. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Signals and Systems: Oppenheim Alan V Willsky Alan. S Pearson Edn. Communication Systems: Haykin Simon John Wiley. Signals and Systems: I J Nagrarth Tata Mc Graw Hill. Signals and Systems: Farooq Husain Umesh pub. Adaptive signal processing: W Bernad Pearson Edn.
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++ T 406 3+1+0 Module 1 Need for OOP Characteristics of Object Oriented Language Basic concepts and terminologyC++ and object oriented programming C++ Programming basics, loops and decisions Module 2 Structures Structure specifier, accessing, nested structures, structures and classes. Functions Declarations, definition, argument passing. Variables and storage classes Module 3 Objects and classes –creation and usage, member functions, constructors and destructors ArraysDefinition, accessing, Arrays as class members, arrays of objects Module 4 432
Operator overloading, Function overloading, Inheritance, Classification of inheritance, virtual functions, PolymorphismRun time and compile time polymorphism. Module 5 Advanced OO concepts iterations and sequences, Virtual destructors, Virtual base classes, Templates, exceptions and exceptions handling, standard library design. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Object Oriented Programming in C++: Robert Lafore, Galgotia Publications C++ Programming language: Bjarne Stroustrup, Pearson Education Object Oriented Programming in C++: Nabajyoti Barkakati, PHI C++ Primer: Lippman and Zajoie, Pearson Education C++ for You++: Maria Litwin & Garry Litwin, Vikas Publishing Object Oriented Programming Using C++: Ira Pohl, Pearson Education. Standard C++ with Object Oriented Programming: Paul.S.Wang, Vikas Publishing.
C++ & DATA STRUCTURES LAB T 407 Using C++ Modern Compiler 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Desk Calculator example. Name spaces and Exceptions Programming with Multiple files Using classes, derived classes Templates Standard Library, standard containers, algorithms, Strings, Streams Using a Debugger 0+0+4
(Any experiment based on the syllabus of T 402 can be substituted.) Simple experiments based on the syllabus of T 402  Arrays, Stack, Queues, Trees, Simple sorting and searching techniques.
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB 433
T 408
0+0+4
1. Characteristics of TTL and CMOS gates. 2. Realization of logic circuits using TTL and CMOS NAND/NOR gates. 3. Arithmetic Circuits Half adder, Full adder, 4bit adder/subtractor. 4. Realization of RS, T, D, JK and MasterSlave Flipflops using gates and study of flipflop ICs. 5. Shift Registers, Ring Counter and Johnson Counter. 6. Counters synchronous and asynchronous, using flipflops. 7. Operational amplifiers Measurement of parameters. 8. Inverting and noninverting amplifiers, Summing amplifiers. 9. Weinbridge Oscillator. 10. Triangular and square wave generators using OPAMPs. 11. IC Voltage regulator, fold back protection. 12. IC power amplifier 13. VCO, PLL 14. Filters LP, HP and BP, Notch Filter.
434
FIFTH SEMESTER
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  IV RT 501 3+1+0 Module 1 QUEUEING THEORY General Concepts  Arrival pattern  service pattern  Queue disciplines  The Markovian model M/M/1/$, M/M/1/N  steady state solutions – Little’s formula. Module 2 NUMERICAL METHODS Introduction  solution of algebraic and transcendental equations  Bisection method  Method of false position  Newton’s method  Approximate solution of equations – Horner’s method solutions of linear simultaneous equations  Iterative methods of solutionJacobi’s method  Gauss Seidal method. Module 3 FINITE DIFFERENCES Meaning of operators – Δ, , μ ,δ ,E  interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula Langrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolation formula  numerical differenciation first and second order derivatives using forward and backward formula  numerical integration trapizoidal rule  Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rules. Module 4 LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM 435
Graphical solution of LPP general problem  solution of LPP method – duality in LPP.
using simplex method  Big M
Module 5 TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEM Balanced transportation problem  initial basic feasible solution Vogel’s approximation method optimum solution by Modi method  Assignment problem  Hungerian techniques References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Operations Research  P.K. Gupta & D.S. Hira, S.Chand & Co. Ltd Advanced Engg Mathematics  Ervin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Higher Engg. Mathematics  Dr. B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers. Operations research Schaum’s Outline Series  Richard Bronson, Operations research  Panneer Selvam, PHI Numerical Methods in Science & Engg. National Publishing Co. M.K. Venkataraman,
OPERATING SYSTEM CONCEPTS T 502 4+1+0 Module 1 Introduction O.S. Objectives and functions, evolution of O.S, Basic concepts and terminology, O.S. hierarchy, Different types of O.S – multiprogramming, time sharing, real time, microkernel, multithreading, multiprocessing, distributed O.S etc. (basic idea only), Windows – 2000 overview, UNIX overview. Module 2 Process Management Process – states, model, description, process hierarchy, scheduling, scheduler organization, scheduling strategies, Process synchronization – interacting processes, coordinating processes, critical section, deadlock, semaphores. Processes and Threads, Multithreading, Multiprocessing, Brief study of process management in UNIX and Win 2000. Module 3 Memory Management Memory management requirements, Techniques, Partitioning, Paging, Segmentation, Virtual memory – hardware and software support, Brief study of memory management in UNIX, Linux, Win 2000 and Solaris. Module 4 I/O and File Management Design issues, Model of I/O organization, Disk scheduling policies and algorithms – RSS, FIFO, PRI, LIFO, SSTF, SCAN, CSCAN, FSCAN etc. , Disk cache, File management systems, file 436
system architecture, file organization and access, Directory structure, File allocation, sharing and security, Brief study of file management in Unix and Win 2000. Module5 Distributed Systems Advantages, Disadvantages, comparison of Network and distributed O.S, ClientServer architecture, Distributed message passing – RPC, Distributed Process management, Distributed memory management. Clustering – cluster computer architecture, win 2000 cluster server. Text Books 1. Operating systems, 4th Edition  William Stallings, Pearson Edn. 2. Operating system Concepts  Silber Schatz, John Wiley. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Operating Systems  Nutt, Pearson Edn. Modern Operating System  Tannenbaum, PHI Understanding Operating System  Flynn, McHoes, Thomson Publications. System Programming and Operating System  Dhamdhere, TMH. Guide to Operating Systems Michel Parmer & Michel Walters, Vikas Thomson Learning
DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS RT503 3+1+0 Module 1 Basic Concepts  Purpose of database systemsComponents of DBMS – DBMS Architecture and Data Independence Data modeling  Entity Relationship Model, Relational – Network Hierarchical and object oriented modelsData Modeling using the Entity Relationship Model. Module2 Structure of relational databases – relational databases – relational algebra tuple relational calculus. Data definition with SQL, insert, delete and update statements in SQL – views – data manipulation with SQL Module 3 Introduction to Transaction Processing Transaction and System Concepts Desirable properties of Transactions Schedules and Recoverability Serializability of SchedulesQuery processing and Optimization Concurrency Control assertions – triggers. Oracle case study: The basic structure of the oracle system – database structure and its manipulation in oracle storage organization in oracle. Programming in PL/SQL Cursor in PL/SQL Module 4 Database Design– Design guidelines– Relational database design – Integrity Constraints – Domain Constraints Referential integrity – Functional Dependency Normalization using Functional Dependencies, Normal forms based on primary keys general definitions of Second and Third Normal Forms. Boyce Codd Normal Form– Multivalued Dependencies and Forth Normal Form – Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form – Pitfalls in Relational Database Design. 437
Module 5 Distributed databases: Distributed Database Concepts Data Fragmentation, Replication and Allocation Techniques Different Types Query Processing – semijoin Concurrency Control and Recovery. Text Book 1. Fundamentals of Database System  Elmasri and Navathe (3rd Edition),Pearson Education Asia References Database System Concepts  Henry F Korth, Abraham Silbershatz , Mc Graw Hill 2nd edition. An Introduction to Database Systems  C.J.Date (7th Edition) Pearson Education Asia Database Principles, Programming and Performance – Patrick O’Neil, Elizabeth O’Neil An Introduction to Database Systems  Bibin C. Desai MICROPROCESSORS T 504 3+1+0 1. 2. 3. 4. Module 1 Evolution of 8086 family of microprocessors – 8088 to Itanium, Internal architecture of 8086, block diagram, Registers, flags, Programming model, 8086 and 8088, 8086 memory organization, segmented memory, Physical address calculation, Memory Addressing, Addressing modes. Module 2 Instruction set, Classification of instructions – Data transfer, Arithmetic and Logic instructions, Program control instructions, Simple programs in 8086 Assembly language. IBM PC Assembly Language Programming, Program Development Tools – DEBUG, MASM, TASM etc. Module 3 8086 hardware design – bus buffering and latching, bus timing – read and write, timing diagram, ready and wait states, Minimum mode and Maximum mode, 8086 Memory interface, address decoding. Module 4 Comparative study of the features of the 8086, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium Pro, Pentium II, Pentium III and Pentium IV Processors. Introduction to Micro controllers – architecture, applications. Module 5 Study of Peripheral chips 8255 – Programmable peripheral interface 8251  USART 8259 – Programmable interrupt controller. 8279 – Programmable keyboard and display interface. 8237 – DMA controller. 8254 – Programmable Interval Timer Brief study of interfacing of Stepper motor, keyboard, 7segment display and ADC with the Microprocessors. 438
References 1. The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium II, Pentium III and Pentium IV processors. Architecture, Programming and Interfacing, 6th Edn – Barry B Bray, Pearson Education Asia 2. The 80X86 family, 3rd Edn  John Uffenbeck, Pearson Education. 3. Micro computer Systems  The 8086/8088 Family, Architecture, Programming & Design Liu & Gibson – PHI. 4. IBM PC Assembly Language Programming Peter Abel, PHI 5. Microprocessors and Interfacing  Douglas V. Hall, TMH 6. Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals Roy & Bhurchandi, TMH LANGUAGE PROCESSORS RT 505 3+1+0 Module 1 Assembler Overview of the assembly process Design of two pass assembler Single pass assembler Macros – Macro definition and usage schematics for Macro expansion – Design of a Macro preprocessor Macro Assembler. Module 2 Introduction to Compilers Compilers and Translators – Structure of a compiler – lexical analysis – syntax analysis – context free grammars – basic parsing techniques top down and bottom up parsing (brief idea only)Recursive Decent parser – Shift reduce parser. Module 3 Storage allocation Data descriptors Static and Dynamic storage allocation – Storage allocation and access in block structured programming languages – Array allocation and access Compilation of expressions – Handling operator priorities – Intermediate code forms for expressions –code generator. Module 4 Compilation of Control Structures Control transfer Conditional and Iterative constructs Procedure calls – Code optimization – Optimization transformations – Local optimization and global optimization – Compiler writing tools – Incremental Compilers Module 5 Loaders and Linkers Loading – Program relocatability – linking – various loading schemes – linkage editing – Design of linkage editor – dynamic loading – overlays – dynamic linking. Text Books 1. System Programming and Operating Systems – Dhamdhere Mc Graw Hill 2. Principles of Compiler Design  Aho A.V., Ullman Narosa Publications. References 1. Systems programming  Donovan, Mc. Graw Hill. 2. System Software – An Introduction to Systems Programming  Leland L. Beck, Addison Wesley. 439
3. Compilers – Principles Techniques And Tools – Aho, Sethi, Ullman, Pearson Education Asia
DATA COMMUNICATION RT 506 2+1+0 Module 1 Communication concepts – Analog modulation – Various schemes – AM, PM, FM –Sampling theorem  Analog pulse modulation – PAM, PWM, PPM – Generation of various modulated waves (Block diagram only) –Digital Pulse modulation (PCM). Module 2 Multiplexing  Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) – Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), Synchronous Time Division Multiplexing –Statistical time Division multiplexing – Key Techniques  ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK  Channel capacity  Shannon`s Theorem. Module 3 Digital data transmission – Serial, Parallel, Synchronous, Asynchronous and Isochronous transmission. Transmission mode Simplex  Half duplex – Full duplex, Noise different types of noise – Basic Principles of Switching (circuit, packet, message switching) Module 4 Error detection and Correcting codes: Hamming code – Block codes and convolution codes – ARQ techniques – Transmission codes – Baudot – EBCDIC and ASCII codes – Barcodes. Module 5 Terminal handling – Point to point, Multidrop lines. Components of computer communication – Concentrators  Front end Processor – Transmission media – Guided media – Twisted pair cable, coaxial cable, fibre optic cable. GSM service and GSM system architecture. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Electronic communication system  Kennedy, Mc Graw Hill. Principles of Communication System  Taub & Schilling Mc Graw Hill. Introduction to Data Communications & Networking – Behurouz & Forozan Mc Graw Hill. Data Communication, Computer Networks & Open Systems  Fred Halsall Pearson Education Asia Principles & Application of GSM  Vijay K. Garg Pearson Education Asia Modern Digital & Analog Communication Systems – B.P Lathi Prism Books Pvt. Ltd. Computer Networks  A.S. Tanenbaum, PHI Data and Computer Communication  William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia Communication Engineering  A. Kumar, Umesh Publications
440
DBMS LAB T 507 Experiments for performing the following: 1. Creation, Updating, Deletion of tables, indexes, views, reports, Queries, Relational Operations, Trigger 2. Importing and Exporting Data. 3. Use of Link Libraries. 4. Natural Language Support 5. Administration. 6. ODBC Interface 7. Exposure to Data Base management packages (Preferably on 4 GLs like ORACLE/INTEGRA/SYBASE, Foxpro or the latest packages) 8. Exercise in Pay Roll, Inventory Management, Library Management using the packages. (Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT 503 can be substituted) 0+0+3
MICROPROCESSOR LAB T 508 1. Study of 8 bit /16 bit microprocessor kit. 2. Assembly language programming with 8 bit /16 bit Microprocessor kit. 3. Interfacing experiments such as: a. Stepper motor control. b. DAC/ADC interface. c. Data Acquisition Board. d. Keyboard interfacing. e. Video display board. f. LED moving graphic display board. g. Serial communication. 4. IBM PC Assembly language programming using MASM/TASM. 0+0+3
441
SIXTH SEMESTER
442
PROJECT MANAGEMENT T601 3+1+0 Module 1 PROJECT PLANNING Overview – Capital expenditure  Phases of capital budgeting – Project development cycle – 7s of project management – Requirements of a project manager – Forms of project organization. Module 2 PROJECT ANALYSIS Market Analysis – Technical Analysis  Financial Analysis – Risk Analysis – Social cost Benefit Analysis. Module 3 CONTROL OF PROJECT Control Systems – Control of major constraints – Project management software & information systems. REVIEW: Performance of Evaluation – Abaudonment Analysis – Behavioral issues in Project Management Module 4 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT Quality systems – ISO 9000 series – ISI – Benchmarking – Quality Function development (QFD) – Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) – ISO 14000. Module 5 CONCEPTS IN SAMPLING Sampling designs and schemes – Errors in sampling – Simple random sample – stratified random sample – Cluster sample. Sample size destination – Estimating population mean – Estimating population proportion. References 1. Projects preparation, Apprisal, Budgeting & Implementation – Prasanna Chandra – Tata McGraw Hill 2. PROJECTS – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation & Review  Prasanna Chandra – Tata McGraw Hill 3. Project Management  Harvey Maylor  Pearson Education 4. Total Quality Management – Dale H. Besterfield – Pearson Education 5. Quality control and Improvement – Amitava Mitra – Pearson Education 6. Quality assurance and TQM – Jain & Chitale – Khanna Publishers
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING RT 602 443 2+1+ 0
Module 1 Introduction to Software engineering Introduction – Software and software Engg. Phases in software developmentSoftware development process modelsRole of Management in software development –Role of Matrics and measurement –Software requirement specification(SRS)  Problem Analysis  validation . Module 2 Project Planning Cost Estimation – Uncertainties – models – COCOMO model – Project scheduling – average duration estimation – Project scheduling and milestones – staffing and personal plan – Rayleigh curve – personnel plan – team structure – software configuration – management plans – quality assurance plans – verification and validation – inspections and reviews  project monitoring plans time sheets – reviews – cost schedule – milestone graph – risk management. Module 3 System Design Design Principles – Problem partitioning and hierarchy – abstraction – modularity – top down and bottom_up – strategies – module level concepts  coupling  cohesion – structured design methodology  verification  matrics. Module 4 Coding Topdown and Bottomup  Structured Programming  Information Hiding  Programming style Internal Documentation – Verification  Code Reading  Static Analysis  Symbolic execution Proving Correctness  Code inspections – Unit testing. Module 5 Testing Testing fundamentals  Functional and Structured Testing  Testing Process  Comparison of Verification and Validation Techniques  Reliability assessment  Programmer Productivity  Error removal efficiency. Text Book 1. An integrated approach to Software Engineering  Pankaj Jalote, Narosa Publication References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Software Engineering  Roger S. Pressman, Tata McGraw Hill Software Engineering  Ian Sommervilla, Pearson Education Software Engineering Theory and Practice Shari Lawrence, Pearson Education Asia Fundamentals of Software Engineering –Rajib Mall, PHI Fundamentals of Software Engineering – Carlo Ghezzi, Mehdi Jazayeri, PHI
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LTA 603 3+1+0 Module1 Review of signals and systems. Introduction  advantages and limitations of Digital Signal Processing. Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) Filters  Signal Flowgraph Basic Network structure for IIR filter Direct Cascade Parallel Forms. Design of IIR Digital filters from analog filters444
Butterworth design Chebyshev design design based on numerical solutions of differential equations Impulse Invariant Transformation. Module 2 Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filters: Linear phase FIR filters Frequency response of linear phase FIR filters  Location of the zeros of linear phase FIR filters. Realization of FIR cascade  lattice designFourier Series method using windowsrectangular triangular or barlett windows hanninghamming Blackman Kaiser windows. Module 3 Discrete fourier Transform: PropertiesCircular convolution Linear Convolution using DFTrelation between Z Transform and DFT Fast Fourier Transform; decimation – in time and Frequency  FFT algorithms – General Computation using Radix 2 algorithm. Module 4 Finite word length effects in digital filters: Introduction Number Representation  Fixed PointSignMagnitude  One’scomplement Two’s  complement forms Addition of two fixed point numbers Multiplication in Fixed Point arithmetic  Floating point numbers Block floating point numbers quantization  truncation rounding  effects due to truncation and rounding Input quantization error  Product quantization error  Coefficient quantization error zeroinput limit cycle Oscillations  Overflow limit cycle Oscillations  Scaling Quantization in Floating Point realization IIR digital filters  Finite Word Length Effects in FIR Digital Filters Quantization effects in the Computation of the DFT quantization errors in FFT algorithms. Module 5 Applications of digital signal processing: Speech Processing speech analysis speech coding sub band coding channel vecoder homomorphic vecoder digital processing of audio signals Radar signal processing DSP based measurements systems. Equi ripple FIR design PCM DSP chips a general study. References Digital signal processing: Ifechor Pearson edn. Desecrate time signal processing Oppenhiem Pearson edn. Digital signal processing: Oppenhiem and Sheffer PHI Introduction to Digital signal processing: Johny R Johnson Digital signal processing: Proakis and Manolakis. Digital signal processing: P Ramesh Babu Scitech Pub. COMPUTER NETWORKS RT 604 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction:  ISOOSI Reference Model – TCP/IP Reference Model – Comparison Network hardwareRepeaters, Routers, Bridges, Gateways, Hub, Cable Modem. Physical Layer:  Transmission Media– ISDN system Architecture – Communication Satellites – geostationary satellites  Medium Earth Orbit Satellites Low earth orbit satellites– Satellite v/s Fiber Module 2 445
Data Link Layer:  Design issuesError Detection and correction – Elementary Data link protocolsSliding window protocols. . LAN Protocols:  Static & Dynamic channel allocation in LAN’s and WAN’s, Multiple access protocols – ALOHA – Pure ALOHA – Slotted ALOHA – Carrier Sense Multiple Access protocols – persistent and nonpersistent CSMA – CSMA with collision detection – IEEE 802.3 standards for LAN Module 3 Network layer: Virtual Circuits, Datagrams, Routing Algorithm – Optimality principle  Flooding Flow Based Routing  Link state routing – Distance vector routing – Multicasting – Link state multicasting – Distance vector multicasting  Congestion Control Algorithms – General principles – Packet discarding – Choke packets  Congestion prevention policies – Traffic shaping – Leaky bucket algorithm – Flow specifications – jitter control Module 4 Transport Layer:  Transport Service  Elements of transport protocols – Internet Transfer Protocols UDP and TCP – ATM – Principle characteristics. Module 5 Application Layer: Domain name system – DNS name space – Resource records – Name servers – operation of DNS  Electronic Mail – MIME Mobile networks:  Mobile telephone systems, Bluetooth  Components – Error correction – Network topology – Piconet and scatternet – L2CAP layers – Communication in Bluetooth networks References 1. Computer Networks (Fourth Edition): Andrew S.Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia/ PHI 2. An Introduction to computer networking: Kenneth C. Mansfield Jr., James L. Antonakos, PrenticeHall India 3. Communication Networks: Leon, Garcia, Widjaja Tata McGraw Hill. 4. Computer Networks (Second Edition): Larry L Peterson & Bruce S Davie, (Harcourt India) 5. Computer Networking: James F Kurose & Keith W Ross, Pearson Education 6. Introduction to Data Communications and Networking: Behrouz, Forouzan, McGraw Hill NETWORK COMPUTING RT 605 3+1+0 Module 1 HTML Documents Basic Tags for Font & Paragraph Formatting Lists, Tables, Frames, image Maps Cascading Style Sheets Style Element, Inline style sheets, Embedded style sheets, External Style sheets, CLASS Attribute, Absolute and relative positioning of elements, DIV & SPAN Tags. Module 2 Dynamic HTML Pages Client side scripting  Java Script – variables, Arithmetic operations – message boxes, Arrays, control statements, functions, event handling, document object model. Dynamic updating of pages with JAVA Script. Embedding ActiveX controls  using the structured graphics – ActiveX Control. 446
Module 3 Java programming – Features of Java, Creating & using classes in Java – Static classes – Inheritance – Final methods, variables and classes – Interfaces  Nested classes – Inner classes – Anonymous Inner classes – Exception handling – Creating & using exceptions, Multithreaded programs and thread synchronization, creating and using packages. Creating GUI with AWT and Swing – JDK1.1 event model Module 4 Network Programming with Java  Features of Java – Applets & Application – Life cycle of applets  Security features for applets  Inter applet communication – Threads & Thread synchronization – TCP/IP Programming with Java – Iterative & Concurrent servers. Datagrams, IP multicasting, RMI (Structure and Working of a simple RMI Program only) Module 5 HTTP Protocol working – HTTP methods, GET, PUT, DELETE, POST, HEAD Server side scripting – HTML Forms & CGI – GET & POST, Basic working of a CGI supported web server – Simple CGI program in C to validate user name & Password. Email: Working of SMTP and POP protocols (Overview only). Text Books Module 1,2,5 1. Internet and World Wide Web – How to program  Deitel, Deitel & Nieto, Pearson Education Asia 2. HTML, DHTML, Java Script, Perl, CGI  Evan Bayross, BPB
Module 3,4,5 1. Java 2 Complete reference  Herbert, Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill 2. The Java Programming Language 3rd Edition  Arnold, Gosling, Holmes, Pearson Education Asia 3. Using Java 2 Platform  Joseph Weber, PHI 4. Computer Networks  Tenanbaum, PHI/ Pearson Education Asia References 1. Unix Network Programming  Stevens W Richard, PHI 2. TCP/IP Protocol suite, 2/e  Behrouz A. Forouzan, TMH PERSONAL COMPUTER HARDWARE T 606 4+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to PC Hardware components – study of motherboards –Different types of ports, slots and connectorsAddon cardsPower supply– SMPS function & operations. Module 2 Storage Devices Floppy – Floppy Disk Controller  Disk Physical specification & operations – Disk magnetic properties – Cylinders – Clusters – Hard disks – Hard disk drive operation – Magnetic data storage 447
Sectors – Disk formatting – partitioning  Hard disk features – Hard disk data transfer modes – Programmed I/O – Direct memory access – Ultra DMA – Data addressing – Standard CHS addressing – Extended CHS addressing – Logical Block Addressing. Module 3 Optical Storage CD ROM, CD Technology, Sector layout, CDR, CDRW, CDROM, drive specifications data transfer rate – Access time – Constant linear velocity – constant angular velocity  Buffers – Interface – Magneto optical drives – WORM devices –DVD RAID – Holographic storage. Module 4 Memory Management in PC Parity – ECC – Static & Dynamic RAM – Memory Addressing – Segmented addressing  64 KB Limits – 640 KB barrier – Logical, segmented, virtual, linear and physical memory addresses – Extended and Expanded memory – Cache memory – Video memory – HMA  Flat memory model – Advanced memory technologies. Module 5 Bus Structures ISA, PCI, PCMCIA, AGP, USB, Hard Disk Interfaces – IDE, EIDE, ATA – Communication ports – Serial – Parallel port – Keyboard / Mouse Interface connectors. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PC Hardware Complete Reference  Craig Zacker & John Rourke, Tata McGraw Hill Inside the PC (8th Edition)  Peter Norton, Techmedia Publications The Indispensable PC Hardware Book  Messmer, Pearson Education Troubleshooting and Repairing Your PC  Corey Candler, Wiley Upgrading and repairing PC’s (4th edition)  Scott Mueller, Pearson Education IBM PC Assembly Language Programming  Abel, PHI PC Upgrading Maintenance & Trouble shooting guide  Dr. S. K. Chauhan, Kataria SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING LAB T607 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 0+0+3 Symbol table construction Single pass and two pass assembler. Macro processor module binder (with limited Instruction set) Lexical analyzer. Bottom Up and Top Down Parser. Code generation. Generation of code for linkers & loaders. Study on UNIX: UNIX Shell Programming, Basic exercises in Processor Management – concurrent processing – memory management – implementation of shared memory and semaphores for process synchronization – device management – dead lock handling, implementation of simple protocols substituted.)
(Any experiment according to the syllabus of T 502 and RT 505 can be
448
MINI PROJECT T608 0+0+3 The aim of the mini project is to prepare the students for the final year project. The topic for the mini project should be simple as compared to the main project, but should cover all the aspects of a complete project.
449
SEVENTH SEMESTER
450
OBJECT ORIENTED MODELING AND DESIGN RT 701 2+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: object oriented developmentmodeling concepts – object oriented methodology – models – object oriented themesObject Modeling– links and associations – advanced links and association concepts – generalization and inheritance  grouping constructs – a sample object modelAdvanced Object Modeling: aggregation – abstract classes – generalization as extension and restriction – multiple inheritance – metadata – candidate keys – constraints Module 2 Dynamic modeling: Events and states – Operations – Nested state diagrams – Concurrency – Advanced dynamic modeling concepts – A sample dynamic model – Relationship of Object and Dynamic models. Functional modeling: Functional models – Data Flow Diagrams  Specifying operations – Constraints – A sample functional model – Relation of functional to Object and Dynamic models. Module 3 Analysis: Analysis in object modeling, dynamic modeling and functional modeling, Adding operations Iterating the analysis System Design: Breaking system into subsystems  Identifying concurrencyallocating subsystems to processors and tasks, managing of data stores. Handling of global resources handling boundary conditionsCommon Architectural Frameworks Module 4 Object Design: Overview of Object design – Combining the three models – Designing algorithms – Design optimization – Implementation of control – Adjustment of inheritance  Design of association – Object representation – Physical packaging – Documenting design decisionsComparison of methodologies Module 5 Other Models: Booch’s Methodology Notations, models, concepts. Jacobson Methodologyarchitecture, actors and usecases, requirement model, Analysis Model, Design model, Implementation model and Test ModelUnified Modeling Language (UML). Text Books 1. Object Oriented Modeling and Design JamesRumbaugh, Prentice Hall India 2. Object Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications  Grady Booch, Pearson Education Asia References 1. Object Oriented Software Engineering  Ivan Jacobson, Pearson Education Asia 2. Object Oriented Software Engineering  Berno Bruegge, Allen H. Dutoit, Pearson Education Asia 3. Object Oriented Analysis and Design using UML  H. Srimathi, H. Sriram, A. Krishnamoorthy 4. Succeeding with the Booch OMT Methods A practical approach  Lockheed Martin, Addison Wesley 5. UML and C++ practical guide to Object Oriented development  Richard C.Lee & William, Prentice Hall India. 451
COMPUTER GRAPHICS RT 702 3+1+0 Module1 Introduction to Computer Graphics: Basic concepts in Computer Graphics – Applications of Computer Graphics, Interactive Graphics system – Raster scan and Random scan systems – Generating a raster image, Application of raster scan graphics. Video Display Devices, Display processors – Display files – graphical input & output devices. Module 2 2D Graphics: Line drawing algorithms – DDA, Bresenham’s – Bresenham’s Circle drawing algorithm  2D Transformations, Clipping – Line clipping – Polygon Clipping, Windowing. Module 3 3D Graphics: 3D display methods, 3D Object Representation – Polygon Surfaces – Quadratic surfaces – Spline Representations – Bezier Curves and Surfaces – BSpline Curves and Surfaces, 3D Transformations. Module 4 3D Rendering: ThreeDimensional ViewingProjections, Clipping, Visible Surface Detection – Classification of Visible surface detection algorithms – Backface Detection, Depth Buffer Method, Scanline Method. Surface Rendering MethodsBasic illumination Models – Polygon–rendering Methods, Gouraud Shading, RayTracing Methods. Module 5 Advanced Technologies: Fractals – Classification of Fractals – SelfSquaring Fractals, AnimationRaster Animation, Morphing. Text Book 1. Computer Graphics (C version)  Donald Hearn & Pauline Baker (Pearson Education Asia) References 1. Computer Graphics Donald Hearn & Pauline Baker (Prentice Hall of India) 2. Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics – William .N. Newman, Robert .F. Sproull (second edition), McGraw Hill edition 3. Computer Graphics Principles & Practice  Foley, VanDam, Feiner, Hughes (second edition in C), Addison Wesley 4. Fundamentals of Computer graphics &  D. P. Mukherjee, Prentice Hall of India multimedia 5. Java 2 complete reference  Herbert, Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill 6. Computer Graphics  Roy A Plastack & Gordon Kally (Schanmi Series McGraw Hill edition) MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS T 703 452 3+1+0
Module 1 Optical Fibre communication Advantages, Disadvantages, System block diagram, Fibre types, Cable configurations, Light propagation through optical fibre, Fibre configurations, Acceptance angle and acceptance cone, Cable losses, Light sources, Light detectors. Module 2 Microwave communication Advantages, Analog Vs Digital Microwave, Frequency modulated microwave radio system – Transmitter, Repeater, Receiver (block diagram only) Microwave terminal station – transmitter and receiver, path characteristics – fading. Module 3 Satellite Communication Satellite orbits, Geostationary satellites, Satellite classifications, Spacing, Frequency allocation, Satellite uplink and down link models (block diagram only), Earth station, Multiple accessing – FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, Satellite Radio Navigation, GPS (Basic idea only) Module 4 Mobile Communication Mobile communication services, Cellular telephone, Concepts – Cells, Frequency reuse, Interference, Cell splitting, Segmentation and Dualisation, Call system layout, Call processing, Analog and Digital Cellular Telephones, Block diagram of a typical transceiver, PCSS Mobile telephone system. Module 5 Advanced Concepts Concepts of Wireless LAN, ISDNProtocol, Architecture, BISDN, ATM Blue tooth Technology WAP and WWW Architecture, Protocols and Applications. Text Book 1. Electronic Communication Systems, Fundamentals Through Advanced, 4th Edn  Wayne Tomasi, Pearson Education. References 1. 2. 3. 4. T 704 Electronic Communication Systems, TMH, 4th Edition.  Kennedy Electronic Communications, PHI, 4th Edition.  Roddy & Coolen Mobile Communications  Jochen Schiller, Pearson Education. Electronic Communication systems, 3rd Edition  Frank R Dungan, VikasThomson Learning MULTIMEDIA TECHNIQUES 2+1+0 Module 1 INTRODUCTION Definition of multimedia, multimedia, hardware, software applications and software environments, Media Types  Analog and digital video, digital audio, music and animation  Analog & Digital video  Memory storage  Basic tools  Authoring tools. Module 2 BUILDING BLOCKS Text  Hyper text  Sound  Sound cards  Standards  Image  Image types  Image compression, RLE, JPEG, MPEG  Fractal and Wavelet Compressions  Image file types  Animation  Capture and Playback techniques. (basic ideas only) 453
Module 3 MULTIMEDIA ENVIRONMENTS The Compact Disc family, CDinteractive, Digital Video Interactive, QuickTime, Multimedia PC and Microsoft Multimedia Extensions. Module 4 MULTIMEDIA PROGRAMMING Framework: Overview, Media classes, Transform classes, Format classes and Component classes Problems related to programming  Composition, Synchronisation, Interaction, Database integration. Module 5 ADVANCED MULTIMEDIA Moving pictures  Techniques realistic image synthesis, Virtual Reality  Full motion digital video Video capture techniques  multimedia networks  Desktop video conferencing  Future multimedia. References 1. Multimedia Programming Objects, Environments & Framework. Simon J. Gibbs, Dionysios C. Tsischritziz (AddisonWesley Publishing Co.) 2. Multimedia: Computing, Communications andApplications Ralf Steinmentz and Klara Nahrstedt, Pearson Education. 3. Multimedia making it work  Tay Van Ghan – Osborne Tata Mcgraw Hill 4. Authoring Interactive multimedia  Arch C Luther 5. Optimizing your Multimedia PC  L.J. Skibbe, Susan Lafe Meister  Comdex 6. Multimedia Bible  Winn L. Rosch, Sams 7. Multimedia in Action  James E. Shuman, Vikas Publication 8. Multimedia Power Tools  Peter Jellam, Random house Electronic Pub. 9. Multimedia Computing  Mathew E. Hodger & Russel M. Sasnett, Addison wesley 10. Integrated Multimedia Systems  Palikom, The communication Wall Overview WEB TECHNOLOGIES RT 705 2+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to SGML – features  XML, XML as a subset of SGML – XML Vs HTML – Views of an XML document – simple XML documents – Starting & Ending of Tags – Attributes of Tags – Entity References – Comments  CDATA section Module 2 Document Type declarations – Creating XML DTDs – Element type declaration – Attribute List Declaration – Attribute types – Attribute defaults – Displaying XML Data in HTML browser as HTML tables – Storing XML data in HTML document – Converting XML to HTML with XSL minimalist XSL style sheets – XML applications Module 3 Java Beans: Features – Designing Java Beans – Creating and using properties – Induced  bound and constrained properties  using and creating events – Introspection – creating & using Beanlnfo clauses – customization – providing custom property editors and GUI interfaces. Module 4 JSPs  Creating simple JSP Pages – templating – Request time expression – Request & Response objects – Reading parameter values – Using Javabeans in JSPs  Reading & setting Properties of JavaBeans – Connecting forms & bean properties – Serialized beans – declaring variables & 454
methods in pages – scriptlets – conditionals, loops & execution handling in JSPs with scriptlets – Accessing beans via scriptlets. Module 5 EJB – Basics of EJB – Types of Beans – Development of Session Beans – Steps – Creating & Implementing Interfaces – Writing Deployment descriptors – Packaging and deploying bean  using the bean from a client – Development of stateful session bean. Entity beans – Features (Basics of developing and using entity beans) References Module1, 2 1. Asia XML by Example: Building Ecommerce applications  Sean McGrath, Pearson Education
Module 3 1. Using JAVA 2 Platform Special Edition  Joseph L. Weber, Prentice Hall of India 2. Java 2, AWT, Swing, XML and JavaBeans Programming Black Book  Steven Holzner, Wiley Dreamtech Module 4 1. 2.
Java Server pages  Larne Pekowsky – Pearson Education Asia JSP: Java server pages  Barry Burd, IDG Books India
Module 5 1. Mastering Enterprise Java Beans and the Java 2 Platforms, Enterprise Edition  EdRoman (WILEY computer publishing) 2. EJB Design Patterns  Floyd Marinescu Additional Reference 1. Internet & Web Technologies  Raj Kamal, TMH ELECTIVE I T 706 LIST OF ELECTIVE SUBJECTS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Note 455 CMELRPTA 70601 T 70602 RT 70603 RT 70604 RT 70605 RT 70606 T 70607 Optimization Techniques Digital Image Processing Principles of real time systems Windows Programming Mobile Computing Software Architecture Optical Communication 3+1+0
New Elective subjects related to the recent trends in Information Technology can be added to this list. Institutions offering such courses should submit the detailed syllabus and get it approved from the University before offering the course.
OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  I) CMELRPTA 7061 3+1+0
Module1 Classical optimization techniques Single variable optimization – Multivariable optimization with no constraints – Hessian matrix – Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier method – Multivariable optimization with inequality constrains – Kuhn Tucker conditions. Module 2 Constrained multivariable optimization Elimination methods – unrestricted search method – Fibonacci method – Interpolation methods – Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation methods. Module 3 Onedimensional unconstrained minimization Gradient of a function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hook and Jeeve’s method. Module 4 Integer – Linear programming problem Gomory’s cutting plane method – Gomory’s method for all integer programming problems, mixed integer programming problems. Module 5 Network Technique Shortest path model – Dijkstra’s Algorithm – Floyd’s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem – PRIM algorithm – Maximal Flow Problem algorithm. References 1. Optimization theory and application  S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd. 2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering  A. D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla, Pearson Education Asia. 3. Principles of Operations Research for Management  F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena, Richard D. Irwin, INC. 4. Operation Research an introduction  H. A. Taha, Eastern Economy Edition. 5. Operation Research – R. Pannerselvam, PHI DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING T 7062 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to Digital Image Processing, The Fourier and ZTransform of Multi dimensional Sequences, Digital image processing in practice, Digitalizing images, Characteristics of an image digitiser, Types of Image Digitisers. Image processing software, Software organization, processing sequence the gray level histogram, Introduction to histograms, Uses of histograms, Relations between histogram and image. 456
Module 2
Point operations, Uses, Linear point operations, Point operations and the histogram, Applications of point operations. Introduction to algebraic operations, Applications, Geometric operations, Grey level interpolation, Spatial transformation, applications, geometric operations, linear filtering theory – Harmonic signals and complex signal analysis.
Module 3
Convolution operation, Applications of digital filtering some useful functions, Convolution filtering – Dimension sampling, Reconstruction of images from its samples, Nyquist rate, Aliasing and foldover frequencies. Non rectangular grid sampling, Practical limitation in sampling and construction. Display aperture and interpolation, Moire effect and flat field response.
Module 4
Processing sampled data, Computing data, Truncation, Optics and System analysis, Diffraction limited optical systems, Abbreviation in an imaging system. Applications of Digital image processing – Image restoration, Approaches and models, Super resolution, System identification, DTF from degraded image spectrum, noise modeling.
Module 5
Image Segmentation by Thresholding, Optimal threshold selection, Gradient optical threshold selection, Gradient based methods, Region growing techniques – Segmented image structure. Measurement and classification size, shape, Measurements, Feature selection, Classification 3 dimensional image processing optical sectioning, CAT Stereo – Metric ranging, Stereoscopic image display – shaded surface display. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Digital Image Processing Kenneth R. Castleman, Prentice Hall. Digital Image Processing – Rafael C Gonzalez & Richard E Woods, Pearson Education Discrete Time Signal Processing Oppenheim and Schafer, Prentice Hall of India. Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing Anil K. Jain, Prentice Hall of India. Introducing Digital Image Processing Jensen J.R, Prentice Hall. Image Processing, Analysis & Machine Vision –Sonka, Hlavac & Boyle, Thomson Learning
RT7063
PRINCIPLES OF REAL TIME SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to Real Time Systems – Structure of real time systems, real time computer, task classes – Periodic, Aperiodic, critical, Noncritical, definition of real time systems – real time systems, embedded systems  Hard real time systems, soft real time systems, real time design issues. Module 2 Real time kernel – polled loop systems, coroutines, interrupt driven systems – sporadic, fixed rate systems, hybrid systems, task control block  task status, scheduling – uniprocessor scheduling – traditional rate monotonic, rate monotonic deferred server, EDF, IRIS tasks – multiprocessor 457
scheduling – utilization balancing algorithm, nextfit, bin packing algorithm, myopic offline, buddy strategy (no need of proofs) fault tolerant scheduling. Module 3 Communication – Communication Media and message sending topologies, network architecture issues, protocols – contention – based, token  based, stop and go multiloop, polled bus, hierarchal, round robin, fault tolerant routing – clocks and synchronization – fault tolerant synchronization in hardware, synchronization in software. Module 4 Fault tolerance – definition, cause of failure, fault types, fault detection and containment, redundancy – hardware, software, time, information, integrated failure handling – reliability – parameter values – series – parallel systems, NMR clusters, combinational model, master chain model, fault latency, transient faults, software error models. Module 5 Programming Languages – Desired language characteristics, Real time databases, characteristics, main memory databases, Transaction, Disk schedule algorithms, Databases for hard real time systems, maintaining serialization constituency. Text Book 1. Real Time Systems  C.M Krishna, Kang G. Shini (M?C Graw Hill) Reference 1. Real Time Systems, Design & Analysis  Philip Laplante (IEEE)
WINDOWS PROGRAMMING (ELECTIVE  I) R7064 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction Concepts of Windows Programming Event Driven Programming – Languages that support Windows Programming – Visual Basic – Java – Visual C++ Visual Basic Programming: Basic Language features – Variables, data types, constants, control statements – Forms – Creating and Using basic Controls – text boxes, labels, buttons  Event handling procedures – Properties Window – Common properties for Controls. Message boxes Module 2 Visual Basic Programming (Contd) Standard Controls – List boxes, Comboboxes, Image box, picture box, Shape controls, Timer, Scrollbars, Frames, Checkboxes, Option Boxes – Frames  File, Drive and Directory List boxes  MDI and SDI interfaces – Menus Module 3 ActiveX controls  RichTextBox, Tree View Control, List view Control, Progessbar, Flexgrid Control, Common dialog Controls – Font, File, Print Dialogs – Creating Custom activex controls – Creating Events and properties for ActiveX controls. 458
Module 4 Graphics and Multimedia – Drawing Graphics in Windows  setting colors  Drawing text, lines, ellipses, arcs, circles – plotting points –Filling figures with colors and patterns – Using clipboards to transfer images between applications Printing graphics and text – Creating animations with Picture clip control  applying image effects – stretching, flipping, embossing, egraving, blurring, sweeping – Using the Multimedia Control – Handling multimedia Errors Module 5 Database Access – Using DAO, RDO and ADO for accessing databases – Creating tables, inserting, deleting and updating records – Using the Data Control – Using the ADO Data Control Using Windows API: Using DLL Procedures in Visual Basic – Declare statement – Handling C++ and Windows Data types – Playing sound with API funtions – Capturing Images from the screen – Handling mouse outside Applications window – Making an ‘always on top’ window. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Visual Basic 6 Programming Black Book Programming Windows fifth Edition Visual Basic Visual Basic Using Visual Basic Steven Holzner (Dreamtech Press) Charles Petzlod (Microsoft Press) Ivan Petrosaus (BPB) Garry Cornell (BPB) Resselman (PHI)
MOBILE COMPUTING (ELECTIVE  I) R7065 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction  Short History, Mobile telephone systemsSimplified Reference model. Multi carrier modulation. Cellular systems. Module 2 Wireless Communication Systems Telecommunication SystemsGSM & DECTArchitecture and Protocols.Satellite SystemsGEO, LEO, MEO. Broadcast SystemsBroadcast transmission, Digital Audio BroadcastingMultimedia Object Transfer Protocol. Digital Video Broadcasting. Module 3 Wireless LAN and ATM  Infra red and Radio Transmission, Infrastructure and ad hoc networks, 802.11 Bluetooth Architecture, Applications and Protocol, Layers, Frame structure. Comparison between 802.11 and 802.16. Wireless ATM Services, Reference Model, Functions, Radio Access Layer. Handover Reference Model, Requirements, Types, handover scenarios. Location Management, Addressing, Access Point Control Protocol (APCP). Module 4 Mobile Network and Transport Layers  Mobile IP Goals, Requirements, IP packet delivery, Advertisement and discovery. Registration, Tunneling and Encapsulation, Optimization, Reverse Tunneling, IPv6, Dynamic Host configuring protocol, Ad hoc networks – Routing, DSDV, Dynamic source routing. Hierarchical Algorithms. Traditional TCP, Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Transmission. 459
Module 5 Wireless Application Protocol & World Wide Web WAP Architecture, ProtocolsDatagram, Transaction, Session.Wireless Application EnvironmentWML Features, Script Wireless Telephony Application. WWW HTTP, Usage of HTML, WWW system architecture. Text Book 1. Mobile Communications – Jochen Schiller, Preason Education Asia References 1. Computer Networks – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, PHI 2. Communication Networks Fundamental Concepts and Key Architectures LeonGarcia & Indra Widjaja, Tata McGraw Hill SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE (ELECTIVE  I) R7066 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to Software architecture – Architectural styles – pipes and filters –data abstract and object oriented organization – Event based, implicit invocation, Layered systems – Repositories – Interpreters – Process control – Heterogeneous Architectures. Module 2 Shared Information Systems – Integration in software Development Environment – Integration in the design of Buildings – Architectural structures for based information systems Module 3 Guidance for user interface architecture Artificial design space – Formal models and specificationsThe value of architectural formalism – Formalizing the architecture of a specific system – Formalizing the architectural style – Formalizing an architectural design space Module 4 Linguistic issues  Requirements for architecture – Description languages – first class connectors – Adding implicit invocation to factorial processing languages. Module 5 Tools for architectural design – Unicon – Exploiting style in architectural design environments – Architectural interconnection Reference 1. Software Architecture – perspectives on an emerging discipline Mary Shaw, David Garlan, PHI OPTICAL COMMUNICATION T 7067 460 3+1+0
Module 1 Optical fibres: Graded index and step index fibres refractive index profiles, numerical aperture propagation of optical beams in fibres. Mode characteristics and cut off conditions (mathematical derivations required). MCVD technique for fibre fabrication, losses in fibres attenuation, absorption, scattering and radiation losses. Module 2 Signal distortion in fibres – Intra model and inter model distortion – group delay , material and wave guide dispersion. Optical sources : Light Emitting diodes – LED structures – surface and edge emitters, mono and hetero structures – internal – quantum efficiency , injection laser diode structures – comparison of LED and ILD. Module 3 Optical Detectors: PN junction photo diodes, PN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes, construction, characteristics and properties, Comparison of performance. Optical amplifiers (OAs): Need for OAs, Principles of operations of various OAs – SLAs, fibre amplifiers (FRA, FBA, EDFA). Comparison of performance. Module 4 Optical communication systems: Direct detection and heterodyne receivers. SNR, advantage of coherent optical communications. Optical digital communications, Transmission link analysis, point to point links – system consideration – link power budget and rise time budget. Module 5 Classification of light wave systems – linear systems: Intensity modulated Direct Detection (IMDD) and coherent systems. Non linear systems. Introduction to solitons –Solitons communications using lumped amplifiers, Bit error Rate performance. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Optical Fibre Communications Gerd Keiser, Mc Graw Hill. Fiber Optic Communications, 4th Edition.  Joseph C.Palais, Pearson Education. Optical Fibre Communications Senior, PHI. Fibre Optic Communication – D C Agarwal, Wheeler Pub. Optical Communication Components & Systems – Franz & Jain, Narosa Publishing. Optical Communication Systems – Gowar, PHI
MULTIMEDIA LAB T 707 1. Programs for a. Point plotting b. Line and circle drawing c. Line and Polygon clipping d. Transformations 461 0+0+3
e. Hidden line elimination f. Curves 2. Web page design with HTML 3. Multimedia development using PowerPoint, 3D Studio, Adobe Photoshop. 4. Familiarization of latest multimedia development tools.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LAB T 708 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 0+0+3
Analog optical communication experiments based on optical communication kits / benches Digital optical communication experiments based on optical communication kits / benches Digital communication experiments based on trainer kits. Design of digital filters (software simulation using MATLAB/ SIMULINK) FFT, DFT Implementation using software simulation (MATLAB/ SIMULINK) Study of transmission media – coaxial cables – TypesHubsBridgesRepeatersRoutersGateways – Switches 7. Study of modemsNICCable connectors and their usages 8. Study of Internetaccessing, services and applications 9. Simple network programming experiments in Java.
PROJECT & SEMINAR T 709/ T 808 0+0+3
Each student is required to present a technical paper on subject approved by the department. The paper should, in general, reflect the state of the art technology. Report should be submitted to the department. In addition to the seminar, the students shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in the 7th semester itself in consultation with the guide (s). On completion of the project work in the 8th semester, each student shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work to the department.
462
EIGHTH SEMESTER
463
SECURITY IN COMPUTING RT 801 2+1+0 Module1 Introduction: Security basics – Aspects of network security – Attacks – Different types – Hackers – Crackers – Common intrusion techniques –Trojan Horse, Virus, Worm – Security services and mechanisms. Module 2 OS Security – Protection Mechanisms –Authentication & Access control – Discretionary and Mandatory access control – Authentication mechanisms – Official levels of computer security (DoD)  Security breaches – Concept of a hole  Types of a holes – Study of the security features for authentication, access control and remote execution in UNIX, WINDOWS 2000 Module 3 Cryptography: Basic Encryption & Decryption – Transposition & substitution ciphers – Caesar substitution – Polyalphabetic substitutions – Crypt analysis – Symmetric key algorithms – Fiestel Networks – Confusion – Diffusion – DES Algorithm – Strength of DES – Comparison & important features of modern symmetric key algorithms – Public key cryptosystems – The RSA Algorithm – Diffice Hellman key exchange – comparison of RSA & DES – Message Authentication & Hash functions – Digital signature Module 4 Network & Application Security: Kerberos – X509 Authentication service – IP security Architecture – Secure socket layer – Electronic mail security – Pretty Good privacy – S/MIME – secure Electronic Transactions – Firewalls  Security mechanisms in JAVA platform – Applet security – Security policy and SecurityManager. Module 5 Database Security:  Security issues – SQL security DAC based on granting & revoking privileges – MAC 4 multilevel security – Statistical database security. Text Books Module1, 4 1. Network Security Essentials Applications & Standards  William S., Pearson Education Asia Module2 1. Modern operating System  Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia 2. Using JAVA 2 platform  Joseph L. Weber, Prentice Hall of India Module3 1. Cryptography and network security principles and practice  William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia Information theory coding and cryptography  Ranjan Bose, TMH Module 4,5 1. Module 5 1. Designing security Architecture Solutions  Jay Ramachandran, Wiley Dreamtech Database Security Mechanisms for Computer Network  Sead Muftic, John wiles 464
References 1. Security in Computing  Charles P. Pfleeger IEEE Computer Science Press 2. Database Security Mechanisms for Computer Network  Sead Muftic, John wiles 3. Designing Security Architecture Solutions – Jay Ramachandran, Wiley dreamtech 4. Firewalls Complete  Marcus Gonsalvus, TMH 5. Networking Technologies  Jaisal, Galgotia Publication 6. Security in Computer Operating System  G.O.Shea, NCC Blackwell Manchester Oxford 7. Mastering JAVA security: Cryptography, Algorithms and Architecture  Rich Helton, Wiley Dreamtech 8. Implementing IPv6  Mark A. Miller P.E, IDG Books INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND MANAGEMENT 3+1+0
T 802
Module 1 Introduction, Management and Systems, Classical and systems approach to organization, Organizational theory, Management and organizational behaviour, Factors affecting productivity, Leadership Styles, Organizational Effectiveness, Managerial Grid, Tasks and functions of Management, General management system. ERP & Related technologies, MIS, DSS, EIS. Module 2 The management process and information needs, Data Bank concept, systems for decision making, Automation of Decision making, Management and the Decision rule, Decision assisting Information systems – MIS, DSS, EIS, ERP. Information science
Module 3 Management Information systems, Strategic and Project Planning for MIS, Conceptual system design, detailed system design, Implementation and maintenance. (Brief study only) Module 4 ERP, Introduction, ERPmodules, benefits, market. Implementation Life cycle, Vendors, Consultants and Users, Future direction in ERP. Module 5 Decision Support Systems – Managers and decision making, Decision Support Tools, Concept of DSS, Components, Basic concepts of Data Mining, Data Warehousing and Knowledge Management. Knowledge based decision support – Basic concepts only. References Module 1,2&3 1. Information Systems for Modern Management  Murdick, Ross & Claggett, PHI. Module 4 2. Enterprise Resource Planning Alexis Leon, TMH Module 5 465
3. Decision Support Systems And Intelligent systems  Efraim Turban, Jay E. Aronson, Pearson Education. 4. Managing Information Technology Bhushan Dewan, Vikas Publishing ECOMMERCE T803 2+1+0 Module1 Introduction to Electronic Commerce ECommerce Framework, Anatomy of ECommerce Applications, ECommerce Consumer & Organization Applications. E Commerce and World Wide Web – Internet Service Providers, Architectural Framework for Electronic Commerce. Module 2 Electronic Payment Systems Types of Electronic Payment Systems, Digital Token Based Electronic Payment System, Smart Cards, Credit Cards, Credit card based Payment system, Online payment process, Risk in Electronic Payment Systems, Designing Electronic Payment Systems. Module 3 Electronic Data Interchange EDI – Architecture, Application in Business, EDILegal, Security and Privacy Issues, EDI standardization, EDI Envelope for Message Transport, Internet based EDI, EDI and MIME, Value added Network. EDI Gateways. Module 4 Intra Organizational ECommerce Internal Information System, Workflow Automation and Coordination, customization and internal Commerce, Supply Chain Management, Document Library, Types of Digital Documents, Technological Architecture for Internal Commerce, Corporate Data Warehouses, advantages of Data Warehouses. Module 5 Recent Trends in ECommerce Marketing on the Internet, Advertising on the Internet, Multimedia in ECommerce, Video Conferencing with Digital Videos, Broad Band Telecommunication, Frame & Cell Relays, Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS), Asynchronous Transfer Mode, Mobile Computing and Wireless Computing. Text Book 1. Frontiers of Electronic Commerce  Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B Whinston/Pearson Education References 1. Global Electronic Commerce – J Christopher Westland & Theodore H K Clark 2. E Commerce The cutting edge of Business  Kamlesh K Bajaj & Debjani Nag / Pearson Education ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE RT 804 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction – Definitions – AI application areas – Example problems Problems and problem spaces  Problem characteristics – Problem solving by searching, Searching strategies – Breadth first 466
search, Uniform cost search, DFS, Depth – Limited search, Bidirectional search – Constraint satisfaction search. Module 2 Informed search, A* algorithm, Heuristic functions – Inventing Heuristic functions  Heuristic for constraint satisfaction problem – Iterative deepening – Hill climbing – Simulated Annealing. Module 3 Game playing and knowledge structures – Games as search problem – Imperfect decisions – Evaluation functions – Alpha – Beta pruning – state of art game programs, Introduction to frames and semantic nets. Module 4 Knowledge and Reasoning – Review of representation and reasoning with Logic – Inference in first order logic, Inference rules involving quantifiers, modus ponens, Unification, forward and backward chaining – Resolution. Module 5 Introduction to Prolog – Representing facts – Recursive search – Abstract data types – Alternative search strategies – Meta predicates, Matching and evaluation, meta interpreters – semantic nets & frames in prolog. Text Books Module 1,2,3,4 1. Artificial Intelligence – A modern approach  Stuact Russell – Peter Narang, Pearson Education Asia 2. Artificial Intelligence  Rich E.  McGraw Hill Booq Company Module 5 3. Artificial Intelligence  George F Luger, Pearson Education Asia Reference 1. An Introduction to Artificial Intelligence – Eugene Charniak & Drew McDermot, Pearson Education Asia ELECTIVE  II T 805 List of elective subjects 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. CMELRPTA 80501 RT 80502 T 80503 RT 80504 RT 80505 RT 80506 T 80507 T 80508 Advanced Mathematics Client Server Computing High Performance Computing Analysis and Modeling of Digital Systems Distributed Computing User Interface Design Satellite & Mobile Communication Data Compression 467 3+1+0
Note: New Elective subjects related to the recent trends in Information Technology can be added to this list. Institutions offering such courses should submit the detailed syllabus and get it approved from the University before offering the course. ADVANCED MATHEMATICS (ELECTIVE  II) CMELRTA 8051 3+1+0 Module 1 Green’s Function Heavisides, unit step function – Derivative of unit step function – Dirac delta function – properties of delta function – Derivatives of delta function – testing functions – symbolic function – symbolic derivatives – inverse of differential operator – Green’s function – initial value problems – boundary value problems – simple cases only Module 2 Integral Equations Definition of Volterra and Fredholm Integral equations – conversion of a linear differential equation into an integral equation – conversion of boundary value problem into an integral equation using Green’s function – integral equation with separable Kernels – Integral equations of convolution type – Neumann series solution. Module 3 Gamma, Beta functions Gamma function, Beta function – Relation between them – their transformations – use of them in the evaluation certain integrals – Dirichlet’s integral – Liouville’s extension of Dirichlet’s theorem – Elliptic integral – Error function. Module 4 Power Series solution of differential equation The power series method – Legendre’s Equation – Legendre’s polynomial – Rodrigues formula – generating function – Bessel’s equation – Bessel’s function of the first kind – Orthogonality of Legendre’s Polynomials and Bessel’s functions. Module 5 Numerical solution of partial differential equations Classification of second order equations Finite difference approximations to partial derivatives – solution of Laplace and Poisson’s equations by finite difference method – solution of one dimensional heat equation by Crank – Nicolson method – solution one dimensional wave equation. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Linear Integral Equation  Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York A Course on Integral Equations  Allen C.Pipkin, Springer – Verlag Advanced Engg. Mathematics  H.K.Dass, S.Chand Advanced Engg. Mathematics  Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia Numrical methods in Engg. &Science  B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers Generalized functions  R.F. Hoskins, John Wiley and Sons. Principles and Techniques of Applied Mathematics  Bernard Friedman, John Wiley and sons Principles of Applied Mathematics  James P.Keener, Addison Wesley. Numerical methods  P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy, S.Chand & co 468
RT 8052
CLIENT SERVER COMPUTING (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0
Module 1 INTRODUCTION History  uses  Client Server Computing & Hetrogenous Computing  Cross Platform Computing Distributed Computing  The costs of Client Server Computing  Advantages and Disadvantages Client Server Databases. Module 2 DESIGNS Fundamentals of client server design  Managing the interaction of client and server Communications Techniques protocols & Client server interaction protocols  Preparing applications for client server  Optimizing applications for client server  Example client server implementations Request acceptance dispatching  Execution of requests  Client server interaction using message. Module 3 MULTITASKING Multi programming vs multitasking  Processor  Advantages and draw backs of multiple processor Child and parent processor  Case study Novell Netware and Windows NT  Developing server applications  Threads  Server communication model. Module 4 SYNCHRONIZATION Scheduling implementations  processing queues  context switching pre emptive systems  critical sections  mutual exclusion  semaphores  semaphore implementations in NT & Netware. Module 5 COMMUNICATIONS Network communication  Inter process communication  Building portable client server applications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Novell's Guide to ClientServer Application & Architecture  Jeffrey D.Schqnk, Novell Press. Client Server Computing  Dawna Travis Dewire, McGraw Hill. Developing Client Server Applications W.H.Inman, BPB. Guide to Client Server Databases  Joe Salemi, BPB. Client Server Strategies  David Vaskevitch, Galgotia. HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING T 8053 3+1+0 Module1 Introduction to parallel processing  Trends towards parallel processing  Parallelism in uniprocessor  Parallel computer structuresArchitecture classification schemes  Indian contribution to parallel processing. Module 2 Principles of pipelining and vector processing  Linear pipelining  Classification of pipeline processors  General pipelines  Instruction and Arithmetic pipelines –Design of Pipilined instruction unitPrinnciples of Designing Pipeline Processors Instruction prefetch and branch handlingDynamic pipelines  Architecture of Cray1. 469
Module 3 Array processors  SIMD array processors  Interconnection networks  Static vs dynamic networks mesh connected networks  Cube interconnection networks  Parallel algorithms for array processors  SIMD matrix multiplicationParallel sorting on array processors  Associative array processing Memory organization. Module 4 Multiprocessor architectures and Programming  Loosely coupled and Tightly coupled multiprocessors  Interconnection networks  Language features to exploit parallelism  Process synchronisation mechanisms. Module 5 Dataflow computers  Data driven computing and Languages  Data flow computers architectures Static data flow computer Dynamic data flow computer Data flow design alternatives. Text Book 1. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Elements of Parallel computing  V. Rajaraman  PHI Super Computers  V. Rajaraman  Wiely arstern Parellel Processing for Super Computers & AI  Kai Hwange & Douglas Degneot Mc Graw Hill Advanced computer Architecture  Sima, Fountain and Kacsuk, Pearson Edn High Performance Computer Architecture  Harold S. Stone, Addison Wesley. Advanced Computing  Vijay P.Bhatkar, Asok V.Joshi, Arirban Basu, Asok K.Sharma. Parallel Computers, Architecture and Programming – Rajaraman & Murthy, PHI ANALYSIS AND MODELING OF DIGITAL SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0 Computer Architecture & Parallel Processing  Kai Hwang & FayeA.Briggs, McGraw Hill
RT 8054
Module 1 Introduction to VHDL: Digital system design  Role of hardware description language Modeling digital systems – events, propagation delays and concurrency – waveforms and timing – signal values – shared signals – simulation model – synthesis model – Field Programmable Gate Arrays. Module 2 Basic language concepts simulation: signals – Entity architecture – concurrent statements – Constructing VHDL models using CSAs – delays. Synthesis: Interface from declarations, simple CSA statements, conditional signal assignment statements, and selected signal assignment statements. Module 3 Modeling behavior Simulation: The process construct – programming constructs – the wait statement – attributes – generating clocks and periodic waveforms – using signals – modeling state machines – constructing VHDL models – programming errors. 470
Synthesis: language directed view – inference from within process – issues – signals vs. variables – latch vs. flip flop – the wait statement – state machine. Module 4 Modeling structure: Describing structure – structural VHDL model – hierarchy, abstraction and accuracy – generics – component instantiation and synthesis – the generate statement Subprograms: functions – procedures – sub program and operator overloading – packages and libraries. Module 5 Basic I/O operations – the package TEXTIO – ASSERT statement – terminology and directory structure – simulation mechanics – synthesis mechanics – identifiers – data objects – data types – operators. Text Book 1. Introductory VHDL  Sudhakar Yalamanchili, Pearson Education Asia.
Reference s 1. VHDL primer  J Bhaskar, Pearson Education Asia 2. Analysis and modeling of digital systems  Zainalabedin Navabi, McGraw Hill. DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING (ELECTIVE  II) RT8055 3+1+0 Module I Introduction Introduction to Distributed Systems, evolution, characteristics, design issues, user requirements, Network technologies and protocols – overview, MACH, AMOBEA overview. Module 2 Distributed file system File service components, design issues, interfaces, implementation techniques, Sun Network File System – architecture and implementation, other distributed file systems – AFS, CODA. Name services – SNS name service model. Module 3 Communication in distributed systems Client server communication, Group communication, Message passing – features, synchronizations, RPC – model, implementation, stub generation, messages, marshalling, Server management. Distributed shared memory – Architecture, design issues, structure of shared memory space, replacement strategy, thrashing. Synchronization – clock synchronization, event ordering, mutual exclusion Module 4 Resource and Process management Features of scheduling algorithms, Task assignment approach, load balancing, load sharing, Process migration mechanisms, Threads – scheduling. Module 5 Consistency maintenance 471
Transaction recovery – methods intention lists, Fault tolerance – failures, Byzantine failures. Deadlocks in distributed systems – detection and prevention, centralized and distributed approaches. References 1. Distributed Systems – Concepts and designing  George Coulouris, Jean Dellimore Tim Kindberg, Pearson Education Asia 2. Distributed Operating Systems  Andrew S. Tenenbaum Pearson Education Asia 3. Distributed Operating Systems  Concepts and designing  Pradeep. K.Sinha, PHI USER INTERFACE DESIGN (ELECTIVE  II) 3+1+0
RT 8056
Module 1 Introduction Importance of user interface – definition, importance of good design, brief history – Graphical User Interface – Web User Interface – Principles of User interface design. Module 2 Design Process Human Interaction with computers, Importance of Human Characteristics, Human consideration, Human Interaction speeds – Understanding Business function Module 3 Screen Designing Design goals  screen meaning and purpose, organizing screen elements ordering of screen data and content – screen navigation and flow – visually pleasing composition – amount of information – focus and emphasis – presenting information simply and meaningfully – information retrieval on web – Statistical graphics – Technological considerations in Interface Design. Module 4 Windows and components Menus and navigation schemes, selection of windows, Selection of device based and screen based controls  text and messages – icons and images – Multimedia – colours uses, problems, choosing colours. Module 5 Software tools Specification methods, interface building tools Interaction devices: keyboard and function keys  pointing devices speech recognition, digitization and generation – image and video displays – printers. Text Books 1. The Essential Guide to User Interface Design – Wilbert O. Galitz, Wiley Dreamtech 2. Designing the User Interface – Ben Shneiderman, Pearson Education Asia References 1. Human Computer Interaction – John M. Carroll, Pearson Education Asia 2. The Essentials of User Interface Design  Alan Cooper, Wiley Dreamtech
SATELLITE AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION 472
T 8057
3+1+0
Module 1 Satellite Communication – review of basic concepts  emerging trends in communication satellitesorbits – Geosynchronous and sun synchronous orbits – Kepler laws – power systems and eclipses – station keeping – altitude control and stabilization, Frequency plan and reuse Transponders, relative power levels Transmission path and path loss – power and link budget calculations – S/N ratiosaturation flux density and noise consideration – EIRP. Module 2 Multiple access Techniques, Satellite earth station, special purpose communication satellite, satellite launch vehicles. Module 3 Spread spectrum Communication – Direct Sequence or Pseudo noise, Frequency hopping, Time hopping, Hybrid and Chirp spread spectrum systems. Applications of spread Spectrum. Module 4 Mobile cellular communications – introduction – basic cellular system performance criteria – uniqueness of mobile radio environment – operation of cellular systems – elements of cellular radio system design – general description – Frequency reuse – co channel interference reduction factor – desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna systems – hand off mechanism – cell splitting – consideration of the components of cellular system. Module 5 Digital cellular systems – multiple access schemes – Global Systems for Mobile (GSM) TDMACDMAMiscellaneous Mobile systems. Intelligent cell concept, CDMA cellular radio network. Advanced intelligent network (AIN), AIN for mobile communications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Electronics Communication 4th ed  Dennis Roody & John Coolen, PHI Mobile Cellular Telecommunication William C.Y Lee, Mc Graw Hill Satellite Communications  D C Agarwal, Khanna Publishers. Mobile Communications Satellite (Theory and Applications)  Tom Lodgdon, Mc Graw Hill. Mobile and Personal Communication System and Services – Raj Pandya, PHI DATA COMPRESSION T 8058 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction – signal compression  fixed rate Vs variable rate – lossless Vs lossy compression – sources, channels and codes – components of compression system – issues – quantization – optimal and adaptive quantization. Module 2 Predictive coding – DPCM – linear prediction – adaptive prediction – delta modulation – adaptive delta modulation. 473
Module 3 Transform coding – orthogonal transformations – bit allocation – performance gain of transform coding – sub band coding – coding based on models of human perception (human auditory system and visual system) Module 4 Vector quantization – introduction – memoryless vector quantizers – llyod algorithm – vector quantization design – tree structured VQ – multistep VQ – product codes – grain/shape VQ – lattice VQ – feedback vector quantization – vector predictive quantization – vector tree and trellis coders – adaptive VQ – VQ for speech coding – VQ for image coding. Module 5 Compression standards – CELP standard for speech – JPEG standard for still images – ISO/MPEG standard for audio and video – introduction to fractal image compression – application of wavelet analysis in signal compression – data compression – review of entropy coding – Huffman, runlength, arithmetic and ziv – lempel coding. References 1. Gersho A, Gray R.M, Vector Quantization and Signal Compression, Kluwer Academic Publishers. 2. Jayant N.S & Noll P., digital Coding of Waveforms – Principle and /applications to Speech and Video. – Prentice Hall. 3. Nelson M. Jean & Loup Gailly, The Data compression book, BPB publications. 4. Solari S.J, Digital Video/Audio Compression, McGrawHill. 5. Kondoz A.M, Digital Speech, John Wiley. 6. Rao R.M & Bopadikar A.S, Wavelet Transforms – Introduction to Theory and Applications, Addison Wesley & Longman Inc. ELECTIVE  III T 806 List of elective subjects 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Note New Elective subjects related to the recent trends in Information Technology can be added to this list. Institutions offering such courses should submit the detailed syllabus and get it approved from the University before offering the course. T 80601 RT 80602 RT 80603 RT 80604 RT 80605 RT 80606 RT 80607 T 80608 Information Theory and Coding Embedded Systems Neural Network Genetic Algorithm and Applications Advanced Networking Trends Data Processing and Analysis Techniques Bio metrics Fuzzy Systems 3+1+0
474
INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING T 8061 3+1+0 Module 1 Information Theory: Concept of amount of information, units – entropy, marginal, conditional and joint entropies – relation among entropies – mutual information, information rate, channel capacity – redundancy and efficiency of a channel, symmetric channels – binary symmetric channel (BSC), binary erasure channel (BEC), deterministic and noiseless channels – capacity of band limited Gaussian channels, Shannon – Hartley theorem – band width – SNR trade off – capacity of a channel of infinite bandwidth , optimum modulation systems. Module 2 Source coding: Instantaneous codes – construction of instantaneous codes – Kraft’s inequality, coding efficiency and redundancy, noiseless, coding theorem – construction of basic source codes – Shannon –Fano Algorithm, Huffman Coding. Cryptography: Secret key Cryptography, block and stream ciphers, DES, public key cryptography, Diffie Hellman Public key distribution – RSA system, digital signatures. Module 3 Codes for error detection and correction parity check coding – linear block codes – error detecting and correcting capabilities – generator and parity check matrices – standard array and syndrome decoding – Hamming codes – encoding and decoding. Module 4 Cyclic codes – description – generator and parity check matrices – encoding of cyclic codes – syndrome computation and error detection, decoding of cyclic codes, BCH codes description and decoding, Reed Solomon codes, burst error correction –block and convolutional interleaving. Module 5 Convolutional codes  encoding – time and frequency domain approaches, state, Tree and Trellis diagrams – Transfer function and minimum free distance – maximum likelihood decoding of convolutional codes – The Viterbi Algorithm, Sequential decoding – Stack Algorithm. ARQ schemes – performance of ARQ – Probability of error and throughput. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Communication Systems  Simon Haykin, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd. Principles of Communication Systems  Taub & Schilling, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi. Principles of Digital Communication  Das, Mullick & Chatterjee. Wiley Eastern Ltd. Information and Coding Theory  Dr. P. S. Sathya Narayana Probability Dynaram Publications, Bangalore. 5. Error Control Coding Fundamental s and Application  Shu Lin & Daniel J.Costello Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
475
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  III) RT8062 3+1+0 Module1 Overview of Embedded System Embedded System, Categories of Embedded System, Requirements of Embedded Systems, Challenges and Issues in Embedded Software Development, Applications of Embedded Systems in Consumer Electronics, Control System, Biomedical Systems, Handheld computers, Communication devices. Module 2 Embedded Hardware & Software Development Environment Hardware Architecture, MicroController Architecture, Communication Interface Standards, Embedded System Development Process, Embedded Operating systems, Types of Embedded Operating systems. Module 3 Embedded Communication System Serial Communication, PCtoPC Communication, Serial Communication with the 8051 Family of Microcontrollers, Protocol Converter, VoiceoverIP, Embedded Applications over Mobile Network example MP3 Sound Player. Module 4 Real Time & Database Applications RealTime Embedded Software Development, Sending a Message over a Serial Link, Simulation of a Process Control System, Controlling an Appliance from the RTLinux System, Embedded Database Applications using examples like Salary Survey, Energy Meter Readings. Module 5 Java Applications & Future Trends in Embedded Systems Networked JavaEnabled Information Appliances, Embedded Process Control System, Mobile Java Applications, Appliance Control using Jini, System on a Chip (SOC), Smart Cards and the Cashless Society, Security in Embedded Systems. Text Book 1. Programming for Embedded Systems  Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech Reference 1. Fundamentals of Embedded Software where C and Assembly Meet – Daniel W Lewis.
NEURAL NETWORKS (ELECTIVE III) RT8063 Module 1 476 3+1+0
Introduction  Principles  artificial neuron  activation functions  Single layer & multilayer networks  Training artificial neural networks  Perception  Representation  Linear separability Learning  Training algorithms. Module 2 Back Propagation  Training algorithm  Applications  network configurations  Network paralysis Local minima  temporal instability. Module 3 Counter Propagation networks: Kebenon layer  Training the cohenen layer  Pre initialising the wright vectors  statistical properties  Training the Grosbery layer  Full counter propagation network  Application. Module 4 Statistical methods  Boltzmann’s Training  Cauche training  Artificial specific heat methods Applications to general nonlinear optimization problems. Module 5 Hopfield nets  Recurrent networks  stability  Associative memory  applications  Thermo dynamic systems  Statistical Hopfield networks  Bidirectional associative memories  Continous BAM  Adaptive resonance theory  Architecture classification  Implimentation. Text Book 1. Neural Computing Theory & Practice  Philip D. Wasserman. References 1. Neural Networks  Simon Haykins 2. Adaptive Pattern Recognition & Neural Networks  Pay Y.H. 3. An Introduction to neural computing  Chapman & Hall GENETIC ALGORITHMS AND APPLICATIONS (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
RT8064
Module 1 ArchitectureAltering Operations Introduction, Previous Methods of Determining the Architecture of a MultiPart Program  On the origin of new function ArchitectureAltering operations for Subroutines Automatically Defined Iterations, Loops, Recursion, Storage. SelfOrganization of Hierarchies and Program Architecture Rotating the Tires on an Automobile – Boolean Parity Problem TimeOptimal Robot Control Problem MultiAgent Problem  Using Architecture Altering Operations for Subroutines. Transmembrane Segment Identification Problem using ArchitectureAltering Operations for IterationsFibonacci Sequence Cart Centering. Module 2 Genetic Programming Problem Solver (GPPS) Elements of GPPS 1.0Problems Illustrating GPPS 1.0  Elements of GPPS 2.0  Problems Illustrating GPPS 2.0  Previous Work on Automated Analog Circuit Synthesis. Module 3 Automated synthesis of analog electrical circuits Synthesis of a Lowpass Filter and Highpass Filter The Role of Crossover in Genetic Programming. 477
Module 4 Evolvable Hardware Evolvable Hardware and Rapidly Reconfigurable FieldProgrammable Gate Arrays Discovery of cellular Automata Rules: Discovery of a Cellular Automata Rule for the Majority Classification Problem. Module 5 Programmatic Motifs for molecular Biology Automatic Discovery of Protein Motifs –Programmatic Motifs and the Cellular Location Problem. Parallelization and Implementation Issues: Computer Time Parallelisation of Genetic Programming –Implementation Issues. Reference 1. Johin R. Koza, Forrest H Bennett III, David Andre, Martin A. Kean, “ Genetic Programming III: Darwinian Invention and Problem Solving”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1999. ADVANCED NETWORKING TRENDS (ELECTIVE – III) 3+1+0
RT8065
Module 1 Ethernet Technology – Frame format – Interface Gap – CSMA/CD – 10 mbps Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Wireless Ethernet – SONET – Sonet multiplexing, Sonet frame structure Module 2 ISDN  Definition  Protocol architecture  System architecture  Transmission channels  ISDN interface, BISDN. Module 3 ATM – ATM Principles – BISDN reference model – ATM layers – ATM adaption Layer – AAL1, AAL2, AAL3/4, AAL5 – ATM addressing – UNI Signaling – PNNI Signalling Module 4 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION: Satellite communication principles  Geo stationary satellites block schematic of satellite earth station  VSAT  VSAT networks  applications in personnel communication. (basic ideas only) Module 5 Wireless Lan – Infrared Vs Radio transmission – Infrastructure & ad hoc n/w – IEEE 802.11 – Hiper Law – Bluetooth – Physical Layer – MAC layer – Networking  Security References Module 1 1. An introduction to Computer Networking  Kenneth C Mansfield, Jr., James L. Antonakos, PHI Module 1,2,3 1. Communication Networks Fundamental Concepts & Key Architecture  LeonGarcia – Widjaja, Tata McGraw Hill 2. Mobile Communication  Jochen Schiller, Pearson Education Asia 478
RT8066
DATA PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to COBOL programming elements of COBOL divisions, sections and paragraphs Table writing  complete program in COBOL using various options verbs, statementsconditions and conditional statements. Module 2 Table Handling – Occur clause – PERFORM verb – SET verb, SEARCH verb – Occurs depending clause – Sorting a Table. Module 3 Processing of various file structures in COBOL Language – File description – Fixed Length Record – Statements – Sequential File with variable length record – Sorting and merging of files – Direct access files. Module 4 Data warehousing – Definition – Multidimentional datamodel – OLAP operation – Data warehouse architecture – Warehouse Server – Metadata – OLAP Engine. Module 5 Data mining – Definitions, KDD Vs Data mining, DBMS Vs DM – DM Techniques, Issues and Challenges in DM – DM application areas. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. COBOL programming  M.K. Roy & D Ghosh Dastidar, Tata McGraw Hill Data mining Techniques  Arun K Pujari (Universal Press) Data mining Concepts and Techniques Jawei Han & Micheline Kamber (Morgan Kunfmann Pub.) Data Mining  Pieter Adriaans, Dolf Zantinge, Person Education Asia Structured COBOL Programming E. Rajasekar & S.Selvi (Anuradha Agencies) Structured COBOL  A. S. Philippakis & Leonard, J. Kazmier (Tata McGraw Hill) BIOMETRICS (ELECTIVE  III) RT8067 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction – Benefits of biometric security – verification and identification – basic working of biometric matching – accuracy – false match rate – false nonmatch rate – failure to enroll rate – derived metrics – layered biometric solutions Module 2 Finger scan – features – components – operation (steps) – competing finger scan technologies – strength and weakness Facial scan  features – components – operation (steps) – competing facial scan technologies – strength and weakness 479
Module 3 Iris scan  features – components – operation (steps) – competing iris scan technologies – strength and weakness Voice scan  features – components – operation (steps) – competing facial scan technologies – strength and weakness Module 4 Other physiological biometricsHandscanretina scan AFIS (automatic fingerprint Identification systems)Behavieral BiometricsSignature scanKey stroke Scan. Module 5 Biometrics Application – Biometric Solution MatrixBioprivacyComparison of privacy factor in different biometrics technologies  Designing privacy sympathetie biometric systemsBiometric standards  (BioAPI, BAPI)  Biometric middleware. Reference 1. Biometrics Identify Verification in a Networked World  Samir Nanavati, Michael Thieme, Raj Nanavati WILEYdreamtech FUZZY SYSTEMS T 8068 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to Fuzzy sets and systems. Basics of fuzzy sets membership function, support of a fuzzy set, height – normalized fuzzy set, α – cuts (decomposition of a fuzzy set), set theoretic definitions on fuzzy sets, complement, intersection and union equality. Module 2 Subsethood – basic definition based on membership functions. The law of the excluded middle and law of contradiction on fuzzy sets. Properties of fuzzy sets operations (logical proof only). Extension of fuzzy sets concepts – type –2 and level 2 fuzzy sets – examples. Module 3 Operations on fuzzy sets – intersection, algebraic sum – product, bounded sum – product, drastic sum product, t norms and t conorms (snorms) on fuzzy sets, typical parameterized t – norms and snorms (with simplified proof). Extension principle and its applications. Module 4 Fuzzy relation. Resolution form of a binary fuzzy relation. Operations on fuzzy relations – projection, max. – min. and min. and max., compositions cylindric extension. Similarity relations – reflexivity, symmetry, transitivity. Module 5 Further operations on fuzzy sets and proposed by Zadeh – concentration dilation, contrast Intensification, a linguistic hedges, computation of the meaning of values of a linguistic variable, fuzzy algorithms, fuzzy engineering – applications of fuzzy controls, case studies. References 480
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Neural Fuzzy Systems  C.T Lin & C.S George Lee, Prentice Hall. Fuzzy Systems Hand Book  Earl Cox, Associated Press. Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic Theory and Applications  Klir and Yuan, Prentice Hall of India. IEEE Trans on Systems, Man & Cybernetics, vol. SMC – 3, No.1, January 1973, pp 2844 Fuzzy Engineering  Bart Kosko, Prentice Hall. Fuzzy Thinking, Bart Kosko  Hooper Collins Publications. INTERNET LAB
T 807 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Familiarization of Internet Accessing and Trouble shooting Internet Programming with JAVA applets Web development with XML, JAVA script, JAVA beans. Implementation of Search Engine Web Development with JSP and EJB Familiarization to the latest web development tools
0+0+4
(Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT 605 and RT 705 can be substituted)
PROJECT & SEMINAR T 709 / T808 0+0+4 Each student is required to present a technical paper on subject approved by the department. The paper should, in general, reflect the state of the art technology. Report should be submitted to the department. In addition to the seminar, the students shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in the 7th semester itself in consultation with the guide (s). On completion of the project work in the 8th semester, each student shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work to the department. VIVA VOCE T 809 A comprehensive viva voce examination will be conducted to assess the student’s overall knowledge in the specified field of Engineering. At the time of viva voce, certified report of seminar, mini project and project work are to be presented for evaluation.
481
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING BRANCH
482
THIRD SEMESTER
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  II CMELPA 301 483 3+1+0
Module 1 Vector differential calculus: Differentiation of vector functions scalar and vector fields gradient divergence and curl of a vector function  their physical meaning  directional derivative  scalar potential conservative field – identities  simple problems. Module 2 Vector integral calculus: Line surface and volume integrals work done by a force along a pathapplication of Green’s theorem Stoke’s theorem and Gauss divergence theorem. Module 3 Function of complex variable: Definition of analytic function and singular points derivation of C.R. equations in Cartesian coordinates harmonic and orthogonal properties construction of analytic function given real or imaginary parts complex potential conformal transformation of functions like Zn, ez, 1/z, Sin z, z + k2/z  bilinear transformation cross ratio invariant property simple problems. Module 4 Finite differences: meaning of ∆, , E, μ, δ  interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula central differences problems using Stirling’s formula Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided difference formula for unequal intervals. Module 5 Difference Calculus: Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences. Numerical integration NewtonCote’s formula trapezoidal rule Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8th rule simple problems difference equations  solutions of difference equations. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Erwin Kreyzing Wiley Eastern. Pub. Higher Engg. Mathematics: B. S. Grewal Khanna publishers. Numerical methods in Science and Engineering: M K Venkataraman National Pub. Numerical methods: S Balachandra Rao University Press. Advanced Engineering Mathematics: Michael D Greenberg PHI. Theory and Problems of Vector analysis: Murray Spiegel Schaum’s Mc Graw Hill.
NETWORK THEORY LA 302 2+1+0 Module 1 Source transformation Mesh and Node voltage Analysis – Coupled circuits – Dot conventions – Analysis of coupled circuits. Module 2 484
Network theoremsSuper position theorem Reciprocity theorem  Thevenin’s theorem Norton's theorem Millman's theorem Maximum power transfer theorem Tellegen’s theorem Graph of a network Trees cotrees Incident matrix cut set matrixtieset matrix Analysis of networksequilibrium equations. Module 3 Fourier Analysis and Laplace transform  Fourier analysis of periodic signalsTrignometric and exponential forms Non periodic signals and Fourier transforms Frequency spectrum of periodic waveforms  Laplace Transform Review of theoremsLaplace transform of important signal waveforms  Periodic functions Initial value and final value Theorems DC&AC transientsSolution of network problems using Laplace transform. Module 4 Twoport Networks and Filters  Voltage and Current ratios of two  port networks Admittanceimpedance hybrid and transmission parameters of two port networks. Passive filters as two port networks Characteristics of ideal filtersImage impedance Constant K low pass High pass and Band pass filtersmderived filtersComposite filters. Module 5 Network Synthesis – Realizability concept – Hurwitz property – positive realness – properties of positive real function – Synthesis of R, L, RC and LC driving point functions – Foster and Cauer forms. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Network analysis M.E Van Valkenburg, PHI Circuits and Networks – analysis & synthesis – A. Sudhakar & S P ShyamMohan Network and Systems D Roy Chaudhary Network analysis and synthesis Franklin F Kuo – John Wiley & Sons Engineering Circuit Analysis W H Hayt & Jack Kennerly – McGraw Hill
ELECTRICAL TECHNONOGY LA 303 2+1+0 Module 1 D.C.Generator  O.C.C. – Condition for self excitation – field critical resistance – critical speed – Load characteristics of generators – Losses – power flow diagram – efficiency – Condition for maximum efficiency – Applications. Module 2 D C motor  starter – 3 point and 4 point starters – torque equation – speed equation – speed torque – characteristics of shunt, series and compound motors – Losses – efficiency – Brake test – 485
Swinburne’s test – speed control – field control – armature control – series parallel control – applications. Module 3 Transformers  transformer on noload and load operation – phasor diagram – equivalent circuit – regulation – losses and efficiency – o.c. and s.c. test – applications – Design of step down transformers like 230/606V, – Basic principles of 3 phase tranformer – autotransformer – applications. Module 4 A.C Machines  3 phase induction motors – rotating magnetic field – torque equation – slip – torqueslip characteristics – operating characteristics – starting of 3 phase induction motors – starters – single phase induction motors – constructional features – types – working and characteristics only (no analysis) – constructional features of synchronous machines – principle of operation of alternator – emf equation – regulation by emf and mmf method – principle of operation of synchronous motor – starting of synchronous motor. Module 5 Special Machines  A C and D C servo motors – synchros – constructional features – working of a tachogenerator – stepper motors – construction, working, applications and specifications of stepper motors – universal motors  constructional features – typical applications – criteria for selection of motors – electromagnetic relays – contactors. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Electrical & Electronic Technology: Hughes, Pearson Education Electrical Technology: H. Cotton Electrical Machines: R.K.Rajput Electrical Design Estimating & Costing: K.B.Raina & Bhattacharya Electrical Machines & Power systems: Vincent Del Toro
SOLID STATE DEVICES LA 304 3+1+0 Module 1 Energy bands and charge carriers in semiconductors: energy bands metals semiconductors and insulators direct and indirect semiconductors charge carriers in semiconductors: electrons and holes intrinsic and extrinsic material nmaterial and pmaterial carrier concentration: fermi levelEHPs temperature dependance conductivity and mobility drift and resistance effect of temperature and doping on mobility hall effect. Module 2 Diffusion of carriers derivation of diffusion constant D Einstein relation continuity equation pn junctions: contact potential equilibrium fermi levels space charge at junctions current components 486
at a junction: majority and minority carrier currents zener and avalanche breakdown capacitance of pn junctions. Module 3 pn junction diodes: voltampere characteristics switching time rectifier action Zener diodes: voltampere characteristics Tunnel diodes: tunneling phenomena voltampere characteristics Varactor diodes Photo diodes: detection principle light emitting diodes. Module 4 Bipolar junction transistors: npn and pnp transistor action open circuited transistor biasing in active region majority and minority carrier distribution terminal currents amplification and switching α and β gain factors emitter efficiency γ schottky transistors photo transistors. Module 5 Field effect transistors: operation pinch off and saturation pinch off voltage gate control voltampere characteristics MOSFETS: n MOS and p MOS: comparison enhancement and depletion types control of threshold voltage MOS capacitance. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Solid state electronic devices  Ben G Streetman Pearson Education Microelectronic Devices  Nagchaudhari, Pearson Education Integrated electronics – Millman and Halkias Mc Graw Hill. Physics of semiconductor devices  S M Sze Mc Graw Hill. Semiconductor devices – Nagchoudhary Tata Mc Graw Hill. Physics of semiconductor devices  Shur PHI. Theory of Semiconductor devices  Karl Hess PHI.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS  I LA 305 3+1+0 Module 1 Rectifiers and Power supplies: Half wave full wave and bridge rectifiers working analysis and design C filter analysis regulated power supplies: series and shunt design of regulated power supplies for specified output conditions current limiting short circuit protection IC regulated power supplies. Module 2 Transistor as an amplifier: Transistor at low frequencies h parameter model analysis expression of voltage and current gain input and output impedance CE CB and CC configurations comparisontransistor parameters from static characteristics FET: operation characteristics small signal model. Module 3
487
Transistor Biasing: operating point DC and AC load lines Q point selection bias stabilitydefinition of stability factors derivation of stability factor for ICO variation fixed bias collector to base bias self bias circuits bias compensation compensation for ICO and VBE. Module 4 RC Coupled amplifier: working analysis and design phase and frequency response FET amplifier: biasing analysis and design. Module 5 Wave shaping circuits: clipping clamping RC integration  differentiation transistor as a switchastable multivibrator working and design  UJT working and applications simple sweep circuit. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Electronic devices and circuits: Boylsted & Nashelsky Pearson Edn. Integrated Electronics: Millman & Halkias Mc Graw Hill. Electronic Principles: Malvino Tata Mc Graw Hill. Electronic devices and circuits: Bogart UBS. Electronic devices and circuits: Allen Mottershed PHI. Electronic devices: Floyd Pearson Edn. Electronic devices and applications: B Somanathan Nair PHI. Electronic devices and circuits: J B Gupta S K Kataria & Sons Pub.
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LA 306 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction to C C fundamentals  The character set  identifiers and keywords  Data types  constants  variables and arrays  declarations  expressions  statements  symbolic constants arithmetic operators Relational and Logical operators  The conditional operator  Library functions  Data input and output  getchar – putchar, scanf, printf  gets and puts functions  interactive programming. Module 2 Control Statements While  do while  for  nested loops if else switch break  continue  The comma operator  go to statement, Functions  a brief overview  defining a function  accesing a function  passing arguments to a function  specifying argument  data types  function prototypes  Recursion. Module 3 Program Structure Storage classes  Automatic variables  external variables  multi file programs. Arrays: defining an array  processing an array  passing arrays in a function – multi dimensional arrays  array and 488
strings. Structures and unions: defining a structure  processing a structure  user defined data types passing structure to a function  self referential structures  unions. Module 4 Pointers Fundamentals  pointer declaration  passing pointers to a function  pointers and one dimensional arrays  operations on pointers  pointers and multi dimensional arrays passing functions to other functions. Module 5 Data Files Opening and closing of a data file  creating a data file  processing a data file, low level programming  register variables – bit wise operation  bit fields  enumeration  command line parameters  macros  the C preprocessor. Text Book 1. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C: Ashok N Kanthane, Pearson Edn. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Theory and problems of programming with C Gottfried, Schaum's series. The C programming language  Kernighan & Ritche, PHI. Programming Techniqes through C  Venkateshmurthy, Pearson Edn. Programming in C  Balaguruswamy, Tata Mc Graw Hill. Programming Ansi C  Ram Kumar. Computer Programming  Rajaraman, PHI.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LAB LA 307 0+0+4 1. Measurement of Electric power (single phase and three phase) and energy using wattmeter and energy meter. 2. Study of stardelta connections. 3. O.C.C. and Load characteristics of D.C. generators. 4. Swinburne’s test. 5. Load characteristics of D.C. shunt, series and compound motors 6. O.C and S.C test on singlephase transformer. 7. Load test on stepup/stepdown transformer; calculation of efficiency and regulation at different power factors. 8. Study of starting of three phase induction motors and load test on squirrel cage induction motor. 9. Load test on slipring induction motor. 10. Study of stepper and servomotors. 11. Load test on single phase induction motor. 12. Predetermination of regulation of the alternator by emf and mmf method.
489
BASIC ELECTRONICS LABORATORY A 308 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0+0+4 Familiarization of CRO, DVM, AF generator etc and Soldering practice. Characteristics  Diode, Transistor, FET, UJT. Determination of parameters. Design and testing of DC power supplies for specified output. Design of Single stage RC coupled amplifier. Determination of Band width. Design of FET amplifier. Determination of Band width. Wave shaping. Design of clipping, clamping, RC differentiator & Integrator. Design of Astable multivibrator for specified time period  sharpening of edges. Simple sweep circuit. Familiarization of data sheets of components – OA79, 1N4001, SZ6.8, BC107, BC547, BC557, BFW10, 2N2646. 10. Simulation of simple circuits using Spice. Note Students may assemble the circuits of the experiments on a universal P.C.B. and verify the results in order to get soldering practice
490
FOURTH SEMESTER
491
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  III CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0 Module 1 Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficents  Finding P.I. by the method of variation of parameters –Cauchys equations Linear Simultaneous eqns simple applications in engineering problems. Module 2 Partial Differential Equations  formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitary Functions solution of Lagrange Linear Equations –Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave equation. Module 3 Fourier Transforms:  Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine & Cosine transforms  inverse transforms  transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no proof) – Parsevals Identity  simple problems. Module 4 Probability and statistics: Binomial law of probability  The binomial distribution, its mean and variance  poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution  its mean and variance fitting of binomial & poisson distributions  normal distribution  properties of normal curve standard normal curve  simple problems in binomial, poisson and normal distributions. Module 5 Population & Samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) –Sampling distribution of variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance  Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – Test of significance for single proportion, difference of proportion, single mean and difference of means (proof of theorems not expected). References 1. Higher Engineering Mathematics  B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers. 2. Engineering Mathematics Vol.II 3rd year Part A & B  M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing Company 3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations  Ian N.Sneddon.,McGraw Hill. 4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers – Richard A Johnson, Pearson Education Asia / PHI. 5. A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II) – Bali and Iyengar, Laxmi Publications Ltd. 6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 7. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC DESIGN LA 402 3+1+0 Module 1 Gates –Inverter  OR gates  AND gates  NOR Gates  De Morgan’s Theorems  NAND Gates – EXCLUSIVE  OR Gates  Tristate Inverter  TTL Circuits  Digital Integrated Circuits  7400 492
Devices  TTL Characteristics  TTL Overview  AND OR NOT Gates  OpenCollector Gates – CMOS gates. Module 2 Boolean Algebra and Karnaugh Maps  Boolean Relations  SumofProducts method  Algebraic Simplification  Karnaugh maps – Pairs – Quads  and Octets  Karnaugh Simplifications  Don’tCare Conditions. Multiplexers  demultiplexers  decoder and encoder. Module 3 ArithmeticLogic Units  Binary Addition  Binary Subtraction  Half Adders  Full Adders  Binary Adders  signed Binary Numbers  2’s Complement  2’sComplement AdderSubtractor. Module 4 Flip Flops  RS Latches  Level Clocking  D Latches  EdgeTriggered D & T FlipFlops  EdgeTriggered JK Masterslave FlipFlop. Module 5 Registers and Counters  Buffer Registers  Shift Registers  Controlled Shift Registers  Ripple Counters  Synchronous Counters  Ring counters  Modulo counters  ThreeState Register. ROMs – PROMs and EPROMs  RAMs. A small TTL Memory. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Digital Fundamentals: Floyd, Pearson Edn. Fundamentals of digital circuits: A Anand Kumar, PHI Digital Integrated Electronics: Taub and Shilling, McGraw Hill, Digital electronics: D C Green, Pearson Edn. Digital Logic and state machine design: Comer, Oxford. Digital electronic principles and applications: A K Maini, Khanna Pub. Digital electronic principles: Malvino and Leach, Mc Graw Hill. Logic and computer design fundamentals: M Morris Mano, Pearson Edn. COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LA403 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: communication systems – Modulation  need for modulation bandwidth Amplitude modulation  theory mathematical representation frequency spectrum  USB & LSB power relation Frequency modulation  theory mathematical representation frequency spectrum Phase modulation comparison of AM FM PM. Module 2 Radio transmitters: AM transmitter  block diagram  Solid state modulators  circuit explanationFM transmitter  reactance modulator varactor diode modulator Amstrong modulator. Module 3 Radio receivers: Tuned radio frequency receiver superheterodyne receiver  block schematicselectivity sensitivity importance of IF  image frequency rejection  AM receivers  schematic explanation  RF amplifiers  circuit explanation  Mixer circuits  IF amplifiers  circuit explanation493
simple diode detector  Automatic gain control circuit  simple and delayed AGC  FM receivers block schematic explanation  amplitude limiting  FM demodulators: slope detectors phase discriminator ratio detectors. Module 4 Side band communication: Single side band transmission  suppression of carrier  balanced modulator  filtering of unwanted sideband  SSB receivers  block schematic explanation  pilot carrier receiver  suppressed carrier receiver  Vestigial side band transmission  transmitter and receiver responses  advantages of VSB in television. Module 5 Telephone Systems  Telephone subscribers loop circuit  subscribers line interface circuit  Pulse and tone signaling  Frequency assignments  Electronic telephone  block schematic of a telephone set block schematic of single line analog SLIC board  two wire repeaters  Electronic private automatic branching exchange  basic block schematic Power line communication: block schematic explanation Facsimile  FAX transmitter and receiver. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Electronic communication Systems: Wayne Tomasi Pearson Edn. Electronic communication: Roody and Coolen PHI. Electronic Communication systems: George Kennedy Mc Graw Hill. Electronic and radio engineering: A P Mathur. Telephony and Carrier current engineering: P N Das. Modern communication Systems: Couch PHI. ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS  II LA 404 3+1+0 Module1 High frequency equivalent circuit of a transistor. Hybrid pi model explanation of components r parameters in terms of h parameters Tuned amplifiers principle  single tuned and double tuned amplifiers frequency response applications (no analysis) multistage amplifiers frequency response. Module2 Feedback different types positive, negative, voltage, current, series and shunt feedback Feedback in amplifiers its effect on amplifier performance typical feedback arrangements emitter follower darlington emitter follower cascade amplifier (principles only) difference amplifier. Module 3 Oscillators conditions for oscillation analysis and design of RC phase shift oscillator, general form of oscillator circuit working of Hartley, Colpitt's, Crystal, tuned collector and Wien Bridge oscillators. Module 4 Monostable multi vibrator analysis  design  applications  triggering  Bistable multivibrator analysis and design different methods of triggering commutating capacitor Schmitt trigger working design. 494
Module 5 Large signal amplifier harmonic distortion analysis of class A, class B, class C and class D amplifiers complimentary and symmetry stage sweep generators voltage and current sweeps time base generators linearisation miller and bootstrap sweeps  applications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Electronic devices and circuits Boylsted & Neshelsky, Pearson Edn. Integrated electronics Millman & Halkias, Mc Graw Hill Electronic principles Malvino Electronic devices and circuits Bugart Microelectronics Digital and Analogue Botkar. SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS LTA 405 2+1+0 Module1 Dynamic Representation of Systems  Systems Attributes Causality linearity Stability timeinvariance. Special Signals Complex exponentials Singularity functions (impulse and step functions).. Linear TimeInvariant Systems: Differential equation representation convolution Integral. Discrete form of special functions. Discrete convolution and its properties. Realization of LTI system (differential and difference equations). Module 2 Fourier Analysis of Continuous Time Signals and Systems  Fourier Series Fourier Transform and properties Parseval’s theorem Frequency response of LTI systems. Sampling Theorem.
Module 3 Fourier Analysis of Discrete Time Signals & Systems  DiscreteTime Fourier series DiscreteTime Fourier Transform (including DFT) and properties. Frequency response of discrete time LTI systems. Module 4 Laplace Transform  Laplace Transform and its inverse: Definition existence conditions Region of Convergence and properties Application of Laplace transform for the analysis of continuous time LTI system (stability etc.) Significance of poles & zeros ZTransform  ZTransform and its inverse: Definition existence Region of convergence and properties Application of ZTransform for the analysis of Discrete time LTI systems Significance of poles and zeros. Module 5 Random Signals  Introduction to probability. Bayes Theorem concept of random variableprobability density and distribution functions function of a random variable. MomentsIndependence of a random variable. Introduction to random process. Auto and cross correlation. widesense stationarity power spectral density White noise Random processes through LTI systems. 495
References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Signals and Systems: Oppenheim Alan V Willsky Alan. S Pearson Edn. Communication Systems: Haykin Simon John Wiley. Signals and Systems: I J Nagrarth Tata Mc Graw Hill. Signals and Systems: Farooq Husain Umesh pub. Adaptive signal processing: W Bernad Pearson Edn. RELIABILITY AND HUMANITIES LA 406 2+1+0 Module 1 Concepts of reliability: Definition of reliability failure classification of failures measures of reliability failure rate mean time between failures (MTBF) mean time to failure (MTTF). Module 2 Failure pattern and fitting curves: Graphical plots Bath tub curves Hazard models Constant hazard models Linearly increasing hazard model Weibull model. Module 3 Manufacture for Quality and reliability: The need for prototype tests the quality standard planning to achieve required quality basic concepts of sequencing.
Module 4 Control charts in statistical quality control: statistical quality control advantages types of control charts X and R chart P chart C chart Reengineering Zero defects. Module 5 Human relations: Human Behavior Scope of Industrial psychologyTheories of MotivationHandling of workers grievancesWorkers participation in managementIndustrial disciplineIndustrial disputesIndustrial fatigueWages and incentives. References 1. Reliability Engineering: L S Sreenath. 2. Reliability Engineering: A K Govil. 3. Industrial Engineering & Management: Banga and Sharma. ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB LA 407 List of experiments 1. Power amplifiers: Design of class A and class AB push pull stage – verification of power output. 2. IC power amplifier. 496 0+0+4
3. Oscillators: Design of RC phase shift, Hartley & Colpitts oscillators. 4. Design of Monostable and bistable multivibrators. 5. Design of bootstrap sweep generator. 6. Schmitt trigger. 7. SCR, Triac firing circuits. 8. Feedback amplifier, design of two stage RC coupled amplifier. 9. Tuned amplifiers. 10. Design and testing of DC regulated power supplies (Fixed and variable). 11. Simulation of above circuits using PSPICE. Note New experiments may be added in accordance with subject LA 404
COMPUTER PRORAMMING LAB LA 408 Part 1 1. Computer hardware familiarization. 2. Familiarization of MSDOS commands, Microsoft Windows. 3. Familiarization of Microsoft Word, Adobe Acrobat Reader. Part 2 Programming Experiments in C/C++: Programming experiments in C/C++ to cover control structures, functions, arrays, structures, pointers and files, classes, operator & function overloading, inheritance, polymorphism. 0+0+4
497
FIFTH SEMESTER
498
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS  IV CMELPA501 3+1+0 Module 1 Complex Integration: Line Integral –Cauchy’s integral theorem Cauchy’s integral formulaTaylor’s seriesLaurent’s series zeros and singularities Residues residue theoremEvaluation of real integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semicircle. Module 2 Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection methodRegula falsi method  Newton –Raphson method – solution of system of linear equations by Jacobi’s iteration method and GaussSiedel method. Module 3 Numerical solution of ordinary differential equation: Taylor’s series method Euler’s method – Modified Eulers method  Rungea – Kutta method (IV order)Milne’s predictor corrector method. Module 4 Z – Transforms: Definition of Z transform properties –Z transform of polynomial functions – trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property inverse transform – solution of 1st & 2nd order difference equations with constant coefficients using Z transforms. Module 5 Linear programming: graphical solution – solution using simplex method (non – degenerate case only) – BigM method, two phase method Duality in L.P.P. Balanced T.P. – Vogels approximation method – Modi method. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Advanced Engineering Mathematics – Ervin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern limited. Numerical methods in Engineering & Science – Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers. Higher Engineering Mathematics  Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers. Numerical methods in Science & Engineering  Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, National Publishing company. Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems  P.C.Tulsian, Vishal Pandey, Pearson Education Asia. Complex variables and applications  Churchill and Brown,McGrawHill. Operations research  Panneer Selvam, PHI. Engineering Mathematics Vol. III S Arumugam, A.T.Isaac,A , Somasundaram, Scitech publications Advanced Mathematics for Engg.students Vol. III S.Narayanan, T.K.M.Pillay, G.Ramanaigh, S.Vishwananthan printers & publishers.
POWER ELECTRONICS LA 502 Module 1 499 2+1+0
Power semiconductor Devices  History of development of Power Electronic devices Constructional features Characteristics rating and specification gate/base drive circuitsprotection including cooling and application consideration of diodes SCRS, GTO, BJTS, MCT, MOSFET and IGBT. Series and parallel operations of SCR Electromagnetic interference. Module 2 AC to DC Converters  Operation and analysis of Single phase and multiphase uncontrolled and controlled rectifiers with R, RL and back EMF load effect of source inductance free wheeling effect power factor improvement methods for phase Controlled rectifiers filters. PWM chips: SG3524 and TL 494 Block schematic. Module 3 AC to AC Voltage Converter  Operation and analysis of single phase integral cycle and phase controlled converters Configuration of three phase controllers. Module 4 DC to DC Converters  Chopper classification Step down step up and four quadrant converters operation analysis and control with R, RL and EMF load current and voltage Commutation circuits. Module 5 DC to AC Converters  Single phase and three phase bridge inverters VSI and CSI voltage control  PWM & Square wave operation Harmonics and their reduction techniques. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Power Electronics: Rashid Muhammad, Pearson Edn. Power Electronics: Harish C Ray, Galgotia Pub. Thyristors and Applications: Ramamoorthy. Power Electronics: Converter, Applications and Design, Mohan Ned, John Wiley, Power Semiconductor Circuits: Dewan, S.B. and Satrughan A, John Wiley & Sons, 1975. Thyristorised Power Controllers: Dubey, G.K., Doradlla, S. R., Wiley Eastern, 1987.
BASIC INSTRUMENTATION A503 3+1+0 Module 1 Generalized configuration of Instrumentation system: Definition of measuring parameters Calibration, Static and dynamic, Standards of measurements, Measurements errors, Accuracy, Precision, Sensitivity, Resolution, Significant figures. Module 2 500
Measurement of resistance, inductance and capacitance using bridges  Wheatstone, Kelvin, Maxwell, Hay, Schering bridges, Megger, Q meter, Electronic multimeter, vector voltmeter, vector impedance meter. Module 3 Signal generators  Audio generators, Function generators, Sweep frequency generators, Pulse generators, RF generators, Frequency synthesizer. Module 4 Digital instruments: Digital voltmeter  dual slop, successive approximation types, Digital measurement of time interval, phase, period, frequency, ratio of two frequencies, Digital LCR meter, Digital IC tester. Module 5 The cathode ray tube, Deflection amplifier, Wave form display, Oscilloscope time  base, Dual trace oscilloscope, Dual beam and split beam. Oscilloscope controlsmeasurements of voltage, frequency and phase, pulse measurements, Lissajous figures, Z axis modulation, oscilloscope probes. Special oscilloscopes  Delayed time base oscilloscope and controls Analog Storage oscilloscope, Storage oscilloscope controls, Sampling oscilloscope, Digital storage oscilloscope  Operation, Analog to digital conversion and storage, digital memory, digital  to analog conversion, DSO controls, DSO applications Spectrum analyzer, Distortion meter. Text Books 1. A.D. Cooper and W.D.Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques, Prentice  Hall of India Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 1995. 2. D.A.Bell, Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1994 References 1. T.S.Rathore, Digital Measurements Techniques, Narosa Publishers, Bombay, 1997 2. Beckwith, Mechanical Measurement 5/e, Pearson Education. 3. Doeblin, Measurement SystemsApplication and Design, Mc Graw Hill, N.Y.1990. COMPUTER ORGANISATION AND ARCHITECTURE 2+1+0
LA504
Module 1 Basic structure of computer hardware and software addressing methods and machine programming sequencing different addressing modes instruction sets computer arithmetic logic design fast adders multiplication Booth’s algorithm fast multiplication integer division floating point numbers. Module 2 Control unit instruction execution cycle sequencing of control signals hardwired control PLAsmicro programmed controls control signals micro instructions  Micro program sequencing branch address modification pre fetching of micro instructions. Module 3 501
Memory organization semi conductor RAM memories internal organization bipolar and MOS devices dynamic memories multiple memory modules and interleaving cache memories mapping functions  replacement algorithms virtual memories address translationpage tables  memory management units secondary memories disk drives standards. Module 4 InputOutput organization accessing I/O devices direct memory access (DMA) interrupts and interrupt handling handling multiple devices device identification vectored interrupts interrupt nesting daisy chaining I/O interfaces serial and parallel standardsbusesscheduling bus arbitrations printers plotters VDUs. Module 5 Introduction to parallel processing and architectureclassification array processors pipeline architecture interconnection networks multistage networks message passing architecture. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Computer organization – Hamacher C V, Mc Graw Hill. Computer Systems and Architecture – Vincent P Heuring, H F Jordan, Pearson Edn. Computer organization and Design – Pal Choudhary Computer organization and Architecture – Hayes J P Computer Org. & Architecture Stallings, Pearson Education.
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LA 505 3+1+ 0 Module 1 Introduction to operational amplifiers – Basic differential amplifier  dual input balanced output and unbalanced output Internal block schematic of op amp  Pin identificationpower supply requirements  typical data sheet  Opamp parameters  ideal op amp  transfer curve  equivalent circuit open loop configurations  frequency response of op amps  compensating networks  slew rate and its effect. Module 2 Op amp in closed loop configuration: Different feed back configurations Voltage series feedback and voltage shunt feedback  concept of virtual ground voltage follower  V/I converters and its applications  Differential amplifiers with one op amp and 3 op amps Use of offset minimizing resistor (ROM) and its design. Module 3 Op amp applications Summer Subtractor Log amplifier Antilog amplifier Comparators: zero crossing using voltage reference regenerative (Schmitt trigger) comparators Astable and 502
monostable multivibrators Triangular and sawtooth wave generators Integrator and differentiatorRC phase shift and Wien bridge oscillatorsSample and hold circuit Peak detector circuit. Module 4 Filters and timers: LPF HPF BPF Notch and all pass filters I order and II order filters Switched capacitor filter Switched capacitor integrator. 555 timers – Functional block diagram Astable multivibrator, monostable multivibrator and its applications. Module 5 Specialized ICs and applications: Voltage regulator ICs – 78XX and 79XX series 317 variable regulators 1723 switching regulators 566 VCO chip Phase locked loop(PLL)  capture and lock range 565 PLL  PLL applications: Frequency multiplication and division AM demodulation FM detection FSK demodulation  LM 380 power amplifier  intercom using LM 380 8038 Function generator chip  applications. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: Ramakand Gaykwad PHI publications. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: R F Coughlin Pearson Education. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: Ravi Raj Dudeja Umesh Publications. Linear Integrated circuits: Roy Choudhary & Jain Wiely Eastern Publications. Integrated circuits: K R Botkar
TRANSDUCERS AND RECORDING SYSTEMS A506 3+1+0 Module 1 Transducers  definition and classification, Electrical transducers, selecting a transducer Temperature measurements: standards and calibration, thermal expansion methods  bimetalic thermometers, liquid in glass thermometers, vapour pressure thermometers. Module 2 Termocouple  principle, fundamental laws, reference junction considerations, types of thermocouples, industrial thermocouples, thermopiles. Resistance temperature detectors  Principle measurements using three wire and four wire bridge circuits, solid state sensors, quartz thermometers, optical pyrometers, digital thermometers. Module 3 Displacement transducers: variable resistance transducers, variable inductance transducers, LVDT construction, principle, characteristics, advantages, Variable capacitance transducers, piezoelectric transducers, digital displacement transducers. Module 4 Strain measurements: strain gauges  different types, resistive semiconductor and optical strain gauges, strain gauge circuits, temperature compensation, Practical Applications 503
Module 5 Recorders: Strip chart recorders, galvanometric recorders, servo recorders, oscillographic recorders, magnetic recorders, direct recording, FM recording, digital recorders, electro mechanical recorders. Display devices, Classification of displays, cathode ray tube, LEDs in direct and indirect bandgap materials, typical uses of LEDs, Liquid crystal displays, theory of liquid crystal display operation, typical use of LCDs. Text Books 1. Beckwith: Mechanical Mesurements 5/e, Pearson Education 2. D V S Murthy, Transducers and Instrumentation, prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 3. B S Sonde, Transducers and Display Systems, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 1979 References 1. E A Doeblin, Measurements Systems  Application and Design, Mc Graw Hill, N Y, 1990. 2. J W Dally, W.F Riley and K G McConnel, Instrumentation for Engineering Measurements, John Wiley and sons Inc., N.Y, 1993. DIGITAL IC LABORATORY LA 507 0+0+4 List of experiments 1. TTL & CMOS characteristics (7400, CD4001) 2. Interfacing of TTL & electromagnetic relay using transistor, opto coupler (4N33) & Darlington arrays (ULN2803). 3. Logic family interconnection (TTL to CMOS & CMOS to TTL) 4. Design of half adder & full adder using gates. 5. Design and testing of ripple & synchronous counters using JK flip flops(7473, 7476) 6. Counters using shift registers (Ring counter & Johnson counter). 7. Study of counter ICs (7490, 74190). 8. Design of astable & monostable multivibrators using gates. 9. Design of monoshots using dedicated ICs (74123). 10. Logic design using multiplexers (74150). 11. Logic design using decoders (74138). 12. Adders, Subtractors, multipliers. 13. Design of 7 segment display circuitsstatic/dynamic (7447, FND542). 14. PRBS generator. 15. Digital circuit simulation using electronic work bench/ similar working tools. Note Any experiment related to LA402 may be added to the above list. MEASUREMENTS LAB A 508 1. Triggered linear sweeps circuits.
504
2. Op amp measurements: input offset voltage, input offset current, open loop gain, common mode input resistance, slew rate, CMRR, full power band width comparison of different classes of opamps (2 expts) 3. Op Amp basic circuits, Multivibrators and Oscillators 4. Dual trace generator. 5. ADC & DAC. (2expts). 6. Instrumentation amplifier & differential amplifiers measurements 7. Sample and hold circuits & measurements of rise time and fall time 8. Transducer measurements. a. Diode thermometer b. LVDT c. strain gauge. d. pressure transducer. e. thermocouple (2 expts) 9. Voltage regulators, Ics  LM 723,78XX, 79XX family. Study of Storage Oscilloscopes.
505
SIXTH SEMESTER
506
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & ECONOMICS LA 601 PART A: Industrial Management Module 1 Modern concept of Management: Scientific managementFunctions of managementPlanning Organising Staffing – Directing – Motivating  Communicating Coordinating Controlling Organisational structures Line, Line and staff and Functional relationships Span of controlDelegation Management by Objectives. Module 2 Personnel management: Objectives and functions of personnel management RecruitmentSelection and training of workers Labour Welfare Industrial Fatigue Industrial disputesTrade UnionsQuality circles. Formation of companies: ProprietoryPartnershipJoint stock companies Public sector Joint sector and Cooperative sector. Module 3 Marketing Management: Pricing Promotion Channels of distribution Market researchAdvertising. Production Management: Batch and mass production Inventory control EOQProject planning by PERT/CPM Construction of Network (Basic ideas only). PART B: Economics Module 4 Theory of demand and supply Price mechanism Factors of production Land, labour, capital and organization National income Difficulties in estimation Taxation Direct and indirect taxesProgressive and regressive Black money InflationCauses and consequences. Module 5 Indian financial system Reserve bank of India: Functions  Commercial banking systemDevelopment financial institutions  IDBI ICICI SIDBI IRBI NABARD Investment institutions – UTI  Insurance companies  Indian capital market Stock market Functions Role of the public sector  Privatisation Multinational corporations and their impact on the Indian economy. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Industrial Management Industrial Management Marketing Management Indian economy Modern economic theory O P Khanna, Dhanpat Rai Pub. K.K. Ahuja, Khanna Pub. Philip Kotler, PHI A.N. Agarwal, Wishwa Prakashan K.K Dewett, Shyam Lal charitable trust. 3+2+0
A602 Module 1
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS 3+1+0
507
Introduction to microprocessors and microcomputers: Function of microprocessors architecture of 8085 pin configuration and functions – tristate bus concept  generation of control signals  bus timings – demultiplexing AD0AD7 – flags  memory decoding  interfacing of RAM and EPROM I/O addressing  I/O mapped I/O  and memory mapped I/O schemes  instruction execution fetch/execute cycle  instruction timings and operation status. Module 2 Atmel AT89C51 microcontroller – features  pin configurations  internal block schematic  pin descriptions  PORT0, PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, idle & power down mode  power control register program protection modes  flash programming & verification. Module 3 Memory organization  program memory  data memory  direct & indirect addressing area Program status word  register banks  addressing modes  instruction set – arithmetic  logical and data transfer instructions  Boolean instructions  program branching instructions  Programming examples. Module 4 Machine cycles – interrupts  interrupt sources  interrupt enable register  interrupt priority interrupt control system  interrupt handling  single step operation  port bit latches and buffers port structures and operation  accessing external memory – programming examples. Module 5 Timer0 & Timer1  TMOD SFR  mode0, mode1, mode2, mode3  TCON SFR  serial interface SCON SFR  mode0, mode1, mode2, mode3 block schematics baud rates power on reset circuitONCE mode on chip oscillator external program & data memory timing diagrams I/O port timings – programming examples. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The 8051 Microcontroller: Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Pearson Education. The 8051 Microcontroller: Kenneth J Ayala, Penram International Microprocessors and Architecture: Ramesh S Goankar Microcomputers and Microprocessors: John Uffenbeck, PHI Web site of Atmel  www.atmel.com
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LTA 603 3+1+0 Module1 Review of signals and systems. Introduction  advantages and limitations of Digital Signal Processing. Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) Filters  Signal Flowgraph Basic Network structure for IIR filter Direct Cascade Parallel Forms. Design of IIR Digital filters from analog filters508
Butterworth design Chebyshev design design based on numerical solutions of differential equations Impulse Invariant Transformation. Module 2 Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filters: Linear phase FIR filters Frequency response of linear phase FIR filters  Location of the zeros of linear phase FIR filters. Realization of FIR cascade  lattice designFourier Series method using windowsrectangular triangular or Barlett windows – Hanning – Hamming – Blackman  Kaiser windows. Module 3 Discrete fourier Transform: PropertiesCircular convolution Linear Convolution using DFTrelation between Z Transform and DFT Fast Fourier Transform; decimation – in time and Frequency  FFT algorithms – General Computation using Radix 2 algorithm. Module 4 Finite word length effects in digital filters: Introduction Number Representation  Fixed PointSignMagnitude  One’scomplement Two’s  complement forms Addition of two fixed point numbers Multiplication in Fixed Point arithmetic  Floating point numbers Block floating point numbers quantization  truncation rounding  effects due to truncation and rounding Input quantization error  Product quantization error  Coefficient quantization error zeroinput limit cycle Oscillations  Overflow limit cycle Oscillations  Scaling Quantization in Floating Point realization IIR digital filters  Finite Word Length Effects in FIR Digital Filters Quantization effects in the Computation of the DFT quantization errors in FFT algorithms. Module 5 Applications of digital signal processing: Speech Processing speech analysis speech coding sub band coding channel vecoder homomorphic vecoder digital processing of audio signals Radar signal processing DSP based measurements systems. Equi ripple FIR design PCM DSP chips a general study. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A604 Digital signal processing: Ifechor Pearson edn. Desecrate time signal processing: Oppenhiem Pearson edn. Digital signal processing: Oppenhiem and Sheffer PHI Introduction to Digital signal processing: Johny R Johnson Digital signal processing: Proakis and Manolakis. Digital signal processing: P Ramesh Babu Scitech Pub. INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION  I 2+1+0
Module 1 Functional descriptions of measuring InstrumentsFunctional elements of an Instrument, active and passive transducers, analog and digital modes of operation, null and deflection methods, static and dynamic characteristics. Module 2 Basic methods of force measurement characteristics of elastic force transducers, resolution of vector forces and moments in to rectangular components 509
Module 3 Torque measurement  torque measurement on rotating shafts, dynamometers, gyroscopic force and torque measurement, vibrating  wire force tranducers, strain gauge, feedback and optical methods. Module 4 Level measurementfloat displacer, bubbler, capacitance, radioisotope and ultrasound type. Flow meters: Area flow meters, mass flow meters, positive displacement type and electric type flow meters. Module 5 Pressure measurement  Manometers, elastic types, bell gauges, electrical types. Vacuum measurement, differential pressure transmitters, sound pressure level measurement, accoustic intensity. References 1. Doebelin  Measurement systems  Application and DesignIVth ed.. MGL, 1990 2. Patranabis  Principles of Industrial Instrumentation  2nd ed., TMH, 1996 3. James W.Dally  Instrumentation for Engineering Measurement  2nd ed., 1993, Wiley International DATA COMMUNICATION A605 4+1+0 Module 1 Data transmission concepts and terminology  Analog and digital data transmission transmission impairments  transmission media Data encoding  digital data, digital  signals  digital data, analog signals  analog data, digital signals  analog data analog signals. Asynchronous and synchronous transmission  error detection techniques interfacing. Module 2 Multiplexing: Frequency division multiplexing  synchronous time division multiplexing  statistical time division multiplexing. Circuit Switching: Introduction  single node networks  digital switching concepts  digital private & branch exchange  control signaling Packet switching: principles  example systems, virtual circuits and data grams  routing traffic control  X.25 Module 3 Local and metropolitan area networks: LAN/MAN technology  different topologies  optical fibre bus  medium access control protocols  LAN/MAN standards Module 4 Computer Communication Architecture protocols  the OSI model  the TCP/IP protocol  System network architecture  principles of inter networking  the bridge  routing with bridges connectionless internetworking  connection oriented internetworking Module 5 ISDN: overview of ISDN  transmission structure  user access  ISDN protocols broad band ISDN. 510
References 1. William stallings  Data and Computer Communication (4th ed.)PHI 2. Larry Haghes  Introduction to Data Communication  a practical approach  Jones and Bartiett Publishers CONTROL SYSTEM THEORY A606 3+1+0 Module 1 Laplace transforms to linear systems, transfer function of linear systems simple mechanical and electromechanical systems. Analogous Systems: force voltage and force current analogy. Block diagram algebra, signal flow graphs  Mason’s gain formula. Module 2 Standard test signals  Time response of first and second order systems  natural frequency and damping ratio. Time response specifications. Steady state and dynamic error coefficients. Module 3 Concept of stability, Routh’s stability criterion, root locus technique  stability analysis. Frequency response analysis: frequency Open loop and closed loop control systems: examples, applications of domain specification, Bode plots. Module 4 Nyquist plots, gain margin and phase margin, Nyquist stability criterion. Closed loop frequency response; Constant M and N circles, Nichols chart Module 5 Introduction to control system design  preliminary considerations  lead, lag and lead  lag compensation, Design of lead compensators and lag compensators. Elements of discrete control systems  transfer functions of discrete data systems stability of closed loop discrete system  jury’s test bilinear transformation method Text Books 1. I J Nagarath and M.Gopal  Control Systems Engineering  New Age International Ltd.  New Delhi 2. B.C Kuo  Automatic Control SystemsPrentice Hall of India  New Delhi Reference 1. K Ogata  Modern Control Engineering  Prentice hall of India  New Delhi INSTRUMENTATION LAB A607 1. Measurements using different types of transducers 511 0+0+3
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
a. Variable capacitance type b. Variable inductance type c. LVDT d. Thermocouples and RTDs e. Photocells Measurement of level, distance, vibration Calibration of pressure gauges, temperature transmitter, E to P Conveter, differential pressure transmitter etc PC based data acqusition system Phase locked loops, frequency to voltage converter, voltage to frequency converter GPIB/RS232C interfacing of function generator and universal counter with PC Robotic trainer kit  PC based control of robotic actions Programmable logic controllers  ladder disgrams MINI PROJECT
A608
0+0+3 Each student should conceive, design, develop and realize an electronic product. The basic elements of product design  the function ergonomics and aesthetics  should be considered while conceiving and designing the product. The electronic part of the product should be an application of the analog & digital system covered up to the 6th semester. The student should submit the report at the end of the semester. The product should be demonstrated at the time of examination.
512
SEVENTH SEMESTER
513
LA701
MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN 2+1+0
Module 1 Various logic families  features – comparison – PLA – PAL GAL comparison – combinational PAL – PAL with flipflops – study of 16L8, 22V10 GAL – dual port RAM – FIFO  FPGA  gate arrays. Module 2 Embedded C compiler – advantages – memory models – interrupt functions – code optimization 89C2051 microcontroller architecturecomparison with 89C51 design of a simple trainer circuit using 89C51/89C2051 µC – interfacing of DIP switch, LED, 7 segment display, alphanumeric LCD – relay interface – design of a traffic light control system  interfacing programs using C and assembly language. Module 3 Analog to digital converters single slope, dual slope, successive approximation, sigma delta, flash – comparison  typical ICs  A/D interface – digital to analog converters – different types – D/A interface  optically isolated triac interface design of a temperature control system interfacing programs using C and assembly language. Module 4 Serial bus standards  I2C bus, SPI bus – operation – timing diagrams – 2 wire serial EEPROM – 24C04 – 3wire serial EEPROM – 93C46  interfacing  serial communication standards  RS232, RS422, RS485 – comparison – MAX232 line driver/ receiver  interfacing – interfacing programs using C and assembly language  low voltage differential signaling – PC printer port – registers – interfacing  universal serial bus – PCI bus. Module 5 Matrix key board interface  AT keyboard – commands – keyboard response codes  watch dog timers  DS1232 watch dog timer – real time clocks – DS1302 RTC – interfacing  measurement of frequency  phase angle  power factor – stepper motor interface  dc motor speed control – L293 motor driver  design of a position control system  interfacing programs using C and assembly language. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The 8051 Microcontroller: Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Pearson Education. The 8051 Microcontroller: Kenneth J Ayala, Penram International. Digital fundamentals: Floyd, Pearson Education. Programming and customizing the 8051 µC: Myke Predko, TMH Programming with ANSI C and turbo C: Kamthane, Pearson Education. Microcomputers and Microprocessors: John Uffenbeck, PHI. Web site of Atmel semiconductors  www.atmel.com
VLSI TECHNOLOGY LA 702 514 3+1+0
Module 1 Process steps in IC fabrication: Crystal growth and wafer preparation Czochralski processapparatus silicon shaping, slicing and polishing Diffusion of impurities physical mechanismFick’s I and II law of diffusion Diffusion profiles complementary (erfc) error function Gaussian profile Ion implantation Annealing process Oxidation process Lithography Photolithography, Fine line lithography, electron beam and xray lithography Chemical vapour deposition (CVD)epitaxial growth reactors metallisation patterning wire bonding and packaging. Module 2 Monolithic components: Isolation of components junction isolation and dielectric isolationTransistor fabrication buried layer impurity profile parasitic effects monolithic diodes schottky diodes and transistors FET structures JFET MOSFET PMOS and NMOS, control of threshold voltage (Vth) silicon gate technology Monolithic resistors sheet resistance and resistor designresistors in diffused regions MOS resistors monolithic capacitors junction and MOS structures IC crossovers and vias. Module 3 CMOS technology: Metal gate and silicon gate oxide isolation Twin well process Latch upBiCMOS technology fabrication steps circuit design process stick diagrams design rulesCapacitance of layers Delay Driving large capacitance loads Wiring capacitance Basic circuit concepts scaling of MOS structures scaling factors effects of miniaturization. Module 4 Subsystem design and layout Simple logic circuits inverter, NAND gates, BiCMOS circuit, NOR gates, CMOS logic systems – bus lines arrangements power dissipation power supply rail distribution subsystem design process design of a 4 bit shifter. Module 5 Gallium Arsenide Technology: Submicro CMOS technology Crystal structure Doping processChanneling effect MESFET GaAs fabrication Device modeling. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. VLSI technology: S M Sze, Mc Graw Hill pub. Basic VLSI design: Douglas Pucknell, PHI. Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: H E Weste, Pearson Edn. Integrated Circuits: K R Botkar, Khanna Pub. CMOS circuit design layout and simulation: Barter, IEEE press. Introduction to VLSI: Conway, Addison weslay. INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION  II A703 3+1+0 Module 1 Measurement viscosity of density, specific gravity scales used in petroleum industriesDifferent methods of measuring consistency and viscosity –Methods for measuring moistures and humidity – Electrical conductivity – Dielectric constantAutomatic electric psycho meter Module 2 515
PH and conductivity meters pH measurement – pH electrode station – various types of electrodes – Installation and maintenances of pH meters – conductivity meters – Electrical conductivity of solution – cell construction operating principles. Module 3 Gas Analysis – Chemical absorption, thermal conductivity, magnetic type, Gas chromagraphy, infrared and ultraviolet light, mass spectometer, propotional counters, Geigor Muller counter, Scintillation counter. Module 4 Measurement of speed Mechanical Electrical Electronic methods stroboscopic method – Measurement of acceleration various types calibrations. Module 5 Power plant instrumentation Diesel electrical power plants, Gas turbine power plants, gas and steam turbines combined cycles, nuclear reactors, fluctuating loads on power plants. Instrumentation and control of power plants. References 1. 2. 3. 4. DOEBLIN: Measurement systems, applications and design, Mc Graw Hill. Pub.Co. D.Patranabis: Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Mc Graw Hills Pub.Co. NAKRA, CHAUDBRY: Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis Mc Graw Hill. Pub.Co. ECKMAN: Industrial Instrumentation Wiley Eastern PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL A 704 2+1+0 Module 1 Process Dynamics – Process Variables – Degree of freedom – Characterization of physical systems – Dynamics of liquid, gas and thermal process – Interacting and non interacting systems – Continuous and batch process – Self regulation and servo regulation operation – Problems.
Module 2 Control actions and controllers – Basic control actions – Characteristics of two position, multi position, floating, proportional I, D Control modes – Composite control modes – PI, PD, PID control modes – pneumatic and electronic controllers to realize various control actions Module 3 Optimum controller settings: Evaluation criteria, 1/4th decay ratio, IAE, ISE, ITAE – determination of optimum settings for mathematically described process using time response and frequency response – Tuning – Process reaction curve method, Continuous cycling metho, Damped oscillation method. Module 4
516
Final control element: I/P converter – Pneumatic, electric and hydraulic actuators – Valve positioner – Control valves – Effective valve characteristics, Valve body – globe, butterfly, diaphragm, Ball valves – Value seizing, cavitation, flouting. Module 5 Complex control system: Cascade control – Feed forward control, Ratio control, Multivariable control. Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Case study – Distillation column control – Combustion control and drum level control in steam boiler. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Peter Harriot, Process control – Tata McGraw Hill D. Patranabis, Principles of Process Control – Tata McGraw Hill Curtis Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation Technology – Eastern economy Edition D.P. Eckman, Automatic Process Control – Wiley Eastern Bela G Liptak, Process Control, Instrument Engineers Handbook Donald R Coughanowr, Process System Analysis and Control – McGraw Hill BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION A 705 3+1+0 Module 1 Human Anatomy & Physiology: Anatomy & Physiology of major systems of the body. Principles of generation and propagation of bioelectric potentials. Electrical activity of heart, propagation of action through nerves, conduction velocity and latency. EMG, EMC, ECG, ERG, EEG, EGG, MEG. Electrical Safety  Physiological effects of electricity, Micro & macro shock hazards. Electrical safety codes & Standards. Protection of patients, power distribution and equipment design Module 2 Electrodes & Transducers: Bio potential electrodes  different types of electrodes, polarisable & nonpolarisable electrodes. Theory of electrode  skin interface. Electrode behaviour & circuit models. Electrodes for stimulation. Transducers, Leads & electrodes: transducers for biological applications  transduction principles, different types  active and passive transducers, implantable transducers, transducers for pressure, flow, pulse, respiration. Chemical sensors. Leads & Electrodes: Types, Materilas, properties, characteristics. Method of application and selection  equivalent circuits of leads & electrodes. Module 3 Biopotential amplifiers, recoders & monitors: Amplifiers: for ECG, EMG & EEG  basic requirements, design considerations  frequency, gain etc. ECG: Working principles, electrode systems and clinical applications EEG: Working Principles, lead system and clinical applications EMG: Working Principles and clinical applications. Evoked potential systems, determination of conduction velocity and latency. Phonocardiolography  principle and clinical applications Biopotential recording  Noise, motion artfact and other considerations Recorders: Potentiometre, galvanometre, electrostatic UV recorder and magnetic tape recorder 517
Module 4 Diagnosis and therapeutic Equipments: Diagnosis Equipments  Electronic BP Monitors, pulse monitors, electrocardioscope, spirometer, pulse oxi meter, ECG machine, EEG machine, EMG machine, EOG machine, ERG machine, PH meter, auto analyser, gas analysers. Module 5 Therapeutic Equipments  Pacemakers, Defibrillator, heart  lung machine, nerve and muscle stimulators, dialysis machines, Surgical diathermy equipment, micro wave  short wave and ultrasound diathermy equipments, Nebuliser, Inhalator, Aspirator, Humidifier and ventillators. Electrical Safety  Physiological effects of electricity, Micro & macro shock hazards. Electrical safety codes & Standards. Protection of patients, power distribution and equipment design. Text Books 1. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell and Erich A Pferffer  Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements  Prentice Hall of India, 1990 2. R.S Khandpur  Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation  Tata Mc Graw – Hill References 1. John G. Webster  Medical Instrumentation  Application and Design  Houghton mifflin company, Boston 2. John C. Cobbold  Tranducers for Biomedical measurements  John wiley & Sons 3. Jacob Kline Hand book of Biomedical Engineering  Academic Press INC OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE  I) CMELRTA 7061 3+1+0
Module1 Classical optimization techniques Single variable optimization – Multivariable optimization with no constraints – Hessian matrix – Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier method Multivariable optimization with inequality constraints – KuhnTucker conditions. Module 2 Onedimensional unconstrained minimization Elimination methods – unrestricted search method – Fibonacci method – Interpolation methods – Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation methods. Module 3 Unconstrained minimization Gradient of a function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hooke and Jeeve’s method. Module 4 Integer – Linear programming problem Gomory’s cutting plane method – Gomory’s method for all integer programming problems, mixed integer programming problems. Module 5 Network Techniques Shortest path model – Dijkstra`s Algorithm – Floyd`s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem – PRIM algorithm – Maximal Flow Problem algorithm. 518
References 1. Optimization theory and application: S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd. 2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering: A. D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla, Pearson Education Asia. 3. Principles of Operations Research for Management:  F.S.Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena, Richard D. Irwin, INC 4. Operation Research an introduction: H. A. Taha, Eastern Economy Edition. 5. Operations Research: R. Panneerselvam, PHI OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++ (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
LA7062
Module 1 Introduction to loops: Evolution of object oriented languages  Support for experiments and structure  process of language translation – Need of objects  Definition of Object  Oriented Language. Module 2 Encapsulation & Inheritance: Building classes  Declaring objects Member functions  constructors and destructors members access control.
Module 3 POLYMORPHISM  Virtual functions  Defining virtual functions – Usage of virtual functions Abstract classes  simulation using abstract classes. Module 4 OVERLOADING: Overloading functions  Overloading operators to provide new meaning Selecting Friend or Member Functions for Operator Overloading. Module 5 DYNAMIC OBJECTS: Dynamic object allocation  Using references with dynamic memory allocation  Inline functions outside class definitions  Friend functions, Applications  Object oriented databases case study – some language (Simula, Smalltalk, C++, Ada) features. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Data abstraction & OOP in C++: Gordenkeeth, Wiley Eastern. Object oriented programming with C++: E. Balaguruswamy, TMH. C++: Strostrout. Object Oriented Programming in C++: Nabajyoti Bjarne. FUZZY SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  I) A 7063 Module 1 519 3+2+0
Introduction to Fuzzy sets and systems. Basics of fuzzy sets membership function, support of a fuzzy set, height  normalised fuzzy set, α  cuts (decomposition of a fuzzy set), set theoretic definitions on fuzzy sets, complement, intersection and union equality, subsethood  basic definition based on membership functions. Module 2 The law of the excluded middle and law of contradiction on fuzzy sets. Properties of fuzzy sets operations (logical proof only). Extension of fuzzy sets concepts  type2 and level 2 fuzzy sets examples. Module 3 Operations on fuzzy sets  intersection, algebraic sum  product, bounded sum  product, drastic sum product, tnorms and tconorms(s  norms) on fuzzy sets, typical parameterised t  norms and snorms (with simplified proof). Extension principle and its applications. Module 4 Fuzzy relation. Resolution form of a binary fuzzy relation. Operations on fuzzy relations projection, maxmin. and min and max, compositions cylindric extension. Similarity relations reflexivity, symmetry, transitivity. Module 5 Further operations on fuzzy sets and proposed by Zadeh  concentration dilation, contrast Intensification, a linguistic hedges, computation of the meaning of values of a linguistic variable, fuzzy algorithms, fuzzy engineering  applications of fuzzy controls, case studies. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C.T lin & C S George Lee. Neural Fuzzy Systems, Prentice Hall. Earl Cox. Fuzzy Systems Handbook, Associated Press Klir and Yuan, Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic: Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall of India. IEEE Trans on Systems, Man & Cybernetics, vol. SMC  3, No.1, January 1973, pp 2844 Bart Kosko. Fuzzy Engineering, Prentice Hall. Bart Kosko. Fuzzy Thinking, Hooper Collins Publications. ARTIFICAL INTELLIGENCE & EXPERT SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  1) 3+1+0
LA7064
Module 1 Introduction Definitions AI applications Data, information and knowledge problems and problem space, problem characteristics, forward and backward reasoning means – ends – analysis – puzzle problems, Tower of Hanoi problem, game playing. Module 2 Search Search strategies, AND OR graphs, Heuristic search methods A and AO* algorithms, MIN – MAX strategies, Alpha – Beta cut offs. Module 3 Knowledge representation Propositional logic predicate logic, conversion of WFF to clause form, resolution, Unification, resolution – refutation system, question answering – non monotinic reasoning, fuzzy logics. 520
Module 4 Knowledge Structure Semantic nets, frames, scripts, conceptual dependency – learning knowledge acquisition, different methods of learning. Module 5 Knowledge engineering and Expert Systems Structure of an expert system, distinctive features – case studies. Text Books 1. Rich E., Artificial Intelligence, MGH References 1. Nison N.J., Problem solving methods in Artificial Intelligence, MGH 2. Winston P.H., Artificial Intelligence, Academic Press, 1977
LA 7065
PRINCIPLES OF REAL TIME SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  I) 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to Real Time Systems – Structure of real time systems, real time computer, task classes – Periodic, Aperiodic, critical, Noncritical, definition of real time systems – real time systems, embedded systems  Hard real time systems, soft real time systems, real time design issues. Module 2 Real time kernel – polled loop systems, coroutines, interrupt driven systems – sporadic, fixed rate systems, hybrid systems, task control block  task status, scheduling – uniprocessor scheduling – traditional rate monotonic, rate monotonic deferred server, EDF, IRIS tasks – multiprocessor scheduling – utilization balancing algorithm, nextfit, bin packing algorithm, myopic offline, buddy strategy (no need of proofs) fault tolerant scheduling. Module 3 Communication – Communication Media and message sending topologies, network architecture issues, protocols – contention – based, token  based, stop and go multiloop, polled bus, hierarchal, round robin, fault tolerant routing – clocks and synchronization – fault tolerant synchronization in hardware, synchronization in software. Module 4 Fault tolerance – definition, cause of failure, fault types, fault detection and containment, redundancy – hardware, software, time, information, integrated failure handling – reliability – parameter values – series – parallel systems, NMR clusters, combinational model, master chain model, fault latency, transient faults, software error models. Module 5
521
Programming Languages – Desired language characteristics, Real time databases, characteristics, main memory databases, Transaction, Disk schedule algorithms, Databases for hard real time systems, maintaining serialization constituency. Text Book 1. Real Time Systems References 1. Real Time Systems, Design & Analysis  Philip Laplante (IEEE) 2. Real Time Systems  Krishna, Tata McGraw Hill  C.M Krishna, Kang G. Shini (McGraw Hill)
LA707 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB 0+0+3 Familiarization of 8085 trainer kit, manual code entry, simple examples. Design and construction of a simple flash programmer for 89C51/89C2051 µC. Study of Intel Hex file format. Computer aided assembly language program development for 89C51/89C2051. Use of assembler, linker and simulator for 89C51/89C2051. Programming examples. Sorting, arithmetic operations (Using assembler, simulator). Programming examples using Embedded ‘C’ compiler for 89C51/89C2051. Programming examples using timer, external interrupts. Design and construction of the following interfacing modules. a. A/D converter. b. D/A converter. c. Alphanumeric LCD display. d. Matrix keyboard interface. e. Seven segment display. f. Extending I/O port using shift registers (74HC595, 74HC165). g. Stepper motor. h. Infra red transmission and reception. i. Opto isolated I/P and O/P. j. Serial EEPROM. k. Real time clock. l. Interfacing using RS 232 and printer port. Any other embedded processor with similar or better capability may be used instead of 89C51/89C2051. INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS LAB
Note
A 708 522
0+0+3
List of Experiments 1. Linear Ramp Firing Circuit. 2. Study of PWMIC TL 494. 3. Battery Charger. 4. Step up DC – DC Converter. 5. Push pull DC – DC Converter. 6. Application of Opto coupler IC MCT2E. 7. AC Phase Control Circuit. 8. Study of DC Drive. 9. Regulation Characteristics of DC Drive. 10. Half bridge and Full bridge Converters
PROJECT DESIGN & SEMINAR A 709 PROJECT DESIGN The student is expected to complete the design of the project work and submit the design phase report. SEMINAR The student is expected to present a seminar in one of the current topics in Electronics, Instrumentation, Computers, Information Technology, Control Systems and related areas. The student will undertake a detailed study on the chosen subject and submit seminar report at the end of the semester. 0+0+2
523
EIGHTH SEMESTER
524
COMPUTER NETWORKS LA 801 3+1+0 Module 1 Network goals topologies configurationsconcept of internet ISOOSI 7 Layer Standard peer processesFunctions of each layerTCP/IP reference model  Transmission media description and characteristics  base band and broad band transmissionsynchronous and asynchronous full duplex, half duplex links Concepts of WAP technology. Module 2 MODEMSserial communication standards  X21 digital interface Need for data link layerstop and wait and sliding window protocolHDLCterminal handling pollingmultiplexingconcentrationvirtual circuit and datagrams  routing congestion control. Module 3 LAN base band and broad band Lan’s  carrier sense networksCSMA/CD ring network shared memory IEEE802 standardsintroduction to X25. Transport layer design issues establishing and releasing connection  flow control – buffering  crash recovery  a simple transport protocol on X25. Module 4 Session layer design issues data exchange  dialogue management  synchronization remote procedure callclient server model  Presentation layerdata presentationcompression network securityprivacy cryptography presentation layer in ARPANET. Module 5 Application layer  virtual terminal  file transfer protocolEmailintroduction to distributed system ATMprotocol architecture ATM logical connections ATM cells cell transmission ATM adaptation layer AAL protocols basic principles of SDH and SONET. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Computer Networks: Andrew S Tannenbaum, Pearson Education. An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking: Keshav, Pearson Education. Computer Networking: A Top Down Approach: Kurose Pearson Education. Computer Network & Internet: Comer, Pearson Education. Data communication: Hausly Computer Networks, protocols standards & interfaces, Uyless Balack Local Area Networks: William Stallings, Pearson Education. Understanding Data Communication and networks 2nd edWilliam A Shay (Vikas Thomson Learning)
MODERN CONTROL THEORY A802 Module 1 525 3+1+0
Limitation of Conventional Control Theory. Concepts of state variable and state model  state model for linear time invariant systems. State space representation of dynamic systems: physical notion of system state, block diagram representations. Lagrang’s equations – examples Module 2 Transformation of state variables, solution of differential equations in state space form, interpretation and properties of the state transition matrix, solution by the laplace transform, the resolvent, transfer function from state model, state space representations of transfer functions. Decomposition of Transfer functions: Direct, cascade and parallel decomposition technique. Module 3 State space modelling of systems: Inverted pendulum on a cart, Temperature control  two capacitance system, spring coupled masses, distillation column, instrument servo, missile guidance dynamics. Controllability and Observability: Physical interpretation, Kalman’s and Gilbert’s tests, Effect of pole  zero cancellation, detectability and stabilisability. Module 4 Shaping the dynamic response  Design of regulators for single input single output systems, Bassgura pole placement formula, Multiple input systems, disturbances and tracking systems: exogenous variables. Linear observers: Need of observers, structure and properties of observers, pole placement for single output systems. Module 5 Introduction to MATLAB  MATLAB functions  m  files analysis and design of control systems using MATLAB, Simulink  construction and analysis of simple models  modelling of systems given in module II References 1. B.Friedland  Control System Design  An Introduction to state space methods  Mc Graw Hill, Inc. NY 2. T. Kailath  Linear systems  Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood cliffs. N J 3. C. Chen  Analog and Digital Control System Design  Transfer function, State Space and algebraic methods, Saunders College Publishing, N.Y 4. A Nagooe Kani – Advanced Control Theory
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS LA 803 3+1+0 Module 1 Intel 8086 Microprocessor  Internal architecture – Block diagram – Minimum and maximum mode operation – Interrupt and Interrupt applications – DMA data transfer – 8087 math coprocessor. 526
8086 memory organization – even and odd memory banks – segment registers – logical and physical address – advantages and disadvantages of physical memory Module 2 Addressing modes used in 80x86 family Data addressing mode – register addressing, immediate addressing, direct addressing, register indirect addressing, base plus index addressing, register relative addressing, base relative plus index addressing, scaled addressing. Program memory addressing modes  direct program memory addressing, relative program memory addressing. Stack memory addressing mode. Module 3 Intel 80286 Microprocessor 80286 Architecture, system connection – Real address mode operation – Protected mode operation Module 4 Intel 80386 Microprocessor 80386 Architecture and system connection – Real operating mode – 386 protected mode operation – segmentation and virtual memory – segment privilege levels and protection – call gates – I/O privilege levels – Interrupts and exception handling – task switching – paging mode – 80386 virtual 86 mode operation. Module 5 Advanced Intel Microprocessors 80486 – Processor model – Reduced Instruction cycle – five stage instruction pipe line – Integrated coprocessor – On board cache – Burst Bus mode. Pentium – super scalar architecture – uv pipe line – branch prediction logic – cache structure – BIST (built in self test) – Introduction to MMX technology. References 1. The Microprocessors, 6th Edition  Barry B. Brey Pearson Edu. 2. Microprocessor and Interfacing 2nd Edition  Douglous V. Hall TMH 3. The 80x86 family  John Uffenbeck
COMPUTERISED PROCESS CONTROL A804 3+1+0 Module 1 Programmable Logic Devices: Basic Concepts Programming Technologies. Programmable Logic Array (PLA) Programmable Array Logic (PAL) Design and Application 527
Module 2 Programmable Logic Controllers: Combinational logic controllers, sequential logic controllers, logic controller design using programmable logic devices, Introduction to programmable logic controllers  PLC programming languages, Commercially available PLCs, Microprocessor based PLCs. Module 3 Distributed Control Systems  Part 1 Basic packages, cost estimating, data highways – field buses, multiplexers and remote terminal units, CRT displays, flow sheet symbols, I/O hardware and setpoint stations. Module 4 Distributed Control Systems  Part II Supervisory computer tasks and configurations, system integration with PLCs and computers, Fibre Optic local area networks: MAP and TOP, Fieldbuses, MAP, TOP. Module 5 Network protocols: Printers, Operator interfaces, workstations, wiring practices and signal conditioning, communication systems, case study Allen Bradlley Protocol (AB. Protocol) References 1. Enrique Mandado, Jorge Marcos, Serafin A Perrez,  Programmable Logic Devices and logic Controllers  Prentice Hall 1996 2. Dobrivoje Popovic and Vijay P. Bhatkar  Distributed Computer Control for Industrial Automation Marcel Dekker, INC, 1990. 3. B.G Liptak  Handbook of Process Control  1996 ROBOTICS (ELECTIVE  II) A8051 Module1 Robot Organization Coordinate transformation – Kinematics and inverse kinematics – trajectory planning and remote manipulation. Module 2 Robot hardware Robot sensors – Proximity Sensors – Range Sensors – Tactile Sensors – Visual Sensors – Auditory Sensors. Robot Manipulators – Manipulator Dynamics – Manipulator Control –wrists – End effectors – Robot Grippers. Module 3 Robot and Artificial Intelligence Principles of all Basics of Learning – planning Movement – Basics of Knowledge Representation – Robot programming languages. Module 4 Robotic Vision Systems Principles of edge detection – Determining of optical flow and shape – image segmentation – Pattern recognition – model director sense analysis. 528
Module 5 Robot control and Application Robot control using voice and infrared – overview of robot application – prosthetic devices – Robots in material handling, processing, assembly and storage. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Koren, “Robtics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Int. Co Tokyo 1985 Hall and Hall” Robotics – A User Friendly Introduction”, Saunders Publishing Company, 1985 Vokobravotic “Introduction to Robotics”, Springer 1988 Lee, Gonzalez aqnd Fu “ Robotics (11 Ed)”, IEEE Press, 1986 Charniakand, Mcdermott, “Roboty Technology ande Applications”, Springer 1985 Charniac & Mcdermott, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence”, Mc Graw Hill, 1986 P Janaki Raman, “Robotics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill VHDL (ELECTIVE  II) LA8052 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction: Hardware Abstraction Basic Terminology Entity Declaration Architecture BodyConfiguration Declaration Package Declaration Package Body Model Analysis Simulation Basic Language Elements –Identifiers Data Objects Data Types Operators. Module 2 Behavioural Modelling: Entity Declaration Architecture BodyProcess Statement Variable Assignment Statement Signal Assignment Statement Wait Statement If Statement  Case Statement Null Statement Loop Statement Exit Statement Next Statement Assertion StatementReport Statement Other Sequential Statements Multiple Processes Postponed Processes Dataflow Modelling: Concurrent Signal Assignment Statement Concurrent versus Sequential Signal Assignment Delta Delay Revisited Multiple Drivers Conditional Signal Assignment StatementSelected Signal Assignment Statement the UNAFFECTED Value Block Statement Concurrent Assertion Statement Value of a Signal. Module 3 Structural Modelling: Component Declaration Component Instantiation Resolving Signal Values Generics and Configurations: Generics Configurations Configuration Specification Configuration Declaration Default Rules  Conversion Functions  Direct Instantiation Incremental Binding. Module 4 Subprograms and Overloading: Subprograms Subprogram Overloading Operator OverloadingSignatures Default Values for Parameters  Packages and Libraries: Package Declaration Package BodyDesign File Design LibrariesOrder of Analysis Implicit Visibility Explicit Visibility. Module 5 Advanced Features: Entity Statements Generate Statements Aliases Qualified Expressions Type Conversions Guarded Signals Attributes Aggregate Targets Shared Variables Groups  Model Simulation: Simulation Writing a Test Bench Converting Real and Integer to Time Dumping Results into a Text Fi1e Reading Vectors from a Text File A Test Bench Example Initialising a Memory Variable File Names Hardware Modelling Examples: Modelling Entity interfaces529
Modelling Simple Elements  Different Styles of Modelling Modelling Regular StructuresModelling Delays Modelling Conditional Operations Modelling Synchronous Logic State Machine Modelling Interacting State Machines Modelling a Moore FSM Modelling a Mealy FSM A Generic Priority Encoder A Simplified Blackjack Program A Clock Divider A Generic Binary Multiplier A Pulse Counter A Barrel Shifter Hierarchy in Design. Text Book 1. VHDL Primer Third editions: J. Bhasker, Pearson Education Asia. Reference 1. Introducing VHDL from simulation to synthesis: Sudhakar Yakmandhiri, Pearson Education Asia NEURAL NETWORKS (ELECTIVE  II) A8053 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction  Principles  artificial neuron  activation functions  Single layer & multilayer networks  Training artificial neural networks  Perception  Representation  Linear separability Learning  Training algorithms. Module 2 Back Propagation  Training algorithm  Applications  network configurations  Network paralysis Local minima  temporal instability. Module 3 Counter Propagation networks: Kebenon layer  Training the cohenen layer  Pre initializing the wright vectors  statistical properties  Training the Grosbery layer  Full counter propagation network  Application. Module 4 Statistical methods Boltzmann’s Training  Cauche training  Artificial specific heat methods Applications to general nonlinear optimization problems. Module 5 Hopfield nets  Recurrent networks  stability  Associative memory  applications  Thermo dynamic systems  Statistical Hopfield networks – Bidirectional associative memories  Continuous BAM  Adaptive resonance theory  Architecture classification  Implementation. Text Book 1. Neural Computing Theory & Practice  Philip D. Wasserman. References 1. 2. 3. 4. Neural Networks  Simon Haykins Adaptive Pattern Recognition & Neural Networks  Pay Y.H. An Introduction to neural computing  Chapman & Hall Artificial Neural Networks  Robert J. Schalkoff, McGraw Hill 530
5. Artificial Neural Networks  B.Yegnanarayana, PHI ADVANCED MICROCONTROLLERS (ELECTIVE – II) 3+1+0
LA8054
Module 1 Low pin count controllers – Atmel AVR family – ATTiny15L controller  architecture – pin descriptions – features – addressing modes – I/O space – reset and interrupt handling – reset sources  Tunable internal oscillator. Module 2 Timers – Watch dog timer – EEPROM – preventing data corruption – Analog comparator – A/D converter – conversion timing – ADC noise reduction – PortB – alternate functions – memory programming – fuse bits – high voltage serial programming – algorithm. Module 3 National semiconductor COP8 family  COP8CBR9 processor – features – electrical characteristics – pin descriptions – memory organization –EEPROM  security – brownout reset – in system programming – boot ROM. Idle timer – Timer1, Timer2, Timer3 operating modes – PWM mode – event capture mode
Module 4 Power saving modes – Dual clock operation – Multi input wake up – USART – framing formats – baud rate generation – A/D conversion – operating modes – prescaler – Interrupts – interrupt vector table – Watch dog – service window – Microwire interface – waveforms. Module 5 Microchip PIC16 family – PIC16F873 processor – features – architecture – memory organization register file map – I/O ports – PORTA  PORTB – PORTC – Data EEPROM and flash program memory – Asynchronous serial port – SPI mode – I2C mode. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Design with PIC microcontrollers: John B Peatman, Pearson Education. DS101374: National Semiconductor reference manual. National semiconductor web site – www.national.com 1187D: Atmel semiconductor reference manual. Atmel semiconductor web site – www.atmel.com DS30292B: Microchip reference manual. Microchip semiconductor web site – www.microchip.com ECOMMERCE (ELECTIVE  II) LA 8055 Module1 531 310
Introduction to Electronic Commerce  ECommerce Framework Anatomy of ECommerce Applications  ECommerce Consumer & Organization ApplicationsE Commerce and World Wide Web  Internet Service Providers  Architectural Framework for Electronic Commerce WWW as the Architecture Hypertext publishing. Module 2 Network Security  ClientServer Network Security  CS Security Threats – Firewalls  Data & Message Security  Encrypted Documents  Security on the Web. Module 3 Electronic Payment Systems  Types of Electronic Payment Systems  Digital Token Based Electronic Payment System  Smart Cards  Credit Cards  Risk in Electronic Payment Systems Designing Electronic Payment Systems. Module 4 Electronic Data Interchange  EDI Application in Business EDILegal  Security and Privacy Issues  EDI standardization  EDI Envelope for Message Transport  Internet based EDI  Internal Information System Workflow Automation and Coordination Supply Chain ManagementDocument Library Types of Digital Documents Corporate Data Warehouses. Module 5 Recent Trends in ECommerce  Multimedia in ECommerce  Video Conferencing with Digital Videos  Broad Band Telecommunication Frame & Cell Relays  Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS)  Asynchronous Transfer Mode  Mobile Computing and Wireless Computing. Text Book 1. Frontiers of Electronic Commerce: Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B Whinston. References 1. Global Electronic Commerce: J Christopher Westland & Theodore H K Clark. 2. E Commerce The cutting edge of Business: Kamlesh K Bajaj & Debjani Nag. 3. ECommerce: Strategy Technologies and Applications, TMH ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
LA8061
Module 1 Introduction to Multirate Digital Signal Processing – Sample rate reduction  decimation by integer factors sampling rate increase – interpolation by integer facto  Design of practical sampling rate converters: Filter Specification filter requirement for individual stages  Determining the number of stages and decimation factors  Sampling rate conversion using polyphase filter structure – polyphase implementation of interpolators. Module 2 Adaptive Signal Processing – Adaptive filters – Concepts Adaptive filter as a Noise Canceller Other configurations of the adaptive filter  Main components of the adaptive filter – Basic Wiener 532
filter theory – The basic LMS adaptive algorithm – Practical limitations of the basic LMS algorithm  Recursive Least Square Algorithm – Limitations  Factorization Algorithm. Module 3 Introduction to two dimensional signal and systems  2D – DFT Transforms  Properties and applications  Discrete Hilbert Transform and Discrete Cosine Transform – Properties and Applications  Short term Fourier Transform  Gabor Transform  Properties and Applications. Module 4 Wavelets – Wavelet Analysis – The Continuous Wavelet Transform  scaling  shifting  scale and frequency  The Discrete Wavelet Transform  One Stage filtering  Approximation and Details Filter bank analysis – Multilevel Decomposition – Number of levels – Wavelet reconstruction – Reconstruction filter Reconstructing Approximations and details Multilevel Reconstruction Wavelet packet synthesis Typical Applications. Module 5 General and special purpose DSP Processors  Computer Architecture for signal processing – Havard Architecture  Pipelining  Hardware Multiply and Accumulate – Special Instructions  Replication Onchip Memory Cache  Extended Parallelism  SIMD – VLIW and static superscalar Processing  Brief study of TMS320C4X and ADSP 2106 processors. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Digital Signal Processing: Emmanuel C Ifeachor, Barrie W Jrevis, Pearson Education. Theory and Applications of DSP: L.R Rabiner and B gold Electronic filter Desig Hand Book: A .B Williams and FT Taylor, McGraw Hill Wavelets and Subband Coding: Valterli & Kovaceric, PHI. Analog Devices & Texas Instruments Users Manuel of TMS320C4X and ADSP 2106x. MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  III) LA8062 3+1+0 Module 1 Introduction Definition of multimedia, multimedia, hardware, software applications and software environments, Media Types  Analog and digital video, digital audio, music and animation  Analog & Digital video  Memory storage  Basic tools  Authoring tools. Module 2 Building Blocks Text  Hyper text  Sound  Sound cards  Standards  Image  Image types  Image compression, RLE, JPEG, MPEG  Fractal and Wavelet Compressions  Image file types  Animation  Capture and Playback techniques. (basic ideas only) Module 3 Multimedia Environments The Compact Disc family, CDinteractive, Digital Video Interactive, QuickTime, Multimedia PC and Microsoft Multimedia Extensions. Module 4 Multimedia Programming 533
Framework: Overview, Media classes, Transform classes, Format classes and Component classes Problems related to programming  Composition, Synchronisation, Interaction, Database integration. Module 5 Advanced Multimedia Moving pictures  Techniques realistic image synthesis, Virtual Reality  Full motion digital video Video capture techniques  multimedia networks  Desktop video conferencing  Future multimedia.
References 1. Multimedia Programming Objects, Environments & Framework  (AddisonWesley Publishing Co.) 2. Multimedia Making it work  Tay Van Ghan – Osborne Tata Mcgraw Hill 3. Authoring Interactive multimedia  Arch C Luther 4. Optimizing your Multimedia PC L.J. Skibbe, Susan Lafe Meister Comdex 5. Multimedia Bible  Winn L. Rosch, Sams 6. Multimedia Producers Bible Ron Goldberg, Comdex 7. Multimedia Power Tools  Peter Jellam, Random house Electronic Pub. 8. Multimedia Computing  Mathew E. Hodger & Russel M. Sasnett, Addison wesley 9. Integrated Multimedia Systems Overview Palikom, The communication Wall SYSTEM SOFTWARE (ELECTIVE  III) LA8063 3+1+0 Module1 Introduction Concept of system software, classification of system s/w. Assemblers: over view of assembly process, elementary ideas of macros & macro processors. Compilers: Overview of compilation process, Parsing top down & bottomup parsing, storage allocation. Interpreters: basic ideas only. Module 2 Operating Systems Types of OS, batch processing, multiprogramming, timesharing, real time OS. OS services UNIX OS –shells, Bourne Shell, C shell visual editor. Module 3 Information Management File system directory structure, basic file system calls, file protection, allocation methods disk blocks and inodes in UNIX. Device management. Module 4 Processor Management CPU scheduling scheduling algorithms, Multiprocessor scheduling, Process management in UNIX, concurrent process critical section, semaphores, synchronization, concurrent languages. Module 5 Memory Management Swapping, partitions, paging, segmentation, virtual memory concepts, page replacement, dynamic linking, caching of secondary storage, memory management in UNIX, Deadlocks: cause, detection, prevention, avoidance, recovery, combined approach to deadlock handling. References 534
System programming and Operating Systems – D M Dhamdhere System Software – an introduction to system Programming – Leland L Beck, 3ed. Operating System – Peterson & Silberschatz, Addison Wesley Operating Systems – Dietal H M Design of UNIX Operating System – Maurice J Bach UNIX System Programming – Stevens. EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE  III) LA8064 3+1+0 Module1 Overview of Embedded System Embedded System, Categories of Embedded System, Requirements of Embedded Systems, Challenges and Issues in Embedded Software Development, Applications of Embedded Systems in Consumer Electronics, Control System, Biomedical Systems, Handheld computers, Communication devices. Module2 Embedded Hardware & Software Development Environment Hardware Architecture, MicroController Architecture, Communication Interface Standards, Embedded System Development Process, Embedded Operating systems, Types of Embedded Operating systems. Module 3 Embedded Communication System Serial Communication, PCtoPC Communication, Serial Communication with the 8051 Family of Microcontrollers, Protocol Converter, VoiceoverIP, Embedded Applications over Mobile Network example MP3 Sound Player. Module 4 Real Time & Database Applications RealTime Embedded Software Development, Sending a Message over a Serial Link, Simulation of a Process Control System, Controlling an Appliance from the RTLinux System, Embedded Database Applications using examples like Salary Survey, Energy Meter Readings. Module 5 Java Applications & Future Trends in Embedded Systems Networked JavaEnabled Information Appliances, Embedded Process Control System, Mobile Java Applications, Appliance Control using Jini, System on a Chip (SOC), Smart Cards and the Cashless Society, Security in Embedded Systems. Text Book 1. Programming for Embedded Systems Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech Reference 1. Fundamentals of Embedded Software where C and Assembly Meet – Daniel W Lewis.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
535
LA8065
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING (ELECTIVE  III) 3+1+0
Module 1 Image representation and modeling  Characteristics of a digital image  Elements of digital image processing systems  Image digitizers & scanners  Elements of visual perception  Brightness & contrast  Image sampling & Quantisation  Two dimensional Sampling theorem  Reconstruction of image from its samples  Aliasing. Module 2 Image Transforms  Two dimensional orthogonal & unitary transforms  Properties of unitary transforms  Two dimensional DFT & its properties – Cosine – Hadamard – Haar – Sine  KL Transforms & their properties. Module 3 Image Enhancement  Point processing  Histogram modeling & Equalization  Spatial Filtering Filtering in the frequency domain  color Image processing. Module 4 Image Restoration  Degradation model  Inverse filtering  Wiener Filter  Interactive restoration Image analysis & vision basic principles only. Module 5 Image Coding & Compression basic principles  run length coding  variable length coding  bit plane coding  lossless predictive coding  lossy predictive coding  Transform coding  Image compression standards. References 1. Digital image Processing: I.Gonzalez Rafel C, Pearson Education. 2. Fundamentals of digital image processing: Jain Anil K, PHI. 3. Digital Image Processing: Pratt William K, John Wiley.
PROCESS CONTROL LAB (A) A807 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0+0+3 Familiarisation of programmable logic controller, development of ladder diagrams and simulation Comparative study of P, PI, PD and PID controllers Level Control Flow control Temperature control Pressure control Cascade control Stepper Motor Control DC motor speed control 536
10. A808
Binary distillation column control PROJECT & SEMINAR 0+0+3 Each student is expected to prepare a report on the project work done by him/her and present a paper highlighting the work done by him/her in a seminar. The student is expected to complete the project work assigned to him/her and submit the project report by the end of semester. VIVA – VOCE
A809
0+0+0
The students should prepare for an oral examination on Basic Circuit theory, Digital systems, Instrumentations, Computer Communication, Microprocessors, Industrial Electronics, Signal Processing etc. (50 marks University exam) VivaVoce examination may be made based on Seminar, Projects, Industrial Visits, Industrial training and overall performance.
BEST OF LUCK……… REGARDS CC, SNGCE
537